FIT Bid Set Project Manual

PROJECT MANUAL FOR
(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition
LOCATED AT
1931 Stella Lake Drive Las Vegas, Nevada 89106
OWNER
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow

1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas, Nevada 89106 Telephone No: 702-367-4348 Telefax: 702-362-8513
ARCHITECT
JMA Architects, Inc.

10150 Covington Cross Drive, Las Vegas, Nevada 89144 Telephone No: 702-731-2033 Telefax: 702-731-2039
DATE: February 18, 2013 BID Documents
JMA Architecture Studios
DOCUMENT 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

Section # Section Name No. of Pages
DIVISION 0 PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 00 00 01 Title Page 00 01 10 Table of Contents 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids 00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders 00 31 00 Information available to Bidders 00 31 13.13 Project Schedule 00 31 32.1 Update to Geotechnical Report 00 31 32.2 Update to Geotechnical Report 00 31 32.3 Geotechnical Report 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form 00 43 36.1 Subcontractors Exceeding 5 percent Listing 00 43 36.2 Subcontractors Exceeding 1 percent Listing 00 43 36.3 Expanded Subcontractors & MBE/WBE/DVBE Subcontractors Listing 00 43 36.4 Suppliers and Manufacturers Listing 00 45 00 Contractors Form of Guarantee 00 45 01 Subcontractors Form of Guarantee 00 45 19 Form of Non-collusive Affidavit 00 50 00 Administration Forms 00 52 00 Agreement (AIA A101-2007) 00 65 39 Non-Utilization of Asbestos Material 00 65 39.1 Contractors Certification of Nonuse of Asbestos containing Materials 00 65 39.2 Subcontractors Certification of Nonuse of Asbestos containing Materials 00 72 00 Conformed General Conditions of the Contract (AIA A201-2007) 00 73 00 Special Conditions 00 73 00.1 Additional Notes 00 73 00.2 Daily Sign In Sheet 00 73 00.3 Daily Construction Report 00 73 00.3 Daily Construction Report 00 73 00.4 EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects 00 73 00.5 Certification Regarding Lobbying 00 73 00.6 Requirements for Affirmative Action (EEO) 00 73 00.7 Goals for EEO Documents Index of Counties 00 73 00.8 EDA Project Sign 00 73 43 Prevailing Wage Rates
1 5 1 8 3 1 98 4 69 2 2 1 1 7 5 1 1 1 2 13 2 1 1 53 14 1 1 2 2 23 2 1 31 5 50
JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013
00 01 10 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Table of Contents
DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 06 00 01 11 00 01 26 00 01 26 13 01 26 14 01 29 00 01 31 00 01 32 26 01 33 00 01 40 00 01 42 00 01 43 26 01 50 00 01 60 00 01 60 50 01 73 00 01 73 29 01 74 13 01 75 00 01 77 00 01 77 01 01 78 43 01 91 13 01 91 14 Safety and Environments Requirements Summary of Work Contract Modification Procedures Contractors Request for Information Contractors Request for Information Form Payment Procedures Project Management and Coordination Construction Progress Documentation Submittal Procedures Quality Requirements References and Definitions Testing Laboratory Temporary Facilities and Controls Product and Material Requirements Substitution Request Form (Post Bid) Execution Requirements Cutting and Patching Construction Cleaning Starting of Systems Closeout Procedures Closeout Tracking Log Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials General Commissioning Requirements Commissioning Authority Responsibilities 2 8 7 4 1 5 7 7 7 5 12 3 9 6 2 6 5 1 1 12 1 2 24 18
DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 02 41 00.10 Demolition Selective Demolition 4 8
DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03 10 00 03 30 00 Concrete Formwork Cast-In-Place Concrete 5 36
DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 METALS 05 10 00 Structural Steel

21
00 01 10 - 2
05 30 00 05 50 00 05 51 00 05 52 00
Metal Deck and Stud Shear Connectors Metal Fabrications Steel Stairs Handrails and Railings
10 10 5 4
DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06 10 53 Rough Carpentry 06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 07 13 13 Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing 07 21 00 Building Insulation 07 24 00 Exterior Insulation and Finish System 07 51 13 Built Up Roofing 07 51 13 Single Ply Roofing 07 62 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 07 84 00 Fire Stopping 07 90 00 Joint Sealants
10 8
4 3 13 11 13 5 4 8 13
DIVISION 8 OPENINGS 08 11 13 08 14 00 08 31 13 08 41 13 08 65 00 08 71 00 08 80 00 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames Wood Doors Access Doors and Frames Aluminum Entrance and Storefronts Tubular Skylight Door Hardware Glazing 4 4 2 10 7 21 7
DIVISION 9 FINISHES 09 22 16 09 29 00 09 30 00 09 51 00 09 65 00 09 68 13 09 68 16 09 77 10 09 81 00 09 91 00 Non Structural Metal Framing Gypsum Board Assemblies Tiling Acoustical Ceiling Resilient Flooring and Base Carpet Tiles Sheet Carpeting FRP Panels Acoustical Insulation Painting 5 9 9 6 5 4 6 3 2 13
00 01 10 - 3
DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES 10 14 00 10 21 13 10 28 00 10 44 13 Signage Toilet Compartments Toilet Accessories Fire Protection Specialties 3 5 3 3
DIVISIONS 11 13 Not Used
DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 21 00 Electric Traction Elevator 10
DIVISIONS 15 20 Not Used
DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPRESSION 21 13 13 21 13 16 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System 14 17
DIVISION 22 PLUMBING 22 05 29 22 07 19 22 11 16 22 13 16 22 14 13 22 42 13.13 22 42 13.16 22 42 16.13 22 42 16.16 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment Plumbing Piping Insulation Domestic Water piping Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping Facility Storm Drainage Piping Commercial Water Closet Commercial Urinals Commercial Lavatories Commercial Sinks 5 7 11 6 6 3 3 3 3
DIVISION 23 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 23 05 93 23 07 13 23 11 23 23 31 13 23 33 00 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC Duct Insulation Facility Natural-Gas Piping Metal Ducts Air Duct Accessories 4 9 12 10 7
00 01 10 - 4
23 34 23 23 37 13 23 74 13
HVAC Power Ventilators Diffusers, Registers and Grilles Packaged, Outdoor, Central-Station Air-Handling Units
5 2 10
DIVISION 24 25 Not Used
DIVISION 26 ELECTRICAL 26 05 19 26 05 26 26 05 29 26 05 33 26 05 53 26 09 23 26 24 16 26 27 26 26 28 13 26 28 16 26 51 00 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems Hangars and Supports for Electrical Systems Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems Identification for Electrical Systems Lighting Control Devices Panelboards Wiring Devices Fuses Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers Interior Lighting 4 5 5 6 7 6 8 8 3 6 8
DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 10
DIVISION 28 30 Not Used
DIVISION 31 EARTHWORK 31 10 00 31 20 00 31 22 00 31 23 16 31 23 16.26 31 26 17 31 23 19 31 23 23 Site Clearing Earthwork Grading Excavation Rock Caliche Removal Trenching Dewatering Backfilling 2 9 3 3 2 2 4 4
00 01 10 - 5
DIVISION 32 EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS 32 01 16 32 13 13 32 16 13 32 17 13 32 17 23 32 84 00 32 93 00 Asphalt Paving Concrete Paving Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks and Driveways Parking Bumpers Pavement Markings Landscape Irrigation Landscape 4 7 4 1 2 16 15
DIVISION 33 UTILITIES 33 11 00 33 13 00 33 30 00 33 40 00 Water Systems Disinfection of Water Systems Sanitary Sewer Storm Drain 7 1 6 8
END OF DOCUMENT
00 01 10 - 6
DOCUMENT 00 11 13 ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed Bids will be received at the (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Offices, 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106 until 3 PM on Monday March 18, 2013, and then opened and read aloud publicly for the furnishing of all labor and material to perform the Work in conjunction with the (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Office located at 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106. The architect of the project is JMA Architects, Inc. The project consists of addition to the existing building for approximately 8,650 square feet of new area and some modifications in the existing building. The approximate cost estimate for the project is $2.5 million USD. Bid documents will be available Monday February 18, 2013 from 8 am to 5 pm Monday-Friday at RGS Reprographic Solutions, 6645 South Eastern Avenue, Suite 101, LV, NV, 89119 (702) 798-2055. General contractors may obtain up to 5 complete sets, subcontractors are limited to one complete set upon receipt of a refundable deposit of $150 per set in the form of a valid business check or money order payable to the Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow. Partial sets will not be issued. Contact RGS for mailing fees if required. Bid documents may also be reviewed at the Owners office and local plan rooms. A pre-bid conference is scheduled at 10:00 am on Wednesday, February 27, 2013 at the Owners address. Deposits for complete sets of bid documents will be refunded if the complete set(s) are returned in acceptable condition to RGS Reprographic Solutions no later than seven (7) working days after the bid opening. Bidders must provide a Security Deposit in the form of a Bid Bond, issued by a surety company, licensed to do business in the State of Nevada. Bid bond or certified check must be in the sum of five percent (5%) of the total bid sum. Bidders shall comply with all Federal, State, and local laws relative to conducting business, including but not limited to licensing and labor laws. All bids shall be in strict accordance with the plans and specifications for the project. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers and to waive irregularity in the bidding and accept the bid which is determined by the Owner to be in his own best interest. Publication dates: Sunday, February 17, 2013, February 24, 2013, March 3, 2013 and March 10, 2013.
END OF DOCUMENT
00 11 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Advertisement for Bids
DOCUMENT 00 21 13 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1. 1.01 SUMMARY OF DOCUMENTS RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. C. D. Document 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids Document 00 31 00 Information Available to Bidders Document 00 41 00 Bid Form Document 00 43 36.1 Subcontractors Exceeding 5 Percent Listing, including ALL subcontractors that would be required to complete work covered in the base bid. Document 00 43 36.2 Subcontractors Exceeding 1 Percent Listing, including ALL subcontractors that would be required to complete work covered in the base bid. Document 00 43 36.3 Expanded Subcontractors Listing, including ALL subcontractors that would be required to complete work covered in the base bid. Document 00 43 36.4 Manufacturer and Suppliers Listing Document 00 45 19 Form of NonCollusive Affidavit Document 00 52 00- Agreement Document 00 72 00- General Conditions of the Contract Document 00 73 00 Special Conditions Other Documents as required to include, but not limited to Bid Security.
E.
F. G. H. I. J. K. L. PART 2. 2.01
ADVERTISEMENT INTENT A. The intent of this Advertisement for Bid is to obtain an offer to perform the complete Work in accordance with all Bidding Requirements and Contract Documents. It is Owners intent to award a contract to the apparent low, responsive and responsible bidder for the full performance of the Work described in the bid and contract documents. It is the Contractors responsibility to submit bids within the single and aggregate bond limits offered by their Surety; it is also the Contractors responsibility to submit bid security that does not exceed the Suretys single bond underwriting limits as listed in the Federal Treasury Listing.
B.
00 21 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Instructions to Bidders
2.02
AVAILABILITY A. B. Sets of Bid Documents can be obtained by interested prime contractors as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bid Documents are made available only for the purpose of obtaining offers for this project. Their use does not grant a license for other purposes.
2.03
EXAMINATION A. B. C. Bid Documents are on display at the Plan Rooms as stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Upon receipt of Bid Documents, verify that documents are complete in accordance with the Specification Index in the Project Manual and Index of Drawings. Immediately notify the Architect upon finding discrepancies or omissions in the Bid Documents.
2.04
QUERIES/ADDENDA A. Clarifications requested by Bidders must be made directly to the Architect in writing, not less than seven (7) calendar days before date set for receipt of Bids. The reply to any material issue will be in the form of an addendum, a copy of which will be forwarded to all bidders of record. Addenda may be issued up to three (3) days prior to the date set for bid. All addenda become part of the Bid/Contract Documents. Include associated costs in the Bid Sum. Acknowledge receipt of addenda on the Bid Form, Document 00 41 00. Verbal answers are not binding on any party.
B.
C. 2.05
WORK IDENTIFIED IN THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. B. Reference Document 00 73 00 Special Conditions. Fees shall be included in base sum for overhead and profit on own Work and Work by subcontractors.
2.06
CONTRACT TIME A. B. Perform the Work as stipulated in Document 00 73 00 Special Conditions. The Bidder, in submitting an offer, accepts the Contract Time period stated for performing the Work. The completion date in the Agreement shall be the Contract Time added to the date of issuance of the Notice to Proceed. Liquidated damages will be assessed in accordance with provisions stated in Document 00 73 00 Special Conditions.
C.
00 21 13 - 2
PART 3. 3.01
BID DOCUMENTS AND PROPOSED CONTRACT DOCUMENTS DEFINITIONS A. Bid Documents: proposed Contract Documents supplemented with Advertisement for Bids, Instructions to Bidders, Information Available to Bidders, Bid Form and Appendices, Supplements to Bid Forms and Bid Securities, identified herein. Contract Documents: defined in 00 72 00 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Article 1. Bid, Offer, or Bidding: act of submitting an offer under seal. Bid Sum: monetary sum as stated by the Bidder in the Bid Form. Owner: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow. Provide: Furnish and install.
B. C. D. E. F. 3.02
PRODUCT/SYSTEM SUBSTITUTIONS A. B. C. Where only one approved product manufacturer is listed in the specifications, that product shall be included in the base bid price. Where more than one approved product manufacturer is listed in the specification, the Contractor may submit his bid based on using any one of those listed. Where the phrase "or equal" or "or approved equal" occurs in the Project Manual, do not assume that the products, materials, or systems will be approved as equal. Submit the request for substitution to the Architect to obtain a determination. Until the item has been specifically so approved for this Work by the Architect and approval has been formally transmitted by the Architect to the Contractor the substitution is not to be used. Transmit requests for substitution approval on Substitution Request Form, a copy of which follows this document. Provide products as specified unless prior approval to use other products is obtained from the Architect and that product is included in an addendum. The burden of proof that an "approved equal" product meets or exceeds the standards of the specified product rests with the proposer. An or equal item serves the same function; has the same dimensions, appearance, quality, terms of warranty, durability, reliability, cost in service and maintenance; and complies with the same codes and standards as the approved product manufacturers. Further, its substitution will have no effect on project details, cost, and program.
D. E.
PART 4. 4.01
SITE ASSESSMENT PREBID CONFERENCE AND SITE WALK A. B. A prebid conference has been scheduled, as specified in Document 00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids. It is recommended that all prime bidders attend the mandatory prebid conference and sign in.
00 21 13 - 3
C. D.
Representatives of the Owner, and Consultants, will be in attendance. Questions to be reviewed at the prebid conference shall be submitted in writing to the Architect 24 hours before the meeting and will be addressed, if required, in addenda only. No verbal answers are binding on any party. Information relevant to the Bid Documents will be issued to all plan holders of record in an addendum.
E.
4.02
SITE EXAMINATION A. Bidders may schedule additional site visits with the Owner identified in Document 00 73 00 Special Conditions, shall carefully examine the site of the proposed Work and acquaint themselves with the conditions under which Work will be performed and nature and extent of the Work involved. The submittal of a Bid is bidders certification of thorough site and premises examination by the bidder and that the Bid Sum covers all costs of all items necessary to perform the Work as set forth in the Bid Documents. In the event that any conflict is discovered between actual conditions existing on site and conditions described or indicated on drawings or in the Project Manual, the bidder shall request clarification before his offer is submitted. Site Visits for bidders by appointment with the Owner. Unauthorized visits will not be allowed on the project premises.
B.
C.
PART 5. 5.01
QUALIFICATION, WAGE REPORTING, SUBCONTRACTORS EVIDENCE OF QUALIFCATION A. At the time of the Pre-Bid Conference bidders are required to submit the following items: 1. 2. 3. 4. Resume for the Project Manager to be assigned to project. Resume for the Project Superintendent to be assigned to project. Current valid Contractors license from NSCB with qualification of B. A current proof of insurance from an insurance company with an A. M. Best rating of at least A- and a financial Size Category FSC capacity of at least VIII or above. Certificate(s) of proof shall include General Liability $1,000,000 per occurrence; Automobile Liability- $1,000,000 combined single limit; Excess Liability - $5,000,000; Workers Compensation and Builders Risk insurance. Provide a current letter of intent to issue two separate bonds (payment and performance) from a surety licensed to do business in the State of Nevada, and listed in the most current Federal Register as acceptable as surety on Federal Bonds with an A.M. Best rating of at least A- and a FSC capacity of at least VIII. Letter of intent shall reference the Project, Contractors name and indicate the A.M. Best rating and FSC class.
5.
00 21 13 - 4
5.02
WAGE REPORTING A. Refer to Document 00 73 00- Special Conditions for the dual wage and worker identification reporting requirements pursuant NRS 338.
5.03
SUBCONTRACTORS/SUPPLIERS/OTHERS A. Per NRS 338 and Article 5 of the Conformed General Conditions of the Contract, the Owner reserves the right to reject a proposed subcontractor or other entity for reasonable cause. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection.
B.
PART 6. 6.01
BID SUBMISSION SUBMISSION RESPONSIBILITY A. B. Bidders shall be solely responsible for the delivery of their bids in the manner and time prescribed. To prevent an untimely opening of mailed bids, sealed bids shall be submitted in a second sealed envelope addressed to the Owner marked as stated above. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to see that his bid is received on time.
6.02
BID SUBMITTAL DOCUMENTS REQUIRED A. Submit the following documents with the Bid bound in a folder arranged in order in a sealed opaque envelope, clearly identified on the outside the Bidders Name, Owners Name, Project Number, and Date and Time of Bid Opening: 1. 2. Bid Form-with all Addenda acknowledged Document 00 43 36.1 Subcontractors Exceeding 5 Percent Listing, including ALL subcontractors that would be required to complete work covered in the base bid. Bid Security Document 00 45 19 Form of Non-Collusive Affidavit.
3. 4. B.
BID FORM 1. 2. Sole Proprietorship: signature of sole proprietor in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the words "Sole Proprietor" under the signature. Partnership, Limited Liability Partnership: signature of all partners in the presence of a witness who will also sign. Insert the word "Partner" under each signature. Corporation, Limited Liability Corporation: signature of a duly authorized signing officer(s) in their normal signatures. Insert the officers capacity in which the signing officer acts, under each signature. Affix the corporate seal.
3.
00 21 13 - 5
If the bid is signed by other than the president, secretary, or treasurer of the company, a copy of the resolution of the board of directors authorizing the signer of the Bid to do so must also be submitted with the Bid Form in the bid envelope. 4. Joint Venture: each party of the joint venture shall execute the Bid Form under their respective seals in a manner appropriate to such party as described above, similar to the requirements of a partnership. Bids shall be rounded to the nearest dollar. Any bids which are not submitted accordingly shall be rounded to the nearest dollar by the Owner. A Bid Bond issued by a surety company licensed to do business in the State of Nevada, or a certified check, in the name of the Owner, in a sum no less than five percent (5%) of the Bid Sum. Endorse each Bid Bond in the name of the Owner as obligee, signed and sealed by the Contractor as principal and the surety. Certified funds security deposits will be returned after delivery to the Owner of the required Performance and Payment Bond(s) by the accepted bidder. Include the cost of Bid Security in the Bid Sum. After a bid has been accepted, cash bid securities will be returned to the respective bidders upon written request with a self-addressed stamped envelope included. If no contract is awarded, all security deposits will be returned.
5. C.
BID SECURITY 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 6.03
POST BID DOCUMENTS REQUIRED A. Submit the following documents after bid opening: 1. Document 00 43 36.2 Subcontractors Exceeding 1 Percent Listing (due within 2 hours after bid opening), including ALL subcontractors that would be required to complete work covered in the base bid. Document 00 43 36.3 Expanded Subcontractors Listing (due within 24 hours after bid opening) including ALL subcontractors that would be required to complete work covered in the base bid and all bid. Document 00 43 36.4 Expanded supplier and manufacturer listing (due at the Pre-Construction meeting).
2.
3.
6.04
BID INELIGIBILITY A. Contractors that submit Bids that are unsigned, improperly signed or sealed, conditional, illegible, obscure, contain arithmetical errors, erasures, alterations, or irregularities of any kind, at the discretion of the Owner, may be declared non responsive.
00 21 13 - 6
B.
Contractors that submit Bid Forms, appendices, and enclosures which are improperly prepared, at the discretion of the Owner, may be declared non responsive. Failure to provide required Bid Security will invalidate the bid. Contractors who fail to provide Documents 00 43 36.1 Subcontractors Exceeding 5 Percent Listing and/or 00 43 36.2 Subcontractors Exceeding 1 Percent Listing within the required time limits shall be declared nonresponsive. An abstract summary of submitted bids will be made available to all bidders following bid opening.
C. D.
E.
PART 7. 7.01
OFFER ACCEPTANCE/REJECTION DURATION OF OFFER A. Bids shall remain open to acceptance and shall be irrevocable for a period of sixty (60) days after the bid closing date.
7.02
ACCEPTANCE OF OFFER A. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any or all offers and to waive irregularity in the bidding and accept the bid, which is most advantageous to the Owner. After acceptance, the Owner will issue a written Notice of Contract Award to the successful bidder. The Owner reserves the right to retain the Bid Security of the party awarded the Contract and the next lowest responsive and responsible bidder for sixty (60) days after bid opening. If any bidder refuses to enter into a Contract, the Owner will retain his Bid Security as liquidated damages but not as a penalty.
B. C.
D.
PART 8. 8.01
BONDS AND INSURANCE PERFORMANCE ASSURANCE A. Accepted bidder to provide, within five (5) working days after Contract Award, the Performance and Payment Bonds as described in the General Conditions. Performance and Payment Bonds are not required on bids under $50,000.00. Include the cost of all required bonds in the Bid Sum.
B. 8.02
INSURANCE A. Successful bidder shall provide, within five (5) working days after Contract Award, an executed "Undertaking of Insurance" on a standard form provided by the insurance company stating their intention to provide insurance to the bidder in
00 21 13 - 7
accordance with the insurance requirements of the General Conditions of the Contract for construction. B. Minimum Insurer AM Best Rating is A- with FSC of VIII or higher of financial size category in the current issue of Bests Key Rating Guide. END OF DOCUMENT
00 21 13 - 8
DOCUMENT 00 31 00 INFORMATION AVAILABLE TO BIDDERS 1.01 SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION REPORT A. A copy of the geotechnical report is included with this document, titled GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION LAS VEGAS ENTERPRISE PARK WEST OF MARTIN LUTHER KING BOULEVARD BETWEEN LAKE MEAD BOULEVARD AND VEGAS DRIVE LAS VEGAS, NEVADA dated September 14, 1995, prepared by Kleinfelder Inc. A copy of the update to the Geotechnical Report titled UPDATE OF GEOTECHINCAL REPORT; LAS VEGAS ENTERPRISE PARK; WEST OF MARTIN LUTHER KING BOULEVARD BETWEEN LAKE MEAD BOULEVARD AND VEGAS DRIVE; APN NO. 13921313011 LAS VEGAS NEVADA dated September 18, 2006, prepared by Kleinfelder Inc. A copy of the update to the Geotechnical Report titled UPDATE OF GEOTECHINCAL RECOMMENDATIONS SPECIFIC TO FOUNDATION FOR AN INDEPENDENT TOMORROW BUILDING ADDITION 1931 STELLA LAKE DRIVE, LAS VEGAS, NEVADA dated February 7, 2013, prepared by Kleinfelder Inc. These reports identify properties of below grade conditions and offers recommendations for the design of foundations, and recommendations for construction. These reports, by their nature, cannot reveal all conditions that exist on the site. Should subsurface conditions be found to vary substantially from this report, the Architect and Owner shall be notified immediately and before the conditions are disturbed. The geotechnical report and updates are included as information to the Contractor necessary to complete the Work.
B.
C.
D. E.
F.
00 31 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Information Available to Bidders
1.02
PROJECT LOCATION MAP
00 31 00 - 2
END OF DOCUMENT
00 31 00 - 3
DOCUMENT 00 31 13.13 PROJECT SCHEDULE
PART 1. 1.01
General Summary A. This Calendar of Events is an integral part of the Bidding Requirement and Contract Documents. All times refer to Pacific Standard Time Event 1 Item (Referenced Document) Advertisement of Bids Date and Time February 17, 2013, February 24, 2013, March 3, 2013 & March 10, 2013 February 27, 2013 at 10:00 am March 18, 2013 at 3:00 pm March 28, 2013 March 29, 2013 March 28, 2014 April 28, 2014
Pre Bid Conference
Receipt of Bids (Invitation to Bid)
4 5 6 7
Award Contract Notice to Proceed (Estimated) Substantial Completion Final Completion
END OF DOCUMENT
JMA 127457 100% CD Submittal: January 08, 2013
00 31 13.13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Project Schedule
DOCUMENT 00 31 32.1 UPDATE TO GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
FIGURE 1
APPENDIX A
SAMPLE/SAMPLER TYPE GRAPHICS

CALIFORNIA SAMPLER (3 inch outside diameter) STANDARD PENETRATION SPLIT SPOON SAMPLER (2 inch outside and 1-3/8 inch inner diameter)
UNIFIED SOIL CLASSIFICATION SYSTEM (ASTM D 2487)

_ CLEAN Cu >4 and < < GRAVEL 1_ Cc _ 3 WITH <5% < FINES Cu 4 and/ or 1>Cc >3
GW
GRAVELS (More than half of coarse fraction is larger than the #4 sieve)
WELL-GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND MIXTURES WITH LITTLE OR NO FINES POORLY GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND MIXTURES WITH LITTLE OR NO FINES WELL-GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND MIXTURES WITH LITTLE FINES WELL-GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND MIXTURES WITH LITTLE CLAY FINES POORLY GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND MIXTURES WITH LITTLE FINES POORLY GRADED GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND MIXTURES WITH LITTLE CLAY FINES SILTY GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SILT-SAND MIXTURES CLAYEY GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND-CLAY MIXTURES CLAYEY GRAVELS, GRAVEL-SAND-CLAY-SILT MIXTURES WELL-GRADED SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL MIXTURES WITH LITTLE OR NO FINES POORLY GRADED SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL MIXTURES WITH LITTLE OR NO FINES WELL-GRADED SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL MIXTURES WITH LITTLE FINES WELL-GRADED SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL MIXTURES WITH LITTLE CLAY FINES POORLY GRADED SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL MIXTURES WITH LITTLE FINES POORLY GRADED SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL MIXTURES WITH LITTLE CLAY FINES SILTY SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL-SILT MIXTURES CLAYEY SANDS, SAND-GRAVEL-CLAY MIXTURES CLAYEY SANDS, SAND-SILT-CLAY MIXTURES
GP
GROUND WATER GRAPHICS

WATER LEVEL (level where first observed) WATER LEVEL (level after exploration completion) WATER LEVEL (additional levels after exploration) OBSERVED SEEPAGE COARSE GRAINED SOILS (More than half of material is larger than the #200 sieve)
GW-GM
> Cu _4 and < < 1_ Cc _ 3
NOTES
1. The report and log key are an integral part of these logs. All data and interpretations in this log are subject to the stated explanations and limitations stated in the report. 2. Lines separating strata on the logs represent approximate boundaries only. Actual transitions may be gradual or differ from those shown. 3. No warranty is provided as to the continuity of soil or rock conditions between individual sample locations. 4. Logs represent general soil or rock conditions observed at the point of exploration on the date indicated. 5. In general, Unified Soil Classification System designations presented on the logs were based on visual classification in the field and were modified where appropriate by visual classifications in the office and/or laboratory gradation and index property testing. 6. Fine grained soils that plot within the hatched area on the Plasticity Chart, and coarse grained soils with between 5% and 12% passing the No. 200 sieve require dual USCS symbols, ie., GW-GM, GP-GM, GW-GC, GP-GC, GC-GM, SW-SM, SP-SM, SW-SC, SP-SC, SC-SM. 7. If sampler is not able to be driven at least 6 inches, 50/X indicates number of blows required to drive the identified sampler X inches with a 140 pounds hammer falling 30 inches.
GRAVELS WITH 5% TO 12% FINES Cu <4 and/ or 1>Cc >3
GW-GC
GP-GM
GP-GC
GM
GRAVELS WITH > 12% FINES
GC
GC-GM
SANDS (More than half of coarse fraction is smaller than the #4 sieve)
CLEAN SANDS WITH <5% FINES
_ Cu >6 and _ < 1< Cc _ 3
SW
Cu <6 and/ or 1>Cc >3
SP
R:KLF_STANDARD_GINT_LIBRARY_SR.1.GLB [GEO-LEGEND 1 (GRAPHICS KEY) WITH USCS]
SW-SM
> Cu _6 and < < 1_ Cc _ 3
SANDS WITH 5% TO 12% FINES Cu <6 and/ or 1>Cc >3
SW-SC
SP-SM
SP-SC
SM
SANDS WITH > 12% FINES
SC
SC-SM ML
SILTS AND CLAYS (Liquid Limit less than 50)
FINE GRAINED SOILS (More than half of material is smaller than the #200 sieve)
INORGANIC SILTS AND VERY FINE SANDS, SILTY OR CLAYEY FINE SANDS, SILTS WITH SLIGHT PLASTICITY
INORGANIC CLAYS OF LOW TO MEDIUM PLASTICITY, GRAVELLY CLAYS, SANDY CLAYS, SILTY CLAYS, LEAN CLAYS
CL CL-ML OL MH
INORGANIC CLAYS-SILTS OF LOW PLASTICITY, GRAVELLY CLAYS, SANDY CLAYS, SILTY CLAYS, LEAN CLAYS
gINT FILE: I:\gintw\projects\75620_fit Update.gpj
SILTS AND CLAYS (Liquid Limit greater than 50)
CH OH
ORGANIC SILTS & ORGANIC SILTY CLAYS OF LOW PLASTICITY INORGANIC SILTS, MICACEOUS OR DIATOMACEOUS FINE SAND OR SILT INORGANIC CLAYS OF HIGH PLASTICITY, FAT CLAYS ORGANIC CLAYS & ORGANIC SILTS OF MEDIUM-TO-HIGH PLASTICITY
NOTE: USE MATERIAL DESCRIPTION ON THE LOG TO DEFINE A GRAPHIC THAT MAY NOT BE PROVIDE ON THIS LEGEND.
PROJECT NO.: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: DATE: REVISED: 75620 DFR DJS 12/18/2012 ---
GRAPHICS KEY
PLATE
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition 1931 Stella Lake Drive Las Vegas, Nevada
A-1a
KLEINFELDER - 6380 S Polaris Avenue | Las Vegas, NV 89118 | PH: 702.736.2936 | FAX: 702.361.9094 | www.kleinfelder.com
GRAIN SIZE
DESCRIPTION SIEVE SIZE >12" 3 - 12' coarse fine coarse medium fine 3/4 -3" #4 - 3/4" #10 - #4 #40 - #10 #200 - #10 Passing #200 GRAIN SIZE >12" 3 - 12" 3/4 -3" 0.19 - 0.75" 0.079 - 0.19" 0.017 - 0.079" 0.0029 - 0.017" <0.0029 APPROXIMATE SIZE Larger than basketball-sized Fist-sized to basketball-sized Thumb-sized to fist-sized Pea-sized to thumb-sized Rock salt-sized to pea-sized Sugar-sized to rock salt-sized Flour-sized to sugar-sized Flour-sized and smaller
Munsell Color
NAME Red Yellow Red Yellow Green Yellow Green Blue Green Blue Purple Blue Purple Red Purple ABBR R YR Y GY G BG B PB P RP
Boulders Cobbles Gravel
Sand Fines
ANGULARITY
DESCRIPTION CRITERIA Particles have sharp edges and relatively plane sides with unpolished surfaces Particles are similar to angular description but have rounded edges Particles have nearly plane sides but have well-rounded corners and edges Particles have smoothly curved sides and no edges
Angular Subangular Subrounded Rounded
Rounded Subrounded Subangular Angular
PLASTICITY
DESCRIPTION LL FIELD TEST A 1/8-in. (3 mm) thread cannot be rolled at any water content.
MOISTURE CONTENT
DESCRIPTION FIELD TEST Absence of moisture, dusty, dry to the touch Damp but no visible water Visible free water, usually soil is below water table
Non-plastic Low (L)
NP < 30
R:KLF_STANDARD_GINT_LIBRARY_SR.1.GLB [GEO-LEGEND 2 (SOIL DESCRIPTION KEY)]
Medium (M)
High (H)
The thread can barely be rolled and the lump or thread cannot be formed when drier than the plastic limit. The thread is easy to roll and not much time is required to reach the plastic limit. 30 - 50 The thread cannot be rerolled after reaching the plastic limit. The lump or thread crumbles when drier than the plastic limit It takes considerable time rolling and kneeding kneading to reach the plastic limit. The thread can be > 50 rerolled several times after reaching the plastic limit. The lump or thread can be formed without crumbling when drier than the plastic limit
Dry Moist Wet
REACTION WITH HYDROCHLORIC ACID

DESCRIPTION None Weak Strong FIELD TEST No visible reaction Some reaction, with bubbles forming slowly Violent reaction, with bubbles forming immediately
APPARENT / RELATIVE DENSITY - COARSE-GRAINED SOIL

APPARENT DENSITY MODIFIED CA CALIFORNIA RELATIVE SPT-N60 SAMPLER SAMPLER DENSITY (# blows/ft) (# blows/ft) (# blows/ft) (%) <4 <4 <5 0 - 15
CONSISTENCY - FINE-GRAINED SOIL

CONSISTENCY
UNCONFINED COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH (Qu)(psf)
CRITERIA
Very Loose Loose Medium Dense Dense Very Dense
Very Soft Soft Firm Hard Very Hard
< 1000 1000 - 2000 2000 < 4000 4000 < 8000 > 8000
Thumb will penetrate soil more than 1 in. (25 mm) Thumb will penetrate soil about 1 in. (25 mm) Thumb will indent soil about 1/4 in. (6 mm)
Thumb will not indent soil but readily indented with thumbnail
4 - 10 10 - 30 30 - 50 >50
5 - 12 12- 35 35 - 60 >60
5 - 15 15 - 40 40 - 70 >70
15 - 35 35 - 65 65 - 85 85 - 100
Thumbnail will not indent soil
NOTE: AFTER TERZAGHI AND PECK, 1948
STRUCTURE
DESCRIPTION CRITERIA Alternating layers of varying material or color with layers at least 1/4 in. thick, note thickness Alternating layers of varying material or color with the layer less than 1/4 in. thick, note thickness Breaks along definite planes of fracture with little resistance to fracturing Fracture planes appear polished or glossy, sometimes striated Cohesive soil that can be broken down into small angular lumps which resist further breakdown Inclusion of small pockets of different soils, such as small lenses of sand scattered through a mass of clay; note thickness Same color and appearance throughout PROJECT NO.: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: DATE: REVISED:
CEMENTATION
DESCRIPTION FIELD TEST Crumbles or breaks with handling or slight finger pressure Crumbles or breaks with considerable finger pressure Will not crumble or break with finger pressure
Stratified Laminated Fissured Slickensided Blocky Lensed Homogeneous
Weakly Moderately Strongly
75620 DFR DJS 12/18/2012 ---
SOIL DESCRIPTION KEY
PLATE
A-1b
Date Begin - End: Logged By: Hor.-Vert. Datum: Angle from Vert.: Weather:
12/12/12 D. Robbins Not Applicable 0 degrees Cool and Overcast
Drill Company: Drill Crew: Drill Equipment: Auger Diameter:
Elite Drilling Charlie CME-75 (truck-mounted) 8 in. O.D. Hammer Type - Drop:
BORING LOG NB-1 140 lb. Auto - 30 in.
Exploration Method: Hollow Stem Auger

FIELD EXPLORATION Recovery (NR=No Recovery) Dry Density (pcf)
Blow Counts(BC)= Uncorr. blows/6 in.
LABORATORY RESULTS
Sample Type
Passing No.4 Sieve (%) Passing #200 Sieve (%) Liquid Limit (NV=No Value) Plasticity Index (NP=No Plasticity)
Graphical Log
ASPHALT: approximately 2 inches thick FILL: probable aggregate base approximately 5 inches thick, silty sand with gravel, brown Clayey SAND (SC): brown, slightly moist, medium dense Lean CLAY with Sand (CL): brown, slightly moist to moist, firm to hard
BC=8 8 9 BC=7 8 12 BC=10 14 18 BC=8 11 13
18"
USCS Symbol
Surface Condition: Asphalt Pavement
SC
9.7
95
100
49
31
15
18"
color change to gray from 7 feet to 7 feet Clayey SAND (SC): weakly cemented, some thin layers of lean clay, light brown, slightly moist to moist, medium dense
18"
10
18"
CALICHE: white, slightly moist, very hard
R:KLF_STANDARD_GINT_LIBRARY_SR.1.GLB [KLF_BORING/TEST PIT SOIL LOG]
15
Sandy Lean CLAY (CL): weakly cemented, caliche nodules, light brown to white, slightly moist, firm to hard
BC=7 8 10
18"
The exploration was terminated at approximately 16.5 ft. below ground surface. The exploration was backfilled with auger cuttings on December 12, 2012.
20
GROUNDWATER LEVEL INFORMATION: Groundwater was not encountered during drilling or after completion.
25
30
PROJECT NO.: DRAWN BY: CHECKED BY: DATE: REVISED:
75620 DFR DJS 12/18/2012 ---
BORING LOG NB-1
PAGE:
Other Tests/ Remarks
Water Content (%)
Depth (feet)
PLATE
A-2
1 of 1
Date Begin - End: Logged By: Hor.-Vert. Datum: Angle from Vert.: Weather:
12/12/12 D. Robbins Not Applicable 0 degrees Cool and Overcast
Drill Company: Drill Crew: Drill Equipment: Auger Diameter:
Elite Drilling Charlie CME-75 (truck-mounted) 8 in. O.D. Hammer Type - Drop:
BORING LOG NB-2 140 lb. Auto - 30 in.
Exploration Method: Hollow Stem Auger

FIELD EXPLORATION Recovery (NR=No Recovery) Dry Density (pcf)
Blow Counts(BC)= Uncorr. blows/6 in.
LABORATORY RESULTS
Sample Type
Passing No.4 Sieve (%) Passing #200 Sieve (%) Liquid Limit (NV=No Value) Plasticity Index (NP=No Plasticity)
Graphical Log
ASPHALT: approximately 2 inches thick FILL: probable aggregate base approximately 5 inches thick, silty sand with gravel, brown Silty SAND (SM): brown to dark brown, slightly moist, medium dense Sandy Lean CLAY (CL): weakly cemented, brown, slightly moist, hard not cemented below 5 feet Clayey SAND (SC): brown to light brown, slightly moist, dense Sandy Lean CLAY (CL): weakly cemented in zones, light brown, slightly moist, hard
10 BC=7 22 35 BC=6 12 9 BC=11 22 25 BC=20 50/5
18"
18"
18"
11"
CALICHE: white, slightly moist, very hard Sandy Lean CLAY (CL): weakly cemented, light brown to white, slightly moist, firm to hard
R:KLF_STANDARD_GINT_LIBRARY_SR.1.GLB [KLF_BORING/TEST PIT SOIL LOG]
15
BC=9 10 9
18"
USCS Symbol
Surface Condition: Asphalt Pavement
The exploration was terminated at approximately 16.5 ft. below ground surface. The exploration was backfilled with auger cuttings on December 12, 2012.
20
GROUNDWATER LEVEL INFORMATION: Groundwater was not encountered during drilling or after completion.
25
30
75620 DFR DJS 12/18/2012 ---
BORING LOG NB-2
PAGE:
Other Tests/ Remarks
Water Content (%)
Depth (feet)
PLATE
A-3
1 of 1
APPENDIX B
SIEVE SIZE
3" 100 90 1-1/2" 3/4" 3/8" #4 #8 #10 #16 #30 #40 #50 #100 #200
80
70
PERCENT PASSING
60
50
40
30
20
10 0
10
0.1
PARTICLE SIZE IN MILLIMETERS
Percent Passing
R:KLF_STANDARD_GINT_LIBRARY_SR.1.GLB [KLF_SIEVE ANALYSIS]
Symbol
Exploration ID NB-1
Approx. Depth (ft) 2.5 - 4
Sample No. N/A
3/4 inch
#4 100
#200 49
Liquid Limit 31
Plastic Limit 16
Plastic Index 15
Sample Description
CLAYEY SAND
75620 DFR DJS 12/18/2012 ---
SIEVE ANALYSIS
PLATE
B-1
60 For classification of fine-grained soils and fine-grained fraction of coarse-grained soils. Equation of "A" - line Horizontal at PI=4 to LL=25.5, then PI=0.73 (LL-20) PLASTICITY INDEX (PI) 40 Equation of "U" - line Vertical at LL=16 to PI=7, then PI=0.9 (LL-8) 30
"U
"L
IN
" "A
LI
NE
50
CH
or
OH
20
CL
or
OL
MH or OH
10 7 4 0 0 10
CL-ML 16 20 30
ML or OL
40 50 60 LIQUID LIMIT (LL) 70 80
Chart Reference: ASTM D2487 90 100 110
Symbol
Exploration ID NB-1
Approx. Depth (ft) 2.5 - 4
Sample No. N/A
Liquid Limit 31
Plastic Plasticity Limit Index 16 15
Sample Description
CLAYEY SAND
R:KLF_STANDARD_GINT_LIBRARY_SR.1.GLB [KLF_ATTERBERG]
75620 DFR DJS 12/18/2012 ---
ATTERBERG LIMITS
PLATE
B-2
APPENDIX C
DOCUMENT 00 31 32.2 UPDATE TO GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
END OF DOCUMENT
DOCUMENT 00 31 32.3 GEOTECHNICAL REPORT
DOCUMENT 00 41 00 BID FORM MAIL OR HAND CARRY SEALED BIDS TO: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas, Nevada 89106
Sir/Madam: I, the undersigned, having examined the General Conditions of the Contract, Specifications, Addenda, and all other Contract documents entitled: "(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition" at (FIT) FOUNDATION FOR AN INDEPENDENT TOMORROW 1931 STELLA LAKE DRIVE, LAS VEGAS NEVADA 89106
and the Contract drawings similarly entitled, and having visited the site and examined all conditions affecting the work, hereby propose and agree to furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and appliances to perform all operations necessary to complete the entire work as required by said documents for the stipulated sum of (rounded to the nearest dollar): _______________________________________________________________________________Dollars ($___________________________) hereinafter called the base bid. If this bid is accepted, we will complete the work in the specified calendar days (reference Document 00 73 00). Enclosed please find Bid Bond, Certified Check or Cashiers Check No.__________, for five (5) per cent of the amount of the base bid, copy of valid Nevada Contractors License, and Document 00 45 19 (Non collusive Affidavit). Per NRS 338, Document 00 43 36.1 (5% Subcontractor List) is enclosed, and Document 00 43 36.2 (1% Subcontractor List) shall be provided within Two (2) hours of bid opening.
00 41 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Bid Form
The undersigned, per Document 00 21 13, Instructions to Bidders, 6.1, consents that the bids may be opened publicly on the date, time, and place set by the Owner.
Contractor
Authorized Signature
Street Address
Suite No.
Title
P. O. Box
Witness Signature Phone No. Fax No.
City
State
Zip
License
Bid Limit
Classification
Dated this ______________day of ____________________, 2013 Addendum #1 #2 #3 #4
END OF DOCUMENT
00 41 00 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Bid Form
DOCUMENT 00 43 25 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM (PRE BID)

Project Name: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition Contractor's Name: (JMA Architecture Studios) Tel/Fax: Attention:(Sylvia Kim) Date:
Please consider for approval the following product or system as an "APPROVED EQUAL" substitution in accordance with the provisions of Divisions 0 and 1 of this Project Manual. Name & description of SPECIFIED Product or System: Division________________________________ Page(s):________________________________ Section:____________________________________ Drawing No.(s):______________________________
Detail or Section No.(s):_________________________________________________________________________ Manufacturer: Vendor: Address: Address: Phone: Phone:
Reason(s) for not giving priority to specified item:____________________________________________________ Does SUBSTITUTION affect other material or systems? (If yes, attach complete data) Does SUBSTITUTION require dimensional revision or redesign or structure, mechanical, and/or electrical work? (If yes, attach complete data) Savings or Credit to Owner for approving SUBSTITUTE (even dollar): Written: YES YES NO NO
$_____________________
________________________________________________________________________________
Attached data is furnished for evaluation of the substitution: CATALOG:_________________________________ SAMPLES:_________________________________ REPORTS:_________________________________ DRAWINGS: TESTS: OTHER: _______________________________
____________________________________ ___________________________________
Manufacturer's guarantees of the Substitute vs. Specified item is:
SAME
DIFFERENT (If different, please explain)
00 43 25 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Substitution Request Form (Pre-Bid)
THE UNDERSIGNED HEREBY CERTIFIES THAT THIS SUBSTITUTION HAS BEEN FULLY CHECKED AND COORDINATED WITH THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Company: Name: Address: Title: Phone: Fax:
Accepted Date Received: Signature: (Architect)
FOR ARCHITECTS USE Accepted As Noted Date of Action: Date:
Received Too Late
END OF DOCUMENT
00 43 25 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Substitution Request Form (Pre-Bid)
DOCUMENT 00 43 36.1 SUBCONTRACTORS EXCEEDING 5 PERCENT LISTING TO: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow hereinafter called "Owner" 1. Pursuant to bidding requirements for the Work titled: "(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition" at (FIT) FOUNDATION FOR AN INDEPENDENT TOMORROW located at 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106. INSTRUCTIONS: Pursuant NRS 338.141 1. (b), the Prime Contractor must include with his bid, the name of each first tier subcontractor who will provide labor or a portion of the work on the public work to the prime contractor for which the first tier subcontractor will be paid an amount exceeding five (5) percent of the Prime Contractor's total bid; the number of the license issued to the subcontractor pursuant NRS 624; and a description of the subcontractors work. The Prime Contractor shall also include his or her name, and a description of the work on this list, if the Prime Contractor will self-perform any of the work required to be listed pursuant the above referenced statute. If the undersigned Prime Contractor fails to submit the required list at time of bid, his bid shall be deemed not responsive. The two (2) hour listing requirement of NRS 338.141 1. (b) shall be provided on Document 00 43 36.2. Prime Contractor and first tier subcontractors listed on this Document 00 43 36.1 shall be re-listed on Document 00 43 36.2. ACKNOWLEDGMENT: Signature at the conclusion of this Document certifies that all subcontractors and self-performed portions required in accordance with NRS 338.141 are listed. SUBCONTRACTOR PORTION OF WORK LICENSE NUMBER
2.
3.
4.
PROVIDE SIGNATURE IDENTICAL TO THAT SHOWN ON THE BID FORM BIDDER NAME: SIGNATURE OF ACKNOWLEDGMENT: NEVADA CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE #: END OF DOCUMENT DATE:
00 43 36.1 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Subcontractors Exceeding 5 Percent Listing
DOCUMENT 00 43 36.2 SUBCONTRACTORS EXCEEDING 1 PERCENT LISTING TO: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow hereinafter called "Owner" 1. Pursuant to bidding requirements for the Work titled: "(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition" at (FIT) FOUNDATION FOR AN INDEPENDENT TOMORROW located at 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106. INSTRUCTIONS: Pursuant NRS 338.141 1.(b), within two (2) hours after the completion of the opening of the bids, the Prime Contractors who submitted the three (3) lowest bids must submit a list of the name of each first tier subcontractor who will provide labor or a portion of the work on the public work to the prime contractor for which the first tier subcontractor will be paid an amount exceeding one (1) percent of the Prime Contractor's total bid or $50,000, whichever is greater; the number of the license issued to the subcontractor pursuant NRS 624; and a description of the subcontractors work. The Prime Contractor shall also include his or her name, and a description of the work on this list, if the Prime Contractor will self-perform any of the work required to be listed pursuant the above referenced statute. Document 00 43 36.2 shall be sent to Owner via fax at 702-362-8513. Prime Contractor and first tier subcontractors previously listed on Document 00 43 36.1 shall be re-listed on this Document 00 43 36.2. If the undersigned Prime Contractor fails to submit this list within the required time, his bid shall be deemed not responsive. ACKNOWLEDGMENT: Signature at the conclusion of this Document certifies that all subcontractors and self-performed portions required in accordance with NRS 338.141 are listed. SUBCONTRACTOR PORTION OF WORK LICENSE NUMBER
2.
3.
4.
PROVIDE SIGNATURE IDENTICAL TO THAT SHOWN ON THE BID FORM BIDDER NAME: SIGNATURE OF ACKNOWLEDGMENT: NEVADA CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE #: END OF DOCUMENT
JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Subcontractors Exceeding 1 Percent Listing
DATE:
00 43 36.2 - 1
DOCUMENT 00 43 36.3 EXPANDED SUBCONTRACTOR LISTING TO: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow hereinafter called "Owner" 1. Pursuant to bidding requirements for the Work titled: "(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition" at (FIT) FOUNDATION FOR AN INDEPENDENT TOMORROW located at 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106. This form must be submitted to the Owner by the three lowest Bidders within 24 hours after bid opening. The form must include all portions of the Work performed by the prime contractor and subcontractors. Bidders who fail to provide Document 00 43 36.3 Expanded Subcontractors Listing within the required time limit may be deemed not responsive. A. The items below are a representative list of all portions of the Work. Although a comprehensive list of portions of the Work is provided, this list should not be considered entirely inclusive. Should a portion of the Work not be specifically listed, the prime contractor is required to add that portion of Work in the space provided. All listed portions of work must be annotated as required or indicated Not Applicable. A bidder who wishes to file a protest must submit a completed 00 43 36.3 form as part of their protest. Document 00 43 36.3 shall be sent to the Owner via fax at 702-632-8513.
B. C.
2. Using federal guidelines please indicate which subcontractors, if any, qualify as one of the following: Minority Business Enterprise (MBE), Womenowned Business Enterprise (WBE) or Disabled Veteranowned Business Enterprise (DVBE). Please note that this column is for informational purposes only. 3. DEFINITIONS: A. MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (MBE) means a business, which is at least fifty one percent (51%) minorityowned, operated and actively controlled by one or more minorities. In the case of a publiclyowned business, at least fiftyone percent (51%) of the stock must be minorityowned and the business must be operated and actively controlled by minorities. Minority categories are NATIVE AMERICAN, BLACK/AFRICAN AMERICAN, ASIAN AMERICAN, AND HISPANIC AMERICAN. WOMENOWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (WBE) means a business which is at least fiftyone percent (51%) womenowned, operated and actively controlled by one or more women, or in the case of a publiclyowned business, at least fiftyone percent (51%) of the stock must be owned and the business operated and actively controlled by a woman or women. DISABLED VETERANOWNED BUSINESS ENTERPRISE (DVBE) means a business which is at least fiftyone percent (51%) disabled veteranowned, operated and actively controlled by a one or more disabled veterans, or in the case of a publiclyowned business, at least fiftyone percent (51%) of the stock must be owned and the business operated and actively controlled by a disabled veteran. Disabled veteran is defined by the City of Las Vegas as a U.S. veteran of any era with a serviceconnected minimum disability of ten (10%), certified by the Department of Veterans Affairs.
B.
C.
00 43 36.3 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Expanded Subcontractors Listing
4. ACKNOWLEDGMENT: 1) Signature at the conclusion of this document certifies that One Hundred Percent (100%) of the portions of the Work are listed; AND 2) Signature at the conclusion of this document certifies that each Subcontractor named by the Contractor is properly licensed for that portion of the work and does not exceed the limit of his license.
PORTION OF THE SUBCONTRACTOR WORK DIVISION 2
LICENSE NUMBER
BID LIMIT
MBE WBE DVBE
DIVISION 3
DIVISION 4
DIVISION 5
00 43 36.3 - 2
LICENSE NUMBER
BID LIMIT
MBE WBE DVBE
DIVISION 7
DIVISION 8
DIVISION 9
00 43 36.3 - 3
LICENSE NUMBER
BID LIMIT
MBE WBE DVBE
DIVISION 11
DIVISION 12
DIVISION 13
00 43 36.3 - 4
LICENSE NUMBER
BID LIMIT
MBE WBE DVBE
DIVISION 15-20 NOT USED DIVISION 21
DIVISION 22
DIVISION 23
DIVISION 24 & 25 NOT USED DIVISION 26
00 43 36.3 - 5
PORTION OF THE SUBCONTRACTOR WORK
LICENSE NUMBER
BID LIMIT
MBE WBE DVBE
DIVISION 27
DIVISION 28
DIVISION 29& 30 NOT USED DIVISION 31
DIVISION 32
DIVISION 33
00 43 36.3 - 6
PORTION OF THE SUBCONTRACTOR WORK DIVISION 34-48

NOT USED
LICENSE NUMBER
BID LIMIT
MBE WBE DVBE
By signing this document, the Contractor attests that each Subcontractor named is properly licensed for that portion of the work and has not exceeded the limit of his license. Listing a Subcontractor who exceeds his bid limit, or a nonspecified manufacturer may be cause for the Owner to reject the bid and accept the next lowest responsive bid for the Project. PROVIDE SIGNATURE IDENTICAL TO THAT SHOWN ON THE BID FORM BIDDER NAME: SIGNATURE OF ACKNOWLEDGMENT: NEVADA CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE #: END OF DOCUMENT DATE:
00 43 36.3 - 7
DOCUMENT 00 43 36.4 SUPPLIER AND MANUFACTURER LISTING Pursuant to bidding requirements for the Work titled: "(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition" at (FIT) FOUNDATION FOR AN INDEPENDENT TOMORROW located at 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106.
PORTION OF THE WORK SUPPLIER MANUFACTURER
DIVISION 2
DIVISION 3
DIVISION 4
DIVISION 5
DIVISION 6
00 43 36.4 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Supplier and Manufacturer Listing
PORTION OF THE WORK
SUPPLIER
MANUFACTURER
DIVISION 7
DIVISION 8
DIVISION 9
DIVISION 10
00 43 36.4 - 2
PORTION OF THE WORK
SUPPLIER
MANUFACTURER
DIVISION 11
DIVISION 12
DIVISION 13
DIVISION 14
00 43 36.4 - 3
PORTION OF THE WORK
SUPPLIER
MANUFACTURER
DIVISION 15-20 NOT USED DIVISION 21
DIVISION 22
DIVISION 23
DIVISION 24 & 25 NOT USED DIVISION 26
DIVISION 27
DIVISION 28
00 43 36.4 - 4
PORTION OF THE WORK
SUPPLIER
MANUFACTURER
DIVISION 29& 30 NOT USED DIVISION 31
DIVISION 32
DIVISION 33
By signing this document, the Contractor attests that each supplier or manufacturer listed above shall provide applicable materials and equipment per Contract Documents BIDDER NAME: SIGNATURE OF ACKNOWLEDGEMENT NEVADA CONTRACTOR'S LICENSE #: END OF DOCUMENT DATE:
00 43 36.4 - 5
DOCUMENT 00 45 00 CONTRACTORS FORM OF GUARANTEE
When required by the specifications written guarantees shall be in the form of the following guarantee, on the Contractors own letterhead:
GUARANTEE FOR We hereby guarantee that which we have installed in have been done in accordance with the drawings and specifications and that the Work installed will fulfill the requirements included in the specifications. We agree to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any adjacent Work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or materials within a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance of the above mentioned Work by Owner, ordinary wear and tear, and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. In the event of our failure to comply with the abovementioned conditions within a reasonable period of time, as determined by the Owner, after being notified in writing by the Owner, we, collectively or separately, do hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense, and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. SIGNED: Prime contractor______________________________________________________________ By: Title: ________________________________________ ________________________________________
Local Representative to be contacted for service: Name: _______________________________________________________ Address: ______________________________________________________ Phone No.: ____________________________________________________
END OF DOCUMENT
00 45 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Contractors Form of Guarantee
DOCUMENT 00 45 01 SUBCONTRACTORS FORM OF GUARANTEE When required by the specifications written guarantees shall be in the form of the following guarantee, on the Contractors own letterhead:
GUARANTEE FOR We hereby guarantee that which we have installed in have been done in accordance with the drawings and specifications and that the Work installed will fulfill the requirements included in the specifications. We agree to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any adjacent Work which may be displaced by so doing, that may prove to be defective in its workmanship or materials within a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance of the above mentioned Work by Owner, ordinary wear and tear, and unusual abuse or neglect excepted. In the event of our failure to comply with the abovementioned conditions within a reasonable period of time, as determined by the Owner, after being notified in writing by the Owner, we, collectively or separately, do hereby authorize the Owner to proceed to have said defects repaired and made good at our expense, and we will honor and pay the costs and charges therefore upon demand. SIGNED: Subcontractor _______________________________________ By: _______________________________________ Title: _______________________________________ Local Representative to be contacted for service: Name: _______________________________________________________ Address: ______________________________________________________ Phone No.: ____________________________________________________ END OF DOCUMENT COSIGNED: Prime contractor _______________________________________ By: _______________________________________ Title: _______________________________________
00 45 01 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Subcontractors Form of Guarantee
DOCUMENT 00 45 19 FORM OF NON COLLUSIVE AFFIDAVIT
To Be Typed on Bidders Letterhead AFFIDAVIT (Prime Bidder) State of _____________________________________). County of ___________________________________)
___________________________________________________ being first duly sworn, deposes and says: That he is (a partner or officer of the firm of, etc.) the party making the foregoing offer or bid, that such offer or bid is genuine and not collusive or sham; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidder or person, to put in a sham bid or to refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid sum of affiant or of any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or of that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the Owner or any person interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements in said proposal or bid are true. Signature of ______________________________________ Bidder, if the bidder is an individual; Partner, if the bidder is a partnership; Officer, if the bidder is a corporation. Subscribed and sworn to before me this _________day of _____________________________, 2013 ______________________________________________ My commission expires on _____________________________, 20__.
END OF DOCUMENT
00 45 19 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Form of NonCollusive Affidavit
DOCUMENT 00 50 00 ADMINISTRATION FORMS PART 1. 1.01 ADMINISTRATION FORMS DOCUMENTS INCLUDED A. Administration forms referenced in this Project Manual are listed below. These documents are available for purchase at the office of Construction Notebook located at 3131 Meade, Las Vegas, Nevada and AIA Office located at Old Town Mall, Upper Level (G1), Reno Nevada 89502. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. B. AIA A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor AIA A201 Conformed General Conditions of the Contract for Construction AIA A310 Bid Bond AIA A312 Performance and Payment Bonds AIA G702 Application and Certificate for Payment AIA G703 Continuation Sheet for Application and Certificate for Payment AIA G706 Contractors Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims AIA G706A Contractors Affidavit of Release of Liens AIA G707 Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment AIA G707A Consent of Surety to Reduction in or Partial Release of Retainage
Other forms required by the Owner for use by the Contractor are as follows, and are included in the Project Manual: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 00 41 00 Bid Form 00 43 25 Substitution Request Form 00 43 36.1 Subcontractors Exceeding 5 Percent Listing 00 43 36.2 Subcontractors Exceeding 1 Percent Listing 00 43 36.3 Expanded Subcontractors & MBE/WBE/DVBE Subcontractors Listing 00 43 36.4 Manufacturer and Supplier Listing 00 45 00 Contractors Form of Guarantee 00 45 01 Subcontractors Form of Guarantee 00 45 19 Form of NonCollusive Affidavit 00 65 39.1 Contractors Certification of NonUse of Asbestos containing Materials 00 65 39.2 Subcontractors Certification of NonUse of Asbestos containing Materials 01 26 01 Request for Information Form
00 05 00 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Table of Contents
13. 1.02
01 33 23.1 Submittal Schedule
USE OF ADMINISTRATION FORMS A. See various Sections for required use of the administration forms.
END OF DOCUMENT
00 05 00 - 2
DOCUMENT 00 65 39 NON UTILIZATION OF ASBESTOS MATERIAL PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Restrictions on the use of asbestos containing products and requirements for certification by Contractor and subcontractors.
1.02
NONUSE OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIAL A. No asbestos or asbestoscontaining products shall be used in this construction or in any tools, devices, clothing or equipment used to affect this construction. Specific exceptions to this exclusion are as follows: vehicles with asbestos containing material (ACM) brake linings; elevator brake linings.
1.03
DEFINITION AND TESTING A. Asbestos and/or asbestoscontaining products shall be defined as all items containing chrysotile, crocidolite, amosite, anthophyllite, tremolite or actinolite. 1. 2. Any or all material containing greater than one tenth of one percent (0.1%) asbestos shall be defined as asbestoscontaining material (ACM). Any disputes involving the question of whether or not material contains asbestos shall be settled by electron microscopy; the costs of any such tests which confirm the presence of ACM shall be paid by the Contractor; if no ACM is found, the cost of such tests shall be borne by the Owner.
1.04
REMEDIATION A. All work or materials found to contain asbestos or work or material installed with asbestoscontaining equipment will be immediately rejected upon discovery and this Work will be remediated at no additional cost to the Owner. Such cost for remediation shall include, but is not limited to, cost of: the asbestos contractor, insurance, asbestos consultant, analytical and laboratory fees, waste disposal, and any other additional cost as may be incurred by Owner. 1. Remediation of work found to contain asbestos or work installed with asbestoscontaining equipment shall be designed, supervised and conducted by an asbestos removal contractor who is licensed in the State of Nevada and knowledgeable, qualified, and experienced in asbestos abatement and accredited in accordance with 40 CFR Part 763 Appendix C to Subpart E (EPA AHERA Model Accreditation Program).
00 65 39 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Non-Utilization of Asbestos Containing Material
2.
The asbestos removal contractor shall be chosen and approved by the Owner or Owners asbestos consultant, who shall have sole discretion and final determination in this matter. The work will not be accepted until asbestos contamination is removed to level deemed acceptable to Owner or Owners asbestos consultant, and in accordance with clearance levels specified in the AHERA Regulations. Procedures for Handling Asbestos Cement Transite Pipe (ACP) When transite is encountered in the scope of a construction project (whether known or discovered) it should be removed by a licensed asbestos contractor. ACP may be removed by non-asbestos licensed workers if they have been specifically trained to remove ACP and the work is supervised by an asbestos competent person. Transite pipe shall not be crushed, crumbled or pulverized. ACP must be disposed of as asbestos waste. An asbestos licensed representative must sign all asbestos waste manifests. The waste material must be placed in an area separate from other construction waste where it will not be crushed or pulverized and arranged for the waste material to be removal and disposal as asbestos waste.
3.
4.
5.
1.05
CERTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall certify, on Document 00 65 39.1 to be submitted with closeout documents, that to the best of his knowledge no asbestoscontaining material (ACM) was used as a building material in the construction of the Project. The Contractor shall obtain a similar certification, Document 00 65 39.2, from all subcontractors. Certification Documents shall be submitted together in a separate folder with closeout documents.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS
Not Used PART 3. EXECUTION
Not Used END OF DOCUMENT
00 65 39 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Non-Utilization of Asbestos Containing Material
DOCUMENT 00 65 39.1 CONTRACTORS CERTIFICATION OF NON USE OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING BUILDING MATERIAL
PROJECT NAME: PROJECT ADDRESS:
(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106
CONSTRUCTION DATES: ______________________________________________________________ NOTICE TO PROCEED (START): _______________________________________________________ SQUARE FEET: ______________________________________________________________ (BUILDING OR PROJECT AREA) SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION DATE: ___________________________________________________ ************************************************************************************* I certify that for the project described above, to the best of my knowledge, no asbestoscontaining material (ACM) was used as a building material in the construction of this project. Construction Companys Name: __________________________________________________________ Name & Title: _________________________________________________________________________ Signature: ____________________________________________________________________________ Date: ________________________________________________________________________________ ************************************************************************************* END OF DOCUMENT
00 65 39.1 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Contractors Certification of Nonuse of Asbestos Materials
DOCUMENT 00 65 39.2 CONTRACTORS CERTIFICATION OF NON USE OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING BUILDING MATERIAL
PROJECT NAME: PROJECT ADDRESS: PRIME CONTRACTOR:
(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106 ____________________________________________________________
SUBCONTRACTOR NAME: ____________________________________________________________ PORTION(S) OF THE WORK SUBCONTRACTED:__________________________________________ BUILDING OR PROJECT AREA: _______________________________________________________ CONSTRUCTION DATES: ______________________________________________________________ START DATE: SQUARE FEET: COMPLETION DATE: _____________________________________________________________ ______________________________________________________________ _____________________________________________________________
************************************************************************************* I certify that for the project described above, to the best of my knowledge, no asbestoscontaining material (ACM) was used as a building material in the construction of that portion of the Work of this project for which I Subcontracted. Subcontractors Companys Name: ________________________________________________________ Name & Title: _________________________________________________________________________ Signature: ____________________________________________________________________________ Date: ________________________________________________________________________________ ************************************************************************************* I certify that for the project described above, to the best of my knowledge, no asbestoscontaining material (ACM) was used as a building material in the construction of this project. Contractors Company Name:_____________________________________________________________ Name & Title: ________________________________________________________________________ Signature: ____________________________________________________________________________ Date: ________________________________________________________________________________ ************************************************************************************* END OF DOCUMENT
JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 00 65 39.2 - 1 Subcontractors Certification of Nonuse of Asbestos Materials
DOCUMENT 00 73 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.01 DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION OF WORK A. The property upon which the Work is to be performed is located at: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 1931 Stella Lake Drive Las Vegas, Nevada 89106 Phone: 702-367-4348 Fax: 702-632-8513 Contact: Janet Blumen B. Description of Work: 1. The scope of work includes: addition of 1,424 square feet of new first floor addition to the existing building and addition of 7,033 square feet of new second floor to existing building, including but not limited to Site work, structure, building envelope, HVAC, electrical systems. In addition modernization of the Break area and addition of tubular skylights in some rooms as indicated in the contract documents.
1.02
TIME FOR PERFORMANCE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. B. C. D. All Work shall be completed in 360 calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are the essence of the Contract. Contractor shall obtain permit from the Building Department and submit a copy of executed permit. Within five (5) working days of issuance of Notice of Award, the successful bidder shall: 1. 2. 3. Provide Performance and Payment Bonds. Provide copy of current Certificate of Workers Compensation Insurance coverage. Provide ($1,000,000.00) one million dollars comprehensive general and automobile liability and $5,000,000.00 excess liability insurance certificate(s) naming the Owner as additional insured. Project Name shall be indicated on Insurance Certificate(s). Provide copy of executed Inspection Permit. Provide Project Specific Installation Floater Coverage for the Contract amount.
4. 5. E.
The Owner shall issue or authorize to be issued a Notice to Proceed. Work shall commence within seven (7) days after such Notice, and Time of Performance shall be calculated from date of issuance of such Notice if no specific date is included therein. Any extension or diminishing of the Time for Performance shall be by Change Order. Any time limit established by Change Order shall become the essence of the Contract. In the event the Contractor fails to complete the Work within the specified or adjusted Time for Performance, the Contractor does hereby agree to (1) pay the Owner $2,000 per day as liquidated damages for each calendar day that the Contract for the Work extends beyond
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Special Conditions
F. G.
00 73 00 - 1
the Time for Performance, and (2) pay for costs the Owner may incur as a result of additional storage and handling of equipment nondeliverable because the Contractor failed to substantially complete the Work as specified. H. In the event the Contractor fails to complete or correct the Work listed on the comprehensive list of deficiencies within the specified or adjusted Time for Performance, the Contractor does hereby agree to (1) pay the Owner $250 as liquidated damages for each calendar day that the completion or correction of the Work extends beyond the 30 days for performance allowed from the date of Substantial Completion and (2) pay for any additional architectural and/or legal fees incurred by the Owner as a result of the delay. Liquidated damages may also be assessed at $1,000 per day for Contractors failure to provide Owner all required submittals per Contract Documents within the specified time periods, which is 45 days after the Pre-Construction conference.
I.
1.03
COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS A. B. Contractor shall coordinate their activities with Owner and will arrange acceptable working hours for the work, which does not conflict with the normal operation of the facility. Contractor shall protect all adjacent areas from damage during this work. All debris from this contract shall be removed, hauled away, and disposed of in a legal fashion. Contractors shall not use the owners trash dumpsters. Daily cleanup is required. The Contractor shall execute an Excavation Clearance Notice when and where applicable.
C. 1.04
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY FOR HIS PERSONNEL WHILE ON SITE A. B. C. Contractor shall identify his personnel with an I.D. badge and/or shirt indicating the Contractors name and the name of the employee. No Smoking Facility: Facility is a NonSmoking area. All cigarette smoking will have to take place off of the facility premises. Restroom and elevators: The Contractors forces shall not have access to the sites existing restroom facilities and elevators for their use. Provide sanitary facilities per Section 01 50 00. Contractor is responsible for workers safety and security of his tools, materials, and equipment while on campus. Contractor shall maintain a safe work environment for worker(s), existing building occupants and public. Contractor shall supply and maintain his own storage unit for his tools, materials and equipment. Contractor shall ensure the energy conservation procedures are met. All doors are to be closed while air conditioning units are in operation, turning lights and equipment off for the weekends when nobody is working. Contractor is subject to videotaping by Owners security systems any time they are performing work on the property.
D.
E. F.
G.
00 73 00 - 2
1.05
SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE A. These specifications are written in imperative and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words shall be shall be included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phases.
1.06
NOT IN CONTRACT A. Certain items of equipment listed or shown on the drawings are not to be included in the Contract and are marked not in contract, NIC. Such items shall be furnished by the Owner and installed under a separate contract or arrangement. Items supplied under this arrangement shall have proper required roughin of utility services made as part of this Contract and of sizes and locations for future installation of items marked NIC. Should a condition of the Contract require that the items marked SUPPLIED BY OWNER be properly and completely installed, the Contractor shall connect or install the items the same as if the items were to be furnished and installed by him under the Contract.
B.
1.07
DAVIS BACON WAGES AND NEVADA REVISED STATUTES CHAPTER 338 A. Section 1606 of the Recovery Act provides the following: Notwithstanding any other provision of law and in a manner consistent with other provisions in the Recovery Act, all laborers and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on projects funded directly by or assisted in whole or in part by and through the Federal Government pursuant to this Act shall be paid wages at rates not less than those prevailing on projects of a character similar in the locality as determined by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with subchapter IV of chapter 31 of title 40, United States Code (commonly referred to as the Davis Bacon Act). With respect to the labor standards specified in this section, the Secretary of Labor shall have the authority and functions set forth in Reorganization Plan Numbered 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267; 5 U.S.C.) B. Both the Davis Bacon and Nevada Prevailing Wage laws apply to this Contract. In all instances the Contractor shall pay the higher of the two wage rates. The more restrictive of the two shall govern and in those instances where Nevada Prevailing Wage law applies it is noted herein. In the event that there is no classification under Davis Bacon, the State of Nevada classification cannot be used and the Contractor must pursue the Davis Bacon Conformance/Additional Classification Request Process. The Contractor and the Owner shall make every effort to clarify necessary classifications prior to the bid opening. A new classification even if undisputed is not valid unless the Department of Labor has approved it. 1. Minimum Wages a. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally
C.
00 73 00 - 3
and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in Sec. 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. b. The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: i. ii. The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and
iii. The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. c. If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for
00 73 00 - 4 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Special Conditions
fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. d. In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advice the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. The Owner shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to DavisBacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract.
e.
f.
g.
2.
Withholding a.
00 73 00 - 5
b.
In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the Owner may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the DavisBacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the Owner. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information must be submitted on Form WH-347. Form WH347 is available at the Wage and Hour Division Website: http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm
3.
Payrolls and Basic Records a.
b.
00 73 00 - 6
c.
The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the Owner, for transmission to the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor, for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the Owner. Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a `Statement of Compliance,' signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: i. That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3;
d.
ii.
iii. That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. iv. Contractors are also required to submit a Non-Performance Payroll Report for Public Works Projects as required by Chapter 338 of the Nevada Revised Statutes and the Nevada Administrative Code.
e.
The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the Statement of Compliance required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Owner or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to
f.
g.
make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. 4. Apprentices and Trainees a. Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize
b.
00 73 00 - 8
apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. c. Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended and 29 CFR part 30. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Owner may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5.
d.
5.
Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements a.
6.
Subcontracts a.
00 73 00 - 9
7.
Contract Termination: Debarment a. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.
8.
Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements a.
9.
Disputes Concerning Labor Standards a.
10.
Certification of Eligibility a.
b.
c.
1.08
CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT A. The Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Sec. 5.5(a) or 4.6 of part 4 of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. 1. Overtime Requirements a. 2. The overtime requirements of Nevada Revised Statutes Section 338.020 apply to this Contract. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the
Violation; Liability For Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages a.
00 73 00 - 10
District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. 3. Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages a. The (write in the name of the Federal agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. The penalties set forth in Nevada Revised Statutes Section 338.060 shall apply to this Contract. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section.
b. 4.
Subcontracts a.
1.09
COLLECTION AND PAYMENT OF SALES TAX A. Any Bidder that sells tangible personal property to any commercial business in the State of Nevada is required to possess a Nevada Sales Tax Permit and shall collect and pay the taxes as defined in NRS Chapters 372 and 374. Permit information can be obtained by contacting the Nevada State Department of Taxation at (702) 486-2300. Each contractor, subcontractor and other person who provides labor, equipment, materials, supplies or services for the pubic work are to comply with the requirements of all applicable state and local laws, including, without limitation, any applicable licensing requirements and requirements for the payment of sales and use taxes on equipment, materials and supplies provided for public work defined in NRS Chapters 372 and 374.
B.
1.10
DUST PERMIT AND DUST ABATEMENT A. The Contractor shall provide the dust control permit.
00 73 00 - 11
B.
The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and means required and shall carry out effective measures wherever and as often as necessary to prevent its operations from causing visible dust emissions from leaving the work areas. These measures shall include, but are not limited to, providing additional watering equipment, reducing vehicle speed on haul roads, restricting traffic on haul roads, and covering haul vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from any dust originating from operations. The dust abatement measures shall be continued for the duration of the contract. The Contractor shall hose down any vehicle or equipment leaving the project area with water prior to entering the public right of way if the vehicles appear to be transporting excessive amounts of dust. When any material or debris is tracked out from the project area, the Contractor shall clean all paved public roads near the site entrances as often as required to prevent spreading of dust by vehicles.
C.
1.11
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PERMIT (SPPP) A. The Contractor (permit) shall obtain the storm water permit required by the Federal Law under the provisions of the Clean Water Act, as amended, (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq; the Act) for construction activities that disturb one (1) or more acres. Federal law prohibits discharges of pollutants in storm water from construction activities without a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit, Operator(s) of construction sites where one (1) or more acres are disturbed must submit an Notice of Intent (NOI) to obtain coverage under an NPDES Storm Water Construction General Permit. Any Questions should be directed to the Nevada Division of Environmental Protection (NDEP) Bureau of Water Pollution Control, 333 West Nye Lane, Carson City, Nevada 89710, telephone 775687-4670.
1.12
DESERT TORTOISE A. B. C. The Contractor shall pay for all fees required in conjunction with the Desert Tortoise. Should the Contractor encounter a Desert Tortoise or tortoise burrow, the Contractor shall stop Work and contact the Architect/Engineer. The Owner will request the proper authorized personnel to remove the tortoise. Removal of tortoises from the site, other than by U.S. Department of Wildlife authorized personnel, can be constituted as a take action.
1.13
OFFSITE IMPROVEMENT A. Final payment for offsite improvements shall be made upon approval by the department or authority having jurisdiction over the offsite improvements.
1.14
UTILITY COMPANIES A. If proper execution of any part of the Contractors Work depends on the requirements shown on utility companies plans or Work performed by the utility companies (gas, electric, telephone, etc.) the Contractor shall, prior to the bid date, coordinate the extent of his Work with the utility companies and prepare his bid accordingly. The Contractor, prior to the bid
00 73 00 - 12
date, shall promptly report to the Architect, any apparent discrepancies or defects and such other information and data that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to report shall constitute an acceptance of the utility companys plans or Work as fit and proper to receive his Work. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling the Work of the utility companies. 1.15 PEST CONTROL A. Upon completion of the building Work and prior to Owners beneficial occupancy, the Contractor shall engage and pay for the services of a licensed professional exterminator to spray all areas of the building with pesticide. Type of pesticide must have prior approval by the Owner. Contractor shall submit technical data, on proposed pesticide and application procedures. Upon completion of exterminators work, the Contractor shall submit a written certification stating that the building has been properly sprayed; what type of pesticide was used; name, address and phone number of professional exterminator used; and that the building has been rid of insects and other pests.
1.16
IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. All manufacturers and/or installers identification labels must be approved by the Architect and or Commissioning authority for size, color and location.
1.17
SYSTEMS INSPECTIONS A. Prior to the start of construction activities, Contractor, in the presence of the Owner/Architect designated representative, shall test existing systems to verify proper operation. Any system found to be nonoperational during the initial inspection shall be returned to service by the Owner before the Contractor begins work. Any system damaged during construction shall be returned to service by the Contractor. Contractor shall test systems monthly during the course of the Work to ensure continuing operation. Initial and monthly reports shall be submitted to the Architect. Systems include, but are not limited to, low voltage systems, electrical power and outlets, lighting fixtures, water service, existing plumbing fixtures, and HVAC existing finished areas.
1.18
FIRE WATCH A. A Fire Watch must be initiated when any part of the fire alarm system is disabled. A Fire Watch must be maintained when facility is occupied. Contractor must employ one qualified people, whose sole responsibility is to patrol the premises in search of fire or signs of fire. The people maintaining fire watch must have in their possession a phone or twoway radio to communicate with the local authorities. Qualification of Fire Watch Personnel are subject to review and approval of the fire authority.
00 73 00 - 13
1.19
FIRE DEPARTMENT NOTIFICATION A. B. If during construction the Fire Alarm and/or Sprinkler system on existing building is out of service the local fire department(s) MUST be informed. Upon completion of the work and final sign off from the State Fire Marshal, the local fire department will need to be contacted to inform them the system is functioning and reporting.
1.20
RED TAG PERMIT SYSTEM A. During construction in an existing building, if at any time the Fire Sprinkler system is placed out of service, the Contractor shall ensure that the FM Global Red Tag Permit notification process is followed in addition to all other request notifications. Instructions for the FM Global process to be followed can be found posted adjacent to the fire sprinkler riser.
1.21
EPA RENOVATION RULES A. Per EPA Renovation, Repair and Painting Program Rule 40 CRF Part 745, effective April 22, 2010, Contractor shall use one of the properly licensed and EPA certified lead abatement contractors listed below to perform lead paint removal, including welding operations. A&B Environmental American Technologies, Inc. Central Environmental, Inc. LVI Environmental of NV Walker Specialty Construction Mike Slough Aaron Murray Dave Fujimoto Bob Springs Brett Unbedacht 795-2681 568-0800 362-5470 220-4848 243-6052
END OF DOCUMENT
00 73 00 - 14
DOCUMENT 00 73 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1.01 DESCRIPTION AND LOCATION OF WORK A. The property upon which the Work is to be performed is located at: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 1931 Stella Lake Drive Las Vegas, Nevada 89106 Phone: 702-367-4348 Fax: 702-632-8513 Contact: Janet Blumen B. Description of Work: 1. The scope of work includes: addition of 1,424 square feet of new first floor addition to the existing building and addition of 7,033 square feet of new second floor to existing building, including but not limited to Site work, structure, building envelope, HVAC, electrical systems. In addition modernization of the Break area and addition of tubular skylights in some rooms as indicated in the contract documents. This project is funded by U. S. Department of Commerce Economic Development Administration (EDA) and therefore provision of EDA apply to the project.
2.
1.02
TIME FOR PERFORMANCE AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES A. B. C. D. All Work shall be completed in 360 calendar days from the date of the Notice to Proceed. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are the essence of the Contract. Contractor shall obtain permit from the Building Department and submit a copy of executed permit. Within five (5) working days of issuance of Notice of Award, the successful bidder shall: 1. 2. 3. Provide Performance and Payment Bonds. Provide copy of current Certificate of Workers Compensation Insurance coverage. Provide ($1,000,000.00) one million dollars comprehensive general and automobile liability and $5,000,000.00 excess liability insurance certificate(s) naming the Owner as additional insured. Project Name shall be indicated on Insurance Certificate(s). Provide copy of executed Inspection Permit. Provide Project Specific Installation Floater Coverage for the Contract amount.
4. 5. E.
The Owner shall issue or authorize to be issued a Notice to Proceed. Work shall commence within seven (7) days after such Notice, and Time of Performance shall be calculated from date of issuance of such Notice if no specific date is included therein. Any extension or diminishing of the Time for Performance shall be by Change Order. Any time limit established by Change Order shall become the essence of the Contract.
F.
00 73 00 - 1
G.
In the event the Contractor fails to complete the Work within the specified or adjusted Time for Performance, the Contractor does hereby agree to (1) pay the Owner $2,000 per day as liquidated damages for each calendar day that the Contract for the Work extends beyond the Time for Performance, and (2) pay for costs the Owner may incur as a result of additional storage and handling of equipment nondeliverable because the Contractor failed to substantially complete the Work as specified. In the event the Contractor fails to complete or correct the Work listed on the comprehensive list of deficiencies within the specified or adjusted Time for Performance, the Contractor does hereby agree to (1) pay the Owner $250 as liquidated damages for each calendar day that the completion or correction of the Work extends beyond the 30 days for performance allowed from the date of Substantial Completion and (2) pay for any additional architectural and/or legal fees incurred by the Owner as a result of the delay. Liquidated damages may also be assessed at $1,000 per day for Contractors failure to provide Owner all required submittals per Contract Documents within the specified time periods, which is 45 days after the Pre-Construction conference.
H.
I.
1.03
COORDINATION REQUIREMENTS A. B. Contractor shall coordinate their activities with Owner and will arrange acceptable working hours for the work, which does not conflict with the normal operation of the facility. Contractor shall protect all adjacent areas from damage during this work. All debris from this contract shall be removed, hauled away, and disposed of in a legal fashion. Contractors shall not use the owners trash dumpsters. Daily cleanup is required. The Contractor shall execute an Excavation Clearance Notice when and where applicable.
C. 1.04
CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITY FOR HIS PERSONNEL WHILE ON SITE A. B. C. Contractor shall identify his personnel with an I.D. badge and/or shirt indicating the Contractors name and the name of the employee. No Smoking Facility: Facility is a NonSmoking area. All cigarette smoking will have to take place off of the facility premises. Restroom and elevators: The Contractors forces shall not have access to the sites existing restroom facilities and elevators for their use. Provide sanitary facilities per Section 01 50 00. Contractor is responsible for workers safety and security of his tools, materials, and equipment while on campus. Contractor shall maintain a safe work environment for worker(s), existing building occupants and public. Contractor shall supply and maintain his own storage unit for his tools, materials and equipment. Contractor shall ensure the energy conservation procedures are met. All doors are to be closed while air conditioning units are in operation, turning lights and equipment off for the weekends when nobody is working.
D.
E. F.
00 73 00 - 2
G.
Contractor is subject to videotaping by Owners security systems any time they are performing work on the property.
1.05
SPECIFICATION LANGUAGE A. These specifications are written in imperative and streamlined form. This imperative language is directed to the Contractor, unless specifically noted otherwise. The words shall be shall be included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phases.
1.06
NOT IN CONTRACT A. Certain items of equipment listed or shown on the drawings are not to be included in the Contract and are marked not in contract, NIC. Such items shall be furnished by the Owner and installed under a separate contract or arrangement. Items supplied under this arrangement shall have proper required roughin of utility services made as part of this Contract and of sizes and locations for future installation of items marked NIC. Should a condition of the Contract require that the items marked SUPPLIED BY OWNER be properly and completely installed, the Contractor shall connect or install the items the same as if the items were to be furnished and installed by him under the Contract. EDA REQUIREMENTS 1. 2. 3. This project is funded by U. S. Department of Commerce Economic Development Administration (EDA) and therefore provisions of EDA apply to this project. Contractor is review and confirm with all the requirements of EDA. Contractor is to meet the EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Project on this project, refer to Document 00 73 00.4 EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects. Contractor is to submit Certification regarding lobbying in accordance with EDA requirements, refer to Documents 00 73 00.5 Certification Regarding Lobbying. Contractor is to meet the Requirements of Affirmative Action (EEO) for this Construction Project, refer to Documents 00 73 00.6 Requirements for Affirmative Action (EEO) for certification and 00 73 00.7 Goals for EEO Document Index of Counties for the target for Clark County, Nevada. Contractor is to provide and install a construction site sign in accordance with EDA Site Sign Guidelines, refer to Document 00 73 00.8 EDA Project Sign. Contractor is pay higher of the Davis Bacon Wages or Clark County Prevailing Wage Rates for this project. Refer to subsection 1.08 and Documents 00 73 43 Prevailing Wage Rates.
B.
1.07
4. 5.
6. 7.
00 73 00 - 3
1.08
DAVIS BACON WAGES AND NEVADA REVISED STATUTES CHAPTER 338 A. Section 1606 of the Recovery Act provides the following: Notwithstanding any other provision of law and in a manner consistent with other provisions in the Recovery Act, all laborers and mechanics employed by contractors and subcontractors on projects funded directly by or assisted in whole or in part by and through the Federal Government pursuant to this Act shall be paid wages at rates not less than those prevailing on projects of a character similar in the locality as determined by the Secretary of Labor in accordance with subchapter IV of chapter 31 of title 40, United States Code (commonly referred to as the Davis Bacon Act). With respect to the labor standards specified in this section, the Secretary of Labor shall have the authority and functions set forth in Reorganization Plan Numbered 14 of 1950 (64 Stat. 1267; 5 U.S.C.) B. Both the Davis Bacon and Nevada Prevailing Wage laws apply to this Contract. In all instances the Contractor shall pay the higher of the two wage rates. The more restrictive of the two shall govern and in those instances where Nevada Prevailing Wage law applies it is noted herein. In the event that there is no classification under Davis Bacon, the State of Nevada classification cannot be used and the Contractor must pursue the Davis Bacon Conformance/Additional Classification Request Process. The Contractor and the Owner shall make every effort to clarify necessary classifications prior to the bid opening. A new classification even if undisputed is not valid unless the Department of Labor has approved it. 1. Minimum Wages a. All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act (29 CFR part 3)), the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship which may be alleged to exist between the contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section; also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and
C.
00 73 00 - 4
fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in Sec. 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein: Provided, that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates conformed under paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section) and the Davis-Bacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. b. The contracting officer shall require that any class of laborers or mechanics, including helpers, which is not listed in the wage determination and which is to be employed under the contract shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. The contracting officer shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: i. ii. The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; and The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and
iii. The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. c. If the contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and the contracting officer agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by the contracting officer to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, DC 20210. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will approve, modify, or disapprove every additional classification action within 30 days of receipt and so advise the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary. In the event the contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and the contracting officer do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), the contracting officer shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of the contracting officer, to the Administrator for determination. The Administrator, or an authorized representative, will issue a determination within 30 days of receipt and so advice the contracting officer or will notify the contracting officer within the 30-day period that additional time is necessary.
d.
e.
The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) (B) or (C) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof. If the contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, Provided, That the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. The Owner shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the contractor under this contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to DavisBacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor, so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees, and helpers, employed by the contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee, or helper, employed or working on the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937 or under the Housing Act of 1949 in the construction or development of the project), all or part of the wages required by the contract, the Owner may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the contractor during the course of the work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the work (or under the United States Housing Act of 1937, or under the Housing Act of 1949, in the construction or development of the project). Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of
f.
g.
2.
Withholding a.
b.
3.
Payrolls and Basic Records a.
00 73 00 - 6
contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the DavisBacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, that the plan or program is financially responsible, and that the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and records which show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. b. The contractor shall submit weekly for each week in which any contract work is performed a copy of all payrolls to the Owner. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 CFR 5.5(a)(3)(i), except that full social security numbers and home addresses shall not be included on weekly transmittals. Instead the payrolls shall only need to include an individually identifying number for each employee (e.g., the last four digits of the employee's social security number). The required weekly payroll information must be submitted on Form WH-347. Form WH347 is available at the Wage and Hour Division Website: http://www.dol.gov/whd/forms/wh347instr.htm c. The prime contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors. Contractors and subcontractors shall maintain the full social security number and current address of each covered worker, and shall provide them upon request to the Owner, for transmission to the Wage and Hour Division of the Department of Labor, for purposes of an investigation or audit of compliance with prevailing wage requirements. It is not a violation of this section for a prime contractor to require a subcontractor to provide addresses and social security numbers to the prime contractor for its own records, without weekly submission to the Owner. Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a `Statement of Compliance,' signed by the contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the contract and shall certify the following: i. That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be provided under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(ii) of Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, the appropriate information is being maintained under Sec. 5.5 (a)(3)(i) of
d.
00 73 00 - 7
Regulations, 29 CFR part 5, and that such information is correct and complete; ii. That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in Regulations, 29 CFR part 3;
iii. That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the contract. iv. Contractors are also required to submit a Non-Performance Payroll Report for Public Works Projects as required by Chapter 338 of the Nevada Revised Statutes and the Nevada Administrative Code.
e.
The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the Statement of Compliance required by paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section. The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of title 18 and section 231 of title 31 of the United States Code. The contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of the Owner or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them available, the Federal agency may, after written notice to the contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 CFR 5.12. Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Office of
f.
g.
4.
Apprentices and Trainees a.
Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. b. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate, who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a contractor is performing construction on a project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Office of Apprenticeship Training, Employer and Labor Services, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Office, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. Trainees. Except as provided in 29 CFR 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program which has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an
c.
00 73 00 - 9
apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. d. Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, as amended and 29 CFR part 30. The contractor shall comply with the requirements of 29 CFR part 3, which are incorporated by reference in this contract. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 CFR 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as the Owner may by appropriate instructions require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5. A breach of the contract clauses in 29 CFR 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 CFR 5.12. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 CFR parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 CFR parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and the contracting agency, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives.
5.
Compliance with Copeland Act Requirements a.
6.
Subcontracts a.
7.
Contract Termination: Debarment a.
8.
Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements a.
9.
Disputes Concerning Labor Standards a.
00 73 00 - 10
10.
Certification of Eligibility a. By entering into this contract, the contractor certifies that neither it (nor he or she) nor any person or firm who has an interest in the contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). No part of this contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 CFR 5.12(a)(1). The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001.
b.
c.
1.09
CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT A. The Agency Head shall cause or require the contracting officer to insert the following clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section in full in any contract in an amount in excess of $100,000 and subject to the overtime provisions of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act. These clauses shall be inserted in addition to the clauses required by Sec. 5.5(a) or 4.6 of part 4 of this title. As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. 1. Overtime Requirements a. 2. The overtime requirements of Nevada Revised Statutes Section 338.020 apply to this Contract. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section the contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. The (write in the name of the Federal agency or the loan or grant recipient) shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime contractor, such sums as
Violation; Liability For Unpaid Wages; Liquidated Damages a.
3.
Withholding for Unpaid Wages and Liquidated Damages a.
00 73 00 - 11
may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b)(2) of this section. b. 4. The penalties set forth in Nevada Revised Statutes Section 338.060 shall apply to this Contract. The contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (b)(1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section.
Subcontracts a.
1.10
COLLECTION AND PAYMENT OF SALES TAX A. Any Bidder that sells tangible personal property to any commercial business in the State of Nevada is required to possess a Nevada Sales Tax Permit and shall collect and pay the taxes as defined in NRS Chapters 372 and 374. Permit information can be obtained by contacting the Nevada State Department of Taxation at (702) 486-2300. Each contractor, subcontractor and other person who provides labor, equipment, materials, supplies or services for the pubic work are to comply with the requirements of all applicable state and local laws, including, without limitation, any applicable licensing requirements and requirements for the payment of sales and use taxes on equipment, materials and supplies provided for public work defined in NRS Chapters 372 and 374.
B.
1.11
DUST PERMIT AND DUST ABATEMENT A. B. The Contractor shall provide the dust control permit. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and means required and shall carry out effective measures wherever and as often as necessary to prevent its operations from causing visible dust emissions from leaving the work areas. These measures shall include, but are not limited to, providing additional watering equipment, reducing vehicle speed on haul roads, restricting traffic on haul roads, and covering haul vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from any dust originating from operations. The dust abatement measures shall be continued for the duration of the contract. The Contractor shall hose down any vehicle or equipment leaving the project area with water prior to entering the public right of way if the vehicles appear to be transporting excessive amounts of dust. When any material or debris is tracked out from the project area, the Contractor shall clean all paved public roads near the site entrances as often as required to prevent spreading of dust by vehicles.
C.
1.12
STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PERMIT (SPPP) A. The Contractor (permit) shall obtain the storm water permit required by the Federal Law under the provisions of the Clean Water Act, as amended, (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq; the
00 73 00 - 12
Act) for construction activities that disturb one (1) or more acres. Federal law prohibits discharges of pollutants in storm water from construction activities without a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit, Operator(s) of construction sites where one (1) or more acres are disturbed must submit an Notice of Intent (NOI) to obtain coverage under an NPDES Storm Water Construction General Permit. Any Questions should be directed to the Nevada Division of Environmental Protection (NDEP) Bureau of Water Pollution Control, 333 West Nye Lane, Carson City, Nevada 89710, telephone 775687-4670. 1.13 DESERT TORTOISE A. B. C. The Contractor shall pay for all fees required in conjunction with the Desert Tortoise. Should the Contractor encounter a Desert Tortoise or tortoise burrow, the Contractor shall stop Work and contact the Architect/Engineer. The Owner will request the proper authorized personnel to remove the tortoise. Removal of tortoises from the site, other than by U.S. Department of Wildlife authorized personnel, can be constituted as a take action.
1.14
OFFSITE IMPROVEMENT A. Final payment for offsite improvements shall be made upon approval by the department or authority having jurisdiction over the offsite improvements.
1.15
UTILITY COMPANIES A. If proper execution of any part of the Contractors Work depends on the requirements shown on utility companies plans or Work performed by the utility companies (gas, electric, telephone, etc.) the Contractor shall, prior to the bid date, coordinate the extent of his Work with the utility companies and prepare his bid accordingly. The Contractor, prior to the bid date, shall promptly report to the Architect, any apparent discrepancies or defects and such other information and data that render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor to report shall constitute an acceptance of the utility companys plans or Work as fit and proper to receive his Work. During the course of construction, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and scheduling the Work of the utility companies.
1.16
PEST CONTROL A. Upon completion of the building Work and prior to Owners beneficial occupancy, the Contractor shall engage and pay for the services of a licensed professional exterminator to spray all areas of the building with pesticide. Type of pesticide must have prior approval by the Owner. Contractor shall submit technical data, on proposed pesticide and application procedures. Upon completion of exterminators work, the Contractor shall submit a written certification stating that the building has been properly sprayed; what type of pesticide was used; name, address and phone number of professional exterminator used; and that the building has been rid of insects and other pests.
00 73 00 - 13
1.17
IDENTIFICATION LABELS A. All manufacturers and/or installers identification labels must be approved by the Architect and or Commissioning authority for size, color and location.
1.18
SYSTEMS INSPECTIONS A. Prior to the start of construction activities, Contractor, in the presence of the Owner/Architect designated representative, shall test existing systems to verify proper operation. Any system found to be nonoperational during the initial inspection shall be returned to service by the Owner before the Contractor begins work. Any system damaged during construction shall be returned to service by the Contractor. Contractor shall test systems monthly during the course of the Work to ensure continuing operation. Initial and monthly reports shall be submitted to the Architect. Systems include, but are not limited to, low voltage systems, electrical power and outlets, lighting fixtures, water service, existing plumbing fixtures, and HVAC existing finished areas.
1.19
FIRE WATCH A. A Fire Watch must be initiated when any part of the fire alarm system is disabled. A Fire Watch must be maintained when facility is occupied. Contractor must employ one qualified people, whose sole responsibility is to patrol the premises in search of fire or signs of fire. The people maintaining fire watch must have in their possession a phone or twoway radio to communicate with the local authorities. Qualification of Fire Watch Personnel are subject to review and approval of the fire authority.
1.20
FIRE DEPARTMENT NOTIFICATION A. B. If during construction the Fire Alarm and/or Sprinkler system on existing building is out of service the local fire department(s) MUST be informed. Upon completion of the work and final sign off from the State Fire Marshal, the local fire department will need to be contacted to inform them the system is functioning and reporting.
1.21
RED TAG PERMIT SYSTEM A. During construction in an existing building, if at any time the Fire Sprinkler system is placed out of service, the Contractor shall ensure that the FM Global Red Tag Permit notification process is followed in addition to all other request notifications. Instructions for the FM Global process to be followed can be found posted adjacent to the fire sprinkler riser.
1.22
EPA RENOVATION RULES
00 73 00 - 14
A.
Per EPA Renovation, Repair and Painting Program Rule 40 CRF Part 745, effective April 22, 2010, Contractor shall use one of the properly licensed and EPA certified lead abatement contractors listed below to perform lead paint removal, including welding operations. A&B Environmental American Technologies, Inc. Central Environmental, Inc. LVI Environmental of NV Walker Specialty Construction Mike Slough Aaron Murray Dave Fujimoto Bob Springs Brett Unbedacht 795-2681 568-0800 362-5470 220-4848 243-6052
END OF DOCUMENT
00 73 00 - 15
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.1 ADDITIONAL NOTES PART 1. SAFETY A. B. Contractor to maintain adequate barriers to ensure the safety of occupants, and the public. Contractor must maintain an adequate barrier to isolate the entire work area from occupants and public. Barriers must be a minimum of 6 high, self-supporting panels with wire mesh fence fabric. Control points into and out of the area must have gates that can be secured during non-working hours. The contractor must maintain the fences at all times. Fence locations are to be worked out with the Owner prior to the installation of the fence and before any work may start at the site. Areas that are open to the interior of the building should have barriers constructed of Plywood framing and should keep out dust and debris from entering the work space. The Contractor will verify that all of the systems in the project are working at the beginning of the project. Contractor is responsible for locating all underground lines before excavation and is responsible for calling CALL USA CALL BEFORE YOU DIG at 1-800-227-2600 for locating all commercial utilities both Onsite and Offsite. END OF DOCUMENT
C. D. PART 2.
EXCAVATION A.
00 73 00.1 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Additional Notes
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.2 DAILY SIGN IN SHEET Project Name: (FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition Date:
Daily Sign-In Sheet

Print Name Signature Trade/Craft Job Title Phone # Time In
Company Name
Time Out
END OF DOCUMENT
00 73 00.2 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Daily Sign In Sheet
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.3 DAILY CONSTRUCTION REPORT

(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas Nevada 89106 Date: _______________________________ Weather: ______________________________ Report Number: _______________________ 24 hr Precipitation: ______________________ Report Number: _______________________ High Temp: _________ Low Temp: ________ Field Office Project Mgr. Superintendent Clerical Crafts Boilermakers Carpenters Cement Masons Roofer Iron Workers Laborers Millwrights Operation Engineers Pipe Fitters Plumbers Sheet Metal Tile Setter Flooring DDC Control Fire Alarm Painters
Subcontractors Supervisors Skilled Labor
Total
Total
Total PROJECT MANPOWER TOTAL _______________
Summary of Work and Remarks
Equipment Information
00 73 00.3 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Daily Construction Report
If the answer to any of the following questions is yes please explain on reverse side. 1) Agreements or decisions? 6) Extra work authorized by Contractor? 2) Accidents, injuries, damages? 7) Any work prevented or delayed? 3) Visitors? 8) Job Inspections or tests? 4) Extra work by Contractor? 9) Shop Drawings prevented or delayed work? 5) Work By Owner? Signature: ______________________________Title: _______________________________________ Printed Name: ___________________________ Reviewed: ____________________________________ END OF DOCUMENT
00 73 00.3 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Daily Construction Report
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.4
Back
U. S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION
EDA CONTRACTING PROVISIONS FOR CONSTRUCTION PROJECTS
These EDA Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects (EDA Contracting Provisions) are intended for use by recipients receiving federal assistance from the U. S. Department of Commerce - Economic Development Administration (EDA). They contain provisions specific to EDA and other federal provisions not normally found in non-federal contract documents. The requirements contained herein must be incorporated into all construction contracts and subcontracts funded wholly or in part with federal assistance from EDA.
Economic Development Administration Contracting Provisions for Construction Projects
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. 24. 25. 26. 27. 28. Definitions Applicability Federally Required Contract Provisions Required Provisions Deemed Inserted Inspection by EDA Representatives Examination and Retention of Contractors Records Construction Schedule and Periodic Estimates Contractors Title to Material Inspection and Testing of Materials OR EQUAL" Clause Patent Fees and Royalties Claims for Extra Costs Contractors and Subcontractors Insurance Contract Security Bonds Labor Standards - Davis-Bacon and Related Acts Labor Standards - Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act Equal Employment Opportunity Contracting with Small, Minority and Womens Businesses Health, Safety and Accident Prevention Conflict of Interest and Other Prohibited Interests New Restrictions on Lobbying Historical and Archaeological Data Preservation Clean Air and Water Use of Lead-Based Paints on Residential Structures Energy Efficiency Environmental Requirements Debarment, Suspension, Ineligibility and Voluntary Exclusions EDA Project Sign
1.
DEFINITIONS
Agreement The written instrument that is evidence of the agreement between the Owner and the Contractor overseeing the Work. Architect/Engineer - The person or other entity engaged by the Recipient to perform architectural, engineering, design, and other services related to the work as provided for in the contract. Contract The entire and integrated written agreement between the Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, or agreements, whether written or oral. Contract Documents Those items so designated in the Agreement. Only printed or hard copies of the items listed in the Agreement are Contract Documents. Contractor The individual or entity with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. Drawings or Plans That part of the Contract Documents prepared or approved by the Architect/Engineer that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work to be performed by the Contractor. EDA - The United States of America acting through the Economic Development Administration of the U.S. Department of Commerce or any other person designated to act on its behalf. EDA has agreed to provide financial assistance to the Owner, which includes assistance in financing the Work to be performed under this Contract. Notwithstanding EDAs role, nothing in this Contract shall be construed to create any contractual relationship between the Contractor and EDA. Owner The individual or entity with whom the Contractor has entered into the Agreement and for whom the Work is to be performed. Project The total construction of which the Work to be performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole, or a part. Recipient - An entity receiving Federal financial assistance from EDA, including any EDAapproved successor to the entity. Specifications That part of the Contract Documents consisting of written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable thereto. Subcontractor An individual or entity having direct contract with the Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the Site.
Work The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary to produce such construction and furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials and equipment into such construction, all as required by the Contract Documents. 2. APPLICABILITY
The Project to which the construction work covered by this Contract pertains is being assisted by the United States of America through federal assistance provided by the U.S. Department of Commerce - Economic Development Administration (EDA). Neither EDA, nor any of its departments, entities, or employees is a party to this Contract. The following EDA Contracting Provisions are included in this Contract and all subcontracts or related instruments pursuant to the provisions applicable to such federal assistance from EDA. 3. FEDERALLY REQUIRED CONTRACT PROVISIONS
(a) Administrative, contractual, or legal remedies in instances where contractors violate or breach contract terms, and provide for such sanctions and penalties as may be appropriate (Contracts more than the simplified acquisition threshold - currently fixed at $100,000. See 41 U.S.C. 403(11)). (b) Termination for cause and for convenience by the Recipient including the manner by which it will be effected and the basis for settlement (all contracts in excess of $10,000). (c) Compliance with Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, Equal Employment Opportunity, as amended by Executive Order 11375 of October 13, 1967 and as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 41 C.F.R. chapter 60 (applicable to all construction contracts awarded in excess of $10,000 by recipients of federal assistance and their contractors or subrecipients). (d) Compliance with the Copeland "Anti-Kickback" Act (18 U.S.C. 874) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 29 C.F.R. part 3 (all contracts and subgrants for construction or repair). (e) Compliance with the Davis-Bacon Act (40 U.S.C. 3145) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 29 C.F.R. part 5 (construction contracts in excess of $2,000 awarded by Recipients and subrecipients). (f) Compliance with sections 103 and 107 of the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 327-330) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations at 29 C.F.R. part 5. (construction contracts awarded by Recipients and subrecipients in excess of $2,000, and in excess of $2,500 for other contracts which involve the employment of mechanics or laborers) (g) EDA requirements and regulations pertaining to reporting.
(h) EDA requirements and regulations pertaining to patent rights with respect to any discovery or invention which arises or is developed in the course of or under such contract. (i) EDA requirements and regulations pertaining to copyrights and rights in data. (j) Compliance with all applicable standards, orders, or requirements issued under section 306 of the Clear Air Act (42 U.S.C. 7606), section 508 of the Clean Water Act (33 U.S.C. 1368), Executive Order 11738, Providing for Administration of the Clean Air Act and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act With Respect to Federal Contracts, Grants, or Loans, and Environmental Protection Agency regulations at 48 C.F.R. part 15 (applicable to contracts, subcontracts, and subgrants of amounts in excess of $ 100,000). 4. REQUIRED PROVISIONS DEEMED INSERTED
Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in this contract shall be deemed to be inserted herein and the contract shall be read and enforced as though it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise any such provision is not inserted, or is not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party the contract shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion of correction. 5. INSPECTION BY EDA REPRESENTATIVES
The authorized representatives and agents of EDA shall be permitted to inspect all work, materials, payrolls, personnel records, invoices of materials, and other relevant data and records. 6. EXAMINATION AND RETENTION OF CONTRACTORS RECORDS
(a) The Owner, EDA, or the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their duly authorized representatives shall, generally until three years after final payment under this contract, have access to and the right to examine any of the Contractors directly pertinent books, documents, papers, or other records involving transactions related to this contract for the purpose of making audit, examination, excerpts, and transcriptions. (b) The Contractor agrees to include in first-tier subcontracts under this contract a clause substantially the same as paragraph (a) above. Subcontract, as used in this clause, excludes purchase orders that do not exceed $10,000. (c) The periods of access and examination in paragraphs (a) and (b) above for records relating to (1) appeals under the disputes clause of this contract, (2) litigation or settlement of claims arising from the performance of this contract, or (3) costs and expenses of this contract to which the Owner, EDA, or Comptroller General or any of their duly authorized representatives has taken exception shall continue until disposition of such appeals, litigation, claims, or exceptions.
7.
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND PERIODIC ESTIMATES
Immediately after execution and delivery of the contract, and before the first partial payment is made, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner an estimated construction progress schedule in a form satisfactory to the Owner, showing the proposed dates of commencement and completion of each of the various subdivisions of work required under the Contract Documents and the anticipated amount of each monthly payment that will become due to the Contractor in accordance with the progress schedule. The Contractor also shall furnish the Owner (a) a detailed estimate giving a complete breakdown of the contract price and (b) periodic itemized estimates of work done for the purpose of making partial payments thereon. The costs employed in making up any of these schedules will be used only to determine the basis of partial payments and will not be considered as fixing a basis for additions to or deductions from the contract price. 8. CONTRACTOR'S TITLE TO MATERIAL
No materials, supplies, or equipment for the work shall be purchased by the Contractor or by any subcontractor that is subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contract or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. The Contractor warrants and guarantees that he/she has good title to all work, materials, and equipment used by him/her in the Work, free and clear of all liens, claims, or encumbrances. 9. INSPECTION AND TESTING OF MATERIALS
All materials and equipment used in the completion of the Work shall be subject to adequate inspection and testing in accordance with accepted standards. The laboratory or inspection agency shall be selected by the Owner. Materials of construction, particularly those upon which the strength and durability of any structure may depend, shall be subject to inspection and testing to establish conformance with specifications and suitability for intended uses. 10. OR EQUAL" CLAUSE
Whenever a material, article, or piece of equipment is identified in the Contract Documents by reference to manufacturers or vendors names, trade names, catalogue numbers, etc., it is intended merely to establish a standard. Any material, article, or equipment of other manufacturers and vendors that will perform adequately the duties imposed by the general design will be considered equally acceptable provided the material, article, or equipment so proposed is, in the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, of equal substance and function. However, such substitution material, article, or equipment shall not be purchased or installed by the Contractor without the Architect/Engineer's written approval. 11. PATENT FEES AND ROYALTIES
(a) Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device that is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in
the performance of the Work and if, to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by the Owner in the Contract Documents. (b) To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and the Architect/Engineer, and the officers, directors, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents. 12. CLAIMS FOR EXTRA COSTS
No claims for extra work or cost shall be allowed unless the same was done in pursuance of a written order from the Architect/Engineer approved by the Owner. 13. CONTRACTORS AND SUBCONTRACTORS INSURANCE
(a) The Contractor shall not commence work under this Contract until the Contractor has obtained all insurance reasonably required by the Owner, nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on his/her subcontract until the insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. (b) Types of insurance normally required are: (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) Workmen's Compensation Contractor's Public Liability and Property Damage Contractor's Vehicle Liability Subcontractors Public Liability, Property Damage and Vehicle Liability Builder's Risk (Fire and Extended Coverage)
(c) Scope of Insurance and Special Hazards: The insurance obtained, which is described above, shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and his/her subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims that may arise from operations under this contract, whether such operations be by the insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by him/her and also against any of the special hazards that may be encountered in the performance of this Contract. (d) Proof of Carriage of Insurance: The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with certificates showing the type, amount, class of operations covered, effective dates, and dates of expiration of applicable insurance policies.
14.
CONTRACT SECURITY BONDS
(a) If the amount of this Contract exceeds $100,000, the Contractor shall furnish a performance bond in an amount at least equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price as security for the faithful performance of this Contract and also a payment bond in an amount equal to one hundred percent (100%) of the Contract price or in a penal sum not less than that prescribed by State, Territorial, or local law, as security for the payment of all persons performing labor on the Work under this Contract and furnishing materials in connection with this Contract. The performance bond and the payment bond may be in one or in separate instruments in accordance with local law. Before final acceptance, each bond must be approved by EDA. If the amount of this Contract does not exceed $100,000, the Owner shall specify the amount of the payment and performance bonds. (b) All bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents except as otherwise provided in applicable laws or regulations, and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies as published in Treasury Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of the agents authority to act. Surety companies executing the bonds must also be authorized to transact business in the state where the Work is located. 15. LABOR STANDARDS - DAVIS-BACON AND RELATED ACTS (as required by section 601 of PWEDA)
(a) Minimum Wages (1) All laborers and mechanics employed or working upon the site of the Work in the construction or development of the Project will be paid unconditionally and not less often than once a week, and without subsequent deduction or rebate on any account (except such payroll deductions as are permitted by regulations issued by the Secretary of Labor under the Copeland Act at 29 C.F.R. part 3, the full amount of wages and bona fide fringe benefits (or cash equivalents thereof) due at the time of payment computed at rates not less than those contained in the wage determination of the Secretary of Labor, which is attached hereto and made a part hereof, regardless of any contractual relationship that may be alleged to exist between the Contractor and such laborers and mechanics. Contributions made or costs reasonably anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits under Section 1(b)(2) of the Davis-Bacon Act on behalf of laborers or mechanics are considered wages paid to such laborers or mechanics, subject to the provisions of 29 C.F.R. 5.5(a)(1)(iv); also, regular contributions made or costs incurred for more than a weekly period (but not less often than quarterly) under plans, funds, or programs, which cover the particular weekly period, are deemed to be constructively made or incurred during such weekly period. Such laborers and mechanics shall be paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed, without regard to skill, except as provided in 29 C.F.R. 5.5(a)(4). Laborers or mechanics performing work in more than one classification may be compensated at the
rate specified for each classification for the time actually worked therein, provided that the employer's payroll records accurately set forth the time spent in each classification in which work is performed. The wage determination (including any additional classification and wage rates determined under 29 C.F.R. 5.5(a)(1)(ii) and the DavisBacon poster (WH-1321) shall be posted at all times by the contractor and its subcontractors at the site of the work in a prominent and accessible place where it can be easily seen by the workers. (2) (i) Any class of laborers or mechanics to be employed under the Contract, but not listed in the wage determination, shall be classified in conformance with the wage determination. EDA shall approve an additional classification and wage rate and fringe benefits therefore only when the following criteria have been met: (A) The work to be performed by the classification requested is not performed by a classification in the wage determination; (B) The classification is utilized in the area by the construction industry; and (C) The proposed wage rate, including any bona fide fringe benefits, bears a reasonable relationship to the wage rates contained in the wage determination. (ii) If the Contractor and the laborers and mechanics to be employed in the classification (if known), or their representatives, and EDA or its designee agree on the classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits where appropriate), a report of the action taken shall be sent by EDA or its designee to the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division, Employment Standards Administration, U.S. Department of Labor, Washington, D.C. 20210. (iii) In the event the Contractor, the laborers or mechanics to be employed in the classification or their representatives, and EDA or its designee do not agree on the proposed classification and wage rate (including the amount designated for fringe benefits, where appropriate), EDA or its designee shall refer the questions, including the views of all interested parties and the recommendation of EDA or its designee, to the Administrator for determination. (iv) The wage rate (including fringe benefits where appropriate) determined pursuant to paragraphs (a)(2)(ii) or (iii) of this section, shall be paid to all workers performing work in the classification under this contract from the first day on which work is performed in the classification. (3) Whenever the minimum wage rate prescribed in the contract for a class of laborers or mechanics includes a fringe benefit which is not expressed as an hourly rate, the Contractor shall either pay the benefit as stated in the wage determination or shall pay another bona fide fringe benefit or an hourly cash equivalent thereof.
(4) If the Contractor does not make payments to a trustee or other third person, the Contractor may consider as part of the wages of any laborer or mechanic the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing bona fide fringe benefits under a plan or program, provided, that the Secretary of Labor has found, upon the written request of the Contractor, that the applicable standards of the Davis-Bacon Act have been met. The Secretary of Labor may require the Contractor to set aside in a separate account assets for the meeting of obligations under the plan or program. (b) Withholding EDA or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld from the Contractor under this Contract or any other federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to Davis-Bacon prevailing wage requirements, which is held by the same prime contractor so much of the accrued payments or advances as may be considered necessary to pay laborers and mechanics, including apprentices, trainees and helpers, employed by the Contractor or any subcontractor the full amount of wages required by the Contract. In the event of failure to pay any laborer or mechanic, including any apprentice, trainee or helper employed or working on the site of the Work in the construction or development of the Project, all or part of the wages required by the Contract, EDA or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, sponsor, applicant, or owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds until such violations have ceased. EDA or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor, disburse such amounts withheld for and on account of the Contractor or subcontractor to the respective employees to whom they are due. The Comptroller General shall make such disbursements in the case of direct Davis-Bacon Act contracts. (c) Payrolls and basic records (1) Payrolls and basic records relating thereto shall be maintained by the Contractor during the course of the Work and preserved for a period of three years thereafter for all laborers and mechanics working at the site of the Work in the construction or development of the Project. Such records shall contain the name, address, and social security number of each such worker, his or her correct classification, hourly rates of wages paid (including rates of contributions or costs anticipated for bona fide fringe benefits or cash equivalents thereof of the types described in section 1(b) (2) (B) of the Davis-Bacon Act), daily and weekly number of hours worked, deductions made and actual wages paid. Whenever the Secretary of Labor has found under 29 C.F.R. 5.5(a)(1)(iv) that the wages of any laborer or mechanic include the amount of any costs reasonably anticipated in providing benefits under a plan or program described in section 1(b)(2)(B) of the Davis-Bacon Act, the Contractor shall maintain records which show that the commitment to provide such benefits is enforceable, the plan or program is financially responsible, and the plan or program has been communicated in writing to the laborers or mechanics affected, and provide records that show the costs anticipated or the actual cost incurred in providing such benefits. Contractors employing apprentices or trainees under approved programs shall maintain written evidence of the registration of
apprenticeship programs and certification of trainee programs, the registration of the apprentices and trainees, and the ratios and wage rates prescribed in the applicable programs. (2) (i) For each week in which Contract work is performed, the Contractor shall submit a copy of all payrolls to the Owner for transmission to EDA or its designee. The payrolls submitted shall set out accurately and completely all of the information required to be maintained under 29 C.F.R. part 5.5(a)(3)(i). This information may be submitted in any form desired. Optional Form WH-347 is available for this purpose. It may be purchased from the Superintendent of Documents (Federal Stock Number 029-005-00014-1), U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402; or downloaded from the U.S. Department of Labors website at www.dol.gov/esa/forms/whd/index.htm. The prime Contractor is responsible for the submission of copies of payrolls by all subcontractors (ii) Each payroll submitted shall be accompanied by a Statement of Compliance, signed by the Contractor or subcontractor or his or her agent who pays or supervises the payment of the persons employed under the Contract and shall certify the following: (A) That the payroll for the payroll period contains the information required to be maintained under 29 C.F.R. 5.5(a)(3)(i) and that such information is correct and complete; (B) That each laborer or mechanic (including each helper, apprentice, and trainee) employed on the Contract during the payroll period has been paid the full weekly wages earned, without rebate, either directly or indirectly, and that no deductions have been made either directly or indirectly from the full wages earned, other than permissible deductions as set forth in 29 C.F.R. part 3; (C) That each laborer or mechanic has been paid not less than the applicable wage rates and fringe benefits or cash equivalents for the classification of work performed, as specified in the applicable wage determination incorporated into the Contract. (iii) The weekly submission of a properly executed certification set forth on the reverse side of Optional Form WH-347 shall satisfy the requirement for submission of the Statement of Compliance required by paragraph 14(c)(ii) of this section. (iv) The falsification of any of the above certifications may subject the Contractor or subcontractor to civil or criminal prosecution under section 1001 of Title 18 and section 231 of Title 31 of the U.S. Code. (3) The Contractor or subcontractor shall make the records required under paragraph 14(c)(1) of this section available for inspection, copying, or transcription by authorized representatives of EDA or its designee or the Department of Labor, and shall permit such representatives to interview employees during working hours on the job. If the Contractor or subcontractor fails to submit the required records or to make them
available, EDA or its designee may, after written notice to the Contractor or Owner, take such action as may be necessary to cause the suspension of any further payment, advance, or guarantee of funds. Furthermore, failure to submit the required records upon request or to make such records available may be grounds for debarment action pursuant to 29 C.F.R. part 5.12. (d) Apprentices and Trainees. (1) Apprentices. Apprentices will be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work they performed when they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a bona fide apprenticeship program registered with the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and Training Administration, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or with a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, or if a person is employed in his or her first 90 days of probationary employment as an apprentice in such an apprenticeship program, who is not individually registered in the program, but who has been certified by the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training or a State Apprenticeship Agency (where appropriate) to be eligible for probationary employment as an apprentice. The allowable ratio of apprentices to journeymen on the job site in any craft classification shall not be greater than the ratio permitted to the Contractor as to the entire work force under the registered program. Any worker listed on a payroll at an apprentice wage rate who is not registered or otherwise employed as stated above, shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any apprentice performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. Where a Contractor is performing construction on a Project in a locality other than that in which its program is registered, the ratios and wage rates (expressed in percentages of the journeyman's hourly rate) specified in the Contractor's or subcontractor's registered program shall be observed. Every apprentice must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the registered program for the apprentice's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeymen hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Apprentices shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the apprenticeship program. If the apprenticeship program does not specify fringe benefits, apprentices must be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination for the applicable classification. If the Administrator determines that a different practice prevails for the applicable apprentice classification, fringes shall be paid in accordance with that determination. In the event the Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training, or a State Apprenticeship Agency recognized by the Bureau, withdraws approval of an apprenticeship program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize apprentices at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (2) Trainees. Except as provided in 29 C.F.R. 5.16, trainees will not be permitted to work at less than the predetermined rate for the work performed unless they are employed pursuant to and individually registered in a program that has received prior approval, evidenced by formal certification by the U.S. Department of Labor, Employment and
Training Administration. The ratio of trainees to journeymen on the job site shall not be greater than permitted under the plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration. Every trainee must be paid at not less than the rate specified in the approved program for the trainee's level of progress, expressed as a percentage of the journeyman's hourly rate specified in the applicable wage determination. Trainees shall be paid fringe benefits in accordance with the provisions of the trainee program. If the trainee program does not mention fringe benefits, trainees shall be paid the full amount of fringe benefits listed on the wage determination unless the Administrator of the Wage and Hour Division determines that there is an apprenticeship program associated with the corresponding journeyman wage rate on the wage determination which provides for less than full fringe benefits for apprentices. Any employee listed on the payroll at a trainee rate who is not registered and participating in a training plan approved by the Employment and Training Administration shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the classification of work actually performed. In addition, any trainee performing work on the job site in excess of the ratio permitted under the registered program shall be paid not less than the applicable wage rate on the wage determination for the work actually performed. In the event the Employment and Training Administration withdraws approval of a training program, the Contractor will no longer be permitted to utilize trainees at less than the applicable predetermined rate for the work performed until an acceptable program is approved. (3) Equal employment opportunity. The utilization of apprentices, trainees and journeymen under this part shall be in conformity with the equal employment opportunity requirements of Executive Order 11246, Equal Employment Opportunity, as amended, and 29 C.F.R. part 30. (e) Compliance with Copeland Anti-Kickback Act Requirements. The Contractor shall comply with the Copeland Anti-Kickback Act (18 U.S.C. 874 and 40 U.S.C. 276(c)) as supplemented by Department of Labor regulations (29 C.F.R. part 3, Contractors and Subcontractors on Public Buildings or Public Works Financed in Whole or in Part by Loans or Grants of the United States). The Act provides that the Contractor and any subcontractors shall be prohibited from inducing, by any means, any person employed in the construction, completion, or repair of public facilities, to give up any part of the compensation to which they are otherwise entitled. The Owner shall report all suspected or reported violations to EDA. (f) Subcontracts. The Contractor and any subcontractors will insert in any subcontracts the clauses contained in 29 C.F.R. 5.5(a)(1) through (10) and such other clauses as EDA or its designee may require, and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with all the contract clauses in 29 C.F.R. part 5.5. (g) Contract termination; debarment. The breach of the contract clauses in 29 C.F.R. part 5.5 may be grounds for termination of the contract, and for debarment as a Contractor and a subcontractor as provided in 29 C.F.R. 5.12.
(h) Compliance with Davis-Bacon and Related Act Requirements. All rulings and interpretations of the Davis-Bacon and Related Acts contained in 29 C.F.R. parts 1, 3, and 5 are herein incorporated by reference in this contract. (i) Disputes concerning labor standards. Disputes arising out of the labor standards provisions of this Contract shall not be subject to the general disputes clause of this Contract. Such disputes shall be resolved in accordance with the procedures of the Department of Labor set forth in 29 C.F.R. parts 5, 6, and 7. Disputes within the meaning of this clause include disputes between the contractor (or any of its subcontractors) and EDA or its designee, the U.S. Department of Labor, or the employees or their representatives. (j) Certification of Eligibility. (1)By entering into this Contract, the Contractor certifies that neither it nor any person or firm that has an interest in the Contractor's firm is a person or firm ineligible to be awarded Government contracts by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 C.F.R. 5.12(a)(1). (2) No part of this Contract shall be subcontracted to any person or firm ineligible for award of a Government contract by virtue of section 3(a) of the Davis-Bacon Act or 29 C.F.R. 5.12(a)(1). (3) The penalty for making false statements is prescribed in the U.S. Criminal Code, 18 U.S.C. 1001. 16. LABOR STANDARDS - CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT
As used in this paragraph, the terms laborers and mechanics include watchmen and guards. (a) Overtime requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the Contract work, which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics, shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which that person is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (b) Violation; liability for unpaid wages, liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a) of this section, the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefore shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (a) of this section, in the sum of $10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or
permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (a) of this section. (c) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. EDA or its designee shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any monies payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor under any such Contract or any other federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other federally-assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime Contractor such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (b) of this section. (d) Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section. 17. EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY
(a) The Recipient hereby agrees that it will incorporate or cause to be incorporated into any contract for construction work, or modification thereof, as defined in the regulations of the Secretary of Labor at 41 C.F.R. chapter 60, which is paid for in whole or in part with funds obtained from EDA, the following equal opportunity clause: During the performance of this contract, the Contractor agrees as follows: (1) The Contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. The Contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: Employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The Contractor will, in all solicitations or advertisements for employees placed by or on behalf of the Contractor state that all qualified applicants will receive consideration for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex, or national origin. (3) The Contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or workers representatives of the Contractor's
commitments hereunder, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The Contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965 and of the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The Contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and pursuant to rules, regulations, and orders of the Secretary of Labor and will permit access to its books, records, and accounts by the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations, and orders. (6) In the event of the Contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this Contract or with any of the said rules, regulations, or orders, this Contract may be canceled, terminated, or suspended in whole or in part and the Contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federally-assisted construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulations or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (7) The Contractor will include the portion of the sentence immediately preceding paragraph 17(a) (1) and the provisions of paragraphs 17(a)(1) through (6) in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations, or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 204 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The Contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as EDA or the Secretary of Labor may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance. Provided, however, that in the event the Contractor becomes involved in or is threatened with litigation with or by a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by EDA or the Secretary of Labor, the Contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. (8) The Recipient further agrees that it will be bound by the above equal opportunity clause with respect to its own employment practices when it participates in federallyassisted construction work. Provided, however, that if the Recipient so participating is a State or local government, the above equal opportunity clause is not applicable to any agency, instrumentality, or subdivision of such government that does not participate in work on or under the Contract. (9) The Recipient agrees that it will assist and cooperate actively with EDA and the Secretary of Labor in obtaining the compliance of contractors and subcontractors with the equal opportunity clause and the rules, regulations, and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor, that it will furnish EDA and the Secretary of Labor such information as they may
require for the supervision of such compliance, and that it will otherwise assist EDA in the discharge of the EDAs primary responsibility for securing compliance. (10) The Recipient further agrees that it will refrain from entering into any contract or contract modification subject to Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, with a Contractor debarred from, or who has not demonstrated eligibility for, Government contracts and federally assisted construction contracts pursuant to the Executive order and will carry out such sanctions and penalties for violation of the equal opportunity clause as may be imposed upon contractors and subcontractors by EDA or the Secretary of Labor pursuant to Part II, Subpart D of the Executive order. In addition, the Recipient agrees that if it fails or refuses to comply with these undertakings, EDA may take any or all of the following actions: Cancel, terminate, or suspend in whole or in part this EDA financial assistance; refrain from extending any further assistance to the applicant under the program with respect to which the failure or refund occurred until satisfactory assurance of future compliance has been received from such applicant; and refer the case to the Department of Justice for appropriate legal proceedings. (b) Exemptions to Above Equal Opportunity Clause (41 C.F.R. chapter 60): (1) Contracts and subcontracts not exceeding $10,000 (other than Government bills of lading) are exempt. The amount of the Contract, rather than the amount of the federal financial assistance, shall govern in determining the applicability of this exemption. (2) Except in the case of subcontractors for the performance of construction work at the site of construction, the clause shall not be required to be inserted in subcontracts below the second tier. (3) Contracts and subcontracts not exceeding $10,000 for standard commercial supplies or raw materials are exempt. 18. CONTRACTING WITH SMALL, MINORITY AND WOMENS BUSINESSES
(a) If the Contractor intends to let any subcontracts for a portion of the work, the Contractor shall take affirmative steps to assure that small, minority and womens businesses are used when possible as sources of supplies, equipment, construction, and services. (b) Affirmative steps shall consist of: (1) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and womens business enterprises on solicitation lists; (2) Ensuring that small and minority businesses and womens business enterprises are solicited whenever they are potential sources;
(3) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by small and minority businesses and womens business enterprises; (4) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirements of the contract permit, which encourage participation by small and minority businesses and womens business enterprises; (5) Using the services and assistance of the U.S. Small Business Administration, the Minority Business Development Agency of the U.S. Department of Commerce, and State and local governmental small business agencies; (6) Requiring each party to a subcontract to take the affirmative steps of this section; and (7) The Contractor is encouraged to procure goods and services from labor surplus area firms. 19. HEALTH, SAFETY, AND ACCIDENT PREVENTION
(a) In performing this contract, the Contractor shall: (1) Ensure that no laborer or mechanic shall be required to work in surroundings or under working conditions which are unsanitary, hazardous, or dangerous to their health and/or safety as determined under construction safety and health standards promulgated by the Secretary of Labor by regulation; (2) Protect the lives, health, and safety of other persons; (3) Prevent damage to property, materials, supplies, and equipment; and, (4) Avoid work interruptions. (b) For these purposes, the Contractor shall: (1) Comply with regulations and standards issued by the Secretary of Labor at 29 C.F.R. part 1926. Failure to comply may result in imposition of sanctions pursuant to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act (40 U.S.C. 3701 3708); and (2) Include the terms of this clause in every subcontract so that such terms will be binding on each subcontractor. (c) The Contractor shall maintain an accurate record of exposure data on all accidents incident to work performed under this Contract resulting in death, traumatic injury, occupational disease, or damage to property, materials, supplies, or equipment, and shall report this data in the manner prescribed by 29 C.F.R. part 1904.
(d) The Owner shall notify the Contractor of any noncompliance with these requirements and of the corrective action required. This notice, when delivered to the Contractor or the Contractors representative at the site of the Work, shall be deemed sufficient notice of the noncompliance and corrective action required. After receiving the notice, the Contractor shall immediately take corrective action. If the Contractor fails or refuses to take corrective action promptly, the Owner may issue an order stopping all or part of the Work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. The Contractor shall not base any claim or request for equitable adjustment for additional time or money on any stop order issued under these circumstances. (e) The Contractor shall be responsible for its subcontractors compliance with the provisions of this clause. The Contractor shall take such action with respect to any subcontract as EDA, or the Secretary of Labor shall direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 20. CONFLICT OF INTEREST AND OTHER PROHIBITED INTERESTS
(a) No official of the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to negotiate, make, accept, or approve, or to take part in negotiating, making, accepting, or approving any architectural, engineering, inspection, construction or material supply contract or any subcontract in connection with the construction of the Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part hereof. (b) No officer, employee, architect, attorney, engineer, or inspector of or for the Owner who is authorized in such capacity and on behalf of the Owner to exercise any legislative, executive, supervisory or other similar functions in connection with the construction of the Project, shall become directly or indirectly interested personally in this Contract or in any part thereof, any material supply contract, subcontract, insurance contract, or any other contract pertaining to the Project. (c) The Contractor may not knowingly contract with a supplier or manufacturer if the individual or entity who prepared the Contract Documents has a corporate or financial affiliation with the supplier or manufacturer. (d) The Owners officers, employees, or agents shall not engage in the award or administration of this Contract if a conflict of interest, real or apparent, may be involved. Such a conflict may arise when: (i) the employee, officer or agent; (ii) any member of their immediate family; (iii) their partner or (iv) an organization that employs, or is about to employ, any of the above, has a financial interest in the Contractor. The Owners officers, employees, or agents shall neither solicit nor accept gratuities, favors, or anything of monetary value from the Contractor or subcontractors. (e) If the Owner finds after a notice and hearing that the Contractor, or any of the Contractors agents or representatives, offered or gave gratuities (in the form of entertainment, gifts, or otherwise) to any official, employee, or agent of the Owner or EDA in an attempt to secure this Contract or favorable treatment in awarding, amending, or making any determinations related to the performance of this Contract, the Owner may, by written notice to the Contractor, terminate this Contract. The Owner may also pursue other rights and remedies that the law or this Contract
provides. However, the existence of the facts on which the Owner bases such findings shall be an issue and may be reviewed in proceedings under the dispute resolution provisions of this Contract. (f) In the event this Contract is terminated as provided in paragraph (e) of this section, the Owner may pursue the same remedies against the Contractor as it could pursue in the event of a breach of this Contract by the Contractor. As a penalty, in addition to any other damages to which it may be entitled by law, the Owner may pursue exemplary damages in an amount (as determined by the Owner) which shall not be less than three nor more than ten times the costs the Contractor incurs in providing any such gratuities to any such officer or employee. 21. RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING
(a) This Contract, or subcontract is subject to section 319 of Public Law 101-121, which added section 1352, regarding lobbying restrictions, to chapter 13 of title 31 of the United States Code. The new section is explained in the common rule, 15 C.F.R. part 28 (55 FR 6736-6748, February 26, 1990). Each bidder under this Contract or subcontract is generally prohibited from using federal funds for lobbying the Executive or Legislative Branches of the Federal Government in connection with this EDA Award. (b) Contract Clause Threshold: This Contract Clause regarding lobbying must be included in each bid for a contract or subcontract exceeding $100,000 of federal funds at any tier under the EDA Award. (c) Certification and Disclosure: Each bidder of a contract or subcontract exceeding $100,000 of federal funds at any tier under the federal Award must file Form CD-512, Certification Regarding Lobbying, and, if applicable, Standard Form-LLL, Disclosure of Lobbying Activities, regarding the use of any nonfederal funds for lobbying. Certifications shall be retained by the Contractor or subcontractor at the next higher tier. All disclosure forms, however, shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the EDA Award, who shall forward all disclosure forms to EDA. (d) Continuing Disclosure Requirement: Each Contractor or subcontractor that is subject to the Certification and Disclosure provision of this Contract Clause is required to file a disclosure form at the end of each calendar quarter in which there occurs any event that requires disclosure or that materially affects the accuracy of the information contained in any disclosure form previously filed by such person. Disclosure forms shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the EDA Award, who shall forward all disclosure forms to EDA. (e) Indian Tribes, Tribal Organizations, or Other Indian Organizations: Indian tribes, tribal organizations, or any other Indian organizations, including Alaskan Native organizations, are excluded from the above lobbying restrictions and reporting requirements, but only with respect to expenditures that are by such tribes or organizations for lobbying activities permitted by other federal law. An Indian tribe or organization that is seeking an exclusion from Certification and Disclosure requirements must provide EDA with the citation of the provision or provisions of federal law upon which it relies to conduct lobbying activities that would otherwise
be subject to the prohibitions in and to the Certification and Disclosure requirements of section 319 of Public Law No. 101-121, preferably through an attorney's opinion. Note, also, that a nonIndian subrecipient, contractor, or subcontractor under an award to an Indian tribe, for example, is subject to the restrictions and reporting requirements. 22. HISTORICAL AND ARCHAEOLOGICAL DATA PRESERVATION
The Contractor agrees to facilitate the preservation and enhancement of structures and objects of historical, architectural or archaeological significance and when such items are found and/or unearthed during the course of project construction. Any excavation by the Contractor that uncovers an historical or archaeological artifact shall be immediately reported to the Owner and a representative of EDA. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions issued by EDA after consultation with the State Historic Preservation Officer (SHPO) for recovery of the items. See the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (80 Stat 915, 16 U.S.C. 470) and Executive Order No. 11593 of May 31, 1971. 23. CLEAN AIR AND WATER
Applicable to Contracts in Excess of $100,000 (a) Definition. Facility means any building, plant, installation, structure, mine, vessel, or other floating craft, location, or site of operations, owned, leased, or supervised by the Contractor or any subcontractor, used in the performance of the Contract or any subcontract. When a location or site of operations includes more than one building, plant, installation, or structure, the entire location or site shall be deemed a facility except when the Administrator, or a designee, of the United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) determines that independent facilities are collocated in one geographical area. (b) In compliance with regulations issued by the EPA, 2 C.F.R. part 1532, pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended (42 U.S.C. 7401 et seq.); the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended (33 U.S.C. 1251 et seq.); and Executive Order 11738, the Contractor agrees to: (1) Not utilize any facility in the performance of this contract or any subcontract which is listed on the EPA List of Violating Facilities pursuant to 2 C.F.R. part 1532 for the duration of time that the facility remains on the list; (2) Promptly notify the Owner if a facility the Contractor intends to use in the performance of this contract is on the EPA List of Violating Facilities or the Contractor knows that it has been recommended to be placed on the List; (3) Comply with all requirements of the Clean Air Act and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, including the requirements of section 114 of the Clean Air Act and section 308 of the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, and all applicable clean air and clean water standards; and
(4) Include or cause to be included the provisions of this clause in every subcontract and take such action as EDA may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions. 24. USE OF LEAD-BASED PAINTS ON RESIDENTIAL STRUCTURES
(a) If the work under this Contract involves construction or rehabilitation of residential structures, the Contractor shall comply with the Lead-based Paint Poisoning Prevention Act (42 U.S.C. 4831). The Contractor shall assure that paint used on the Project on applicable surfaces does not contain lead in excess of the percentages set forth in Paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section. In determining compliance with these standards, the lead content of the paint shall be measured on the basis of the total nonvolatile content of the paint or on the basis of an equivalent measure of lead in the dried film of paint already applied. (1) For paint manufactured after June 22, 1977, paint may not contain lead in excess of 6 one-hundredths of 1 percent (.0006) lead by weight. (2) For paint manufactured on or before June 22, 1977, paint may not contain lead in excess of five-tenths of 1 percent lead by weight. (b) As a condition to receiving assistance under PWEDA, recipients shall assure that the restriction against the use of lead-based paint is included in all contracts and subcontracts involving the use of federal funds. (c) Definitions (1) Applicable surfaces are those exterior surfaces which are readily accessible to children under seven years of age. (2) Residential structures means houses, apartments, or other structures intended for human habitation, including institutional structures where persons reside, which are accessible to children under seven years of age, such as day care centers, intermediate and extended care facilities, and certain community facilities. 25. ENERGY EFFICIENCY
The Contractor shall comply with all standards and policies relating to energy efficiency which are contained in the energy conservation plan issued in compliance with the Energy Policy and Conservation Act (Public L. No. 94-163) for the State in which the Work under the Contract is performed. 26. ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
When constructing a Project involving trenching and/or other related earth excavations, the Contractor shall comply with the following environmental constraints: (1) Wetlands. When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials on public or private property, the Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert wetlands.
(2) Floodplains. When disposing of excess, spoil, or other construction materials on public or private property, the Contractor shall not fill in or otherwise convert 100 year floodplain areas delineated on the latest Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA) Floodplain Maps, or other appropriate maps, i.e., alluvial soils on Natural Resource Conservation Service (NRCS) Soil Survey Maps. (4) Endangered Species. The Contractor shall comply with the Endangered Species Act, which provides for the protection of endangered and/or threatened species and critical habitat. Should any evidence of the presence of endangered and/or threatened species or their critical habitat be brought to the attention of the Contractor, the Contractor will immediately report this evidence to the Owner and a representative of EDA. Construction shall be temporarily halted pending the notification process and further directions issued by EDA after consultation with the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service. 27. DEBARMENT, SUSPENSION, INELIGIBILITY, AND VOLUNTARY EXCLUSIONS
As required by Executive Order 12549, Debarment and Suspension, and implemented at 2 C.F.R. part 1326, for prospective participants in lower tier covered transactions (except subcontracts for goods or services under the $25,000 small purchase threshold unless the subrecipient will have a critical influence on or substantive control over the award), as defined at 2 C.F.R. part 1326. (1) By entering into this Contract, and by further executing Form CD-512, the Contractor and subcontractors certify, that neither it nor its principals is presently debarred, suspended, proposed for debarment, declared ineligible, or voluntarily excluded from participation in this Contract by any federal department or agency. (2) Where the Contractor or subcontractors are unable to certify to any of the statements in this certification, the Contractor or subcontractors shall attach an explanation to this bid. See also15 C.F.R. 14.13 or 24.35, as applicable. 28. EDA PROJECT SIGN
The Contractor shall supply, erect, and maintain in good condition a Project sign according to the specifications provided by EDA. To the extent practical, the sign should be a free standing sign. Project signs shall not be located on public highway rights-of-way. Location and height of signs will be coordinated with the local agency responsible for highway or street safety in the Project area, if any possibility exists for obstructing vehicular traffic line of sight. Whenever the EDA site sign specifications conflict with State law or local ordinances, the EDA Regional Director will permit such conflicting specifications to be modified so as to comply with State law or local ordinance.
END OF DOCUMENT
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.5
Back
CERTIFICATION REGARDING LOBBYING (This Certification is required pursuant to 31 U.S.C. 1352)
Certification for Contracts, Grants, Loans, and Cooperative Agreements The undersigned certifies, to the best of his or her knowledge and belief, that: (1) No Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid, by or on behalf of the undersigned, to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with the awarding of any Federal contract, the making of any Federal grant, the making of any Federal loan, the entering into of any cooperative agreement, and the extension, continuation, renewal, amendment, or modification of any Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement. (2) If any funds other than Federal appropriated funds have been paid or will be paid to any person for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a Member of Congress, an officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a Member of Congress in connection with this Federal contract, grant, loan, or cooperative agreement, the undersigned shall complete and submit Standard Form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," in accordance with its instructions. (3) The undersigned shall require that the language of this certification be included in the award documents for all subawards at all tiers (including subcontracts, subgrants, and contracts under grants, loans, and cooperative agreements) and that all subrecipients shall certify and disclose accordingly. This certification is a material representation of fact upon which reliance was placed when this transaction was made or entered into. Submission of this certification is a prerequisite for making or entering into this transaction imposed by Section 1352, Title 31, U.S. Code. Any person who fails to file the required certification shall be subject to a civil penalty of not less than $11,000 and not more than $110,000 for each such failure.
Please check appropriate box: No nonfederal funds have been used or are planned to be used for lobbying in connection with this application/award/contract. or + ) , Attached is Standard Form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," which describes the use . ) - (past or planned) of nonfederal funds for lobbying in connection with this application/award/ contract. Executed this by (Type or Print Name) (Title of Executing Official) day of , 20
+ ) , . ) -
(Signature of Executing Official)
(Name of organization/applicant)
CONTRACT CLAUSE NEW RESTRICTIONS ON LOBBYING This contract, subcontract, or subgrant is subject to Section 319 of Public Law 101-121, which added section 1352, regarding lobbying restrictions, to Chapter 13 of Title 31 of the United States Code. The new section is explained in the common rule, 15 CFR Part 28 (55 FR 6736-6748, 2/26/90). Each bidder/applicant/recipient of this contract subcontract, or subgrant and subrecipients are generally prohibited from using Federal funds for lobbying the Executive or Legislative Branches of the Federal Government in connection with this Award. Contract Clause Threshold This Contract Clause regarding lobbying must be included in each application for a subgrant and in each bid for a contract or subcontract exceeding $100,000 of Federal funds at any tier under the Federal Award. Certification and Disclosure Each applicant/recipient of a subgrant and each bidder/applicant/ recipient of a contract or subcontract exceeding $100,000 of Federal funds at any tier under the Federal Award must file a "Certification Regarding Lobbying" and, if applicable, Standard Form LLL, "Disclosure of Lobbying Activities," regarding the use of any nonfederal funds for lobbying. Certifications shall be retained by the next higher tier. All disclosure forms, however, shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the Federal Award (grant), who shall forward all disclosure forms to the Federal agency. Continuing Disclosure Requirement Each subgrantee, contractor, or subcontractor that is subject to the Certification and Disclosure provision of this Contract Clause is required to file a disclosure form at the end of each calendar quarter in which there occurs any event that requires disclosure or that materially affects the accuracy of the information contained in any disclosure form previously filed by such person. Disclosure forms shall be forwarded from tier to tier until received by the Recipient of the Federal Award (grant) who shall forward all disclosure forms to the Federal agency. Indian Tribes, Tribal Organizations, or Other Indian Organizations Indian tribes, tribal organizations, or any other Indian organizations, including the Alaskan Native organizations, are excluded from the above lobbying restrictions and reporting requirements, but only with respect to expenditures that are by such tribes or organizations for lobbying activities permitted by other Federal law. An Indian tribe or organization that is seeking an exclusion from Certification and Disclosure requirements must provide (preferably in an attorney's opinion) EDA with the citation of the provision or provisions of Federal law upon which it relies to conduct lobbying activities that would otherwise be subject to the prohibitions in and to the Certification and Disclosure requirements of Section 319 of Public Law No. 101-121. Note, also, that a non-Indian subgrantee, contractor, or subcontractor under an award (grant) to an Indian tribe, for example, is subject to the restrictions and reporting requirements.
END OF DOCUMENT
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.6
Back
NOTICE OF REQUIREMENTS FOR AFFIRMATIVE ACTION TO ENSURE EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY (EXECUTIVE ORDER 11246 AND 41 CFR PART 60-4) The following Notice shall be included in, and shall be a part of all solicitations for offers and bids on all Federal and federally assisted construction contracts or subcontracts in excess of $10,000. The Offeror's or Bidder's attention is called to the "Equal Opportunity Clause" and the "Standard Federal Equal Employment Opportunity Construction Contract Specifications" set forth herein. The goals and timetables for minority and female participation, expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate workforce in each trade on all construction work in the covered area, are as follows: Timetables Goals for minority participation for each trade Goals for female participation for each trade 6 .9 %
What % to use?
These goals are applicable to all the Contractor's construction work (whether or not it is Federal or federally assisted) performed in the covered area. If the contractor performs construction work in a geographical area located outside of the covered area, it shall apply the goals established for such geographical area where the work is actually performed. With regard to this second area, the contractor also is subject to the goals for both its federally involved and non federally involved construction. The Contractor's compliance with the Executive Order and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4 shall be based on its implementation of the Equal Opportunity Clause, specific affirmative action obligations required by the specifications set forth in 41 CFR 604.3(a), and its efforts to meet the goals. The hours of minority and female employment and training must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the contract, and in each trade and the contractor shall make a good faith effort to employ minorities and women evenly on each of its projects. The transfer of minority or female employees or trainees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's goals shall be a violation of the contract, the Executive Order, and the regulations in 41 CFR Part 60-4. Compliance with the goals will be measured against the total work hours performed. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the Director of the Office of Federal Contract Compliance Programs within 10 working days of award of any construction subcontract in excess of $10,000 at any tier for construction work under the contract resulting from this solicitation. The notification shall list the name, address and telephone number of the subcontractor; employer identification number of the subcontractor; estimated dollar amount of the subcontract; estimated starting and completion dates of the subcontract; and the geographical area in which the subcontract is to be performed. As used in this Notice, and in the contract resulting from this solicitation, the "covered area" is:
State of County of City of
END OF DOCUMENT
Back
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.7 ECONOMIC AREAS GOALS FOR EEO DOCUMENT - INDEX OF COUNTIES STATE
GOAL (percent)
Maine: 001 Bangor, ME: Non-SMSA Counties ME Aroostook; ME Hancock; ME Penobscot; ME Piscataquis; ME Waldo; ME Washington. 002 Portland-Lewiston, ME: SMSA Counties: 4243 Lewiston-Auburn, ME ME Androscoggin. 6403 Portland, ME ME Cumberland; ME Sagadahoc. Non-SMSA Counties ME Franklin; ME. Kennebec; ME Knox. ME; Lincoln; ME Oxford; ME Somerset; ME York. 0.8
0.5 0.6 0.5
Vermont: 003 Burlington, VT: Non-SMSA Counties NH Coos; NH Grafton; NH Sullivan; VT Addison; VT Caledonia; VT Chittenden; VT Essex; VT Franklin; VT Grand Isle; VT Lamoille; VT Orange; VT Orleans; VT Ruthland; VT Washington; VT Windsor. 0.8
Massachusetts: 004 Boston, MA: SMSA Counties: 1123 Boston - Lowell - Brockton - Lawrence - Haverhill. MA-NH MA Essex; MA Middlesex; MA Norfolk; MA Plymouth; MA Suffolk; NH Rockingham. 4763 Manchester-Nashua, NH NH Hillsborough. 5403 Fail River-New Bedford, MA MA Bristol 9243 Worcester - Fitchburg Leominster, MA MA Worcester. Non-SMSA Counties MA Barnstable; MA Dukes-, MA Nantucket, NH Belknap; NH Carroll; NH Merrimack; NH Strafford.
4.0 0.7 1.6 1.6 3.6
Rhode Island: 005 Providence - Warwick - Pawtucket, RI: SMSA Counties: 6483 Providence - Warwick - Pawtucket Rl Rl Bristol; Rl Kent; RI Providence; Rl Washington Non-SMSA Counties RI Newport.
3.0 3.1
Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors
Page E-21
Connecticut (Massachusets): 006 Hartford - New Haven - Springfield, CT-MA: SMSA Counties: 3283 Hartford - New Britain Bristol, CT CT Hartford; CT Middlesex; CT Tolland 5483 New Haven - Waterbury Meriden, CT CT New Haven. 5523 New London - Norwich, CT CT New London. 6323 Pittsfield, MA MA Berkshire. 8003 Springfield - Chicopee - Holyoke. MA-CT MA Hampden; MA Hampshire. Non-SMSA Counties CT Litchfield; CT Windham; MA Franklin; NH Cheshire; VT Windham.
6.9 9.0 4.5 1.6 4.8 5.9
New York: 007 Albany - Schenectady - Troy, NY: SMSA Counties: 3.2 0160 Albany - Schenectady Troy, NY NY Albany; NY Montgommy, NY Rensselaer, NY Saratoga; NY Schenectady. 2.6 Non-SMSA Counties NY Clinton; NY Columbia; NY Essex; NY Fulton; NY Greene; NY Hamilton, NY Schoharie NY Warren; NY Washington; VT Bennington. 008Syracuse - Utica, NY: SMSA Counties: 3.8 8160 Syracuse NY Madison; NY Onondaga; NY Oswego. 2.1 8680 Utica -Rome, NY NY Herkimer; NY Oneida. Non-SMSA Counties 2.5 NY Cayuga; NY Cortland; NY Franklin; NY Jefferson; NY Lewis; NY St. Lawrence. 009 Rochester, NY: SMSA Counties: 5.3 6840 Rochester, NY NY Livingston; NY Monroe; NY Ontario; NY Orleans; NY Wayne. 5.9 Non-SMSA Counties NY Genesee; NY Seneca; NY Yates. 010 Buffalo, NY: SMSA Counties: 1280 Buffalo, NY 7.7 NY Erie; NY Niagara. 6.3 Non-SMSA Counties NY Allegany; NY Cattaraugus; NY Chautauqua; NY Wyoming. PA McKean; PA Potter. 011 Binghamton - Elmira, NY: SMSA Counties 0960 Binghamton, NY - PA 1.1 NY Broome; NY Tioga; PA Susquehanna. 2.2 2335 Elmira, NY NY Chemung Non-SMSA Counties 1.2 NY Chenango; NY Delaware; NY Otsego; NY Schuyler; NY Steuben; NY Tompkins; PA Bradford; PA Tioga. 012 New York, NY: SMSA Counties:
Page E-22
1163 Bridgeport - Stamford - Norwalk - Danbury, CT CT Fairfield. 3640 Jersey City, NJ NJ Hudson. 4410 Long Branch - Asbury Park, NJ NJ Monmouth 5380 Nassau Suffolk, NY NY Nassau; NY Suffolk. 5460 New Brunswick - Perth Amboy - Sayreville, NJ. NJ Middlesex 5600 New York NY, NJ . NJ Bergen; NY Putnam; NY Rockland; NY Westchester
10.2 12.8 9.5 5.8 5.8 22.6
The following goal ranges are applicable to the indicated trades in the counties of Bronx, Kings, New York, Queens, and Richmond. Electricians Carpenters Steam fitters Metal lathers Painters Operating Engineers Plumbers Iron workers (struct) Elevator constructors Bricklayers Asbestos workers Roofers Iron workers (ornamental) Cement masons Glaziers Plasterers Teamsters Boilermakers All others 9.0 to 10.2 27.6 to 32.0 12.2 to 13.5 24.6 to 25.6 28.6 to 26.0 25.6 to 26.0 12.0 to 14.5 25.9 to 32.0 5.5 to 6.5 13.4 to 15.5 22.8 to 28.0 6.3 to 7.5 22.4 to 23.0 23.0 to 27.0 16.0 to 20.0 15.8 to 18.0 22.0 to 22.5 13.0 to 15.5 16.4 to 17.5 17.3 12.9 6.4 17.0
5640 Newark, NJ NJ Essex; NJ Morris; NJ Somerset; NJ Union. 6040 Paterson - Clifton - Passaic., NJ NJ Passaic. 6460 Poughkeepsie, NY NY Dutchese Non-SMSA Counties NJ Hunterdon; NJ Ocean; NJ Sussex; NY Orange; NY Sullivan; NY Ulster; PA Pike.
Pennsylvania: 013 Scranton - Wilkes-Barre, PA: SMSA Counties 5745 Northeast Pennsylvania PA Lackawanna; PA Luzerne; PA Monroe. Non-SMSA Counties ................ ... .... 0.5 PA Columbia; PA Wayne; PA Wyoming. 014 Williamsport, PA: SMSA Counties 9140 Williamsport, PA
0.6
1.0
Page E-23
PA Lycoming. Non-SMSA Counties PA Cameron; PA Centre; PA Clearfield; PA Clinton; PA Elk; PA Jefferson; PA Montour; PA Northumberland; PA Snyder; PA Sullivan; PA Union. 015 Erie, PA: SMSA Counties: 2360 Erie, PA PA Erie. Non-SMSA Counties PA Clarion; PA Crawford; PA Forest; PA Venango; PA Warren. 016 Pittsburgh, PA: SMSA Counties 0280 Altoona, PA PA Blair. 3680 Johnson, PA PA Cambria; PA Somerset. 6280 Pittsburgh, PA PA Allegheny; PA Beaver; PA Washington; PA Westmoreland. Non-SMSA Counties MD Allegany; MD Garrett; PA Armstrong; PA Bedford; PA Butler; PA Fayette; PA Greene; PA Indiana; WV Mineral. 017 Harrisburg - York - Lancaster, PA: SMSA Counties 3240 Harrisburg PA PA Cumberland; PA Dauphin; PA Perry. 4000 Lancaster, PA PA Lancaster. 9280 York, PA PA Adams; PA York. Non-SMSA-Counties PA Franklin; PA Fulton; PA Huntingdon; PA Juniata; PA Lebanon; PA Mifflin. 018 Philadelphia, PA: SMSA Counties 0240 Allentown - Bethlehem - Easton, PA-NJ NJ Warren; PA Carbon; PA Lehigh; PA Northhampton. 0560 Atlantic City, NJ NJ Atlantic 6160 Philadelphia, PA-NJ NJ Burlington; NJ Camden; NJ Glouchester; PA Bucks; PA Chester; PA Delaware; PA Montgomery; PA Philadelphia. 8680 Reading, PA PA Berks. 8480 Trenton, NJ NJ Mercer. 8760 Vineland - Millville - Bridgeton, NJ NJ Cumberland. 9160 Wilmington, DE-NJ-MD DE Now Castle; MD Cecil; NJ Salem. Non-SMSA Counties DE Kent; DE Sussex; NJ Cape May; PA Schuylkill.
0.7
2.8 1.8
1.0 1.3 6.3 4.8
6.2 2.0 2.2 3.1
1.6 18.2 17.3 2.5 16.4 16.0 12.3 14.5
Maryland: 019 Baltimore, MD SMSA Counties: 0720 Baltimore MD MD Anne Arundel; MD Baltimore; MD Carroll; MD Harford; MD Howard; MD Baltimore City. Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors
23.0
Page E-24
Non-SMSA Counties MD Caroline; MD Dorchester; MD Kent; MD Queen Annes; MD Somerset; MD Talbot; MD Wicomico; MD Worcester; VA Accomack; VA Northamptom
23.6
Washington DC: 020 Washington DC: SMSA Counties 8840 Washington, DC-MD-VA DC District of Columbia; MD Charles; Montgomery; MD Prince Georges; VA Arlington; VA Fairfax; VA Loudoun; VA Prince William; VA Alexandria; VA Fairfax City; VA Falls Church. Non-SMSA Counties MD Calvert; MD Frederick; MD St. Marys; MD Washington; VA Clarke; VA Culpepper; VA Fauquier; VA Frederick; VA King George; VA Page; VA Rappahannock; VA Shenandoah; VA Spottsylvania; VA Stafford; VA Warren; VA Westmoreland; VA Fredericksburg; VA Winchester; WV Berkeley; WV Grant; WV Hampshire;. WV Hardy; WV Jefferson; WV Morgan.
28.0
25.2
Virginia: 021 Roanoke-Lynchburg VA: SMSA C4unties: 19.3 4640 Lynchburg, VA VA Amherst; VA Appomattox; VA Campbell; VA Lynchburg. 10.2 6800 Roanoke, VA VA Botetourt; VA Craig; VA Roanoke VA; VA Roanoke City; VA Salem. Non-SMSA Counties 12.0 VA Alleghany, VA Augusta; VA Bath; VA Bedford; VA Bland; VA Carroll; VA Floyd; VA Franklin; VA Giles; VA Grayson; VA Henry; VA Highland; VA Montgomery; VA Nelson; VA Patrick; VA Pittsylvania; VA Pulaski; VA Rockbridge; VA Rockingham; VA Wythe; VA Bedford City; VA Buena Vista; VA Clifton Forge; VA Covington; VA Danville; VA Galex; VA Harrisonburg; VA Lexington; VA Martinsville; VA Radford; VA Staunton; VA Waynesboro; WV Pendleton. 022 Richmond, VA: SMSA Counties: 30.6 6140 Petersburg - Colonial Heights Hopewell, VA VA Dinwiddie; VA Prince George; VA Colonial Heights; VA Hopewell; VA Petersburg. 24.9 6760 Richmond, VA VA Charles City; VA Chesterfield; VA Goochland; VA Hanover; VA Henrico; VA New Kent; VA Powhatan; VA Richmond. Non-SMSA Counties 27.9 VA Albemarle; VA Amelia; VA Brunswick; VA Buckingham; VA Caroline; VA Charlotte; VA Cumberland; VA Essex; VA Fluvanna; VA Greene; VA Greensville; VA Halifax; VA King And Queen; VA King William; VA Lancaster; VA Louisa; VA Lunenberg; VA Madison; VA Mecklenburg; VA NorthumberIand; VA Nottoway; VA Orange; VA Prince Edward; VA Richmond; VA Sussex; VA Charlottesville; VA Emporia; VA South Boston. 023 Norfolk - Virginia Beach - Newport News,VA: SMSA Counties: 5680 Newport News-Hampton, VA.... VA Gloucester, VA James City; VA York; VA Hampton; VA Newport News; VA Williamsburg. 5720 Norfolk - Virginia Beach Portsmouth VA NC NC Currituck; VA Chesapeake; VA Norfolk; VA Portsmouth; VA Suffolk; VA Virginia Beach.
27.1 26.6
Page E-25
Non-SMSA Counties NC Bertie; NC Camden; NC Chowan; NC Gates; NC Hertford; NC Pasquotank; NC Perquimans; VA Isle of Wight; VA Matthews; VA Middlesex; VA Southampton; VA Surry; VA Franklin.
29.7
North Carolina: 024 Rocky Mount - Wilson - Greenville NC: Non-SMSA Counties 31.7 NC Beaufort; NC Carteret; NC Craven; NC Dare; NC Edgecombe; NC Greene; NC Halifax; NC Hyde; NC Jones; NC Lenoir; NC Martin; NC Nash; NC Northampton; NC Pamlico; NC Pitt; NC Tyrrell; NC Washington; NC Wayne; NC Wilson 025 Wilmington, NC: SMSA Counties: 20.7 9200 Wilmington, NC NC Brunswick; NC New Hanover. 23.5 Non-SMSA counties NC Columbus; NC Duplin; NC Onslow; NC Pender. 026 Fayetteville, NC: SMSA Counties: 26.2 2560 Fayetteville, NC NC Cumberland. Non-SMSA Counties 33.5 NC Bladen; NC Hoke; NC Richmond; NC Robeson; NC Sampson; NC Scotland. 027 Raleigh - Durham, NC. SMSA Counties: 22.8 6640 Raleigh Durham NC Durham; NC Orange; NC Wake. Non-SMSA Counties 24.7 NC Chatham; NC Franklin; NC Granville; NC Harnett; NC Johnston; NC Lee; NC Person; NC Vance; NC Warren. 028 Greensboro - Winston Salem - High Point, NC: SMSA Counties: 16.2 1300 Burlington, NC NC Alamance. 3120 Greensboro - Winston Salem High Point NC 16.4 NC Davidson; NC Forsyth; NC Guilford; NC Randolf; NC Stokes; NC Yadkin. 15.5 Non-SMSA Counties NC Alleghany; NC Ashe; NC Caswell; NC Davie; NC Montgomery; NC Moore; NC Rockingham; NC Surry; NC Watauga; NC Wilkes. 029 Charlotte, NC: SMSA Counties: 18.5 1520 Charlotte Gastonia, NC NC Gaston; NC Mecklenburg; NC Union. 15.7 Non-SMSA Counties NC Alexander; NC Anson; NC Burke; NC Cabarrus; NC Caldwell; NC Catawba; NC Cleveland; NC Iredell; NC Lincoln; NC Rowan; NC Rutherford; NC Stanley; SC Chester; SC Lancaster SC York. 030 Asheville, NC Non-SMSA Counties: 8.5 0480 Asheville, NC NC Buncombe; NC Madison. Non-SMSA Counties 6.3 NC Avery; NC Cherokee; NC Clay; NC Graham; HC Heywood; NC Henderson; NC Jackson; NC McDowell; NC Macon; NC Mitchell; NC Swain; NC Transylvania; NC Yancey.
Page E-26
South Carolina: 031 Greenville Spartanburg, SC: SMSA Counties: 3160 Greenville Spartanburg, SC SC Greenville; SC Pickens; SC Spartanburg. Non-SMSA Counties SC Polk; SC Abbeville; SC Anderson; SC Cherokee; SC Greenwood; SC Laurens; SC Oconee; SC Union. 032 Columbia, SC SMSA Counties: 1760 Columbia, SC SC Lexington; SC Richland. Non-SMSA Counties SC Calhoun SC Clarendon; SC Fairfield; SC Kershaw; SC Lee; SC Newberry; SC Orangeburg; SC Saluda; SC Sumter 033 Florence, SC Non-SMSA Counties SC Chesterfield; SC Darlington; SC Dillon; SC Florence; SC Georgetown; SC Horry; SC Marion; SC Marlboro; SC Williamsburg. 034 Charleston - North Charleston, SC SMSA Counties 1440 Charleston - North Charleston, SC SC Berkeley; SC Charleston; SC Dorchester. Non-SMSA Counties SC Collection
16.0 17.8
23.4 32.0
33.0
30.0 30.7
Georgia: 035 Augusta, GA: SMSA Counties: 0600 Augusta, GA SC 27.2 GA Columbia; GA Richmond; SC Aiken 32.8 Non-SMSA Counties GA Burke; GA Emanuel; GA Glascock; GA Jefferson; GA Jenkins; GA Lincoln; GA McDuffie; GA Taliaferro; GA Warren; GA Wilkes; SC Allendale, SC Bamberg; SC BarnweIl; SC Edgefield; SC McCormick 036 Atlanta, GA SMSA Counties 21.2 0520 Atlanta GA Butts; GA Cherokee; GA Clayton; GA Cobb; GA Dekalb; GA Douglas; GA Fayette; GA Forsyth; GA Fulton; GA Gwinnett; GA Henry, GA Newton; GA Paulding; GA Rockdale; GA Walton 19.5 Non-SMSA Counties GA Banks; GA Barrow; GA Bartow; GA Carroll; GA Clarke; GA Coweta; GA Dawson; GA Elbert; GA Fannin; GA Floyd; GA Franklin; GA Gilmer; GA Gordon; GA Greene; GA Habersham; GA Hall; GA Haralson; GA Hart; GA Heard; GA Jackson; GA Jasper; GA Lamar, GA Lumpkin; GA Madison, GA Morgan; GA Oconee, GA Oglethorpe; GA Pickens; GA Pike; GA PoIk; GA Rabun, GA Spalding; GA Stephens; GA Towns; GA Union; GA Upson; GA White. 037 Columbus, GA: SMSA Counties 1800 Columbus 29.6 AL Russell; GA Chattahoochee; GA Columbus. 31.6 Non-SMSA Counties AL Chambers; AL Lee; GA Harris; GA Marion; GA Meriwether; GA Quitman; GA Schley; GA Stewart; GA Sumter; GA Talbot; GA Troup; GA Webster.
Page E-27
038 Macon, GA: SMSA Counties 27.5 4660 Macon, GA GA Bibb; GA Houston; GA Jones; GA Twiggs. 31.7 Non-SMSA Counties GA Baldwin; GA Bleckley; GA Crawford; GA Crisp; GA Dodge; GA Dooly; GA Hancock; GA Johnson; GA Laurens; GA Macon; GA Monroe; GA Peach; GA Pulaski; GA Putnam. GA Taylor; GA Telfair; GA Treutlen; GA Washington; GA Wheeler; GA Wilcox; GA Wilkinson. 039 Savannah, GA: SMSA Counties: 7520 Savannah, GA 30.6 GA Bryan; GA Chatham; GA Effingham 29.8 Non-SMSA Counties GA Appling; GA Atkinson; GA Bacon; GA Bullock; GA Candler; GA Coffee; GA Evans; GA Jeff Davis; GA Liberty; GA Long; GA McIntosh; GA Montgomery; GA Screven; GA Tattinall; GA Toombs; GA Wayne; SC Beaufort; SC Hampton; SC Jasper. 040 Albany, GA SMSA Counties 32.1 0120 Albany, GA GA Dougherty; GA Lee. 31.1 Non-SMSA Counties GA Baker; GA Ben HiII; GA Berrien; GA Brooks; GA Calhoun; GA Clay; GA Clinch; GA Colquitt; GA Cook; GA Decatur; GA Early; GA Echols; GA Grady; GA Irwin; GA Lanier; GA Lowndes; GA Miller; GA Mitchell; GA Randolph; GA Seminole, GA Terrell; GA Thomas; GA Tift; GA Turner; GA Worth.
Florida: 041 Jacksonville, FL: SMSA Counties 2900 Gainesville, FL FL Alachua 3600 Jacksonville, FL FL Baker; FL Clay; FL Duval; FL Nassau; FL St. Johns. Non-SMSA Counties FL Bradford; FL Columbia; FL Dade; FL Gilchrist; FL Hamilton; FL LaFayetle; FL Levy; FL Marion; FL Putnam; FL Suwannee; FL Union; GA Brantley; GA Camden; GA Charlton; GA Glynn; GA Pierce; GA Ware. 042 Orlando - Melbourne - Daytona Beach, FL. SMSA Counties: 2020 Daytona Beach, FL FL Volusia. 4900 Melbourne Tutusville Cocoa, FL FL Brevard. 5960 Orlando, FL FL Orange; FL Osceola; FL Seminole. Non-SMSA Counties FL Flagler; FL Lake; FL Sumter. 043 Miami - Fort Lauderdale, FL: SMSA Counties: 2680 Fort Lauderdale Hollywood, FL FL. Broward. 5000 Miami, FL FL Dade. 8960 West Palm Beach - Boca Raton, FL FL Palm Beach.
20.6 21.8 22.2
15.7 10.7 15.5 14.9
15.5 39.5 22.4
Page E-28
Non-SMSA Counties FL Glades; FL Hendry; FL Indian River; FL Martin; FL Monroe; FL Okeechobee; FL St. Lucie. 044 Tampa - St Petersburg, FL SMSA Counties: 1140 Bradenton, FL FL Manatee. 2700 Fort Myers, FL FL Lee. 3980 Lakeland - Winter Haven, FL FL Polk 7510 Sarasota, FL FL Sarasota. 8280 Tampa - St. Petersburg, FL FL Hillsborough, FL Pasco; FL Pinellas Non-SMSA Counties FL Charlotte; FL Citrus; FL Collier, FL Desoto; FL Hardee; FL Hernando; FL Highlands. 045 Tallahassee. FL: SMSA Counties: 8240 Tallahassee, FL FL Leon; FL Wakulla. Non-SMSA Counties: FL Calhoun; FL Franklin; FL Gadsden; FL Jackson; FL Jefferson; FL Liberty; FL Madison; FL Taylor. 046 Pensacola - Panama City, FL SMSA Counties: 8615 Panama City, FL FL Bay. 6080 Pensacola, FL FL Escambia; FL Santa Rosa. Non-SMSA Counties FL Gulf; FL Holmes; FL Okaloosa; FL Walton; FL Washington.
30.4
15.9 15.3 18.0 10.5 17.9 17.1
24.3 29.5
14.1 18.3 15.4
Alabama: 047 Mobile, AL SMSA Counties: 5160 Mobile, AL 26.9 AL Baldwin; AL Mobile. 16.9 6026 Pascagoula - Moss, Point MS MS Jackson. Non-SMSA Counties 26.4 AL Choctaw; AL Clarke; AL Conecuh; AL Escambia; AL Monroe; AL Washington; AL Wilcox; MS George; MS Greene. 048 Montgomery, AL: SMSA Counties 29.9 5240 Montgomery, AL AL Autauga; AL Elmore; AL Montgomery. Non-SMSA Counties 29.9 AL Barbour; AL Bullock; AL Butler; AL Coffee; AL Coosa; AL Covington; AL Crenshaw; AL Dale; AL Dallas; AL Geneva; AL Henry; AL Houston; AL Lowndes; AL Macon; AL Perry; AL Pike; AL Tallapoosa. 049 Birmingham, AL: SMSA Counties: 14.3 0450 Anniston, AL AL Calhoun.
Page E-29
1000 Birmingham, AL AL Jefferson; AL St. Clair; AL Shelby; AL Walker; AL Etowah 8600 Tuscaloosa, AL AL Tuscaloosa. Non-SMSA Counties AL Bibb; AL Blount; AL Cherokee; AL Chilton; AL Clay; AL Cleburne; AL Cullman; AL Fayette; AL Greene; AL Hale; AL Lamar; AL Marion; AL Pickens; AL Randolph; AL Sumter; AL Talladega; AL Winston. 050 Huntsville Florence, AL: SMSA Counties: 2650 Florence, AL AL Colbert; AL Lauderdale. 3440 Huntsville, AL AL Limestone; AL Madison; AL Marshall. Non-SMSA Counties AL Franklin; AL Lawrence AL Morgan; TN Lincoln.
24.9 20.6 20.7
11.9 12.0 11.2
Tennessee: 051 Chattanooga, TN: SMSA Counties: 1560 Chattanooga, TN GA GA Catoosa; GA Dade; GA Walker; TN Hamilton;TN Marion; TN Sequatchie. Non-SMSA Counties AL De Kalb; AL Jackson; GA Chattooga; GA Murray; GA Whitfield; TN Bledsoe; TN Bradley; TN Grundy; TN McMinn; TN Meigs; TN Monroe; TN Polk; TN Rhea. 052 Johnson City - Kingsport - Bristol, TN-VA: SMSA Counties: 3660 Johnson City - Kingsport - Bristol. TN VA TN Carter; TN Hawkins; TN Sullivan; TN Unicoi; TN Washington; VA Scott; VA Washington; VA Bristol. Non-SMSA Counties TN Greene; TN Hancock; TN Johnson; VA Buchanan; VA Dickenson; VA Lee; VA Russell; VA Smyth; VA Tazewell; VA Wise; VA Norton; WV McDowell, WV Mercer. 053 Knoxville, TN SMSA Counties: 3840 Knoxville, TN TN Anderson; TN Blount; TN Knox; TN Union. Non-SMSA Counties KY Bell; KY Harlan; KY Knox; KY Laurel; KY McCreary; KY Wayne; KY Whitley; TN Campbell; TN Claiborne; TN Cocke; TN Cumberland; TN Fentress; TN Grainger, TN Hamblen; TN Jefferson; TN Loudon; TN Morgan; TN Roane; TN Scott; TN Sevier. 054 Nashville, TN: SMSA Counties: 1660 Clarksville - Hopkinsville, TN - KY KY Christian; TN Montgomery. 5360 Nashville - Davidson, TN TN Cheatham, TN Davidson; TN Dickson; TN Robertson; TN Rutherford; TN Sumner; TN Williamson; TN Wilson. Non-SMSA Counties KY Allen; KY Barren; KY Butler; KY Clinton; KY Cumberland; KY Edmonson; KY Logan; KY Metcalfe; KY Monroe; KY Simpson; KY Todd; KY Trigg; KY Warren; TN Bedford; TN Cannon; TN Clay; TN Coffee; TN DeKalb; TN Franklin; TN Giles; TN Hickman; TN Houston; TN Humphreys; TN Jackson; TN Lawrence; TN Lewis; TN Macon; TN Marshall; TN Maury; TN Moore; TN Overton; TN Perry; TN Pickett;
12.5 8.6
2.6 3.2
6.6 4.5
18.2 15.8 12.0
Page E-30
TN Putnam; TN Smith; TN Stewart; TN Trousdale; TN Van Buren; TN Warren; TN Wayne; TN White. 055 Memphis, TN: SMSA Counties: 4920 Memphis, TN-AR-MS AR Critteriden; MS Do Soto; TN Shelby; TN Tipton. Non-SMSA Counties AR Clay; AR Craighead; AR Cross; AR Greene; AR Lawrence; AR Lee; AR Mississippi; AR Phillips; AR. Poinsett; AR Randolph; AR St. Francis; MS Alcorn; MS Benton; MS Bolivar; MS Calhoun; MS Carroll; MS Chickasaw, MS Clay; MS Coahoma; MS Grenada; MS ltawamba; MS Lafayette; MS Lee; MS Leflore; MS Marshall; MS Monroe; MS Montgomery; MS Panola; MS Pontotoc; MS Prentiss; MS Quitman; MS Sunflower; MS Tallahatchie; MS Tate; MS Tippah; MS Tishomingo; MS Union; MS Washington; MS Webster. MS Yalobusha; MO Dunklin; MO New Madrid; MO Pemiscot; TN Benton; TN Carroll; TN Chester; TN Crockett; TN Decatur; TN Dyer; TN Fayette; TN Gibson; TN Hardeman; TN Hardin; TN Haywood; TN Henderson; TN Henry; TN Lake; TN Lauderdale; TN McNairy; TN Madison; TN Obion; TN Weakley.
32.3 26.5
Kentucky: 056 Paducah, KY: Non-SMSA Counties IL Hardin; IL Massac; IL Pope; KY Ballard; KY Caldwell; KY Calloway. KY Carlisle; KY Crittenden; KY Fulton; KY Graves; KY Hickman; KY Livingston; KY Lyon. KY McCracken; KY Marshall. 057 Louisville, KY: SMSA Counties: 4520 Louisville, KY-IN IN Clark; IN Floyd; KY Bullitt; KY Jefferson; KY Oldham. Non-SMSA Counties IN Crawford; IN Harrison; IN Jefferson; IN Orange; IN Scott; IN Washington; KY Breckinridge; KY Grayson; KY Hardin; KY Hart; KY Henry; KY Larue; KY Marion; KY Meade; KY Nelson; KY Shelby; KY Spencer; KY Trimble; KY Washington. 058 Lexington, KY SMSA Counties 4280 Lexington-Fayette, KY KY Bourbon; KY Clark; KY Fayette; KY Jessamine; KY Scott; KY Woodford. Non-SMSA Counties KY Adair KY Anderson; KY Bath; KY Boyle; KY Breathitt; KY Casey; KY Clay; KY Estill; KY Franklin; KY Garrard; KY Green; KY Harrison; KY Jackson; KY Knott; KY Lee; KY Leslie; KY Letcher; KY Lincoln; KY Madison; KY Magoffin; KY Menifee; KY Mercer; KY Montgomery; KY Morgan. KY Nicholas; KY Owsley; KY Perry; KY Powell; KY Pulaski; KY Rockcastle; KY Russell; KY Taylor; KY Wolfe. 5.2
11.2 9.6
10.8 7.0
West Virginia: 059 Huntington, WV: SMSA Counties: 3400 Huntington Ashland, WV-KY-OH KY Boyd; KY Greenup; OH Lawrence; WV Cabell; WV Wayne. Non-SMSA Counties KY Carter; KY Elliott; KY Floyd; KY Johnson; KY Lawrence; KY Martin; KY Pike; KY Rowan; OH Gallia; WV Lincoln; WV Logan; WV Mason; WV Mingo. 060 Charleston, WV SMSA Counties:
2.9 2.5
Page E-31
1480 Charleston, WV WV Kanawha; WV Putnam. Non-SMSA Counties WV Boone; WV Braxton; WV Calhoun; WV Clay; Fayette; WV Gilmer; WV Greenbrier; WV Jackson; WV Monroe; WV Nicholas; WV Pocahontas; WV Raleigh; WV Roane; WV Summers; WV Webster; WV Wyoming. 061 Morgantown-Fairmont; WV: Non-SMSA Counties WV Barbour; WV Doddridge; WV Harrison; WV Lewis; WV Marion; WV Monongalia; WV Preston; WV Randolph; WV Taylor; WV Tucker, WV Upshur. 062 Parkersburg, WV: SMSA Counties: 6020 Parkersburg-Marietta. WV-OH OH Washington; WV Wirt; WV Wood. Non-SMSA Counties WV Pleasants; WV Ritchie. 063 Wheeling - Steubenville - Wierton, WV-OH: SMSA Counties: 8080 Steubenville-Wierton, OH-WV OH Jefferson; WV Brooke; WV Hancock. 9000 Wheeling, WV-OH OH Belmont; WV Marshall; WV Ohio. Non-SMSA Counties OH Harrison; OH Monroe; WV Tyler; WV Wetzel.
4.9 4.2
2.1
1.1 1.2
4.3 2.4 3.0
Ohio: 064 Youngstown-Warren, OH: SMSA Counties: 9320 Youngstown-Warren, OH OH Mahoning; OH Trumbull. NonSMSA Counties OH Columbiana; PA Lawrence; PA Mercer. 065 Cleveland, OH: SMSA Counties: 0080 Akron, OH OH Portage; OH Summit. 1320 Canton, OH OH Carroll; OH Stark. 1680 Cleveland, OH OH Cuyahoga; OH Geauga; OH Lake; OH Medina. 4440 Lorain-Elyria, OH OH Lorain. 4800 Mansfield, OH OH Richland. Non-SMSA Counties: OH Ashland; OH Ashtabula; OH Coshocton; OH Crawford; OH Erie; OH Holmes; OH Huron; OH Tuscarawas; OH Wayne. 066 Columbus, OH: SMSA Counties: 1840 Columbus, OH OH Delaware; OH Fairfield; Franklin; OH Madison; OH Pickaway. Non-SMSA Counties OH Athens; OH Fayette; OH Guernsey; OH Hocking; OH Jackson; OH Knox; OH Licking; OH Marion; OH Meigs; OH Morgan; OH Morrow; OH Muskingum; OH Noble; OH Perry OH Pike; OH Ross; OH Scioto; OH Union; OH Vinton. 067 Cincinnati, OH: SMSA Counties: Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors
9.4 6.7
7.8 6.1 16.1 9.3 6.3
10.6 7.3
Page E-32
1640 Cincinnati, OH-KY-IN IN Dearborn; KY Boone; KY Campbell; KY Kenton; OH Clermont; OH Hamilton; OH Warren. 3200 Hamilton-Middletown, OH OH Butler. Non-SMSA Counties IN Franklin; IN Ohio; IN Ripley; IN Switzerland; KY Bracken; KY Carroll; KY Fleming; KY Gallatin; KY Grant; KY Lewis; KY Mason; KY Owen; KY Pendleton; KY Robertson; OH Adams; OH Brown; OH Clinton; OH Highland. 068 Dayton, OH: SMSA Counties: 2000 Dayton, OH OH Greene; ON Miami; OH Montgomery; OH Preble. 7960 Springfield, OH OH Champaign; OH Clark. Non-SMSA Counties OH Darke; OH Logan; ON Shelby. 069 Lima, OH: SMSA Counties: 4320 Lima, OH OH Allen; OH Auglaize; OH Putnam; OH Van Wert. Non-SMSA Counties OH Hardin; OH Mercer. 070 Toledo, OH: SMSA Counties: 8400 Toledo, OH-Ml MI Monroe; OH Fulton; OH Lucas; OH Ottawa; OH Wood. Non-SMSA Counties MI Lenawee; OH Hancock; OH Henry; OH Sandusky; OH Seneca; OH Wyandot.
11.0 5.0 9.2
11.5 7.8 9.9
4.4 3.5
8.8 7.3
Michigan: 071 Detroit, MI:, SMSA Counties: 0440 Ann Arbor, MI MI Washtenaw. 2160 Detroit, MI MI Lapeer; MI Livingston; Ml Macomb; MI Oakland; MI St. Clair; Mi Wayne. 2640 Flint, MI MI Genesee; MI Shiawassee. Non-SMSA Counties MI Sanilac. 072 Saginaw, MI: SMSA Counties: 0800 Bay City, MI MI Bay. 6960 Saginaw, MI MI Saginaw. Non-SMSA Counties MI Alcona; MI Alpena; MI Arenac; MI Cheboygan; MI Chippewa; MI Clare; MI Crawford; MI Gladwin; MI Gratiot; MI Huron; MI losco; MI Isabella; MI Luce; MI Mackinac; MI Midland; MI Montmorency; MI Ogemaw; MI Oscoda; MI Otsego; MI Presque Isle; MI Roscommon; MI Tuscola. 073 Grand Rapids, MI: SMSA Counties: 3000 Grand Rapids, MI MI Kent; MI Ottawa.
8.5 17.7 12.6 16.7
2.2 14.3 5.2
5.2
Page E-33
5320 Muskegon - Norton Shores - Muskegon Heights, Ml MI Muskegon; MI Oceana. Non-SMSA Counties MI Allegan; MI Antrim; MI Benzie; MI Charlevoix; MI Emmet; MI Grand Traverse; MI Kalkaska; MI Lake; MI Leelanau; MI Manistee; MI Mason; MI Mecosta; MI Missaukee; MI Montcalm; MI Newaygo; MI Osceola; MI Wexford. 074 Lansing - Kalamazoo, MI: SMSA Counties: 0780 Battle Creek, MI MI Barry; MI Calhoun. 3520 Jackson, MI MI Jackson. 3720 Kalamazoo-Portage, MI MI Kalamazoo; MI Van Buren. 4040 Lansing-East Lansing, MI MI Clinton; MI Eaton; MI Ingham; MI Ionia. Non-SMSA Counties MI Branch; MI Hillsdale.
9.7 4.9
7.2 5.1 5.9 5.5 5.5
Indiana: 075 South Bend, IN: SMSA Counties: 7800 South Bend, IN IN Marshall; IN St. Joseph, 2330 Elkhart IN IN Elkhart. Non-SMSA Counties IN Fulton; IN Kosciusko; IN Lagrange; MI Berrien; MI Cass; MI St. Joseph. 076 Fort Wayne, IN: Non-SMSA Counties IN Allen; IN Dekalb; IN Wells; IN Huntington; IN Noble; IN Steuben; IN Whitley; OH Defiance; OH Paulding; OH Williams. 077 Kokomo-Marion, IN: SMSA Counties: 3850 Kokomo, IN IN Howard; IN Tipton. Non-SMSA Counties IN Cass; IN Grant; IN Miami; IN Wabash. 078 Anderson-Muncie, IN: SMSA Counties: 0400 Anderson, IN IN Madison. 5280 Muncie, IN IN Delaware. Non-SMSA Counties IN Blackford; IN Fayette; IN Henry; IN Jay; IN Randolph; IN Union; IN Wayne. 079 Indianapolis, IN: SMSA Counties: 1020 Bloomington, IN IN Monroe. 3480 Indianapolis, IN IN Boone; IN Hamilton; IN Hendricks; IN Johnson; IN Marion; IN Morgan; IN Shelby. Non-SMSA Counties IN Bartholomew; IN Brown; IN Daviess; IN Decatur; IN Greene; IN Jackson; IN Jennings; IN Lawrence; IN Martin; IN Owen; IN Putnam; IN Rush.
7.1 4.0 6.2 4.4
4.4 3.7
4.9 5.3 3.9
3.1 12.5 9.7
Page E-34
080 Evansville, IN: SMSA Counties 2440 Evansville, IN-KY IN Gibson; IN Posey; IN Vanderburgh; IN Warrick; KY Henderson. 5990 Owensboro, KY KY Daviess. Non-SMSA Counties IL Edwards; IL Gallatin; IL Hamilton; IL Lawrence; IL Saline; IL Wabash; IL White; IN Dubois; IN Knox; IN Perry; IN Pike; IN Spencer; KY Hancock; KY Hopkins; KY McLean; KY Muhlenberg; KY Ohio; KY Union; KY Webster. 081 Terre Haute, IN: SMSA Counties: 8320 Terre Haute, IN IN Clay; IN Sullivan; IN Vermillion; IN Vigo. Non-SMSA Counties IL Clark; IL Crawford; IN Parke. 082 Lafayette, IN: SMSA Counties: 3920 Lafayette - West Lafayette, IN IN Tippecanoe. Non-SMSA Counties IN Benton; IN Carroll; IN Clinton; IN Fountain; IN Montgomery; IN Warren; IN White.
4.8 4.7 3.5
3.1 2.5
2.7 1.5
Illinois: 083 Chicago, IL: SMSA Counties: 1600 Chicago, IL IL Cook; IL Du Page; IL Kane; IL Lake; IL McHenry; IL Will. 2960 Gary - Hammond - East Chicago, IN IN Lake; IN Porter. 3740 Kankakee. IL IL Kankakee. 3800 Kensoha, WI WI Kenosha. Non-SMSA Counties IL Bureau; IL De Kalb; IL Grundy; IL Iroquois; IL Kendall; IL La Salle; IL Livingston; IL Putnam; IL Jasper; IN Laporte; IN Newton; IN Pulaski; IN Starke. 084 Champaign-Urbana, IL: SMSA Counties: 1400 Champaign - Urbana Rantoul, IL IL Champaign. Non-SMSA Counties IL Coles; IL Cumberland; IL Douglas; IL Edgar; IL Ford; IL Platt; IL Vermilion. 085 Springfield-Decatur, IL: SMSA Counties: 2040 Decatur, IL IL Macon. 7880 Springfield, IL IL Menard; IL Sangamon. Non-SMSA Counties IL Cass; IL Christian; IL De Witt; IL Logan; IL Morgan; IL Moultrie; IL Scott; IL Shelby. 086 Quincy, IL: Non-SMSA Counties IL Adams; IL Brown; IL Pike; MO Lewis; MO Marlon; MO Pike; MO Rails.
19.6 20.9 9.1 3.0 18.4
7.8 4.8
7.6 4.5 4.0
3.1
Page E-35
087 Peoria, IL: SMSA Counties 1040 Bloomington - Normal, IL IL McLean. 8120 Peoria, IL IL Peoria; IL Tazewell; IL Woodford. Non-SMSA Counties IL Fulton; IL Knox; IL McDonough; IL Marshall; IL Mason; IL Schuyler; IL Stark; IL Warren. 088 Rockford, IL: SMSA Counties: 6880 Rockford, IL IL Boone; IL Winnegago. 3620 Janesville - Beloit WI WI Rock Non-SMSA Counties IL Lee; IL Ogle; IL Stephenson.
2.5 4.4 3.3
6.3 3.1 4.6
Wisconsin: 089 Milwaukee, WI: SMSA Counties: 5080 Milwaukee, WI WI Milwaukee; WI Ozaukee; WI Washington; WI Waukesha. 6600 Racine, WI WI Racine. Non-SMSA Counties WI Dodge; WI Jefferson; WI Sheboygan; WI Walworth. 090 Madison, WI: SMSA Counties: 4720 Madison, WI WI Dane. Non-SMSA Counties WI Adams; WI Columbia; Wl Green; WI Iowa; WI Marquette; Wl Richland; WI Sauk. 091 La Crosse, WI: SMSA Counties: 3870 LaCrosse. WI Non-SMSA Counties MN Houston; MN Winona; WI Buffalo; WI Jackson; WI Juneau; WI Monroe; WI Trempealeau; WI Vernon. 092 Eau Claire, WI: SMSA Counties: 2290 Eau Claire, WI WI Chippewa; WI Eau Claire. Non-SMSA Counties Wl Barron; WI Dunn; WI Pepin; WI Rusk; WI Sawyer; WI Washburn. 093 Wausau, WI: Non-SMSA Counties WI Clark; WI Langlade; WI Lincoln; WI Marathon; WI Oneida; WI Portage; WI Price; WI Taylor; WI Vilas; WI Wood. 094 Appleton - Green Bay - Oshkosh, WI: SMSA Counties: 0460 Appleton-Oshkosh, WI WI Calumet; WI Outaramie; WI Winnebago. 3080 Green Bay, WI WI Brown.
8.0 8.4 7.0
2.2 1.7
0.9 0.6
0.5 0.6 0.6
0.9 1.3
Page E-36
Non-SMSA Counties MI Alger; MI Baraga; MI Delta; MI Dickinson; MI Houghton; MI Iron; MI Keweenaw; MI Marquette; MI Menominee; MI Schoolcraft; WI Door; WI Florence; WI Fond Du Lac; WI Forest WI Green Lake; WI Kewaunea; WI Manitowoc; WI Marinette; WI Menominee; WI Oconto; WI Shawano; WI Waupaca; Waushara. 095 Duluth, MN: SMSA Counties: 2240 Duluth - Superior, MN-WI MN St Louis; Wl Douglas. Non-SMSA Counties MI Gogebic; MI Ontonagon; MN Carlton; MN Cook; MN Itasca; MN Koochiching; MN Lake; WI Ashland; W! Bayfield; WI Iron.
1.0
1.0 1.2
Minnesota: 096 Minneapolis-St. Paul, MN: SMSA Counties: 5120 Minneapolis-St. Paul, MN-WI MN Anoka; MN Carver; MN Chisago; MN Dakota; MN Hennepin; MN Ramsey; MN Scott; MN Washington; MN Wright; MN St. Croix. 6980 St. Cloud, MN MN Benton; MN Sherburne; MN Stearns. Non-SMSA Counties MN Aitkin; MN Big Stone; MN Blue Earth; MN Brown; MN Cass; MN Chippewa; MN Crow Wing; MN Douglas; MN Faribault; MN Goodhue; MN Grant; MN Isanti; MN Kanabec; MN Kandiyohi; MN Lac Qui Parle; MN Le Sueur; MN McLeod; MN Martin; MN Meeker; MN Mille Lacs; MN Mornson; MN Nicollet; MN Pine; MN Pope; MN Renville; MN Rice; MN Sibley; MN Stevens; MN Swift; MN Todd; MN Traverse; MN Wadena; MN Waseca; MN Watonwan; MN Yellow Medicine; WI Burnett; WI Pierce; WI Polk. 097 Rochester, MN: SMSA Counties: 6820 Rochester, MN MN Olmsted. Non-SMSA Counties MN Dodge; MN Fillmore; MN Freeborn; MN Mower; MN Steele; MN Wabasha. Iowa: 098 Dubuque, IA: SMSA Counties: 2200 Dubuque, IA IA Dubuque Non-SMSA Counties IL Jo Daviess; IA Allamakee; IA Clayton; IA Delaware, IA Jackson; IA Winneshiek; WI Crawford; WI Grant; Wl Lafayette. 099 Davenport-Rock Island-Moline, IA-IL: SMSA Counties: 1960 Davenport-Rock Island-Moline, IA-IL IL Henry; IL Rock Island; IA Scott. Non-SMSA Counties IL Carroll; IL Handcock; IL Henderson; IL Mercer; IL Whiteside; IA Clinton; IA Des Moines; IA Henry; IA Lee; IA Louisa; IA Muscatine; MO Clark. 100 Cedar Rapids, IA: SMSA Counties: 1360 Cedar Rapids, IA IA Linn. Non-SMSA Counties Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors
2.9 0.5 2.2
1.4 0.9
0.6 0.5
4.6 3.4
1.7 1.5 Page E-37
IA Benton; IA Cedar; IA Iowa; IA Johnson; IA Jones; IA Washington. 101 Waterloo, IA: SMSA Counties: 8920 Waterloo-Cedar Falls, IA IA Black Hawk. Non-SMSA Counties IA Bremer; IA Buchanan; IA Butler; IA Cerro Gordo; IA Chickasaw; IA Fayette; IA Floyd; IA Franklin; IA Grundv; IA Hancock; IA Hardin; IA Howard; IA Mitchell; IA Winnegago; IA Worth. 102 Fort Dodge, IA: Non-SMSA Counties IA Bueno Vista; IA Calhoun; IA Carroll; IA Clay; IA Dickinson; IA Emmet; IA Greene; IA Hamilton; IA Humboldt; IA Kossuth; IA Palo Alto; IA Pocahontas; IA Sac; IA Webster; IA Wright. 103 Sioux City, IA: SMSA Counties: 7720 Sioux City, IA-NE IA Woodbury; NE Dakota. Non-SMSA Counties IA Cherokee, IA Crawford; IA Ida; IA Monona; IA O'Brien; IA Plymouth; IA. Sioux; NE Antelope; NE Cedar; NE Cuminq; NE Dixon; NE Knox; NE Madison; NE Pierce; NE Stanton; NE Thurston; NE Wayne; SD Bon Homme; SD Clay; SD Union; SD Yankton. 104 Des Moines, IA: SMSA Counties: 2120 Des Moines, IA IA Polk; IA Warren. Non-SMSA Counties IA Adair; IA Appanoose; IA Boone; IA Clarke; IA Dallas; IA Davis; IA Decatur; IA Guthrie; IA Jasper; IA Jefferson; IA Keokuk; IA Lucas; IA Madison; IA Mahaska; IA Marion; IA Marshall; IA Monroe; IA Poweshiek; IA Ringgold; IA Story; IA Tama; IA Union; IA Van Buren; IA Wapello; IA Wayne.
4.7 2.0
0.4
1.9 1.2
4.5 2.4
Missouri: 105 Kansas City, MO: SMSA Counties: 3760 Kansas City, MO-KS KS Johnson; KS Wayandotte; MO Cass; MO Clay; MO Jackson; MO Platte; MO Ray. 4150 Lawrence, KS 7000 St Joseph. MO MO Andrew; MO Buchanan. Non-SMSA Counties KS Anderson; KS Atchison; KS Brown; KS Doniphan; KS Franklin; KS Leavenworth; KS Linn; KS Miami; MO Atchison; MO Bates; MO Benton; MO Caldwell; MO Caroll; MO Clinton; MO Daviess; MO Dekalb; MO Gentry; MO Grundy; MO Harrison; MO Henry; MO Holt; MO Johnson; MO Lafayette; MO Livingston; MO Mercer; MO Nodaway; MO Pettis; MO Saline; MO Worth. 106 Columbia, MO: SMSA Counties: 1740 Columbia, MO; MO Boone Non-SMSA Counties MO Adair; MO Audrain; MO Callaway; MO Camden; MO Chariton; MO Cole; MO Cooper; MO Howard; MO Knox; MO Linn;. MO Macon; MO Miller; MO Moniteau; MO Monroe; MO Morgan; MO Osage; MO Putnam; MO Randolph; MO Schuyler; MO Scotland; MO Shelby; MO Sullivan.
12.7 7.2 3.2 10.0
6.3 4.0
Page E-38
107 St. Louis, MO: SMSA Counties: 14.7 7040 St. Louis, MO-IL IL Clinton; IL Madison; IL Monroe; IL St. Clair; MO Franklin; MO Jefferson; MO St. Charles; MO St. Louis; MO St. Louis City. 11.4 Non-SMSA Counties IL Alexander IL Bond; IL Calhoun; IL Clay; IL Effingharn; IL Fayette; IL Franklin; IL Greene; IL Jackson; IL Jasper; IL Jefferson; IL Jersey; IL Johnson; IL Macoupin; IL Marion; IL Montgomery; IL Perry; IL Pulaski; IL Randolph; IL Richland; IL Union; IL Washington; IL Wayne; IL Williamson; MO Bollinger; MO Butler; MO Cape Girardeau; MO Carter; MO Crawford; MO Dent; MO Gasconade; MO Iron; MO Lincoln; MO Madison; MO Maries; Mississippi; MO Montgomery; MO Perry; MO Phelps; MO Reynolds; MO Ripley; MO St. Francis; MO Ste. Genevieve; MO Scott; MO Stoddard; MO Warren; MO Washington; MO Wayne. 108 Springfield, MO: SMSA Counties: 2.0 7920 Springfield, MO MO Christian; MO Greene. 2.3 Non-SMSA Counties KS Allen; KS Bourbon; KS Cherokee; KS Crawford; KS Labette; KS Montgomery; KS Neosho; KS Wilson; KS Woodson; MO Barry; MO Barton; MO Cedar; MO Dade; MO Dallas;.MO Douglas; MO Hickory; MO Howell; MO Jasper; MO Laclede; MO Lawrence; MO McDonald; MO Newton; MO Oregon; MO Ozark; MO Polk; MO Pulaski; MO St. Clair; MO Shannon; MO Stone; MO Taney; MO Texas; MO Vernon; MO Webster; MO Wright; OK Craig; OK Ottawa.
Arkansas: 109 Fayetteville, AR: Non-SMSA Counties AR Baxter; AR Benton; AR Boone; AR Carroll; AR Madison; AR Marion; AR Newton; AR Searcy; AR Washington; OK Adair; OK Delaware. 110 Fort Smith, AR: SMSA Counties: 2720 Fort Smith, AR-OK AR Crawford; AR Sebastian; OK Le Flore; OK Sequoyah. Non-SMSA Counties AR Franklin; AR Logan; AR Polk; AR Scott; OK Choctaw; OK Haskell; OK Latimer; OK McCurtain; OK Pittsburg; OK Pushmataha. 111 Little Rock-North Little Rock, AR: SMSA Counties: 4400 Little Rock-North Little Rock, AR AR Pulaski; AR Saline. 6240 Pine Bluff, AR AR Jefferson Non-SMSA Counties AR Arkansas; AR Ashley; AR Bradley; AR Calhoun; AR Chicott; AR Clark; AR Calhoun; AR Cleveland; AR Conway; AR Dallas; AR Desha; AR Drew; AR Faulkner; AR Fulton: AR Garland; AR Grant; AR Hot Springs; AR Independence; AR Izard; AR Jackson; AR Johnson; AR Lincoln; AR Lonoke; AR Monroe; AR Montgomery; AR Ouachita; AR Perry, AR Pope; AR Prairie; AR Sharp; AR Stone; AR Union; AR Van Buren; AR While; AR Woodruft; AR Yell. _3.3
5.6 6.6
15.7 31.2 16.4
Page E-39
Mississippi: 112 Jackson, MS: SMSA Counties; 3560 Jackson, MS MS Hinds; MS Rankin. Non-SMSA Counties MS Attala; MS Choctaw; MS Choctaw; MS Clarke; MS Copiah; MS Covington; MS Franklin; MS Holmes: MS Humphreys; MS Issaquena; MS Jasper; MS Jefferson; MS Jefferson Davis; MS Jones; MS Kemper; MS Lauderdale; MS Lawrence; MS Leake; MS Lincoln; MS Lowndes; MS Madison; MS Neshoba; MS Newton; MS Noxubee; MS Oktibbeha; MS Scott; MS Sharkey; MS Simpson; MS Smith; MS Warren; MS Wayne; MS Winston; MS Yazoo.
30.3 32.0
Louisiana: 113 New Orleans, LA: SMSA Counties 0920 Biloxi-Gulfport, MS MS Hancock; MS Harrison; MS Stone. 5560 New Orleans, LA LA Jefferson; LA Orleans; LA St. Bernard; LA St. Tammany. Non-SMSA Counties LA Assumption; LA Lafourche; LA Plaquemines; LA St. Charles; LA St. James; LA St. John The Baptist; LA Tangipahoa; LA Terrebonne; LA Washington; MS Forrest; MS Lamar; MS Marion; MS Pearl River; MS Perry; MS Pike; MS Walthall. 114 Baton Rouge, LA: SMSA Counties: 0760 Baton Rouge, LA LA Ascension; LA East Baton Rouge; LA Livingston; LA West Baton Rouge. Non-SMSA Counties LA Concordia; LA E. Feliciana; LA Iberville; LA Pointe Coupee; LA St. Helena; LA West Feliciana; MS Adams; MS Amite; MS Wilkinson. 115 Lafayette, LA: SMSA Counties: 3880 Lafayette, LA LA Lafayette. Non-SMSA Counties LA Acadia; LA Evangeline; LA Iberia; LA St. Landry; LA St. Martin; LA St. Mary; LA Vermillion. 116 Lake Charles, LA: SMSA Counties: 3960 Lake Charles, LA LA Calcasieu. Non-SMSA Counties LA Allen; LA Beauregard; LA Cameron; LA Jefferson Davis LA Vernon. 117 Shreveport, LA: SMSA Counties: 0220 Alexandria, LA LA Grant; LA Rapides. 7680 Shreveport, LA LA Bossier; LA Caddo; LA Webster. Non-SMSA Counties LA Avoyelles; LA Bienville; LA Claiborne; LA De Soto; LA Natchitoches; LA Red River; LA Sabine; LA Winn.
19.2 31.0 27.7
26.1 30.4
20.6 24.1.
19.3 17.8
25.7 29.3 29.3
Page E-40
118 Monroe, LA: SMSA Counties: 22.8 5200 Monroe, LA LA Ouachita. 27.9 Non-SMSA Counties LA Caldwell; LA Catahoula; LA East Carroll; LA Franklin; LA Jackson; LA La Salle; LA Lincoln; LA Madison; LA Morehouse; LA Richland; LA Tensas; LA Union; LA West Carroll.
Texas: 119 Texarkana, TX: SMSA Counties: 8360 Texarkana, TX-Texarkana, AR AR Little River; AR Miller; TX Bowie. Non-SMSA Counties AR Columbia; AR Hempstead; AR Howard; AR Lafayette; AR Nevada; AR Pike; AR Sevier; TX Camp; TX Cass; TX Lamar; TX Morris; TX Red River; TX Titus. 120 Tyler-Longview, TX: SMSA Counties: 4420 Longview, TX TX Gregg; TX Harrison. 8640 Tyler, TX TX Smith. 22.5 Non-SMSA Counties TX Anderson; TX Angelina; TX Cherokee; TX Henderson; TX Houston; TX Marion; TX Nacogdoches; TX Panola; TX Rusk; TX San Augustine; TX Shelby; TX Upshur; TX Wood. 121 Beaumont-Port Arthur, TX: SMSA Counties: 0840 Beaumont-Port Arthur Orange, TX TX Hardin; TX Jefferson; TX Orange. Non-SMSA Counties TX Jasper; TX Newton; TX Sabine; TX Tyler. 122 Houston, TX: SMSA Counties 1260 Bryan-College Station, TX TX Brazos. 2920 Galveston-Texas City, TX TX Galveston. 3360 Houston, TX TX Brazona; TX Fort Bend; TX Harris; TX Liberty, TX Montgomery, TX Waller. Non-SMSA Counties TX Austin; TX Burleson; TX Calhoun; TX Chambers; TX Colorado; TX De Witt; TX Fayette; TX Goliad; TX Grimes; TX Jackson; TX Lavaca; TX Leon; TX Madison; TX Matagorda; TX Polk; TX Robertson; TX San Jacinto; TX Trinity; TX Victoria; TX Walker; TX Washington; TX Wharton. 123 Austin, TX: SMSA Counties: 0640 Austin, TX TX Hays; TX Travis; TX Williamson. Non-SMSA Counties TX Bastrop; TX Blanco; TX Burnet; TX Caldwell; TX Lee; TX Llano. 124 Waco-Killeen-Temple, TX: SMSA Counties: 3810 Killeen-Temple, TX. TX Belt TX Coryall. 8800 Waco, TX TX McLermarx Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors
19.7 20.2
22.8 23.5
22.6 22.6
23.7 28.9 27.3 27.4
24.1 24.2
16.4 20.7
Page E-41
Non-SMSA Counties 18.6 TX Bosque; TX Falls; TX Freestone; TX Hamilton; TX Hill; TX Lampasas; TX Limestone; TX Milam; TX Mills. 125 Dallas-Fort Worth, TX: SMSA Counties 18.2 1920 Dallas-Fort Worth, TX TX Collier; TX Dallas; TX Denton; TX Ellis; TX Hood; TX Johnson; TX Kaufman; TX Parker; TX Rockwall; TX Tarrant; TX Wise. 9.4 7640 Sherman-Denison, TX TX Grayson. 17.2 Non-SMSA Counties OK Bryan; TX Cooke; TX Delta; TX Erath; TX Fannin; TX Franklin; TX Hopkins; TX Hunt; TX Jack; TX Montague; TX Navarro; TX Palo Pinto; TX Rains; TX Sommerveil; TX Van Zandt. 126 Wichita Falls, TX: SMSA Counties: 12.4 9080 Wichita Falls, TX: TX Clay; TX Wichita. 11.0 Non-SMSA Counties TX Archer; TX Baylor; TX Cottle; TX Foard; TX Hardeman; TX Wilbarger; TX Young. 127 Abilene, TX: SMSA Counties: 11.6 0040 Abilene, TX TX Callahan; TX Jones; TX Taylor. 10.9 Non-SMSA Counties TX Brown; TX Coleman; TX; Comanche; TX Eastland; TX Fisher; TX Haskell; TX Kent; TX Knox; TX Mitchell; TX Nolan; TX Scurry; TX Shackelford; TX Stephens; TX Stonewall; TX Throckmorton. 128 San Angelo, TX: SMSA Counties: 7200 San Angelo, TX 19.2 TX Tom Green. 20.0 Non-SMSA Counties TX Coke; TX Concha; TX Crockett; TX Irion; TX Kimble; TX McCulloch; TX Mason; TX Menard; TX Reagan; TX Runnels; TX San Saba; TX Schleicher; TX Sterling; TX Sutton, TX Terrell. 129 San Antonio, TX: SMSA Counties: 87.3 4080 Laredo TX Webb. 47.8 7240 San Antonio, TX TX Bexar; TX Comal; TX Guadalupe. Non-SMSA Counties 49.4 TX Atascosa; TX Bandera; TX Dimmit; TX Edwards; TX Frio; TX Gillespie; TX Gonzales; TX Jim Hogg; TX Karnes; TX Kendall; TX Kerr; TX Kinney; TX La Salle; TX McMullen; TX Maverick; TX Medina; TX Real; TX Uvalde; TX Val Verde; TX Wilson; TX Zapata; TX Zavala. 130 Corpus Christi, TX: SMSA Counties: 1880 Corpus Christi, TX 41.7 TX Nueces; TX San Patricio. 44.2 Non-SMSA Counties TX Aransas; TX Bee; TX Brooks; TX Duval; TX Jim Wells; TX Kenady; TX Kyberg; TX Live Oak; TX Refugio. 131 Brownsville-McAllen-Harlingen, TX: SMSA Counties: 1240 Brownsville-Harlingen-San Benito, TX 71.0 TX Cameron. 72.8 4880 McAllen-Pharr-Edinburg, TX Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors Page E-42
TX Hidalgo. Non-SMSA Counties TX Starr; TX Willacy. 132 Odessa-Midland, TX: SMSA Counties: 5040 Midland, TX TX Midland. 5800 Odessa, TX TX Ector. Non-SMSA Counties TX Andrews; TX Crane; TX Glasscock; TX Howard; TX Loving; TX Martin; TX Pecos; TX Reeves; TX Upton; TX Ward; TX Winkler. 133 El Paso, TX: SMSA Counties: 2320 El Paso, TX TX El Paso. Non-SMSA Counties NM Chaves; NM Dona Ana; NM Eddy; NM Grant; NM Hidalgo; NM Luna; NM Otero; NM Sierra, TX Brewster; TX Culberson; TX Hudspeth; TX Jeff Davis; TX Presidio. 134 Lubbock, TX: SMSA Counties: 4600 Lubbock TX Lubbock. Non-SMSA NM Lea; NM Roosevelt ; TX Bailey; TX Borden; TX Cochran; TX Crosby; TX Dawson; TX Dickens; TX Floyd; TX Gaines; TX Garza; TX Hale; TX Hockley; TX King; TX Lamb; TX Lynn; TX Motley; TX Terry; TX Yoakum. 135 Amarillo, TX: SMSA Counties: 0320 Amarillo, TX TX Potter; TX Randall. Non-SMSA Counties NM Curry; NM Harding; NM Quay; NM Union; OK Beaver; OK Cimarron; OK Texas; TX Arnstrong; TX Briscoe; TX Carson; TX Castro; TX Childress; TX Collingsworth; TX Dallam; TX Deaf Srnith; TX Donley; TX Gray; TX Hall; TX Hansford; TX Hartley; TX Hemphill; TX Hutchinson; TX Lipscomb; TX Moore; TX Ochitree; TX Oldham; TX Parmer; TX Roberts; TX Sherman; TX Swisher; TX Wheeler.
72.9
19.1 15.1 18.9
57.8 49.0
19.6 19.5
9.3 11.0
Oklahoma: 136 Lawton, OK: SMSA Counties: 4200 Lawton, OK OK Comanche. Non-SMSA Counties OK Cotton; OK Green; OK. Harmon; OK Jackson; OK Jefferson; OK Kiowa; OK Stephens; OK Tillman. 137 Oklahoma City, OK: SMSA Counties 5880 Oklahoma City, OK OK Canadian; OK Cleveland; OK McClain; OK Oklahoma; OK Pottawatomie. Non-SMSA Counties OK Alfalfa; OK Atoka; OK Beckham; OK Blaine; OK Caddo; OK Carter; OK Coat; OK Custer; OK Dewey; OK Ellis; OK Garfield; OK Garvin; OK Grady; OK Grant; OK Harper; OK Hughes; OK Johnston; OK Kingfisher; OK Lincoln; OK Logan; OK Love; OK Major; OK Marshall; OK Murray, OK Okfuskee; OK Pontotoc; OK Roger Mills; OK Seminole; OK Washita; OK Woods; Ok Woodward.
14.8 10.8
10.2 9.0
Page E-43
138 TuIsa, OK: SMSA Counties: 8560 Tulsa, OK OK Creek; OK Mayes; OK Osage; OK Rogers; OK Tulsa; OK Wagoner. Non-SMSA Counties OK Cherokee; OK Key; OK McIntosh; OK Muskogee; OK Noble; OK Nowata; OK Okmulgee; OK Pawnee; OK Payne; OK Washington.
10.2 10.0
Kansas: 139 Wichita, KS: SMSA Counties: 9040 Wichita, KS KS Butler; KS Sedgwick. Non-SMSA Counties KS Barber; KS Barton; KS Chase; KS Chautauqua; KS Clark; KS Comanche. KS Cowley; KS Edwards; KS Elk; KS Finney; KS Ford; KS Grant; KS Gray; KS Greeley; KS Greenwood; KS Hamilton; KS Harper; KS Harvey; KS Haskell; KS Hodgeman; KS Kearny; KS Kingman; KS Kiowa; KS Lane; KS McPherson; KS Marion; KS Meade; KS Morton; KS Ness; KS Pawnee; KS Pratt; KS Reno; KS Rice; KS Rush; KS Scott; KS Seward; KS Stafford; KS Stanton; KS Stevens; KS Sumner, KS Wichita. 140 Salina, KS: Non-SMSA Counties KS Cheyenne; KS Cloud; KS Decatur; KS Dickinson; KS Ellis; KS Ellsworth; KS Gove; KS Graham; KS Jewell; KS Lincoln; KS Logan; KS Mitchell; KS Norton; KS Osborne; KS Ottawa; KS Phillips; KS Rawlins; KS Republic; KS Rooks; KS Russell; KS Saline; KS Sheridan; KS Sherman; KS Smith; KS Thomas; KS Trego; KS Wallace. 141 Topeka, KS: SMSA Counties: 8440 Topeka, KS KS Jefferson; KS Osage; KS Shawnee. Non-SMSA Counties KS CIay; Coffey; KS Geary; KS Jackson; KS Lyon; KS Marshall; KS Morris; KS Nemaha; KS Pottawatomie, KS Riley; KS Wabaunsee; KS Washington.
7.9 5.7
1.5
9.0 8.5
Nebraska: 142 Lincoln, NE: SMSA Counties: 4360 Lincoln, NE NE Lancaster. Non SMSA Counties NE Butler; NE Fillmore; NE Gage; NE Jefferson; NE Johnson; NE Nemaha; NE Otoe; NE Pawnee; NE Polk; NE Richardson; NE Saline, NE Seward; NE Thayer; NE York. 143 Omaha, NE: SMSA CountieS: 5920 Omaha, NE-IA IA Pottawattamie; NE Douglas; NE Sarpy. Non-SMSA IA Adams; IA Audubon; IA Cass; IA Fremont; IA Harrison; LA Mills; IA Montgomery; IA Page; IA Shelby; IA Taylor; NE Burt; NE Cass; NE Colfax; NE Dodge; NE Platte; NE Saunders; NE Washington. 144 Grand Island, NE: Non SMSA Counties NE Adams; NE Aurther; NE Blaine; NE Boyd; NE Brown; NE Buffalo; NE Chase; NE Cherry; NE Clay; NE Custer; NE Dawson; NE Dundy; NE Franklin; NE Frontier; NE Fumas; NE Garfield; NE Gosper; NE Grant; NE Greeley, NE Hall; NE Hamilton; Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors
2.8 1.9
7.6 6.3
1.4
Page E-44
NE Harlan; NE Hayes; NE Hitchcock; NE Holt; NE Hooker; NE Howard; NE Kearney; NE Keith; NE Keya Paha; NE Lincoln; NE Logan; NE Loup; NE McPherson; NE Merrick; NE Nance; NE Nuckolls; NE Perkins; NE Phelps; NE Red Willow; NE Rock; NE Sherman; NE Thomas; NE Valley; NE Webster; NE Wheeler. 145 Scottsbluff, NE: 5.3 Non-SMSA Counties NE Banner; NE Box Butt; NE Cheyenne; NE Dawes; NE Deuel; NE Garden; NE Kimball; NE Morrill; NE Scotts Buff; NE Sheridan; NE Sioux; NE Goshen.
South Dakota: 146 Rapid City, SD: SMSA Counties: 6660 Rapid City, SD SD Pennington; SD Meade. Non-SMSA Counties SD Bennett; SD Buffalo; SD Butte; SD Campbell; SD Corson; SD Custer; SD Dewey (Armstrong); SD Fall River; SD Haakon; SD Harding; SD Hughes; SD Hyde; SD Jackson; SD Jones; SD Lawrence; SD Lyman; SD Mellette; SD Perkins; SD Potter; SD Shannon (Washington); SD Stanley; SD Sully; SD Todd; SD Tripp; SD Walworth; SD Washabaugh; SD Ziebach; WY Crook; WY Niobrara; WY Weston. 147 Sioux Falls, SD: SMSA Counties: 7760 Sioux Falls, SD SD Minnehaha. Non-SMSA Counties IA Lyon; IA Osceola; MN Cottonwood; MN Jackson;. MN Lincoln; MN Lyon; MN Murray, MN Nobles; MN Pipestone; MN Redwood; MN Rock; SD Aurora; SD Beadle; SD Brookings; SD Brule; SD Charles Mix; SD Davison; SD Douglas; SD Gregory; SD Hand; SD Hanson; SD Hutchinson; SD Jerauld; SD Kingsbury; SD Lake; SD Lincoln; SD McCook, SD Miner, SD Moody, SD Sanborn; SD Turner. 148 Aberdeen, SD: Non-SMSA Counties SD Brown; SD Clark; SD Codington; SD Day; SD Deuel; SD Edmunds; SD Faulk; SD Grant; SD Hamlin; SD McPherson; SD Marshall; SD Roberts; SD Spink.
3.4 7.9
1.2 0.8
1.3
North Dakota: 149 Fargo-Moorhead, ND-MN: Non-SMSA Counties MN Becker MN Clay; MN Cass; MN Wilkin; ND Barnes; ND Dickey; ND Eddy; ND Foster; ND Griggs; ND La Moure; ND Logan; ND McIntosh; ND Ransom; ND Richland; ND Sargent; ND Steele; ND Stutsman; ND Traill. 150 Grand Forks, ND: SMSA Counties: 2985 Grand Forks, ND-MN MN Polk; ND Grand Forks. Non-SMSA Counties MN Beltrami; MN Clearwater MN Hubbard. MN Kittson; MN Lake of the Woods; MN Mahnomen; MN Marshall; MN Norman; MN Pennington; MN Red Lake; MN Roseau; MN Benson; ND Cavalier; ND Nelson; ND Pembina; ND Ramsey; ND Towner; ND Walsh. 151 Bismarck, ND: SMSA Counties: 1010 Bismarck, ND ND Burleigh; ND Morton. 0.7
1.2 2.0
0.4
Page E-45
Non-SMSA Counties 1.3 ND Adams; ND Billings; ND Bowman; ND Dunn; ND Emmons; ND Golden Valley; ND Grant; ND Hettinger; ND Kidder; ND Mercer; ND Oliver; ND Sheridan; ND Sioux; ND Slope; ND Stark; ND Wells. 152 Minot, ND: 4.4 Non-SMSA Counties MT Daniels; MT Richland; MT Roosevelt; MT Sheridan; ND Bottineau; ND Burke; ND Divide; ND McHenry; ND McKenzie; ND McLean; ND Mountrail; ND Pierce; ND Renville; ND Rolette; ND Ward; ND Williams.
Montana: 153 Great Falls, MT: SMSA Counties. 3040 Great Falls, MT MT Cascade. Non-SMSA Counties MT Blaine; MT Broadwater; MT Chouteau; MT Fergus; MT Glacier; MT Hill; MT Jefferson; MT Judith Basin; MT Lewis and Clark; MT Liberty; MT Meagher; MT Petroleum; MT Phillips; MT Pondera; MT Teton; MT Toole; MT Valley; MT Wheatland. 154 Missoula, MT: Non-SMSA Counties MT Beaverhead; MT Deer Lodge; MT Flathead; MT Granite; MT Lincoln; MT Madison; MT Mineral; MT Missoula; MT Powell; MT Ravalli; MT Sanders; MT Silver Bow; MT Lake. 155 Billings, MT: SMSA Counties: 0880 Billings, MT MT Yellowstone. Non-SMSA Counties MT Big Horn; MT Carbon; MT Carter; MT Custer; MT Dawson; MT Fallon; MT Gallatin; MT Garfield; MT Golden Valley; MT McCone; MT Musselshell; MT Park; MT Powder River; MT Prairie; UT Rosebud; MT Stillwater, MT Sweet Grass; MT Treasure; MT Wilbaux; MT Yellowstone Natl Park; WY Big Horn; WY Hot Springs; WY Park; WY Sheridan; WY Washakie.
3.2 4.1
2.7
3.3 3.3
Wyoming: 156 Cheyenne-Casper, WY: Non-SMSA Counties CO Jackson; WY Albany; WY Campbell; WY Carbon; WY Converse; WY Fremont WY Johnson; WY Laramie; WY Natrona, WY Platte. 7.5
Colorado: 157 Denver, CO: SMSA Counties: 2080 Denver-Boulder, CO CO Adams; CO Arapahoe; C0 Boulder. CO Denver; CO Douglas; CO Gilpin; CO Jefferson. 2670 Fort Collins, CO CO Larimer. 3060 Greeley, CO CO Weld.
13.8 6.9 13.1
Page E-46
Non-SMSA Counties CO Cheyenne; CO Clear Creek; CO Elbert CO Grand; CO Kit Carson; CO Logan; CO Morgan; CO Park; CO Phillips; :CO Sedgwick; CO Summit; CO Washington; CO Yuma. 158 Colorado Springs-Pueblo, CO: SMSA Counties: 1720 Colorado Springs, CO CO EL Paso; CO Teller. 6560 Pueblo, CO CO Pueblo. Non-SMSA Counties CO Alamosa; CO Baca; CO Bent; CO Chaffee; CO Conejos; CO Costilla; CO Crowley; CO Custer; CO Fremont; CO Huerfano; CO Kiowa; CO Lake; CO Las Animas; CO Lincoln; CO Mineral; CO Otero; CO Prowers; CO Rio Grande; CO Saguache. 159 Grand Junction. CO: Non-SMSA Counties CO Archuleta; CO Delta; CO Dolores; CO Eagle; CO Garfield; CO Gunnison; CO Hinsdale; CO La Plata, CO Mesa; CO Moffat; CO Montezuma; CO Montrose; CO Ouray; CO Pitkin; CO Rio Blanco; CO Routt; CO San Juan; CO San Miguel; UT Grand; UT San Juan.
12.8
10.9 27.5 19.0
10.2
New Mexico: 160 Albuquerque, NM: SMSA Counties. 0200 Albuquerque, NM 38.3 NM Bernalillo; NM Sandoval. Non-SMSA Counties 45.9 NM Citron. NM Colfax; NM De Baca; NM Guadalupe; NM San Juan; NM San Miguel; NM Santa Fe; NM Socorro; NM Taos; NM Torrance; NM Valencia.
Arizona: 161 Tucson, AZ: SMSA Counties: 8520 Tucson, AZ AZ Pima. Non-SMSA Counties AZ Cochise; AZ Graham; AZ Greenlee; AZ Santa Cruz. 162 Phoenix, AZ: SMSA Counties: 6200 Phoenix, AZ AZ Maricopa. Non-SMSA Counties AZ Apache; AZ Coconino; AZ Gila; AZ Mohave; AZ Navajo; AZ Pinal; AZ Yavapai; AZ Yuma.
24.1 27.0
15.8 19.6
Nevada: 163 Las Vegas, NV: SMSA Counties: 4120 Las Vegas, NV NV Clark.
13.9
Page E-47
Non-SMSA Counties 12.6 NV Esmeralda; NV Lincoln; NV Nye;UT Beaver; UT Garfield; UT Iron; UT Kane; UT Washington. 164 Reno, NV: SMSA Counties: 6720 Reno, NV NV Washoe. Non-SMSA Counties NV Churchill; NV Douglas; NV Elko;NV Eureka; NV Humboldt; NV Lander; NV Lyon; NV Mineral; NV Pershing; NV Storey; NV White Pine; NV Carson City
8.2 9.2
Utah: 165 Salt Lake City, Ogden, UT: SMSA Counties 6520 Provo-Orem, UT UT Utah. 7160 Salt Lake City-Ogden, UT UT Davis; UT Salt Lake; UT Toole; UT Weber. Non-SMSA Counties ID Bear Lake; ID Franklin; ID Oneida; UT Box Elder; UT Cache; UT Carbon; UT Daggett; UT Duchesne; UT Emery; UT Juab; UT Millard; UT Morgan; UT Piute; UT Rich; UT Sanpete; UT Sevier; UT Summit; UT Uintah -UT Wasatch; UT Wayne; WY Lincoln; WY Sublette; WY Sweetwater; WY Uinta.
2.4 6.0 5.1
Idaho: 166 Pocatello-Idaho Falls, ID: Non-SMSA Counties ID Bannock; ID Bingham; ID Baline; ID Bonneville; ID Butte; ID Camas; ID Caribou; ID Cassia; ID Clark; ID Custer; ID Fremont; ID Gooding; ID Jefferson; ID Jerome; ID Lemini; ID Lincoln; ID Madison; ID Minidoka; ID Power; ID Teton; ID Twin Falls; WY Teton. 167 Boise City, ID: SMSA Counties: 1080 Boise City. ID ID Ada. Non-SMSA Counties ID Adams; ID Boise; ID Canyon; ID Elmore; ID Gem; ID Owyhee; ID Payette; ID Valley; ID Washington; OR Harney; OR Malheur. 4.0
2.3 4.4
Washington: 168 Spokane, WA: SMSA Counties: 7840 Spokane, WA WA Spokane. Non-SMSA Counties ID Benewah; ID Bonner; ID Boundary; ID Clearwater; ID Idaho; ID Kootena; ID Latah; ID Lewis; ID Nez Perce; ID Shoshone; WA Adams; WA Asotin; WA Columbia; WA Ferry; WA Garfield; WA Lincoln; WA Pend Orelle; WA Stevens; WA Whitman. 169 Richland, WA: SMSA Counties: 6740 Richland-Kennewick, WA WA Benton; WA FranklIn. Non-SMSA Counties Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors
2.8 3.0
5.4 3.8
Page E-48
OR Baker; OR Gilliam; OR Grant; OR Morrow; OR Umatilla; OR Union; OR Wallowa; OR Wheeler; WA Walla Walla. 170 Yakima, WA: SMSA Counties: 9260 Yakima, WA WA Yakima. Non-SMSA Counties WA Chelan; WA Douglas; WA Grant; WA Kittitas; WA Okanogan. 171 Seattle, WA: SMSA Counties: 7600 Seattle-Everett, WA WA King; WA Snohomish. ` 8200 Tacoma, WA WA Pierce. Non-SMSA Counties WA Clallarn; WA Grays Harbor; WA Island; WA Jefferson; WA Kitsap; WA Lewis; WA Mason; WA Pacific; WA San Juan; WA Skaqil; WA Thurston; WA Whatcom.
9.7 7.2
7.2 6.2 6.2
Oregon: 172 Portland, OR: SMSA Counties: 6440 Portland, OR-WA OR Clackamas; OR Muitnomah; OR Washinton; WA Clark. 7080 Salem OR OR Marion; OR Polk. Non-SMSA Counties: . . . OR Benton; OR Clatsop; OR Columbia; OR Crook; OR Deschutes; OR Hood River; OR Jefferson; OR Lincoln; OR Linn; OR Sherman; OR Tillammok; OR Wasco; OR Yamhill; WA Cowlitz; WA Klickitat; WA Skamania; WA Wahkiakum. 173 Eugene, OR: SMSA Counties: 2400 Eugene-Springfield, OR OR Lane. Non-SMSA Counties OR Coos; OR Curry; OR Douglas; OR Jackson; OR Josephine; OR Klamath; OR Lake
4.5 2.9
2.4 2.4
California: 174 Redding, CA: Non-SMSA Counties CA Lassen; CA Modoc; CA Plumas; CA; Shasta; CA Siskiyou; CA Tehama. 175 Eureka, CA: Non-SMSA Counties CA Del Norte; CA Humboldt; CA Trinity. 176 San Francisco-Oakland-San Jose, CA: SMSA Counties: 7120 Salinas-Seaside-Monterey, CA CA Monterey. 7360 San Francisco-Oakland, CA CA Alameda; CA Contra Costa; CA Marin; San Francisco; CA San Mateo. 7400 San Jose, CA CA Santa Clara. 7485 Santa Cruz, CA CA Santa Cruz. 7500 Santa Rosa, CA CA Sonoma.Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors 6.8 6.6
28.9 25.8 19.6 14.9 9.1
Page E-49
8720 Vallejo-Fairfield-Napa, CA CA Napa; CA Solano. Non-SMSA Counties CA Lake; CA Mendocino; CA San Benito. 177 Sacramento, CA: SMSA Counties: 6920 Sacramento, CA CA Placer; CA Sacramento; CA Yolo. Non-SMSA Counties CA Butte; CA Colusa; CA El Dorado; CA Glenn; CA Nevada; CA Sierra; CA Sutter; CA Yuba. 178 Stockton-Modesto, CA: SMSA Counties:5170 Modesto, CA CA Stanislaus 8120 Stockton, CA CA San Joaquin. Non-SMSA Counties CA Alpine; CA Amador; CA Calaveras; CA Mariposa; CA Merced, CA Tuolumne. 179 Fresno-Bakersfield, CA: SMSA Counties: 0680 Bakersfield, CA CA Kent 2840 Fresno, CA CA Fresno Non-SMSA Counties CA Kings; CA Madera CA Tulare. 180 Los Angeles, CA: SMSA Counties. 0360 Anaheim-Santa Ana-Garden Grove, CA CA Orange. 4480 Los Angeles-Long Beach, CA CA Los Angeles 6000 Oxnard-Simi Valley-Ventura, CA CA Ventura 6780 Riverside-San Bernardino-Ontario, CA CA Riverside; CA San Bernadino. 7480 Santa Barbara-Santa Maria-Lompoc, CA CA Santa Barbara. Non-SMSA Counties CA Inyo; CA Mono; CA San Luis - Obispo. 181 San Diego, CA: SMSA Counties 7320 San Diego, CA CA San Diego. Non-SMSA Counties CA Imperial
17.1 23.2
16.1 14.3
12.3 24.3 19.8
19.1 26.1 23.6
11.9 28.3 21.5 19.0 19.7 24.6
16.9 16.2
Alaska: 182 Anchorage, AK: SMSA Counties: 0380 Anchorage, AK 8.7 AK Anchorage Division. 15.1 Non-SMSA Counties AK Aleutian IsIands Division; AK Angoon Division; AK Barrow-North Slope Division; AK Bethel Division; AK Bristol Bay Borough; AK Bristol Bay Division; AK Cordova McCarthy Division; AK Fairbanks Division; AK Haines Division; AK Juneau Division; Technical Assistance Guide for Federal Construction Contractors Page E-50
AK Kenai-Cook Inlet Division; AK Ketchikan Division; AK Kobuk Division; AK Kodiak Division; AK Kwskokwim Division; AK Matansuska-Susitna Division; AK Nome Division; AK Outer Ketchikan Division; AK Prince of Wales Division; AK Seward Division; AK Sitka Division; AK Skagaway-Yakutat Division; AK Southeast Fairbanks Division; AK Upper Yukon Division; AK Valdez-Citina-Whittier Division; AK Wade Hampton Division; AK Wrangell-Petersburg Division; AK Yukon-Koyukuk Division.
Hawaii: 183 Honolulu, HI: SMSA Counties: 3320 Honolulu. Hl HI Honolulu. Non-SMSA Counties HI Hawaii; HI Kauai; HI Maui; HI Kalowao.
69.1 70.4
END OF DOCUMENT
Page E-51
DOCUMENT 00 73 00.8
EDA PROJECT SIGN The Contractor shall supply, erect, and maintain in good condition a project sign according to the specifications set forth below: EDA SITE SIGN SPECIFICATIONS Size: 4' x 8' x "
Materials: Exterior grade/MDO plywood (APA rating A-B) Supports: Erection: 4" x 4" x 12' posts with 2" x 4" cross branching Posts shall be set a minimum of three feet deep in concrete footings that are at least 12" in diameter. Outdoor enamel Jet Black, Blue (PMS300), and Gold (PMS7406). Specifically, on white background the following will be placed: The U. S. Department of Commerce seal in blue, black, and gold; EDA in blue; U. S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION in black; In partnership with in blue; (Actual name of the) Investment Recipient in black; PUTTING AMERICA TO WORK in blue; Barack Obama, President of the United States in black. Lettering: Specific fonts are named below; positioning will be as shown on the attached illustration. U. S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT ADMINISTRATION use Bank Gothic Medium In partnership with use UniversTM 55 Oblique (Name of) Investment Recipient use UniversTM Extra Black 85 PUTTING AMERICA TO WORK use Walkway Black Barack Obama, President of the United States use UniversTM 55 Oblique Project signs will not be erected on public highway rights-of-way. If any possibility exists for obstruction to traffic line of sight, the location and height of the sign will be coordinated with the agency responsible for highway or street safety in the area. The EDA Regional Director may permit modifications to these specifications if they conflict with state law or local ordinances.
Paint: Colors:
2.25 1.75
Black Blue= PMS300 Gold= PMS7406

10
13.5
1.75
2.0
1.5
4.0 48
3.0
3.0
3.75
3.0
4.25
2.0
1.75
4.0
96"
DOCUMENT 00 73 43 PREVAILING WAGE RATES
2013 Davis Bacon and Nevada State Prevailing Wage Rates for Clark County Nevada are being provided for reference only. The Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the United State Department of Labor and Nevada State Office of the Labor Commissioner for obtaining and verifying the current wage rates, reporting requirements, including any and all amendments and revisions. Owner, Architect and their officers and employees shall not be liable for any possible omissions in the Project Manual with regards to the prevailing wage rates and reporting requirements.
00 73 43 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Prevailing Wage Rates
Page 1 of 8
General Decision Number: NV130001 01/04/2013
NV1
Superseded General Decision Number: NV20120001 State: Nevada Construction Types: Building, Heavy and Highway NEVADA TEST SITE (NTS), TONOPAH TEST RANGE (TTR) AND NATIONAL TEST AND TRAINING RANGE (NTTR) ONLY
Counties: Clark, Lincoln and Nye Counties in Nevada. Modification Number 0 Publication Date 01/04/2013
ASBE0135-001 09/01/2012 Rates Asbestos/Insulator Worker........$ 40.15 Fringes 17.28
Includes application of all insulation materials, protective coverings, coatings and finishes to all mechanical systems. ---------------------------------------------------------------BOIL0092-001 01/01/2011 Rates Fringes
BOILERMAKER......................$ 41.26 25.27 ---------------------------------------------------------------BRNV0003-003 04/21/2011 Rates Fringes
BRICKLAYER.......................$ 34.02 10.92 MARBLE SETTER....................$ 38.48 10.77 TERRAZZO WORKER/SETTER...........$ 38.48 10.77 TILE FINISHER....................$ 26.07 8.32 TILE SETTER......................$ 35.85 10.77 ---------------------------------------------------------------CARP1780-007 07/01/2012 Rates CARPENTER Carpenters..................$ 37.76 Millwrights.................$ 38.68 Fringes
12.85 12.93
ZONE PAY: 0 to 40 miles radius from intersection of Maryland Parkway and Charleston Blvd in Las Vegas: Free Zone 40 to 60 miles radius: $2.50 additional per hour Over 60 miles radius: $4.25 additional per hour Laughlin Area: $2.00 additional per hour ---------------------------------------------------------------ELEC0357-002 06/01/2011
http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/NV1.dvb?v=0
1/5/2013
Page 2 of 8
Including Nevada Test Site and the Tonopah Test Range Rates ELECTRICIAN......................$ 44.72 ZONE PAY: Zone 1: Work performed within Nevada Test Site (NTS): $2.00 per hour additional. Zone 2: Work performed within Tonopah Test Range (TTR): $2.50 per hour additional. Zone 3: Work performed within Nevada Test and Training Range (NTTR): Excluding Nevada Test Site and Tonopah Test Range: $2.50 per hour additional. ---------------------------------------------------------------ELEV0018-002 01/01/2012 Rates ELEVATOR MECHANIC................$ 47.73 Fringes 23.535 Fringes 16.86+3%
FOOTNOTE: Employer contributes 8% of the basic hourly rate for over 5 years service and 6% of the basic hourly for 6 months to 5 years service as Vacation Pay Credit. Eight paid Holidays: New Years Day, Memorial Day, Independence Day, Labor Day, Veterans Day, Thanksgiving Day, Friday after Thanksgiving, and Christmas Day. ---------------------------------------------------------------ENGI0012-005 01/01/2012 Rates OPERATOR: GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP GROUP Power Equipment 1.....................$ 2.....................$ 3.....................$ 4.....................$ 5.....................$ 6.....................$ 7.....................$ 8.....................$ 9.....................$ Fringes
38.48 39.06 39.30 39.41 39.60 39.70 39.95 40.20 40.35
19.55 19.55 19.55 19.55 19.55 19.55 19.55 19.55 19.55
POWER EQUIPMENT OPERATOR CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Air Compressor; Pump or Generator Operator; Engineer- Oiler and Signalman; Blade Operator; Rotary Drill Tender (Rotary and Core); Steam Cleaner/Pressure Washer; Switchman or Brakeman; Gupie Operator(Cement). GROUP 2: Concrete Mixer Operator; Skid Type Conveyor and Beltman; Fireman; Generator; Pump or Compressor Operator (2 to 5 Units inclusive, over 5 units; $0.10 per hour for each additional unit up to 10 units; portable units); Generator; Pump or Compressor Plant; Hydrostatic Pump
1/5/2013
Page 3 of 8
Motorman (rotary and core); PJU Side Dump Jack; Screening and Conveyor machine Operator (or similar type); Skiploader; Wheeltype; Ford; Ferguson; Jeep or similar type, 3/4 yard or less (without drag-type attachments); Temporary Heating Plant Operator; Truck Crane Oiler. GROUP 3: A-frame or Winch Truck Operator; Bobcat or similar type (Skid Steer); Derrickman (Rotary and Core); Dinky Locomotive or Tunnel Motor operator; Elevator Hoist Operator; Equipment Greaser; Ford, Ferguson or similar type (with drag-type attachments); Global Position Systems Chainman and Rodman; Hydra-Hammer or similar type equipment; Material Hoist/Outside manlift Operator; Power concrete Curing Machine; Power Concrete Saw Operator (or similar type); Power-Driven Jumbo Form Setter; Ross Carrier Operator; Self-Climbing Scaffold (or similar type); Self-propelled Tar Pipelining Machine; Stationary Pipe Wrapping ang Cleaning Machine Operator; Towblade Operator. GROUP 4: Asphalt Plant Fireman; Boring Machine; Boring System Electronic Tracking Locator; Boxman or Mixer Box (concrete or asphalt plant); Fishing Tool Engineer; Highline Cableway Signalman; Horizontal Directional Drilling Machine; Instrumentman; Locomotive Engineer; Micro Tunneling (above ground tunnel); Mud Plant Operator; Power Sweeper Operator; Roller Operator, Compacting; Screed Operator; Seeder Trenching Machine Operator (up to 6ft. depth capacity, manfacturer's rating) Vacuum Truck. GROUP 5: Asphalt or Concrete Spreading; Mechanical Tamping or Finishing Machine Operator- roller (all types and sizes); soil, cement, asphalt finish; Asphalt Plant Engineer; Deck Engine; Grade Checker; Pavement- breaker; Pneumatic heading shield- Tunnel; Road Oil Mixing Machine; Forklift, under five tons; Rubber-tired, heavy duty equipment (Oshkosh; DW Euclid, Letourneau; Laplant-Choate, or similar type equipment with any type attachments); Skidloader; wheeltype, over 3/4 yds., up to and including 1 1/2-yards; Slip Form Pump (power-driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms); Tractor Operator Drag-Type Shovel; Bulldozer; Tamper Scraper and Push Tractor. GROUP 6: Batch Plant; Bulk Plant Concrete Mixer-paving; Concrete Mobile Mixer; Concrete Pump or Pumpcrete Gun; Crushing PlantEengineer; Dandy Digger; Driller (rotary and core); Elevating Grade; Forklift, over 5 tons; Grade-all;Heavy Duty Welder; Highline Cableway; Hoist (Chicago boom and mine); Jumbo Pipe Carrier; Kolman Belt Loader and similar type; Lift slab machine; Loader Operator- Athey, Euclid, Hancock, Sierra or similar type; Machinist; Micro Tunnel System (below ground); Motor Patrol (any type or size); Ozzie Padder (or similar type), Pneumatic Concrete Placing Machine Hackley- Presswell or similar type; Pneumatic Pipe Ramming Tool (and similar types); Rotomill; Sewer Plant; Shovel, Backhoe, Dragline, Clamshell, Derrick, Derrick Barge, Crane Piledriver and Mucking Machine; Shuttle Buggy; Skiploader, wheeltype, over 1-1/2 yds.; Surface Heater and Planer; Tractor Loader Crawler type all types and sizes; Tractor, with boom attachments; Traveling Pipe Wrapping, Cleaning and Bending
1/5/2013
Page 4 of 8
Machine; Trenching Machine (over 6 ft. depth capacity, manufacturer's rating); Tunnel Boring Machine; Water pull (compaction); water Well Driller. GROUP 7: Heavy Duty Repairman; Body and Fender Mechanic; Global Position Systems Party Chief; Heavy Duty Welder GROUP 8: Combination Heavy Duty Repairman and Welder.
GROUP: 9 Rubber Tired, Tandem, Multiple Engine, Earth-Moving Equipment;Sewer Treatment Plant Operator. ---------------------------------------------------------------IRON0118-001 07/01/2011 Rates Fringes
IRONWORKER Fence Erectors..............$ 26.58 15.81 Ornamental, Reinforcing and Structural..............$ 33.00 24.71 ---------------------------------------------------------------LABO0872-002 07/01/2009 Rates LABORER GROUP 1.....................$ 25.31 GROUP 2.....................$ 25.52 Fringes
17.63 17.63
GROUP 1: Building/office cleanup; Cement dumper; Cesspool digger & installer; Concrete curer; Dry packing concrete & filling of bolt holes; Fence builder; Fine grader, Highway & Street; Flagperson; Gas & oil pipeline laborer; Gas & oil pipeline wrapper - pot tender and form man; Guineau chaser; Laborer-packing rod steel and plans; Laborer (General) construction cleanup, etc; Laborer demolition; Landscape gardener, nurseyman and grounds keeper; Making & caulking of all nonmetallic pipe joints; Paving, airport run ways & similar work; Rip rap work; Rip rap stone paver; Roto scraper; Sandblaster (pot tender); Scaler; Septic tank digger and installer (leadman); Tank scaler and cleaner; Tool attendant(jobsite only); Tree climber; Faller, Chain saw, Pittsburg chipper and similar type brush shedders, Window cleaners. GROUP 2: Asbestos abatement/rad worker; Asphalt raker, Ironer, Spreader; Buggymoble man; Concrete core cutter, Sawman and Cement grinding, Cribber or shorer, Cutting torch (demolition); Driller, Gas and oil pipeline wrapper; Hard rock slinger; Jackhammer, Driller and/or pavement breaker; Laying of all nonmetallic pipe, including sewer pipe, drain pipe and underground tile; Machine tool op., (operator and tenders of pneumatic & electric tools, Vibrating machines and similar mechanical tools not separately classified herein, including hand guided ditch witch and hand- type rooler); Pesticide, Herbcide, Insecticide applicator; Powder man; Rock Slinger, Sandblaster (nozzleman); Steel Headerboard man. ---------------------------------------------------------------PAIN0159-003 07/01/2011
1/5/2013
Page 5 of 8
Rates
Fringes
PAINTER (Including Drywall Finishing and Paper Hanging).....$ 37.97 12.19 ---------------------------------------------------------------PLAS0797-004 07/01/2010 Rates Fringes
CEMENT MASON/CONCRETE FINISHER...$ 34.17 12.11 ---------------------------------------------------------------PLUM0525-002 10/01/2010 Rates PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER...............$ 39.66 ZONE PAY: Zone A (Las Vegas)-No Zone Pay Zone B (NTS)-Add $2.00/hour Zone C (TTR)-Add $2.50/hour ---------------------------------------------------------------ROOF0162-001 08/01/2011 Rates Fringes Fringes 17.93
ROOFER...........................$ 24.11 7.82 ---------------------------------------------------------------SFNV0669-003 04/01/2011 Rates Fringes
SPRINKLER FITTER.................$ 38.10 18.25 ---------------------------------------------------------------SHEE0088-002 08/01/2012 Rates SHEET METAL WORKER...............$ 42.51 Fringes 19.71
Zone 1: 0 to 30 miles $0.00 Zone 2: 30 to 50 miles $2.50 Zone 3: 50 to 100 miles (including Laughlin) $3.50 Zone 4: over 100 miles $5.00 ---------------------------------------------------------------* TEAM0631-002 10/01/2012 Rates TRUCK DRIVER GROUP 1.....................$ GROUP 2.....................$ GROUP 3.....................$ GROUP 4.....................$ GROUP 5.....................$ ZONE PAY: Fringes
27.19 27.29 27.50 27.68 28.18
20.89 20.89 20.89 20.89 20.89
1/5/2013
Page 6 of 8
ZONE 1: All work within 30 road miles of City Hall in Las Vegas shall be considered a Free Zone. ZONE 2: All work 30 to 50 road miles from City Hall in Las Vegas shall receive $1.50 additional per hour. ZONE 3: All work 50 to 70 road miles from City Hall in Las Vegas shall receive $2.50 additional per hour. ZONE 4: All work over 70 road miles from City Hall in Las Vegas shall receive $3.50 additional per hour. TRUCK DRIVERS CLASSIFICATIONS GROUP 1: Light duty driver.
Light duty drivers shall include: service truck drivers, dump truck drivers of less than 16 yards water level, truck driver with legal payload capacities of less than 20 tons, road oil spreader truck drivers, water truck drivers under 4,000 gallons, and passenger bus drivers on the jobsite. GROUP 2: Bootman; Truck greaser; Tireman; Light Vehicle Dispatcher. GROUP 3: Heavy duty driver; Forklift driver; Warehouseman; Forklift driver; Equipment Parts GROUP 4: tons). Extra heavy duty driver; Forklift driver (over 15
GROUP 5: Off road and special equipment. ---------------------------------------------------------------WELDERS - Receive rate prescribed for craft performing operation to which welding is incidental. ================================================================
Unlisted classifications needed for work not included within the scope of the classifications listed may be added after award only as provided in the labor standards contract clauses (29CFR 5.5 (a) (1) (ii)).
----------------------------------------------------------------
The body of each wage determination lists the classification and wage rates that have been found to be prevailing for the cited type(s) of construction in the area covered by the wage determination. The classifications are listed in alphabetical order of "identifiers" that indicate whether the particular rate is union or non-union.
Union Identifiers
1/5/2013
Page 7 of 8
An identifier enclosed in dotted lines beginning with characters other than "SU" denotes that the union classification and rate have found to be prevailing for that classification. Example: PLUM0198-005 07/01/2011. The first four letters , PLUM, indicate the international union and the four-digit number, 0198, that follows indicates the local union number or district council number where applicable , i.e., Plumbers Local 0198. The next number, 005 in the example, is an internal number used in processing the wage determination. The date, 07/01/2011, following these characters is the effective date of the most current negotiated rate/collective bargaining agreement which would be July 1, 2011 in the above example. Union prevailing wage rates will be updated to reflect any changes in the collective bargaining agreements governing the rates. 0000/9999: weighted union wage rates will be published annually each January.
Non-Union Identifiers Classifications listed under an "SU" identifier were derived from survey data by computing average rates and are not union rates; however, the data used in computing these rates may include both union and non-union data. Example: SULA2004-007 5/13/2010. SU indicates the rates are not union majority rates, LA indicates the State of Louisiana; 2004 is the year of the survey; and 007 is an internal number used in producing the wage determination. A 1993 or later date, 5/13/2010, indicates the classifications and rates under that identifier were issued as a General Wage Determination on that date. Survey wage rates will remain in effect and will not change until a new survey is conducted.
---------------------------------------------------------------WAGE DETERMINATION APPEALS PROCESS 1.) Has there been an initial decision in the matter? This can be: * * * * an existing published wage determination a survey underlying a wage determination a Wage and Hour Division letter setting forth a position on a wage determination matter a conformance (additional classification and rate) ruling
On survey related matters, initial contact, including requests for summaries of surveys, should be with the Wage and Hour Regional Office for the area in which the survey was conducted because those Regional Offices have responsibility for the Davis-Bacon survey program. If the response from this initial contact is not satisfactory, then the process described in 2.)
1/5/2013
Page 8 of 8
and 3.) should be followed. With regard to any other matter not yet ripe for the formal process described here, initial contact should be with the Branch of Construction Wage Determinations. Write to: Branch of Construction Wage Determinations Wage and Hour Division U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 2.) If the answer to the question in 1.) is yes, then an interested party (those affected by the action) can request review and reconsideration from the Wage and Hour Administrator (See 29 CFR Part 1.8 and 29 CFR Part 7). Write to: Wage and Hour Administrator U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 The request should be accompanied by a full statement of the interested party's position and by any information (wage payment data, project description, area practice material, etc.) that the requestor considers relevant to the issue. 3.) If the decision of the Administrator is not favorable, an interested party may appeal directly to the Administrative Review Board (formerly the Wage Appeals Board). Write to: Administrative Review Board U.S. Department of Labor 200 Constitution Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20210 4.) All decisions by the Administrative Review Board are final. ================================================================ END OF GENERAL DECISION
1/5/2013
2013 PREVAILING WAGE RATES CLARK COUNTY

DATE OF DETERMINATION: October 1, 2012
APPLICABLE FOR PUBLIC WORKS PROJECTS BID/AWARDED OCTOBER 1, 2012 THROUGH SEPTEMBER 30, 2013*
*Pursuant to NAC 338.040(3), "After a contract has been awarded, the prevailing rates of wages in effect at the time of the opening of bids remain in effect for the duration of the project."
As Amendments/Addenda are made to the wage rates, such will be posted to sites of the respective counties. Please review regularly for any amendments posted or contact our offices directly for further assistance with any amendments to the rates.
AIR BALANCE TECHNICIAN ALARM INSTALLER BOILERMAKER BRICKLAYER CARPENTER CEMENT MASON ELECTRICIAN-COMMUNICATION TECH. ELECTRICIAN-LINE ELECTRICIAN-NEON SIGN ELECTRICIAN-WIREMAN ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR FENCE ERECTOR FLAGPERSON FLOOR COVERER GLAZIER HIGHWAY STRIPER HOD CARRIER-BRICK MASON HOD CARRIER-PLASTERER TENDER IRON WORKER
2012-2013 Prevailing Wage Rates Clark County 1
LABORER MECHANICAL INSULATOR MILLWRIGHT OPERATING ENGINEER OPERATING ENG. STEEL FABRICATOR/ERECTOR OPERATING ENGINEER-PILEDRIVER PAINTER PILEDRIVER (NON-EQUIPMENT) PLASTERER PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER REFRIGERATION ROOFER (Does not include sheet metal roofs) SHEET METAL WORKER SPRINKLER FITTER SURVEYOR (NON-LICENSED) TAPER TILE /TERRAZZO WORKER/MARBLE MASON TRAFFIC BARRIER ERECTOR TRUCK DRIVER WELL DRILLER LUBRICATION AND SERVICE ENGINEER (MOBILE AND GREASE RACK) SOIL TESTER (CERTIFIED) SOILS AND MATERIALS TESTER
PREVAILING WAGE RATES INCLUDE THE BASE RATE AS WELL AS ALL APPLICABLE FRINGES NRS 338.010(21) Wages means: (a) The basic hourly rate of pay; and (b) The amount of pension, health and welfare, vacation and holiday pay, the cost of apprenticeship training or other similar programs or other bona fide fringe benefits which are a benefit to the workman. NRS 338.035 Discharge of part of obligation of contractor or subcontractor engaged on public work to pay wages by making certain contributions in name of workman. The obligation of a contractor engaged on a public work or a subcontractor engaged on a public work to pay wages in accordance with the determination of the Labor Commissioner may be discharged in part by making contributions to a third person pursuant to a fund, plan or program in the name of the workman.
CRAFT
AIR BALANCE TECHNICIAN Air Balance Technician-Journeyman Air Balance Technician-Foreman Air Balance Technician-General Foreman ALARM INSTALLER Alarm Installer-Journeyman BOILERMAKER Boilermaker BRICKLAYER Bricklayer-Journeyman CARPENTER Carpenter-Journeyman Carpenter-Welder Carpenter-Foreman Carpenter-General Foreman CEMENT MASON Cement Mason-Journeyman Cement Mason-Foreman Cement Mason-General Foreman ELECTRICIAN- COMMUNICATION TECHNICIAN Installer/Technician Senior Installer/Technician Installer/Technician Foreman Installer/Technician General Foreman ELECTRICIANLINEMAN/GROUNDMAN/HEAVY EQUIPMENT OPERATOR
2012-2013 Prevailing Wage Rates Clark County
RATE
ADD SHEET METAL ZONE RATE 62.27 66.52 70.77
56.87
65.94 SEE AMENDMENT 4 45.33 ADD ZONE RATE 50.76 52.76 SEE AMENDMENT 6 53.89 57.30 ADD ZONE RATE 47.03 49.03 50.78 ADD ZONE RATE 40.75 56.87 61.23 65.60
Groundman Lineman Foreman General Foreman Heavy Equipment Operator ELECTRICIAN-NEON SIGN Electrician-Neon Sign ELECTRICIAN-WIREMAN Wireman-Journeyman Wireman-Cable Splicer Wireman-Foreman Wireman-General Foreman ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR Elevator Constructor-Journeyman Mechanic Elevator Constructor-Mechanic In Charge FENCE ERECTOR Fence Erector FLAGPERSON Flagperson
36.97 55.48 60.80 66.22 45.49
46.26 ADD ZONE RATE 57.23 58.34 61.64 66.04 73.13 80.54 18.67 SEE AMENDMENT 3 43.79
FLOOR COVERER SEE AMENDMENT 2 ADD LABORER ZONE RATE Floor Coverer-Journeyman 17.66 Floor Coverer-Foreman 17.66 GLAZIER Glazier-Journeyman Glazier-Foreman HIGHWAY STRIPER Highway Striper HOD CARRIER-BRICK MASON TENDER Brick Mason
See Amendment 14 59.04 63.27 32.06 ADD LABORER ZONE RATE 42.22
HOD CARRIER-PLASTERER TENDER Plasterer Tender-Journeyman Plasterer Tender-Foreman Plasterer Tender-General Foreman IRON WORKER Ironworker-Journeyman Ironworker-Foreman Ironworker-General Foreman
ADD LABORER ZONE RATE 46.69 48.69 49.69
57.75 61.05 64.68
LABORER SEE GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS ADD ZONE RATE Group 1 45.29 Group 2 45.50 Group 3 45.60 Group 4 45.69 Group 5 45.79 Group 6A 47.03 Group 6B 46.53 Group 6C 46.28 Group 6D 46.94 Group 6E 46.53 Group 7 45.60 Foreman $2.00 above highest paid journeyman supervised. General Foreman $3.00 above highest paid foreman supervised. MECHANICAL INSULATOR Mechanical Insulator-Journeyman Mechanical Insulator-Foreman Mechanical Insulator-General Foreman MILLWRIGHT Millwright-Journeyman Millwright-Welder Millwright-Foreman Millwright-General Foreman
57.13 60.34 63.55 ADD ZONE RATE 51.76 52.76 55.07 58.71
OPERATING ENGINEER SEE GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 Group 16 Group 17 Group 18 Group 19 Group 20 Group 21 Group 22 Group 23 Group 24 Group 25 Add $.50 per hour for "Special" Shift Add $1.00 per hour for "Multiple" Shift
ADD ZONE RATE 58.04 58.99 59.28 60.77 61.87 60.99 62.09 61.10 62.20 61.22 62.32 61.39 61.49 61.52 61.60 61.72 61.89 61.99 62.10 62.22 62.39 62.49 62.60 62.72 62.89
OPERATING ENGINEER: CRANES, PILEDRIVING, & HOISTING EQUIPMENT SEE GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS ADD ZONE RATE Group 1 Engineer Oiler 61.72 Forklift Operator 58.04 Group 2 Truck Crane Oiler 61.72 Group 3 A-Frame or Winch Truck Operator 60.63
Ross Carrier Operator (Jobsite) 60.63 Group 4 Bridge-Type Unloader and Turntable Operator 60.77 Helicopter Hoist Operator 60.77 Group 5 Hydraulic Boom Truck (Pitman) 60.99 Stinger Crane (Austin-Western or Similar Type) 60.99 Tugger Hoist Operator (1 Drum) 60.99 Group 6 Bridge Crane Operator 61.10 Cretor Crane Operator 61.10 Hoist Operator (Chicago Boom and Similar Type) 61.10 61.10 Lift Mobile Operator Lift Slab Machine Operator (Vagtborg and Similar 61.10 Types) 61.10 Material Hoist/Manlift Operator 61.10 Polar Gantry Crane Operator 61.10 Self Climbing Scaffold (or Similar Type) Shovel, Backhoe, Dragline, Clamshell Operator (Over 61.10 3/4 YD. and up to 5 CU. YDS. M.R.C.) 61.10 Silent Piler 61.10 Tugger Hoist Operator (2 Drum) Group 7 Pedestal Crane Operator 61.22 Shovel, Backhoe, Dragline, Clamshell Operator (over 5 61.22 CU. YDS. M.R.C.) 61.22 Tower Crane Repairman 61.22 Tugger Hoist Operator (3 Drum) Group 8 Crane Operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity) 63.19 Crawler Transporter Operator 61.39 Derrick Barge Operator (up to and including 25 ton 61.39 capacity) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or Similar 61.39 Type (up to and including 25 ton capacity) Shovel, Backhoe, Dragline, Clamshell Operator (over 7 61.39 CU. YDS. M.R.C.) Group 9 Crane Operator (over 25 tons up to and including 50 63.19 tons M.R.C.) Derrick Barge Operator (over 25 tons, up to and 61.56
including 50 tons M.R.C.) 61.56 Highline Cableway Operator Hoise Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or Similar 61.56 Type (over 25 tons, up to and including 50 tons M.R.C.) 61.56 K-Crane 61.56 Polar Crane Operator Self Erecting Tower Crane Operator Maximum Lifting 61.56 Capacity Ten (10) Tons. One (1) Ton Operator) Group 10 Crane Operator (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 64.61 tons M.R.C.) Derrick Barge Operator (over 50 tons, up to and 62.56 including 100 tons M.R.C.) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or Similar Type (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 tons 62.56 M.R.C.) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 50 tons, up to and 64.61 including 100 tons M.R.C.) Group 11 Crane Operator (over 100 tons, up to and including 200 65.11 tons M.R.C.) Derrick Barge Operator (over 100 tons, up to and 63.56 including 200 tons M.R.C.) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or Similar Type (over100 tons, up to and including 200 tons 63.56 M.R.C.) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 100 tons, up to 65.11 and including 200 tons M.R.C.) Tower Crane Operator and Tower Gantry 65.56 Group 12 Crane Operator (over 200 tons up to and including 300 67.75 tons M.R.C.) Derrick Barge Operator (over 200 tons up to and 64.56 including 300 tons M.R.C.) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or Similar Type (over 200 tons up to and including 300 tons 64.56 M.R.C.) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 200 tons up to and 67.75 including 300 tons M.R.C.) Group 13 Crane Operator (over 300 tons) 69.12
Derrick Barge Operator (over 300 tons) Helicopter Pilot Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or Similar Type (over 300 tons) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 300 tons) Add $ .50 per hour for "Special" Shift Add $1.00 per hour for "Multiple" Shift
65.56 65.56 65.56 69.12
OPERATING ENGINEER-SURVEYOR SEE GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10
ADD ZONE RATE 59.96 60.77 60.99 61.27 61.39 61.49 61.52 61.89 62.02 62.52
OPERATING ENGINEER -TUNNEL SEE GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 PAINTER Painter-Journeyman Painter-Foreman
ADD ZONE RATE 59.89 60.84 61.13 61.27 61.49 61.60 61.72 61.89 62.02
47.58 50.70
PILEDRIVER Driverman, Rigman, Bridge and Dock Carpenter Certified Welder Piledriver-Foreman Diver-Diving (wet pay) Stand-By Diver Tender PLASTERER Plasterer-Journeyman Plasterer-Foreman Plasterer-General Foreman PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER Plumber/Pipefitter-Journeyman Plumber-Foreman Plumber-General Foreman REFRIGERATION Refrigeration-Journeyman Refrigeration-Foreman Refrigeration-General Foreman ROOFER (Does not include sheet metal roofs) Roofer-Journeyman Roofer-Foreman SHEET METAL WORKER Sheet Metal-Journeyman Sheet Metal-Foreman Sheet Metal-General Foreman SPRINKLER FITTER Sprinkler Fitter-Journeyman Sprinkler Fitter-Foreman Sprinkler Fitter-General Foreman TAPER Taper
50.81 51.31 54.30 94.72 55.30 54.30 ADD ZONE RATE 45.44 47.94 49.69 ADD ZONE RATE 59.63 63.49 67.34 See Amendement 10 43.68 46.37 49.05 37.23 42.00 ADD ZONE RATE 62.27 66.52 70.77
52.20 52.20 52.20 See Amendment 13 42.87

10
TILE SETTER/TERRAZZO WORKER/MARBLE MASON Tile Setter/Terrazzo Worker/Marble Mason-Finisher Tile Setter Terrazzo Worker/Marble Mason
ADD ZONE RATE 35.22 49.38 50.01
TRAFFIC BARRIER ERECTOR Traffic Barrier Erector TRUCK DRIVER SEE GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Foreman $1.00 above highest paid journeyman supervised. WELL DRILLER Well Driller EQUIPMENT GREASER (RACK) Equipment Greaser (rack) EQUIPMENT GREASER (GREASE TRUCK) Equipment Greaser (grease truck) EQUIPMENT GREASER (GREASE TRUCK/MULTI-SHIFT) Equipment Greaser (grease truck/multi-shift) TUNNEL, EQUIPMENT GREASER (GREASE TRUCK) Tunnel, Equipment Greaser (grease truck)
ADD LABORER ZONE RATE 45.29
ADD ZONE RATE 48.08 48.18 48.39 48.57 48.72 49.07
14.11 ADD OPERATING ENGINEER ZONE RATE 59.28 ADD OPERATING ENGINEER ZONE RATE 60.77 ADD OPERATING ENGINEER ZONE RATE 61.87 ADD OPERATING ENGINEER ZONE RATE 61.87
11
FIELD SOILS AND MATERIAL TESTER Field Soils and Material Tester FIELD ASPHALTIC CONCRETE (SOILS AND MATERIAL TESTER) Field Asphaltic Concrete (soils and material tester)
See Amendment 11 40.55 See Amendement 12 40.55
__
Job Descriptions for Recognized Classes of Workmen

Regarding job descriptions for public works projects, please take notice of the following: 1. Pursuant to NAC 338.0095(1)(a), "A workman employed on a public work must be paid based on the type of work that the workman actually performs on the public work and in accordance with the recognized class of the workman." 2. The work description for a particular class is not intended to be jurisdictional in scope nor to be construed as limiting or prohibiting any worker from performing the work of one or more classes. 3. Any person who believes that a type of work is not classified, or who otherwise needs clarification pertaining to the recognized classes or job descriptions, shall contact the Labor Commissioner, in writing, for a determination of the applicable classification and pay rate for a particular type of work. 4. The job descriptions set forth or referenced herein supersede any and all descriptions previously agreed upon by the Labor Commissioner in any settlement agreements or stipulations arising out of contested matters. 5. The following specific provisions, where applicable, shall prevail over any general provisions of the job descriptions: Amendments to the prevailing wage determinations; Group Classifications and/or descriptions recognized by the Labor Commissioner and included with wage determinations for a particular type of work in a particular county.
AIR BALANCE TECHNICIAN, includes but is not limited to: Inspecting, testing, programming, documenting, adjusting and balancing heating, cooling and ventilating systems using specialized tools and testing equipment to attain performance standards specified in the design of the systems. ALARM INSTALLER, includes but is not limited to:
1. Installing or testing electrical protective signaling systems used to provide notification of fire, burglary or other irregularities on the premises of the subscriber of the system; 2. Installing of wiring and signaling units; 3. Repairing electrical protective signaling systems 4. Starting up, programming and documenting systems; BOILERMAKER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Constructing, assembling, maintaining and repairing stationary steam boilers and boiler house auxiliaries; 2. Aligning structures or plate sections to assemble boiler frame tanks or vats; 3. Assisting in the testing of assembled vessels, directing cleaning of boilers and boiler furnaces; 4. Inspecting and repairing boiler fittings, including, without limitation, safety valves, regulators, automatic-control mechanisms, water columns and auxiliary machines. BRICKLAYER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Laying materials, including without limitation, brick, structural tile and blocks of concrete, cinder, glass, gypsum and terra cotta, but not including stone, to construct or repair walls, partitions, arches, sewers, and other structures; 2. Laying and aligning bricks, blocks or tiles to build or repair structures for high temperature equipment, including, without limitation, cupola, kilns, ovens and furnaces; and 3. Fastening or fusing brick or other building materials to structures with wire clamps, anchor holes, torches or cement. 4. Pointing-cleaning-caulking of all types of masonry; caulking of window frames encased in masonry on brick, stone or cement structures, including grinding and cutting out on such work and sand blasting, steam cleaning and gunite work. 5. Pointing, cleaning and weatherproofing of buildings, grain elevators and chimneys built of stone, brick or concrete, including grinding and cutting out, sand blasting and gunite work on the same. CARPENTER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Laying out, constructing, erecting, fabricating, installing and repairing structures and fixtures of wood, plywood, or alternative materials, doors and hardware and the fastening of the same, inclusive of garage or overhead door openers, cabinets, framework, floors, and acoustical ceiling systems using carpenter's hand tools and power tools; 2. Installing or erecting metal studs, drywall, lathing, wall partitions, prefabricated EFIS panels or any other system of panels that is attached to the interior or exterior of any building or structure, insulation and all types of ceilings; 3. Pre-cast concrete and concrete form work which includes but is not limited to: setting of templates, layout, fabrication, constructing, placing, erection, rigging and hoisting, stripping and removing of all forms which are to be reused;
4. Plywood decking, including, without limitation, stacking and installation of the plywood and the plywood decking; 5. Cutting, setting, removing of beam sides and soffits, bracing, and pads; 6. Constructing all wood panel forms and frame wall; 7. Building, erecting and disassembling self-supporting scaffolds that are more than 14 feet in height; 8. Laying out, cutting, joining, fitting of Foam Architectural Elements if same are attached mechanically; and 9. Shaping, cutting and planing by any means if done by hand or machine. CEMENT MASON, includes but is not limited to: 1. Smoothing and finishing surfaces of poured concrete floors, walls, sidewalks and curbs to specified textures; 2. Patching holes with fresh concrete or an epoxy compound; 3. Molding expansion joints and edges through the use of edging tools, jointers and straightedges; 4. Setting of curb and gutter forms one board high; ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION INSTALLER/TECHNICIAN, includes but is not limited to: 1. Pulling cable, installing and trimming devices, terminating loops, circuits, or other data gathering points; 2. Termination of main control panels, racks, or other head end equipment, as well as testing of all circuits from the field devices to the main control panels and/or equipment; 3. Utilizing test equipment for the purpose of troubleshooting and verifying the integrity of the circuits in question; 4. Using hand tools to assemble and install data communication lines and equipment computer systems, antennas and towers; 5. Disassembling equipment to adjust, repair or replace parts using hand tools; 6. Starting up, programming and documenting systems; 7. Measuring, cutting, splicing, connecting, soldering and installing wire and cable associated with communication systems ELECTRONIC COMMUNICATION SENIOR INSTALLER/TECHNICIAN, includes but is not limited to: May include the duties of the Installer/Technician; working with, supervising, and coordinating the work of the Installer/Technician. ELECTRICIAN LINEMAN, includes but is not limited to:
1. Erecting and repairing wood poles and prefabricated light duty metal towers, cable and related equipment to construct overhead transmission and distribution power lines used to conduct electrical energy between generating stations, substations and consumers; 2. Directing and assisting electrician ground men in attaching cross arms, insulators, lightning arresters, switches, wire conductors and auxiliary equipment to poles and towers in preparation of erecting the poles or towers; 3. Climbing erected poles or towers and installing equipment such as transformers 4. Strings wire conductors between erected poles with assistance of ground helpers and adjusts slack in conductors to compensate for contraction and elongation of conductors due to temperature variations, using winch. ELECTRICIAN GROUNDMAN, includes but is not limited to: 1. Working under the direct supervision of linemen, including the operation of jackhammers and man hauls; 2. Loading and unloading of materials and equipment used by electrician lineman. 3. Does not include climbing poles, towers or other structures or working in the proximity of energized lines or equipment; ELECTRICIAN-NEON SIGN, includes but is not limited to: 1. Installing, servicing and repairing plastic, neon and illuminated signs; 2. Ascending ladders or operating hydraulic or electric hoist to install, service, or examine sign to determine cause of malfunction; 3. Wiring, rewiring or removing defective parts and installing new parts using electrician's tools; 4. Removing sign or part of sign for repairs, such as structural fabrication, scroll repair, or transformer repair; ELECTRICIAN WIREMAN, includes but is not limited to: 1. Laying out plans, installing, testing and repairing wiring, electrical fixtures, apparatus and control equipment; 2. Measuring, cutting, bending, threading, assembling and installing electrical conduit by using tools including, without limitation, a hacksaw, pipe threader, or conduit bender; 3. Pulling wiring through conduit; 4. Splicing wires; 5. Connecting wiring to lighting fixtures and power equipment; 6. Installing control and distribution apparatus, including, without limitation, switches, relays and circuit breakers, and fastening such apparatus into place; 7. Connecting power cables to equipment, including, without limitation, electric ranges and motors, and installing grounding leads; 8. Testing the continuity of a circuit to ensure electrical compatibility and safety of components using testing instruments, including, without limitation, an ohmmeter, a battery and buzzer, and an oscilloscope;
9. As necessary, cutting and welding steel structural members; 10. Handling and installation of all electrical equipment, appliances, apparatus and materials at the site of the public work and necessary to the execution of the contract for the public work. ELEVATOR CONSTRUCTOR, includes but is not limited to: 1. Assembling, installing, repairing and maintaining electric and hydraulic freight and passenger elevators, escalators and dumbwaiters; 2. Cutting pre-fabricated sections of framework, rails and other elevator components to specified dimensions, using acetylene torch, power saw, and disc grinder; 3. Installing cables, counterweights, pumps, motor foundations, escalator drives, guide rails, elevator cars, and control panels, using hand tools; FENCE ERECTOR, includes but is not limited to: 1. Erecting or repairing chain link, wooden, tortoise, wire/wire mesh, or temporary fencing; 2. Mixing and pouring concrete around bases of posts and tamping soil into post hole to embed post; 3. Digging post holes with a spade, post hole digger or power driven auger; 4. Aligning posts through the use of lines or by sighting; 5. Verifying vertical alignment of posts with a plumb bob or spirit level; FLAG PERSON, includes but is not limited to: 1. Directing movement of vehicular traffic through construction projects; 2. Distributing traffic control signs and markers along site in designated pattern; 3. Informing drivers of detour routes through construction sites; FLOOR COVERER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Applying blocks, strips or sheets of shock-absorbing, sound-deadening or decorative covering to floors and walls, including carpets or rugs; 2. Measuring and cutting covering materials, such as rubber, linoleum, astro-turf, or cork tile and foundation material such as felt, using rule, straightedge, linoleum knife and snips; 3. Spreading adhesive cement over floor to cement foundation material to floor for sounddeadening, and to prevent covering from wearing at the board joints; 4. Rolling finished floors to smooth the floor and press cement into base and covering; 5. Fitting of devices for the attachment of carpet, linoleum, rubber and all resilient floor coverings and the fitting of metal edges, corners and caps used in the installation of the foregoing materials and all other preparatory work; GLAZIER, includes but is not limited to:
1. Installing, setting, cutting, preparing, or removal of glass, or materials used in lieu thereof, including, without limitation, in windows, doorways, showers, bathtubs, skylights and display cases; 2. Installing glass on surfaces, including, without limitation, fronts of buildings, interior walls and ceilings; 3. Installing pre-assembled framework for windows and doors designed to be fitted with glass panels, including stained glass windows by using hand tools; 4. Loading and arranging glass, or materials used in lieu thereof, on trucks at the site of the public work; HIGHWAY STRIPER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Painting highways, streets and parking surfaces by using manually propelled or mechanically propelled machines, brushes, rollers or spray guns; 2. Installing any device or application of any material used in lieu of paint for traffic direction, including, without limitation, buttons, tapes, plastics, rumble bars and other similar materials; HOD CARRIER-BRICK MASON TENDER, includes but is not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Tending to or assisting brick masons, bricklayers and stonemasons; Mixing, packing, wheeling and tempering mortar and fire clay; Mixing, supplying and holding materials or tools; Mixing, handling and conveying all other materials used by brick masons, bricklayers and stone masons; Building scaffolds, trestles, boxes and swinging staging used exclusively by bricklayers and stone masons; Hanging cables and placing putlogs; Carrying bricks and mortar in a hod; Cleaning work area and equipment of bricklayers and stone masons
HOD CARRIER-PLASTERER TENDER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Serving Plasterers in any capacity; 2. Handling materials after the materials are delivered as used by a Plasterer; 3. Building and handling all necessary trestle, scaffolding and planking of scaffolding for the exclusive use of Plasterers; 4. Building mortar boxes, mortar boards and stands. IRONWORKER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Performing duties, as part of a crew, to raise, place and unite girders, columns and other structural steel members to form completed structures or structure frameworks; 2. Setting up hoisting equipment for raising and placing structural steel members; 3. Fastening steel members to cable of hoist, using chains, cable or rope;
4. Forcing steel members into final position using turnbuckles, crowbars, jacks, hand tools; 5. Aligning rivet holes in steel members with corresponding holes in previously placed steel members by driving drift pins to handle of wrench through holes; 6. Bolting aligned steel members to keep them in position until the steel members can be permanently riveted, bolted or welded into place; 7. Cutting and welding steel members; 8. Installing and repairing gates, iron doors, flagpoles, iron fences and roof decking; 9. Installing corrugated sheets when attached to steel frames; 10. Stud welding of all iron, steel and metal to structural steel; 11. Handling and setting of steel and metal joists; 12. Loading, unloading, hoisting, handling, signaling, placing and erecting of pre-stressed and pre-cast materials; 13. Handling, racking, sorting, cutting, bending, hoisting, placing, burning, welding and tying all material used to reinforce concrete construction; LABORER, includes but is not limited to:
Perform tasks involving physical labor at building, highway, and heavy construction projects, tunnel and shaft excavations, and demolition sites. May operate hand and power tools of all types: air hammers, earth tampers, cement mixers, small mechanical hoists, and a variety of other equipment and instruments. May clean and prepare sites, dig trenches, set braces to support the sides of excavations, erect scaffolding, clean up rubble and debris, and remove asbestos, lead, and other hazardous waste materials. May assist other craft workers. MARBLE MASON, includes but is not limited to: 1. Cutting, tooling, and setting marble slabs in floors and walls of buildings and renovating and polishing marble slabs previously set in buildings; 2. Trimming, facing and cutting marble to a specific size using a power saw, cutting and facing equipment, and hand tools 3. Drilling holes in marble slabs and attaching brackets; 4. Spreading mortar on the bottom and sides of a marble slab and on the side of adjacent marble slabs; 5. Setting blocks in positions, tamping a marble slab into place and anchoring bracket attachments with wire; 6. Filling joints between marble slabs with grout and removing excess grout with a sponge; 7. Cleaning and beveling cracks and chips on marble slabs using hand tools and power tools; 8. Heating cracked or chipped areas of a marble slab with a blowtorch and filling the defect with a composition mastic that matches the grain of the marble slab; and 9. Polishing marble slabs and other ornamental stone to a high luster by using hand tools and power tools. MECHANICAL INSULATOR, includes but is not limited to:
1. Covering and lining structures with cork, canvas, tar paper, magnesia and related materials; 2. Installing blown-on insulation on pipe and machinery; 3. Lining of mechanical room surfaces and air handling shafts; 4. Filling and damming of fire stops and penetrations including, but not limited to, electrical and mechanical systems; 5. Foam applications for the purpose of thermal, acoustical, or fire protective purposes, including RTV foams or equivalents, applied to mechanical or electrical systems; 6. Duct lining and duct wrapping, direct application and installation of fire protection of grease ducts, exhaust systems, or any other ductwork for acoustical or thermal purposes; 7. Insulation of field joints on pre-insulated underground piping and the pouring of Gilsilite or its equivalent; 8. The application of material, including metal and PVC jacketing, on piping, fittings, valves, flanges, boilers, ducts, plenums, flues, tanks, vats, equipment and any other hot or cold surface for the purpose of thermal control; MILLWRIGHT, includes but is not limited to: 1. Installing machinery and equipment according to layout plans, blueprints and other drawings in industrial establishments by using hoists, lift trucks, hand tools and power tools; 2. Dismantling machines by using hammers, wrenches, crowbars and other hand tools; 3. Assembling and installing equipment, including, without limitation, shafting, conveyors, monorails and tram rails, by using hand tools and power tools; 4. Constructing foundations for machines by using hand tools and building materials, including, without limitation, wood, cement and steel; 5. Assembling machines and bolting, welding, riveting or otherwise fastening them to a foundation or other structure by using hand tools and power tools; and 6. Repairing and lubricating machines and equipment (at the site of the public work) assembled and used by millwrights. OPERATING ENGINEER, includes but is not limited to: Operate one or several types of power construction equipment, such as motor graders, bulldozers, scrapers, compressors, pumps, derricks, shovels, tractors, or front-end loaders to excavate, move, and grade earth, erect structures, or pour concrete or other hard surface pavement. PAINTER, includes but is not limited to: 1. All painting of walls, equipment, buildings, bridges and other structural surfaces by using brushes, rollers and spray guns; 2. Application of wall coverings/wall paper; 3. Removing old paint to prepare surfaces before painting the surface; 4. Mixing colors or oils to obtain desired color or consistency;
5. 6. 7. 8.
Sanding surfaces between coats and polishing final coat to a specified finish; Cutting stencils and brushing and spraying lettering and decorations on surfaces; Washing and treating surfaces with oil, turpentine, mildew remover or other preparations; Filling cracks, holes and joints with caulk, putty, plaster or other filler by using caulking gun or putty knife;
PILEDRIVER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Operating pile drivers mounted on skids, barge, crawler, treads or locomotive crane to drive piling as foundations for structures including, without limitation, buildings, bridges and piers; 2. Barking, shoeing, splicing, form building, heading, centering, placing, driving, staying, framing, fastening, automatic pile threading, pulling and/or cutting off of piling; 3. Fabricating, forming, handling and setting of all such pre-cast, pre-stressed and poststressed shapes that are an integral part of docks, piers, wharves, bulkheads, jetties, and similar structures; PIPEFITTER, includes but is not limited to: Assembling, installing, modifying and maintaining pipe systems, pipe supports and pneumatic equipment and related machines and equipment components for steam, hot water, heating, cooling, lubricating, sprinkling and industrial and processing systems which may require: a. Cutting, threading and hammering pipe to specifications using tools, including, without limitation, saws, cutting torches and pipe threaders and benders; b. Attaching pipes to walls, structures and fixtures, including without limitation, radiators or tanks, using brackets, clamps, tools, or welding equipment; c. Coating non-ferrous piping materials by dipping in mixture of molten tin and lead to prevent erosion, or galvanic and electrolytic action; PLASTERER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Applying coats of plaster onto interior or exterior walls, ceilings, or partitions of buildings to produce a finished surface according to blueprints, architects' drawings and oral instruction; 2. Creating decorative textures in finish coat by using sand, pebbles or stones; 3. Installing guide wires on exterior surfaces of buildings to indicate thickness of plaster or stucco; 4. Applying weatherproof, decorative covering to exterior surfaces of a building; 5. Molding and installing ornamental plaster pieces, panels and trim; 6. Directing workers to mix plaster to a desired consistency; 7. Assembly of EFIS panels; 8. Laying out, cutting, joining, fitting and installation of Architectural Foam Elements which are trowel applied or adhesive set;
9. Applying, shaping, cutting, and planing in preparation for netting done by hand or machine; 10. All plaster or synthetic finishes applied to Foam Architectural Elements PLUMBER, includes but is not limited to: Assembling, installing and repairing pipes, fittings and fixtures for heating, water and drainage systems inside of buildings and to a point 5 feet outside of buildings which may therein require: a. Repairing and maintaining plumbing by replacing defective washers, repairing or mending broken pipes, and opening clogged drains; b. Assembling pipe sections, tubing and fittings by using screws, bolts, solder, plastic solvent and caulking; c. Installing pipe assemblies, fittings, valves and fixtures, including, without limitation, sinks, toilets and tubs, by using hand tools and power tools; d. Cutting openings in structures, excluding concrete, to accommodate pipe and pipe fittings by using hand tools and power tools; e. Filling pipes and plumbing fixtures with water or air and observing pressure gauges to detect and locate leaks. REFRIGERATION MECHANIC, includes but is not limited to: 1. Installing and repairing industrial and commercial refrigeration systems; 2. Mounting compressors, condensers and other refrigeration components to the frame of a refrigerator by using hand tools and acetylene welding equipment; 3. Assembling structural and functional components needed for refrigeration, including, without limitation, controls, switches, gauges, wiring harnesses, valves, pumps, compressors, condensers, cores and pipes; 4. Installing expansion and control valves by using hand tools and acetylene welding equipment; 5. Cutting, bending, threading and connecting pipe from functional components to water, power or refrigeration systems; 6. Fabricating and assembling components and structural portions of a refrigeration system; ROOFER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Installing and covering roofs and structures with slate, asphalt, wood and other related materials, other than sheet metal, by using brushes, knives, punches, hammers and other tools; 2. Spraying roofs, sidings and walls with material to bind, seal, insulate or soundproof sections of a structure; 3. Installation of all plastic, slate, slag, gravel, asphalt and composition roofing, and rock asphalt mastic when used for damp and waterproofing; 4. Installation of all damp resisting preparations when applied on roofs with mop, three-knot brush, roller, swab or spray system;
5. All types of preformed panels used in waterproofing; 6. Handling, hoisting and storing of all roofing, damp and waterproofing materials; 7. The tear-off and/or removal of roofing and roofing materials; SHEET METAL WORKER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Fabricating, assembling, dismantling, installing or repairing: o Sheet metal roofs, including #30 felt roofing paper installed to form a metal roofing system; o Sheet metal parts or equipment, including, without limitation, duct work, metal lockers and kitchen equipment; o Air-veyor and air-handling systems, regardless of materials used; 2. Setting up and operating fabrication machines to cut, bend and straighten sheet metal; 3. Shaping metal over anvils, blocks or forms using a hammer; 4. Operating soldering and welding equipment to join sheet metal parts; 5. Inspecting, assembling and smoothing seams and joints of burred surfaces; 6. Welding, soldering, bolting, riveting, screwing, clipping, caulking or bonding component parts to assemble products by using hand tools, power tools and devices for lifting and handling; SPRINKLER FITTER, includes but is not limited to: Installing, dismantling, maintaining, repairing, adjusting and correcting all fire protection and fire control systems, including the installation of piping or tubing, appurtenances and equipment pertaining thereto, including both overhead and underground water mains, fire hydrants, and hydrant mains, standpipes and hose connection to sprinkler systems, sprinkler tank heaters, air lines and thermal systems used in connection with sprinkler and alarm systems. SURVEYOR, includes but is not limited to: 1. Planning ground surveys designed to establish base lines, elevation and other geodetic measurements; 2. Compiling data relevant to the shape, contour, gravitation, location, elevation and dimension of land and land features on or near the surface of the Earth for engineering, map making, mining, land evaluation, construction and other purposes; 3. Surveying bodies of water to determine navigable channels and to secure data for construction of breakwaters, piers and other marine structures; 4. Computing data necessary for driving and connecting underground passages, underground storage and volume of underground deposits. TAPER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Sealing joints between plasterboard or other wallboards to prepare a wall surface for painting or papering;
2. Mixing sealing compound by hand or with a portable electric mixer and spreading the compound over the joints between boards using a trowel, broad knife, or spatula; 3. Filling cracks and holes in walls and ceilings with sealing compound ; 4. Applying texturing compound and primer to walls and ceiling to prepare a surface for a final finish by using brushes, rollers and spray guns; 5. Coating of joint compound or taping mud; TERRAZZO WORKER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Applying cement, sand, pigment and marble chips to floors and stairways to attain durable and decorative surfacing according to specifications or drawings; 2. Spreading mixtures of sand, cement and water over surface with a trowel to form terrazzo; 3. Cutting metal division strips and pressing the metal division strips into a terrazzo base so that top edges form a desired design or pattern and define level of finished floor surface; 4. Spreading mixtures of marble chips, cement, pigment and water over a terrazzo base to form a finished surface by using a float and trowel; 5. Pre-casting terrazzo blocks in wooden forms. TILE SETTER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Applying tile and materials made for tile in tile-like units to walls, floors, ceilings and promenade roof decks following design specification; 2. Applying glazed, unglazed, mosaic and other ceramic tiles, which are used as a surface on floors, walls, ceilings, and other surfaces and which must be set to specific grade; 3. Applying and floating all setting beds into which glazed, unglazed, mosaic, or other ceramic tiles are set; 4. Leveling and plumbing tiles to a specified grade. TILE, TERRAZZO AND MARBLE FINISHER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Supplying and mixing construction materials for a tile setter, terrazzo worker or marble setter; 2. Applying grout and finishing the surface of installed tile, terrazzo and marble; 3. Cleaning installed tile, terrazzo and tile surfaces; 4. Renovation and filling chipped, cracked and broken pieces of tile, terrazzo and marble; 5. Grinding and polishing tile, terrazzo and marble; 6. Assisting a tile setter, terrazzo worker or marble setter; TRAFFIC BARRIER ERECTOR, includes but is not limited to: Erects or places instruments to provide directional assistance to traffic on or near the public works construction project. TRUCK DRIVER, includes but is not limited to:
Driving a tractor trailer combination or a truck transport goods or materials at the site of a public work or between sites of a public work. (Also, see descriptions listed with Truck Driver rates, if any) WELL DRILLER, includes but is not limited to: 1. Setting, operating or tending to portable drilling rig machinery and related equipment to drill wells; 2. Extending stabilizing jackscrews to support and level a drilling rig; 3. Installing water well pumps; 4. Drillings wells for industrial water supplies, irrigation water supplies or water supplies for any other purpose; dewatering or other similar purposes; exploration; hole drilling for geologic and hydrologic information; and core drilling for geologic information. ______________________________________________________________________________
GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS LABORER Group 1 Construction Clean-Up Dry packing of concrete & filling of form bolt holes File grader, highway & street paving, airport runways & similar type heavy construction Gas & oil pipeline laborer Guinea chaser Laborer, demolition or general construction ("General construction" does not include work otherwise classified.) Laborer, packing rod steel & pans Laborer, temporary water lines (portable type) Landscape gardener Nurseryman Tarman and mortarman, kettleman, potman and man applying asphalt, lay-kold creosote, fine, and similar type materials Underground laborer, including caisson bellowers Scaffold Erector (under 14 ft.) Landscape Decorative rock Installer (Ponds, Waterfalls, Etc.)
Materials Handler (incidental to trade) Tool Crib Light Crib Light Tool Repairman Landscape Gardener (Must have knowledge of plant materials and how to plant them. Lays out plant arrangements to follow the landscape plan.) Mechanical Stabilized Earth Wall Construction Clean Up Certified Firewatch Group 2 Asphalt raker, ironer, spreader, luteman Buggymobile man Cement dumper (on one yard or larger mixers & handling bulk cement) Cesspool digger and installer Chucktender (except tunnels) Concrete core cutter Concrete curer, impervious membrane and oiler of all materials Concrete saw man, excluding tractor type, cutting, scoring old or new concrete Gas and oil wrapper, pot tender and form man Making and caulking of all non-metallic pipe joints Operators and tenders of pneumatic and electric tools, vibrating machines, hand propelled trenching machines, impact wrench multiplate and similar mechanical tools not separately classified herein Operator of cement grinding machine Riprap stonepaver Roto-scraper Sandblaster (pot tender) Scaler Septic tank digger and installer (lead man) Tank scaler and cleaner Tree climber, faller, chain saw operator, Pittsburgh chipper and similar type brush shredders Group 3 Cutting torch operator Gas and oil pipeline wrapper Gas and oil pipeline laborer, certified Jackhammer and/or pavement breaker Laying of all non-metallic pipe, including landscape sprinklers, sewer pipe, drain pipe and underground tile Mudcutter Concrete vibrator operator, all sizes Rock slinger Scaler (using bos'n chair or safety belt or power tools) Forklift (Incidental to Trade) A journeyman shall hold OSHA certification at time of referral
Laying of all metallic and non-metallic pipe, p.v.c. and duct bank, including landscape sprinklers, sewer pipe, drain pipe and underground tile. Cement dumper (on one yard or larger mixers and handling bulk cement Concrete core cutter Concrete curer, impervious membrane and oiler of all materials Decorative rock installer (ponds, waterfalls, etc.) Shotcrete/gunite Group 4 Cribber or shorer, lagging, sheeting, trench bracing, hand guided lagging hammer Head rock slinger Powderman-blaster, all work of loading holes, placing and blasting of all powder and explosives of whatever type, regardless of method used for such loading and placing Sandblaster (nozzleman) Steel header-board man Group 5 Driller (core, diamond or wagon) Joy driller model TW-M-2A, Gardner-Denver model DH 143 and similar type drills (in accordance with Memorandum of Understanding between Laborers and Operating Engineers dated Miami, Florida, February 3, 1954) Gas and oil pipeline fusion Gas and oil pipeline wrappers, 6" pipe and over Group 6 Miner and Bullgang
Group 7 Asbestos Abatement Lead Abatement Hazardous Waste Abatement Petro-Chemical Abatement Radiation Remediation Microbial Remediation $.50 wage rate above group III when wearing protective suite or respirator Employees shall be properly certified and/or licensed at time of dispatch. OPERATING ENGINEER, includes but is not limited to: Group 1 Bargeman Blade Operator Assistant Brakeman Compressor Operator
Ditch Witch, with seat or similar type equipment Elevator Operator - inside Engineer Oiler Forklift Operator (under 5 Tons) Generator Operator Generator, Pump or Compressor Plant Operator Pump Operator Signalman Steam Cleaner/Pressure Washer Switchman Group 2 Asphalt-Rubber Plant Operator (Nurse Tank Operator) Concrete Mixer Operator - Skip type Conveyor Operator Fireman Forklift Operator (over 5 Tons) Hydrostatic Pump Operator Oiler Crusher (Asphalt or Concrete Plant) PJU Side Dump Jack Rotary Drill Helper (Oilfield) Screening and Conveyor Machine Operator (or similar types) Skiploader (wheel type up to yd. without attachment) Tar Pot Fireman Temporary Heating Plant Operator Trenching Machine Oiler Group 3 Asphalt-Rubber Blend Operator Bobcat or similar type (Skid Steer) Ford Ferguson (with dragtype attachments) Helicopter Radioman (ground) Stationary Pipe Wrapping and Cleaning Machine Operator
Group 4 Asphalt Plant Fireman Backhoe Operator (Mini-Max or similar type) Boring Machine Operator Boring System Electronic Tracking Locator Boxman or Mixerman (Asphalt or Concrete) Chip Spreading Machine Operator Concrete Cleaning Decontamination Machine Operator Concrete Pump Operator (small portable) Drilling Machine Operator, Small Auger Types (Texoma Super
Economatic, or similar types - Hughes 100 or 200, or similar types - drilling depth of 30' maximum) Guard Rail Post Driver Operator Highline Cableway Signalman Horizontal Directional Drilling Machine Hydra-Hammer-Aero Stomper Micro Tunneling (above ground tunnel) Power Concrete Curing Machine Operator Power Concrete Saw Operator Power - Driven Jumbo Form Setter Operator Power Sweeper Operator Rock Wheel Saw/Trencher Roller Operator (compacting) Screed Operator (Asphalt or Concrete) Trenching Machine Operator (up to 6 ft.) Vacuum or Muck Truck Group 5 No current classification Group 6 Articulating Material Hauler Asphalt Plant Engineer Batch Plant Operator Bit Sharpener Concrete Joint Machine Operator (canal and similar type) Concrete Planer Operator Dandy Digger Deck Engine Operator Derrickman (Oilfield type) Drilling Machine Operator, Bucket or Auger Types (Calweld 100 Bucket or similar types - Watson 1000 Auger or similar types Texoma 330, 500 or 600 Auger or similar types - drilling depth of 45' maximum) Drilling Machine Operator (including water wells) Hydrographic Seeder Machine Operator (straw, pulp or seed) Jackson Track Maintainer, or similar type Kalamazoo Switch Tamper, or similar type Machine Tool Operator Maginnis Internal Full Slab Vibrator Mechanical Berm, curb or gutter (concrete or asphalt) Mechanical Finisher Operator (concrete, Clary-Johnson-Bidwell or similar) Micro Tunnel System (below ground) Pavement Breaker Operator (truck mounted) Road Oil Mixing Machine Operator Roller Operator (asphalt or finish)
Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) Self-Propelled Tar Pipelining Machine Operator Skiploader Operator (crawler and wheel type, over yd. and up to and including 1 yds.) Slip Form Pump Operator (power driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms) Tractor Operator - Bulldozer, Tamper-Scraper (single engine, up to 100 h.p. flywheel and similar types, up to and including D-5 and similar types) Tugger Hoist Operator (1 drum) Ultra High Pressure Waterjet Cutting Tool System Operator Vacuum Blasting Machine Operator Welder - General Group 7 Welder - General (Multi-Shift) Group 8 Asphalt or Concrete Spreading Operator (Tamping or Finishing) Asphalt Paving Machine Operator (Barber Greene or similar type) Asphalt-Rubber Distributor Operator Backhoe Operator (up to and including yd.) Small Ford, Case or similar. Cast in Place Pipe Laying Machine Operator Combination Mixer and Compressor Operator (Gunite Work) Compactor Operator - self propelled Concrete Mixer Operator - Paving Crushing Plant Operator (Non Portable) Drill Doctor Drilling Machine Operator, Bucket or Auger Types (Calweld 150 Bucket or similar types - Watson 1500, 2000, 2500 Auger or similar types - Texoma 700, 800 Auger or similar types drilling depth of 60' maximum) Elevating Grader Operator Grade Checker Gradall Operator Grouting Machine Operator Heavy Duty Repairman Heavy Equipment Robotics Operator Kalamazoo Balliste Regulator or similar type Kolman Belt Loader and similar type Le Tourneau Blob Compactor or similar type Loader Operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar types) Master Environmental Maintenance Mechanic Mobark Chipper or similar types Ozzie Padder or similar types PC 490 Slot Saw Pneumatic Concrete Placing Machine Operator (Hackley-Presswell or similar type) Portable Crushing Plant Operator
Pumpcrete Gun Operator Rock Drill or similar types Rotary Drill Operator (excluding Caison type) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator (single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon, and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator (multiple engine - up to and including 25 yds. struck) Rubber-Tired Scraper Operator (self-loading paddle wheel type - John Deere, 1040 and similar single unit) Self-Propelled Curb and Gutter Machine Operator Shuttle Buggy Skiploader Operator (crawler and wheel type over 1 yds. up to and including 6 yds.) Soil Remediation Plant Operator (C.M.I. Enviro Tech Thermal or Similar Types) (Oiler Required Group II) Surface Heaters and Planer Operator Tractor Compressor Drill Combination Operator Tractor Operator (any type larger than D-5 - 100 flywheel h.p. and over, or similar - Bulldozer, Tamper, Scraper and Push Tractor, single engine) Tractor Operator (boom attachments) Traveling Pipe Wrapping, Cleaning and Bending Machine Operator Trenching Machine Operator (over 6 ft. depth capacity, manufacturer's rating Trenching Machine with Road Miner Attachment (over 6 ft. depth capacity, manufacturer's rating) Ultra High Pressure Waterjet Cutting Tool System Mechanic Water Pull (compaction) Group 9 Heavy Duty Repairman (Multi-Shift) Group 10 Drilling Machine Operator, Bucket or Auger Types (Calweld 200 B Bucket or similar types - Watson 3000 or 5000 Auger or similar types - Texoma 900 Auger or similar types - drilling depth of 105' maximum) Dual Drum Mixer Heavy Duty Repairman-Welder Combination Monorail Locomotive Operator (diesel, gas or electric) Motor Patrol - Blade Operator (single engine) Multiple Engine Tractor Operator (Euclid and similar type - except Quad 9 Cat.) Pneumatic Pipe Ramming Tool and similar types Pre-Stressed Wrapping Machine Operator (2 Operators required) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator (single engine, over 50 yds. struck) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar - over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck) Tower Crane Repairman
Tractor Loader Operator (crawler and wheel-type over 6 yds.) Welder-Certified Woods Mixer Operator (and similar Pugmill equipment) Group 11 Dynamic Compactor LDC350 (or similar types) Heavy Duty Repairman-Welder Combination (Multi-Shift) Welder-Certified (Multi-Shift) Group 12 Auto Grader Operator Automatic Slip Form Operator Drilling Machine Operator, Bucket or Auger Types (Calweld, Auger 200 CA or similar types Watson, Auger 6000 or similar types- Hughes Super Duty, Auger 200 or similar types - drilling depth of 175' maximum) Hoe Ram or similar with Compressor Mass Excavator Operator - Less than 750 cu. yds. Mechanical Finishing Machine Operator Mobile Form Traveler Operator Motor Patrol Operator (multi-engine) Pipe Mobile Machine Operator Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck) Rubber-Tired Self-Loading Scraper Operator (paddle-wheel-Auger type self-loading - two (2) or more units) Vermeer Rock Trencher (or similar type) Group 13 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Push-Pull System (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) Group 14 Canal Liner Operator (not less than four (4) employees Operator, Oiler, Welder, Mechanic, Grade Checker required) Canal Trimmer Operator Remote Controlled Earth Moving Equipment Operator (no one (1) Operator shall operate more than two (2) pieces of earth moving equipment at one time - One Dollar ($1.00) per hour additional to base rate) Wheel Excavator Operator (over 750 cu. yds. per hour) Group 15 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Push-Pull System (single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon, and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck)
Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Push-Pull System (multiple engine - up to and including 25 yds. struck) Group 16 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Push-Pull System (single engine, over 50 yds. struck) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Push-Pull System (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck) Group 17 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Push-Pull System (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck) Tandem Tractor Operator (operating crawler type tractors in tandem - Quad 9 and similar type) Group 18 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating in Tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) Group 19 Rotex Concrete Belt Operator (or similar types) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating in Tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, including compaction units - single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon, and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating in Tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) Group 20 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating in Tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - single engine, over 50 yds. struck)
Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating in Tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. and up to 50 yds. struck) Group 21 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating in Tandem (scrapers, belly dumps, and similar types in any combination, excluding compaction units - multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck)
Group 22 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Tandem PushPull System (single engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) Group 23 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Tandem PushPull System (single engine, Caterpillar, Euclid, Athey Wagon, and similar types with any and all attachments over 25 yds. and up to and including 50 cu. yds. struck)
Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Tandem PushPull System (multiple engine, up to and including 25 yds. struck) Group 24 Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Tandem PushPull System (single engine, over 50 yds. struck)
Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Tandem PushPull System (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar, over 25 yds. & up to 50 yds. struck) Group 25 Concrete Pump Operator - truck mounted (Oiler required when boom over 105' or 36 meters) Rubber-Tired Earth Moving Equipment Operator, operating equipment with the Tandem PushPull System (multiple engine, Euclid, Caterpillar and similar type, over 50 cu. yds. struck)
OPERATING ENGINEER-CRANES, PILEDRIVING AND HOISTING EQUIPMENT Group1 Engineer Oiler Forklift Operator Group 2 Truck Crane Oiler Group 3 A-Frame or Winch Truck Operator Ross Carrier Operator (jobsite) Group 4 Bridge-Type Unloader and Turntable Operator Helicopter Hoist Operator
Group 5 Hydraulic Boom Truck (Pitman) Stinger Crane (Austin-Western or similar type) Tugger Hoist Operator (1 drum)
Group 6 Bridge Crane Operator Cretor Crane Operator Hoist Operator (Chicago Boom and similar type) Lift Mobile Operator Lift Slab Machine Operator (Vagtborg and similar types) Material Hoist/Manlift Operator Polar Gantry Crane Operator Self Climbing Scaffold (or similar type) Shovel, Backhoe, Dragline, Clamshell Operator (over 3/4 yd. and up to 5 cu. yds. M.R.C.) Silent Piler Tugger Hoist Operator (2 drum) Group 7 Pedestal Crane Operator Shovel, Backhoe, Dragline, Clamshell Operator (over 5 cu. yds. M.R.C.) Tower Crane Repairman Tugger Hoist Operator (3 drum) Group 8 Crane Operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity) Crawler Transporter Operator Derrick Barge Operator (up to and including 25 ton capacity) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or similar type (up to and including 25 ton capacity) Shovel, Backhoe, Dragline, Clamshell Operator (over 7 cu. yds. M.R.C.) Group 9 Crane Operator (over 25 tons, up to and including 50 tons M.R.C.) Derrick Barge Operator (over 25 tons, up to and including 50 tons M.R.C.) Highline Cableway Operator Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or similar type (over 25 tons, up to and including 50 ton M.R.C.) K-Crane Polar Crane Operator Self-Erecting Tower Crane Operator Maximum Lifting Capacity ten (10) tons. One (1) ton operator). Group 10 Crane Operator (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 ton M.R.C.)
Derrick Barge Operator (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 ton M.R.C.) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or similar type (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 ton M.R.C.) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 50 tons, up to and including 100 ton M.R.C.)
Group 11 Crane Operator (over 100 tons, up to and including 200 ton M.R.C.) Derrick Barge Operator (over 100 tons, up to and including 200 ton M.R.C.) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or similar type (over 100 tons, up to and including 200 ton M.R.C) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 100 tons, up to and including 200 ton M.R.C.) Tower Crane Operator and Tower Gantry Group 12 Crane Operator (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 ton M.R.C.) Derrick Barge Operator (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 ton M.R.C.) Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or similar type (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 ton M.R.C.) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 200 tons, up to and including 300 ton M.R.C.) Group 13 Crane Operator (over 300 tons) Derrick Barge Operator (over 300 tons) Helicopter Pilot Hoist Operator, Stiff Legs, Guy Derrick or similar type (over 300 tons) Mobile Tower Crane Operator (over 300 tons) SURVEYOR GROUP CLASSIFICATIONS Group 1 Chainman Group 2 Rodman Group 3 Instrument man Group IV Global Position Systems Chainman and Rodman Hydrographic Engineering Technician I (Chainman) Group V Party Chief
Group VI E.D.M. or Fathometer Instrument man Group VII Certified Party Chief Group VIII Hydrographic Engineer Party Chief Group IX Certified Hydrographic Engineer Party Chief Global Position Systems Party Chief Group X Chief of Parties Two (2) or more crews OPERATING ENGINEER-Tunnel Group 1 Heavy Duty Repairman Helper Group 2 Skiploader (wheel type up to yd. without attachment) Group 3 Power - Driver Jumbo Form Setter Operator Group 4 Dinkey Locomotive or Motorman (up to and including 10 tons)
Group 5 Bit Sharpener Equipment Greaser (Grease Truck) Slip Form Pump Operator (power driven hydraulic lifting device for concrete forms) Tugger Hoist Operator (1 drum) Tunnel Locomotive Operator (over 10 and up to and including 30 tons) Welder - General
Group 6 Backhoe Operator (up to and including yd.) Small Ford, Case or similar Drill Doctor
Grouting Machine Operator Heading Shield Operator Heavy Duty Repairman Jumbo Pipe Carrier Loader Operator (Athey, Euclid, Sierra and similar types) Mucking Machine Operator (1/4 yd.) Pneumatic Concrete Placing Machine Operator (Hackley-Presswell or similar type) Pneumatic Heading Shield (tunnel) Pumpcrete Gun Operator Tractor Compressor Drill Combination Operator Tugger Hoist Operator (2 drum) Tunnel Locomotive Operator (over 30 tons) Group 7 Heavy Duty Repairman-Welder Combination Group 8 No current classification Group 9 Tunnel Mole Boring Machine Operator TRUCK DRIVER, includes but is not limited to: Group 1 Drivers of dump trucks (less than 12 yds. water level), drivers of trucks (legal payload capacity less than 15 tons), water and fuel truck drivers under 2,500 gal, pickup driver, service station attendant, teamster equipment (highest rate paid for dual craft operation), warehousemen, drivers of busses on site used for transportation of up to sixteen (16) passengers. Group 2 Drivers of dump trucks (12 yds but less than 16 yds water level), drivers of trucks (legal payload capacity between 15 and 20 tons), drivers of transit mix trucks (under 3 yds), dumpcrete trucks (less than 6 yds water level), gas and oil pipeline working truck drivers, including winch truck and all sizes of trucks, water and fuel truck drivers (2,500 gal to 4,000 gal), truck greaser, drivers of busses (on jobsite used for transportation or more than sixteen (16) passengers), warehouse clerk. Group 3 Drivers of dump trucks (16 yds up to and including 22 yds water level), drivers of trucks (legal payload cap. 20 tons but less than 25 tons), drivers of dumpster trucks, drivers of transit-mix trucks (3 yds but less than 6 yds), dumpcrete trucks (6 yds water level and over), fork lift driver, Ross Carrier driver, highway water and fuel drivers (4,001 gallon but less than 6,000 gallon), stock room clerk, tireman.
Group 4 Drivers of transit-mix trucks (6 yds or more), drivers of dump trucks (over 22 yds. water level), drivers of trucks (legal payload capacity 25 tons and over) drivers of fuel and water trucks (6,000 gallon and over). Group 5 Drivers of trucks and trailers in combination (six axles or more). Group 6 All Off-road Equipment, Truck Repairman, Transport Drivers and Drivers of Road Oil Spreader Trucks, DW 10 and DW 20 Euclid-type equipment Letourneau pulls, Terra Cobras and similar types of equipment, also PB and similar type trucks when performing work within the Teamster jurisdiction, regardless of types of attachment, including power units pulling off-highway belly dumps in tandem.
ZONE RATES
CARPENTER In addition to CARPENTER rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated from Maryland Parkway and Charleston Boulevard, Las Vegas: Zone 1-0 to 40 miles $0.00 Zone 2-41 to 60 miles $2.50 Zone 3-Over 60 miles $4.25 Laughlin area $2.00 CEMENT MASON In addition to CEMENT MASON rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated based on a radius from the City Hall of Las Vegas, Nevada: Zone 1-0 to 30 miles $0.00 Zone 2-31 to 50 miles $1.50 Zone 3-over 50 miles $3.25 ELECTRICIAN COMMUNICATION TECHNICIAN In addition to ELECTRICIAN-Communication Technician, rates, add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated based on a radius from City Hall of Las Vegas: Zone 1- 0 to 25 miles $0.00 Zone 2- 26 to 55 miles $2.50 Zone 3-56 miles and over $3.50 ELECTRICIAN-WIREMAN In addition to ELECTRICIAN-Wireman rates, add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated based on a radius from City Hall of Las Vegas: Zone 1-0 to 25 miles $0.00 Zone 2-26 to 55 miles $2.50 Zone 3-over 55 miles $3.50 LABORER In addition to: LABORER, FLAGPERSON, HOD CARRIER BRICK MASON TENDER, HOD CARRIER PLASTERER TENDER AND TRAFFIC BARRIER ERECTOR rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated based on a radius from the City Hall of Las Vegas, Nevada: Zone 1-0 to 50 Miles $0.00 Zone 2-50 Miles and Over $3.75 including Laughlin area. MILLWRIGHT In addition to MILLWRIGHT rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated from Maryland Parkway and Charleston Boulevard, Las Vegas: Zone 1-0 to 20 miles $0.00
Zone 2-21 to 40 miles Zone 3-41 miles and over
$1.50 $3.25
OPERATING ENGINEER In addition to: OPERATING ENGINEER; CRANES, PILEDRIVING AND HOISTING EQUIPMENT, SURVEYOR, TUNNEL, EQUIPMENT GREASER (RACK), EQUIPMENT GREASER (GREASE TRUCK), EQUIPMENT GREASER (GREASE TRUCK/MULTISHIFT), TUNNEL, EQUIPMENT GREASER (GREASE TRUCK), FIELD SOILS AND MATERIAL TESTER and FIELD ASPHALTIC CONCRETE (SOILS AND MATERIALS TESTER) rates add the applicable amounts per hour calculated from the City Hall of Las Vegas, Nevada: Zone 1-0 to 20 miles Zone 2-21 to 40 miles Zone 3-41 to 60 miles Zone 4-over 60 miles $0.00 $2.00 $3.00 $3.50
PLASTERER In addition to PLASTERER rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated from the City Hall of Las Vegas, Nevada: Zone 1-0 to 50 miles $0.00 Zone 2-over 50 miles $1.50 PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER In addition to PLUMBER/PIPEFITTER rates employees performing work on Public Works Projects covered by this Agreement shall be entitled to the following wage rates for all hours worked, calculated on an air mile radius from the Clark County Regional Justice Center: Zone 1-0-20 miles Zone 2-21-45 miles Zone 3-46-75 miles Zone 4-76 miles and over $ 0.00 $3.75 $7.50 $11.25
SHEET METAL WORKER In addition to SHEET METAL WORKER and AIR BALANCE rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated on a radius from the City Hall of Las Vegas, Nevada: Zone 1-0 to 30 miles Zone 2-31 to 50 miles Zone 3-51 to 100 miles Zone 4-over 100 miles $0.00 $2.50 $3.50 (including Laughlin) $5.00
TILE/TERRAZZO WORKER/MARBLE MASON In addition to TILE/TERRAZZO WORKER/MARBLE MASON rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated based on a radius of over fifty (50) miles from the City Hall of Las Vegas, Nevada: 0-40 Miles $0.00 41-50 Miles $2.50 51-70 Miles $4.37 Over 70 Miles $6.87 The area within the city limits of Boulder City and Primm, Nevada shall be considered free zones. TRUCK DRIVER In addition to TRUCK DRIVER rates add the applicable amounts per hour, calculated from Las Vegas City Hall: Zone 1-0 to 30 miles 0.00 Zone 2-31 to 50 miles 1.50 Zone 3-51 to 70 miles 2.50 Zone 4-Over 70 miles 3.50
SECTION 01 06 00 SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL LAWS, ORDINANCES, AND REGULATIONS A. The Contractor shall comply with the Construction Safety Orders and other applicable safety orders described within the Regulations for the Nevada Occupational Safety and Health Enforcement Program and the Nevada Occupational Safety and Health Act, and such other rules, regulations, and laws applicable during the progress of the work. The Contractor shall have copies of the following posted at the work site. 1. 2. 3. 1.02 A copy of the Nevada Occupational Safety and Health Act, and Regulations for the Nevada Occupational Safety and Health Enforcement Program. Material Safety Data Sheets for all chemicals or potentially hazardous materials being used or stored at the site. Permits as required for the work.
B.
SAFETY AND HEALTH A. B. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the work. The Contractor shall publish an alcohol, drug and smoke-free work site policy statement notifying all employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of alcohol or a controlled substance is prohibited at the work site and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violation of such prohibition. Additionally, the Contractor shall publish a no smoking on the construction site policy statement notifying all employees that smoking will not be allowed on the construction site or in the facility. All persons shall be required to wear hard hats and suitable hard soled work shoes in good repair (safety style steel or fiberglass toe shoes are recommended) while at the work site. Sandals, athletic shoes, and other soft footwear may not be worn on the work site. The Contractor shall make every effort to ensure the safety of all inspectors and other employees, consultants, clients and agents of Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow (FIT) and Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow personnel. The Contractor shall not permit inspectors, employees, consultants, and agents to enter any unsafe place for the purpose of making inspections, except where an inspection is required to determine if previously detected unsafe conditions have been corrected. Where work is required to be inspected, and the inspection is not
C.
D.
01 06 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Safety and Environmental Requirements
performed due to the existence of an unsafe condition, such work is subject to rejection, or the work may be suspended. E. The Contractor shall notify in writing the Owner and Owners representative and personnel five days in advance of when materials which may cause odors will be used, applied, or mixed nearby or directly to the building.
1.03
DUST ABATEMENT A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment, and means required and shall carry out effective measures wherever and as often as necessary to prevent its operations from causing visible dust emissions from leaving the work areas. These measures shall include, but are not limited to, providing additional watering equipment, reducing vehicle speed on haul roads, restricting traffic on haul roads, and covering haul vehicles. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage resulting from any dust originating from operations. The dust abatement measures shall be continued for the duration of the contract. The Contractor shall hose down any vehicle or equipment leaving the project area with water prior to entering the public right of way if the vehicles appear to be transporting excessive amounts of dust. When any material or debris is tracked out from the project area, the Contractor shall clean all paved public roads near the site entrances as often as required to prevent spreading of dust by vehicles.
B.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall submit, at the preconstruction conference, the name of the Contractors on-site safety representative and a copy of the written Site Safety Plan in accordance with OSHA requirements. The Site Safety Plan must be posted at the job site. The General Contractor will provide written verification of a Site Safety Plan for each subcontractor within thirty (30) days from the Notice to Proceed date. The Contractor shall inform the Owner and Owners Architect of the number and character of all accidents resulting in loss of time, medical treatment, and first aid treatment. END OF SECTION
B. C.
01 06 00 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Safety and Environmental Requirements
SECTION 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements, including but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 1.02 Project identification and description. Contract description. Work by General Contractor Work by Owner. Work under other contractors. Owner furnished items. Contractor Use of Site and Premises. Owner Use of Site and Premises. Work sequence and scheduling. Owner occupancy. Miscellaneous provisions.
SUMMARY OF WORK A. Project: The Project of which the Work of the Contract is a part titled (FIT) FOUNDATION FOR AN INDEPENDENT TOMORROW BUILDING ADDITION and is located at 1931 Stella Lake Drive, Las Vegas, Nevada 89106. The Work is described in the Project Drawings, Narratives and Divisions 1 through 48 of the Project Manual. The Work consists of the addition of 1,424 square feet of new first floor addition to the existing building and addition of 7,033 square feet of new second floor to existing building, including but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. C. Onsite and offsite improvements Landscaping renovations Renovation of the existing break room. Addition of tubular skylight in existing offices. Electrical service upgrade
B.
Contractor shall protect all adjacent areas from damage and restore to existing conditions all areas adjacent to the work. All debris from this contract shall be removed, hauled away and disposed of in a legal fashion. Do Not Use Owners Dumpsters.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Summary of Work
01 11 00 - 1
1.03
USE OF SITE A. Facility: The Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow is and will remain occupied and operational throughout the Project duration, including construction and close out. Owner: Owner intends to use site and building during construction period for normal operations. Contractor shall allow for use of site by: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. Owners personnel and staff. Work by Owner. Work by others, work by Owner, and work by public utility companies. Use of site and premises by the public.
B.
Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by law, ordinances, permits, and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. Construction operations shall be limited to areas as indicated on the Contract Documents and as approved by Owner. The Contractor is responsible to and shall provide temporary building systems as required by the Owners operations of the facility, including but not limited to; electrical, lighting, HVAC systems, plumbing, data, communications, surveillance and security for the duration of Construction. Construction Time Restrictions: Coordinate with Owner to minimize impact to Owners operations. Nonsmoking Restrictions: Smoking is not permitted within the facility, or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor air intakes of the facility. Contractor shall maintain emergency exits from existing buildings during construction. Maintain fire lanes and other access routes required by the Owner. Utility Outages and Shutdown: Provide a minimum fourteen (14) days' notice of scheduled shutdowns and immediate notification of unscheduled utility interruptions to the site.
D. E.
F. G. H. I. J.
1.04
OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and operated the facility during entire construction period. The Contractor must cooperate with the Owner and comply with all security requirements and procedures during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Work is to be scheduled, phased and performed so as not to interfere with Owners operations. Owner Operations: 1. At no time during the Work shall Contractor place, or cause to be placed, materials or equipment, or other items, at a location that would impede or
B.
01 11 00 - 2
impair access to or from the present facilities for customers, employees or delivery personnel. 2. Contractor shall cooperate with the Owner in providing traffic control during course of construction in order to minimize inconvenience to the Owners personnel and staff, Owners operations and the Public. Utility service to existing building shall not be interrupted without prior written approval from the Owner.
3. C.
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.
1.05
WORK BY CONTRACTOR A. Review Contract Documents and Field Conditions: 1. Carefully study and compare the Contract Documents with each other and with information furnished by Owner and immediately report to the Owners Architect errors, inconsistencies, or omissions discovered. If Contractor performs any final document preparation and construction activity knowing it involves a recognized error, inconsistency, or omission in the Contract Documents without such notice to Owners Architect, Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such performance and shall bear an appropriate amount of the attributable costs of correction. Take field measurements, verify field conditions, and carefully compare field measurements and conditions and other information known to Contractor with the Contract Documents before commencing with Final Construction and Permit Document preparations and construction activities. Report errors, inconsistencies, or omissions discovered to the Owners Architect at once. Furnish within five (5) days after award of Contract a list of principal staff assignments including but not limited to: a. b. c. d. Contractors Superintendents, Project Managers, Project Engineers, Other team personnel in attendance at Project site.
2.
B.
Supervision: 1.
Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including emergency contact numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.
01 11 00 - 3
2.
Superintendent shall be present at the project site for a minimum of 8 hours each day that construction work is progressing, or that is a normal business day until all punch list items have been corrected. a. Superintendent shall also be present at the project site during all work performed at other than the above times.
3. 4.
At the Owners sole discretion, the Owner shall request and require, in writing, the replacement of a Superintendent and/or Project Manager. Superintendent shall not be replaced at Contractors request, except in case of an emergency as approved by Owner or upon mutual agreement by Owner and Contractor. Any subsequent substitution, if approved, will require full time presence on-site of Contractor's Project Manager in addition to Superintendent. Perform all design, engineering and construction work as may be necessary to complete the Contract in a satisfactory and acceptable manner. Contractor shall be solely responsible for and have control over construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract. Contractor shall be responsible to Owner for acts and omissions of Contractor's employees, Subconsultants, Subcontractors, and their agents and employees, and other persons performing portions of the Work under a contract. Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the intent and requirements of the Contract Documents, either by activities or duties of Owner in Owner's administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections, or approvals required or performed by persons other than Contractor. Furnish and pay for all transportation, material, equipment, tools, labor, and incidentals necessary to complete the Work in the best possible and most expeditious manner. Provide and pay for labor, materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanent and whether or not incorporated in the Work.
C.
Performance of the Work: 1. 2.
3.
4.
D.
Materials, Labor, and Equipment: 1.
2.
E.
Labor: Enforce strict discipline and good order among Contractor's employees, subcontractors and other persons carrying out the Contract. Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons not skilled in tasks assigned to them. Contractor's Responsibilities include but are not limited to:
F.
01 11 00 - 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.06
Review Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples; before and after Architect's review. Receive and unload Products at site. Inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. Handle, store, install, and finish Products. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt.
OWNER FURNISHED AND INSTALLED ITEMS A. Contractor is to coordinate with the Owner for items indicated on the Contract Documents as Not in Contract (NIC) and items indicated to be furnished and installed by Owner: Contractors Responsibilities: 1. Provide Owner with written notice stating date(s) when Owner-furnished items must be received at the job site to insure Project completion in accordance with established schedule. Such dates shall be shown on the schedule. Contractor is responsible for the coordination and interface of OwnerFurnished and Installed work with Work of this Contract to provide all required mechanical and electrical rough-ins, openings, supports, dimensions, etc., as required for a complete installation. Provide support systems to receive Owner furnished equipment, including plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as applicable.
B.
2.
3.
1.07
OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED ITEMS A. B. Coordinate with the Owner for items that will be furnished by Owner for installation by Contractor: Owners Responsibilities: 1. 2. 3. Arrange for, and deliver, Owner reviewed Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples to Contractor. Arrange and pay for delivery of Owner-furnished items according to Contractor's Construction Schedule. After delivery, inspect items for damage with Contractor present. Inspect specified items jointly with Contractor and record status and condition of each item. If Owner-furnished items are damaged, defective, or missing, Owner will arrange for replacement, including submitting claims for transportation. Arrange for manufacturer's field services and for delivery of manufacturer's warranties to Contractor.
4. 5.
01 11 00 - 5
6.
Furnish Contractor the earliest possible delivery date for Owner-furnished products with reasonable promptness to avoid delay in orderly progress of the Work. Provide access to specified items for inspection by Contractor. Cooperate with Contractor on scheduling time and method of removal of Owner- supplied products from existing location for reinstallation in the Work of the Project. Provide Owner with written notice stating date(s) when Owner-furnished items must be received at the job site to insure Project completion in accordance with established schedule. Such dates shall be shown on the schedule. Review Owner-provided Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples and return them to Architect noting discrepancies or anticipated problems in use of product. Contractor shall not be responsible for omissions and errors in Owner-provided items. Receive and unload items at Project site. After delivery, inspect items for damage with Owner present. Protect Owner-furnished items from damage during storage and handling, including damage from exposure to the elements, once Contractor has taken possession of Owner-furnished items. If Owner-furnished items are damaged as a result of Contractor's operations, Contractor shall repair or replace them. Using Owner-furnished earliest possible delivery dates, designate delivery dates of Owner-furnished items in Contractor's Construction Schedule. Contractor is responsible for the coordination and interface of OwnerFurnished and Installed work with Work of this Contract to provide all required mechanical and electrical rough-ins, openings, supports, dimensions, etc., as required for a complete installation. Provide support systems to receive Owner furnished equipment, including plumbing, mechanical, and electrical connections as applicable.
7. 8.
C.
Contractors Responsibilities: 1.
2.
3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8.
9.
1.08
EXISTING CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall be completely responsible for protecting the existing building from damage and/or injury due to this Work and shall repair at his expense and to the Owners and Owners Architect's satisfaction, all areas damaged as a result of his Work.
1.09
CODES AND REGULATIONS
01 11 00 - 6
A.
The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and lawful orders of public authority bearing on the performance of the Work. If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owners Architect and Owner, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility therefore and shall bear attributable costs.
B.
1.10
SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using CSIs "MasterFormat 04" 50-division numbering system. 1. Section Identification: The Specifications use Section numbers and titles to help cross-referencing in the Construction Documents. Sections in the Project Manual are in numeric sequence; however, the sequence is incomplete because all available Section numbers are not used. Consult the table of contents at the beginning of the Project Manual to determine numbers and names of Sections in the Contract Documents. Division 01: Sections in Division 01 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.
2. B.
Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.
C.
These specifications are written in streamlined or declarative style, using incomplete sentences. This imperative language is directed to Contractor unless specifically noted otherwise. Omissions of such words and phrases as "The Contractor shall," "in conformity therewith," "shall be," "as shown on the Drawings," "a," "an," "the," and "all" are intentional in streamlined sections. 1. 2. 3. Omitted words shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as when a note appears on the Drawings. Omission of such words shall not relieve the Contractor from providing the items and work described herein or indicated on the Drawings. Words "shall be" are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences or phrases.
D.
01 11 00 - 7
PART 2. Not Used PART 3. Not Used
PRODUCTS
EXECUTION
END OF SECTION
01 11 00 - 8
SECTION 01 26 00 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. B. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 60 00 - Product and Material Requirements for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after Contract award.
1.02
DEFINITIONS A. A Modification is 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Architects Supplemental Instructions. Change Order Construction Change Directive Or a written amendment to the Contract signed by the Owner, Architect and Contractor
Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by Owner and signed by Owner, Contractor and Owners Architect, stating their agreement upon a change in the Work which results in a change in the Contract Time and/or Contract Amount on AIA Document G701 Change Order. A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Owners Architect and signed by Owner and Owners Architect, directing a change in the Work, on AIA Document G714, Construction Change Directive. Construction Change Directive allows the Work to proceed when Owner and Contractor do not agree upon a change to the Contract Sum or Contract Time required by a Change Order. Construction Change Directive requires agreement by Owner and Owners Architect and may or may not be agreed to by Contractor.
C.
D.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Contractor agrees to provide all labor rates and labor burden cost information and requires all Subcontractors to submit all their labor rates and labor burden cost information to be used as the basis for contract modifications. Information is to be submitted with first Pay Application.
01 26 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Contract Modification Procedures
B.
Submit name of the individual authorized to accept changes, and to be responsible for informing others in Contractors employ of changes in the Work. Refer to Document 00 21 13, Instructions to Bidders, subparagraph 7.4.
1.04
DOCUMENTATION OF CHANGE IN CONTRACT SUM AND CONTRACT TIME A. Maintain detailed records of Work done on a time and material basis. Provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes, and to substantiate costs of changes in the Work. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation. On request, provide additional data to support computations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. D. Quantities of products, labor, and equipment. Taxes. Overhead and profit. Justification for any change in Contract Time according to CPM schedule. Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented.
B. C.
On request, support each claim for additional costs, and for Work done on a time and material basis, with additional information. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Origin and date of claim. Dates and times Work was performed, and by whom. Time records and wage rates paid. Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontracts, similarly documented. Any RFI, ASI, RFP, COR which effected claim RFI Request For Information RFP Request For Proposal COR Change Order Request
1.05
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS A. The Architect has the authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time and not inconsistent with intent of the Contract Documents. Such minor changes shall be effected by written order and shall be binding on Owner and Contractor. Contractor shall carry out such written orders promptly.
B. C. 1.06
PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a Request for Proposal (RFP) which will include detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that
01 26 00 - 2
may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. Within seven (7) after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Contractor shall include a detailed statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors and trades, including existing facilities, utilities and access.
2.
b. c.
d.
B.
Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. Comply with requirements in Section 01 60 00 Product and Material Requirements if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.
2.
3. 4.
5.
01 26 00 - 3
6.
Contractor shall include a detailed statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors and trades, including existing facilities, utilities and access
C. 1.07
Proposal Request Form: AIA Document G709.
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. B. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. Contractor shall submit proposals and/or billings for materials and/or labor for all additional work: 1. 2. C. 1. In conformance with provisions, rates, and requirements set forth in the Prevailing Wage Rates outlined in the Construction Contract. With charges limited to those set forth below in this Article Cost of products or materials to Contractor or Subcontractor, less any applicable trade discounts, shall be subject to mark-up for overhead and profit as follows: a. Where Contractor supplies products or materials to Owner directly, Contractor will be allowed to add a maximum of 10 percent overhead and profit in his billing to Owner Where Subcontractor supplies products or materials to Owner, through Contractor, Contractor will be allowed to add a maximum of 10 percent overhead and profit for Subcontractor, and above that, 5 percent overhead and profit for himself in his billing to Owner
Materials:
b.
2. D. E.
Owner reserves the right to request copies of any or all invoices or contracts, including those from originating suppliers, subcontractors, or manufacturers
Applicable taxes: No overhead and profit will be allowed Labor: 1. Where Contractor supplies labor to Owner directly, Contractor will be allowed to add a maximum of 15 percent overhead and profit in his billing to Owner. Where Subcontractor supplies labor to Owner, through Contractor, Contractor will be allowed to add a maximum of 15 percent overhead and profit for Subcontractor; and above that, a maximum of 10 percent overhead and profit in his billing to Owner. Labor costs shall be in compliance with the Prevailing Wage Rates as provided herein. Owner reserves the right to request copies of any or all invoices, time sheets, and so forth relevant to labor charged.
2.
3. 4. F.
Overhead and Profit:
01 26 00 - 4
1.
Overhead and profit at the rates outlined above includes costs of bonds and insurance, supervision, estimating, administrative and clerical personnel at the base office and/or field office, use of power tools and equipment, incidental job burdens, payroll tax on labor, and general office expenses. No additional overhead and profit will be allowed for omitting work. When both additions and credits covering related work or substitutions are involved in any one change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any, with respect to that change.
2. 3.
1.08
CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.
B.
If a Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods. 1. 2. 3. Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data to permit evaluation Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed fee
C.
Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise Owner of Contractor's agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in Contract Sum or Contract Time. A Construction Change Directive signed by Contractor indicates the agreement of Contractor therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract time or the method determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. If Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the method and the adjustment shall be determined by Owner on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data and documentation necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract as indicated herein.
D.
E.
F.
1.09
DOCUMENTATION
01 26 00 - 5
A. B. C.
The Contractor shall maintain detailed records on a time and material for all work done to document and substantiate pricing for any changes in the Work. Document each quotation and provide full information required for evaluation of proposed changes to substantiate costs of changes in the Work. The Contractor, Subcontractors, and Sub-subcontractors, along with the Owner, Architect, and their respective consultants shall use the established method of pricing to estimate, document, and verify proposed costs for changes in the Work. Document each quotation for a change in cost or time with sufficient data to allow evaluation of the quotation. Supporting data shall include but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Document(s) which generated or effected quotation (RFI, RFP, or COR, etc.) Quantities of products, labor, and equipment Taxes Overhead and profit Credit for deletions from Contract, similarly documented; and Detailed justification for any change in Contract Time according to CPM schedule
D.
E.
Support each claim for additional costs and for work done on a time and material force account basis with additional information: 1. 2. Origin and date of claim Dates and time work was performed and by whom. Superintendent and Owner's representative and Architect shall be notified when work commences and when it is complete. Superintendent and Owner's representative shall sign the work log Time records and wage rates paid Invoices and receipts for products, equipment, and subcontractors similarly documented
3. 4. F.
Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as Owner may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs shall be limited to the following: 1. Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers' or workmen's compensation insurance Costs of materials, supplies, and equipment, including costs of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed Rental costs of machinery and equipment exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from Contractor or others
2. 3.
1.10
CORRELATION OF CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
01 26 00 - 6
A.
Promptly revise Schedule of Values and Application for Payment forms to record each authorized Change Order as a separate line item and adjust the Contract Sum as shown on Change Order. Promptly revise CPM Schedules to reflect any change in Contract Time, revise sub schedules to adjust times for other items of Work affected by the change, and resubmit. Promptly enter changes in Project Record Documents.
B.
C. PART 2.
PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3.
EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION
01 26 00 - 7
SECTION 01 26 13 CONTRACTORS REQUEST FOR INFORMATION PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Administrative requirements for Request for Information.
DEFINITIONS A. Request for Information: A document submitted by the Contractor requesting information or clarification of a portion of the Contract Documents that is required to properly perform the work, hereinafter referred to as an RFI. 1. Request shall clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is sought and why a response is needed from the Architect. In the RFI form the Contractor shall set forth their own interpretation or understanding of the requirement along with reasons why they have reached such an understanding. The Architect will review all RFIs to determine whether the RFI is within the meaning of this term. A properly prepared Request for Information shall include a detailed written statement that indicates the specific drawing or specification section in need of clarification and the nature of the clarification requested. a. b. C. Drawing(s) shall be identified by drawing number and location on the drawing sheet. Specification shall be identified by section number, page and paragraph.
B.
Proper RFIs: 1.
Improper RFIs: 1. RFIs that are not properly prepared and may be processed by the Architect at the Architects standard hourly rate and the Architect may charge the Owner. Such costs will be deducted from monies still due the Contractor. The Contractor will be notified by the Architect prior to the processing of improper RFIs. Frivolous RFIs are RFIs that request information that is clearly shown on the Contract Documents. Frivolous RFIs may be returned unanswered or may be processed by the Architect at the Architects standard hourly rate and the Architect may charge the Owner. Such costs will be deducted from monies still due the Contractor. The Contractor will be notified by the Architect prior to the processing of frivolous RFIs.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Contractors Request for Information
D.
Frivolous RFIs: 1. 2.
01 26 13 - 1
1.03
CONTRACTORS REQUEST FOR INFORMATION A. When the Contractor is unable to determine from the Contract Documents the material, process or system to be installed, the Architect shall be requested to make a clarification of the indeterminate item. 1. Wherever possible, such clarification shall be requested at the next appropriate project meeting, with the response entered into the meeting minutes. When clarification at the meeting is not possible, either because of the urgency of the need, or the complexity of the item, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI to the Architect. If clarification of an item is required of a document known to have been prepared by a consultant to the Architect, the Contractor may not direct the RFI directly to the consultant. Each RFI shall be processed through the Architect. Forms shall be completely filled in, and if prepared by hand, shall be fully legible after photocopying or transmission by facsimile (fax) or electronically (email). RFIs shall be submitted in numerical order with no breaks in the consecutive numbering. Each page of attachments to RFI's shall bear the RFI number and shall be consecutively numbered in chronological order. It is preferred that RFI's be submitted by E-Mail. a. b. C. Address for E-Mail will be distributed by the Architect at the PreConstruction Conference. An electronic version of Document 01 26 14 will be provided upon request.
2.
B.
RFI's shall be submitted on Document 01 26 14 included in the Project Manual. 1.
2. 3. 4.
Contractor shall endeavor to keep the number of RFI's to a minimum. In the event that the process becomes unwieldy, in the opinion of the Architect, because of the number and frequency of RFI's submitted, the Architect may require the Contractor to abandon the process and submit future requests as either submittals, substitutions or requests for change. RFIs shall be originated by the Contractor. 1. 2. RFIs from subcontractors or material suppliers shall be submitted through, reviewed by, and signed by the Contractor prior to submittal to the Architect. RFIs sent by a subcontractor or material supplier directly to the Owner, Owners Representative, Architect or the Architects consultants shall not be accepted and will be returned unanswered.
D.
E.
Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents to assure that the requested information is not available therein. RFIs which request information available in the Contract Documents will be deemed frivolous as defined herein.
01 26 13 - 2
F.
In cases where RFIs are issued to request clarification of coordination issues, for example, pipe and duct routing, clearances, specific locations of work shown diagrammatically and similar items the Contractor shall fully lay out a suggested solution using drawings or sketches drawn to scale and submit same with the RFI. RFIs which fail to include a suggested solution will be returned unanswered with a requirement that the Contractor submit a complete request. RFIs shall not be used for the following purposes: 1. 2. 3. 4. To request approval of submittals. To request approval of substitutions. To request changes which entail additional cost or credit. To request methods of performing work different than those shown or specified.
G.
H.
The Contractor shall prepare and maintain a log of RFIs. Upon request by the Owner or Architect, the Contractor shall furnish copies of the log showing outstanding RFIs. The Contractor shall note unanswered RFIs in the log.
1.04
ARCHITECTS RESPONSE TO RFIs A. Contractor shall allow 5 days for the Architects review and response time for RFIs, after receipt at Architects office, however, the Architect will endeavor to respond in less time. If additional time is required beyond the 5 days allowed, the Architect shall notify the Contractor in writing. 1. RFI shall state requested date/time for response, however, this requested date/time for response is not a guarantee that the RFI will be answered by that date/time if that date/time is too expeditious. Directly upon the RFI Form Notice of Clarification (NOC) Request for Proposal form. A Notification of Processing Fee(s). Unanswered and returned with the notation: Not Reviewed.
B.
Architect will respond to properly prepared RFIs on one of the following forms: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Improper or frivolous RFIs shall be subject to one of the following: 1. 2.
D.
The Architect may opt to retain RFIs for discussion during regularly scheduled project meetings for inclusion of responses in meeting minutes in lieu of responding in written form. Responses from the Architect will not change any requirement of the Contract Documents unless so noted by the Architect in the response to the RFI. In the event the Contractor believes that a response to a RFI will cause a change to the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately give written notice to the Architect stating that the Contractor considers the response to
E.
01 26 13 - 3
be a Change Order. Failure to give written notice within 14 days shall waive the Contractors right to seek additional time or cost. 1. PART 2. Not Used PART 3. Not Used EXECUTION PRODUCTS Answered RFIs shall not be construed as approval to perform extra work.
END OF SECTION
01 26 13 - 4
SECTION 01 26 14 CONTRACTORS REQUEST FOR INFORMATION FORM
Project: FIT for an Independent Tomorrow To: Sylvia Kim (JMA Architecture Studios) 10150 Covington Cross Drive Las Vegas, Nevada 89122 A/E Project Number: 127457 Re: Specification Section: Request: Paragraph:
R.F.I. Number: From:
Contract For: Drawing Reference: Detail:
*Requested Date/Time for Response: Signed by:
Response:
Attachments Response From: Signed By: Copies: Owner Consultants _______________ _______________ File To: *Date Received: *Date Returned
*Contractor shall allow up to 5 working days review and response time for RFIs unless review is required of multiple consultants, then the review and response shall be 7 working days. (See Section 01 26 13 Contractors Request for Information). END OF SECTION
01 26 14 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Contractors Request for Information Form
SECTION 01 29 00 PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.
1.02
SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Submittals Schedule and Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets (AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheet). Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than 7 days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. Prepare Schedule of Values in coordination with Contractors Construction Schedule.
2.
3. B.
Format and Content: Indicate the scheduled value of major categories and subcontracts for the Work. 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Project name and location. Name of Architect. Architect's project number. Contractor's name and address. Date of submittal.
Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. b. c. d. e. f. Related Specification Section or Division. Description of the Work. Name of subcontractor. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. Name of supplier. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Payment Procedures
01 29 00 - 1
g. 3.
Dollar value: Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.
Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Schedule of Values shall include but not be limited to, the following items; a) Division 01 General Requirements 1. Mobilization: maximum of one/half percent of Contract amount. 2. Overhead and profit to be spread equally to all scheduled line items. b) Division 02 Existing Conditions 1. Demolition. c) Division 03 Concrete 1. Building Concrete 2. Sitework Concrete d) Division 05 Metals 1. Structural Steel Framing 2. Steel Stairs 3. Handrails e) Division 06 Woods and Plastics and Composites 1. Architectural Woodwork f) Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 1. Waterproofing 2. Insulation 3. Cementitious Fireproofing g) Division 08 Openings 1. Door Frames, Doors, and Hardware 2. Glazing h) Division 09 Finishes 1. Drywall and Painting 2. Acoustical Tile Ceilings 3. Ceramic Tile i) Division 10 Specialties 1. Wall Protection j) Division 14 Conveying Equipment 1. Electric Traction Elevator k) Division 21 Fire Suppression 1. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System l) Division 22 and Division 23 Plumbing, Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning. 1. Ductwork and HVAC Equipment 2. HVAC Piping 3. Plumbing Piping 4. Plumbing Fixtures m) Division 26 Electrical 1. Building Service per NV Energy and Embarq 2. Rough-in Conduit and Wire
4.
01 29 00 - 2
5. 6.
3. Distribution apparatus (standing sections, panelboards, motor controls, cabinets and enclosures, dry type transformers) 4. Wiring Devices 5. Transfer Switches n) Division 27 Communications 1. Communications Backbone Cabling o) Division 31 Earthwork 1. Rock and caliche removal 2. Backfill p) Division 32 Exterior Improvements 1. Asphaltic Paving 2. Concrete Paving q) Construction Conflicts and Additional Work Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Identify temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as either separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.
7.
8.
9.
Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.
1.03
APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. General: 1. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications, except as otherwise required herein, and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor, or, if not indicated, the 15th day of each month. The period covered by each Application for Payment starts on the day following the end of the preceding period and ends 15 days before the date for each progress payment. Only one pay application per month can be submitted by the Contractor. Payment Application Forms: AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.
2.
3.
01 29 00 - 3
4.
Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. a. b. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. As a condition precedent to receiving payments, Contractor shall have on file with Owner current certificates of insurance evidencing required coverage. Insurance certificates for Owner shall contain the information shown on the sample certificates provided in the Contract Documents.
5.
Certificates of Insurance. a.
b. B.
Transmittal: Submit 3 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar required attachments. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.
C.
Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. 2. 3. 4. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.
D.
Initial Application for Payment: Include the following administrative actions and submittals prior to, or with, submittal of first Application for Payment: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. List of subcontractors. Schedule of Values Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). List of Contractor's staff assignments. Copies of building permits.
01 29 00 - 4
7. 8. 9. 10. E. 1. 2. 3. F.
Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. Performance and payment bonds. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. Verify that as-built drawings are up to date. Verify that the Project has been maintained in a clean condition. Application for Payment will be processed each month only after verification of the Quality Assurance items. Provide two Compact Discs with each pay application containing digital photographs of the site and building showing progress of the Work from the previous months work as indicated in Section 01 31 00.
Quality Assurance
Photographs: 1.
G.
Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. Application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.
2. H.
Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." Evidence that claims have been settled. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. END OF SECTION
01 29 00 - 5
SECTION 01 31 00 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.02 General project coordination procedures. Conservation. Coordination Drawings. Administrative and supervisory personnel. Project meetings.
COORDINATION A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.
2. 3. B.
Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.
C.
Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. Preparation of the Schedule of Values. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. Delivery and processing of submittals. Progress meetings.
01 31 00 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Project Management and Coordination
6. 7. D.
Preinstallation conferences. Project closeout activities.
Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. 1. 2. 3. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. Indicate required installation sequences. Refer to Division 23 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" and Division 25 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations.
B.
Staff Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including emergency contact numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone.
1.04
PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 3 days of the meeting.
2. 3.
B.
Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Project Management and Coordination
01 31 00 - 2
convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. 1. Attendees: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. Authorized representatives of Owner Construction Manager Architect, and their consultants Contractor and its superintendent Major subcontractors; manufacturers; suppliers; and other concerned parties. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including, but not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. Tentative construction schedule. Phasing. Critical work sequencing. Designation of responsible personnel. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. Distribution of the Contract Documents. Submittal procedures. Preparation of Record Documents. Use of the premises. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. Parking availability. Office, work, and storage areas. Equipment deliveries and priorities. First aid. Security. Progress cleaning. Working hours.
C.
Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: a. Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting.
01 31 00 - 3
b. 2.
Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.
Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including, but not limited to, requirements for the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. Contract Documents. Options. Related Change Orders. Purchases. Deliveries. Submittals. Review of mockups. Possible conflicts. Compatibility problems. Time schedules. Weather limitations. Manufacturer's written recommendations. Warranty requirements. Compatibility of materials. Acceptability of substrates. Temporary facilities and controls. Space and access limitations. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Testing and inspecting requirements. Required performance results. Protection of construction and personnel.
3. 4.
Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.
D.
Pre-Progress Meeting: If requested by Architect, conduct a pre-progress meeting prior to Progress Meeting. 1. Attendees: Owner, Architect, Contractor. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 1. Attendees: a. b. Representatives of Owner Architect
E.
01 31 00 - 4
c.
Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.
d. 2.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including, but not limited to the following: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. ix. x. xi. xii. Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Work hours. Hazards and risks. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards.
b.
viii. Temporary facilities and controls.
xiii. Change Orders. xiv. Documentation of information for payment requests. 3. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have been present. Include a brief summary, in narrative form, of progress since the previous meeting and report. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.
01 31 00 - 5
F.
Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at weekly intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. 1. Attendees: a. b. Representatives of Owner Each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work
c. 2.
Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. Schedule Updating: Revise Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including, but not limited to, the following: i. ii. iii. iv. v. vi. vii. ix. x. xi. xii. Interface requirements. Sequence of operations. Status of submittals. Deliveries. Off-site fabrication. Access. Site utilization. Work hours. Hazards and risks. Progress cleaning. Quality and work standards.
b.
c.
viii. Temporary facilities and controls.
xiii. Change Orders.

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Project Management and Coordination
01 31 00 - 6
3.
Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3.
01 31 00 - 7
SECTION 01 32 26 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.02 Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submittals Schedule. Daily construction reports. Field condition reports. Construction photographs.
DEFINITIONS A. Critical Path: The longest continuous chain of activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.
B.
C. D.
Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Submittals Schedule: 1. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. Scheduled date for first submittal. Specification Section number and title. Submittal category (action or informational). Name of subcontractor. Description of the Work covered. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.
Submit 3 copies of schedule. If requested by Architect, provide electronic copy for Architects use.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Construction Progress Documentation
01 32 36 - 1
B.
Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit 2 printed copies: 1. 2. First copy: Single sheet of reproducible media. Second copy: Print, large enough to show entire network for entire construction period. First copy: Reproducible media. Second copy: Blue or black-line print, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.
C.
Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit 2 printed copies of initial schedule. 1. 2.
D.
CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit 3 printed copies of each of the following computer-generated reports. Each activity identified in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float. 1. 2. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float.
3. E. F. G.
Construction Photographs: Submit 2 prints of each photographic view within 7 days of taking photographs. Daily Construction Reports: Submit 2 copies at weekly intervals. Field Condition Reports: Submit 2 copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.
1.04
COORDINATION A. B. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. 1. 2. C. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.
Coordinate access to Project site with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

01 32 36 - 2
A.
Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. 2. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.
2.02
CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. General: Submit Contractor's Construction Schedule within 10 calendar days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the Preliminary Construction Schedule and whatever updating and feedback was received since the start of Project. Submit updated schedule with each application for payment. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for the Notice to Proceed to date of Final Completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.
B.
C.
Activities: Indicated separate activities, broken down by trade or material, including the following information: 1. 2. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal time frames as indicated in Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule. Startup and Testing Time: Include time frame recommended by product and system manufacturers for startup and testing. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.
3.
4. 5.
D.
Contract Modifications: Submit a revised schedule with each proposed contract modification, demonstrating the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. 1. Format: Schedule may be by CPM or bar graph (Gantt chart) type.
01 32 36 - 3
2.
Gantt: Comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal Gantt-chart-type indicating each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. a. For construction activities that require 3 months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.
3.
CPM: Prepare Contractor's Construction Schedule using a CPM network analysis diagram. a. Preliminary Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 60 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 30 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. Unit of Time: One workday. Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the preliminary network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following: i. Preparation and processing of submittals. ii. Purchase of materials. iii. Delivery. iv. Fabrication. v. Installation. g. Processing: Process data to produce output data or a computer-drawn, timescaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a list of straight "early start-total float" sort. Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: i. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.
b.
c.
d. e.
f.
h. i.
01 32 36 - 4
ii. Description of activity. iii. Principal events of activity. iv. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. v. Early and late start dates. vi. Early and late finish dates. vii. Activity duration in workdays. viii. Total float or slack time. ix. Average size of workforce. E. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3. F. Changes in early and late start dates. Changes in early and late finish dates. Changes in activity durations in workdays. Changes in the critical path. Changes in total float or slack time. Changes in the Contract Time.
2.
As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.
Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. 2. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.
2.03
REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording events at Project site, including the following: 1. 2. 3. List of subcontractors and numbers of associated workers with each trade. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. Accidents.
01 32 36 - 5
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B.
Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. Meter readings and similar recordings. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. Services connected and disconnected. Equipment or system tests and startups.
Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare a detailed report. Submit with a request for information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
2.04
CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Digital Photographs: 1. 2. B. Resolution: Minimum 2 megapixel resolution. CD-Rom: Submit a CD-Rom containing photographs in JPEG format, with an index, as part of closeout documents
Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Name of Project. Name and address of photographer. Name of Architect. Name of Contractor. Date photograph was taken. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction.
C. D.
Date Stamp: Date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. Pre-construction Photographs: Take sufficient photographs prior to commencing work to indicate existing conditions, including, but not limited to, landscape, buildings, site features and furnishings. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 24 color photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Architect. Photograph Technique a. Provide factual presentation.
E.
2.
01 32 36 - 6
b.
Provide correct exposure and focus, high resolution and sharpness, maximum depth of field, and minimum distortion.
PART 3.
EXECUTION
Not Used
END OF SECTION
01 32 36 - 7
SECTION 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other miscellaneous submittals.
1.02
DEFINITIONS A. B. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's approval. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.
1.03
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. 2. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. B. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Section 01 32 26 - Construction Progress Documentation for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. Allow 15 days for processing each resubmittal.
C.
2. 3.
01 33 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Submittal Procedures
4. D.
No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing.
Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. 1. 2. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. Provide a space approximately 4 by 5 inches on label or beside title block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Project name. Date. Name and address of Architect. Name and address of Contractor. Name and address of subcontractor. Name and address of supplier. Name of manufacturer. Unique identifier, including revision number. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. Other necessary identification.
3.
E. F.
Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions of the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals, without review or will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor. 1. 2. Include Contractor's certification stating that information submitted complies with requirements of the Contract Documents. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.
G.
H.
Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, and installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating action taken by Architect in connection with construction.
I.
01 33 00 - 2
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS ACTION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit 5 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return 4 copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.
B.
Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Manufacturer's written recommendations. Manufacturer's product specifications. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. Printed performance curves. Operational range diagrams. Compliance with recognized trade association standards. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
2. 3.
C.
Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Include the following information, as applicable: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Dimensions. Identification of products. Fabrication and installation drawings. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. Templates and patterns. Schedules. Notation of coordination requirements.
01 33 00 - 3
j. 2. 3.
Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.
Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and fieldinstalled wiring. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.
D. E.
Coordination Drawings: As specified in Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination. Samples: Prepare physical units of materials or products, including the following: 1. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Submit one full set of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.
2.
Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from the same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with the product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. Preparation: Mount, display, or package Samples in manner specified to facilitate review of qualities indicated. Prepare Samples to match Architect's sample where so indicated. Attach label on unexposed side. Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a final check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between final submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.
3.
4.
5.
F. G.
Product Schedule or List: Prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Submittals Schedule: As specified in Section 01 32 26 Construction Progress Documentation.
01 33 00 - 4
2.02
INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. 2. Number of Copies: Submit 2 copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 Quality Requirements.
3. B.
Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements and, where required, is authorized for this specific Project. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements.
C. D.
E.
F.
G. H.
I.
J.
01 33 00 - 5
K.
Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements in Section 01 77 00 Contract Closeout. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factoryauthorized service representative's tests and inspections. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage. Construction Photographs: Comply with requirements in Section 01 32 26 Construction Progress Documentation.
L.
M.
N.
O.
P. Q.
R.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION CONTRACTORS REVIEW A. Review each submittal and check for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.
B.
01 33 00 - 6
3.02
ARCHITECTS ACTION A. B. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and will return them without action. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will reject and return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will not be reviewed and may be discarded. END OF SECTION
C.
D.
01 33 00 - 7
SECTION 01 40 00 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. B. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.
2.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. B. Qualification Data: Include proof of qualifications for testing agencies in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. C. Date of issue. Project title and number. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. Identification of product and Specification Section. Complete test or inspection data. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.
Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: Submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, and notices,
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Quality Requirements
01 040 00 - 1
receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, for Owners records. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful inservice performance. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
1.04
TESTS AND INSPECTIONS A. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required qualityassurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. B. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.
Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner and as indicated on Drawings. 1. Testing agency will notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
01 040 00 - 2
2.
Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. Testing agency will retest and reinspect corrected work. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.
3. 4.
5. 6.
7.
C.
Contractor Responsibilities: 1.
2. 3. 4. 5. D.
Notify testing agencies at least 24hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.
Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.
E.
F.
01 040 00 - 3
2. 3.
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. Distribute copies of a certified written report, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service as follows: a. b. c. 2 copies to the Architect 1 copy to the Structural Engineer 2 copies to the Contractor
4. 5. G.
Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.
Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Access to the Work. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.
1.05
QUALITY CONTROL A. Where Specifications require that a particular product be installed and/or applied by an Applicator approved by the Manufacturer, it is the Contractor's responsibility to ensure that Subcontractor employed for such Work is approved. Such Subcontractor(s) shall provide evidence of being approved when requested by the Architect. 1. Work shall be executed by mechanics skilled in the Work required. Conform to the methods, standards and accepted practices of the Trade or Trades involved. Each Section includes a list of Manufacturers whose equipment is acceptable as to manufacture, subject to conformance with the Contract Documents. Careful checking must be made by the Contractor and the manufacturer or equipment supplier to verify that the equipment will meet all capacities, requirements, space allocations and is suitable to the intended purpose.
2.
01 040 00 - 4
3.
Conflicting Requirements: If Contract Documents conflict with manufacturers written instructions for minimum installation procedures, assume the more stringent applies and request confirmation from Architect for a decision before proceeding.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3.
EXECUTION, REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION
01 040 00 - 5
SECTION 01 42 00 REFERENCES AND DEFINITIONS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL DEFINITIONS A. B. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. "Approved equal", "or equal" shall mean as approved and accepted by the Architect and Owner. "As necessary" means essential to the completion of the work. "As required" means as required by the contract documents. "As selected", "as approved" or words of similar import mean as selected by, as approved by, or as accepted by the Architect and Owner. "As shown", "as detailed", "as indicated" or words of similar import mean as indicated on the drawings unless otherwise noted. "Concealed" means not visible in the finished work. "Days" means calendar days. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "approved," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed." "Exposed" means visible in the finished work. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. "Furnish": Purchase and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, connecting, and similar operations. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.
C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.
K. L.
M.
N. O.
P.
01 42 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow References and Definitions
Q.
"Installer": Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. 1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.
R.
"Experienced": When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. "Shall": Means mandatory. Substantial Completion: That stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use.
S.
T. U.
1.02
INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, request clarification from Architect for a decision before proceeding. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project must be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
B. C.
D.
E.
01 42 00 - 2
ADAAG
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from Access Board (800) 872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202) 272-5434
CFR
Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office www.access.gpo.gov/nara/cfr
(888) 293-6498 (202) 512-1530
UFAS
Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board www.access-board.gov
(800) 872-2253 (202) 272-5434
1.03
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. Aluminum Association, Inc. www.aluminum.org American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers www.aaadm.com Associated Air Balance Council www.aabchq.com American Architectural Manufacturers Association www.aamanet.org American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials www.aashto.org American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists www.aatcc.org American Concrete Institute/ACI International www.aci-int.org American Concrete Pipe Association www.concrete-pipe.org Air Diffusion Council www.flexibleduct.org American Forest & Paper Association (See AF&PA) American Forest & Paper Association www.afandpa.org (202) 862-5100 (216) 241-7333 (202) 737-0202 (847) 303-5664 (202) 624-5800
AA AAADM AABC AAMA AASHTO
AATCC ACI ACPA ADC AFPA AF&PA
(919) 549-8141 (248) 848-3700 (972) 506-7216 (312) 201-0101
(800) 878-8878 (202) 463-2700
01 42 00 - 3
AGA AGC AHA AI AIA AISC AISI AITC ALA
American Gas Association www.aga.org Associated General Contractors of America www.agc.org American Hardboard Association www.ahardbd.org Asphalt Institute www.asphaltinstitute.org American Institute of Architects (The) www.aia.org American Institute of Steel Construction www.aisc.org American Iron and Steel Institute www.steel.org American Institute of Timber Construction www.aitc-glulam.org American Laminators Association (See LMA)
(202) 824-7000 (703) 548-3118 (847) 934-8800 (859) 288-4960 (202) 626-7300
(800) 644-2400 (312) 670-2400 (202) 452-7100 (303) 792-9559
ALCA
Associated Landscape Contractors of America www.alca.org American Lumber Standard Committee American Nursery & Landscape Association (Formerly: AAN - American Association of Nurserymen) www.anla.org American National Standards Institute www.ansi.org APA - The Engineered Wood Association www.apawood.org Architectural Precast Association www.archprecast.org American Society of Civil Engineers www.asce.org American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and AirConditioning Engineers www.ashrae.org ASME International (The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) www.asme.org
(800) 395-2522 (703) 736-9666 (301) 972-1700 (202) 789-2900
ALSC ANLA
ANSI APA APA ASCE ASHRAE
(202) 293-8020 (253) 565-6600 (941) 454-6989
(800) 548-2723 (703) 295-6300 (800) 527-4723 (404) 636-8400 (800) 843-2763 (212) 591-7722
ASME
01 42 00 - 4
ASSE ASTM AWCI
American Society of Sanitary Engineering www.asse-plumbing.org American Society for Testing and Materials www.astm.org AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries International) www.awci.org American Wood-Preservers' Association www.awpa.com American Welding Society www.aws.org American Water Works Association www.awwa.org Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association www.buildershardware.com Brick Industry Association (The) www.bia.org Carpet Cushion Council www.carpetcushion.org Center for Cold-Formed Steel Structures www.umr.edu/~ccfss Copper Development Association Inc. www.copper.org Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association www.cellulose.org Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association www.cisca.org Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute www.chainlinkinfo.org Carpet & Rug Institute (The) www.carpet-rug.com Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute www.crsi.org CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) www.csa-international.org Construction Specifications Institute (The) www.csinet.org
(440) 835-3040 (610) 832-9585 (703) 534-8300
AWPA AWS AWWA BHMA BIA CCC CCFSS CDA CIMA CISCA CLFMI CRI CRSI CSA
(817) 326-6300 (800) 443-9353 (305) 443-9353 (800) 926-7337 (303) 794-7711 (212) 297-2122 (703) 620-0010 (203) 637-1312 (573) 341-4471 (800) 232-3282 (212) 251-7200 (888) 881-2462 (937) 222-2462 (630) 584-1919 (301) 596-2583 (800) 882-8846 (706) 278-3176 (847) 517-1200 (800) 463-6727 (416) 747-4000 (800) 689-2900 (703) 684-0300
CSI
01 42 00 - 5
DHI EIMA EJMA FGMA
Door and Hardware Institute www.dhi.org EIFS Industry Members Association www.eifsfacts.com Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. www.ejma.org Flat Glass Marketing Association (See GANA)
(703) 222-2010 (800) 294-3462 (770) 968-7945 (914) 332-0040
FM Factory Mutual System (See FMG) FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) www.fmglobal.com GA GANA Gypsum Association www.gypsum.org Glass Association of North America (Formerly: FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association) www.glasswebsite.com/gana Glass Tempering Division of Glass Association of North America (See GANA) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA ICRI IEEE IESNA IGCC ILI KCMA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association www.hpva.org International Concrete Repair Institute (The) www.icri.org Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) www.ieee.org Illuminating Engineering Society of North America www.iesna.org Insulating Glass Certification Council www.igcc.org Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. www.iliai.com Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association www.kcma.org Light Gage Structural Institute www.loseke.com (703) 435-2900 (703) 450-0116 (212) 419-7900 (212) 248-5000 (315) 646-2234 (812) 275-4426 (703) 264-1690 (202) 289-5440 (785) 271-0208 (401) 275-3000
GTA
LGSI
(972) 370-0967
01 42 00 - 6
LMA
Laminating Materials Association (Formerly: ALA American Laminators Association) www.lma.org Laminated Safety Glass Association (See GANA)
(201) 664-2700
LSGA MBMA MCA MFMA (216) 241-7333 (312) 201-0193 (847) 480-9138
Metal Building Manufacturers Association www.mbma.com Metal Construction Association www.metalconstruction.org Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association www.maplefloor.org Metal Framing Manufacturers Association Marble Institute of America www.marble-institute.com Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association (See SSMA)
MFMA MIA ML/SFA NAAMM NCMA NECA NeLMA NEMA NETA NFPA NFRC NGA NHLA NLGA
(312) 644-6610 (614) 228-6194
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers www.naamm.org National Concrete Masonry Association www.ncma.org National Electrical Contractors Association www.necanet.org Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association www.nelma.org National Electrical Manufacturers Association www.nema.org National Electrical Testing Association www.netaworld.org National Fire Protection Association www.nfpa.org National Fenestration Rating Council www.nfrc.org National Glass Association www.glass.org National Hardwood Lumber Association www.natlhardwood.org National Lumber Grades Authority www.nlga.org
(312) 332-0405 (703) 713-1900 (301) 657-3110 (207) 829-6901 (703) 841-3200 (303) 697-8441
(800) 344-3555 (617) 770-3000 (301) 589-6372 (703) 442-4890 (800) 933?0318 (901) 377-1818 (604) 524-2393
01 42 00 - 7
NOFMA NRCA
National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association www.nofma.org National Roofing Contractors Association www.nrca.net
(901) 526-5016
(800) 323-9545 (847) 299-9070 (888) 846-7622 (301) 587-1400 (800) 342-1415 (703) 525-8788 (800) 323-9736 (703) 779-1022
NRMCA NSA
National Ready Mixed Concrete Association www.nrmca.org National Stone Association www.aggregates.org
NTMA NWWDA PCI
National Terrazzo and Mosaic Association, Inc. www.ntma.com National Wood Window and Door Association (See WDMA)
(312) 786-0300 Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute www.pci.org
PDCA PDI
Painting and Decorating Contractors of America www.pdca.com Plumbing & Drainage Institute www.pdionline.org
(800) 332-7322 (703) 359-0826 (800) 589-8956 (508) 230-3516 (800) 220-7620 (202) 682-4800 (847) 462-1930
RMA Rubber Manufacturers Association www.rma.org SDI Steel Deck Institute www.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute www.steeldoor.org SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council www.sgcc.org SIGMA SJI SMACNA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association www.sigmaonline.org/sigma Steel Joist Institute www.steeljoist.org Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association www.smacna.org Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) www.sprayfoam.org
(440) 899-0010 (315) 646-2234 (312) 644-6610 (843) 626-1995 (703) 803-2980
SPFA
(800) 523-6154
01 42 00 - 8
SPI SPRI
The Society of the Plastics Industry www.plasticsindustry.org SPRI (Single Ply Roofing Institute) www.spri.org
(202) 974-5200 (781) 444-0242
SSINA SSMA
Specialty Steel Industry of North America www.ssina.com Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (Formerly: ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association) www.ssma.com SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings www.sspc.org Steel Window Institute www.steelwindows.com Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute www.swrionline.org Tile Council of America, Inc. www.tileusa.com Underwriters Laboratories Inc. www.ul.com West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau www.wclib.org Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Formerly: AWCMA - American Window Covering Manufacturers Association) www.windowcoverings.org Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) www.wdma.com Woodwork Institute of California www.wicnet.org Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association www.wmmpa.com Western Wood Products Association www.wwpa.org
(800) 982-0355 (202) 342-8630 (312) 456-5590
SSPC SWI SWRI TCA UL WCLIB WCMA
(800) 837-8303 (412) 281-2331 (216) 241-7333 (816) 472-7974 (864) 646-8453
(800) 704-4050 (847) 272-8800 (800) 283-1486 (503) 639-0651 (800) 506-4653 (212) 661-4261
WDMA
(800) 223-2301 (847) 299-5200
WIC WMMPA WWPA B.
(916) 372-9943
(800) 550-7889 (530) 661-9591 (530) 224-3930
Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.
01 42 00 - 9 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow References and Definitions
BOCA CABO
BOCA International, Inc. www.bocai.org
(708) 799-2300
Council of American Building Officials (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (The) www.iapmo.org ICBO ICC International Code Council (Formerly: CABO - Council of American Building Officials) www.intlcode.org SBCCI C. Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. (205) 591-1853 International Conference of Building Officials www.icbo.org (800) 284-4406 (562) 699-0541 (703) 931-4533 (909) 595-8449
Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web site addresses are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. Army Corps of Engineers www.usace.army.mil Consumer Product Safety Commission www.cpsc.gov Department of Commerce www.doc.gov Environmental Protection Agency www.epa.gov Federal Aviation Administration www.faa.gov Federal Communications Commission www.fcc.gov Food and Drug Administration www.fda.gov General Services Administration www.gsa.gov Department of Housing and Urban Development www.hud.gov National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov Occupational Safety & Health Administration www.osha.gov Department of Agriculture www.usda.gov
CE CPSC DOC EPA FAA FCC FDA GSA HUD NIST OSHA USDA
(800) 638-2772 (301) 504-0990 (202) 482-2000 (202) 260-2090 (202) 366-4000 (202) 418-0190 (888) 463-6332 (202) 708-5082 (202) 708-1112 (301) 975-6478 (202) 693-1999 (202) 720-2791
01 42 00 - 10
USPS 1.04
Postal Service www.usps.com
(202) 268-2000
STATUTORY REQUIREMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION CONTRACTS AND SUBCONTRACTS A. Each contractor or subcontractor shall comply with laws and all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant thereto: including, but not limited to the following: 1. 2. The Copeland "AntiKickback" Act, as amended (18 USC 874) as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR Chapter 60). Nondiscrimination, Title VI of the Civil Rights Act of 1964 (P.L. 88352), as amended, (42 USC 2000d) and the requirements imposed by the regulations of the Department of Commerce (15 CFR Part 8) issued pursuant to that title. The Flood Disaster Protection Act of 1973 (P.L. 93234), as amended in 42 USC 4601. Architectural Barriers Act (P.L. 90480), 42 USC 4151, as amended. Rehabilitation Act of 1973, 29 USC 794, Executive Order 11914, 12250. (Delete upon confirmation that Rehabilitation Act has been revoked.) The Uniform Relocation Assistance and Real Property Acquisition Policies Act of 1970 (P.L. 91646, as amended in 42USC 4601), 15 CRF Part 916. The National Environmental Policy Act of 1969 (P.L. 91190); the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (80 Stat 915, 16 USC 470); and Executive Order No. 11593 of May 31, 1971. Equal Employment Opportunity, Executive Order 11246, as amended by Executive Order 11478, and as supplemented in Department of Labor regulations (41 CFR Chapter 60). Certification of Nonsegregated Facilities as Required by the May 9, 1967, Order (32 F.R. 7439, May 19, 1967) on Elimination of Segregated Facilities, by the Secretary of Labor. The Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 USC 1857 et seg., the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 USC 1251 et seq. and the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency with respect thereto, at 40 CFR Part 15, as amended from time to time. The Power Plant and Industrial Fuel Use Act of 1978 (92 Stat. 3318. P.L. 95620) relating to the conservation of petroleum and natural gas.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS Not Used
01 42 00 - 11
PART 3.
01 42 00 - 12
SECTION 01 43 26 TESTING LABORATORY PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. E. 1.02 Selection and payment Laboratory and testing agency reports Limits on testing laboratory/agency authority Contractor responsibilities Schedule of inspections and tests
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. Document 00 31 00 - Information Available to Bidders Document 00 72 00 - 1997 A201 Conformed General Conditions: Inspections, testing, and approvals required by public authorities Section 01 33 00 Submittals Procedures Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements Section 01 75 00 - Starting of Systems Section 01 77 00 - Contract Closeout Procedures Division 23 - Mechanical Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing
1.03
REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D3740 - Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Engaged in Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. AABC - Associated Air Balance Council, National Standards for Total Balance, 1982 Rev. 4: Criteria for AABC Certified Independent Agencies in their testing, adjusting and balancing of building environmental systems. AABC - National Project Certification Performance Guarantee: The requirement of a guarantee issued and backed by a national organization on the performance of the certified independent testing agency. NEBB - National Environmental Balancing Bureau, Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems, Fourth Edition, 1983:
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Testing Laboratory
B. C.
D.
E.
01 43 26 - 1
Criteria for certified NEBB Contractors in their testing, adjusting and balancing of building environmental systems. 1.04 SELECTION AND PAYMENT A. Owner shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory/agency to perform specified inspection and testing, unless otherwise noted. 1. Owner shall pay for up to six tests for the project. Contractor is responsible for any additional tests required to complete the project, costs for additional testing will be deducted from the contract sum.
B.
Contractor will employ and pay for independent Commissioning Agency and independent Test and Balance Company that is acceptable to Owner to perform specified Commissioning and Mechanical Test and Balance. The cost of the independent Commissioning Agency and independent Test and Balance Company should be included in the base bid of the Contractor.
1.05
LABORATORY/AGENCY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, the laboratory will submit a copy of the laboratory/agency report to the Contractor, Owners Representative, and the Architect. Include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. C. Date issued. Project title and number. Name of inspector or certified testing engineer. Date and time of sampling or inspection, Identification of product and specifications section. Location in the Project. Type of inspection or test. Date of test. Results of tests. Conformance with Contract Documents.
B.
When requested by the Architect or Owner, the laboratory/agency will provide interpretation of test results.
1.06
LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY/AGENCY AUTHORITY A. B. C. Laboratory/agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. Laboratory/agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. Laboratory/agency may not assume any duties of Contractor.
01 43 26 - 2
D.
Laboratory/agency has no authority to stop the Work.
1.07
CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratory/agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. Deliver to the independent testing laboratory/agency copies of submittals. Cooperate with laboratory/agency personnel, and provide access to the Work. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. Contractor to notify the Architect, and Owners Representative 48 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services.
B. C.
D.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3.
01 43 26 - 3
SECTION 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.
1.02
USE CHARGES A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction. Sewer Service: Pay sewer service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations. Water Service: Pay water service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all entities for construction operations.
B. C. D.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Temporary Utility Reports: Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and similar procedures performed on temporary utilities.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6, NECA's "Temporary Electrical Facilities," and NFPA 241. Comply with codes and regulations regarding potable drinking water, sanitation, dust control, fire protection, and other temporary controls. 1. Electric Service: Comply with NFPA, NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 50 00 - 1
service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities. B. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. 2. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT, FACILITIES AND CONTROLS A. General: 1. Provide incombustible construction for offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet of building lines. Comply with NFPA 241. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, as approved by Owner. Provide temporary parking areas to accommodate construction personnel. When site space is not adequate, provide additional offsite parking. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts. Locate where indicated, or enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to accommodate construction operations. Install in a manner that will prevent people, dogs, and other animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates. Provide gates in sizes and at locations necessary to accommodate delivery vehicles and other construction operations. Close and lock after construction hours. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owners use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by Governing Authorities for public rightsofway and for public access to existing building. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life.
2.
B.
Parking 1. 2.
C.
Site Enclosure Fence: 1.
2.
3.
4.
5. 6.
01 50 00 - 2
7. D.
Protect nonowned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust, fumes and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. Construction: framing and plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; STC rating of 35 in accordance with ASTM E90 maximum Flame Spread Rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. Paint surfaces exposed to view from Owner occupied areas.
Temporary Interior Partitions and Enclosures: 1.
2.
3. E.
Field Offices: Weather-tight, with lockable entrances, operable windows, and serviceable finishes; on foundations adequate for normal loading. 1. 2. Size: Sufficient to accommodate required office personnel and meetings of 24 persons at Project site. Furnishings: Desk, chairs, file cabinets, a plan table, a plan rack, and bookcase. Provide the following: a. b. c. d. 3. Electric heater. Air-conditioning unit capable of maintaining an indoor temperature of 72 degrees Fahrenheit. Fluorescent light fixtures 110- to 120-V duplex outlets.
Locate temporary offices at location as directed by Architect or Owner. Comply with fire insurance and governing regulations. Fire Extinguishers: Hand carried, portable, UL rated. Provide class and extinguishing agent as indicated or a combination of extinguishers of NFPArecommended classes for exposures. a. Provide adequate number of fire extinguishers to protect the Work. Temporary Fire Protection: Until fire-protection needs are supplied by permanent facilities, install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.
F.
Fire Protection: 1. 2.
3.
G.
Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate for construction until permanent water service is in use. Sterilize temporary water piping before use. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking-water fixtures. Comply with regulations and health codes for type, number, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.
H.
01 50 00 - 3
1.
Disposable Supplies: Provide toilet tissue, paper towels, paper cups, and similar disposable materials for each facility. Maintain adequate supply. Provide covered waste containers for disposal of used material. Toilets: Provide self-contained single occupant units of chemical, aerated recirculation, or combustion type; vented; fully enclosed with a glass-fiberreinforced polyester shell or similar nonabsorbent material. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. Wash Facilities: Install wash facilities supplied with potable water at locations as required for personnel who handle materials that require wash up. Dispose of drainage properly. Supply cleaning compounds appropriate for each type of material handled. Provide temporary heating and cooling required by
2.
3.
I. J.
Drinking-Water Fixtures: Provide potable water, including paper cup supply. Heating and Cooling: construction activities. 1. 2.
Maintain a minimum temperature of 50 degrees Fahrenheit in permanently enclosed portions of building for normal construction activities. Heating Equipment: Provide and pay for heating devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. a. Heating Units: Listed and labeled, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use for type of fuel being consumed.
K.
Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption. Electric Service: 1. Electric Power Service: Provide weatherproof, grounded electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity, and power characteristics during construction period. Include meters, transformers, overload-protected disconnecting means, automatic ground-fault interrupters, and main distribution switchgear. a. b. 2. Install electric power service underground, unless overhead service must be used. Install power distribution wiring overhead and rise vertically where least exposed to damage.
L.
Outlets: Properly configured, NEMA-polarized outlets to prevent insertion of 110- to 120V plugs into higher-voltage outlets; equipped with ground-fault circuit interrupters, reset button, and pilot light.
01 50 00 - 4
3. M.
Distribution: Provide receptacle outlets adequate for connection of power tools and equipment.
Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations and traffic conditions. 1. 2. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system. Provide the following: a. b. c. 3. One 100-W incandescent lamp per 500 sq. ft., uniformly distributed, for general lighting, or equivalent illumination. One 100-W incandescent lamp every 50 feet in traffic areas. One 100-W incandescent lamp per story in stairways and ladder runs, located to illuminate each landing and flight.
Install exterior-yard site lighting that will provide adequate illumination for construction operations, traffic conditions, and signage visibility when the Work is being performed.
N.
Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service throughout construction period for common-use facilities used by all personnel engaged in construction activities. Install separate telephone line for each field office and first-aid station. 1. Provide additional telephone lines for the following: a. b. 2. 3. In field office with more than two occupants, install a telephone for each additional occupant or pair of occupants. Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine and computer with modem in each field office.
Provide messaging system on superintendent's telephone. Furnish superintendent with electronic paging device, portable two-way radio or portable cellular telephone for use when away from field office.
O.
Electronic Communication Service: Provide temporary electronic communication service, including electronic mail, in common-use facilities. 1. Provide high-speed internet access in primary field office. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Prepare Project identification and other signs in sizes indicated. Do not permit installation of unauthorized signs except as required by law. 1. Engage an experienced sign painter to apply graphics for Project identification signs. Colors, pattern and verbiage shall be as directed by Architect. Prepare temporary signs to provide directional information to construction personnel and visitors. Install signs where indicated or as directed by Architect.
P.
2. 3. Q.
Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds or adequate size to accommodate stored materials and equipment.
01 50 00 - 5
1. R.
Construct framing, sheathing, and siding using fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood.
Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary connections to existing sewers to remove effluent that can be discharged lawfully. If sewers are not available, provide drainage ditches, dry wells, stabilization ponds, and similar facilities acceptable by law. If neither sewers nor drainage facilities can be lawfully used for discharge of effluent, provide containers to remove and dispose of effluent off-site in a lawful manner. 1. 2. 3. 4. Filter out excessive soil, construction debris, chemicals, oils, and similar contaminants that might clog sewers or pollute waterways before discharge. Connect temporary sewers to existing system as directed by sewer department officials. Maintain temporary sewers and drainage facilities in a clean, sanitary condition. After heavy use, restore normal conditions promptly. Provide temporary filter beds, settlement tanks, separators, and similar devices to purify effluent to levels acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
S.
Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequate to support loads and to withstand exposure to traffic during construction period. Locate temporary roads and paved areas as indicated on Drawings. 1. 2. 3. 4. Provide and maintain access to fire hydrants, free of obstructions. Provide means of removing mud from vehicle wheels before entering streets. Designated existing on-site roads may be used for construction traffic. Access roads shall be capable of supporting imposed loads of all emergency vehicles.
T.
Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Containerize and clearly label hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Comply with Section 01 73 00 -Execution Requirements for progress cleaning requirements. 1. 2. If required by authorities having jurisdiction, provide separate containers, clearly labeled, for each type of waste material to be deposited. Develop a waste management plan for Work performed on Project. Indicate types of waste materials Project will produce and estimate quantities of each type. Provide detailed information for on-site waste storage and separation of recyclable materials. Provide information on destination of each type of waste material and means to be used to dispose of all waste materials.
U.
Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with standards and code requirements for erecting structurally adequate barricades. Paint with appropriate
01 50 00 - 6
colors, graphics, and warning signs to inform personnel and public of possible hazard. Provide lighting, including flashing red or amber lights as required. V. Water Control: 1. 2. 3. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate and maintain pumping equipment. Protect site from puddling or running water. required to protect site from soil erosion. Provide water barriers as
Stormwater Control: Provide earthen embankments and similar barriers in and around excavations and subgrade construction, sufficient to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavy rains.
W.
Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior. 1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, provide insulated temporary enclosures. Coordinate enclosure with ventilating and material drying or curing requirements to avoid dangerous conditions and effects. Vertical Openings: Close openings of 25 sq. ft. or less with plywood or similar materials. Horizontal Openings: Close openings in floor or roof decks and horizontal surfaces with load-bearing, wood-framed construction. Install tarpaulins securely using fire-retardant-treated wood framing and other materials. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffets of openings. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas.
2. 3. 4. X.
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
6.
01 50 00 - 7
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. General: 1. 2. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately or as directed by Architect. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Maintain and modify as required. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities. Engage appropriate local utility company to install temporary service.
B. C.
Temporary Utilities: 1. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects. Avoid using tools and equipment that produce harmful noise. Restrict use of noisemaking tools and equipment to hours that will minimize complaints from persons or firms near Project site. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from construction damage. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion. Pest Control: Before deep foundation work has been completed, retain a local exterminator or pest-control company to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests. Engage this pestcontrol service to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.
D.
E.
3.02
OPERATION, TERMINATION AND REMOVAL A. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal. Protect from damage caused by weather. 1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.
B.
Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion. Permanent fire protection materials may be used, if required. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction and site that may have been delayed because of
C.
01 50 00 - 8
interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. 1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are the property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements in Section 01 73 00 Closeout Procedures. END OF SECTION
2.
01 50 00 - 9
SECTION 01 60 00 PRODUCT AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.02 Product delivery, storage, and handling Manufacturers' standard warranties on products Product substitutions Comparable products.
DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. Prior Approvals: Substitution requests made prior to receipt of bids.
B. 1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list showing specified products as follows: 1. 2. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. 3. Specification Section number and title. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations. Manufacturer's name and address. Supplier's name and address. Installer's name and address. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date.
Completed List: Within 20 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Product and Material Requirements
4.
01 60 00 - 1
list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products to prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. 2. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. Deliver fabrications in as large assemblies as practicable. Fabrications specified to be shop-primed or shop-finished shall be packaged or crated as required to preserve such priming or finish intact and free from abrasion. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Store materials in a manner that will not cause obstructions or endanger Project structure. Store off sidewalks, roadways, and underground services. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. Protect stored products from damage. When a room in the Project is used as a shop or store room, the Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs, patching or cleaning necessary due to such use. Location of such storage space shall be subject to approval of the Architect.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7. 8.
9. 10. 11.
1.05
PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.
01 60 00 - 2
B.
Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection unless otherwise indicated. Where products are accompanied by the term "match approved sample," the sample to be matched is Architect's. Product: Where a single product and manufacturer is named, provide the product named. Manufacturer: Where a single manufacturer is listed, provide a product by the manufacturer that complies with requirements. Manufacturers: Where a list of manufacturers' names is provided, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specifications indicate a specific product as "Basis-of-Design Product[s]" or Specifications are based on and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.
2.02
PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS A. Prior Approvals (Substitution requests during the bidding phase): 1. 2. 3. Substitutions will be considered when written request has been submitted to the Architect for approval at least 10 days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Contractor shall request approval of such substitution on a form acceptable to Architect. Requests shall include documentation of compliance with requirements for conditions for Substitution Requests as specified herein.
01 60 00 - 3
4. B. 1.
Form of Acceptance: Architect will set forth approval in writing. Substitution requests will be considered only under one or more of the following circumstances: a. b. c. d. If the specified product is not available Specified product or material cannot be provided within the Contract Time. Request relates to an or equal clause. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. Specified product or material cannot receive regulatory approval. Specified product or material is not compatible with other materials. Specified product or material cannot be coordinated with other materials. Specified product or material manufacturer cannot provide the specified warranty.
Substitutions (After Award of Contract):
e. f. g. h. 2. 3.
Requests for substitutions shall be received by the Architect a minimum of 14 days prior to date Contractor is required to place an order for the product. Submit 3 copies of each request. Identify product, fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. Substitution Request Form: Section 01 60 50 Substitution Request Form (After the Bidding Phase) contained in the Project Manual. Requests shall include the following information: a. b. Documentation of compliance Substitutions as specified herein. with Conditions for Product
4. 5.
Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications required to other parts of the Work that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified.
c.
d.
01 60 00 - 4
e. f. g. h. i.
Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. Samples, where applicable or requested by Architect. List of similar installations in completed projects. Include names and addresses of the project, Architect and Owner. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution compared to specified products. Cost information, including any changes in the Contract Sum. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 10 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. Form of Acceptance: Response to request for substitution.
j. k. l.
m.
6.
Architect's Action: a.
b.
c. C.
Conditions for Product Substitutions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.
01 60 00 - 5
6. 7. 8. 9.
Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.
PART 3.
01 60 00 - 6
SECTION 01 60 50 SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM (POST BID)
Project: FIT for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition To: Sylvia Kim (JMA Architects, Inc) 10150 Covington Cross Drive Las Vegas, Nevada 89122 A/E Project Number: 127457 Specification Title: Description: From:
Substitution Request Number:
Section: _______ Page: ________ Article/Paragraph: Proposed Substitution: Manufacturer: Trade Name: Installer: History: New product Address: 2-5 years old 5-10 years old Address: Phone: Model No.: Phone: More than 10 years old
Differences between proposed substitution and specified product:
Point-by point comparative data attached REQUIRED BY A/E Reason for not providing specified item: Similar Installation: Project: Address: Architect: Owner: Date Installed: Proposed substitution affects other parts of Work: No Yes; explain
Savings to Owner for accepting substitution: Proposed substitution changes Contract Time: Supporting Data Attached:
($_________________). No Yes [Add] [Deduct] Samples Tests Reports days.
Drawings Product Data
01 60 50 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Substitution Request Form (Post Bid)
The Undersigned certifies: Proposed substitution has been fully investigated and determined to be equal or superior in all respects to specified product. Same warranty will be furnished for proposed substitution as for specified product. Same maintenance service and source of replacement parts, as applicable, is available. Proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades and will not affect or delay progress schedule. Cost data as stated above is complete. Claims for additional costs related to accepted substitution which may subsequently become apparent are to be waived. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions and functional clearances. Payment will be made for changes to building design, including A/E design, detailing, and construction costs by the substitution. Coordination, installation, and changes in the Work as necessary for accepted substitution will be complete in all respects.
Submitted by: Signed by: Firm: Address: Telephone: Attachments:
A/Es REVIEW AND ACTION Substitution approved Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution approved as noted Make submittals in accordance with Specification Section 01330. Substitution rejected Use specified materials. Substitution Request received too late Use specified materials. Signed by: Date: Additional Comments: Contractor Subcontractor Supplier Manufacturer A/E
END OF SECTION
JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Substitution Request Form (Post Bid)
01 60 50 - 2
SECTION 01 73 00 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: General procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.02 Construction layout. Field engineering and surveying General installation of products. Progress cleaning. Starting and adjusting. Protection of installed construction. Correction of the Work.
SUBMITTALS A. B. C. D. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor or professional engineer certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor or professional engineer. Final Property Survey: Submit 5 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Execution Requirements
01 73 00 - 1
work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. 1. B. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.
Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. 2. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability compatibility with existing finishes or primers. of substrates, including
Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
3.02
PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility and Owner that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.
B.
C. D.
3.03
CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly. General: Engage a land surveyor or professional engineer to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.
B.
01 73 00 - 2
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. D.
Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction.
Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.
E.
3.04
FIELD ENGINEERING A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. C. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.
B.
Final Property Survey: Prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor or professional engineer, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."
3.05
INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.
01 73 00 - 3
1. 2. 3. B. C.
Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.
Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. 2. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.
D.
E.
F.
Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.
G.
3.06
PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. 2. 3. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.
B. C.
Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. 1. Remove liquid spills promptly.
01 73 00 - 4
2. D.
Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.
Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.
E. F. G.
H.
I.
3.07
STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. B. C. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. equipment for proper operation. Adjust
Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
3.08
PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.
3.09
CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Section 01 73 29 - Cutting and Patching.
01 73 00 - 5
1.
Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.
B. C. D. E.
Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION
01 73 00 - 6
SECTION 01 73 29 CUTTING AND PATCHING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Procedural requirements for cutting and patching.
DEFINITIONS A. B. Cutting: Removal of existing construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other Work. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore surfaces to original conditions after installation of other Work.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information: 1. 2. Necessity: Describe why cutting and patching cannot be avoided. Changes to Existing Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements. Description of proposed Work: a. b. c. d. 4. 5. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation. Trades which will execute Work. Products proposed to be used. Extent of refinishing to be done.
3.
Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. Utilities: List utilities that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List utilities that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long service will be disrupted. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure. Cost proposal, when applicable. Written permission of trades whose Work will be affected. Submit written request to the Owner/Architect for approval prior to proceeding in advance of cutting or alternations which affects:
6.
7. 8. 9.
01 73 29 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Cutting and Patching
a. b. c. 10.
Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant element. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
Architects Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their structural capacity. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch the following elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers. Membranes and flashings. Exterior curtain-wall construction. Equipment supports. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.
C.
Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.
1.05
PAYMENT FOR COSTS A. Cost caused by ill-timed or defective Work or Work not conforming to Contract Documents, including costs for additional services of Architect and Engineer to be paid by Contractor. Cost of Work done on written instructions of Architect, other than defective or nonconforming Work, will be paid by Owner on approval of written Change Order. Provide written cost proposals prior to proceeding with cutting and patching proposed by Architect.
B.
01 73 29 - 2
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Inspect existing conditions of Work, including elements subject to movement or damage during cutting and patching, and excavating and backfilling. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed. 1. 2. B. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
By starting cutting or patching operations, the Contractor acknowledges acceptance of existing conditions and the responsibility to restore cut and patched area to its original condition.
3.02
PREPARATION A. B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings, devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.
C. D. E.
3.03
PERFORMANCE A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.
B.
Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes as shown on Drawings and as specified.
01 73 29 - 3
C.
Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and other penetrations through surfaces. Conform to fire code requirements for penetrations and maintain integrity of fire walls and ceilings. Restore Work which has been cut or removed. Install new products to provide completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and as required to match surrounding areas and surfaces. Cutting: Cut existing construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. Existing Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.
D.
E.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. F.
Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. 1. 2. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.
3.
01 73 29 - 4
a.
Where patching occurs in a painted surface, apply primer and intermediate paint coats over the patch and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.
4. 5.
Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition. END OF SECTION
01 73 29 - 5
SECTION 01 74 13 CONSTRUCTION CLEANING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. PART 2. 2.01 Cleaning and disposal of waste materials, debris, and rubbish during construction
PRODUCTS EQUIPMENT A. Provide covered containers for deposit of waste materials, debris, and rubbish.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION CLEANING A. Maintain areas under Contractors control free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. Site to be broom swept once a week. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to closing the space. Daily clean interior areas to provide suitable conditions for Work. Broom clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning on an asneeded basis. Control cleaning operations so that dust and other particles will not adhere to wet or newlycoated surfaces.
B. C. D. E.
3.02
DISPOSAL A. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site at least weekly and dispose of offsite in a legal manner. END OF SECTION
01 74 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Construction Cleaning
SECTION 01 75 00 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL STARTING SYSTEMS 1. 2. 3. Coordinate schedule for startup of various equipment and systems. Notify the Owner and Architect seven (7) days prior to startup of each item. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions, which may cause damage. Verify that each component of each system performs as designed and in conformance to manufacturers recommendations to comprise complete and fully functional environmental systems. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested; i.e., electrical systems are properly open without restriction, all normally open positions are active, controls safely operational. All mechanical equipment shall be started and placed into operation by the manufacturers authorized representative under the supervision of responsible Contractors personnel and the Owners representative. Any equipment requiring field assembly fabrication or wiring shall have such work done under the direct supervision of the manufacturers representative. Prior to final approval, the Contractor shall submit letters of evidence from the manufacturer verifying conformance with these requirements. The operation and function of all air conditioning equipment and controls shall be fully understood by the air conditioning contractors project representative. This representative shall be present at the site on a full time basis during startup. Prior to final approval, contractor shall submit in triplicate copies of the system startup report. This report shall contain a daily log prepared by the project representative of all events involving the system during startup.
4.
5. 6.
7.
8.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS Not Used
PART 3.
01 75 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Starting of Systems
SECTION 01 77 00 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.02 Inspection procedures. Project Record Documents. Operation and maintenance manuals. Emergency Manuals Warranties. Instruction of Owner's personnel (Demonstration and Training).
SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: The following items shall be completed prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion: 1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list). Include the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete. a. Preparation: Submit 3 copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including areas disturbed by Contractor. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor. Organize items applying to each space by major element.
b. c. 2. 3. 4.
Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final Completion construction photographs and photographic negatives, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.
5.
01 77 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Closeout Procedures
6.
Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. Complete startup testing of systems. Submit test/adjust/balance records. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. B.
When Contractor considers Work or designated portion of Work is nearly or substantially complete, he shall submit written notice and request a courtesy inspection by the Owner. 1. Courtesy Inspection: Architect will walk through the project with the Contractor selecting various rooms or portions of the project at random, pointing out typical deficiencies and describing quality and level of work which will be required at the time of substantial completion inspection. Substantial Completion Inspection: upon written notice, Architect will inspect the project with the Contractor. Deficiencies will be noted and a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected, shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the Owner for consideration and for attachment to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. During the inspection, should the list become too extensive in the judgment of the Architect to constitute Substantial Completion, the inspection may be terminated and the Contractor notified in writing. Should the Architect find the Work is substantially complete, after receiving the list, he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of the General Conditions of the Contract Documents (Refer to AIA, A201). The list of deficiencies shall be attached to the Certificate of Substantial Completion. Should the Architects inspection find Work that is not substantially complete, he will promptly notify Contractor in writing, listing observed deficiencies. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial completion.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
01 77 00 - 2
7.
When the Architect finds the Work is substantially complete he will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion in accordance with provisions of Contract Documents. Submit certificates of Contractor and Subcontractors, certifying that products furnished and installed do not contain asbestos per Section 00 65 39.1 and 00 65 39.2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion. Should status of completion of Work require re-inspection by the Architect due to failure of Work to comply with Contractors claims on initial inspection, Architect will deduct the amount of Architect compensation for re-inspection services from final payment to Contractor.
8.
9. C.
Reinspection Fees: 1.
1.03
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. B. Certificate of Occupancy Certificates of Inspection for the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. D. Fire alarm Fire sprinkler Mechanical systems Electrical systems.
Letters of Acceptance from the governing entity for off-site and related on-site improvements. Letters of Acceptance from the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Sanitation district Water district Electric company Gas company Telephone company.
E. F.
Operation and Maintenance Data in hard copy and digital format. Warranties and Bonds. 1. 2. Due within one week of the Owners occupancy of the Project. Submit two (2) copies of the summary of equipment warranties with copy of the manufacturers warranty indicating, as a minimum, the warranty start date, warranty duration and the warranty end date for all equipment covered by a manufacturer's warranty. Summary shall also be included with Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Due within one week of the Owners occupancy of the Project.
G.
Non-Use of Asbestos Certificates. 1.
01 77 00 - 3
H. I. J. K. L. M. N.
Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials: under provisions of Section 01 78 43. Keys and Keying Schedule: under provisions of Section 08 71 00. Contractors Affidavit of Release of Liens (AIA G706). Consent of Surety Company to Final Payment (AIA G707). Certificates of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. Application for Final Payment Record documents: 1. Record documents required, include but are not limited to the following list: a. b. c. d. e. 2. Record drawings Record specifications Record survey Contractors certified punch list Project and record shop drawings product data and samples
Contractor is to sign each sheet of the record drawings that are turned over to the Project Manager and subcontractors are to sign their respective sheets of the Work. Transmit with cover letter in duplicate, listing: a. b. c. d. e. Date Project title and number Contractors name, address, and telephone number Number and title of each record document Signature of Contractor or authorized representative
3.
1.04
FINAL COMPLETION A. Preliminary Procedures: Prior to requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following: 1. 2. Submit a final Application for Payment in accordance with Section 01 29 00 Payment Procedures. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems.
3. 4. 5. B.
Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of
01 77 00 - 4
unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected.
1.05
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. General: Contractor shall maintain a complete and accurate record of changes or deviations from the Contract Documents and Shop Drawings, indicating the Work as actually installed. Record information in the appropriate locations on a record set of prints of the Drawings and Shop Drawings and a copy of the Specifications that are maintained solely for the purpose of this documentation. Keep this record set of Contract Documents and Shop Drawings at the project site for review by the Owner and Architect. 1. 2. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Protect Project Record Documents from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. The Individual or entity who obtains record data shall prepare Record Documents. Information contained in the record documents shall include, but not be limited to: a. b. Actual installation where actual installation varies from original drawings. Modifications made by Addenda, Change Orders, Construction Change Directive and Architect's Supplemental Instructions which shall be transferred to the record documents. Location of underground pipes, conduits, ducts, cables and similar work, dimensioned horizontally to permanent points of reference and located vertically by indicating depth of burial. Dimensions shall be accurate within +6 inches. Location of plumbing piping, sprinkler piping, control valves, heating and air conditioning equipment, mechanical piping, ductwork, major conduit runs, power, control and alarm wiring, etc., dimensioned horizontally to permanent points of reference. Dimensions shall be accurate within 6 inches. Modifications made to accommodate field conditions. Location and function of mechanical and electrical control devices and shut-off valves. Final circuiting of electrical fixtures and equipment.
3. 4.
c.
d.
e. f. g.
01 77 00 - 5
i. h. B.
Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.
Construction Change Directive numbers, Change Order numbers, alternate numbers, and similar identification where applicable.
Record Electronic Drawings: 1. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. Seals and signatures of Registrants shall be completely removed and/or permanently obscured. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of CAD Drawings as they relate to the Contract Drawings. CAD Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCAD 2012. Record Drawings prepared by Contractor shall be in the same software version. Organize CAD information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each CAD file.
2. 3.
4.
C.
Upon Substantial Completion of the Work, deliver the complete set of Record Documents including prints, reproducible set, Shop Drawings and annotated Specifications to the Architect for approval. Number of Copies: 1. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of plots from corrected Record CAD Drawings and one set of marked-up Record Prints to Architect for approval. Final Submittal: a. b. c. Marked-up Record Prints: One set. Record CAD Drawing Files and Plots: One set. Copies printed from Plots: 3 copies. Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.
D.
E.
Identification: Provide the following information on each CAD file: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Project name. Date. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." Name of Architect. Name of Contractor.
F.
Record Specifications: Submit one copy of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. Where installation varies from that indicated, mark copy to indicate the actual product installation. 1. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings.
2.
01 77 00 - 6
G.
Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Bind or file miscellaneous records with identification labels
1.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. General: Assemble 2 copies of operation and maintenance data indicating the operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include operation and maintenance data required in individual Specification Sections and as follows: 1. Operation Data: Include complete operating sequence, control diagrams, description of method of operating machinery, machine serial numbers, factory order numbers, parts, tests, instruction books, suppliers phone numbers and addresses, individual equipment guarantees, parts and part numbers. Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's information, a list of spare parts, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules for preventive and routine maintenance, and copies of warranties and bonds. Include lists of filter sizes for air handling equipment, indicating which unit filter if for and if filter is washable" or "disposable". Organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system in accordance with CSI Master format Divisions. Include a title page and table of contents in each manual. Table of Contents: provide title of Project; names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, sub-consultants, and Contractor with name of responsible parties; schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of the volume. For each product or system: list names, addresses, and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. Product data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information. Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Do not use project Record Documents as maintenance drawings. Type text: as required to supplement product data. Additional requirements: as specified in individual product specification sections.
2.
B.
Organization: 1.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
7. 8.
01 77 00 - 7
C.
Format: 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiplevolume sets.
2.
Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, crossreferenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. b. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.
3. 4.
D. E.
Provide manufacturers operations and maintenance videotapes of each specific equipment item or system. Provide two digital copies (Compact Disc or Flash Drive) of the Manuals in PDF format, with each product as a separate file and combined per volume as a single PDF portfolio file. All PDF portfolio files should be labeled per binder volume number. Upon substantial completion of the Project Work, submit one hard copy and one digital copy of the Maintenance Manual and Operating Instructions to the Architect for approval. Upon receipt of Notice of Approval, deliver the additional hard copy and digital copy to the Owner.
F.
1.07
EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for type of emergency, emergency instructions, and emergency procedures. Include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's
B.
01 77 00 - 8
operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. C. Emergency Procedures: Include instructions on stopping, shutdown instructions for each type of emergency, operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits, and required sequences for electric or electronic systems.
1.08
WARRANTIES A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties upon request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.
B.
2.
3. C. D.
Include and additional copy of each warranty in the operation and maintenance manuals. Provide two digital copies (Compact Disc or Flash Drive) of the Warranties in PDF format, with each product bookmarked and the Warranties binder as a single PDF file.
1.09
OWNERS MANUAL A. Prior to final payment, submit one hard-back, loose-leaf binder containing the following items, typed, indexed and labeled for ready reference: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Subcontractors, major suppliers list with companys names, addresses and telephone numbers. Certifications. Affidavit from general and subcontractors on use of asbestos free materials. List of Extra Materials supplied to Owner, signed by Owner's representative. Other items required by the Specifications.
01 77 00 - 9
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Instruction: Instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment. 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Provide instructors experienced in operation and maintenance procedures. Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at the start of each season. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect. Provide a minimum of 7 days' advance notice. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction, and course content.
Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and equipment type, as required by individual Specification Sections. For each training module, develop a learning objective and teaching outline. 1. Include instruction for system design and operational philosophy, review of documentation, operations, adjustments, troubleshooting, maintenance, and repair.
3.02
FINAL CLEANING A. B. General: Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.
b.
01 77 00 - 10
c. d. e.
Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, eventextured surface. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. Sweep concrete floors broom-clean in unoccupied spaces. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if visible soil or stains remain. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows taking care not to scratch surfaces. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Remove labels that are not permanent. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration. i. Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.
f.
g. h. i.
j. k.
l.
Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.
m. n. o. p.
q. C.
Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.
01 77 00 - 11
D.
Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully. Make building(s) ready for occupancy in every respect. Lay heavy building paper in main circulation areas to protect the floors until final inspection and acceptance. Existing improvements, inside or outside the property which are disturbed, damaged or destroyed by the Work under the Contract shall be restored to the condition in which they originally were, or to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION
E. F.
01 77 00 - 12
CLOSE OUT CHECK LIST Required prior to Request for Substantial Completion Certificate of Building Department Inspection & Approval System Start Up
Written Request for Systems Start Up
Completed Date
Performance of Systems Start Up Written Systems Start Up Report Submittal and approval of O&M Manuals Manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance Test Reports and/or Deficiency Lists (Test & Balance, Commissioning, Water, etc.) Substantial Completion Written Request for Substantial Completion Substantial Completion Inspection Substantial Completion Awarded w/Punch List Contract Closeout Punch List Written Request for Punch List Inspection Perform Punch List Inspection Certificate of Punch List Completion System Demonstration Written Request for Systems Demonstration System Demonstration Completed Written System Demonstration Report All Certified Payroll Submitted and Aanvestigations Completed Asbestos Report Certificates from Prime Contractor and all Subs Final Cleaning Project Record Documents Consent of Surety to Final Pay Training has been completed - Attendees Signatures Received Certificate of Liability Insurance (in effect for 2 years - Formals) Warranties/Guarantees (Due within 2 weeks of issuing COSC) Warranties - Special (longer than one year, etc.) Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens (AIA 706A w/Release form Prime Contractor and all Subs) Report to the Labor Commissioner Final SIIS (Worker's Compensation) Final Payment Received Final Pay Application Approval of Final Pay Application
01 77 01 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Closeout Tracking Log
SECTION 01 78 43 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
PART 1. 1.01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED A. B. Products required Storage and delivery of products
1.02
PRODUCTS REQUIRED A. Provide quantities of products, spare parts, maintenance tools, and maintenance materials specified in individual sections to be provided to Owner, in addition to that required for completion of Work. Products: identical to those installed in the Work. Include quantities in original purchase from supplier to avoid variations in manufacture.
B.
1.03
1.4 STORAGE, MAINTENANCE A. Provide a separate storage connex for the specific use of spare parts storage. 1. 2. 3. B. Spare parts storage connex shall be located on the site. Spare parts and permanent storage shipping container shall be delivered no less than one (1) month prior to the scheduled Substantial Completion Date Contractor will be responsible for the removal of the connex within 30 days of the acceptance of spare parts.
Maintain spare products in original containers with labels intact and legible, until delivery to Owner.
1.04
DELIVERY A. B. C. D. Coordinate with Owners for delivery of maintenance Material. Coordinate and provide written notice to the Architect once spare part products are ready to be assigned to the Owner for Architects verification. The Contractor shall have all spare parts clearly identified and labeled. Contractor shall obtain a written receipt from the Owners representative prior to submitting final payment.
1.05
SCHEDULE OF SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Thirty (30) days before the scheduled substantial completion inspection, submit a Spare Parts Listing by specification section including products requiring spare parts,
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
01 78 43 - 1
manufacturers product description, quantity description, and quantity of spare parts by individual product, maintenance tools, and maintenance material required. PART 2. PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3. EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION
01 78 43 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Spare Parts and Maintenance Materials
SECTION 01 91 13 GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Construction Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including general and supplementary conditions, and Division 1, 23 and 26 specification sections, apply to this section. Review of Basis of Design / Design Intent documents, respectively.
B. 1.02
SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. B. Building Systems Commissioning. Commissioning description. Submittals. Commissioning services. Commissioning responsibilities. Commissioning meetings. Commissioning reports. Test equipment. Verification check and startup procedures. Functional performance test procedures. Function performance test methods. Deficiencies and test approvals. Demonstration.
Related Sections
1.03
RELATED SECTIONS A. Related Sections include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures Section 01 43 26 Testing Laboratory / Agency Services Section 01 75 00 Starting of Systems Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures Section 01 78 23 Operations and Maintenance Data
01 91 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow General Commissioning Requirements
7.
Section 01 91 14 Commissioning Authority Responsibilities: Outlines the Commissioning Authority (CxA) responsibilities as related to the commissioning process and scope. Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: Alerts the TAB of Cx responsibilities in 23 08 00. Section 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC: Describes the Cx responsibilities of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors and the prefunctional testing and startup responsibilities of each. Section 25 08 00 Commissioning of Integrated Automation: Alerts the controls contractor of the special requirements of the control contractor and control system as related to Section 23 08 00. Section 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Systems: Describes the Cx responsibilities of the electrical contractor. Section 26 99 00 Electrical Testing Requirements: Alerts the general contractor and Division 26 Subcontractor to coordinate with commissioning and describes the specific functional testing requirements for Section 26 equipment in the project.
8. 9.
10.
11. 12.
B.
The Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)) consulting fees shall be carried by the Contractor. The Commissioning Authority (CxA) shall be contracted directly to the Contractor. The process of commissioning as defined herein goes well beyond typical HVAC and electrical systems start-up both in detail of testing and in detail of documentation. The director of the commissioning process is the Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)). Commissioning is a systematic process of ensuring that all building systems perform interactively according to the design intent, basis of design, construction documents and Owners system operational needs. This is achieved by beginning in the design phase, documenting design intent/basis of design and continuing through construction, building acceptance and the warranty period with actual verification of performance. The commissioning process shall coordinate what have traditionally been separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing and performance testing. During the Warranty Period, commissioning may be necessary to assist the Owner one time per typical issue to help coordinate resolution of any unresolved issues related to equipment / systems function. The Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)) directs and coordinates all commissioning activities; this section describes some but not all of the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities
C.
D.
1.04
REFERENCES A. PECI (Samples) - Sample Forms for Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Performance Tests; Portland Energy Conservation, Inc.; located at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm; current edition.
01 91 13 - 2
B. C. D. E. 1.05
ASHRAE Guideline 1-1996 The HVAC Commissioning Process ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 The Commissioning Process PECI (MCP) - Model Commissioning Plan; Portland Energy Conservation, Inc.; located at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm; current edition. Associated Air Balance Council AABC Commissioning Guideline
DEFINITIONS: A. Definition of Terms: 1. 2. Adjustment: To change the speed, flow, position, signal, or level of any piece of mechanical equipment. Basis of Design - a static document that provides the explanation of the ideas, concepts and criteria that are considered to be very important to the owner. It addresses the Owners Performance Requirements (OPR) and operational needs. Calibration: To check or adjust the graduations of a quantitative measuring instrument against a known standard. Commissioning: Systematic process of ensuring systems perform interactively according to design intent and Owners operational needs. Commissioning process encompasses and coordinates system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training, and verification of actual performance. Critical System: a system that is related to life-safety. This includes, shelterin-place, emergency backup systems (e.g. generator/automatic transfer switch), emergency lighting, fire smoke dampers, duct detectors, call switches, shunt-trip buttons, refrigerant leak detection and associated exhaust fans and alarms. Non-critical Systems: are those systems not indicated as critical systems. Datalogging - monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment using stand-alone dataloggers separate from the control system. Deficiency - a condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents (that is, does not comply with the design intent). Design Intent - a dynamic document that provides the explanation of the ideas, concepts and criteria that are considered to be very important to the owner. It is initially the outcome of the programming and conceptual design phases, and responds to the Basis of Design. Functional Performance Testing (FT): This portion of the Commissioning Process involves dynamic tests that ensure that all mechanical, electrical and life safety systems function in accordance with design intent. The tests are dynamic and on-line and test the systems through all possible modes of operation.
3. 4.
5.
6. 7. 8.
9.
10.
01 91 13 - 3
11.
Installation Verification: This initial portion of the Commissioning Process includes observations and punch-lists recorded and performed by the Engineer to ensure that all equipment is installed in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. The Commissioning Authority shall overview this process. Minor Adjustment: To add, subtract, or change various parameters included in the operation logic of a mechanical system or systems in order to improve or optimize operational performance. This refers only to the specified performance logic. Difficulties encountered in accomplishing a minor adjustment shall not be used to define a minor versus a major adjustment. Major Adjustment: To fully change the specified operation logic of a mechanical system or systems. This refers only to the specified performance logic. Difficulties encountered in accomplishing a minor adjustment shall not be used to define a minor versus a major adjustment. Power Monitoring System (PMS): This is not synonymous with the FCS system. This is the system providing monitoring / trending / logging data as related to the electrical distribution system bundled loads, e.g. lighting, fans, and major equipment such as chillers and air handlers, etc. Pre-functional checklists (PC): This portion of the Commissioning Process involves primarily the test and balance and startup personnel to ensure that individual pieces of equipment are capable of performing in accordance with the Specifications, Drawings, and manufacturers' requirements. This is documented with a pre-functional checklist provided and completed by the contractor. The Commissioning Authority shall overview this testing. Statistical Sampling. - Functionally testing a statistically representative quantity (i.e. 15%) of identical or near identical pieces of equipment. Subject to 3% failure threshold whereby if there are greater than 3% testing failures of randomly chosen equipment, the testing shall be noted as failed and the Contractor shall re-verify the startup of 100% of the equipment. An additional identical statistically representative quantity of equipment shall again be tested which shall include a retest of 25% of the failed equipment and 75% randomly chosen untested equipment. This shall be repeated until the testing is noted as passing. Any proposed statistical sampling shall be identified in the construction phase commissioning plan and approved by the Commissioning Authority (CxA). System: A combination of system components that allow the manufacture or distribution of conditioned air or water from one location to another. System Component or System Element: A single piece of mechanical equipment such as a pump, fan, chiller, boiler, coil, etc. that when combined together through piping or ductwork will comprise a "System". Tuning: To adjust for maximum performance.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17. 18.
19.
01 91 13 - 4
1.06
COMMISSIONING TEAM A. Coordination and management: The Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)) firm shall provide overall coordination and management of the commissioning program as specified herein. The commissioning process will require cooperation of the Contractor, subcontractors, vendors, Architectural Engineering design team, and the Owner. The commissioning team shall be comprised of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. D. Contractor: Superintendant, project Mechanical/Electrical/Plumbing (MEP) coordinator. Subcontractors: As required by the prime contractor. Manufacturers factory engineers: As specified elsewhere. Commissioning Authority (CxA) Construction Management Engineer (CME) (if applicable) Owner Construction Observers Architectural/Engineering Representatives manager and
B. C.
The trades represented on the commissioning team will include, but is not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. General Contractor Mechanical Contractor Electrical Contractor Plumbing Contractor Building Automation System Contractor Fire Alarm System Contractor Test, Adjust and Balancing Agency
E.
The lead tradesman for each trade who will actually perform or supervise the commissioning work is to be designated as the representative to the commissioning team. Responsibility for various steps of the commissioning process will be divided among the members of the commissioning team, as described in other sections.
F.
1.07
COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES A. Owner: 1. 2. B. Commissioning procedures and results will be observed by the Owners designated witnesses. The Contractor is expected to verify the functional readiness of systems to be tested prior to performing the tests in the presence of the witnesses.
Architect / Engineering Firm (A/E)
01 91 13 - 5
1. 2.
The Design Engineer shall attend the commissioning scope meeting and selected commissioning team meetings. The Design Engineer shall provide any design narrative and sequences documentation requested by the Commissioning Authority (CxA). The designers shall assist (along with the contractors) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. The Design Engineer shall provide additional calculation and investigation of design adjustments as needed from the Engineers defined by the Commissioning Authority (CxA). The Design Engineer shall participate in the resolution of potential design concerns as discovered during the commissioning process. Contractor shall facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the Commissioning Authority (CxA), and ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the project's master CPM schedule. Contractor shall coordinate resolution of system issues identified during commissioning, according to the contract documents. Contractor shall provide the Commissioning Authority (CxA) with copies of the MEP submittal data, list of pertinent RFIs, CORs and NOCs. In each purchase order or subcontract written, Contractor shall include requirements for submittal data, O&M data and commissioning tasks. Contractor shall ensure that all Subcontractors execute their commissioning responsibilities according to the Contract Documents in association with the commissioning plan and schedule. A representative of the Contractor shall attend a commissioning scope meeting scheduled by the Commissioning Authority (CxA) and other necessary meetings scheduled by the Commissioning Authority (CxA) to facilitate the commissioning (Cx) process. Contractor shall coordinate the activities of all subcontractors and vendor personnel, required to complete training of Owner personnel in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications and the Training Agenda. Contractor shall prepare and submit the O&M manuals, according to the Contract Documents, including clarifying and updating the original sequences of operation to as-built conditions. Contractor shall categorize and inventory the required spare parts for Owner turnover. Include requirements for commissioning submittal data, operation and maintenance data, commissioning tasks and training in each purchase order and subcontract for equipment and systems indicated to be commissioned.
3.
4. C.
General Contractor (GC) 1.
2. 3. 4. 5.
6.
7.
8.
9. 10.
01 91 13 - 6
11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17.
Facilitate coordination of commissioning work by Commissioning Authority. Attend commissioning meetings. Cooperate with Commissioning Authority, and provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. Require equipment and system installers to execute test to review and provide comments on functional test procedures. Require manufacturers to review commissioning test procedures for equipment installed by manufacturer. Furnish proprietary test equipment required by manufacturers to complete equipment and system tests. Provide temporary facilities as specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls for Commissioning Authority's exclusive use for documentation and instrument storage and preparation of reports. Furnish qualified personnel to assist in completing commissioning. Furnish manufacturer's qualified field representatives as specified in Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements and individual specification sections to assist in completing commissioning. Ensure equipment and system installers execute commissioning responsibilities according to Contract Documents and schedule. Coordinate Owner's personnel training. Prepare operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures. Update original sequences of operation reflecting actual installation. Ensure equipment and system installers execute seasonal and deferred functional performance testing, witnessed by Commissioning Authority. Ensure equipment and system installers correct deficiencies and make necessary adjustments to operation and maintenance manuals and Record Documents for issues identified in seasonal testing. Under the direction of the GC, the Division 23 and Division 26 Contractors shall provide the services outlined within this paragraph and as shown elsewhere in the project specifications. a. Cooperate with the Commissioning Authority (CxA) to complete commissioning (Cx) activities.
18. 19.
20. 21. 22.
23. 24.
D.
Division 23 (Mechanical) and Division 26 (Electrical) Contractors 1.
E.
Commissioning Authority Responsibilities: 1. Basic Responsibilities: a. b. Coordinate, direct, and approve commissioning work. Develop and coordinate execution of commissioning plan. Revise commissioning plan to suit Project conditions.
01 91 13 - 7
c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j.
Schedule commissioning work with Contractor for inclusion in Project schedule. Plan and conduct commissioning meetings. Request and review commissioning submittals required to perform commissioning tasks. Write and distribute verification tests and checklists. Develop verification check and startup plan in cooperation with Contractor and equipment and system installers. Write functional performance test procedures in cooperation with Contractor and equipment and system installers. Review test and balance execution plan. Attend Project progress and pre-installation meetings when required. Review meeting minutes. Resolve potential conflicts with commissioning activities. Observe equipment and system installations. Document equipment and systems are installed and perform in accordance with design intent and Contract Documents. Notify Owners representative and Architect of deficiencies. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency corrections. Oversee and approve content and adequacy of Owners personnel training. Review and approve operation and maintenance manuals. Compile commissioning record and testing data manual. Provide final commissioning report. Witness and document each piping, ductwork, electrical system testing, cleaning, and flushing. Include documentation in operation and maintenance manuals. Approve verification tests and checklist completion by reviewing verification checklist reports, site observation, and spot checking. Approve systems startup by reviewing startup reports and site observation. Oversee functional testing of control system. Approve control system for use for test and balance operations. Approve air and water systems balancing by reviewing completed reports, site observation, and spot testing. Analyze functional performance trend logs and monitor data to verify performance.
k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. 2. a.
Detailed Responsibilities:
b. c. d. e. f.
01 91 13 - 8
3.
Return to site minimum one month before expiration of warranty period. a. Review current equipment and system operation and condition of outstanding issues related to original and seasonal commissioning with Owner's personnel. Interview Owner's personnel to identify problems or concerns regarding equipment and system operation. Make suggestions for improvements and for recording changes in operation and maintenance manuals. Identify deficiencies covered by warranty or original construction contract. Assist Owner's personnel to develop reports, documents and requests for services to remedy outstanding problems. Release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. Assume duties of Contractor or Architect/Engineer. Stop the Work.
b. c. d. e. 4.
Commissioning Authority may not: a. b. c. d.
1.08
SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED A. Provide functional performance testing for all modes of operation for all mechanical equipment included in the design. The as applicable caveat is intended to exclude any generically listed pieces of equipment that are not included in the design. 1. Air Handling Systems a. b. c. 2. a. b. 3. a. b. 4. B. 1. HVAC Air Handling Systems Actuated dampers Air distribution systems Fan coil units Miscellaneous Unit heaters, radiation and heating coils General Refrigerant purge
Terminal Units
Supply and Exhaust Systems:
Facility Control System (Building Automation) Distributed Utility Heating & Cooling Systems: a. b. Heating water pumps & VFDs Heat Exchangers
Building (as applicable):
01 91 13 - 9
2.
Air Handling Systems a. b. c. VAV and CV HVAC Air Handling Systems Makeup Air Handling Systems Heat recovery Variable Air Volume Boxes Fan coil units Miscellaneous Unit heaters, radiation and heating coils.
3.
Terminal Units a. b. c.
4. 5.
Computer room air conditioning units Exhaust and Supply Systems: a. b. General & Toilet Kitchen
6. 7.
Facility Control System (Building Automation / Direct Digital Controls) Plumbing Systems: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Domestic H/C Water Hot Water Heaters Recirculation Pumps Associated controls (if applicable) Lavatories Sinks Water closets Urinals Electrical distribution system Lighting and lighting controls systems Emergency Generator / Uninterruptible Power Supplies Emergency and egress lighting Grounding / Bonding Power monitoring system Power Metering Call buttons Grounding / Bonding Duct detectors Emergency and egress lighting (including exit signs) FACP annunciation and identification Fire smoke dampers(FSDs)
8.
Electrical Systems: a. b. c. d. e. f. g.
9.
Life Safety Systems: a. b. c. d. e. f.
01 91 13 - 10
g. h. i. j. k. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A.
Generator and automatic transfer switch (ATS) Intercom / Public Announcement Systems Refrigerant leak detection and associated exhaust fans and alarms Shelter-in-place Shunt-trip buttons
See Section 01 33 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures; except: 1. Make all submittals specified in this section, and elsewhere where indicated for commissioning purposes, available directly to the Commissioning Authority, unless they require review by Architect; in that case, submit to Architect first. Submit one approved copy of Division 23 and 26 submittals to the Commissioning Authority, not to be returned. Commissioning Authority firm name, address, and telephone number, and name of responsible officer. Name of full time individual assigned to Project and assuming role as Commission Authority. Detailed description of three commissioning projects completed by full time individual assigned to Project within past five years. Include names and telephone numbers of owners project manager and general contractors site superintendent.
2. B.
Qualifications Data: Submit the following prior to start of Work: 1. 2. 3.
C.
Manufacturers' Instructions: Submit copies of all manufacturer-provided instructions that are shipped with the equipment as soon as the equipment is delivered. Product Data: If submittals to Architect do not include the following, submit copies as soon as possible: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Manufacturer's product data, cut sheets, and shop drawings. Manufacturer's installation instructions. Startup, operating, and troubleshooting procedures. Fan and pump curves. Factory test reports. Warranty information, including details of Owner's responsibilities in regard to keeping warranties in force.
D.
E. F.
Startup Plans and Reports. Completed Prefunctional Checklists.
01 91 13 - 11
1.
Prefunctional Checklists are provided by the Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)). It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure the forms are accurately completed in a timely manner that reflects status of the actual work. All form fields are to be completed. It is the responsibility of the respective subcontractor(s) to complete the checklists. All Prefunctional Checklists are to remain onsite under the control of the Contractor. All Prefunctional Checklists are to be available at any time for review by the Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)), Owner and / or Engineer. (All startup and testing reports associated with the equipment and systems being commissioning must be assembled in a timely manner to accompany the Checklists.)
1.10
SCHEDULE A. Commissioning schedule: Contractor to integrate functional performance testing and commissioning requirements with the GCs master CPM construction schedule. Commissioning scheduling is the responsibility of the Contractor. 1. 2. Prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities, update the schedule of commissioning activities monthly. Two weeks prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities, provide a detailed two-week look-ahead schedule. Thereafter, update the two-week look-ahead schedule weekly for the duration of commissioning for that construction phase. The two-week look-ahead schedule shall identify the date, time, beginning location, contractor personnel required, and anticipated duration for each startup or test activity. The intent is to ensure the CPM construction schedule is detailed and valid to facilitate planning, and scheduling resource allocation by the Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)), as the Cx activities are to be integrated into the GCs master CPM construction schedule.
B.
Commissioning of systems shall proceed per the criteria established in the specific sections that follow, with activities to be performed on a timely basis. Commissioning of systems may proceed prior to final completion of systems. The Commissioning Authority (CxA) must be available to respond promptly to avoid delay to the CPM schedule. However, this availability is contingent upon timely notification of all activities in advance so that adequate preparation is afforded. Problems observed shall be addressed immediately, in terms of notification to responsible parties and actions to correct deficiencies. It is expected that most deficiencies can be corrected within (7) days from the time they are identified. The Contractors schedule is expected to detail the project from inception to completion. The Commissioning Authoritys schedule is developed based on that GCs CPM schedule. Therefore, the notifications previously mentioned are necessary in order for the CxA to adequately prepare and perform resource allocation(s). Should the Contractor not provide the required (14) days advance notice for commissioning activities that require CxA involvement, the Owner may
C.
D.
01 91 13 - 12
be responsible for additional charges for the CxA having to respond on short notice, compressed schedule based on the CxAs hourly rates. The Owner, in turn, will backcharge the Contractor 1.11 QUALIFICATIONS A. Commissioning Authority Firm: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1. 2. B. Responsible for successfully commissioning three facilities of similar complexity and systems in past two years. Independent of Owner, Architect/Engineer, Contractor, Mechanical and Electrical Contractor.
Commissioning Authority: Individual employed by Commissioning Authority firm specializing in performing work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. 1. 2. Licensed as Professional Engineer, with mechanical and electrical engineering specialty. Experienced in operation and troubleshooting mechanical, electrical systems, fire alarm system, energy management control systems and lighting controls systems. Knowledgeable in test and balance of air and water systems. Experienced in monitoring and analyzing system operation using energy management control system trending or stand-alone data logging equipment. Excellent verbal and written communication skills, highly organized and able to work with both management and installers.
3. 4. 5.
1.12
COMMISSIONING SERVICES A. Employ and pay for services of an independent firm as Commissioning Authority acceptable to Owner to perform specified commissioning.
1.13
COMMISSIONING MEETINGS A. Scope Meeting: Early in the construction process, the owners representative shall schedule for a Commissioning Scoping / Kick-off Meeting involving all members of the commissioning team and shall be held at a time and place designated by the Owner. The purpose of the meeting will be to familiarize all parties with the requirements of the commissioning process, review of the commissioning plan and to ensure that the responsibilities of each party are clearly understood. Progress Meetings: 1. Prior to the beginning of start-up or functional performance testing activities, the Commissioning Authority (CxA) will hold commissioning meetings at least monthly during the initial 75% of the project. These meetings may be held concurrently with the general construction meetings. It is the
B.
01 91 13 - 13
responsibility of the contractor to ensure that all subcontractors be prepared, i.e. be knowledgeable of the previous meeting minutes and be prepared to take notes. The intent is for the meeting to be progressive. C. Beginning two weeks prior to the commencement of start-up or functional performance testing activities, i.e. final 25% of construction, whichever is earlier, the Commissioning Authority (CxA) will hold commissioning meetings at least weekly. Thereafter, and for the duration of commissioning for that construction phase, commissioning meetings will continue to be held at least weekly. These meetings may be held concurrently with the general construction meetings. Should the GCs master CPM construction schedule.be extended for any reason, the Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)) will submit invoice for reimbursement of such meetings based on hourly rates. The Commissioning Authority (CxA) may require additional meetings if the commissioning process appears to be behind schedule or if there are coordination problems. Such additional meetings will be invoiced at the CxAs hourly rates.
D.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS TEST EQUIPMENT A. The Division contractor for the equipment tested provides all standard or proprietary testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required functional performance testing. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 is ultimately responsible for all standard or proprietary testing equipment for the Facility Controls System (FCS) in Division 23, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. The CxA to provide two-way radios during commissioning for commissioning purposes. Contractor shall provide all standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required Functional Testing; unless otherwise noted such testing equipment will not become the property of Owner. Contractor shall include special or proprietary equipment, tools, software and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site, except for stand-alone data logging equipment used by the Commissioning Authority (CxA). Equipment-Specific Tools: Where special testing equipment, tools and instruments are specific to a piece of equipment, are only available from the vendor, and are required in order to accomplish startup or Functional Testing, contractor shall provide such equipment, tools, and instruments as part of the work at no extra cost to Owner; such equipment, tools, and instruments are to become the property of Owner. Contractor shall provide all testing equipment of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the
B.
C.
D.
E.
01 91 13 - 14
Contract Documents. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: 1. Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5F and a resolution of + or - 0.1F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of + or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last (12) months.
2.
F.
Contractor shall calibrate all equipment according to the manufacturers recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags or have certificates readily available. The Commissioning Authority (CxA) will provide data logging equipment and software required to test equipment. Any equipment and software will remain the properly of the CxA. Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment. 1. Dataloggers required for Functional Tests will be provided by the Commissioning Authority and will not become the property of Owner.
G.
H.
PART 3. 3.01
COORDINATION COMMISSIONING PLAN A. B. Commissioning Plan: The commissioning schedule, procedures, and coordination requirements for all parties in the commissioning process. Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)) has prepared the Commissioning Plan. 1. 2. C. D. All requested parties shall attend meetings called by the Commissioning Authority (CxA) for purposes of completing the commissioning plan. Require attendance and participation of relevant subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and manufacturer representatives.
Contractor is responsible for compliance with the Commissioning Plan. Commissioning Schedule: 1. Contractor shall submit anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system to Commissioning Authority (CxA) within (60) days after award of Contract. Re-submit anticipated startup dates monthly, but not less than (8) weeks prior to startup. Prefunctional Checklists (PC) and Functional Performance Tests (FT) are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems.
2. 3.
01 91 13 - 15
4.
Contractor shall provide sufficient notice to Commissioning Authority (CxA) for delivery of relevant Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Performance Test procedures, to avoid delay.
3.02
STARTUP PLANS AND REPORTS A. B. Startup Plans: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup plan, submit the plan not less than (8) weeks prior to startup. Startup Reports: For each item of equipment and system for which the manufacturer provides a startup checklist (or startup plan or field checkout sheet), Contractor shall document compliance by submitting the completed startup checklist prior to startup, signed and dated by responsible entity. Contractor shall submit directly to the Commissioning Authority.
C. 3.03
PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS (PC) A. A Prefunctional Checklist (PC) is required to be filled out for each item of equipment or other assembly specified to be commissioned. 1. 2. 3. No sampling of identical or near-identical items is allowed. These checklists do not replace manufacturers' recommended startup checklists, regardless of apparent redundancy. PC forms will not be complete until after award of the contract; the following types of information will be gathered via the completed Prefunctional Checklist (PC)forms: a. Certification by installing contractor that the unit is properly installed, started up, and operating and ready for Functional Performance Testing (FT). Confirmation of receipt of each shop drawing and commissioning submittal specified, itemized by unit. Manufacturer, model number, and relevant capacity information; list information as specified, submitted and installed. Document the serial number of installed unit. List of inspections to be conducted to document proper installation prior to startup and Functional Performance Testing (FT); these will be primarily static inspections and procedures; for equipment and systems may include normal manufacturers start-up checklist items and minor testing. Sensor and actuator calibration information.
b. c. d. e.
f. 4. B.
Samples of Prefunctional Checklist (PC) forms that indicate anticipated level of detail can be found at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm.
Commissioning Authority is responsible for furnishing the Prefunctional Checklist (PC) forms to Contractor.
01 91 13 - 16
1. 2.
Initial Drafts: Contractor is responsible for review of the initial draft of PC forms where so indicated in the Contract Documents. Contractor shall provide all additional information requested by Commissioning Authority (CxA) to aid in preparation of checklists, such as shop drawing submittals, manufacturers' startup checklists, and O&M data. Commissioning Authority (CxA) may add any relevant items deemed necessary regardless of whether they are explicitly mentioned in the Contract Documents or not.
3.
C.
Contractor is responsible for filling out Prefunctional Checklists (PCs), after completion of installation and before startup; witnessing by the Commissioning Authority (CxA) is not required unless otherwise specified. 1. Each line item without deficiency is to be witnessed, initialed, and dated by the actual witness; checklists are not considered to be complete until all line items are initialed and dated complete without deficiencies. Prefunctional Checklist (PC) forms with incomplete items may be submitted for approval provided the Contractor attests that the incomplete items do not preclude the performance of safe and reliable Functional Testing; resubmission of the Prefunctional Checklist (PC) form is required upon completion of remaining items. Individual checklists may contain line items that are the responsibility of more than one installer; Contractor shall assign responsibility to appropriate installers or subcontractors, with identification recorded on the form. If any Checklist line item is not relevant, record reasons on the form. Contractor may independently perform startup inspections and/or tests, at his option; See Section 01 75 00 for additional general startup requirements. Regardless of these reporting requirements, Contractor is responsible for correct startup and operation. Submit completed Prefunctional Checklist (PC) forms to Commissioning Authority (CxA) within two days of completion. Each piece of primary equipment, unless sampling of multiple similar units is allowed by the commissioning plan. Contractor will provide the necessary advance notice to CxA for participation. Failure to do so will result in request to perform the startup again. A sampling of non-primary equipment, as allowed by the commissioning plan.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. D.
Commissioning Authority shall witness startup for: 1.
2. E.
Issues: The Division contractor for the equipment tested is to correct issues and reinspect or re-test, as applicable, at no extra cost to Owner. 1. If difficulty in correction would delay progress, immediately report all such issues to the Owners Representative, Architect and Commissioning Authority.
01 91 13 - 17
2.
Should any of the aforementioned requirements not be met on the date that the commissioning process commences and/or if issues are observed during the commissioning process, the commissioning will be considered a failure and the issues will be required to be remedied and then addressed in writing prior to requesting a date for re-commissioning. It shall be Contractors responsibility to ensure that all defects and/or issues in the building equipment systems are corrected and/or repaired. Should the Commissioning Agent determine that a building equipment system is deficient and then receive Contractors written notice that such issue has been corrected, the Commissioning Agent will re-inspect such deficient system one additional time (Issue Re-commissioning) to confirm whether or not the system has been repaired or corrected to meet the Clients operational criteria. Additional re-commissioning time beyond this will be tracked and billed at the hourly rates.
3.04
FUNCTIONAL TESTS A. A Functional Test is required for each item of equipment, system, or other assembly specified to be commissioned, unless sampling of multiple identical or near-identical units is allowed by the final test procedures. Contractor is responsible for execution of required Functional Tests, after completion of Prefunctional Checklist and before closeout. Commissioning Authority (Commissioning Authority (CxA)) is responsible for witnessing and reporting results of Functional Tests, including preparation and completion of forms for that purpose. Contractor is responsible for correction of issues and re-testing at no extra cost to Owner; if an issue is not corrected and re-tested immediately, the Commissioning Authority (CxA) will document the issue and the Contractor's stated intentions regarding correction. 1. Issues are any condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents or does not perform properly. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. However, the Commissioning Authority (CxA) will not be pressured into overlooking deficient work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is an overriding reason to do so at the request of the Owner. When the issue has been corrected, the Contractor shall complete the resolution tracking form to certify that the item is ready to be re-tested. The Issues & Resolution tracking form shall be returned complete to the Commissioning Authority (CxA), where the Commissioning Authority (CxA) will reschedule the test and the Contractor shall re-test.
B. C.
D.
2.
3.
01 91 13 - 18
4.
Identical or Near-Identical Items: If 10 percent, or three, whichever is greater, of identical or near-identical items fail to perform due to material or manufacturing defect, all items will be considered defective; Contractor shall provide a proposal for correction within 2 weeks after notification of defect, including provision for testing sample installations prior to replacement of all items. Contractor shall bear the cost of Owners representative and Commissioning Authority (CxA) personnel time for witnessing of retesting. The Contractor shall respond in writing to the Commissioning Authority (CxA) and CM at least as often as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution. Cost of Retesting. a. The cost for the Subcontractor to retest a prefunctional or functional test, if they are responsible for the issue, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC. For an issue identified, not related to any prefunctional checklist or startup fault, the following shall apply: The Commissioning Authority (CxA) and Owners Representative will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no charge to the GC for their time. However, the Commissioning Authority (CxA)s and Owners Representative time for a second retest will be charged to the GC, who may choose to recover costs from the responsible Subcontractor. The time for the Commissioning Authority (CxA) and Owners Representative to direct any retesting required because a specific prefunctional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be backcharged to the GC, who may choose to recover costs from the party responsible for executing the faulty prefunctional test. Contractor shall bear the cost of Commissioning Authority personnel time witnessing and / or re-testing if the test failed due to failure to execute the relevant Prefunctional Checklist correctly; if the test failed for reasons that would not have been identified in the Prefunctional Checklist process, Contractor shall bear the cost of the second and subsequent re-tests. Compression of scheduled commissioning activity will result in additional charges at the Commissioning Authority (CxA)s hourly rates.
5. 6.
7.
b.
c.
d.
e.
01 91 13 - 19
E.
Failure Due to Manufacture Defect. If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance specification, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the Owner. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following: 1. Within one week of notification from the Owners Representative, the Contractor or manufacturers representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the Owners Representative within two weeks of the original notice. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation. The Owners Representative will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable. Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor and the Owners Representative will be allowed to test the installations for up to one week, upon which the Owners Representative will decide whether to accept the solution. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained. Some test procedures are included in the Contract Documents; where Functional Test procedures are not included in the Contract Documents, test procedures will be determined by the Commissioning Authority with input by and coordination with Contractor. Examples of Functional Testing: a. Test the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems (rather than just components) using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc.
2.
3. 4.
5.
F.
Functional Test Procedures: 1.
2.
b.
01 91 13 - 20
c.
Systems are run through all the HVAC control systems sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequence's state. Group trends are required for major systems. Contractor is required to provide trend groups for all major systems. Traditional air and water test and balancing (TAB) is not Functional Testing; random sampling of a percentage of the TAB by demonstration to the Commissioning Authority (CxA) is Functional Testing.
d. e.
3.
All preliminary Functional Test procedures are included in the contract documents; the Commissioning Authority (CxA) has the authority to modify these test procedures and shall furnish any final versions as applicable.
G.
Deferred Functional Tests: Some tests may need to be performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions; performance of these tests remains the Contractor's responsibility regardless of timing. 1. General contractor shall be required to provide coordination with the required trades participation for all applicable deferred testing.
3.05
TEST PROCEDURES - GENERAL A. General Requirements 1. All systems and system components shall be tested in the presence of the Commissioning Authority (CxA) (and Engineer, if desired by the Engineer) to demonstrate compliance with specified requirements. To minimize the time of commissioning, contracting and engineering team members, testing shall be done in seasonal single blocks of time insofar as possible. The contractor shall notify the Commissioning Authority (CxA) (14) days prior to scheduled Functional Performance Tests, of the scheduled completion date of the Installation Verification and Pre-Functional Testing. All testing shall be conducted under specified design operating conditions, as approved by the Commissioning Authority (CxA) and Engineer. All elements of systems shall be tested to demonstrate that total systems satisfy all requirements of these Specifications. Testing shall be accomplished on a hierarchical basis. Test each piece of equipment for proper operation, followed by each subsystem, followed by entire system, followed by inter-ties to other major systems. All special testing materials and equipment shall be provided by the contractor. This includes but is not limited to proprietary equipment, handheld control parameter/setpoint adjustment tools and air/ water flow balance instrumentation.
2.
3. 4.
5.
01 91 13 - 21
6. B.
Provide one copy of all test reports and records to the Commissioning Authority (CxA).
Contractor shall provide skilled technicians to execute starting of equipment and to execute the Functional Tests. Ensure that they are available and present during the agreed upon schedules and for sufficient duration to complete the necessary tests, adjustments and problem-solving. Contractor shall provide all necessary materials and system modifications required to produce the flows, pressures, temperatures, and conditions necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, return all affected equipment and systems to their pre-test condition. Sampling: Where Functional Testing of fewer than the total number of multiple identical or near-identical items is explicitly permitted, perform sampling as follows: 1. 2. Identical Units: Defined as units with same application and sequence of operation; only minor size or capacity difference. Sampling is not allowed for: a. b. c. 3. Major equipment. Life-safety-critical equipment. Prefunctional Checklist execution.
C.
D.
If frequent failures occur, resulting in more troubleshooting than testing, the Commissioning Authority may stop the testing and require Contractor to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units prior to continuing testing.
E.
Manual Testing: Use hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts, or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the observation). Simulating Conditions: Artificially create the necessary condition for the purpose of testing the response of a system; for example apply hot air to a space sensor using a hair dryer to see the response in a VAV box. Simulating Signals: Disconnect the sensor and use a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and control system to simulate the sensor value. Over-Writing Values: Change the sensor value known to the control system in the control system to see the response of the system; for example, change the outside air temperature value from 50 degrees F to 75 degrees F to verify economizer operation. Indirect Indicators: Remote indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100 percent closed, are considered indirect indicators. Monitoring: Record parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of the relevant control
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
01 91 13 - 22
systems; where monitoring of specific points is called for in Functional Test Procedures: 1. All points that are monitored by the relevant control system shall be trended by Contractor; at the Commissioning Authoritys request, Contractor shall trend up to 20 percent more points than specified at no extra charge. Other points will be monitored by the Commissioning Authority using dataloggers. At the option of the Commissioning Authority, some control system monitoring may be replaced with datalogger monitoring. Provide hard copies of monitored data in columnar format with time down left column and at least 5 columns of point values on same page. Graphical output is desirable and is required for all output if the system can produce it. Monitoring may be used to augment manual testing.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.06
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. B. See Section 01 77 00 for additional requirements. Add design intent documentation furnished by Architect to manuals prior to submission to Owner.
PART 4. 4.01
EXECUTION COMMISSIONING PROCEDURE A. Sequence of testing: Commissioning shall proceed from lower to higher levels of complexity. For each discrete subsystem or system, testing at the lower level shall be completed prior to starting the next higher level of tests. In general, the order of testing from lowest to highest is: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Static tests (such as duct leakage tests). Component functional performance tests (of motors, actuators, sensors, etc.) and start-up. Balancing. System functional performance tests. Intersystem functional performance tests.
Re-testing: The Contractor shall repeat, at no additional cost to Owner, the complete functional test procedure for each test for which acceptable results are not achieved. Repeat tests until acceptable results are achieved. The Commissioning Authority (CxA) shall track commissioning issues until correction. Within each system, the Commissioning Authority (CxA) shall provide one re-commissioning for any issues. For systems with large quantities of identical equipment, a statistical re-commissioning strategy shall be applied to retest 25% of the failed issues. The tested systems will not be witnessed by the Owner until acceptable
01 91 13 - 23
results are achieved, documented, reviewed and accepted. Additional testing beyond a single failure may be subject to back-charges by the Commissioning Authority (CxA). C. Correction of Issues: 1. 2. Correct functional performance test issues promptly document and schedule retest. Corrections during functional performance tests are generally prohibited to avoid consuming the time of personnel waiting for the test, but not involved in making the correction. Exceptions will be allowed if the cause of the failure is obvious and corrective action can be completed in less than five minutes. If corrections are made under this exception, the failure shall be noted on the functional performance test data form. A new functional performance test data form, marked retest, shall be initiated after the correction has been made. The entire functional performance test procedure shall be repeated.
D.
Delegated witnesses: Witnesses may be designated by the Owner or A/E to observe the commissioning process. Witnesses shall provide no labor or materials in the commissioning process. The only function of the witnesses shall be to observe and comment on the progress and results of commissioning.
4.02
TRAINING A. Contractor shall prepare and submit a training plan for Owner approval. The training plan shall include for each training session: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Dates, start and finish times, and locations. Outline of the information to be presented. Names and qualifications of presenters. List of texts and other materials required to support training.
Contractor shall obtain assistance from appropriate subcontractors and vendors to provide training for the delegated Owner operations staff as specified in Divisions 23, 26, and elsewhere in the project specifications. Contractor shall host each training session: 1. 2. Provide program overview and curriculum guidance. Obtain signatures of attendees on a sign-in list.
C.
D.
Equipment vendors provide training on the specifics of each system and philosophy, troubleshooting, maintenance recommendations and repair techniques as specified in the relevant sections of this specification. Installation subcontractors provide training on peculiarities specific to this project and job-specific experience as specified in the relevant sections of this specification. END OF SECTION
E.
01 91 13 - 24
SECTION 01 91 14 COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY RESPONSIBILITIES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. The Commissioning Process is a joint team effort to ensure that all mechanical and electrical equipment, controls and systems function together properly to meet the design intent of the Engineer, and to document system performance parameters for fine-tuning of control sequences and operation procedures. Commissioning is intended to achieve the following specific objectives; this section covers the Commissioning Authority's responsibilities for commissioning: 1. Verify that the work is installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturers recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup: Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists are utilized to achieve this. Verify and document that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents: Functional Tests performed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this. Verify that operation and maintenance manuals submitted to Owner are complete: Detailed O&M data submittals are specified.
2.
3. B.
The Commissioning Process shall encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, training and performance testing. Testing and balancing, controls and training are addressed in other sections of the Specifications. The Commissioning described herein is not intended to supersede or replace the normal system startup by the contracting team, observations by the design team or balancing by the test and balance contractor. Commissioning Process: In as much as possible, the Commissioning Process shall occur during the construction of the project for all portions of the electrical and mechanical systems that are scheduled to be complete at the opening day. This is intended to achieve the following: 1. 2. Reduce as much as possible any duplication of work or testing for the Contractor. Identify and solve any potential electrical / mechanical system design or construction problems as they relate to functional performance, prior to Substantial Completion.
C.
D.
01 91 14 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commissioning Authority Responsibilities
E.
Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion. Coordinate and direct all the commissioning activities in a logical, sequential and efficient manner using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise. The Commissioning Authority is employed by Owner.
F.
G. 1.02
REFERENCES A. B. C. ASHRAE Guideline 1-1996 The HVAC Commissioning Process ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005 The Commissioning Process PECI (MCP) - Model Commissioning Plan; Portland Energy Conservation, Inc.; located at http://www.peci.org/library/mcpgs.htm; current edition.
1.03
COMMISSIONING AUTHORITY FIRM (CxA) QUALIFICATIONS A. The CxA shall meet the following minimum qualifications: 1. 2. 3. A minimum of 5 years documented experience, specifically in Building Commissioning. CxA shall have documentable experience in Commissioning similar facilities. Documentable experience in startup and troubleshooting HVAC, hot water heating, chilled water, steam, plumbing, fire suppression, electrical, emergency power, fire alarm, life safety, fume hoods, security, specialty systems, and medical gas systems of similar complexity to those contained in these documents. A demonstrable working knowledge of complex environmental, fire alarm, electric power control and facility control systems; be capable of understanding control vendors operating system and control code; be capable of troubleshooting control code and recommending necessary modifications. Competency in system design and intent. Knowledge of the test and balance of air and hydronic systems. Knowledge of the electrical distribution and lighting systems in conjunction with NETA electrical testing requirements. Excellent communication and writing skills, organizational skills, and ability to work well with management and trades contractors. CxA shall provide day-to-day project management by a Certified Commissioning Professional (CCP, or equivalent) or professional engineer with extensive practical field experience and knowledge of the commissioning process and specific, pertinent disciplines. The technical
4.
5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
01 91 14 - 2
training and experience with extensive practical field experience of all field personnel will also be reviewed. 10. 11. B. CxA shall be a full member of the Building Commissioning Association (BCA). CxA shall have a fully staffed office within 100 miles of the project, specializing in Building Commissioning
The CxA shall not be the project superintendent, foreman, safety officer, MEP coordinator or hold other duties that would keep him/her from fulfilling the responsibilities of the CxA.
1.04
COMMISSIONING RESPONSIBILITIES A. A. Commissioning Authority Firm (CxA): The CxA Responsibilities include, but are not limited to: 1. General Tasks: a. b. c. Coordinate, schedule and manage the commissioning activities. Schedule, agenda and attendees of the commissioning process. Coordinate directly with each Sub Contractor with respect to their responsibility and contractual obligations as it relates to commissioning. Assist the Contractor to coordinate all Sub Contractor commissioning activities. Obtain, assemble and submit commissioning documentation. Attend periodic on-site commissioning activities. Develop the commissioning plan and schedule. Incorporate detailed prefunctional checkoff sheets and functional performance test procedures. Coordinate locations of all required test ports required for testing and Commissioning of the systems on P&IDs, shop drawings and during installation. Conduct and coordinate the installation verification inspections with the Engineer. Conduct and coordinate the installation verification inspections with the Engineer, Architect, Contractor and Owners Representative. Prepare and submit the Commissioning Reports with Closeout Documents. Be present during portions of the startup activities and selected prefunctional testing activities. Testing to assist and witness the execution of startup.
d. e. f. 2. a. b. c.
Commissioning Documentation Development Tasks:
d. e. 3.
Pre-Functional Testing Tasks: a. b.
01 91 14 - 3
c.
Monitor the performance of a statistically representative portion of the Test, Adjust and Balance contractor activities. Provide random sampling or direct witness of 10% to 30% of TAB contractors work. See 3.4L of this Section for details. Direct the functional performance testing. Provide testing of all systems to provide complete confidence in the systems. The tests will include the interaction between individual components, sub-systems and complete building systems under both normal and emergency power conditions. Provide 100% functional performance testing on critical systems and statistical based functional performance testing on high quantity, less critical systems. Statistical based testing is a random testing of different components/systems and requires less than a 3% failure rate, or the entire system must be re-checked by the contractor. The breakdown is detailed on the list of included systems. Ensure that the respective Sub Contactors have made the necessary arrangements and provisions test instrumentation is available during functional performance testing and instruments meet quality and calibration requirements and are in good working order. Enforce system compliance and recommend modifications to the system design that will correct or enhance the system performance. Coordinate witnessing of the tests. Track commissioning issues until correction and retesting are successfully completed. Assist the Commissioning Team in determining the cause of failure. Within each system, include one recommissioning for any deficiencies.
4.
Functional Performance Testing Tasks: a.
b.
c.
d. e. f.
1.05
SUBMITTALS A. Commissioning Plan: 1. 2. 3. B. Submit preliminary draft for review by Owner and Architect within (30) days after commencement of Commissioning Authority contract. Submit revised draft to be included in the construction contract documents, not less than 4 weeks prior to bid date. Submit final plan not more than (90) days after commencement of construction, for issuance to all parties. Submit preliminary draft for review by Owner and Architect at start of construction documents phase or within (30) days after commencement of Commissioning Authority contract, whichever is later.
General Commissioning Specifications. 1.
01 91 14 - 4
2. C.
Submit final draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than (6) weeks prior to bid date. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within (30) days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. Submit revised list not less than (6) weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. Submit final list not more than (60) days after start of construction. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within (30) days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than (6) weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than (4) weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned. Submit preliminary list at start of construction documents phase or within (30) days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. Submit revised list not less than (6) weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the Contract Documents; this is intended to be a list of titles, not full description of the tests. Submit final list not more than (60) days after start of construction. Submit preliminary draft at start of construction documents phase or within (30) days after commencement of contract, whichever is later. Submit revised draft for review by Owner and Architect not less than (6) weeks prior to bid date, for inclusion in the construction contract documents. Submit final draft to Contractor not less than (4) weeks prior to startup of particular items to be commissioned.
List of Prefunctional Checklists to be developed: 1. 2. 3.
D.
Prefunctional Checklists: 1. 2. 3.
E.
List of Functional Test procedures to be developed: 1. 2.
3. F. 1. 2. 3. G.
Functional Test Procedures:
Final Commissioning Report: Submit to Owner (30) days from final completion of Functional Performance Testing.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS COMMISSIONING REPORTS A. Documentation - General: 1. 2. The Commissioning Authority shall record and maintain detailed testing data. The data record shall be comprehensive and concise. All data must be recorded as soon as possible during the course of the testing.
01 91 14 - 5
3. 4. 5.
All documentation shall have the date, time, and names of persons participating in the inspection and testing. All test instruments shall be documented for valid calibration. The recording work sheets, inspection check lists, and performance testing plans must all be approved by the Engineer and Commissioning Authority prior to the start of Functional Performance Testing. The Commissioning Authority shall provide daily report logs to be included in the final report. The daily logs shall record the commissioning Authority personnel and event summaries of meetings, conversations, tests, failures, solutions, procedures and successes.
B.
Daily Commissioning Report Logs: 1. 2.
C.
Installation verification audit: Prior to start-up, the CxA shall maintain a report of installation verification audit activities. Identify equipment and components verified, issues noted, corrective action taken, and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries. Start-up issues report: Within five days following start-up of each system or equipment, the CxA shall maintain start-up issues report forms. Identify systems and/or equipment started up, issues noted, corrective action taken, and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries. Test, adjust and balance (TAB) progress reports: After commencement of TAB activities, the TAB Contractor shall submit weekly TAB progress reports to the Owner. Identify: 1. 2. 3. 4. Systems or subsystems for which preliminary balancing is complete. Systems or subsystems for which final balancing is complete. Status of issues and balancing problems encountered, including corrective actions taken. Updated schedule of remaining TAB activities.
D.
E.
F.
Issues & Resolutions Report: At the end of each day, in which functional performance tests are conducted, the CxA shall maintain a Issues & Resolutions (I&R) Log for tests for which acceptable results were not achieved during the day. 1. Identify tests for which acceptable results were not obtained by test number and description, and equipment identification and location. Briefly describe observations about the performance that was associated with failure to achieve acceptable results. Identify the cause of failure if such is apparent. When corrections have been completed, the CxA shall update the functional performance test issues report forms. Identify corrective action taken and the dates and initials of the persons making the entries. Identify the schedule for re-testing.
2.
3.
01 91 14 - 6
G.
Final Commissioning Report: The CxA shall prepare and submit (6) copies of the Final Commissioning Report. The Report format shall be an indexed Adobe Acrobat PDF File. This electronic Report shall contain: 1. 2. 3. The report shall verify performance of HVAC equipment and systems. Document any field modifications to the testing process and why these modifications were made. The organization of the final commissioning report shall be as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. Executive Summary of each mechanical system and problems encountered and resolved. System Overview summarizing the system design. Commissioning Plan Post Commissioned Controls Sequences and Points Lists. Prefunctional Testing Checklists Functional Testing Procedures and Results Issues & Resolutions Logs Daily report logs. Appendix of letters, meeting minutes, memos and notes occurring during the commissioning process.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION COMMISSIONING PLAN A. Prepare and maintain the Commissioning Plan, covering commissioning schedule, Pre-functional Checklist and Functional Test procedures, coordination requirements, and forms to be used, for all parties in the commissioning process. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Call and chair meetings of the Commissioning Team when appropriate. Give Contractor sufficient notice for scheduling commissioning activities. Develop a comprehensive start-up and initial systems checkout plan with cooperation of Contractor and subcontractors. The PECI Model Commissioning Plan may be used as a guide for the Commissioning Plan. ASHRAE Guideline 1 may be used as a guide for the Commissioning Plan. Avoid replication of information included in the construction contract documents to the greatest extent possible.
Preliminary Commissioning Plan Construction Phase: Submit a preliminary construction phase commissioning plan to identify how commissioning activities will be integrated into general construction and trade activities. The plan is the key means for the CxA to inform all parties as to how each system functions, independently and with respect to other systems. The plan shall be updated regularly and redistributed to the commissioning team for review and comment.
01 91 14 - 7
The intent of this plan is to evoke questions, expose issues, and resolve them with input from the entire commissioning team early in construction. The commissioning plan shall identify how commissioning responsibilities are distributed. Include the following sections: 1. 2. Executive Summary: Provide a description of the Commissioning Manual Commissioning Team: Provide a listing of all commissioning team members including the names, addresses, and office/fax/cell phones number or the owner, commissioning authority, architect, mechanical engineer, electrical engineer, general contractor, mechanical contractor, electrical contractor, controls contractor, fire alarm system contractor and test & balance contractor. System Overview: Provide a listing of design weather data, design parameters and all mechanical and electrical systems equipment data. Overview of Testing Program Procedures: Provide a detailed description of the testing plan and procedures that will be implemented during the commissioning process. Record Document - Sequences of Operation: Provide a detailed sequence of operation that is utilized for testing purposes. The final commissioning report shall describe any modifications to the engineer specified sequences of operation. Pre-Functional Testing Checklists: Provide prefunctional testing checklist forms to the contracting team for each individual piece of mechanical equipment. The forms shall describe all events required to fully start-up a piece of equipment. Functional Testing Procedures: Provide a list of proposed functional testing procedures Provide samples of commissioning forms including: a. Issues & Resolutions Log: Provide a sample functional performance test Issues & Resolutions report form. Include space to record: Associated functional performance test data form number; date of test; name of person reporting the issue; description of the observations associated with the failure of the test; cause of the failure, if apparent at the time of the test; date and description of corrective action taken; name and signature of person taking corrective action; and schedule for retest. Daily Log: Provide a blank log as an example. Meeting Minutes: Provide a blank log as an example.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7. 8.
b. c. 9.
Commissioning schedule: Submit within (90) calendar days of notice to proceed.
01 91 14 - 8
10.
Test equipment identification list: For each instrument, sorted according to intended use: Manufacturer; model number; serial number; calibration certification; range; accuracy; resolution; and intended use. Test, adjust, and balance (TAB) information (by TAB Contractor) including: a. b. c. TAB Data forms TAB procedures: TAB report.
11.
C.
Final Commissioning Plan Construction Phase: Include all items described in the Preliminary Commissioning Plan, update as required with project changes and submittal review comments, and finalize the outstanding Preliminary Commissioning Plan items within 30 days of acceptance of the Preliminary Commissioning Plan: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Executive Summary: Same as preliminary Commissioning Team: Update changes and add personnel as required System Overview: Update any changes and include approved submittal data for mechanical/electrical system equipment rather than design data. Overview of Testing Program Procedures: Update as required. Record Document - Sequences of Operation: Update as required with RFIs and questions to the design team. Pre-Functional Testing Checklists: Update as required to reflect additional or changed equipment. Functional Testing Procedures & Data Forms: Provide complete and detailed functional performance testing procedures required to fully test the entire system including the following: a. b. c. d. Identify which subcontractors will participate in each of the tests. Identify instrumentation required for each test. Identify who will provide instrumentation for each test. Operational description: This shall include, for example, the design criteria, design intent/basis of design, code requirements, specifics of the equipment to be provided, sequences of operation, operating priorities, protocols, etc. Some of these items will be provided to the CxA with the construction package and may be copied or referenced. Each procedure shall have a unique alphanumeric designator consisting of the applicable functional performance test procedure designator followed by a dash digit suffix to distinguish multiple repetitions of the same procedure. The same procedure may be applied to multiple identical pieces of equipment or systems. Procedures shall reference the applicable specification section upon which the procedure is based.
e.
f. g.
01 91 14 - 9
h. i. j.
Identify the value for all setpoints and inputs, positions of adjustable devices, valves, dampers, and switches. Identify the range of acceptable results for each condition tested. FPT procedures shall be detailed test instructions, written with sufficient step-by-step information to allow a test to be repeated under identical conditions with repeatable results. Include space to record: Description of the procedure; whether the form is for a retest of a failed procedure; identification and location of the equipment being tested; identification of instrumentation used by serial number; observed conditions at each step of the procedure; acceptable results as specified elsewhere; date of the test; names of technicians performing the procedure; name and signature of the CxA Issues & Resolution Log Daily Log: Meeting Minutes:
k.
8.
Update the samples of commissioning forms including: a. b. c.
9. 10. 11. D.
Commissioning schedule: Update as required. Test equipment identification list: Update as required. TAB information (by TAB Contractor): Update as required
Basis of Design Documentation: Detailed documentation of the functional requirements of the project; descriptions of the systems, components, and methods chosen to meet the design intent; assumptions underlying the design intent. 1. Prepared By: Architect. Review the construction contract documents for Contractor submittals of draft checklists, draft test procedures, manufacturer startup procedures, and other information intended for the use of the Commissioning Authority in preparing the Commissioning Plan. Commissioning Schedule: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Coordinate with Contractor anticipated dates of startup of each item of equipment and system. Contractor's scheduling responsibilities are specified in the construction contract documents. Revise and re-issue commissioning schedule as needed. Pre-functional Checklists and Functional Tests are to be performed in sequence from components, to subsystems, to systems. Deliver relevant Pre-functional Checklists and Functional Test Procedures to Contractor in time to avoid delay.
E.
F.
01 91 14 - 10
3.02
PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS A. Prefunctional Checklists - Content: Prepare forms for Contractor's use, in sufficient detail to document that the work has been installed in accordance with the Contract Documents and the manufacturers recommendations and instructions, and that it receives adequate operational checkout prior to startup. 1. 2. Prepare separate Checklists for each type of equipment, system, or other assembly, customized to the item. Identify each Checklist by using the contract documents identification number or name, if any; If none, create unique identifiers for each Checklist; do not rely on Contractor to number checklists. Multiple identical or near-identical items may appear on a single Checklist provided there is space to record all required data for each separately; label each set of data uniquely. Include space to record manufacturer name, model number, serial number, capacity and other relevant characteristics, and accessories and other features as applicable; include space to record "as specified", "as submitted", and "as installed" data. Include space to record whether or not the required submittals have been received; list each separate type of submittal. Include line items for each physical inspection to be performed. Include line items for each operational inspection to be performed, such as checking switch operation, fan rotation, valve and damper stroke, and measuring actual electrical loads. Include separate section for sensors and actuators, with space for documenting actual physical location and calibration measurements; provide a separate generic calibration checklist identified wherever referenced. Include spaces to record that related Checklists for related work upon which this work depends have been completed. Provide a cover-sheet showing name of equipment item or system, documentation identification number, names of accessory components involved, and identification of related checklists. Include on cover sheet space for Contractor's use in attesting to completeness; provide spaces for the signatures of the general contractor and each subcontractor or other entity responsible, customized to the project and the type of item. Include on the cover sheet, above the signature block, the following statement: "The work referenced in this Checklist and other work integral to or dependent on this work is complete and ready for functional testing. The checklist items are complete and have been checked off only by parties having direct knowledge of the event." Include two checkboxes:
3.
4.
5. 6. 7.
8.
9. B.
Prefunctional Checklists - Format: 1.
2.
3.
01 91 14 - 11
a. b.
"This Checklist is submitted for approval with no exceptions." "This Checklist is submitted for approval, subject to the attached list of outstanding items, none of which preclude the performance of safe and reliable functional tests. A statement of completion will be submitted upon completion of the outstanding items."
4. 5.
Use a consistent, tabular format for all Checklists, with one line per checklist activity. For each line item, provide space for initials and date, and identification of the subcontractor or other entity responsible.
3.03
FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES A. Develop test procedures in sufficient detail to show that functional performance is in accordance with the Contract Documents and shows proper operation through all modes of operation where there is a different system response, including seasonal, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Obtain assistance and review by installing subcontractors. Itemize each test sequence in step-by-step order, with acceptance criteria for each step and for the test as a whole. Include test setup instructions, description of tools and apparatus, special cautions, and. Avoid procedures that would void or otherwise limit warranties; review with Contractor prior to execution. For HVAC systems, procedures may include energy management control system trending, stand-alone datalogger monitoring or manual functional testing. Obtain explicit approval of Contractor in regard to feasibility and safety prior to execution.
6. B.
Functional Test Report Forms: Prepare forms in advance of testing, using a consistent format; include all test procedure information given to Contractor and: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Report Identifier. Formulas to be used in calculations. Yes/No check boxes for each step of test. Space to record results, document deficiencies, and make recommendations. Signature and date block for Commissioning Authority.
C.
Functional Test Prerequisites: Include space to verify all of the following items on each Functional Test Report Form, unless truly inapplicable: 1. All related equipment has been started up and start-up reports and Prefunctional Checklists submitted and approved ready for Functional Testing.
01 91 14 - 12
2.
All related equipment has been started up and start-up reports and Prefunctional Checklists submitted and approved ready for Functional Testing. a. For electrical distribution systems, check that: i. NETA testing and manufacturer startups are complete and approved.
ii. All equipment and devices are complete and operational. b. For lighting controls, check that: i. 3. Manufacturer startups are complete and approved. ii. All equipment and devices are complete and operational. All control system functions for this and all interlocking systems are programmed and operable in accordance with the Contract Documents, including final set points and schedules with debugging, loop tuning and sensor calibrations completed, with space for signature of controls installer. Incomplete items identified by Architect during closeout inspections have been corrected or completed. Safeties and operating ranges have been reviewed. A copy of the specified sequence of operation is attached. A copy of applicable schedules and setpoints is attached. A copy of the specified Functional Test Procedures is attached. The Functional Test Procedures have been reviewed and approved by the applicable installer. Vibration control report approved (if required). False loading equipment, system and procedures ready. Sufficient clearance around equipment for servicing. Original values of pre-test setpoints that need to be changed to accommodate testing have been recorded, with a check box provided to verify return to original values (include control parameters, limits, delays, lockouts, schedules, etc.). Any other items on the Prefunctional Checklist or Start-up Reports that need to be re-verified.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13.
14.
3.04
CONSTRUCTION PHASE A. Coordinate the commissioning work with Contractor and Construction Manager, ensure that commissioning activities are being incorporated into the master schedule. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attend planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review Contractor's meeting minutes for issues relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving discrepancies.
B.
01 91 14 - 13
C.
Commissioning Kick-Off Meeting: Plan and conduct a meeting early in the construction phase to review commissioning activities and responsibilities with all parties involved. Require attendance by all members of the Commissioning Team. Conduct periodic meetings as necessary to coordinate, resolve planning issues, and aid in resolution of deficiencies, minimizing the time spent by Contractor and Owner personnel; hold meetings at least monthly. Submit periodic progress reports to Owner and Contractor. Review Contractor shop drawing submittals applicable to systems being commissioned for compliance with commissioning needs; verify that Owner's responsibilities are clearly defined in warranties. Review and approve submittals directly related to commissioning. Deliver Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test procedures to Contractor. Verify satisfactory completion of Prefunctional Checklists by Contractor by reviewing checklists and by site observation and spot checking; provide formal approval when satisfactory. Verify startup of all systems by reviewing start-up reports and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory. Coordinate, witness and approve Functional Tests performed by Contractor. Coordinate retesting until satisfactory performance is achieved. HVAC Commissioning: 1. Gather and review the control sequences and interlocks and work with Contractor and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to prepare detailed Functional Test procedures. Building Automation System Tasks: Verify that total building automation system control system is performing to provide conditions through all possible modes of operation as outlined in the Design Intent Document (provided by the Engineer). The Functional Performance Testing procedures shall address all operating characteristics of control system equipment, modes of operation, sequences, and instrumentation calibration including: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3. Chilled water system operation Heating water & steam system operation Air handling and ventilation systems operation Terminal unit operation Exhaust fans system Critical Trends
D.
E. F.
G. H. I.
J. K. L.
2.
Mechanical System Tasks: Verify that the total HVAC mechanical system is performing to provide conditions through all possible modes of operation as outlined in the Design Intent Documented (provided by the Engineer). The Functional Performance Testing procedures shall represent all operating characteristics of all mechanical equipment and systems, including:
01 91 14 - 14
a. b. c. d. e. 4.
Air handling and ventilation systems Chilled water system operation including chillers, pumps and controls The heating water system operation including boilers, pumps and controls Terminal unit operation Exhaust systems.
Witness all or part of HVAC piping test and flushing procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. Witness all or part of duct testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. Review TAB Plan prepared by Contractor. Before TAB is executed, witness sufficient Functional Testing of the control system to approve it to be used for TAB. Verify air and water systems balancing by spot testing, by reviewing completed reports, and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory. Verify readings for the approximate quantities of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. 30% of Fan flows 30% of Pump flows 20% of Outside air volumes 20% of equipment pressure drops 10% of Supply (maximum and minimum primary air) return and exhaust diffusers, registers and grilles 10% of hydronic flows (as applicable) 10% of Balancing valve/damper settings 10% of Coil pressure drops If more than one-fifth of these readings differ from the documented TAB readings by more than 15 percent, then the TAB for the failed system shall be repeated in entirety.
5.
6. 7. 8.
9. M. 1.
Analyze critical trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance. Gather and review the electrical submittals and interlocks and work with Contractor and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained, in writing, to be able to prepare detailed Functional Test procedures. Power Monitoring System Tasks: Verify that power monitoring system is performing to provide electrical data as outlined in the Design Intent Document (provided by the Engineer). The Functional Performance Testing procedures shall address all operating characteristics of electrical system equipment, and instrumentation calibration including:
Electrical Commissioning:
2.
01 91 14 - 15
a. b. c. d. e. 3.
Distribution system Lighting system operation Air handling and ventilation systems Exhaust fans system Generation Systems
Electrical System Tasks: Verify that the total electrical system is performing to provide conditions through all possible modes of operation as outlined in the Design Intent Documented (provided by the Engineer). The Functional Performance Testing procedures shall represent all operating characteristics of all electrical equipment and systems, including: a. b. c. d. e. Electrical Distribution Equipment operation Lighting and Lighting Controls operation Emergency Backup System operation Power Monitoring System operation Electrical Generation operation
4.
Witness all or part of NETA Electrical Test procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. Witness all or part of equipment testing and procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed; document testing and include documentation in O&M manuals. Verify wiring devices by spot testing, by reviewing completed reports, and by site observation; provide formal approval when satisfactory. Analyze critical trend logs and monitoring data to verify performance.
5.
6. 7. N. O. P. 3.05
Perform Functional Testing for systems and equipment so specified, without assistance of Contractor. Maintain a master Issues & Resolution Log and a separate testing record. Provide written progress and test reports with recommended actions. Notify Contractor and Owner of issues in procedures or results; suggest solutions.
CLOSEOUT A. Commissioning Record: Use the same format and organization as specified for the O&M manuals. 1. 2. Include the Final Commissioning Plan and Final Report. For each product or system and equipment item, include the following organized as indicated, with separator tabs: a. b. c. Design intent documentation, furnished by Architect or others. Detailed operational sequences. Startup plan and approved startup reports.
01 91 14 - 16
d. e. f. g.
Filled out Prefunctional Checklists. Filled out Functional Test reports; trend logs and monitoring reports and analysis; other verification documentation. Training plan and training records. (Provided to CxA by Contractor.) Recommissioning recommendations, including time schedule and procedures; include blank copies of all Prefunctional Checklists and Functional Test report forms.
B.
Final Commissioning Report: Include: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Executive summary. List of participants and roles. Brief facility description. Overview of commissioning scope and general description of testing and verification methods. For each item commissioned, an evaluation of adequacy of: a. b. c. d. e. 6. 7. 8. 9. The product itself; i.e. compliance with the contract documents. Installation. Functional performance; include a brief description of the verification method used and observations and conclusions from the testing. O&M documentation, including design intent. Operator training.
List of all outstanding unresolved items, referenced to the specific functional test, inspection, trend log, etc., where the issue is documented. List of unresolved issues, seasonal or deferred testing, and other concerns that could affect facility operation. Recommendations for improvement to equipment or operations, future actions, commissioning process changes, etc. (about four to six pages). Attach appendices containing all commissioning documentation, including logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, etc., except that specified to be part of the Commissioning Record.
3.06
SAMPLE COMMISSIONING REPORTING FORMS: A. The Commissioning Report shall contain the following forms as a minimum: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Daily Report Log Issues & Resolution Log Request for Information Cx Meeting Minutes Cx Progress Log Field Report Electrical Performance Test Protocol
01 91 14 - 17
8. 9.
Mechanical/Process Pre-Functional Checklist Mechanical/Process Functional Performance Test Protocol and verification of critical trends END OF SECTION
01 91 14 - 18
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 02 41 00 DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Demolition necessary or required so that the new construction, alterations, remodeling and related work can be performed and completed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2
SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00: 1. 2. B. Copies of permits and notices authorizing building demolition as may be required by law, including permits to transport and dispose of debris. Shop Drawings: Drawings of temporary structural support locations and calculations sealed by a Structural Engineer registered in the State of Nevada.
Submit project record documents which accurately record actual locations of capped utilities and concealed obstructions.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: 1. 2. 3. B. Specializing in performing the Work required by this Section. Minimum 5 years documented experience. Utilizing workers experienced in disconnecting and capping utilities, if applicable.
Regulatory Requirements 1. 2. 3. Conform to applicable code(s) for demolition of structures, safety of adjacent structures, dust control, runoff control and disposal. Obtain required permits from authorities. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures if hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
1.4
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. No extra compensation will be considered for the coordination work which may be required due to unknown project conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Carefully remove salvageable items such as light fixtures, grilles, doors, hardware, plumbing fixtures, ball washers, trash cans, tee markers and other items which are not specifically indicated for reuse, but which may have salvage value to the Owner. 1. 2. B. C. Demolished materials and equipment shall be stockpiled in an area designated by the Owner, in a manner that the Owner may determine those items which have salvage value to the Owner. Those materials, which are not salvaged by the Owner, shall become the possession of the Contractor and shall be immediately removed from the site.
Carefully remove materials (in whole or in part as required) that are scheduled for reuse. Store and protect for reinstallation the materials identified by the owner. Fill materials at excavations: As specified in Section 31 23 23.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
JMA 127457 Bid Documents: February 18, 2013 02 41 00-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Demolition
Lochsa Engineering
3.1
EXAMINATION A. B. Verify existing conditions and notify the Architect in writing of discrepancies before proceeding with the work. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with the intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the conflict. Promptly submit a written report to the Architect.
3.2
PREPARATION A. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 1. 2. B. C. D. E. F. G. Mark location of utilities. Identify, disconnect, remove and cap designated utilities within demolition areas.
Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices where required and as indicated on drawings. Protect existing landscaping materials, appurtenances, and structures which are not to be demolished. Protect benchmarks and existing work from damage or displacement. Prevent movement or settlement of adjacent structures. Obtain written permission from adjacent property owners when demolition equipment will traverse, infringe upon or limit access to their property. Protection of existing building exterior: 1. 2. 3. Erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings. Maintain exit requirements. Protect from weather openings cut in existing roof for new work, or where existing roofing is removed to allow new construction to join existing. Install temporary deck of exterior grade plywood and wood skids, or other material approved by Architect, for material and personnel traffic over existing roofing, to protect existing roof and surrounding surfaces from damage. Repair damage caused to the roof and other items.
H.
Dustproof Partitions: 1. 2. Erect and maintain as required to prevent spread of dust, fumes and smoke to other parts of the building. On completion, remove partitions and repair damage surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
I.
Roofing Removal: During the removal of the existing parapets and roofing, provide proper protection from falling objects. Maintain interior of building rain and water protection.
3.3
GENERAL DEMOLITION A. Carry out demolition work to cause as little inconvenience to any adjacent occupied building or site areas as possible and with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. Perform the removal, cutting, drilling, etc., of existing work with extreme care, and using small tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building. Shore existing construction whenever existing supports are removed to allow the installation of new work. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority having jurisdiction and Architect. Do not resume operations until directed by Architect.
02 41 00-2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Demolition
B. C. D.
JMA 127457 Bid Documents: February 18, 2013
Lochsa Engineering
E. F. G. H.
Rebuild existing work, which must be removed to allow the installation of new work as, indicated on the Drawings. Perform cutting of existing concrete and masonry with saws and core drills. Do not use jackhammers. Provide hoses and water connections for sprinkling of debris as necessary to limit dust to lowest practicable level. Material Disposal: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Remove materials from site and dispose of in a legal manner at no additional expense to Owner. No materials are to be sold on, or adjacent to, the site. Signs advertising the sale of materials shall not be allowed. Burning of materials on site is not permitted. Break concrete and masonry into sections less than 3 feet in any dimension. Remove from site, contaminated, vermin infested, or dangerous materials encountered and dispose of by safe means so as not to endanger health of workers and public. Debris from the demolition shall not be allowed to accumulate within the building or on the site.
3.4
SELECTIVE INTERIOR DEMOLITION A. B. C. D. Selectively demolish and remove items and materials from the interior of buildings or portions of buildings as indicated. Items, materials or portions of the interior of the buildings that are designated to remain intact shall be protected and carefully worked around during the demolition work. Contaminants from work, which occurs within a single room, may be contained by sealing doors and other openings with duct tape at head, jamb, and sill. Use window exhaust systems to establish negative pressure in contaminant producing work area, ensuring continuous flow of air into work area. Do not open windows in work area except when an exhaust fan is used. Close windows at end of each work shift. Seal exhaust system ductwork, which might leak into building or mechanical systems. Damp mop hard surface floors in work area daily to minimize tracking of contaminants from work area. In carpeted areas, protect carpet with plastic and plywood; provide hardsurfaced area at entrances for daily damp mopping.
E. F.
3.5
STRUCTURE DEMOLITION A. B. C. D. E. Begin demolition at top of building and proceed to lowest basement floor, without using explosives. Demolish structure above each floor level without damaging supporting members on lower levels. Remove foundation walls and footings to a minimum of 2'-0" below finished grade beyond area of new construction. Remove concrete slabs on grade. Empty buried tanks located within demolition area. Remove buried tanks, components, and piping from site. Prior to bidding, verify with Owner if testing for soil contamination is required. Testing and removal of contaminated soil and disposal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Backfill areas excavated and open pits and holes caused as a result of demolition in accordance with Section 31 23 23.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Demolition
F.
02 41 00-3
Lochsa Engineering
G.
Rough grade and compact areas affected by demolition to maintain site grades and contours unless noted otherwise on drawings. END OF SECTION
02 41 00-4
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Demolition
SECTION 02 41 00.10 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 3. Partial demolition and removal of buildings and structures as indicated on Drawings for new Construction. Storage of salvaged materials. Support and shoring of remaining structure as required to maintain structural integrity.
1.02
DEFINITIONS A. B. C. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them offsite unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or recycled. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach items from existing construction and deliver them to location as directed by Owner. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or recycled.
1.03
MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Demolished materials shall become Contractors property and shall be removed from site unless indicated to be reused, salvaged, reinstalled or otherwise remain Owners property.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A. B. Qualification Data: Submit data for demolition firm, professional engineer, and refrigerant recovery technician indicating compliance with requirements. Schedule of Building Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Detailed sequence of demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Interruption of utility services. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. Locations of temporary protection and means of egress. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of adjacent buildings and partial use of premises to ensure uninterrupted Owners operations.
02 41 00.10 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Selective Demolition
C.
Pre-demolition Photographs or Video: Show existing conditions of adjoining construction and site improvements, including finish surfaces that might be misconstrued as damage caused by building demolition operations. Submit a minimum of 5 working days prior to commencing work. Record Drawings: Accurately record and submit actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions and related details. 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical or mechanical conditions.
D.
E. F.
Copies of permits and notices authorizing building demolition as may be required by law, including permits to transport and dispose of debris. Shop Drawings: Drawings of all required temporary structural support locations and calculations sealed by a Structural Engineer registered in the State of Nevada.
1.05
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Demolition Firm Qualifications: An experienced firm having a minimum of 10 years experienced specializing in demolition work similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project. 1. B. Utilizing workers experienced in disconnecting and capping utilities, if applicable Comply with governing regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain required permits from authorities. Conform to applicable regulatory procedures if hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered.
Regulatory Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4.
C. D.
Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6 and NFPA 241. Pre-demolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 01 31 00 - Project Management and Coordination.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. Areas of buildings to be demolished will be vacated and their use discontinued before start of Work. Owner and the Public will occupy buildings immediately adjacent to demolition area. Conduct building demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, exits, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. a. Do not close or obstruct walkways, exits, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.
02 41 00.10 - 2
2. C. 1. D.
Maintain Fire Department access. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.
Owner assumes no responsibility for buildings and structures to be demolished.
Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. 2. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.
E.
Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted except as required for recycling.
1.07
COORDINATION A. Arrange demolition schedule so as not to interfere with Owner's operations.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Repair Materials: Use repair materials identical to existing materials. Where identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used for exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces and whose installed performance equals or surpasses that of existing materials. Submit samples and product data to demonstrate match and performance prior to installation. Temporary Storage: Provide temporary storage facility or location to store items indicated to be salvaged. Storage area shall be of size and capacity to accommodate salvaged items without excessive stacking or crowding of items.
B.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. B. C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of building and utility demolition required. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, utility or structural elements are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of the element. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. Perform an engineering survey of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during building demolition operations.
D.
02 41 00.10 - 3
E.
Verify that hazardous materials have been remediated before proceeding with building demolition operations.
3.02
PREPARATION A. B. Refrigerant: Remove and store refrigerant according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. Existing Utilities: 1. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished. a. b. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. Provide temporary utilities that bypass buildings and structures to be demolished and that maintain continuity of service to other buildings and structures. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed and verified in writing. Remove and recycle refrigerant from air-conditioning equipment before starting demolition.
c.
d. e. 2.
Maintain utility services indicated to remain and protect them against damage during demolition operations. a. Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent occupied or operating.
C.
Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain interior and exterior shoring, bracing, or structural support to preserve stability and prevent unexpected movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of demolition. Clean salvaged items of dirt and demolition debris. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. Transport items to storage area as directed by Owner Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. Removed and Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
D.
3.03
PROTECTION A. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during demolition. When permitted by the Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during demolition and reinstalled in their original locations after demolition operations are complete.
02 41 00.10 - 4
B.
Temporary Protection: Erect temporary protection, such as walks, fences, railings, canopies, and covered passageways, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, and/or as indicated. Comply with requirements in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities and Controls. 1. 2. 3. 4. Protect existing site landscaping to remain. improvements, appurtenances, structures and
Erect a plainly visible fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around building demolition area and to and from occupied portions of adjacent buildings and structures. Protection of existing building exterior: a. b. Erect weatherproof closures for exterior openings. requirements. Maintain exit
5.
Protect walls, windows, roofs, and other adjacent exterior construction that are to remain and that are exposed to building demolition operations.
6.
Erect and maintain dustproof partitions and temporary enclosures to limit dust and dirt migration and to separate areas from fumes and noise from occupied portions of adjacent buildings.
C.
Special Site Conditions: Provide protection to existing walls, flooring, structure and finishes, to prevent damage, chipping, scratching or gauging from construction operations. 1. 2. The Architect shall provide evaluation regarding condition of existing surfaces and finishes. Patching and repairing of existing surfaces will not be permitted without written approval from The Architect. The Architect reserves the right to require removal and replacement of adjacent areas surrounding damaged surfaces to ensure consistent aesthetics at no additional cost to Owner.
3.04
DEMOLITION A. General: Conduct demolition indicated using methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flamecutting operations. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches. Locate building demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.
2. 3.
02 41 00.10 - 5
4.
Perform the removal, cutting, drilling, etc., of existing work with extreme care, and using small tools in order not to jeopardize the structural integrity of the building. Shore existing construction whenever existing supports are removed to allow the installation of new work. Provide additional protection during footing removal. Cease operations immediately if adjacent structures appear to be in danger. Notify authority having jurisdiction and the Architect. Do not resume operations until directed by the Architect. Rebuild existing work which must be removed to allow the installation of new work as indicated on the Drawings. Perform cutting of existing concrete and masonry with saws and core drills. Do not use jack-hammers.
5.
6.
7. 8. B. C.
Engineering Surveys: Perform surveys as the Work progresses to detect hazards that may result from building demolition activities. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debrisremoval operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction or Owner. Provide hoses and water connections for sprinkling and wetting down of debris as necessary to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations. Do not use water when it may damage adjacent construction or create hazardous or objectionable conditions, such as ice, flooding, and pollution.
2.
D.
Proceed with demolition of structural framing members systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete building demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting members on the next lower level. Remove debris from elevated portions by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 1. Remove structural framing members and lower to ground by method suitable to minimize ground impact or dust generation.
E.
F.
Cutting Materials: Cut materials at junctures with construction indicated to remain as follows: 1. 2. Concrete: Cut concrete full depth using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw cuts. Masonry: Cut masonry using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.
02 41 00.10 - 6
3. G. 3.05
Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove.
Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.
SELECTIVE INTERIOR DEMOLITION A. B. Selectively demolish and remove items and materials from the interior of buildings or portions of buildings as indicated. Items, materials or portions of the interior of the buildings that are designated to remain intact shall be protected and carefully worked around during the demolition work. Contaminants from work which occurs within a single room may be contained by closing registers, sealing doors and other openings with duct tape at head, jamb, and sill. Use window exhaust systems to establish negative pressure in contaminantproducing work area, ensuring continuous flow of air into work area. Do not open windows in work area except when an exhaust fan is used. Close windows at end of each work shift. 1. E. F. Locations without windows: Provide mechanical system to ensure continuous flow of air into work area.
C.
D.
Seal exhaust system ductwork which might leak into building or mechanical systems. Damp mop hard surface floors in work area daily to minimize tracking of contaminants from work area. In carpeted areas, protect carpet with plastic and plywood; provide hard-surfaced area at entrances for daily damp mopping.
3.06
CLEARING AND GRUBBING A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. 2. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches (450 mm) below exposed subgrade. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
3. 4.
02 41 00.10 - 7
3.07
SITE RESTORATION A. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition and removal operations with satisfactory soil materials as required for new construction. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.
B.
3.08
REPAIRS A. B. C. General: Promptly repair damage to adjacent construction caused by building demolition operations. Where repairs to existing surfaces are required, patch to produce surfaces suitable for new materials. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining construction in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching and refinishing.
3.09
DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. 2. B. C. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.
Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally disposed of them.
3.10
CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by building demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began. END OF SECTION
02 41 00.10 - 8
SECTION 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1. 1.01 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. 1.02 Formwork for cast-in place concrete, with shoring, bracing and anchorage. Openings for other work. Form accessories. Form stripping.
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. Section 03 20 00 - Concrete Reinforcement. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.03
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American Concrete Institute International. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete and Commentary; American Concrete Institute International. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete; American Concrete Institute International. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood; National Institute of Standards and Technology (Department of Commerce).
1.04
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Design, engineer and construct formwork, shoring and bracing to conform to design and code requirements; resultant concrete to conform to required shape, line and dimension. Design and fabricate forms to support all applied loads until concrete is cured, and for easy removal without damage to concrete.
B.
1.05
SUBMITTALS A. Not used.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work of this section in accordance with ACI 347R, ACI 301, and ACI 318.
03 10 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Concrete Formwork
B.
Design formwork under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of concrete formwork and licensed in Nevada.
1.07
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for design, fabrication, erection and removal of formwork.
1.08
AIR QUALITY REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 06 00 - Safety and Environmental Requirements, as they are applicable to the work of this section, and as though they are repeated verbatim herein.
1.09
MOCK-UP A. Not used.
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. B. Deliver form materials and installation instructions in manufacturer's packaging. Store forms off ground in ventilated and protected manner to prevent deterioration from moisture or damage.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS WOOD FORM MATERIALS A. B. C. D. Form Materials: At the discretion of the Contractor to achieve design requirements and specified finishes. Softwood Plywood: PS 1, B-B High Density Concrete Form Overlay, Class I. Plywood: Douglas Fir species; solid one side grade; sound undamaged sheets with clean, true edges. Lumber: Douglas Fir species; structural grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
2.02
PREFABRICATED FORMS A. Preformed Steel Forms: Minimum 16 gauge well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. Glass Fiber Fabric Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and Grade 1 Architectural finish appearance of finished concrete surfaces. Pan Type: Steel, glass fiber, removable of size and profile required.
B.
C.
03 10 00 - 2
2.03
FORMWORK ACCESSORIES A. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off type, galvanized metal, fixed or adjustable length, cone type, with waterproofing washer, 1 inch back break dimension, free of defects that could leave holes larger than 1-1/4 inch in concrete surface. Provide plugs acceptable to Architect to seal holes exposed to view. Form Release Agent: Colorless material that will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, impair natural bonding of concrete finish coatings, or effect color characteristics of concrete finish coatings. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. C. D. E. Debond Form Coating as manufactured by L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc. Crete Lease 880 as manufactured by Cresset Chemical. Nox-Crete as manufactured by Nox-Chem. Clean strip Ultra J-3 VOC by Dayton Superior.
B.
Corners: Chamfered, inch, wood strip type; maximum possible lengths. Dovetail Anchor Slot: Galvanized steel, minimum 14 gage thick, foam filled, release tape sealed slots, anchors for securing to concrete formwork. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required, of sufficient strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verify lines, levels and centers before proceeding with formwork. Ensure that dimensions agree with drawings.
3.02
EARTH FORMS A. B. Earth forms may be permitted in accordance with Geotechnical report. Hand trim sides and bottom of earth forms. Remove loose soil prior to placing concrete.
3.03
ERECTION - FORMWORK A. B. C. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with requirements of ACI 301. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Shore or strengthen formwork subject to overstressing by construction loads. Coordinate placement of joint devices with erection of concrete formwork and placement of form accessories.
03 10 00 - 3
D. E. F. G. H. I. J. 3.04
Arrange and assemble formwork to permit dismantling and stripping. Do not damage concrete during stripping. Align joints and make watertight. Keep form joints to a minimum. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members that are not indicated on drawings. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of beams, joists, columns, and walls where shown on architectural drawings. Coordinate this section with other sections of work that require attachment of components to formwork. Formwork placed after reinforcement shall result in sufficient concrete cover over reinforcement. Formliners shall be installed in accordance with manfacturers printed instructions.
APPLICATION - FORM RELEASE AGENT A. B. C. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Apply prior to placement of reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces will receive special finishes or applied coverings that are affected by agent. Soak inside surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces coated prior to placement of concrete.
3.05
INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. B. C. Provide formed openings where required for items to be embedded in or passing through concrete work. Locate and set in place items that will be cast directly into concrete. Coordinate with work of other sections in forming and placing openings, slots, reglets, recesses, sleeves, bolts, anchors, other inserts, and components of other work. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are straight, level, and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. Install waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so they are continuous without displacing reinforcement. Heat seal joints so they are watertight. Provide temporary ports or openings in formwork where required to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain.
D.
E.
F.
03 10 00 - 4
G. H.
Close temporary openings with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, and neatly fitted so joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. Submit proposed form joints and tie locations to architect for review at surfaces exposed in final structure. Provide sample of plugs for tieholes to architect for review. Install plugs using permanent adhesive.
3.06
FORM CLEANING A. B. Clean forms as erection proceeds, to remove foreign matter within forms. Clean formed cavities of debris prior to placing concrete. 1. Flush with water or use compressed air to remove remaining foreign matter. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
3.07
FORMWORK TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances required by ACI 301.
3.08
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. A testing agency will be required to perform field quality control tests, as specified in Section 01 40 00. Inspect erected formwork, shoring, and bracing to ensure that work is in accordance with formwork design, and to verify that supports, fastenings, wedges, ties, and items are secure.
3.09
FORM REMOVAL A. B. Notify Owners Project Manager prior to removing formwork. Do not remove forms or bracing until concrete has gained sufficient strength to carry its own weight and imposed loads. Remove load supporting forms when concrete has attained 75% of required 28 day compressive strength, provided construction is reshored. Reshore structural members due to design requirements or construction conditions to permit successive construction. Loosen forms carefully. Do not wedge pry bars, hammers, or tools against finish concrete surfaces scheduled for exposure to view. Store removed forms to prevent damage to form materials or to fresh concrete. Discard damaged forms. Remove formwork in same sequence as concrete placement to achieve similar concrete surface coloration. END OF SECTION
C. D. E. F.
03 10 00 - 5
DeSimone Consulting Engineers Project Number 5740
Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete
Section 03300 Cast-in-Place Concrete PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, conditions of the Contract (including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions), Division 1 Specification Sections and all other Contract Documents apply to work of this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of cast-in-place concrete is indicated on the Drawings, including layout and sizes of members, type and strength of concrete, reinforcing and accessories. B. Provide all plants, labor, tools, materials, equipment, appliances, hoists, services and related work as indicated on the Drawings, specified in this Section, and required by job conditions. C. The work shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. All cast-in-place concrete, including: Footings, piers, pile caps, mats, slabs on ground, pits, encasement of steel beams and columns, walls, columns, beams, slabs on steel deck, formed slabs, stairs and landings, fill and topping slabs, bases and platforms for equipment, and encasement of conduit. Furnishing, fabrication, and placing of all reinforcing bars, wire mesh, stud rails, and reinforcing supports. The design, supply, installation, and removal of all necessary formwork, bracing, shoring and reshoring. Left-in-place metal formwork. All appliances, equipment, scaffolding, runways, chutes, tremies, forms, form coatings, materials and apparatus for placing, protecting, curing and finishing concrete. The proper installation of anchor bolts and other embedded items specified under other sections and other specifications. Grouting of column and beam base plates. Porous fill and vapor barriers under slabs on ground. Waterstops and keys. Expansion, contraction (control), and construction joints. Beam and column pockets, boxed openings, reglets, sleeves, openings, depressions, and the like. Finishing and treatment of exposed concrete floors and stairs, plugging and finishing of form tie holes, and finishing of concrete exposed to view or to receive other materials. Assistance and coordination for quality assurance and quality control. Designing and testing of concrete mixes. Submission of shop drawings, samples, mill certificates and all other supporting data for cement, admixtures, aggregates, reinforcing steel, compounds and other
2. 3. 4. 5.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12.
13. 14. 15.
Foundation For Independent Tomorrow BID Documents Las Vegas, NV
Page 1 of 36 2/18/2013
accessories. 16. All other materials labor and services required to complete the work.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Division 1 Sections. B. Shoring and Underpinning Division 2 Sections. C. Earthwork - Division 2 Sections. D. Prestressed Precast Concrete Piles Section 02360. E. Augered Pressure Grouted Piles Section 02370. F. Precast Concrete Hollow Core Plank and Double Tees - Section 03400.
G. Precast Concrete Composite Concrete Deck Section 03410. H. Precast Concrete Keystone Joists and Soffit Beams Section 03420. I. J. Post-Tensioned Concrete Section 03470. Masonry - Division 4 Sections.
K. Structural Steel - Section 05100. L. Steel Joists and Joist Girders - Section 05200.
M. Metal Deck and Stud Shear Connectors Section 05300. N. Metal Fabrications - Section 05500. O. Waterproofing Division 7 Sections. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) 2009. B. The following abbreviations are defined for use in this Specification: 1. 2. 3. 4. ACI: American Concrete Institute. ASTM: American Society for Testing and Materials. Specifications cited shall be the latest edition listed in the Index of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards. CRSI: Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. AASHTO: American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
C. The following codes, specifications, and standards shall apply to the work. Where conflicts among codes, standards, and specifications exist, the one having the most stringent requirements shall govern. In ACI publications, the advisory provisions shall be considered to be mandatory, as though the word "shall" has been substituted for "should" wherever it appears. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete, ACI 318-05. Specifications for Structural Concrete, ACI 301-05. Hot Weather Concreting, ACI 305R-99, Reapproved 1997. Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting, ACI 306.1-90, Reapproved 2002. Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight and Mass Concrete, ACI 211.1-91, Reapproved 2002.
Page 2 of 36 2/18/2013
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Structural Lightweight Concrete, ACI 211.2-98, Reapproved 2004. * Recommended Practice for Evaluation of Strength Test Results of Concrete, ACI 214 Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete, ACI 304R Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods, ACI 304.2R-96. Batching, Mixing, and Job Control of Lightweight Concrete, ACI 304.5R-91, Reapproved 1997. Guide for Consolidation of Concrete, ACI 309R-05. Standard Practice for Curing Concrete, ACI 308-98. Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction, ACI 302.1R-04. Guide to Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete Practice, ACI 303R-04. ACI Detailing Manual - 2004, SP-66(04) (Includes ACI 315 and ACI 315R). Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials, ACI 117-06, with footnotes referring to buildings over 100 feet in height deleted. Tolerances given in ACI 117 shall apply throughout the full height of the building. Guide to Formwork for Concrete, ACI 347R-04. Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4-98. CRSI Manual of Standard Practice, 27th edition, 2001, by the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Standard Method of Test for Water Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete Using Microwave Oven Drying, by AASHTO T 318-02.
17. 18. 19. 20.
D. Work of this Section shall conform to all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data and Samples: Submit samples and manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the following products to the Architect for acceptance prior to the start of any work. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Waterstops. Vapor barriers. Joint fillers. Curing, feathering repair and bonding compounds. Non-shrink grout and grout for post-tensioning steel. Admixtures. Synthetic fiber reinforcement. Any other manufactured products specified under Part 2 - Products.
B. Mill Certificates: Submit to Testing Agency and Architect certified copies of mill test reports for all steel reinforcement, including bars, welded wire fabric, stud rails, prestressing bars and strands. C. Concrete Mix Designs: Submit proposed concrete mix designs for each type of concrete as required in Part 1.06 - Concrete Mix Design - of this Section for acceptance by the
Foundation For Independent Tomorrow BID Documents Las Vegas, NV Page 3 of 36 2/18/2013
Architect at least three weeks prior to the start of any concrete work. Reports shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Nevada and experienced in the design and testing of concrete mixes. The reports shall be made on the mix design submittal form included at the end of this specification, or with a similar format. 1. Reports for each mix shall include: a. Source and type of each cement, including results of chemical and physical tests, if requested by Architect. b. Complete identification of source of supply for each type of aggregate. c. Results of tests of aggregates for compliance with specified requirements, if requested by Architect. d. Scale weight of each aggregate. e. Absorbed water in each aggregate. f. Brand, type and amount per cubic yard of each admixture used (including synthetic fiber reinforcement).
g. Amount of free water used per cubic yard. h. Proportions of each material per cubic yard. i. j. k. l. Gross weight per cubic foot. Measured slump. Water/cementitious materials ratio, by weight. Total air content, by percent.
m. Water soluble ion chloride content, percent by weight of cement, if maximum is specified in this Section. n. Compressive strength at seven and 28 days, from not less than two cylinders at seven days and not less than three at 28 days, for at least three different water/cement ratios. o. Complete standard deviation analysis or trial mix test data. 2. If requested by Architect, submit manufacturer or suppliers certificates of conformance to applicable standards for each ingredient.
D. Deviations: Requests for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications shall be submitted on Contractors letterhead. Acceptance of shop drawings including deviations not detected during shop drawing review will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to conform strictly to the Contract Documents. Deviations will be allowed only where permitted by Architect in writing. Proposed deviations must be accompanied by documented and physical evidence, which will establish that its quality equals or exceeds the quality specified. E. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Architect for acceptance in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit shop drawings for: a. All steel reinforcing bars, welded wire fabric, and stud rails. b. Pan joist and waffle slab formwork layout. c. Formwork, shoring and reshoring.
2.
Shop drawings shall conform to the highest standards of the construction industry. Include enough plans, elevations, sections and details at adequate scale to completely describe all work to be provided. All detailing work shall be in accordance with ACI 315 and shall be not less complete than examples given in ACI SP-04. Submit shop drawings to Architect in coordinated packages so that all required information is in hand at time of review. Prior to resubmission of shop drawings, all changes from prior issue shall be clearly circled and identified. Do not fabricate before shop drawings have been reviewed and returned to Contractor marked "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted" only. Contractor shall coordinate and cross-check for accuracy, completeness and correct relationship to the work of other sections, each shop drawing prepared for the work of this Section, including each shop drawing prepared by accepted subcontractors. Show and dimension holes required for passage of work of other sections through cast-in-place concrete. Architect's review of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor from these responsibilities. Prior to sending submittals to Architect, Contractor and Construction Manager (if applicable) shall coordinate and cross-check for accuracy and completeness each shop drawing prepared for work of this Section with the approved Construction Documents and Specifications. Shop drawings shall bear the stamp of Contractor and Construction Manager indicating that this review has been performed. Architect will not review submittals for which Contractor and Construction Manager have not performed this review. Reinforcing detail drawings shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. Setting plans, wall elevations, detailed bending diagrams, cutting lists and other information so as to completely demonstrate the location, spacing, size, length, bending, shape of all reinforcing steel, and position and length of all splices. b. The yield strength and ASTM designation of all reinforcing. c. All control, expansion and construction joints including keys and waterstops. d. Cover for reinforcing, indicated and shown on every shop drawing. e. Wall reinforcing detailed on wall elevations, not on plans. f. Separate top and bottom bar plans for slabs, with schedules attached. Loose 8.5 x 11 schedules are not allowed.
3.
4.
5.
6.
g. All openings, depressions, trenches, sleeves, embedded inserts and any other project requirements affecting reinforcing details and placing. h. Type, size and location of all metal and plastic accessories required for the proper assembling, placing and support of the reinforcement. 7. Reinforcing steel shop drawings must provide all information, sections, details and marks so that reinforcing steel can be easily placed without the use of any other drawings or information. Reproduction of Structural Drawings, in entirety or part, for use as shop drawing is not permitted. Detail reinforcing steel for curbs, pads, trenches, openings and the like from information given in Architectural, HVAC, Plumbing, Electrical and other Contract Documents. Provide all reinforcement shown or scheduled in the Drawings, including that
Page 5 of 36 2/18/2013
8.
9.
required by typical details and general notes, but not less than required by ACI Code minimums. 10. Detailing of reinforcement shall consider the arrangement, shape and size of individual bars, including hooks and lap splices, so as to preclude interference between bars, and embedded items and to provide clear spacing and concrete cover as required by ACI 318. Provide placing sequence information when required to properly install reinforcement in the field. Provide enough sections and enlarged details, whether they are given on Structural Drawings or not, to fully illustrate placement locations. Fieldwork drawings shall be submitted for review of and acceptance for all work required to accommodate field conditions. Submit formwork, shoring and reshoring drawings signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer licensed in the State of Nevada. These drawings will not be reviewed by the Architect. The submittal requirement is solely to insure that these items have been designed by a licensed Professional Engineer.
11. 12.
F.
Protective Measures: Submit hot and cold weather concreting procedures prior to start of any work. Including cold weather heating systems, enclosures, insulation, curing procedures and the like. Procedures shall be reviewed at a preconstruction conference.
1.06 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN: A. General: Contractor shall employ a consultant, acceptable to the Engineer, hereinafter called the "Concrete Consultant", to prepare concrete mix designs from representative samples of the materials to be used to produce the concrete for each "type" of concrete required. 1. A new "type" of concrete exists whenever any one or more of the following parameters change: a. Source or kind of any ingredient. b. Type or source of cement. c. Design strength. d. Proportioning of ingredients. e. Placing method (pumping vs. gravity). 2. The Concrete Consultant shall design or verify mixes for each "type" of concrete in accordance with the trial mixture method or field experience method of ACI 318 Article 5.3. Test results of trial mixes shall be submitted to Engineer for acceptance prior to concreting. Each mix shall clearly state the location where mix is to be used. The proportion of ingredients shall be selected by the Concrete Consultant to produce proper placeability, durability, strength, and to produce a mixture which will work readily into the corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement by methods of placement and consolidation employed on the work, but without permitting materials to segregate or permitting excessive free water to collect on surface. Comply with recommendations of ACI 211.1, 211.2 and 302.1R. When a source, type, kind or brand of each constituent has been established and approved for the project mixes, it shall not be changed throughout the duration of the concreting. Batch all constituents including admixtures at the central batch plant.
3.
4.
B. Admixtures: Concrete mixes with admixture dosages exceeding 64 ounces per cubic yard
Page 6 of 36 2/18/2013
of concrete shall have free water content of concrete mix reduced by aqueous portion of admixtures in order to adhere to water-to-cementitious ratio requirements. 1. 2. A water-reducing admixture or high-range water reducing admixture shall be used in all mix designs. A high-range, water-reducing admixture shall be used when any of the conditions below apply. Minimum slump shall be 6 inches, maximum slump 10 inches for conventional concrete. Self-Consolidating concrete shall have a slump/flow of 20 to 30. a. Water-to-cementitious ratio is 0.45 or less, architectural concrete, selfconsolidating concrete, and synthetic fiber concrete. b. Concrete is to be pumped. c. When requested by the Contractor and accepted by the Architect in concrete mix design. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. An air-entraining admixture shall be used in all mix designs for concrete subject to freezing and thawing. A water-reducing, retarding admixture shall be used when concrete is to be placed during hot weather as defined by ACI 305R. Fly ash shall be used as an admixture for all lightweight concrete to be pumped. A non-corrosive accelerator shall be used when concrete is to be placed during cold weather as defined by ACI 306.1. Synthetic macro fiber reinforcement shall be used where called for on the Drawings and when requested by Contractor and accepted by the Architect. Unless noted otherwise on the Drawings, or otherwise recommended by the manufacturer, dosage rate shall be 1-1/4 pounds per cubic yard.
C. Mix Requirements: Concrete mixes shall be designed to provide for all of the requirements given in this Specification and on the Drawings even if strength or any other criteria must be exceeded to meet another criteria. 1. Strength requirements given on the Drawings shall be based on 28-day compressive strength for Type I and II cement and 7-day for Type III, unless a different test age is specified. Lightweight concrete shall have a maximum air-dry unit weight as noted on the Drawings, measured in accordance with ASTM C567, a minimum cement content (per cubic yard) of 560 pounds for pump mixes and 520 pounds for other mixes, and a maximum water-to-cement ratio of 0.50 by weight. Normal weight concrete shall have a maximum water-to-cementitious ratio, by weight, of 0.50 and a minimum strength of 4000 psi @ 28 days. * Concrete to be exposed to deicing salts, to brackish water, or to salt laden air in service shall have a maximum water-to-cement ratio, by weight, of 0.40, a minimum strength of 5000 psi, a minimum cement content of 650 pounds per cubic yard, air entrainment, Type II cement, and a maximum water soluble chloride ion content of 0.15 percent by weight of cement. All concrete required to be watertight shall have a maximum water-to-cement ratio, by weight, of 0.45 and a minimum strength of 4500 psi. All trowel finished interior slabs subjected to vehicular traffic, shall have a maximum water-to-cement ratio, by weight, of 0.53 and a maximum air content of 3% (no air
Page 7 of 36 2/18/2013
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
entraining admixture used). 7. 8. 9. Provide pea gravel aggregate concrete for all sections thinner than 6 inches, and where required due to congestion of reinforcing steel. Concrete mixes to be exposed to earth or weather shall have a maximum water soluble chloride ion content of 0.30 percent by weight of cement. All normal weight concrete subject to freezing and thawing shall contain 4% minimum to 7% maximum total air content. All light weight concrete shall contain 5% total air content. The allowable tolerance shall be plus or minus 1 % of the air content indicated in the mix design.
1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent Testing Agency acceptable to the Architect. Agency shall meet the requirements of ASTM C1077 and ASTM E329. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Testing Agency and Architect with proper notice of the initiation of each phase and portion of work requiring testing or inspection. Written notice of commencement date shall be provided at least 5 working days prior to the start of shop work and the start of field work. Subsequently, Contractor shall give a minimum of 24 hours verbal notice of work, or completion of work as applicable requiring inspection and/or testing. Contractor shall furnish Testing Agency with the following: a. A complete set of all current Construction Documents and Specifications. b. A complete set of accepted Shop Drawings. c. Cutting, order and shipping lists for reinforcing. d. Concrete placing schedules. e. Full and ample means and assistance for testing materials and proper facilities for inspection of the work in the mill, shop, batch plant and field. f. 3. On-site storage facilities complying to ACI and ASTM requirements.
2.
Testing Agency may inspect and test materials and work at the source before shipment as well as at the site before, during or at any time after installation. Deficient or incomplete work or materials shall be corrected or replaced, as directed by the Architect, without additional costs or delays to the Owner. The Testing Agency shall report directly to the Owner and Architect the results of all testing and inspection by means of daily written reports. When any test or inspection reveals deficient or nonconforming work, Testing Agency shall notify Owner and Architect immediately by means of a written report specially and clearly marked and identified to show deficient areas of work. Performance or waiving of inspection, testing or surveillance by Testing Agency for a given portion of the work will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to conform strictly to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where additional tests are deemed necessary by Architect due to failure to pass tests, the cost of additional testing will be deducted from payments to Contractor. If, due to errors by the contractor or failure to perform his work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Architect must perform additional design or drafting work or review proposed solutions, the Contractor shall, through the Owner,
4.
5.
6. 7.
Page 8 of 36 2/18/2013
reimburse the Architect in accordance with the Architect's current fee schedule, plus out of pocket expenses incurred. B. Inspection and Control: Testing Agency shall perform inspecting and control as required by the IBC 2009, and as specified herein. Services shall include, but not be limited to: 1. Control of concrete at the batching plant, including tests of materials for moisture, gradation and cleanliness; and determination and recording of all mixture quantities and water/cement ratios. Verify that quantities and materials conform to the accepted trial mixes, adjusted for moisture content of aggregates. Inspection of all reinforcing; verifying size, number, spacing, location, splices, support, wiring, etc. of all reinforcing bars, mesh, and stud rails. The location and installation details of reinforcing and prestressing steel shall be inspected for compliance with the approved Construction Documents and ACI 318. Inspections shall be made only with shop drawings bearing the Architect's stamp and marked "No Exception Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted" only. Verification of sizes and thickness of structural members, such as slab and wall thickness, beam and column dimensions, etc. Layout, alignment, plumbness, etc. are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Inspection of all concrete placing, finishing, and curing operations. Testing Agency shall verify that all concrete forms and reinforcing are clean and free of dirt and debris at time of pour and that concrete is properly deposited, consolidated, finished and cured. Placement and location of embedded items such as sleeves, inserts, railings, etc. is the responsibility of the Contractor and Construction Manager.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C. Testing: Testing Agency shall perform tests as follows for the entire duration of work. Methods of tests shall in all cases comply in detail with latest applicable ACI and ASTM requirements and the IBC 2009. Tests shall be made by an ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician Grade 1 or equivalent. 1. 2. General: Sampling of fresh concrete shall comply with ASTM C172. Shall be taken of concrete as specified herein. Slump: Testing shall comply with ASTM C143. Test every time compressive strength cylinders are taken. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed. When a high-range, water reducing admixture is being used, slump tests shall be made before and after the admixture is added. The results of such tests shall be included in the Testing Agency's written reports. Air Content: Testing shall comply with ASTM C173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete or ASTM C231, pressure method for normal weight concrete. Air content must be verified by unit weight tests. Test every time compressive strength cylinders are taken. The results of such tests shall be included in the Testing Agency's written reports. Concrete Temperature: Test at discharge from every truck when air temperature is 40 degrees F (4 deg C) and below, and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above. Otherwise test every time compressive strength cylinders are taken. The results of such tests shall be included in the Testing Agency's written reports. Compression Strength Tests: Test cylinders shall be made, taken, cured and tested in accordance with ASTM C172, C31 and C39 as applicable. a. Sets of test cylinders shall be taken at the mixer at intervals specified herein. Samples shall be laboratory cured unless otherwise directed by Architect. Test
3.
4.
5.
one cylinder at seven days for information, two at 28 days for acceptance, and one shall be retained for testing at 56 days if required. In addition, when intermediate conveyance is be used to place the concrete, one additional set of cylinders shall be taken for each 150 cubic yards or fraction thereof for each type of concrete placed in any one days concreting. These test cylinders shall be separate and distinct from those made in the mixer and shall be made in the same batch and cured and tested in the same manner as the samples taken from the mixer. b. Cylinder sets shall be taken for each type of concrete poured each day, but not less than one set for each 100 cubic yards, nor less than one set for each 5000 square feet of surface area for walls or slabs. Additional sets shall be taken when requested by Architect. c. When frequency given above would provide less than five cylinder sets for a given type of concrete, sets shall be made from at least five randomly selected trucks or from each truck if fewer than five trucks are used. d. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equals or exceeds the specified compressive strength, and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 PSI. A strength test is the average of two cylinders tested at design age of concrete. e. Test reports shall include name of Testing Agency and project, date of concrete placement, type of concrete, exact location of concrete batch in structure and results of seven and 28 day tests and shall be specially marked to clearly identify any and all results falling below specified strength. f. Additional tests may be performed by the Testing Agency on in-place concrete if compressive tests or inspection or observation by Architect reveals nonconforming work or practices. Cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42 or other methods directed by Architect may be used. Contractor shall pay for such tests.
6.
Grout shall be tested for compressive strength in accordance with ASTM C1107. Nine 2 inch cubes shall be taken each day grout is being placed and 3 cubes tested at 3, 7 and 28 days. When requested by Architect, furnish test data indicating grout placed at a fluid consistency achieves 95% bearing under an 18 x 36 base plate. Tests for water soluble ion chloride content shall be made in accordance with ASTM C114 for concrete that has a maximum chloride ion content specified in this Specification. Test every time compressive strength cylinders are taken. The results of such tests shall be included in the Testing Agency's written reports. Cement Cube Strength Tests: For concrete with a design strength of more than 4 ksi, cement samples shall be taken directly from the hopper at the batching plant and tested in accordance with ASTM C109. a. Samples shall be taken randomly, in quantities directed by the Architect, throughout the project at each shipments of bulk cement and at additional times as directed by the Architect.
7.
8.
9.
Microwave Testing: Test water / cementitious materials ratio with Microwave test per AASHTO T318 as directed by Architect. Tests to be performed daily during placement of parking decks and ramps and other concrete with a w/cm of 0.40 or less. *
1.08 QUALITY CONTROL

A. General: Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents and note any discrepancies and special construction problems requiring close coordination and exact time schedules; assume the responsibility of same and administer action such that the proper solution will result. 1. 2. Contractor's material control procedures shall be effective and shall assure that all work fulfills the requirements of applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall maintain, on staff, sufficient office, field engineering, and field supervision staff to assure that all data and layout drawings for work of other Sections is transmitted to detailers to allow proper detailing of holes, penetrations, chases, and the like and to assure proper execution of the work in the field. Perform quality control functions required to achieve and to document that work conforms to the Contract Documents. Provide access to Contractor's quality control documents and reports upon request of Owner, Engineer, Architect or Testing Agency. Provide reasonable numbers of photocopies of specific quality control reports on request. Contractor and Construction Manager shall coordinate and schedule the work of this Section with the work of other Sections of this Specification in order to optimize quality and to avoid delay in overall job progress. Prior to starting applicable phases of the work of this Section (i.e., shop drawings, formwork, reinforcing steel fabrication and placement, concrete placement, etc.), Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with each trade affected by the work of this Section, including areas where work of other Specification Sections joins or relates to work of this Section. Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or nonconforming conditions to Architect in writing prior to the start of work. Construction loads shall not exceed the superimposed load, which the member, with necessary supplemental support, is capable of carrying safely and without damage. The amount, method of distribution, and proposed supplemental support of loads during construction shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B. Qualifications: Throughout the progress of the work of this section, provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly familiar with the Construction Documents and other applicable specified requirements, completely trained and experienced in the necessary skills, and who shall be present at the site and shall direct all work performed under this Section. 1. 2. In actual installation of the work of this Section, use adequate numbers of skilled workmen to ensure installation in strict accordance with the approved design. In acceptance or rejection of work performed under this Section, no allowance will be made for the lack of skill on the part of workmen.
C. Formwork Design: Design and engineering of formwork, as well as its construction and inspection, shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Design, construct, erect, support, brace, maintain and remove forms in conformance with the requirements of ACI 318, Chapter 6 and ACI 347R for loads, lateral pressure, and allowable stresses, in addition to other design parameters such as wind loads. All forms shall be sound, clean and sturdy enough to maintain true planes as shown on the Drawings, within the tolerances recommended in ACI 117 and as specified herein.
2.
D. Cold Weather: When casting concrete in cold weather, plans to protect the concrete
from freezing shall be made in advance and shall be in accordance with ACI 306.1. All materials and equipment to protect the concrete shall be on site before the first frost is likely to occur, not after the concrete has been placed. The Contractor is responsible for ensuring the proper planning for cold weather concreting. 1.09 MEASUREMENTS AND TOLERANCES A. Measurements: Lay out each part of the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. Precise measurements and layout are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. B. Obtain all field measurements required for proper detailing, fabrication and installation of the work. Field verify all dimensions and locations of existing conditions shown on the Contract Documents. Where discrepancies exist, notify Architect in writing, and by sketch when applicable, of discrepancies and proposed solutions to correct discrepancies. C. Tolerances for Slab Finishes: Refer to Part 3 of this specification for requirements. D. Tolerances for Formed Surfaces: Unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings, conform to the requirements given below or as given in ACI 117, whichever is more stringent. All tolerances shall apply to the full height of the building. Variations from grade shall be measured prior to removal of formwork. 1. Variation from plumb: a. In the lines and surfaces of columns, piers, walls, corners and the like: i) ii) In any 10 ft. of length Maximum for the entire height 1/4 in. 1 in.
b. For exposed corner columns, control-joint grooves, and other conspicuous lines: i) ii) 2. Alignment: a. At slab and/or beam, alignment of columns or walls above and below: i) 3. Maximum offset 1/4 in. In any 20 ft. of length Maximum for the entire height 1/4 in. 1/2 in.
Variation from level or specified grades and elevations: a. In slab, beam and girder soffits and the like: i) ii) In any 10 ft. length 1/4 in.
In any bay or in any 20 ft. length 3/8 in. 3/4 in.
iii) Maximum for the entire length
b. In exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other conspicuous lines: i) ii) 4. In any bay or in 20 ft. length Maximum for the entire length 1/4 in. 1/2 in.
Variation of building lines from theoretical positions in plan and related positions of columns, walls, piers and the like: i) ii) In any bay In any 20 ft. length 1/4 in. 1/4 in.
Page 12 of 36 2/18/2013
iii) Maximum for the entire length 5. Sleeves, wall openings and floor openings: i) ii) 6. Variation in size Variation in location
1/2 in.
1/4 in. 1/2 in.
Variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and beams and in thickness of slabs and walls: i) ii) Minus Plus 1/4 in. 1/2 in.
7.
Variation in the location of anchors and inserts shown in accepted shop drawings, unless more stringent tolerances are required for work of other Sections: i) ii) Vertically Horizontally 3/8 in. 1/4 in.
8.
Faces of formed slab edges, turned down spandrels, and parapets shall not deviate from theoretical position or alignment by more than the distance in consideration divided by 500 or by 1/2 inch, whichever is less. Footings: a. Variations in dimensions in plan: i) ii) Minus Plus 1/2 in. 2 in.
9.
b. Misplacement or eccentricity: i) 2 percent of the footing width in direction of misplacement but not more than 2 in.
c. Thickness: i) ii) Decrease in specified thickness Increase in specified thickness 5 percent No limit
d. Elevation at steel bearing plates: i) ii) 10. Plus Minus 1/4 in. 1/4 in.
Variation in stair dimensions: a. In a flight of stairs: i) ii) Rise Run 1/8 in. 1/4 in.
b. In consecutive steps: i) ii) Riser Tread 1/16 in. 1/8 in.
E. Fabricating and Placing Tolerances for Reinforcement: Bars used for concrete reinforcement shall be fabricated in accordance with the fabricating tolerances given in ACI 315 and placed in accordance with tolerances given in ACI 318, Chapter 7, or
Page 13 of 36 2/18/2013
provided herein, whichever is more stringent. 1. Bars shall be placed to the following tolerances: a. Clear distance to formed surfaces: b. Minimum spacing between bars: c. Top bars in slabs and beams: i) ii) Members 8 in. deep or less: + 1/4 in. + 1/2 in. + 1/4 in. + 1/4 in.
Members more than 8 in. but not over 2 feet deep:
d. Crosswise of members: spaced evenly within 2 in. e. Lengthwise of members: 2. + 2 in.
Bars may be moved as necessary to avoid interference with other reinforcing steel, conduits, or embedded items. If bars are moved more than one bar diameter, or enough to exceed the above tolerances, the resulting arrangement of bars shall be subject to acceptance by the Architect.
1.10 PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS A. The Contractor shall report in writing to the Architect any discrepancies between the design drawings and the existing site conditions. B. The Contractor shall field verify all information related to existing conditions such as: Surrounding structures, underground utilities and any other conditions that may exist. C. The Contractor shall survey surrounding structures to obtain information such as: Elevation of existing footings, bearing walls, water supply, sewage, utility piping and other utilities installations which may interfere with the construction. D. The Contractor shall obtain the pertaining information described above before starting a particular phase of work. E. Examine the substrata and the conditions under which the concrete is to be installed, and notify the Engineer in writing of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work until the unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. F. All concrete work shall be properly protected during casting against freezing, excessive heat, acid rain or any other environmental destructive agent. Completed work shall be covered temporarily, permanently or as required. Protect adjacent finish materials against spatter during concrete placing.
G. The Contractor shall comply with any and all federal, state and local environmental code requirements. H. Descriptions of, or limitations on, sequences of construction given in the Contract Documents are intended to assist the Contractor. Descriptions or limitations given are not by any means intended to fully describe construction limitations, sequence or techniques, nor preclude use of other methods if accepted by Architect in writing. Whether or not Contractor follows the limitations and descriptions given herein, Contractor remains fully responsible for both the stability and the safety of the work; adherence to the limitations described herein does not relieve the Contractor from that responsibility. 1.11 DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING: A. Materials and products shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging bearing labels as to type of material, brand name and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials shall be identical to accepted samples.
Page 14 of 36 2/18/2013
B. Materials and products shall be handled in a workmanship like manner per manufacturer's specifications. Storage shall be under cover in dry, weathertight, ventilated and clean locations off the ground. C. Protect reinforcing steel and mesh from scaling, oil, grease and distortion. Reinforcing steel and mesh that has rusted to the extent of scaling will be rejected and may be placed in the work only after proper cleaning and approval by the Testing Agency. D. Storage of ingredients for concrete: 1. 2. Cement shall be stored in weathertight containers. Aggregate stockpiles shall be arranged and used in a manner to avoid excessive segregation and to prevent contamination with other materials or with other sizes of like aggregates. To ensure that this condition is met, any test for determining conformance to requirements for cleanliness and grading shall be performed on samples secured from the aggregates at the point of batching. Frozen or partially frozen aggregates shall not be used. Stockpiles of natural or manufactured sand shall be allowed to drain to ensure a relatively uniform moisture content throughout the stockpile. Unless predampening is not considered desirable by the manufacturer or is considered impractical by the Architect, dry lightweight aggregates shall be predampened as necessary. To prevent excessive variations in moisture content, predampened aggregates shall be allowed to remain in the stockpiles for a minimum of 12 hours before use. Admixtures shall be stored in a manner that will avoid contamination, evaporation, or damage. For admixtures used in the form of suspensions or nonstable solutions, agitating equipment shall be provided to ensure thorough distribution of the ingredients. Liquid admixtures shall be protected from freezing and from temperature changes which would adversely affect their characteristics.
3. 4.
5.
E. Delivered materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation, shall be removed from the jobsite and replaced with acceptable materials. 1.12 DEFICIENT WORK A. Deficient work or any work failing to strictly conform to the Contract Documents shall be removed and replaced, or repaired if accepted by Architect, at no cost to the Owner, Architect or Engineer. 1. Contractor shall prepare appropriate details and procedures to bring such work into conformance with the Contract Documents and submit to Architect for review and acceptance. Contractor shall, through the Owner, reimburse the Architect for time and expense incurred reviewing proposal procedures and details in accordance with the Architect's current fee schedule. Nonconforming work may be rejected by Owner, Architect or Engineer at any time, regardless of prior acceptance in shop drawings, prior inspection, inclusion in inspection or test reports, or inclusions in certificates of payments.
2.
B. Deficient work shall include, but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. Low cylinder strength, as defined by this Specification. Excessive or deficient air content. Slump not in accordance with this Specification. Spalling, honeycombing, surface defects, cracking, improper consolidation or the
Page 15 of 36 2/18/2013
like. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Unauthorized cutting, construction joints, cold joints and so forth. Workmanship not in accordance with the Drawings, with this Specification, with accepted samples, or with referenced codes or standards. Incorrect forming, finishing or treating of concrete surfaces. Exceedance of tolerances. Evidence of improper curing and the like. Higher than specified water content and/or w/cm ration as determined by Microwave testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE INGREDIENTS A. Cement: Portland cement conforming to ASTM C150, Type I or II, from a single supplier. 1. For concrete mixes with a design strength of more than 4 ksi, cement shall have a minimum 28 day cube strength of 4000 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM C109. Refer to Table 2A of ASTM C150.
B. Aggregates: All aggregates shall conform to ASTM C33 for normal weight concrete or ASTM C330 for lightweight concrete. Aggregates for slabs on ground shall conform to the recommendations of ACI 302.1R, Chapter 4. Aggregates shall be suitably graded. 1. 2. Fine Aggregate: Clean, hard, light colored sand. Coarse Aggregate: Sound gravel or crushed stone, having clean, uncoated, hard and strong particles and free of deleterious materials such as alkali, acidic or organic matter. ASTM C33 size #67 or smaller. Lightweight Coarse Aggregate: Rotary kiln product of expanded shale or slate and conforming also to all requirements for normal weight coarse aggregates. For pump mixes, lightweight aggregate shall be purchased from the supplier pre-saturated. Pea Gravel Aggregate: Aggregates shall be as given above, except that coarse aggregate shall be ASTM C33 size #8.
3.
4.
C. Water: Clean, fresh, potable and free from deleterious materials. D. Admixtures: Concrete admixtures shall improve concrete properties, including desired setting characteristics, and shall be used in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. All admixtures shall be added at separate intervals of mix cycle. 1. The following admixtures (or equivalents accepted by Architect) shall be permitted: a. Air-entraining, conforming to ASTM C-260; Air-Mix or AEA-92 by the Euclid Chemical Company, Daravair-M by W.R. Grace & Co., or MB-VR or MBAE90 by Master Builders. b. Water-reducing, conforming to ASTM C-494 Type A; Eucon NW or Eucon WR91 by the Euclid Chemical Company, WRDA-64 or WRDA-79 by W.R. Grace & Co., or Pozzolith N by Master Builders. c. Non-chloride and non-corrosive accelerator conforming to ASTM C-494 Type C; Accelguard 80/90 or NCA by the Euclid Chemical Company, Daraset by W.R. Grace & Co., or Pozzutec 20 by Master Builders.
Page 16 of 36 2/18/2013
d. Water-reducing, retarding conforming to ASTM C-494 Type D; Eucon Retarder 75 or Eucon DS by the Euclid Chemical Company, Daratard-17 by W.R. Grace & Co., or Pozzolith R by Master Builders. e. High-range, water-reducing conforming to ASTM C-494 Type F; Eucon 37 or Eucon SPJ or Plastol Series by the Euclid Chemical Company, Daracem-100 or AdvaFlow Series by W.R. Grace & Co., or Rheobuild 1000 or Glenium Series by Master Builders. f. Corrosion inhibiting, calcium nitrite based compound; Eucon CIA by the Euclid Chemical Company, DCI Corrosion Inhibitor by W.R. Grace & Co., Rheocrete CNI by Master Builders.
g. Microsilica; MSA by the Euclid Chemical Company, Force 10,000 by W.R. Grace & Co., or Rheomac SF by Master Builders. h. Structural Macro Fibers: ASTM C 1116, minimum of 2 inches (50mm) length, aspect ratio of 50 to 90, minimum toughness rating of R10, 50 = 60 (approximate) according to ASTM C 1018. Manufacturer: The Euclid Chemical Company, Tuf-Strand SF or W.R. Grace Strux 90.40. * E. The use of admixtures containing calcium chloride, thiocyanates or chloride ions in excess of 0.05% by weight of cement is specifically prohibited. F. Certfication: Written conformance to the above-mentioned requirements and the chloride ion content of admixtures will be required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review by the Architect.
G. Supplementary Cementitious Materials: 1. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F except that maximum carbon content shall not exceed three percent and maximum percentage retained on the #325 screen shall not exceed 25 percent. Fly ash shall be from a single, domestic source. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C989, Grade 100 or 120 may be used up to a maximum of 40% of the total cementitious content. The exact percentages to be used shall be based on a successful test placement onsite.
2. 3.
2.02 REINFORCEMENT MATERIALS A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60, deformed, from new billet steel, produced domestically, unless noted otherwise on the drawings. ASTM A706 for welded reinforcement. B. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A185 for sizes less than W4.0 and ASTM A497 for sizes D4.0 and larger unless noted otherwise on the Drawings. C. Post-Tensioning Tendons: See section 03470. D. Bar and Mesh Supports: Supports shall be all plastic or have plastic coating extending at least 1/2 inch up from concrete surface. Coating shall be at least 1/8 inch thick at tips. 1. Mesh supports for slabs on ground shall be precast blocks of concrete.
E. Mechanical Tension Splices for Reinforcing Bars: Cadweld Rebar Splices or Lenton Couplers by Erico Products, Inc., BarGrip by BarSplice Products Inc., or equivalent accepted by Architect. F. Mechanical Compression Splices for Reinforcing Bars: Speed-Sleeve Splices by Erico Products, Inc. or equivalent accepted by Architect.
Page 17 of 36 2/18/2013
G. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement and Accessories: ASTM A615 deformed bars as specified herein with coating conforming to ASTM A775 or welded wire fabric, ASTM A185 or A497, with coating conforming to ASTM A884. 1. Bar supports shall be completely coated with epoxy or vinyl, compatible with both the concrete and the epoxy coating on rebars. Coating shall be at least 1/8 inch thick at tips. Tie wire shall be nylon coated.
2.
H. Shear Reinforcement: Stud rails by Decon. 2.03 FORMWORK MATERIALS A. Form Contact Surfaces: 1. Forms for exposed finish concrete shall be made of plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood faced or other acceptable panel type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces. These types of forms shall comply with the U.S. Product Standard PS-1, "A-C or B-B high density overlaid concrete form" Class I. Forms for unexposed finish concrete shall be made of plywood, lumber, metal, or other material acceptable to Engineer and Architect. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. Joist and waffle slab pans shall conform to standard dimensions and all the requirements of Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute. Pans shall be in clean, new-like condition and shall be in steel or fiberglass reinforced plastic. Submit to Engineer and Architect for acceptance. End caps shall be provided for joist pans at beams, bridging and special headers if pans are not closed ended. Forms for round columns shall be metal, fiberglass or cardboard, free of horizontal seams and having a smooth, uniform finish. Discontinuities or bulges will not be allowed. Joints shall be tight and flush.
2.
3.
4.
B. Left-In-Place Forms: Galvanized per ASTM A653, coating designation G90, and not less than 20 gage. C. Formwork Accessories: 1. Form Sealers: Shall be guaranteed by manufacturer to be non-staining and to not impair the bond of paint, waterproofing or other required surface coatings. a. Sealer for lumber surfaces and plywood edges shall be clear polyurethane. b. Sealer for board forms shall be penetrating, non-staining and not leave a surface coating. 2. 3. 4. Releasing Agents: Shall be compatible with material or finish to be subsequently applied and free of deleterious effects on final surfaces. Form Oil: Shall not contain castor oil. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snapoff metal form ties, designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units which will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2" to surface nor leave a hole greater than 7/8" in diameter. Ties shall have a minimum capacity of 3000 pounds.
2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS A. PVC Waterstops: Unless otherwise noted, 6" wide dumbell or serrated type made from virgin PVC; Style 748 or 679 by Greenstreak, Type R6-316 by Vinylex, or equivalent
accepted by Architect. B. Bentonite Waterstop: Waterstop-RX by Volclay, SuperStop by Tremco or equivalent accepted by Architect. C. Vapor Barrier: Provide vapor barrier which conforms to ASTM E1745, Class A. The membrane shall have a water-vapor transmission rate no greater than 0.008 gr. / ft 2 / Hr. when tested in accordance with ASTM E96. The vapor barrier shall be placed over prepared base material where indicated below slabs on grade. The vapor barrier should be placed directly below the slab on ground. Vapor barrier shall be no less than 15 mil thick. Provide Stego Wrap (15 mil) Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries LLC, Griffolyn Vaporguard by Reef Industries or Perminator 15 by W.R. Meadows D. Granular Fill: Under slabs on ground shall be well a graded run of bank sand and gravel with maximum size of 1-1/2", between 30% and 50% passing a #4 sieve, between 10% and 25% passing a #50 sieve and not more than 5% of particles by weight passing a #200 sieve. Imported material, if required, shall consist of a well graded mixture of sand and durable, hard limestone. The Contractor shall provide laboratory gradation tests (i.e., before and after laboratory compaction tests) and compaction tests (ASTM D 1557) prior to delivery for evaluation and approval by the geotechnical engineer. E. Gravel or Crushed Stone: Under slabs on ground shall be hard, clean, natural rock, free of dust or other contaminants, and graded to requirements of ASTM C33, size #67. F. Non-Shrink Grout: Factory premixed grout complying with ASTM C1107 Grade B; Masterflow 928 or Masterflow 713 by Master Builders, SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corporation, NS Grout by the Euclid Chemical Company or equivalent accepted by Architect. 1. High Flow Grout: Where high fluidity and/or increased placing time is required, use high flow grout. The factory pre-mixed grout shall conform to ASTM C1107, Standard Specification for Packages Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-Shrink). In addition, the grout manufacturer shall furnish test data from an independent laboratory indicating that the grout when placed at a fluid consistency shall achieve 95% bearing under a 18 x 36 base plate. Provide Hi-Flow Grout by The Euclid Chemical Co. or Masterflow 928 by Master Builders. *
G. Bonding Agent: SBR Latex by Euclid Chemical Company, Daraweld-C by W.R. Grace & Co. or equivalent accepted by Architect. H. Curing Materials: Sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171 and be non-bleeding and non-staining. Burlap cloth shall be made from jute or kraft and conform to AASHTO M182, using at least 2 layers. I. Curing and Sealing Compound: Shall conform to ASTM C309, Type 1 or 1D; with 30% minimum solids content Masterkure-CR by Master Builders, Kurez DR Vox by the Euclid Chemical Company, Sonosil by Sonneborn Building Products or equivalent accepted by Architect. Bond Breaker: Under fill and topping slabs shall be 4 mil thick polyethylene sheet.
J.
K. Styrofoam: Shall conform to ASTM C578, Type VI; Styrofoam 40 High Load by The Dow Chemical Company or equivalent accepted by Architect. L. Expansion Dowels: ASTM A36 bars, hot-dipped galvanized and provided with a suitable expansion shield securely positioned and end filled with a readily compressible material assuring adequate expansion space beyond.
M. TFE Slide Bearings: A nominal 1/16 glass filled virgin PTFE. The bonding shall be done in a heated bonding press under a controlled time and pressure. The stainless steel shall be a minimum of 20 ga A240 Type 304 with a surface finish of less than 20 micro inches RMS.
Type CSB as manufactured by CONSERV Inc, Fluorgold by Seismic Energy Products, or equivalent accepted by Architect. N. Neoprene Pads: Shall conform to AASHTO Standard Specification, Division II, Chapter 18 ASTM D2240, grade 50 Durometer hardness. O. Premolded Joint Filler: Non-extruding bituminous-type preformed expansion joint filler conforming to ASTM D1751. P. Expansion Joint Filler: Sponge neoprene, closed cell, ASTM C1056, Grade SCO-11, high performance. Q. Semi Rigid Joint Filler: For contraction and construction joints in slabs on grade a two (2) component 100% solids compound, with a minimum shore A hardness of 80. Provide Euco 700 or QWIKjoint 200 by The Euclid Chemical Company or Masterfill CJ by Master Builders. R. Liquid Sealer Densifier: High performance, deeply penetrating concrete densifier; odorless, colorless, VOC - compliant, non-yellowing siliconate based solution designed to harden, dustproof and protect concrete floors subjected to heavy vehicular traffic and to resist black rubber tire marks on concrete surfaces. The compound must contain a minimum solids content of 20% of which 50% is siliconate. Provide Diamond Hard by The Euclid Chemical Company. S. Penetrating Sealer: Clear solvent based or water based silane or siloxane penetrating sealer; Euco-Guard 100, 200 or Vox by the Euclid Chemical Company, Sikaguard 701W by Sika, Masterseal SL by Master Builders, or equivalent accepted by Architect. Non-Oxidizing Metallic Floor Hardener: The specified non-oxidizing metallic floor hardener shall be formulated, processed and packaged under stringent quality control at the manufacturers owned and controlled factory. The hardener shall be a mixture of specially processed non-rusting aggregate, selected Portland cement and necessary plasticizing agents. Product shall be Diamond-Plate by The Euclid Chemical Co.
T.
U. Polymer Repair Mortar: Polymer and microsilica modified cementitious based compound; Thin Top Supreme, Concrete Top Supreme (Horizontal repairs) by the Euclid Chemical or Sikatop 121 or 122 (Horizontal repairs) by Sika Chemical, or Verticoat/Verticoat Supreme by The Euclid Chemical Company (Vertical or Overhead) or Sika 123 by Sika Chemical (Vertical or Overhead) by Sika Chemical. These patching mortars may be used when color match of the adjacent concrete is not required. Prior approval by the Architect is required. V. High Strength Repair Mortar: A flowable high strength, microsilica modified repair mortar for large horizontal placements or form and pour applications; Eucocrete by Euclid Chemical. W. Underlayment Compound: Free flowing, self-leveling, pumpable cementitious base compound, Flo-Top or Super Flo-Top by The Euclid Chemical Company, Ardex by Ardex Company, or Underlayment 110, by Master Builders. X. Slab on Ground Plate Dowels: Plate material shall be ASTM A36 steel and shall be Diamond Dowel System, by PNA Construction Technologies, size 1/4 x 4 dowels. Locate plate dowels at construction joints. Do not shear plates. Remove burrs at edges of plates. Y. Contraction Joint Protection: Load plate shall be smooth steel plate bars, ASTM A36, and shall be Load Plate Basket or PD3 Basket by PNA Construction Technologies. Locate Load Plate Baskets at contraction joints so noted on the plans. Do not shear. Remove burrs. *
Page 20 of 36 2/18/2013
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE A. At least 35 days prior to the start of concrete construction schedule, the contractor shall conduct a meeting to review the proposed mix designs and to discuss the required methods and procedures to achieve the required concrete construction. The contractor shall send a pre-construction conference agenda to all attendees 20 days prior to the scheduled date of the conference. 3.02 PREPARATION FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Adjacent Structures: Contractor is solely responsible for the protection, shoring, bracing, stability and underpinning of existing structures either on or adjacent to the site. Details and extent of such work shown on the Drawings are suggestions only; Contractor is to determine requirements and methods. All of the above operations shall be done under the supervision of a qualified Professional Engineer licensed in the state of Nevada. B. Examination of Field Conditions: Contractor shall examine all existing surfaces, structures and the like which the work must attach to, clear or abut. Notify Engineer in writing of any conditions, which will delay or be detrimental to work. Start of work shall represent acceptance by Contractor of existing conditions as suitable for completing work as specified. C. Field Measurements: Contractor shall verify, by measurements at the site, all existing dimensions, which affect the work of this Section. Field dimensions varying from those on the design drawings or accepted shop drawings shall be brought to the Architect's and Engineer's attention in writing. 3.03 FORMWORK A. General: Contractor shall be solely responsible for the design, construction, erection, removal, safety and adequacy of all concrete formwork, falsework, shoring, reshoring and the like. Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical and lateral, static and dynamic loads that might be applied, until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. 1. Design formwork to be readily removable without impact, shock, or damage to cast-in-place concrete surfaces and adjacent materials.
B. Construction and Erection: Construct forms of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and location so as to obtain accurate lines, positions, grades, levels, and plumb work in finished structures. Maintain tolerances required in this Specification. 1. Provide for openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the work. Solidly butt joints and provide back-up at joints to prevent leakage of cement paste. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, to prevent swelling and for easy removal. Provide temporary openings where interior area of formwork is inaccessible for cleanout, for inspection before concrete placement and for placement of concrete. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings on forms at inconspicuous locations.
2.
3.
Page 21 of 36 2/18/2013
4. 5.
Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Camber forms as indicated on Drawings and elsewhere as required to achieve level finish surfaces. Camber top surfaces of such locations by setting screeds to follow camber of formwork and maintain uniform thickness. Shape of cambered form surfaces shall be gently curved. Formwork surface materials shall be cleaned thoroughly and repaired prior to reuse. Damaged materials, which cannot be repaired prior to conditions complying with this Specification, shall not be reused. Condition of formwork surfaces, use and reuse shall be subject to acceptance or rejection by Architect or Engineer. Rejected formwork shall be removed from the jobsite immediately. Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms. Provide form ties at spacing as required to hold formwork readily and eliminate visible deflection and building of formwork surfaces as well as safely resist all applied loads. Ties shall be coated with an approved bond breaker. Foamglass panels shall be installed with staggered joints and bonded with adhesive approved by manufacturer.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C. Cleaning and Preparation of Forms: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before concrete is placed. Retightening of forms and bracing after concrete placement is required to eliminate mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply form coating compound as specified for new formwork. 1. 2. 3. 4. Clean re-used forms of concrete matrix residue, repair and patch as required to return forms to acceptable surface condition. Coat contact surfaces of forms with releasing agents and/or form-coating compound before reinforcement is placed. Coat steel forms with a non-staining, rust-preventive form oil or otherwise protect against rusting. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. Do not allow form coating or releasing agents to come in contact with previously placed concrete, reinforcement or embedded items.
D. Concrete Forms Exposed to View: Construct form surfaces only with materials approved by the Architect. 1. Chamfer exposed corners and edges as indicated on architectural drawings, using wood, PVC, rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. Provide square exposed corners and edges as indicated on architectural drawings, using wood, metal, or PVC strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. Locate ties in level and plumb lines and columns in arrangements acceptable to the Architect. Form coating and releasing agents shall not discolor concrete.
2.
3. 4.
E. Form Removal and Reshoring: Forms, shores, or reshores shall be removed only after the
Page 22 of 36 2/18/2013
concrete has rendered sufficient strength to carry the dead weight of concrete plus all applicable construction and external loads without causing damage, overstress, or excessive or permanent deflection. Comply with recommendations of ACI 347R. 1. Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper and safe removal of forms, shoring, and removal of reshoring. Contractor shall do cost of tests and/or calculations needed to determine such techniques, timing and sequences without expense to Owner, Architect or Engineer. Contractor shall replace or repair, at Architect's direction, any and all work damaged by improper removal or reshoring operations. Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of spandrel beams, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 36 hours after placing concrete, provided that the concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal operations, and that effective curing and protection operations are provided as required by this Specification. Unless reshoring is used, formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than the time period specified in ACI 347, paragraph 3.7.2.3 unless concrete has attained 75 percent of specified compressive strength at an earlier time. Determine compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured cylinders representative of concrete location or members. The Contractor shall pay the cost of such testing. If reshoring is used, remove shores and reshore in a planned sequence to avoid damage to partially cured concrete. Locate and provide adequate reshoring to safely support the structure without excessive stress or deflection. Removal of reshores shall comply with requirements for removal of forms supporting weight of concrete. Reshores shall extend at least 3 floors and be placed directly below shores for level being placed as to transfer loads directly. Prior to removing reshores, the underside of the slab shall be surveyed to determine the relative elevation of the slab. At a minimum, survey points are to be located next to columns and at center of column strips and middle strips. Slab edges and cantilevers are to be surveyed at points of theoretical maximum and minimum deflections within each span. Surveyor is to submit a general layout of points to engineer for approval prior to surveying the slabs. Additional points may be required at the engineers discretion. The Construction Manager is to contract out the surveying service to a surveyor not affiliated with the concrete contractor. The cost of this survey is to be included in the construction cost.
2. 3.
4.
5.
6.
3.04 FABRICATION AND PLACEMENT OF REINFORCEMENT A. Fabrication: Reinforcing steel shall be fabricated in strict accordance with accepted shop drawings, and standards and tolerances referenced by or given in this Specification. Workmanship shall be of the highest standard of the construction industry using modern equipment and tools in good condition. To the extent practical, fabrication shall be done in the shop and not in the field. 1. Partially embedded reinforcement shall not be bent or re-bent without the express written acceptance of the Architect. Offset bars shall be bent before being placed.
B. Placement: Placing of reinforcement shall comply with the requirements of the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's (CRSI) recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars", and as herein specified.
Page 23 of 36 2/18/2013
1. 2.
Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice and other materials, which reduce or destroy bond with concrete. Accurately position as shown on accepted shop drawings. Support and secure reinforcement against displacement by formwork, construction, or concrete placement operations. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as required. Place reinforcement to obtain at least minimum coverages for concrete protection as required. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces. Reinforcing bar supports shall be appropriate for the intended use and used in sufficient numbers and proper manner to hold reinforcing accurately in position before and during concreting operations. a. Neither top nor bottom bars shall be allowed to sag below tolerances specified herein. b. For #8 bars and smaller, separate adjacent layers of parallel bars with short length of #8 bars, securely tied to both layers. For #9 bars and larger, separator bar shall be of the largest bar size separated. c. Displaced reinforcing steel or embedded items shall be immediately repositioned and secured with additional supports to prevent recurrence. d. Reinforcing bars and mesh over metal deck shall be supported and secured prior to concreting operations.
3.
4.
5. 6.
Tie wire ends shall not fall within required clear concrete cover. Tack welding of reinforcing steel is prohibited. Replace bars damaged by welding operations. Welding of bar intersections is prohibited.
C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcement: Shall be subject to the following in addition to all other requirements given in this Specification: 1. Cold bend all bars around pins with nylon collars and take other required steps to minimize damage of the coating during fabrication. Hot bending will not be permitted. Handling and hoisting shall be done with care, making use of nylon lifting slings. Bundles of bars shall be lifted in a manner to prevent bar-to-bar abrasions; spreaders shall be used to lift bundles where lifting at third points is not practical. Bundling bands shall be padded or shall be nylon. Store epoxy-coated bars on padded or wooden cribbing. Reinforcing bars used as support bars for epoxy-coated reinforcement shall be epoxy-coated. Damage to coating shall be repaired in accord with the patching material manufacturers published instructions. Bars requiring patching in excess of 2 percent of the surface area of that bar shall be rejected and shall be removed immediately from the site.
2.
3. 4. 5.
3.05 JOINTS A. Construction Joints: Shall be made and located only as shown or indicated on the Drawings or accepted shop drawings. Conform to ACI 318, Article 6.4. All construction joints not shown or indicated on the Drawings shall be submitted in writing for
acceptance. 1. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2" deep in construction joints in walls, slabs, and between walls and footings. Accepted bulkheads designed for this purpose may be used for slabs. Use butt joints for unreinforced slabs on grade with Diamond Dowels for proper load transfer. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, except as otherwise indicated. Provide waterstops in construction joints as indicated on drawings and specifications. Install waterstops to form continuous diaphragm in each joint. Make provisions to support and protect exposed waterstops during the progress of work. Fabricate field joints in waterstops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Where overlay finishes, such as pavers or terrazzo, are to be provided, locate construction joints accurately below or behind expansion joints in the finish material. Do not exceed maximum distance between construction joints noted in the Drawings or this Specification. If no criteria is given, do not space greater than 40 feet for walls, 100 feet in any direction for formed slabs, or 40 feet for slabs on ground. Do not cast columns higher than 1/2 inch or lower than 1 inch below lowest girder, beam or slab supported by the column. Construction joints designated to be specially roughened, or joints of new concrete connecting to existing concrete, shall be bush hammered to 1/4-inch minimum roughness amplitude and thoroughly cleaned. Apply specified bonding agent where noted or specified. Joints in slabs on grade, subjected to hard wheeled traffic shall be filled with the specified semi-rigid joint filler. The installation shall be made in strict accordance with the instructions from the manufacturer. The surface must be level with the concrete shoulders.
2. 3.
4. 5.
6. 7.
8.
B. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-On-Ground: Construct in pattern as shown or noted on Drawings. 1. Inserts shall be laid into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of inserts. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris. Saw cuts shall be made as soon as possible after slab finishing and may be done without dislodging aggregate. a. Maximum joint spacing shall be 36 times the slab thickness unless otherwise noted on the drawings. The Soff-Cut saw shall be used immediately after final finishing and to a depth of 1-1/4". A conventional saw shall be used as soon as possible without dislodging aggregate and to a depth of 1/4 slab thickness. b. Use load plate baskets under saw cuts where designated on the plans for load transfer. 3. Joints, in slabs on grade, subjected to hard wheeled traffic shall be filled with the specified semi-rigid joint filler. The installation shall be made in strict accordance with the instructions from the manufacturer. The surface must be level with the concrete shoulders.
2.
C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-On-Ground: Provide at points of contact between slabs-on-ground and vertical surfaces where shown or called for on drawings. Provide joint filler and sealant as specified.
D. Expansion Joints: Locate and construct as noted or shown or called for on drawings. Width of joint shall be kept completely free of reinforcing steel, concrete, form materials, conduit, or any other material and shall be cleaned immediately prior to installation of filler. 1. Joint filler shall be installed the full depth of the joint, unless specifically indicated otherwise, and set flush with the exposed concrete surface unless a sealant or reveal is called for.
3.06 INSTALLATION OF EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Install anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to, or supported by, cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached thereto. B. Install sleeves, conduits, box-outs and the like for other trades prior to placing concrete, and where practical, prior to placing reinforcement. Set accurately and securely so as not to displace during subsequent work. 3.07 MIXING AND DELIVERY OF CONCRETE A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: All concrete shall be ready-mixed. Batch at a central plant, with automatic control and recording devices. Comply with ACI 304R, 304.2R, 304.5R and ASTM C94. Each admixture used shall be added at a different stage of the mix cycle. 1. After the introduction of initial mixing water for the batch, no additional water shall be added from the truck water system or any other source, even if the slump at the job site is less than that specified. High-range, water-reducing admixture shall be added at the jobsite or at the initial batching, in accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Synthetic Macro Fiber Reinforcement: Fibers shall be added when concrete is batched. Follow manufacturers instructions and standard ASTM C94 practices. Discharge of concrete shall be completed within 1 hours, or before the drum has revolved 300 revolutions, whichever comes first, after the introduction of the mixing water to the cement and aggregates or introduction of the cement to the aggregates.
2. 3. 4.
B. Hand-Mixed Concrete: Shall not be used without written acceptance by Architect. When permitted, such concrete shall be mixed only in watertight containers. Each ingredient shall be measured dry and sand and cement shall be mixed prior to adding coarse aggregate. Water shall be added slowly so as to provide an even mixture. 3.08 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with ACI 304R and ACI 309R and handle with due care to avoid deterioration due to delay or handling. 1. Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work; cooperate in setting such work. Moisten wood forms immediately before placing concrete where form coatings are not used. Forms and other surfaces to receive fresh concrete shall be clean and free of frost, dirt and any other debris immediately prior to and during concrete placing. Apply temporary protective covering to lower 2 feet of finished walls adjacent to poured floor slabs and similar conditions, and guard against spattering during placement.
2. 3.
Page 26 of 36 2/18/2013
4.
Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no concrete will be placed on concrete which has hardened sufficiently to cause the formation of seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as approved by the Architect. Free drop of concrete shall not exceed 8 feet for columns or 4 feet for other elements. Self-Consolidating Concrete may be dropped further when approved by the engineer. Canvas or rubber elephant trunks may be used to limit free drop. Concrete shall not be placed on frozen subgrade. Should cold joints form, cease operations. Submit detailed drawings showing remedial measures for acceptance. Drilled dowels or anchors or chipped keyways may be required by the Architect. Deposit concrete as near as practical to its final location. Minimize lateral movement of fresh concrete. Placement procedures shall not allow concrete to drop thru successive reinforcing grids, nor strike cages in columns or layers in walls. Concrete temperature, at time of placing, shall not be less than 50oF nor more than 95oF.
5.
6. 7.
8.
9.
B. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers not deeper than 24" and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete in accordance with ACI 309R. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations not farther than visible effectiveness of machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 in. into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing segregation of mix. Self-Consolidating Concrete may not require vibration if successful placement is demonstrated on site.
2.
3.
C. Placing Concrete Slabs: Deposit and consolidate concrete slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints (if required), until the placing of a panel or section is completed. 1. 2. Consolidate concrete during placing operations so that concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with straightedge and strikeoff. Use bull floats or darbies to smooth surface, free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.
D. Weather Limitations: Concrete shall not be placed during rain, sleet or snow, nor shall rain, sleet or snow be permitted to fall upon uncured surfaces. 3.09 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE WORK A. Filling-In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as herein specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete work.
B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations, as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts complying with equipment shop drawings or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. Bases poured on concrete slabs shall be same type of concrete as slab, unless specifically noted otherwise on the Drawings. Foundations shall be normal weight, 4 ksi concrete, unless noted otherwise. Trowel concrete to a smooth, dense finish. C. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads and landings and associated items. Cast-in safety inserts and accessories as shown on drawings. Screed, tamp, and finish concrete surfaces as scheduled. D. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersection, and terminations slightly rounded. If the curb is part of a beam, the form shall be removed as specified in the section for beams. E. Non-Shrink Grouting: Provide formwork; install flowable non-shrink grout and cure in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Use high flow grout for all base plates larger than 12 sq. ft. F. Concrete Topping: Clean surface of underlying slab of all oil, dirt, laitance and any other material, which could impair bond. Moisten existing concrete thoroughly prior to placing topping. Use structural macro fibers at 4 lbs. per cubic yard in 4000 psi topping, with a maximum w/cm of 0.50, unless otherwise indicated on the plans. Approved curing procedure must begin immediately after final finishing. The joint pattern must be approved by the engineer. *
3.10 FINISH OF FORMED SURFACES A. Rough Form Finish: Provide for formed concrete surfaces not exposed to view and not covered with a material applied directly to the concrete. 1. This is a concrete surface having texture impacted by the form facing material used, with tie holes and defective areas repaired, filled and patched. Fins and other projections exceeding 1/4 inch in height shall be rubbed down or chipped off.
B. Smooth Form Finish: Provide for formed concrete surfaces exposed to view, or that are to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofing, veneer plaster, painting, or other similar system. 1. This is an as-cast concrete surface obtained with selected form facing material, arranged orderly and symmetrically with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch defective areas. Fins or other projections shall be completely removed.
C. Grout-Cleaned Finish: Provide, where scheduled, to concrete surfaces, which have received smooth form finish. 1. Combine one part portland cement to 1-1/2 parts fine sand by volume, and mix with water to consistency of thick paint. Proprietary additives may be used at Contractor's option. Blend standard portland cement and white portland cement, amounts determined by trial patches, so that final color of dry grout will match adjacent surfaces. Thoroughly wet concrete surfaces and apply grout to coat surfaces and fill small holes. Remove excess grout by scraping and rubbing with clean burlap. Keep damp by fog spray for at least 36 hours after rubbing.
2.
D. Architectural Concrete Finish: Provide smooth, uniform finish upon form removal with no patching, stoning, or other form of repair, except washing, permitted unless otherwise noted, for walls, columns, and other surfaces visible to view when the work is complete.
Use Self-Consolidating Concrete. The surface shall match the approved jobsite mockup panel. E. Related Unformed Finishes: At top of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces occurring adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. 3.11 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES A. Scratch Finish: Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive concrete floor topping or mortar setting beds for tile, portland cement terrazzo, and other bonded applied cementitious finish flooring material, and as otherwise indicated. 1. After placing slabs, plane surface to tolerances for floor flatness (FF) of 15 and floor levelness (FL) of 13. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. After leveling, roughen surface before final set, with stiff brushes, brooms, or rakes.
B. Float Finish: Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to receive trowel finish and other finishes as hereinafter specified, and slab surfaces which are to be covered with membrane or elastic waterproofing, membrane or elastic roofing, or sand-bed terrazzo, and as otherwise indicated. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until ready for floating. Begin floating when surface water has disappeared or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats, or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Check and level surface plane to tolerances of FF 18 - FL 15. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.
C. Trowel Finish: Apply to monolithic slab surfaces that are to be to exposed-to-view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile, paint, or other thin film finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surfaces by final hand-troweling operation, free of trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and with surface leveled to tolerances of FF 20 - FL 17. Grind smooth surface defects, which would telegraph through applied floor covering system.
D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply trowel finish as specified, then immediately following score surface by fine brooming. E. Non-Slip Aggregate Finish: Apply to concrete stair treads, platforms, ramps, sloped walks, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. After completion of float finishing, and before starting trowel finish, uniformly spread 25 lbs. of dampened non-slip aggregate per 100 sq. ft. of surface. Tamp aggregate flush with surface using a steel trowel, but do not force below surface. After broadcasting and tamping, apply trowel finishing as herein specified. After curing, lightly work with a steel wire brush, or an abrasive stone, and water to expose non-slip aggregate. Immediately following first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of required weight of dry shake material over concrete surface, and embed by means of power floating. Follow floating operation with second shake application,
Page 29 of 36 2/18/2013
2. 3.
uniformly distributing remainder of dry shake material at right angles to first application, and embed by power floating. 4. After completion of broadcasting and floating, apply trowel finish as herein specified. Cure slab surface with curing compound recommended by dry shake hardener manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.
F.
Non-oxidizing Metallic Floor Hardener: All slabs, in the loading dock area, or other areas noted on the drawings, shall receive an application of the non-oxidizing, metallic floor hardener applied at the rate of 1.5 lbs/ft5. Immediately following the first floating operation, uniformly distribute approximately 2/3 of the required weight of the nonoxidizing metallic floor hardener over the concrete surface, by mechanical spreader, and embed by means of power floating. The hardener shall be floated in and the second application made. The surface shall be floated again to properly bond the hardener to the base concrete slab. The surface shall then be troweled, at least twice, to a smooth dense finish. 1. After completion of broadcasting and floating, apply trowel finish as herein specified. Cure slab surface with curing compound recommended by hardener manufacturer. Apply curing compound immediately after final finishing.
G. Architectural Finish Concrete Floors: Where called out on Architectural Drawings, provide special concrete floor finishes as required. Review requirements at preconcreting conference including mock up requirements, staining, embeds etc. Do not proceed until approval of mock up by Architect. 3.12 CURING, TREATMENT AND PROTECTION A. General: Comply with all applicable recommendations of ACI 308, "Recommended Practices for Curing Concrete", and all requirements of this Specification. 1. 2. 3. Protect freshly placed concrete from rain, premature drying, and excessive hot or cold temperature. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Begin final curing procedures immediately following initial curing and before concrete has dried. Continue final curing for at least 7 days, at a temperature of at least 50oF, in accordance with ACI 301 procedures. Avoid rapid drying at end of final curing period. Comply with specified requirements given in other paragraphs of this Specification for hot or cold weather concreting, as defined by ACI 305R and 306.1.
4.
B. Curing Methods: Perform curing of concrete by curing and sealing compound, by moist curing, by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combinations thereof, as herein specified. 1. Provide moisture curing by one of the following methods: a. Keep concrete surface continuously wet by covering with water. b. Covering concrete surface with specified absorptive cover, thoroughly saturating cover with water and keeping continuously wet. Place absorptive cover to provide coverage of concrete surfaces and edges, with 4" lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows: a. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete,
Page 30 of 36 2/18/2013
placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3" and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. 3. Provide curing and sealing compound as follows: a. All exposed interior slabs, not receiving a liquid densifier, and troweled slabs receiving mastic applied adhesives or shake-on hardeners shall be cured with the specified curing and sealing compound. Exterior slabs, sidewalks, curbs, and architectural concrete, not receiving a penetrating sealer, shall be cured with the specified curing and sealing compound. Maximum coverage shall be 400 ft5/gallon on steel troweled surfaces and 300 ft5/gallon on floated or broomed surfaces for curing/sealing compound. C. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including undersides of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces by moist curing with forms in place for full curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by one of the methods specified above, as applicable. D. Curing Unformed Surfaces: 1. Apply curing and sealing compound to all slabs, ramps, pit slabs, stairs, landings and the like, except where bond and adhesion of mortar, adhesive or other finish material will be adversely affected. Treat slabs, ramps, curbs and columns and walls two feet up from top of slabs with penetrating sealer in areas that will be exposed to deicing salts in service. Follow manufacturer's instructions for dosage and procedures. Cure other areas by moist cure, or moisture-retaining cover, or strippable curing compound.
2.
3.
E. Surface Treatments: 1. Penetrating Sealer: Apply at a rate of 125 square feet per gallon. Sweep and power wash concrete surface before application. Do not apply until time period specified in manufacturers instructions.
3.13 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS A. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removal of forms. 1. Cut out honeycomb, rock pockets, voids over 1/4" in any dimension, and holes left by tie rods and bolts, down to solid concrete but, in no case to a depth of less than 1". Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with specified bonding agent. Place patching mortar after bonding compound has dried. For exposed-to-view surfaces, blend white Portland cement and standard Portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match color surrounding. Provide test areas at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.
2.
B. Repair of Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect or Engineer. Surface defects, as such, include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets; fins and other projections on surface; and stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. Flush out form tie holes, fill with dry pack mortar, or
Page 31 of 36 2/18/2013
precast cement cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, that contain defects that affect the durability of concrete. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace concrete.
C. Repair of Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface plane to tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as herein specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope, in addition to smoothness using a template having required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces that contain defects, which affect durability of concrete. Surface defects, as such, include crazing, cracks in excess of 0.01" wide or which penetrate to reinforcement, spalling, pop-outs, honeycomb, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding, after concrete has cured at least 14 days, but without exposing the reinforcing. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completion of surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with fresh concrete. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Use the specified underlayment or repair topping. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1" diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas to sound concrete with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4" clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding compound. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. Repair isolated random cracks and single holes not over 1" in diameter by dry-pack method. Groove top of cracks and cut-out holes to sound concrete and clean of dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding compound. Mix dry-pack, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. Place dry pack after bonding compound has dried. Compact dry-pack mixture in place and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for not less than 72 hours.
2. 3.
4.
5.
3.14 CONCRETE STRUCTURAL REPAIRS A. Perform structural repairs only where accepted, by Architect, Owner and Engineer, in detailed procedure submitted by Contractor in writing. All other defective areas shall be removed and replaced. 1. Conform to Article 1.7 of ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete for Buildings" and to instructions of Engineer.
3.15 COLD WEATHER CONCRETING A. General: Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength, which could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures, in compliance with ACI 306.1 and as herein specified. 1. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators, unless otherwise accepted in mix designs.
Page 32 of 36 2/18/2013
B. Mixing, Delivery and Placement: When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 degrees F (4 degrees C), the water and aggregate shall be heated uniformly before mixing, to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C), and not more than 80 degrees F (27 degrees C) at point of placement. C. Curing and Protection: Protection of concrete in cold weather shall continue long enough to ensure the strength required, but not less than 72 hours. The temperatures shall be kept sufficiently above freezing. Protection from freezing for the first 24 hours does not ensure the strength required. 1. The surface temperature of the concrete shall be monitored specially at corners and edges of concrete. Use thermometers or any other equipment approved for this type of work. The Contractor shall provide all the equipment necessary to protect and monitor the curing of concrete. After the concrete has cured and the above requirements are no longer necessary, the temperature shall be decreased slowly and gradually as required by ACI 306.1. Under no circumstances are sudden changes of temperature in the concrete allowed. Heating units shall be vented. The concrete shall be protected from drying when heated locally by the heating locally by the heating equipment. The heating enclosures, if used, must be strong, windproof and weatherproof. Concrete shall not be exposed to carbon dioxide (CO2) gas or any other pollution resulting from the use of heating equipment. The temperature shall not exceed those shown in ACI 306.1. The use of urethane foams as insulation shall be avoided if possible or done with caution, as it generates highly noxious fumes when subject to fire.
2. 3.
4.
3.16 HOT WEATHER CONCRETING A. General: When hot weather conditions exist that would seriously impair the quality and strength of concrete, place concrete in compliance with ACI 305R and as herein specified. B. Mixing, Delivery and Placement: Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement below 95 deg F (35 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled, or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Use of liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. 1. 2. Reduce concrete mixing time as required to avoid quick stiffening of the concrete. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedment in concrete. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before concrete is placed.
3.
3.17 CONCRETE PLACED ON METAL DECK A. General: Contractor shall provide, at no additional cost to the Owner, the additional volume of concrete necessary due to deflection of structural steel members and metal decking and any other construction effect. 1. Concrete for slabs on metal deck supported by steel members shall be placed and finished in a manner that produces uniformly thick slabs above the steel framing members. Any deck units damaged prior to or during concrete placement shall be removed and replaced prior to placing of concrete in that area.
Page 33 of 36 2/18/2013
2.
B. Shoring: Contractor may shore deck and/or steel framing to reduce amount of concrete required, control ponding, and maintain tolerances. Proper design of such shores is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3.18 CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GROUND A. Subgrade Preparation: All slabs-on-ground, unless otherwise noted, shall be placed on either compacted soil or undisturbed soil of proper bearing capacity. 1. Crushed stone, gravel or porous fill, as shown on the Drawings, shall be placed in layers not more than 8 inches thick and compacted in several passes to achieve specified density of the material. Conduit, drains, piping and other items shall be placed prior to installation of the vapor barrier.
2.
B. Vapor Barrier Installation: Place over stone, gravel or fill. Place sheets with longest dimension parallel to direction of pour. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with appropriate tape. 1. Tears or holes in barrier shall be properly repaired prior to concreting.
C. Reinforcement: Support reinforcement securely on precast concrete blocks or use other method described in shop drawings and accepted by Engineer. 1. 2. Avoid cutting or puncturing vapor barrier during reinforcement placement and concreting operations. Install welded wire fabric in as long lengths as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh plus two inches and lace splices with wire. Offset end laps in adjacent widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.
3.19 LIQUID DENSIFIER/SEALER A. All interior slabs subject to hard-wheeled vehicular traffic, and so noted on the drawings, shall be treated with the specified liquid densifier/sealer. B. Spray, squeegee or roll on liquid densifier to clean, dry concrete surface. The liquid should be scrubbed into the surface with a mechanical scrubber. Keep the surface wet with the densifier during the application process. When the product thickens, but not more than 60 minutes after initial application, the surface shall then be squeegeed or vacuumed to remove all excess liquid.
END OF SECTION 03300
Page 34 of 36 2/18/2013
SECTION 03300 APPENDIX CONCRETE MIX DESIGN SUBMITTAL FORM Project: City: General Contractor: Concrete Contractor: Contact Name: Address: Phone Number: Main Plant Location: Miles from Project Site: Date: Design Characteristics Use (describe): Strength: Density: Air: psi at pcf % Water/cementitious ratio: days
Design Mix Information check one Based on Standard Deviation Analysis of Trial Mixes or Field Experience. No. of test cylinders: Standard deviation: fcr = fc + 1.34s or fcr = fc + 2.33s - 500 Refer to ACI 318 Sec. 5.3.1 for standard deviation factor if less than 30 tests Based on Trial Mix Test Data. fcr: psi Avg. Strength: fcr: psi psi
fcr = fc + 1200 psi, for up to 5000 psi fcr = 1.10 fc + 700 psi, for greater than 5000 psi
Page 35 of 36 2/18/2013
Materials Type/Source Cement Flyash Microsilica Fine Aggregate Coarse Aggregate Water Air Other Total Admixtures Manufacturer Water Reducer Air Entraining Agent High Range Water Reducer Non-Corrosive Accelerator Other Slump before HRWR Slump after HRWR Required Attachment Checklist Combined aggregate gradation report Note: 8%-18% aggregate required to be retained on each side sieve except the top size and #100. Standard deviation analysis summary or trial mixture test data Admixture compatibility certification letters END OF SECTION 03300 APPENDIX
Specific Gravity
Weight Lbs.
Absolute Vol. Cu. Ft.
27.0 cu. ft.
Dosage Oz/Cwt
inches inches
Section 05100 Structural Steel
Section 05100 Structural Steel PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, conditions of the Contract (including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions), Division 1 Specification Sections and all other Contract Documents apply to work of this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of structural steel work is shown on the Drawings, including schedules, notes and details to show size and location of members, typical connections, and type of steel required. B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and perform all operations required for complete furnishing, fabrication, and erection of all structural steel as indicated on the Drawings, specified in this Section, and required by job conditions. C. The work shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20. 21. Beams, girders, trusses. Columns, posts, struts and hangers. Base plates and bearing plates. Anchor bolts and plates to be embedded in concrete. Templates for items to be embedded in or attached to concrete. Structural steel support angles, channels, etc. for metal deck. Shop painting, lacquering and galvanizing and field touch-up. Bracing, guying, surveying and plumbing of erected steel. Shoring and temporary bracing. Connections. Shop applied stud shear connectors. Concrete reinforcing bar coupling devices which are to be welded to structural steel. Drilled-in anchors into concrete or masonry to fasten structural steel. Deformed anchor bars stud welded to structural steel. TFE slide bearings. Erection drawings, shop drawings and samples. Protection of work of this Section. Protection of other work from activities under this Section. Submittals. Provisions for other work. All other work shown in the Drawings, specified in this Section or required to make
Foundation for an Independent tomorrow BID Documents Las Vegas, NV
Page 1 of 21 2/18/2013
the structural steel work complete. 1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Division 1 Sections. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03300. C. Prestressed and Precast Concrete Section 03400. D. Masonry Division 4 sections. E. Steel Joist and Joist Girders Section 05200. F. Metal Deck and Stud Shear Connectors Section 05300.
G. Cold-Formed Metal Framing Section 05400. H. Metal Fabrications Section 05500. I. Spray-On Fireproofing Division 7 Sections.
1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to the requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) 2009. B. The following codes, specifications and standards shall apply to the work. Where conflict among codes, standards, and specifications exist, the one having the most stringent requirements shall govern. 1. 2. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Steel Construction Manual, 13th Edition, by the American Institute of Steel Construction ("AISC Specification"). Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, March 18, 2005 by the American Institute of Steel Construction ("AISC Code"). Sections 6 and 7 apply to the work; the remainder is specifically excluded. Chapter 10 applies to members designated in the Contract Documents as Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS). Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts, June 30, 2004, by the Research Council on Structural Connections of the Engineering Foundation ("RCSC Specifications"). Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination, AWS A2.4-93, by the American Welding Society ("AWS A2.4"). Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1-00, by the American Welding Society ("AWS D1.1"). Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel, AWS D1.4-98, by the American Welding Society ("AWS D1.4"). American Society for Testing and Materials ("ASTM") specifications cited shall be the latest edition listed in the Index of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Detailing for Steel Construction, 2nd Edition 2002, by the American Institute of Steel Construction. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Manual, Volume I, 1982 and Volume II, 1991, by the Steel Structures Painting Council ("SSPC").
3.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.
C. Work of this Section shall conform to all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations.
Page 2 of 21 2/18/2013
1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data and Samples: Submit producer's or manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for the following products to the Architect for acceptance prior to the start of any work. Include laboratory test reports and other data to show compliance with Specifications, including specified standards. Submit samples where requested by Architect. 1. High-strength bolts (each size, length and type), nuts, and washers, including manufacturer's certification of conformance for each and every lot. When requested by Architect, submit samples to Testing Agency for testing prior to start of any work or delivery of materials to job site or stockyards. Paint for structural steel. Shop-applied stud shear connectors. Reinforcing bar coupling devices which are to be shop welded to a structural steel. Submit welded sample for testing when requested. Deformed anchor bars to be stud welded to structural steel. Submit welded sample for testing when requested. Drilled-in anchors. Any other manufactured products specified under Part 2 - Products, or called for on the Drawings.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
B. Mill Certificates: Submit certified copies of producer's mill certificates for each piece of steel to be used. Reports shall include chemical and physical properties. For ASTM Group 4 and 5 rolled shapes being used as truss members, submit test reports for Charpy V-Notch testing in accordance with ASTM A6 Supplementary Requirement S5. See AISC specification section A3.1c. C. Deviations: Requests for deviations from Drawings or Specifications shall be submitted on Contractor's letterhead. Acceptance of shop drawings including deviations not detected during shop drawing review will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to conform strictly to the Contract Documents. Deviations will be allowed only where permitted by Architect in writing. Proposed deviations must be accompanied by documented and physical evidence, which will establish that its quality equals or exceeds the quality specified. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Architect for acceptance in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect shall have two weeks to review submittal packages from day after submittal arrives in Architects office until day that submittal is sent returned by Architect. 1. At least two weeks prior to the first shop drawing submittal, Contractor shall provide Architect with a comprehensive list of all shop drawing submittals, and a schedule indicating when all submittals are to be sent to the Architect. If Contractor deviates from this schedule, Architect shall be allowed additional time to review shop drawings. Shop drawings furnished under this section shall be not less complete than indicated by the applicable procedures shown in AISC's "Detailing for Steel Construction", 2002. Shop drawings shall be prepared by competent engineering personnel under the supervision of an experienced Professional Engineer registered in the state of Nevada. As evidence of such, each and every shop drawing shall bear the seal and signature of said Engineer.
2.
Page 3 of 21 2/18/2013
3. 4.
Submit complete job standards prior to detailing individual members. Standards shall describe all repetitive work. Provide calculations upon request. Submit shop drawings to Architect in coordinated packages so that all required information is in hand at time of review. Prior to resubmission of shop drawings, all changes from prior issue shall be clearly circled and identified. Do not fabricate before shop drawings have been reviewed and returned to Contractor marked either "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted" only. Prepare, submit and keep up to date, a complete drawing index, cross-referencing assigned piece mark with the drawing number upon which the piece is detailed. Contractor shall coordinate and cross-check for accuracy, completeness and correct relationship to the work of other sections, each shop drawing prepared for the work of this Section, including each shop drawing prepared by subcontractors. Detail steel work so as not to interfere with the work of other trades. Architect's review of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor from these responsibilities. Prior to sending submittals to Architect, Contractor and Construction Manager (if applicable) shall coordinate and cross-check for accuracy and completeness each shop drawings prepared for work of this Section with the approved construction Documents and Specifications. Shop drawings shall bear the stamp of Contractor and Construction Manager indicating that this review has been performed. Architect will not review submittals for which Contractor and Construction Manager have not performed this review. Prepare erection drawings to show clearly the size and location of each member, and the erection mark assigned to each member. Show each field connection complete with data and details necessary for assembling the structure. Direct attention to the possible need for special guying, bracing or shoring. Prepare anchor bolt, base plate and embedded plate erection drawings with complete dimensions. Provide to the concrete trade in advance of applicable concrete work. Submit, for review and acceptance, field work drawings depicting all field work required to accommodate field conditions. Shop drawings shall include plans, elevations, sections and complete details and be accurately dimensioned. Indicate size and grade of steel for each piece. Detail to accommodate Contractor's field measurements of supporting and adjoining construction. Contractor shall make a complete survey of all existing conditions prior to detailing. Design of structural steel connections to plates or anchors embedded in concrete shall be based on the most severe combination of structural steel, concrete structure, and embedded item location tolerance. Identify the connection used at each location. Connections shall conform to controlling requirements given in the Drawings, specified herein, or required by the IBC 2009. Proportion connections not completely detailed in the Drawings to resist loads and load combinations required by the Contract Documents or by the IBC 2009. Provide temporary expansion joints in structural steel work and between the work of this Section and that of other sections providing support or restraint until such time as work is thoroughly stabilized. Close and secure such joints at that time. Indicate clearly the grade, size and number of bolts, the type, number, position and orientation of each washer and the size of each hole, whether slotted or round.
5. 6.
7.
8.
9.
10. 11.
12.
13.
14.
Page 4 of 21 2/18/2013
Proportion connection details to ensure adequate wrench clearance for correct bolt tensioning sequences. Indicate method of tensioning for all high strength bolts. 15. All welds shall be indicated by using symbols conforming to AWS A2.4 and shall indicate type, size, length, spacing, location, orientation, etc. as applicable. Complete and partial penetration welds shall be indicated by an AWS prequalified joint designation. In addition, for all penetration welds, the complete joint preparation and configuration shall be shown or indicated, including root opening, groove angle, root face, backing bar, etc. as applicable. Bevels shall be graphically detailed in large scale. Welding processes and electrodes shall be indicated on each shop drawing. Detail shear studs, deformed bar anchors, concrete reinforcing bar couplers and other items which are to be shop applied. Show and dimension holes and other work in the structural steel work required for work of other sections. Provide fieldwork drawings for holes not shown in shop drawings. Show camber dimensions or indicate natural camber up, as appropriate. Indicate all structural steel shelves required to support steel deck ends and edges at supporting beams, columns, and other structural steel elements. Detail cleaning and painting requirements, including identification of "no-paint" areas.
16. 17. 18.
19. 20. 21.
E. Work engineered by Contractor: Submit, for record purposes, drawings and calculations as applicable, signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer registered in the state of Nevada, for all work engineered by the Contractor. Such work shall include all crane and crane-related engineering, shoring and bracing procedures and sequences, and any other areas noted on the Drawings or required by the IBC 2009. 1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent Testing Agency acceptable to the Architect. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Testing Agency and Architect with proper notice of the initiation of each phase and portion of work requiring testing or inspection. Written notice of commencement date shall be provided at least 5 working days prior to the start of shop work and the start of fieldwork. Subsequently, Contractor shall give a minimum of 24 hours verbal notice of work, or completion of work as applicable, requiring inspection and/or testing. Contractor shall furnish Testing Agency with a complete set of Construction Documents and Specifications, along with one copy of each accepted shop drawing bearing the Architect's review stamp, mill test certificate and manufacturer's certification. Provide reasonable office space to Testing Agency at fabrication plants and at the site. Provide Testing Agency personnel with convenient and safe access to the work and all reasonable assistance necessary to permit effective inspection and testing work. Testing Agency may inspect and test materials and work at the source before shipment, as well as at the site before, during or at any time after installation. Deficient or incomplete work or materials shall be corrected or replaced, as directed by the Architect, without additional costs or delays to the Owner.
2.
3.
Page 5 of 21 2/18/2013
4.
The Testing Agency shall report directly to the Owner and Architect the results of all testing and inspection by means of daily written reports. When any test or inspection reveals deficient or non-conforming work, Testing Agency shall notify Owner and Architect immediately by means of a written report specially and clearly marked and identified to show deficient areas of work. Furthermore, the Testing Agency shall provide a table of all known members, noting when each piece was shop inspected, field inspected, any deficiencies and when the deficiencies were corrected. This table is to be provided to the Owner and Architect with the weekly submission of daily reports. The format of this table is to be submitted to the Owner and Architect for approval before inspection is begun. Performance or waiving of inspection, testing or surveillance by Testing Agency for a given portion of the work will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to conform strictly to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where additional tests are deemed necessary by Architect due to failure to pass tests, the cost of additional testing will be deducted from payments to Contractor. If, due to errors by the Contractor or failure to perform his work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Architect must perform additional design or drafting work or review proposed solutions, the Contractor shall, through the Owner, reimburse the Architect in accordance with the Architect's current fee schedule plus out of pocket expenses incurred.
5.
6. 7.
B. Shop Inspection and Testing: Work performed at fabrication plants shall be subject to inspection and testing as follows: 1. 2. The Testing Agency shall review the fabricator's quality control program and make a written report of such. Each piece of fabricated steel shall be examined for straightness, alignment and proper conformance to details on accepted shop drawings. Camber shall be measured at midpoint of all members for which camber is called for on the Drawings. Mill certificates for all steel shall be examined. Manufacturer's certifications for all bolting materials to be used in the shop shall be checked and lot numbers on containers shall be verified to match certificates. High strength bolts and bolting operations shall be tested and inspected in accordance with part 1.06 E of this Section. Welds and welding operations shall be tested and inspected in accordance with part 1.06 D of this Section. Surface preparation and painting of all steel members where blast cleaning is specified shall be inspected. When requested by the Architect, dry film thickness of paint layers shall be measured. Stud welding operations shall be inspected and tested in accordance with AWS D1.1 Sections 7.7 and 7.8.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
8.
C. Field Inspection and Testing: Work performed in the field shall be subject to inspection and testing as follows: 1. Testing Agency shall verify that all steel pieces and connections are installed completely and properly in the correct location and manner in accordance with accepted shop drawings.
Page 6 of 21 2/18/2013
2.
Lot numbers on containers of all bolting materials shall be verified to match submitted manufacturer's certifications. Manufacturer and grade markings on all components of bolt assemblies shall be verified. High strength bolts and bolting operations shall be tested and inspected in accordance with part 1.06 E of this Section. Welds and welding operations shall be tested and inspected in accordance with part 1.06 D of this Section. Steel exposed to the weather shall be inspected to verify that paint has been properly touched up at damaged or scratched areas.
3. 4. 5.
D. Welding: Inspection and testing of welds and welding operations shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1 Section 6 by the Testing Agency using AWS Certified Welding Inspectors. 1. Testing Agency shall verify: a. Welding materials and equipment conform to the Contract Documents and AWS requirements and are used in correct positions and procedures. b. Size, length and location of all welds, and correct and appropriate processes are used. c. Welds are only made by welders certified by AWS for applicable process and position. d. At appropriate intervals, performance of individual welders and preparation and fit-up of joints. 2. 3. All welds shall be visually inspected. Acceptance criteria shall be per AWS D1.1 Section 8.15.1 or 10.17.1 as applicable. Fifty percent of all full and partial penetration welds, whether made in the shop or field, shall be ultrasonically tested, for 100% of their length, in accordance with AWS D1.1 Section 6 Part C and Section 8.15 or 10.17 as applicable. a. If testing discloses a large ratio, in the opinion of the Architect, of unacceptable welds, the required percentage shall be increased to 100% by the Architect. b. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the testing consistently discloses acceptable welds, the percentage of tested welds may be reduced by the Architect to a minimum of 25%. 4. Fifty percent of all fillet welds, for 100% of their length, shall be tested by dye penetrant (ASTM E165) or magnetic particle (ASTM E709) method. Acceptance criteria shall be per AWS D1.1 Section 8.15 or 10.17 as applicable. a. If testing discloses a large ratio, in the opinion of the Architect, of unacceptable welds, the required percentage shall be increased to 100% by the Architect. b. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the testing consistently discloses acceptable welds, the percentage of tested welds may be reduced by the Architect to a minimum of 25%. 5. Welds which are not satisfactory or which are found to be defective by the Testing Agency shall be cut out and replaced by a satisfactory weld at no additional cost or delay to the Owner.
Page 7 of 21 2/18/2013
E. High Strength Bolting: High strength bolts and bolting operations shall be tested and inspected as specified herein and in accordance with the RCSC Specification, Section 9. 1. Storage and Handling: The Testing Agency shall verify that bolting materials are properly stored and protected and at time of installation, are clean and free of rust and thread damage. Assembly: The Testing Agency shall verify that the proper bolting assembly is installed by checking size and grade of bolt, type and grade of nut, location and number of flat washers, and location, orientation and type of direct tension indicator (if used). Snugging: The Testing Agency shall verify that all bolts in a connection are properly snugged in accordance with RCSC Specification procedures and requirements of this Section before final tensioning of any bolt in a connection. Calibration: The Contractor shall provide a tension-measuring device (Skidmore-Wilhelm or similar), with proper calibration certification, at the jobsite at all times when bolts are being tensioned. At the start of work, when requested by the Architect, and whenever deemed appropriate by the Testing Agency, installation procedures shall be confirmed by tensioning a representative sample of bolts in the tension measuring device. A representative sample shall consist of not less than three bolts of each size, grade, length and producer being used. Installation procedures shall achieve a tension not less than that given in Table 4 of the RCSC Specification within 10 seconds from a snug tight condition. Twist-off Bolts: Twist-off type bolts shall be inspected by observing installation procedures and by verifying that the splined end of every bolt shank has been properly broken off by the wrench chuck. Direct Tension Indicators: Bolts installed with direct tension indicators shall be inspected by observing installation procedures and by measuring the average residual gap of the DTI on every bolt in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Turn-of-nut Installation: Bolts installed by the turn-of-nut method shall be inspected by measuring torque with a calibrated wrench. At the beginning of work, when deemed appropriate by the Testing Agency, whenever conditions such as lubrication or surface dirt change, and when a new or different manufacturer's material is being used, an inspecting torque shall be established. This shall be done by tensioning 5 bolts of each grade, diameter and manufacturer in a Skidmore-Wilhelm device to a tension not less than 105% of the minimum required and measuring torque with a properly certified calibrated wrench. The high and low values shall be discarded and the middle three averaged to establish an inspecting torque for each grade, diameter and producer. A minimum of 10 percent of the bolts, but not less than 2, in every connection shall be inspected. The Contractor shall provide the Skidmore-Wilhelm device, a calibrated wrenches, scaffolding and laborers as needed to perform such procedures at times requested by the Testing Agency. Verification Procedures: If the Testing Agency reasonably suspects that any bolts may not be properly tensioned, due to relaxation as a result of improper snugging or any other reason, the arbitration inspection method of the RCSC Specification, Section 9(b), shall be used, except that all bolts in the connection in question shall be checked. The Contractor shall provide a Skidmore-Wilhelm device, calibrated wrench, a laborer and scaffolding as required to safely and properly perform such verification.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Page 8 of 21 2/18/2013
9.
Laboratory Testing: High strength bolting materials shall be randomly tested throughout the project at times and in quantities chosen by the Architect. a. Tension tests of full-size bolts shall be performed to determine the proof load and ultimate tensile strength in accordance with ASTM F606 using Method 1, Length Measurement. b. Rockwell hardness of bolts shall be determined on the wrench flats after removal of surface material in accordance with ASTM F606. The reported hardness shall be the average of three hardness readings. c. Rockwell hardness of nuts shall be determined on the bearing face in accordance with ASTM F606. d. Surface hardness of hardened washers shall be determined in accordance with ASTM F606. e. In addition the surface hardness, the core hardness of 5/16 inch thick washers shall also be determined in accordance with ASTM F606. f. Direct tension indicators shall be tested in accordance with ASTM F959.
g. If requested by the Architect, chemical properties and dimensional tolerances of bolting materials may also be tested. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents and note any discrepancies and special construction problems requiring close coordination and exact time schedules; assume the responsibility of same and administer action such that the proper solution will result. 1. 2. Contractor's quality assurance procedures shall be effective and shall assure that all work fulfills the requirements of applicable provisions of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall maintain, on staff, sufficient office, field engineering, and field supervision staff to assure that all data and layout drawings for work of other Sections is transmitted to detailers to allow proper detailing of holes, penetrations, chases, and the like and to assure proper execution of the work in the field. Perform quality control functions required to achieve and to document that work conforms to the Contract Documents. Provide access to Contractor's quality control documents and reports upon request of Owner, Architect, Engineer or Testing Agency. Provide reasonable numbers of photocopies of specific quality control reports on request. Contractor and Construction Manager shall coordinate and schedule the work of this Section with the work of other Sections of this Specification in order to optimize quality and to avoid delay in overall job progress. Prior to starting applicable phases of the work of this Section, Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with each trade affected by the work of this Section, including areas where work of other Specification Sections joins or relates to work of this Section. Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or nonconforming conditions to Engineer in writing prior to the start of work.
3.
4.
5.
B. Fabrication: The fabricator shall be certified by and use the AISC Quality Certification Program in establishing and administering a quality control program. Such program shall ensure that the work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Page 9 of 21 2/18/2013
C. Erection: The erector shall maintain a quality control program to the extent necessary to ensure that all of the work is performed in accordance with the Contract Documents. The erector shall provide the equipment, personnel and management for the scope, magnitude and specified quality of the work. D. Qualifications: Throughout the progress of the work of this Section, provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements, completely trained and experienced in the necessary skills, and who shall be present at the site and shall direct all work performed under this Section. 1. The structural steel detailing firm shall be subject to acceptance by the Architect. To ensure continuity, there shall be a single structural steel detailing firm. As a minimum requirement for acceptance, the structural detailing firm shall demonstrate experience in detailing of not less than five buildings of the type of this work and shall demonstrate in-house quality control procedures to the satisfaction of the Architect. Fabricator shall have experience in the fabrication of structural steel for at least five buildings of the type of this work and shall possess all capabilities and qualifications required for AISC Type II Certification. Erector shall have experience in the erection of structural steel of at least five buildings of the type of this work. Welders and welding operators performing work under this Section shall be qualified in accordance with the building code and with applicable AWS requirements for each specific welding procedure and process which the welder will use in this work. When requested by the Architect, Contractor shall require welders to be retested. Each welding procedure shall be described fully in the shop drawings and shall be designated prequalified under AWS D1.1 or shall be qualified in accordance with provisions of AWS D1.1 prior to use in the work. Each weld shall be visually inspected by the welder performing the work. a. Contractor shall comply with AWS D1.1 Section 6.6. E. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the items listed below. While the following list is not intended to be a complete listing of all responsibilities, it is provided to bring these items to the specific attention of the Contractor. Architect's review of shop drawings or other submittals, or performance or waiving of inspection or testing, does not relieve Contractor from these responsibilities. 1. 2. 3. Safety and stability of the work. Construction sequences, whether stated or implied, are intended only to assist the Contractor in coordinating the work of the project. Fabrication procedures and the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Correctness of dimensions and quantities, for the fitting to other or existing elements, for conditions to be confirmed and correlated at the site, and for the verification of the physical interrelationships of elements of the work. The amount, method of distributing, and proposed supplemental support of loads during construction. Construction loads shall not exceed the superimposed load which the member, with necessary supplemental support, is capable of carrying safely without damage. Obtain all field measurements required for proper fabrication and installation of work covered by this Section. Precise measurements are the responsibility of Contractor.
2.
3. 4.
5.
4.
5.
Page 10 of 21 2/18/2013
6.
Report unsatisfactory or non-conforming conditions to the Architect in writing prior to the start of work.
1.08 MEASUREMENTS AND TOLERANCES A. Measurements: Lay out each part of the work in strict accordance with the Contract Documents. Precise measurements and layout are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 1. Obtain all field measurements required for proper detailing, fabrication and installation of the work. Field verify all dimensions and locations of existing conditions shown on the Contract Documents. Where discrepancies exist, notify Architect in writing, and by sketch when applicable, of discrepancies and proposed solutions to correct discrepancies. Lay out the work from at least 2 pre-established benchmarks and axis lines, individually correct for length and bearing.
2.
B. Tolerances: Structural steel shall be fabricated and erected within the tolerances specified in the AISC Specification and Code, except that more restrictive tolerances, when specifically shown or noted in the Drawings or provided under this Specification, shall take precedence and shall apply to the work. 1. In lieu of the criteria given in Section M.4.4 of the AISC Specification, fit of finished compression splices shall be as follows: at least 65 percent of the contact area shall be in uniform bearing about the centroid of the bearing surface, with no separation greater than 1/32 inch. This requirement also applies to both shop and field connected base plates and bearing plates. Trusses shall be erected and aligned to provide chords within 1/2 inch of theoretical locations with respect to the plane of the truss. Slide bearing joints shall be assembled and erected to have uniform contact over 75 percent of the joint with no separation greater than 0.02 inch.
2. 3.
1.09 DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Anchor bolts, embedded plates, anchorage devices, and other items required to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete shall be delivered to the project site at times coordinated by Contractor to allow convenient installation and orderly cast-in-place concrete operations. B. Include setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation with all anchor bolts and with all other items or devices furnished and delivered to the project site for installation under other sections of this Specification. C. Structural steel members which are stored on or off the project site shall be supported above ground on platforms, skids or other supports so as to protect steel members from overstress, permanent deformation, corrosion and other damage. D. Materials shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's original and unopened containers and packaging, bearing labels as to type of material, brand name, and manufacturer's name. Delivered materials which are damaged or otherwise not suitable for installation, shall be removed from the jobsite and replaced with acceptable materials. E. Handling, shipping and erecting of shop painted steel pieces shall not be performed until the paint has dried thoroughly. Protect the paint from damage and keep individual members free from contact with the ground and with each other. 1. Contractor shall furnish members in-place, fully painted, including all touch-up
Page 11 of 21 2/18/2013
painting required as specified herein, at all locations where painting is required in the drawings by provisions of this Specification, and by the IBC 2009. 1.10 DEFICIENT WORK A. Deficient work or any work failing to strictly conform to the Contract Documents shall be removed and replaced, or repaired if accepted by Architect, at no cost to the Owner, Architect or Engineer. 1. Contractor shall prepare appropriate details and procedures to bring such work into conformance with the Contract Documents and submit to Architect for review and acceptance. Contractor shall, through the Owner, reimburse the Architect for time and expense incurred reviewing proposal procedures and details in accordance with the Architect's current fee schedule. Nonconforming work may be rejected by Owner, Architect or Engineer at any time, regardless of prior acceptance in shop drawings, prior inspection, inclusion in inspection or test reports, or inclusions in certificates of payments.
2.
B. Deficient work shall include, but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Bent, twisted or warped pieces. Unauthorized cutting or reaming. Cracking, interior or surface defects. Painted or unpainted surfaces not sufficiently clean to receive spray fireproofing or finish coat. Tops of flanges not sufficiently clean to receive field-applied stud shear connectors or deck welding. Workmanship not in accordance with the Drawings, with this Specification, with accepted samples, or with referenced codes or standards. Exceedance of tolerances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL A. Structural steel furnished for each location shall provide the minimum yield point given in the drawings, shall conform to the applicable ASTM steel specification, shall meet the requirements of the IBC 2009, shall be suitable for use in welded structures and shall meet the requirements both of the drawings and of this Specification. All materials shall be new and of the best commercial quality. Steel produced to modified ASTM specifications shall not be used without the Architect's prior written acceptance. 2.02 PAINT A. Shop and field-applied paint where designated in the Drawings, specified herein, and where required by the Building Code shall be selected from the following: 1. Alkyd primer: a. Tnemec 10-99 by Tnemec Co. b. Kem Kromik Primer by Sherwin-Williams Co. c. Dulux 67-Y-834 by Dupont Co.
Page 12 of 21 2/18/2013
d. Carbocoat 150 or Carbocoat 818 by Carboline. e. Amercoat 5105 by Ameron International. 2. Zinc-rich primer: a. 90-97 Tneme-Zinc by Tnemec Co. b. Zinc Clad 5 by Sherwin-Williams Co. c. Ganicin 347-Y-937 by Dupont Co. d. Carbozinc 859 (class B Slip Critical) Epoxy Zinc-Rich by Carboline. e. Amercoat 68HS by Ameron International. 3. Epoxy based: a. Series 66 Hi-Build Epoxoline by Tnemec Co. b. Tile-Clad II Epoxy by Sherwin-Williams Co. c. Corlar 823 HB by Dupont Co. d. Carboguard 890 Series or Carobguard 888 by Carboline. e. Amercoat 385 by Ameron International. 4. Polyurethane: a. Series 73 Endura-Shield III by Tnemec Co. b. Hi-Solids Polyurethane by Sherwin-Williams Co. c. Imron 333 by Dupont Co. d. Carbothane 133 HB or Carobthane 833 by Carboline. e. Amercoat 450 series (450HS, 450SA) by Ameron International. 5. Cold galvanizing: a. ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound by ZRC Products. b. LPS Cold Galvanize by LPS Laboratories, Inc. c. Carbozinc 4195 by Carboline. 6. Color of paint for steel exposed to view shall be selected by the architect.
2.03 WELDING MATERIALS A. Welding materials shall conform to AWS A5.1, A5.5, A5.17, A5.18, A5.20, A5.23, A5.28 or A5.29. Welding electrodes which have been wet or contaminated by grease or other substances deleterious to welding shall not be used in the work. B. Welding electrodes for welding of stainless steel to stainless or carbon steel shall be E308L. 2.04 STUDS A. Stud shear connectors and welding equipment used for installation shall conform to AWS D1.1 and to applicable portions of Sections 05300 Metal Deck and Stud Shear Connectors. 2.05 BOLTING MATERIALS A. General: Bolts, nuts and washers for a given grade and diameter of bolt shall come from a single domestic manufacturer. For each diameter, only one grade may be used. Bolting
Page 13 of 21 2/18/2013
materials shall be shipped to the jobsite in the bolt manufacturer's unopened containers with nuts and washers assembled and lot numbers marked on the container. B. Bolts: Bolts shall conform to ASTM A325 or A490 except where ASTM A307 are specifically permitted in notes or details on the drawings and clearly designated in accepted shop drawings. 1. 2. Bolts shall be cold forged with rolled threads. Type 2 A325, Type 3 A325 or A490 bolts shall not be used.
C. Nuts: Nuts for A325 bolts shall conform to ASTM A563 Grade C, D or DH or ASTM A194 Grade 2 or 2H. Nuts for A490 bolts shall conform to ASTM A563 Grade DH or ASTM A194 Grade 2H. Nuts for A307 bolts shall conform to ASTM A563 Grade A. D. Washers: Hardened washers shall conform to ASTM F426 and the requirements of the RCSC Specification. E. Direct Tension Indicators: DTI's shall conform to ASTM F959; Coronet Direct Tension Indicators by J & M Turner or DTI's by Applied Bolting Technology. F. Galvanized Steel Bolting Materials: Bolts shall conform to ASTM Type I, nuts shall be ASTM A563 Grade DH or A194 Grade 2H only. Bolts, nuts and washer shall be galvanized under the supervision of the bolt manufacturer in accordance with either ASTM B695 Class 50 or A153 Class C. Nuts must be tapped after hot dip galvanizing or slightly overtapped before wax or equal. The galvanized bolt, washer, nut assembly shall be tested by the bolt manufacturer in accordance with ASTM A325 section 8.5 and shipped and stored in plastic bags in closed containers. Direct tension indicators for galvanized bolts shall be coated by the DTI manufacturer only, in accordance with ASTM B695 Class 50, and tested by the manufacterer after coating.
G. Stainless Steel Bolting materials: Bolts shall conform to ASTM A193 Grade B8. Nuts shall conform to ASTM A194 Grade 8M. 2.06 GALVANIZING A. Galvanized steel members shall be hot-dipped galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123 or ASTM A386, as applicable. 2.07 LACQUER A. Milled Surfaces: Coat with Blue Lacquer by Varcroft Paint Co., or M-2658 Blue Lacquer by U.S. Steel Corp. 2.08 DRILLED-IN ANCHORS A. Adhesive Anchors: HVA Adhesive Anchors by Hilti, HIT HY 150 by Hilti, Epcon by ITW/Ramset, Ultrabond by U.S. Anchor, or other accepted by Architect. B. Expansion Bolts: Kwik-Bolt III Anchors by Hilti, HSL Heavy Duty Sleeve Anchors by Hilti, Trubolt Wedge by ITW/Ramset, or other accepted by Achitect. 2.09 COUPLERS FOR CONCRETE REINFORCING BARS A. Concrete reinforcing bar couplers, which are to be welded to structural steel, shall be Lenton Half Couplers as manufactured by Erico Products, Grip Twist Coupler by BarSplice Products, or other accepted by Architect. 2.10 STAINLESS STEEL A. Stainless steel shall be type 18-8 conforming to AISI Grade 304 or 316.
Page 14 of 21 2/18/2013
2.11 DEFORMED ANCHOR BARS A. Deformed bars to be stud welded to structural steel shall be D2L anchors as manufactured by Nelson Stud Division of TRW or other accepted by Architect. 2.12 TFE SLIDE BEARINGS A. A nominal 1/16 glass filled virgin PTFE factory bonded with a tested epoxy to a steel back up plate. The bonding shall be done in a heated bonding press under a controlled time and pressure. The stainless steel shall be a minimum of 20 ga A240 Type 304 with a surface finish of less than 20 micro inches RMS. Type CSB as manufactured by CONSERV Inc. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Adjacent Structures: Contractor is solely responsible for the protection, shoring, bracing and stability of existing structures either on or adjacent to the site. Details and extent of such work shown on the Drawings are suggestions only; Contractor is to determine requirements and methods. All of the above operations shall be done under the supervision of a qualified Professional Engineer. B. Examination of Field Conditions: Contractor shall examine all existing surfaces, structures and the like which the work must attach to, clear or abut. Notify Architect in writing of any conditions, which will delay or be detrimental to work. Start of work shall represent acceptance by Contractor of existing conditions as suitable for completing work as specified. C. Field Measurements: Contractor shall verify, by measurements at the site, all existing dimensions, which affect the work of this Section. Field dimensions varying from those on the design drawings or accepted shop drawings shall be brought to the Architect's and Engineer's attention in writing. 3.02 FABRICATION A. General: Structural Steel shall be shop fabricated in strict accordance with the shop drawings, certificates, and other submitted data accepted by the Architect. Workmanship shall be of the best practice of relevant trades and shall be performed by skilled mechanics making use of modern tools and equipment in good condition. To the extent practical, fabrication shall be performed in the shop and not in the field. B. Straightening and Tolerances: Contractor shall straighten, square, flatten and torsionally align plates and shapes as necessary to provide fabricated elements within allowable tolerances as well as to provide correct alignment, good fit and uniform erection clearance, as applicable. 1. 2. 3. Fabrication tolerances shall not exceed those of the AISC Code. Beams shall be fabricated with natural camber up except where specific camber is designated in the Drawings. Material straightened prior to fabrication shall be examined carefully for signs of distress and for other defects before being placed in fabrication. Distressed or otherwise defective material shall not be used in the work. Straightening by the use of properly controlled heat will be permissible if done by personnel skilled in heat straightening, using equipment and techniques in accordance with written procedure documents and applicable detail sketches prepared by the fabricator and accepted by the Architect.
Page 15 of 21 2/18/2013
4.
Sharp corners, projections, and similar rough or sharp surfaces or edges shall be eased and smoothed by grinding. Fabricated materials containing sharp kinks or bends shall be rejected.
C. Cutting: Except where accepted by the Architect, cutting shall be by machine. Gas cutting shall provide smooth, uniform, workmanlike surfaces and shall conform to the prescribed line. Minimum 1/2 inch radius of cut shall be provided at all reentrant corners. Gas cut surfaces shall be made uniform and notch-free by chipping, planning, grinding and welding as required. D. Finished Surfaces: Finishing shall be mean milled to ANSI 500 or smoother. Finished surfaces shall be protected by a corrosion inhibiting substance as provided herein. Plane contact surfaces of grillages and base plates. Mill edges of bearing stiffeners. E. Bolt Holes: Bolt holes shall be normal size unless specifically accepted by the Architect. Do not make or enlarge holes by burning. Drill material where thickness exceeds the connector diameter and in all material thicker than 7/8 inch. Remove burrs from drilling operations. Elongated punch and die sets shall be used to punch elongated holes. F. Built-Up Members: Built-up members shall be constructed true to line. Plate edges shall be cut or milled true to line. Plate edges to be welded to other plates shall be straight or curved, as applicable, and normal to the plate surface. Provide uniform cross section, minimum practical twist, and minimum practical deviation from true lines. Provide true and uniform camber, where noted in the Drawings, by cutting of web plates prior to assembly. Where splices of material are specifically accepted by the Architect in shop drawings, splice each component prior to fitting up of plates. Use welding procedures, patterns, sequences and techniques that will avoid distortion of base metal or member.
G. Miscellaneous: 1. 2. 3. 4. 3.03 ERECTION A. General: Erection of steelwork shall be performed by skilled workmen in accordance with the accepted shop drawings and certificates and shall conform strictly to the Contract Documents. B. Embedded Items: Furnish anchor bolts, embedded plates and any other items specified in this Section which are to be cast into concrete in a timely manner. Provide steel templates and layout drawings with setting instructions and tolerances. C. Shoring, Bracing and Guying: Contractor shall be solely responsible for stability and safety of the structure during the construction process. This responsibility includes any and all engineering for cranes, methods and sequences of erection, and temporary storage of materials such as metal decking. 1. Provide temporary bracing as required in order to resist safely all imposed vertical and horizontal loads during construction and to maintain correct alignment. Design Members shall not be shop or field spliced except where specifically accepted by the Architect and detailed on shop drawings. Pipes, tubes and built-up box members shall be completely sealed with cap plates unless specifically designated otherwise in the Drawings. Beam openings not shown or scheduled may be provided only where specifically accepted by the Architect. Curved members of rolled sections shall be bent to uniform smooth curvature by means acceptable to the Architect.
Page 16 of 21 2/18/2013
of temporary shoring, bracing and guying is the Contractor's sole and complete responsibility, including all details of installation and removal, methods, sequence and timing. Remove temporary members and their connections after structure is completed. 2. Anchor bolts as shown in the Drawings are intended for requirements of the fully completed structure. Anchor bolt requirements for erection purposes and loadings shall be determined by the Contractor.
D. Measurements and Tolerances: Contractor shall employ a licensed Surveyor experienced in surveying steel building frameworks and report all discrepancies to the Architect. Contractor shall not proceed with erection until acceptable corrections have been made. Contractor's steel surveys shall establish permanent bench marks as necessary, shall check elevations of bearing surfaces and locations of anchor devices and shall provide data during the course of the Work and a final survey showing the E-W, N-S and elevation position of the work points of each steel frame, truss and other major member as compared to theoretical location. Such surveys shall be submitted for record at the completion of steel erection and at times requested by the Architect. 1. Erection tolerances shall not exceed those of the AISC Code. Trusses shall be erected and aligned to provide chords within 1/2 inch of theoretical location with respect to the plane of the truss.
E. Compression Splices: Fastening of compression splices and joints shall be performed after the abutting surfaces have been brought uniformly into contact. Bearing surfaces shall be cleaned before the parts are assembled. 1. At least 65 percent of the contact area shall be in uniform bearing about the centroid of the bearing surface, with no separation greater than 0.02 inches, except locally at flange toes or corners which may be separated 0.03 inches without need for corrective measures. These requirements apply to both shop and field connected base plates and bearing plates. The above requirements specifically supersede Section M4.4 of the AISC Specification.
F.
Field Modifications and Corrections: Field modifications and/or correction of fabrication or detailing errors shall not be made without the prior acceptance of field work drawings by the Architect. 1. 2. Bolt holes shall not be cut or enlarged with a gas torch. Field cut beam openings shall only be made where expressly permitted by the Engineer. Openings to be cut with a mechanically guided torch after which all edges are to be ground smooth with proper radii at corners. Required reinforcing is to be placed prior to cutting opening.
3.04 BOLTING A. General: Bolting procedures shall meet all of the requirements of the RCSC Specification and those given herein. 1. 2. Bolts, nuts and washers, at time of tightening, shall be clean, rust-free and free from thread damage. Impact wrenches shall be of adequate capacity and sufficiently supplied with air to perform the required tightening of each bolt within 10 seconds.
B. Acceptable Methods of Installation: All ASTM A325 and A490 bolts shall be fully tensioned to the minimum values given in Table 4 of the RCSC Specification unless specifically permitted otherwise by the Engineer in writing.
Page 17 of 21 2/18/2013
1.
Bolts shall be tensioned using one of the following methods, as defined by the RCSC Specification and requirements herein, within the limitations given: a. Twist-off type bolts, for diameters not exceeding one inch. b. Direct tension indicators. c. Turn-of-nut, provided that every bolt in every connection is marked with white or yellow keel after snugging and prior to final tightening ("match marking"). Turn-of-nut may not be used for bolts larger than one inch diameter.
2.
ASTM A307 bolts shall be tightened using full manual effort on a suitable wrench. After installation, score threads to prevent nuts from loosening.
C. Snugging: Regardless of the installation method being used, connections shall be properly "snugged" prior to final tensioning of any bolt in the connection. Snug tight is defined as the condition where all plies of the connection are in firm contact. Snugging of bolts shall progress systematically from the most rigid part of the connection to the free edges. Impact wrenches shall be used on larger connections if manual effort on spud wrenches is not sufficient to bring plies together. D. Twist-off Type Bolt Installation: Connections shall be properly snugged prior to tensioning of any bolt, which breaks the splined tip. A hardened washer shall be provided under the nut. E. Installation with Direct Tension Indicators: Tensioning methods, number, thickness, location, orientation and type of washers, procedures and measurements shall be in strict accordance with the manufacturer's latest printed instructions. 1. 2. DTI's shall be provided in addition to all other washers required. Impact wrenches used shall be those recommended by the DTI manufacturer for the grade and size of bolt being installed and shall be in good repair and sufficiently supplied with compressed air. Protrusions of the DTI shall bear only against the underside of the bolt head or against a hardened 3/16-inch thick hardened washer, as applicable. Bolts larger than one-inch diameter shall be lubricated with Johnson's Stick Wax 140 on threads and face of turned element prior to tightening. Connections shall be properly snugged prior to final tensioning of any bolt, which flattens the protrusions of the DTI. In calibration procedures, the DTI need only indicate a tension of 100 percent of the minimum specified tension and not 105 percent as required by Section 8(d)(4) of the RCSC Specification.
3. 4. 5. 6.
F.
Installation by Turn-of-Nut: Installation shall be in strict accordance with the RCSC Specification and the additional requirements given herein. 1. 2. 3. A hardened washer shall always be provided under the bearing face of the turned element (nut or bolt head). Bolts shall be properly snugged and match marked prior to final tensioning of any bolt in a connection. During tightening of bolts, the unturned element shall not be allowed to rotate. The unturned bolt element shall be held without rotation using the correct size spud wrench or other suitable correct size of open end, closed end or socket wrench.
Page 18 of 21 2/18/2013
G. Oversized and Slotted Holes: Washers, plate washers and/or continuous bars shall be provided for ASTM A325 and A490 bolts in accordance with Paragraphs 7(c)(3) thru 7(c)(7) of the RCSC Specification. H. Reuse of Bolts: ASTM A490 bolts and galvanized ASTM A325 bolts, if completely or partially untorqued, shall not be reused. ASTM A325 bolts may be reused only with specific written acceptance by the Architect. I. Field Modifications or Corrections: Unfair holes shall not be enlarged by burning or drifting alone. Enlarge holes where necessary and permitted by flame piercing and reaming or by reaming alone or by other means accepted by the Architect. Holes after enlargement shall be true round holes normal to the surfaces joined. Increase bolt size to fill enlarged and reamed holes. Galvanized Bolts: Galvanized bolts shall be provided wherever the connection is exposed to the weather. 1. 3.05 WELDING A. General: Welding processes and materials shall comply with AWS D1.1 and any additional requirements specified herein. B. Quality Control and Certifications: Quality of all welds shall conform to AWS D1.1 Article 7.7 or 8.15 or 10.17 as applicable for the type of weld and specified method of inspection. 1. 2. All welds shall be visually inspected by the welder who made the weld. Welds shall only be made by welders with AWS certification, and any local building code license if required, for the type of weld, welding process and position of the weld being made. Field welds shall be subject to the same acceptance criteria as shop welds. Cracking or incomplete penetration shall be cause for rejection of each weld possessing such defects, regardless of other acceptance or rejection criteria. Base metal containing gross discontinuities, before or after welding, or lamellar tearing after welding, shall be repaired in accordance with accepted procedures or shall be discarded and replaced. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of AWS Article 6.6. Bolt threads and the face of the turned element shall be lubricated with Johnsons Stick Wax 140 prior to installation.
J.
3. 4. 5.
6.
C. Materials and Processes: Welding materials and processes shall be selected from those specified herein and shall conform to accepted welding procedure specifications. 1. 2. Complete and partial penetration welds shall be made using only AWS prequalified procedures following all requirements for joint preparation, fit up, orientation, etc. Welding electrodes or flux contaminated by deleterious substances or moisture shall not be used and shall be removed promptly from the work location. Low hydrogen electrodes which cannot be used promptly after opening of hermetically sealed containers shall be stored in electric holding ovens at 250oF (minimum).
D. Preheating: Welding shall be performed on material preheated to a temperature above the dew point, regardless of other preheating requirements. 1. Joints in which material is two inches or more in thickness shall not have the weld interrupted after operation has started, unless at least 2/3 of its size, for its full length,
Page 19 of 21 2/18/2013
has been completed without an interruption of more than one hour. Welding may be interrupted for longer periods, provided the preheat temperature is maintained for full length of joint for the entire time welding is interrupted. E. Miscellaneous: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Sizes of fillet and partial penetration welds shall equal or exceed minimums required by the AISC Specification regardless of all other requirements. All backing bars shall be continuous across the entire length of the weld. Slag shall be removed from all welds for inspection. Shop stud welding of headed stud shear connectors and deformed anchor bars shall be in accordance with Paragraph 3.07 A of this Section. Exposed exterior structural steel shall have all joints seal welded. Welding of ASTM A6 Group 4 and 5 rolled shapes spliced in tension shall conform to AISC specification Section J1.7.
3.06 FINISHING, PAINTING & GALVANIZING A. General: Steel work shall be cleaned, painted or galvanized as provided herein. Cleaning and priming shall be done in the shop, intermediate and top coats may be done in the shop or in the field unless otherwise specified. 1. Steel to be unpainted and spray fireproofed shall be cleaned to meet the requirements of SSPC SP-3. Additional cleaning shall be performed in the field to allow proper adherence of spray fireproofing. Steel which is to be encased in concrete shall be cleaned to meet the requirements of SSPC SP-2, by wire brush or other means at the option of the contractor. Reclean after erection to the extent required to achieve the original condition. Steel which is to be enclosed but not spray fireproofed shall be cleaned to meet the requirements of SSPC SP-3 and shop sprayed with an alkyd primer, not less than 2.5 mils nor more than 3.5 mils dry film thickness. Steel which is to be exposed to view but protected from the weather shall be cleaned to meet the requirements of SSPC SP-6, shop sprayed with zinc-rich primer not less than 2.0 nor more than 3.5 mils dry film thickness, and top coated with epoxy-based paint not less than 4.0 mils nor more than 6.0 mils dry film thickness. Top coating may be achieved by a single sprayed coat or 2 rolled and brushed coats. New steel which is to be exposed to weather shall be cleaned to meet the requirements of SSPC SP-6, shop sprayed with zinc-rich primer not less than 2.5 nor more than 3.5 mils dry film thickness (DFT), intermediate spray coated with epoxy-based paint not less than 4.0 nor more than 6.0 mils DFT, and top coated with polyurethane paint not less than 3.0 nor more than 5.0 mils DFT. New steel exposed to the weather but not painted, and where noted in the Drawings, shall be hot-dip galvanized.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B. Painting: Paint shall be applied thoroughly and evenly without sags or holidays by suitable spray equipment in strict accordance with the paint manufacturer's printed instructions. Provide a dry film thickness within the range specified herein, including around outside corners or other abrupt changes in surface profile. 1. Paint shall be applied only to dry surfaces and only at times when steel surface temperatures are at least 5 F above the dew point and above the minimum
Page 20 of 21 2/18/2013
temperature recommended by the manufacturer for the particular paint. 2. For alkyd primer, epoxy-based paint and polyurethane, surfaces to be subsequently bolted or welded shall be blocked out for a minimum of 2 inches each direction from edge of bolt holes or welds. For Zinc-rich primer, surfaces to be subsequently welded shall be blocked out. Surfaces to be bolted shall not be blocked if slip-critical Class B zinc-rich primer is utilized (no topcoat). Contractor shall reasonably protect painted surfaces from damage, abrasion and soiling. Sharp edges, such as those created by flame cutting or shearing, shall be broken and rounded prior to surface preparation. Breaking the edge can be accomplished by a single pass of a grinder in order to flatten the edge.
3.
4. 5.
C. Field Touch-Up: Field touch-up shall be provided at all blocked areas and points of damage, including bolts and welds installed after coating. 1. 2. 3. 4. Touch-up for one coat treatment shall be power tool cleaning to SSPC SP-3 and one coat of zinc-rich primer. Touch-up for two coat treatment shall be power tool cleaning to SSPC SP-3, one coat of zinc-rich primer and one coat of epoxy-based paint. Touch-up for three coat treatment shall be power tool cleaning to SSPC SP-3, one coat of zinc-rich primer and two coats of polyurethane paint. Touch-up for galvanized steel shall be power tool cleaning to SSPC SP-3 and painting with cold galvanizing compound.
3.07 MISCELLANEOUS A. Stud Welding: Use automatic stud welding systems in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions to weld all studs and deformed anchor bars installed in the shop. Prepare structural steel surfaces as recommended by the stud shear connector or anchor bar manufacturer. Fillet welding shall be used for repair welding only. All welding ferrules shall be broken and removed to allow visual inspection of the stud welds. All weld repairs to stud welds shall be made to the extent required by AWS D1.1. B. Drilled-In-Anchors: Drilled-in anchors into concrete or masonry shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Drilled holes shall be cleaned thoroughly with compressed air blown into the bottom of the drilled hole with a tube. C. Rebar Couplers: Concrete reinforcing bar couplers welded to structural steel shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions and AWS D1.1. D. Slide Bearings: Shop weld TFE slide bearings by controlled fillet welding so as to produce distortion free bearings accurately located and aligned. Erect and assemble slide bearing joints with uniform contact over at least 75 percent of the joint with no separation greater than 0.02 inch.
Page 21 of 21 2/18/2013
Section 05300 Metal Deck and Stud Shear Connectors
Section 05300 Metal Deck and Stud Shear Connectors PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, conditions of the Contract (including General, Supplementary, and Special Conditions), Division 1 Specification Sections and all other Contract Documents apply to work of this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Extent of metal decking and stud shear connectors is indicated on the Drawings, including basic layout and type of deck units required. B. Provide all labor, materials, equipment and services, and perform all operations required for complete furnishing, fabrication and installation of all steel deck and stud shear connectors and related work as indicated on the Drawings, specified in this Section and required by job conditions. C. The work shall include, but not be limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Metal roof, floor and form decking. Pour stops around the building perimeter and at all openings, end closures and closure plates around all columns and work of other trades. Saddles, ridge and valley plates and sump pans and plates. Deck supports not shown or specified under other Sections, but necessary for the proper support of deck and applied loads. Shoring of deck where shown in the Drawings and where required to properly support applied loads and/or maintain uniform concrete slab thickness and maintain specified floor finish tolerances. Cutting and forming of holes and openings through metal deck, including the reinforcing of deck to support safely both temporary and permanent construction. Hanger tabs and other vertical supports for ceilings and other lightweight devices. Field-applied stud shear connectors. Field-applied deformed anchor bars stud welded to structural steel. Touch-up painting in the field. Erection drawings, shop drawings and samples. Protection of work of this Section. Protection of other work from activities under this Section. Submittals. Provisions for other work. All other work shown in the Drawings, specified in this Section or required to make the work complete.
6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16.
1.03 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Submittals Division 1 Sections. B. Cast-In-Place Concrete - Section 03300.
Foundation for Independent Tomorrow BID Documents Las Vegas, NV
Page 1 of 10 2/18/2013
C. Structural Steel - Section 05100. D. Metal Fabrications - Section 05500. E. Spray-On Fireproofing Division 7 Sections. 1.04 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Conform to the requirements of the IBC 2009. B. The following codes, specifications, and standards shall apply to the work. Where conflicts among codes, standards, and specifications exist, the one having the most stringent requirements shall govern. 1. 2. 3. Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members, 2002, by the American Iron and Steel Institute ("AISI Specification"). Specification for Structural Steel Buildings Steel Construction Manual, 13th Edition, by the American Institute of Steel Construction ("AISC Specification"). Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, March 18, 2005, by the American Institute of Steel Construction ("AISC Code"). Sections 6, 7 and 10 apply to the work; the remainder is specifically excluded. Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel, AWS D1.3-98, by the American Welding Society ("AWS D1.3"). Structural Welding Code - Steel, AWS D1.1-00, by the American Welding Society ("AWS D1.1"). Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing and Nondestructive Examination, AWS A2.4-93, by the American Welding Society ("AWS D2.4"). American Society for Testing and Materials ("ASTM") specifications cited shall be the latest edition listed in the Index of the Annual Book of ASTM Standards.
4. 5. 6. 7.
C. Work of this Section shall conform to all applicable federal, state and local laws and regulations. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data and Samples: Submit manufacturer's specifications, catalogs and installation instructions. Include laboratory test reports, manufacturer's certifications and other data to show compliance with the Drawings, Specifications and standard specifications. When requested, submit the following samples to the Architect for acceptance prior to the start of any work. 1. 2. 3. One 2 foot long section of each type of deck. One stud shear connector of each type. Other samples where requested by the Architect.
B. Certifications: Submit certifications for mill tests, stud shear connectors, deformed anchor bars, and galvanizing. C. Deviations: Requests for deviations from the Drawings or Specifications shall be submitted on Contractor's letterhead. Acceptance of shop drawings including deviations not detected during shop drawing review will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to conform strictly to the Contract Documents. Deviations will be allowed only where permitted by the Architect in writing. D. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to the Architect for acceptance in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Architect shall have two weeks to
Page 2 of 10 2/18/2013
review submittal packages from day after submittal arrives in Architects office until day that submittal is sent returned by Architect. 1. At least two weeks prior to the first shop drawing submittal Contractor shall provide Architect with a comprehensive list of all shop drawing submittals, and a schedule indicating when all submittals are to be sent to Architect. If Contractor deviates from this schedule, Architect shall be allowed additional time to review shop drawings. Shop drawings shall be prepared by competent engineering personnel under the supervision of an experienced Professional Engineer registered in the state of Nevada. Shop drawings shall conform to the best standards of the construction industry. Submit shop drawings to the Architect in coordinated packages so that all required information is in hand at time of review. Prior to resubmission of shop drawings, all changes from prior issue shall be clearly circled and identified. Do not fabricate before shop drawings have been reviewed and returned to the Contractor marked either "No Exceptions Taken" or "Make Corrections Noted" only. Shop drawings shall include all steel deck work and welds and shall be accurately dimensioned. Detail to accommodate Contractor's field measurements of supporting and adjoining construction. Prepare erection drawings of steel deck and for field applied stud shear connectors and bar anchors. Show clearly the size and location of steel deck system. Show stud layout and details. Erection procedures, construction loadings and loads shall be considered by the Contractor. Special methods and provisions may be required to avoid overstress and excessive deformations caused by these forces. Submit for review and acceptance field work drawings depicting all field work required to accommodate field conditions. Contractor shall coordinate and cross-check for accuracy, completeness and correct relationship of the work of other Sections, each shop drawing prepared for the work of this Section, including each shop drawing prepared by accepted subcontractors. Architect's review of shop drawings does not relieve Contractor of these responsibilities. Prior to sending submittals to Architect, Contractor and Construction Manager (if applicable) shall coordinate and cross-check for accuracy and completeness each shop drawing prepared for work of this Section with the approved Construction Documents and Specifications. Shop drawings shall bear the stamp of Contractor and Construction Manager indicating that this review has been performed. Architect will not review submittals for which Contractor and Construction Manager have not performed this review. Indicate gage, grade of steel and galvanizing for each piece. Indicate welds and nondestructive tests by using symbols conforming to AWS A2.4. Show and dimension holes through deck and other work required for work of other Sections. Provide field work drawings for holes not shown in shop drawings.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
8.
9. 10. 11.
1.06 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General: Owner will engage and pay for the services of an independent Testing Agency acceptable to the Architect. 1. Contractor shall be responsible for providing the Testing Agency and Architect with proper notice of the initiation of each phase and portion of work requiring testing or
Page 3 of 10 2/18/2013
inspection. Written notice of commencement date shall be provided at least 5 working days prior to the start of work. Subsequently, Contractor shall give a minimum of 24 hours verbal notice of work, or completion of work as applicable, requiring inspection and/or testing. Provide Testing Agency personnel with convenient and safe access to the work and all reasonable assistance necessary to permit effective inspection and testing work. 2. 3. Contractor shall furnish Testing Agency with one copy of each accepted shop drawing bearing the Architect's review stamp. Testing Agency may inspect and test materials and work at any time before, during or after installation. Deficient or incomplete work or materials shall be corrected or replaced, as directed by the Architect, without additional costs or delays to the Owner. The Testing Agency shall report directly to the Owner and Architect the results of all testing and inspection by means of daily written reports. When any test or inspection reveals deficient or non-conforming work, Testing Agency shall notify Owner and Architect immediately by means of a written report specially and clearly marked and identified to show deficient areas or work. Performance or waiving of inspection, testing or surveillance by Testing Agency for a given portion of the work will not relieve Contractor from responsibility to conform strictly to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Where additional tests are deemed necessary by Architect due to failure to pass tests, the cost of additional testing will be deducted from payments to Contractor. If, due to errors by the Contractor or failure to perform his work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Architect must perform additional design or drafting work or review proposed solutions, the Contractor shall, through the Owner, reimburse the Architect in accordance with the Architect's current fee schedule plus out of pocket expenses incurred.
4.
5.
6. 7.
B. Deck: Field inspection of deck shall include verification of correct size, type and gage, inspection of welds and sidelaps and verification of correct installation in accordance with Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions. C. Stud Shear Connectors: Field inspection of stud shear connectors and deformed bar anchors shall include verification of correct number, size, length, spacing, arrangement and welding technique. Inspection of stud welding shall be in accordance with AWS D1.1 Section 7.8. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Contractor shall examine all Contract Documents and note any discrepancies and special construction problems requiring close coordination and exact time schedules; assume responsibility of same and administer action such that construction may proceed properly without delay. 1. Contractor shall perform quality control functions required to achieve, and to document that, work conforms to the Contract Documents. Provide access to Contractor's quality control documents and reports upon request of Owner, Architect or Testing Agency. Contractor shall maintain sufficient office, field engineering, and field supervision staff to assure that all data and layout drawings for work of other Sections is transmitted to detailers to allow proper detailing and to assure proper execution of the work in the field. Provide sufficient qualified supervision, field and shop verification, and cross-checking efforts to assure that all work conforms to the
Page 4 of 10 2/18/2013
2.
Contract Documents. Coordinate and schedule the work of this Section with the work of other Sections of this Specification. 3. Contractor and Construction Manager shall coordinate and schedule the work of this Section with the work of other Sections of this Specification in order to optimize quality and to avoid delay in overall job progress. Prior to starting applicable phases of the work of this Section, Contractor shall cooperate and coordinate with each trade affected by the work of this Section, including areas where work of other sections joins or relates to work of this Section. Contractor shall report unsatisfactory or nonconforming conditions to Architect in writing prior to the start of work.
4.
B. Qualifications: Throughout the progress of the work of this Section, provide at least one person who shall be thoroughly familiar with the specified requirements, completely trained and experienced in the necessary skills, and who shall be present at the site and shall direct all work performed in this Section. 1. The steel deck detailing firm shall be subject to acceptance by the Architect. As a minimum requirement for acceptance, the steel deck detailing firm shall demonstrate experience in detailing of not less than five major buildings and shall demonstrate in-house quality control procedures to the satisfaction of the Architect. Erector shall have experience in the erection of composite steel deck for at least five buildings of the type of this work. Stud shear connector applicators shall have experience in the stud welding through composite metal deck for at least five buildings of the type of this work. Welders and welding operators shall be qualified in accordance with the IBC 2009 and with applicable AWS requirements for each specific welding procedure and process which the welder will use in the work. When requested by the Architect, Contractor shall require welders to be retested.
2. 3. 4.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities: The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the items listed below. While the following list is not intended to be a complete listing of all responsibilities, it is provided to bring these items to the specific attention of the Contractor. Architect's review of shop drawings or other submittals, presence or observation at the jobsite, or performance or waiving of inspection or testing, does not relieve Contractor from these responsibilities. 1. Design, engineering, construction, safety and adequacy of all steel deck work acting as a concrete form. Design and construct deck as a form to withstand all imposed forces, including all construction dead and live loads, horizontal loads from equipment and wind and forces due to vibration of plastic concrete. Provide inspection of all steel deck as a form for conformance with this Specification. Safety and stability of the work. Construction sequences, whether stated or implied, are intended only to assist the Contractor in coordinating the work of the project. Fabrication procedures and the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Correctness of dimensions and quantities, for the fitting to other or existing elements, for conditions to be confirmed and correlated at the site, and for the verification of the physical interrelationships of elements of the work. The amount, method of distributing, and proposed supplemental support of loads during construction. Construction loads shall not exceed the superimposed load which the member, with necessary supplemental support, is capable of carrying
2. 3. 4.
5.
Page 5 of 10 2/18/2013
safely without damage. 6. Obtain all field measurements required for proper fabrication and installation of work covered by this Section. Precise measurements are the responsibility of the Contractor. Report unsatisfactory or non-conforming conditions to the Architect in writing prior to the start of work.
7.
1.08 DELIVERIES, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Steel deck items which are stored on or off the project site shall be supported above ground on platforms, skids or other supports. Deck shall be protected from corrosion. B. Protect steel units from permanent distortion during bundling and hoisting operations. 1.09 DEFICIENT WORK A. Deficient work or any work failing to strictly conform to the Contract Documents shall be removed and replaced, or repaired if accepted by Architect, at no cost to the Owner, Architect or Engineer. 1. Contractor shall prepare appropriate details and procedures to bring such work into conformance with the Contract Documents and submit to Architect for review and acceptance. All drawings and details of proposed corrective work shall be neatly and clearly drafted in scale clearly identifying location and extent of such work. Contractor shall, through the Owner, reimburse the Architect for time and expense incurred reviewing proposal procedures and details in accordance with the Architect's current fee schedule. Nonconforming work may be rejected by Owner, Architect or Engineer at any time, regardless of prior acceptance in shop drawings, prior inspection, inclusions in certificates of payment.
2.
B. Deficient work shall include, but not be limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Bent or warped pieces. Unauthorized cutting. Surface defects. Surfaces not sufficiently clean to receive stud shear connectors or spray fireproofing. Workmanship not in accord with the Drawings, with this Specification, with accepted samples, or with referenced codes or standards. Exceedance of tolerances.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL DECK A. The following are acceptable manufacturers for steel deck. Other manufacturers will be considered by the Architect. 1. 2. 3. Bowman Metal Deck Division of the Cyclops Corp. Vulcraft United Steel Deck, Inc.
B. Steel thickness shall be as shown on the Drawings, but not less than required to adequately brace structural steel work during construction and to meet strength and stiffness
Page 6 of 10 2/18/2013
requirements. Gage and section properties used in determining stress and deflection shall be calculated in accordance with the AISI Specification. C. Geometry and configuration of composite decks shall be nominally symmetric about the neutral axis of its cross section and have an average rib width of 6 inches. D. All floor decks shall have interlocking side laps with horizontal returns on the female sides. E. Metal deck units shall be classified by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. Test results shall be based on spray-applied cementitious fireproofing. F. Steel for deck units shall be ASTM A653 CS Type A, B or C with a minimum yield point of 33 ksi.
G. Galvanizing for deck units shall conform to ASTM A653, minimum of G60 plus conformance to UL 209. 2.02 GALVANIZING REPAIR PAINT A. Paint for field touch-up of galvanized deck shall be high zinc-dust content complying with Military Specification MIL-P-21035 (ships). 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL A. Miscellaneous steel shapes and plates shall be ASTM A36. 2.04 WELDING MATERIALS A. Welding materials shall conform to AWS A5.1-91. Use E7010G for welding deck to structural steel and for deck side laps, E7018 for steel shapes and plates. 2.05 SHEAR CONNECTORS A. Stud shear connectors shall conform to ASTM A108, Grade 1015 or 1020, cold-finished carbon steel. Dimensions shall conform to requirements given in the AISC Specification. Welding equipment used for installation shall conform to the requirements of AWS D1.1. 2.06 FASTENERS A. Self-drilling fasteners for deck edge laps shall be 12-14 x 3/4" HWH TEKS/1 as manufactured by Buildex division of Illinois Tool Works, ENP2 or X-EDN High Shear Nail by Hilti or other accepted by the Architect. 2.07 DEFORMED BAR ANCHORS A. Deformed bar anchors stud welded to structural steel shall be D2L anchors as manufactured by Nelson Stud Division of TRW or other accepted by the Architect. 2.08 LIP HANGERS A. Lip hangers shall be galvanized, not less than 18 gage, not less than 2 inches wide, extending 3 inches below the bottom of the deck with a 3/8 inch diameter hole. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Examination of Field Conditions: Contractor shall examine all surfaces and features to which work must be attached or applied, abut or clear, and shall verify, by measurements at the jobsite, all dimensions affecting the work of this Section. Starting of work shall represent acceptance by Contractor of surfaces, dimensions and conditions as suitable and correct for performing the work as specified. B. Field Measurements: Contractor shall verify, by measurements at the site, all existing
Page 7 of 10 2/18/2013
dimensions, which affect the work of this Section. Field dimensions varying from those on the design drawings or accepted shop drawings shall be brought to the Architect and Engineers attention in writing. 3.02 FABRICATION A. Decking: Deck units shall be factory cut to length and, to the maximum practical extent, shall be continuous over two or more spans. Provide flush abutting ends for floor decks and 2" end laps for roof decks and centering. Side laps shall be provided for floor decks and shall be tight fitting. Provide 2" minimum end bearing on supports for all decks. B. Pour Stops: Fabricate pour stops, flashing, ridge plates and saddles from sheet steel, bent plates or rolled steel shapes as required to withstand loads and maintain true lines and tolerances, but not less than 18 gage thickness. Fabricate edge members to accommodate facade support system members and fittings. Galvanize as specified herein. C. Closures: Fabricate metal closure strips of not less than 20 gage galvanized sheet steel. Provide closures at columns, openings, perimeters, changes in deck direction, and wherever else required to safely and completely contain and support fresh concrete and construction loads. Form to achieve tight fitting closures as to avoid loss of concrete fines. D. Sumps: Fabricate roof sump pans from not less than 14 gage galvanized sheet steel of adequate size to receive roof drains and with bearing flanges not less than 3 inches wide. Recess pans a minimum of 1-1/2 inches below top of deck. Holes for drains may be field cut, reinforce deck prior to cutting. 3.03 ERECTION A. General: Steel deck units, accessories, studs and deformed bar anchors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, accepted shop drawings, and as specified herein. 1. Clean surface of supporting steel, remove grease, oil, and other deleterious material which may interfere with sound welding of stud shear connectors through steel deck and of other welding of deck units to supports. Steel deck units shall bear two inch minimum on supporting framework. Laps of roof decks and centering shall be a minimum of 2 inches and shall occur over supports. Adjust deck units and accessories to final position and accurate alignment. Units shall be free from excessive deflection, local distortions and damage when permanently joined into the structure. Permanently secure deck units prior to their use as storage or working platforms. Locate deck bundles so as to prevent overloading of structure. Systems shown in the Drawings are based on unshored construction. Use shores where required for safety or to meet specified tolerances at option of Contractor. Install pour strips and closure strips to form true and straight perimeter and interior edge conditions. Prevent loss of concrete through gaps and openings at columns, change in deck direction, etc. Provide tight fitting closures at open ends of flutes. Closures shall not reduce concrete volume around shear studs and shall permit placing of reinforcing bars in the deck flutes. Upon completion of installation of floor or form deck system, work shall be ready to receive concrete as a suitable form without leaking or loss of concrete fines. Perimeter edge conditions shall meet required tolerances to accommodate curtain wall support systems and fittings.
2. 3.
4. 5. 6.
7.
Page 8 of 10 2/18/2013
8. 9.
Provide metal or tape joint covers at abutting ends of deck. Upon completion, steel deck shall be clean, with no rusted or scarred areas on either top or bottom of surfaces. Dispose of all stud welding ferrules and other debris. Decking shall be ready to receive concrete without leakage. Touch-up paint where galvanizing has been scratched or damaged.
B. Deck Welding: Welding of steel deck shall be in accordance with AWS D1.3 including appearance, quality of welding and corrective methods. Use only certified welders. 1. Bring steel deck units into intimate contact with steel supporting members prior to and during welding. Flatten embossments as necessary to provide uniform contact between the metal of the steel deck and the face of the supporting steel members prior to stud welding. Remove moisture prior to welding. Weld deck units to structural steel supports as noted in the Drawings. Welds shall be thoroughly fused to the steel deck around the weld perimeter as well as to the supporting steel member. Where necessary, use welding washers to obtain sound fusion welds.
2.
C. Side Laps: Side laps of adjacent floor and roof deck units shall be fastened by one of the following means: 1. 2. 3/8" x 1-1/4" arc seam welds at 36" maximum spacing. Button punching at 24" maximum spacing. To be acceptable, button punching shall provide tight interlocking between sections that effectively prevents differential displacement between adjacent units both longitudinally and vertically. #12 TEKS self-drilling fasteners at 18" maximum spacing. At cantilever spans, fasten side laps 3" from end and at 12" maximum spacing. Use closer spacing than specified herein on any spans as required for erection diaphragm forces or to prevent differential deflection of adjacent edges under fresh concrete or for other construction loads.
3. 4. 5.
D. Stud Welding: Install field-applied stud shear connectors by means of automatically timed stud welding equipment in accordance with AWS D1.1. 1. 2. Manual fillet welding shall not be used except where specifically permitted by the Architect. Shear connector quantities shown in the drawings are based on full connector value per AISC. Should deck geometry and/or configuration reduce the full connectors, Contractor to restore the capacity called for in the Drawings, at no cost to the Owner. Stud weld field-applied deformed anchor bars in strict accordance with the manufacturers instructions. Prepare structural steel surfaces as recommended. Manual fillet welding is strictly prohibited.
3.
E. Reinforcement of Openings in Deck: Provide reinforcement around openings as shown in the Drawings and in accepted shop drawings. Unframed openings larger than 6" shall be reinforced as shown on the Drawings or as necessary, but not less than: 1. 2. 3. Holes 6" to 12" - 16 gage flat sheet, extending 6" beyond hole in all directions, welded to top of deck. Holes 12" to 18" - 1-3/4x1-3/4x3/16 angle perpendicular to ribs of deck at each end of hole extending 16" beyond hole and welded to top side of deck. Sump pans shall be welded to the top of deck with welds in each corner and at 12"
Page 9 of 10 2/18/2013
maximum spacing along sides.
Page 10 of 10 2/18/2013
SECTION 05 50 00 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Metal fabrications, including items fabricated from iron and steel shapes, plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural steel or other metal systems in other Sections of these Specifications. Types of metal items include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 1.02 Carpenters Ironwork Steel grating and frames. Steel pipe Guards Steel Pipe Bollards. Ladders at roofs and elevator pits. Miscellaneous framing and supports. Miscellaneous steel framing. Elevator sill angles and hoist beams. Exterior Trellis/Canopy. Support for folding and operable partitions.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance of Ladders: Provide ladders capable of withstanding the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in ANSI A14.3. Thermal Movements: Provide exterior metal fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
B.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers printed literature for primers, premanufactured items, including fabrication and assembly information.Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Fabrications
05 50 00 - 1
B.
Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings for the fabrication and erection of items and assemblies not completely shown by the Manufacturer's data sheets. 1. 2. 3. 4. Include plans and elevations at not less than 1 inch to 1'-0" scale, and include details of sections and connections at not less than 3 inches to 1'-0" scale. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors and bolts specified for installation under other Sections. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
C. 1.04
Certificates: Submit copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following, except as otherwise shown and specified: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. 1. 2. AISC "Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings." AISI "Specifications for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." ASTM A6 "General Requirements for Rolled Steel Plates Shapes, Sheet Piping and Bars for Structural Use." AWS Structural Welding Code-Steel. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS Standard Qualification Procedure. Submit certification that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for types of welding processes involved on project and has performed similar welds during the preceding 6 months.
Welding Standards:
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS A. Design under direct supervision of Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Nevada.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. Accept metal fabrications on site in labeled shipments. Inspect for damage. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the ground is not permitted. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements.
05 50 00 - 2
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of Shop Drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the Work. Allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrications might delay the Work.
1.08
COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal fabrications. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. General: 1. Exposed Metal: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes
B. C. D. E. F.
Steel Shapes, Plates, Rod, Bars and Bar-sized shapes: ASTM A36. Steel Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A500. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, standard weight (Schedule 40), unless another weight is indicated or required by structural loads. Sheet Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, Grade 33 Structural Quality. Ribbed Steel Deck: ASTM A653 steel, 16 gage ribbed deck comparable to Vulcraft Type 3N, with G90 zinc coating.
2.02
FASTENERS A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563; and, where indicated, flat washers. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; ASTM F 593 for bolts and ASTM F 594 for nuts, Alloy Group 1.
B. C.
05 50 00 - 3
D. E. F. G. H. I.
Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, carbon steel, ASME B18.21.1. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, ASME B18.22.1. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to four times the load imposed, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. Threaded or wedge type; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47 malleable iron or ASTM A 27 cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, hot-dip galvanized per ASTM A 153.
J.
Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. 1. 2. Material for Anchors in Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zincplated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. Material for Anchors in Exterior Locations: Alloy Group 1 stainless-steel bolts complying with ASTM F 593 and nuts complying with ASTM F 594.
K. L.
Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, tumble-wing type, class and style as needed. Gratings: Grating shall be electro-pressure welded construction type as shown on Drawings. Exterior gratings shall be hot-dipped galvanized, after fabrication. Furnish perimeter support angles with welded anchors as detailed.
2.03
ACCESSORIES A. B. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 for steel plates, bars and strips. Metal Primer: Provide primers compatible with finish system specified in Section 09 90 00. 1. Interior and enclosed exterior steel: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer with rust inhibitors, compatible with finish paint systems indicated. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: i. 2. Series 88-HS; Tnemec ii. VOC Steel Spec B50NJ1201; Sherwin Williams Exterior Steel (exposed): 2-component, moisture-cured zinc-rich primer conforming to SSPC-PS12.01. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
05 50 00 - 4
i. C. D.
Corothane I Galvapac B65G10/B69D210; Sherwin Williams
ii. Tneme-Zinc 90-97; Tnemec Company, Inc. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for regalvanizing welds in steel, complying with SSPC-Paint 20. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt mastic complying with SSPC-Paint 12, except containing no asbestos fibers, or cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. Grout: Nonshrink, Nonmetallic, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.
E.
2.04
FABRICATION A. General: For fabrication of Miscellaneous Metal Work which will be exposed to view, use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness. Remove such blemishes by grinding or by welding and grinding, prior to cleaning, treating and application of surface finishes, including zinc coatings. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop, when possible, to minimize field splicing and assembly of units at the site. Disassemble units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of the size and thickness shown, or if not shown, of the required size and thickness to produce adequate strength and durability of the finished product for the intended use. Work to the dimensions of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of Work. Form exposed Work true to line and level with accurate angles, surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise shown. Form bent-metal corners to the smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work. Weld corners and seam continuously and in accordance with the recommendations of AWS. Grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces. Form exposed connections with hairline joints which are flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of the type shown, or if not shown, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting structure and the progress schedule. Fabricate as required to provide adequate support for the intended use of the Work.
B.
C.
2.
3.
4.
5.
05 50 00 - 5
6. 7. D.
Cut, reinforce, drill and tap Miscellaneous Metal Work as may be required to receive finish hardware and similar items of Work. Use hot-rolled steel bars for Work fabricated from bar stock, unless Work is indicated to be fabricated from cold-rolled, or cold-finished stock.
Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees Fahrenheit, ambient; 180 degrees Fahrenheit, material surfaces.
E. F.
Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Carpenter's Iron Work: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabricated bolts, plates, anchors, hangers, dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures. Straight bolts and other stock rough hardware are specified in Division 6 Sections. Manufacture or fabricate items of sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts which bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.
2.
G.
Ladders: Fabricate ladders for locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and anchorages as indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with ANSI A14.3, unless otherwise indicated. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1. Fit rungs into punched holes in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more than 60 inches O.C. Use welded or bolted steel brackets, designed for adequate support and anchorage, and to hold the ladder 6 inches clear of the wall surface and other obstructing construction. Extend rails 42 inches above top rung, and return rails to wall or structure unless other secure handholds are provided. If the adjacent structure does not extend above the top rung, gooseneck the extended rails back to the structure to provide secure ladder access. Provide non-slip surfaces on the top of each rung, either by coating the rung with aluminum oxide granules set in epoxy resin adhesive, or by using a type of manufactured rung which is filled with aluminum oxide grout. Exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, shall have hot-dipped galvanized finish.
5.
6.
05 50 00 - 6
H.
Elevator Sill Angles and Hoist Beams 1. 2. Sill Angles: Steel sections as indicated on shop drawings for support of elevator sills; prime paint, one coat. Hoist Beams: Steel wide flange sections, shape and size required to support applied loads with maximum deflection of 1/240 of the span; prime paint, one coat. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting. Galvanize plates after fabrication. Steel pipe, concrete filled, crowned cap, 6 inches diameter, length as indicated on the Drawings. Prime pain, one coat. Concrete Fill: Comply with requirements of Section 03300 for normalweight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi. Anchors: Concealed type.
I.
Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: 1.
2. 3. J. 1. 2. 3.
Bollards:
4. K.
Exterior Trellis, Accents and Ornamentation: Fabricate to sizes, configurations and shapes indicated using steel tubing, shapes, plate, and rod as detailed. Continuously weld all joints and grind smooth. Provide exposed surfaces smooth, square, and free of surface blemishes, including pitting, rust and scale seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, and roughness, except where these features are a design feature of the ornamental item. 1. Comply with fabrication requirements, including tolerance limits, of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" for architecturally exposed structural steel. Provide anchorage devices as indicated on Drawings and as required for complete installation. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports which are not a part of the structural steel framework, as required to complete Work. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown, or if not shown, of the dimensions required to receive adjacent grating, plates, doors or other Work to be retained by the framing. Except as otherwise shown, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of all welded construction using mitered corners, welded brackets and splice plates, and a minimum number of joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items to be anchored to the Work.
2. L.
Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. 2.
05 50 00 - 7
3.
Equip units with integrally welded anchor straps for casting into concrete or building into masonry wherever possible. Furnish inserts if units must be installed after concrete is poured. Except as otherwise shown, space anchors 24 inches o.c., and provide minimum anchor units of 1-1/4 inch x 1/3 inch x 8 inch steel straps. Provide steel framing and supports that are not a part of structural-steel framework as necessary to complete the Work. Fabricate units from structural-steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction, unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction retained by framing and supports. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.
M.
Miscellaneous Steel Trim: 1. 2.
3. 2.05
FINISHING A. General: 1. 2. B. 1. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Finish metal fabrications after assembly. Painting: a. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1," for shop painting. Shop prime steel surfaces, except the following: i. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches.
Factory Applied Finishes:
ii. Surfaces to be field welded. iii. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections unless using a primer approved for slip-critical conditions and as approved by Structural Engineer. iv. Surfaces to receive sprayed-on fireproofing. v. Galvanized surfaces. b. Surface Preparation: Remove loose rust, loose mill scale, and spatter, slag, or flux deposits before shop coat of paint is applied. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1. Clean surfaces as required by primer manufacture and as follows: i. c. Exterior and Interior Architectural Exposed: SSPC SP-6. ii. Interior (concealed): SSPC SP-2 or SSPC SP-1. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's instructions and to provide a uniform dry
05 50 00 - 8
film thickness required by manufacturer. Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces. d. e. f. g. h. 2. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply 2 coats of shop paint to inaccessible surfaces after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from first. Paint erection marks on painted surfaces. Touch-up surfaces where welding, grinding of welds, joints, etc. are done in the field. Paint shall be thoroughly dry before members are handled. Surfaces shall receive paint finish as specified in Section 09 91 00
Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with applicable standard listed below: a. b. ASTM A 123, for galvanizing steel and iron products. ASTM A 153, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Verify field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive Work. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
B.
3.02
PREPARATION A. B. C. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal and aluminum where site welding is required. Supply steel items required to be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry with setting templates to appropriate Trades. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from water and concrete entry.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Make provisions for erection stresses. Install temporary bracing to maintain alignment, until permanent bracing and attachments are installed. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. Obtain approval of Architect/Engineer prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled.
05 50 00 - 9
F. G.
After erection, touch up welds, abrasions, and damaged finishes with prime paint or galvanizing repair paint to match shop finishes. Install pipe bollards in concrete footings plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 1. 2. Provide adequate bracing as required to hold bollard in position until concrete has been placed and cured. Fill bollards solidly with concrete and mound top surface to shed water.
3.04
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. B. C. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1/4 inch per story or for every 12 ft in height whichever is greater, non-cumulative. Maximum Offset From Alignment: 1/4 inch. Maximum Out-of-Position: 1/4 inch.
3.05
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. END OF SECTION
05 50 00 - 10
SECTION 05 51 00 STEEL STAIRS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 3. 1.02 Steel stair frame of structural sections, with closed risers. Pan to receive concrete fill stair treads and landings Integral balusters and handrailing.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. Steel stairs including stringers, treads, risers and landings, shall be designed and fabricated to support dead load plus live load of 100 psf or a concentrated load of 300 pounds, whichever governs. Limit maximum live load deflection to 1/360 span. Railing assembly, wall rails, and attachments to resist lateral force of 75 lbs at any point without damage or permanent set. Test in accordance with ASTM E935. Fabricate stair assembly to NAAMM AMP 510, Class Architectural.
B. C. 1.03
SUBMITTALS A. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Shop Drawings: Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. Drawings to be stamped and signed by a structural engineer licensed in the State of Nevada. Design Data: Submit design calculations prepared by a structural engineer licensed in the state of Nevada. Welders Certificates: Certify welders employed on the Work, verifying AWS qualification within previous 12 months.
C. D.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with local code and regulatory agency requirements for stair design and the following: 1. 2. 3. B. ANSI A117.1, 1998 "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities." Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
Welding: Conforming to AWS D1.1 and performed by certified welders.
05 51 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Steel Stairs
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS A. Design under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Nevada.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Exercise care during unloading, storage and erection to avoid damage. Dumping on the ground is not permitted. Support material stored at the site completely free of the ground, and cover to avoid damage from the elements.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. Structural T-Shapes: Cut from structural W-shapes. Channels and Angles: ASTM A36/A36M. Round Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. Square and Rectangular Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A500/A500M, Grade B. Structural Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B. Tubing: ASTM A513, Type 5, minimum 50 ksi yield strength. Structural Plates: ASTM A36/A36M. Tread and Landing Concrete Reinforcement: Mesh Bar type, unfinished. Bolts: ASTM A307; Grade A. ASTM A325; Type 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. L. M. N. Finish: Unfinished. Finish: Unfinished. For ASTM A307 Bolts: ASTM F844. a. a. Finish: Unfinished. Finish: Unfinished. For ASTM A325 Bolts: ASTM F436; Type 1. Nuts: ASTM A563 heavy hex type. Washers:
Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of stair structure. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. Shop Primer: SSPC Paint 15, Type 1, red oxide.
05 51 00 - 2
O. P. Q. 2.02
Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer. Stair Treads: concrete in metal pan; 2 inches deep; smooth surface; with 2" painted contrasting color strip edge. Concrete: Type specified in Section 03 30 00.
FABRICATION A. General: 1. 2. 3. B. Conform to Standard Specifications, Rules and Practice of the AISC as described in the "Steel Construction Manual". Form and fabricate the Work to meet installation requirements. Include accessories to adequately secure the Work in place.
Shop fabricate metal stairs to designs and configurations indicated on Drawings and to comply with the Recommended Voluntary Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs of NAAMM (National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers) Standard AMP 510 Metal Stairs Manual for Architectural Classification of stairs for exposed stairs and Commercial Classification for service stairs in stair enclosures, except where more stringent requirements are specified. Metal Pan Units: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Form metal pans of 12 gage thick structural steel sheet. Shape pans to conform to configurations shown. Construct riser and subtread metal pans with steel angle or bar supporting brackets, of size shown, welded to stringers. Secure metal pans to brackets with welds, as shown. Secure subplatform metal pans to platform frames with welds. Form metal treads of thick diamond pattern (checker plate) structural steel sheets. Thickness of diamond pattern (check plate) structural steel sheets shall be as follows: Maximum Tread Span (Stair Width) 44 inches 56 inches 66 inches 2. 3. 4. 5. Plate Thickness 1/4 inch 5/16 inch 5/16 inch
C.
D.
Metal Tread Units: 1.
Shape treads to conform to configurations shown. Construct riser and metal treads with steel angle or bar supporting brackets, of size shown, welded to stringers. Secure metal pans to brackets with welds, as shown. Secure subplatform metal pans to platform frames with welds.
05 51 00 - 3
E. F. G. H. PART 3. 3.01
Fabricate stringers of structural steel shapes as shown. exposed ends of stringers.
Provide closures for
Provide metal framing, hangers, columns, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates and other components as required for support of stairs and platforms. Shop/Factory/Finishing: Clean metal work of grease, rust, mill scale and other foreign matter, and give a coat of primer. Galvanizing: ASTM A653, Class G-60.
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
B.
3.02
PREPARATION A. Where masonry walls support the Steel Stair Work, provide temporary supporting struts, designed for the erection of steel stair components before installation of masonry.
3.03
ERECTION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Make connections between members, unless otherwise indicated, by the use of welds or bolts. Conceal connections in finished Work where possible. Accurately align members for miter exposed joints with hairline joints. Perform welding by the shielded arc method. Grind welds in finished surfaces smooth with no identifying marks remaining exposed. Fabricate units so that bolts and other fastenings do not appear on finish surfaces. Make joints true and tight. Painting: 1. 2. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Remove temporary guys, bracing and bracing clips. Grind flush remaining burrs before painting. Remove welding slag, splatter, rust and burnt paint and clean welds by wire brushing before painting. After steel stairs are erected and before substantial completion, Contractor to paint steel stairs, in accordance with Division 9 painting requirements.
3.
05 51 00 - 4
3.04
05 51 00 - 5
SECTION 05 52 00 HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.02 Steel pipe tube railings. Balusters. Fittings. Handrails.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS A. B. Design handrail, guardrail, and attachments to resist forces as required by applicable code. Apply loads non-simultaneously to produce maximum stresses. Comply with ASTM E985 and IBC Section 1607.7.Fabricate stair assembly to NAAMM AMP 510, Class Architectural.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing dimensions, details and erection diagrams, connections with other work, and structural calculations sealed by a qualified Structural Engineer registered in the State of Nevada, certifying conformance with Code and Performance Requirements.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with local code and regulatory agency requirements for stair design and the following: 1. 2. 3. B. ANSI A117.1, 1998 "Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities." Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
Engineer Qualifications: A qualified engineer who is registered in the State of Nevada and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated for metal handrails and railing similar to those of this Project in material, design, and extent. Welding: Conforming to AWS D1.1 and performed by certified welders.
C.
05 52 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Handrails and Railings
1.05
QUALIFICATIONS A. Design under direct supervision of Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in State of Nevada.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
B. C. 1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field measurements: Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Tubing: ASTM A513, Type 5, minimum 50 ksi yield strength. Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, Schedule 40. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, wall brackets, escutcheons; cast steel. Mounting: brackets and flanges. Prepare backing plate for mounting in wall construction. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing. Splice Connectors: Steel welding collars. F.Metal Primer: VOC compliant. 1. 2. H. Interior Steel: Zinc oxide, alkyd primer, high-solids content, conforming to SSPC-Paint 25.1. Exterior Steel (exposed): 2-component, moisture-cured zinc-rich primer conforming to SSPC-PS 12.01. Interior Anti-Corrosive Paints: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GC-03.
Touch-Up Primer: Match shop primer. 1.
I. J.
Anchoring Cement: Prepackaged, erosion-resistant, non-shrink hydraulic controlled anchoring cement recommended for exterior use. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Prepackaged, non-shrink, nonstaining grout complying with ASTM C 1107 and recommended for interior and exterior use as applicable.
05 52 00 - 2
2.02
FABRICATION A. Shop Assembly: 1. 2. Conform to Standard Specifications, Rules and Practice of the AISC as described in the "Steel Construction Manual". Preassemble items in shop to the greatest extent possible to largest practicable sizes to minimize field splicing/welding and assembly of units at the site. Limit size of shop assembled units only to extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations and galvanizing of exterior units after fabrication. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Form and fabricate the Work to meet installation conditions. Include accessories to adequately secure the Work in place. Make provisions to connect with or to receive abutting construction.
3.
4. 5. 6. B. C. D.
Shop/Factory/Finishing: Clean surfaces of grease, rust, mill scale, and other foreign matter, and apply coat of primer, except galvanized surfaces. Galvanizing: Galvanize all exterior railing, sleeves, brackets and flanges after fabrication to comply with ASTM A123 and ASTM A153 as applicable. Make connections between members, unless otherwise indicated by welding. 1. 2. 3. 4. Cope and cut components for hairline fit prior to welding. Accurately align members. Fabricate joints watertight for exterior applications. Welds shall be flush type, with fillets dressed to uniform radius, using the shielded arc method.
E.
Where bolted or screw connections are indicated or necessary, use round or oval head bolts and tamper-resistant screws and conceal in the finished work to the greatest extent possible. Provide metal end caps at exposed or open end conditions. Grind welds, projections and corners in finished surfaces smooth. No identifying marks shall remain exposed.
F. G.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
B.
05 52 00 - 3
3.02
PREPARATION A. B. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal where site welding is required. Supply items required to be cast into concrete and or embedded in masonry placed in partitions with setting templates, to appropriate sections.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. Install steel railings and handrails at locations indicated. Install components plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Anchor railings to structure with concealed anchors. Install items anchored in concrete in the formwork, where practicable. Install items to be built into masonry so masonry can be built up to them. Where indicated, anchor posts in concrete with core drilled holes or pre-set sleeves of diameter at least 3/4 more than diameter of post being anchored and not less than 5 deep. Fill space with non-shrink, non-metallic grout or anchoring cement. Install posts and vertical members plumb within 1/8 inch of vertical. Install longitudinal members parallel with each other and to floor surfaces or slope of stairs to within 1/8 inch per 10 running feet. Securely anchor wall brackets. Field weld anchors as indicated on shop drawings. Touch-up welds with primer. Grind welds smooth. Conceal bolts and screws whenever possible. Where not concealed, use flush countersunk fastenings. Assemble with spigots and sleeves to accommodate tight joints and secure installation.
G.
H. I. J. K.
3.04
05 52 00 - 4
Section 061053 Rough Carpentry
SECTION 061053 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1. GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes: Rough carpentry including, but not limited to: 1. Dimensional lumber, boards and timber. 2. Wall and Roof framing. 3. Roof sheathing. 4. Preservative treatment of wood. 5. Fire retardant treatment of wood. 6. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing. 7. Framing with engineered wood products. 8. Plywood telephone and electrical backer boards. 9. Wood blocking at Concrete Walls as detailed. 10. 11. 12. B. Concealed Wood blocking for support of toilet and bath accessories, wall mounted cabinets. Plywood sheathing at walls where indicated. Fasteners, anchors and connectors.
Related Sections: 1. Section 03 30 00: Setting anchors in concrete. 2. Section 08 11 13: Window and Door openings to receive wood blocking. 3. Section 07 72 00: Wood roof decking to receive wood curbs and cants.
1.02
REFERENCES A. American Wood-Preservers Association: 1. AWPA M4 - Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products. 2. AWPA U1 - Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood. B. ASTM International: 1. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware. 2. ASTM B695 - Standard Specification for Coatings of Zinc Mechanically Deposited on Iron and Steel 3. ASTM C1177/C1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. 4. ASTM C1280 - Standard Specification for Application of Gypsum Sheathing. 5. ASTM C1396/C1396M - Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. 6. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
Page 1 of 10 2/18/2013
7. ASTM E119 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 8. ASTM F1667 - Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples. C. Forest Stewardship Council: 1. FSC Guidelines - Forest Stewardship Council Guidelines. D. Green Seal: 1. GS-36 - Aerosol Adhesives. E. National Lumber Grades Authority: 1. NLGA - Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber. F. Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association: 1. NELMA - Standard Grading Rules for Northeastern Lumber. G. The Redwood Inspection Service: 1. RIS - Standard Specifications for Grades of California Redwood Lumber. H. South Coast Air Quality Management District: 1. SCAQMD Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant Applications. I. Southern Pine Inspection Bureau: 1. SPIB - Standard Grading Rules for Southern Pine Lumber. J. U.S. Department of Commerce National Institute of Standards and Technology: 1. DOC PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. 2. DOC PS 2 - Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels. 3. DOC PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. K. West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau: 1. WCLIB - Standard Grading Rules for West Coast Lumber. L. Western Wood Products Association: 1. WWPA G-5 - Western Lumber Grading Rules. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. B. Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. Shop Drawings For Site Fabricated Truss Frame: Indicate dimensions, wood species and grades, component profiles, drilled holes, fasteners, connectors, erection details and sequence. Product Data: Submit technical data on insulated sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. Samples of Exposed To View Wood Members: Submit two samples, 3 x 3 inch in size illustrating wood grain, stain, and finish. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify Products meet or exceed specified requirements.
C. D. E.
Page 2 of 10 2/18/2013
F.
Indoor Air Quality Certificates: 1. Certify volatile organic compound content for each interior adhesive, sealant and related primer. 2. Certify each composite wood and agrifiber product contains no added urea-formaldehyde resins.
G.
Product Data: 1. Manufacturers data for wood-preservative treatment and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. 2. Manufacturers data for fire-retardant treatment and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials, both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures when tested according to ASTM D 5516 and ASTM D 5664. 3. Submit copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 4. Submit certification that moisture content meets specified requirements at time of installation.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Identify each piece of lumber or plywood used for structural framing with grade and trade mark of a lumber grading organization. Trade mark of manufacturer shall also appear on each piece. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood product through one source from a single manufacturer. Source Limitations for Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Obtain each type of fireretardant-treated wood product through one source from a single producer. Grading Rules: Conform with applicable requirements of American Lumber Standards "Simplified Practice Recommendation R-16" and to grading rules of manufacturer's association under whose rules the lumber is produced. Standards: Conform with the requirements of American Plywood Association, U. S. Dept. of Commerce Commercial Standards and American Wood Preservers Association Standards, as they apply. Fire Rated Wall Construction: Rating as indicated on Drawings. 1. Tested Rating: Determined in accordance with ASTM E119. G. Surface Burning Characteristics: 1. Fire Retardant Treated Materials: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. H. Apply label from agency approved by authority having jurisdiction to identify each preservative treated and fire retardant treated material.
B. C. D.
E.
F.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact.
Page 3 of 10 2/18/2013
B.
Storage: Store off ground to assure adequate ventilation, and protect against damage while stored at the site. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. Handling: Comply with manufacturer's instructions.
C. 1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Store materials for which a maximum moisture is specified in areas where humidity can be controlled.
PART 2. PRODUCTS 2.01 DIMENSIONAL LUMBER A. General: 1. Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. 2. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Moisture Content: Expressed as a percentage of the weight of oven-dry wood at time of installation 5. Moisture Content: Expressed as a percentage of the weight of oven-dry wood at time of installation: a. 2-inch nominal thickness or less: 19 percent maximum moisture content. B. C. D. 2.02 Species: As indicated on General Structural Notes and Drawings. Grades: As indicated on General Structural Notes and Drawings. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.
ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS A. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units complying with APA PRI-400; depths and performance ratings not less than those indicated Conform to Standard Specifications, Rules and Practice of the AISC as described in the "Steel Construction Manual". 1. Materials: Plywood web joists shall be factory manufactured with structural grade plywood, microlam or machine stress rated lumber flanges, utilizing waterproof type glues. Plywood webs shall be APA structural I grade with face veneers installed with grain running in the vertical direction of the joist and butt jointed to form a continuous web member. The web shall be pressure formed and fit into a groove in the center of the wide face of the flange members so as to form a pressured glue-joint at that junction. 2. Structural Capacities: Establish and monitor structural capacities according to ASTM D 5055.
Page 4 of 10 2/18/2013
3. Trademark: Factory mark I-joists with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and I-joist compliance with APA standard. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation. b. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation. c. Trus Joist MacMillan. 2.03 SHEET PRODUCTS A. General: 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial." 2. Factory mark panels according to indicated standard. B. Plywood: DOC PS 1. Each panel of softwood plywood shall be identified with the APA grade-trademark and shall meet the requirements of PS-1-83 for softwood plywood. 1. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. 2. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1 sheathing. a. Thickness: As indicated on General Structural Notes and Drawings. C. D. 2.04 Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated on Drawings. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backer Boards: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire-retardant treated, 15/16 inches thick unless otherwise indicated.
TREATED MATERIALS A. Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2 (lumber) and AWPA C9 (plywood) 1. Materials: a. Provide ammoniacal copper quaternary (ACQ) or copper boron azole (CBA). b. Chromated copper arsenate (CCA) is not allowed. 2. Locations: a. Wood members in connection with roofing or flashing. b. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete, located at or below grade. c. Wood framing members less than 18 inches above grade. d. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. e. Blocking occurring on top of or above the roof deck, including the nailer beneath the flashing at parapet caps.
Page 5 of 10 2/18/2013
f. B.
Other locations as required by Code.
Fire Retardant Treatment: Comply with performance requirements in AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Use treatment for which chemical manufacturer publishes physical properties of treated wood after exposure to elevated temperatures, when tested by a qualified independent testing agency according to AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). 2. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. 3. Chemicals shall comply with FR-1 or AWPA Standard P17 and shall be free of halogens, sulfates and ammonium phosphate. 4. Lumber shall be kiln dried to maximum moisture content of 19 percent after treatment, 15 percent for plywood.
2.05
FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this Article for material and manufacture. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in contact with ground, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153. 2. Fasteners in contact with wood that has been pressure-preservative treated shall be hot dip zinc coated complying with ASTM A 153, or stainless steel complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594. B. C. D. E. F. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667 and as indicated on General Structural Notes and Drawings. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5. G. Metal Framing Anchors: Made from hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653, G60 coating designation. 1. Research/Evaluation Reports: Provide products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which model code research/evaluation reports exist that show compliance of metal framing anchors, for application indicated, with building code in effect for Project.
Page 6 of 10 2/18/2013
2. Allowable Design Loads: Meet or exceed those indicated per manufacturer's published values determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. PART 3. EXECUTION 3.01 FRAMING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. 2. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. 3. Structural Members: No cutting, notching or drilling without prior approval of the Structural Engineer through the Architect. 4. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber and plywood. 5. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: a. Published requirements of metal framing anchor manufacturer. b. IBC 2009. B. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood; predrill as required. Use finishing nails for exposed work, unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with wood filler. Connections: Subdrill where necessary to avoid splitting. Bolts: Drill bolt holes 1/32 inch larger than bolt diameter. Use square plate or malleable iron washers under heads and nut where they bear against wood. Re-tighten bolts immediately prior to concealing with finish materials. Retighten exposed bolts immediately prior to final inspection by Building Official. Lag Screws and Screws: Subdrill, use square plate or malleable iron washer under lag screw heads when they bear on wood. Exterior base plates or sills resting on concrete: Bed in continuous bead of adhesive/sealant. Backing, Furring, Stripping and Blocking: Install where indicated and where required for installation and attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other work involved.
C. D. E.
F. G. H.
Page 7 of 10 2/18/2013
1. Provide fire-proofed wood backing approved by Building Official where required by Code in noncombustible or fire-rated construction. 2. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. 3. Blocking: a. Provide continuous horizontal blocking, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width studs, as follows i. Stud partitions or walls more than 8 feet but less than 14 feet in height: One row of blocking fitted snugly and nailed into mid-height of stud. Walls or partitions over 14 feet in height: 2 or more rows of blocking. Locate rows of blocking so that in no case will the distance between sole or top plates and blocking or between lines of blocking exceed 8 feet.
ii.
b. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level and at ceiling line of top story. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted wood blocks of 2-inch nominal- thick lumber of same width as framing members. I. Wood Framing - General: 1. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated. 2. Do not splice structural members between supports. 3. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- dimension lumber on edge are required, fasten together with 2 rows of 20d nails spaced not less than 32 inches o.c. Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. J. Wall and Partition Framing: Arrange studs so wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-load-bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Construct corners and intersections with 3 or more studs. 2. Openings: Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. a. Non-load-bearing partitions,: Provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 4-inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width.
Page 8 of 10 2/18/2013
b. Load-bearing walls: Provide double-jamb studs for openings 72 inches and less in width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated. 3. Provide bracing in walls, at locations indicated and as required by local code, unless otherwise indicated. K. Timber Framing: 1. Install timber with crown edge up and provide not less than 4 inches of bearing on supports. Provide continuous members, unless otherwise indicated; tie together over supports if not continuous. 2. Where beams or girders are framed into pockets of exterior concrete or masonry walls, provide 1/2-inch air space at sides and ends of wood members. 3. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated. 4. Treat ends of timber beams and posts exposed to weather by dipping in water-repellent preservative for 15 minutes. L. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated on General Structural Notes and Drawings.
3.02
CEILING JOIST INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. 1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- size or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Provide collar beams (ties) as indicated or, if not indicated, provide 1-by-6-inch nominal- size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches o.c. Locate below ridge member, at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions, if any.
C. 3.03
SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No. E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential & Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated. 1. Comply with "Code Plus" provisions in above-referenced guide. 2. Install with the "C" or best face on exposed side. 3. Install roof sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to joints. 4. Install wall sheathing with long dimension vertical. 5. Sheathing shall have edges blocked and nailed for diaphragm or shear wall stresses as shown on the Drawings.
Page 9 of 10 2/18/2013
B.
Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Nail or screw to wood framing, as approved by Structural Engineer. 2. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
3.04
PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Plywood Backing Panels: Install with the C or best face on exposed side.
3.05
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises.
A. END OF SECTION
B. Slide Bearings: Shop weld TFE slide bearings by controlled fillet welding so as to produce distortion free bearings accurately located and aligned. Erect and assemble slide bearing joints with uniform contact over at least 75 percent of the joint with no separation greater than 0.02 inch.
Page 10 of 10 2/18/2013
SECTION 06 40 00 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 3. 1.02 Cabinets and countertops. Plastic Laminates Solid Surfacing countertops.
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturers literature for each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories, and finishing materials and processes. Provide data on fire retardant treatment materials and application instructions
2. B.
Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned in plans and elevations, construction details, attachment devices, hardware, and schedule of finishes. 1. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and hole penetrations through installed architectural woodwork. Submit two 6 inch x 6 inch size samples, illustrating cabinet finish, color and texture. Submit two 6 inch x 6 inch size samples, illustrating each countertop finish, color, and texture. Submit two 6 inch x 6 inch samples of each wood species to receive transparent finish at job site and at mill. Submit 2 samples of each type of hardware, illustrating hardware finish.
C.
Samples: 1. 2. 3. 4.
D. E.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of woodwork certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.
06 40 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Architectural Woodwork
1.03
REFERENCES A. Reference Standards: Comply with the following: 1. 2. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" 8th Edition, Version 1.0 (2003). ANSI/NEMA LD3 for laminates.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with AWI (Architectural Woodwork Institute) Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated. 1. Quality Level: a. 2. B. C. Provide Custom Grade for typical architectural woodwork (e.g. plastic laminate casework) when not otherwise indicated.
Affix Quality Grade Stamp to each unit of product (e.g. each case; each panel; each bundle of trim, etc.).
Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be company specializing in manufacturing the product specified in this Section with minimum 3 years documented experience. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Flame Spread Index: Where fire-retardant treated wood is specified or required by Code requirements, provide materials that have been tested in accordance with ASTM E84 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Fire-retardant treated materials shall be identified with appropriate classification markings indicating rating on surfaces that will be concealed from view in the finished work or by separate removable label applied by the treated wood manufacturer.
2.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Project Conditions" Article.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAV system is operating and maintaining a temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication
B.
06 40 00 - 2
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
1.07
COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS WOOD MATERIALS A. B. General each type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated. Wood Sheet Products 1. 2. 3. Hardboard: AHA A135.4. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD Provide Grade MDExterior Glue at locations subject to moisture or exterior conditions. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade MD. Provide Grade MD-Exterior Glue at locations subject to moisture or exterior conditions. Provide sanded faces for drawer and shelving construction. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, Douglas Fir face species, rotary cut, exterior glue, sanded finish. Provide marine grade at locations subject to moisture.
4.
2.02
LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Plastic Laminate: High pressure decorative type. 1. 2. 3. Horizontal Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50, .050 inch thickness. Horizontal Grade (Color-Thru): NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50 with color extending through material thickness. Horizontal Grade (High Wear): Exceeding NEMA LD-3, Grade GP50, 0.048 inch thickness. Wear resistance: 3.1 at 3500 cycles in accordance with NEMA LD-3 test method. Vertical Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade GP28, (.028 inch thickness). This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. Fire-Rated Horizontal Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade FR50; 0.050 inch thickness. Fire Rated Vertical Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade FR32, 0.032 inch thickness. Post Forming Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade PF 42.
4. 5. 6. 7.
06 40 00 - 3
8. 9.
Cabinet Liner Grade: NEMA LD-3, Grade CL-20, (.020 inch thickness). This grade of laminate shall be counterbalanced. Thermoset Decorative Overlay (Melamine): Particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, or medium-density fiberboard complying with ANSI 208.3, Grade MD, with surface of thermally fused, melamineimpregnated decorative paper complying with LMA SAT-1. Backer: NEMA LD-3, Grade BK-20 (.020 inch thickness). Veneer Edge Band: 3 mm PVC edge band matching plastic laminate. Finishes, Colors and Patterns: As indicated on Drawings. Manufacturers a. b. c. d. e. Formica Corporation Laminart Nevamar Pionite Wilsonart International; Division of Premak International, Inc.
10. 11. 12. 13.
B.
Plastic Laminate Balancing Sheet: .020 inch plastic laminate backing sheet, meeting NEMA standards and be of a type and thickness to properly balance face finish. Fasteners and Adhesives: 1. Adhesive for Bonding High Pressure Decorative Laminates: Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. a. b. Interior Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with SCAQMD Rule 1168. Interior Aerosol Adhesives: Maximum volatile organic compound content in accordance with GS-36.
C.
2.03
SOLID SURFACING MATERIAL A. Solid-Surfacing Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with material and performance requirements in ANSI Z124.3, for Type 5 or Type 6, without a precoated finish. 1. 2. 3. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings. Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated on the Drawings. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. Avonite; Avonite, Inc. Corian; DuPont Polymers. Surell; Formica Corporation. Fountainhead; International Paper, Decorative Products Div. Gibraltar; Wilsonart International
06 40 00 - 4
2.04
A.
CABINET HARDWARE
Grommets: Plastic material for cut-outs.
A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H.
Shelf Standards and Rests: Formed steel channels and rests, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; satin finish. Drawer and Door Pulls: "U" shaped pull, aluminum with satin finish, 4 inch centers. Sliding Door Pulls: Circular shape, aluminum with satin finish. Cabinet Locks: Keyed cylinder, two keys for each lock, master keyed, steel with satin finish. Catches: Magnetic. Drawer Slides: Galvanized steel construction, ball bearings separating tracks, full extension type. Hinges: Knuckle disappearing type, steel with satin finish. Sliding Door Track Assemblies: Galvanized steel construction, ball bearing carriers fitted within tracks, multiple pendant suspension attachments for door.
2.05
ACCESSORIES A. B. C. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, fireretardant treated as required, kiln-dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. Nails: Hot-dip galvanized. Screws: Hot-dip galvanized. 1. D. For metal framing supports, provide self-drilling screws as recommended by metal framing manufacturer.
Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.
2.06
FABRICATION GENERAL A. B. Interior Woodwork Grade: Fabricate architectural woodwork and cabinets in conformance with AWI Custom grade standards. General: 1. 2. Exposed fasteners are not allowed in the finish Work on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of AWI for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas.
C.
Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following:
06 40 00 - 5
1. 2. 3. D.
Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members and Rails: 1/16 inch.
Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible, before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment.
E.
Shop cut openings, to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish.
2.07
FABRICATION CABINETS AND COUNTERTOPS A. B. C. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for wood cabinets. Style: 1. 1. 2. 3. D. 1. Door and Drawer Fronts: As selected by Architect. Core: 3/4 inch, 45 lb industrial grade particle board minimum. Laminated with the same material on both sides. All edges to receive edge banding. Plastic Laminate: Cap exposed edges of plastic laminate casework with 3mm matching PVC edge banding laminated to edge with PUR resin. Use one piece for full length only. Doors:
Edge Treatment:
E.
Shelves: Fabricate shelves with 3/4 inch thick wood particleboard cores unless otherwise indicated. 1. Laminate, Shelves within Casework: Melamine, thermally fused, 3mm edge banding at all adjustable shelf edges, unless otherwise indicated. Apply edge banding with PUR resin. Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for high-pressure decorative laminate countertops.
F.
Plastic Laminate Countertops: 1.
06 40 00 - 6
2.
Core Material: Particleboard made with exterior glue or Medium-density fiberboard made with exterior glue. Provide marine grade plywood at locations subject to moisture. Back splashes: Integrally formed, postformed, and separate side splashes with integral scribe for fitting to wall and back splash. Edge Treatment: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI Section 400 requirements for countertops. Grade: Custom. Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied backsplashes and edges, unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.
3. 4. G.
Solid Surface Countertops: 1. 2. 3.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION PREPARATION A. B. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installation. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. B. Quality Standard: Install woodwork to comply with AWI Section 1700, Custom grade. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level `and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, and refinish cut surfaces and repair damaged finish at cuts. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. Exposed fasteners are not allowed. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings
C. D.
E. F.
06 40 00 - 7
and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. 2. G. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with appropriate fasteners.
Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. Calk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Section 07 92 00 -Interior and Miscellaneous Joint Sealants.
2. H.
Wall Hung Cabinets: Screws shall be concealed behind doors or drawers. At locations that are not possible to conceal, fasten utilizing blind fastening methods.
3.03
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION
B. C.
06 40 00 - 8
SECTION 07 13 13 BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 1.02 Waterproofing at retaining walls.
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and recommendations. Include certification of data indicating VOC content of components. Samples: Submit samples of membrane, protection board and composite drainage material.
B.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. 2. 3. Minimum 3 years experience with Projects of similar scope and complexity. Applicator shall be approved by Membrane Manufacturer. Applicator shall furnish written evidence that applicator is currently approved by manufacturer to install the products required or specified for this project.
B.
Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this Work with related and adjacent Work. Agenda for meeting shall include review of special details and flashing. Manufacturer's Representative: Make arrangements necessary to have a trained employee of the Manufacturer on-site periodically to review waterproofing installation procedures.
C.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. Materials shall be delivered in Manufacturer's original unopened packages with Manufacturer's labels intact. Material shall be protected from rain and physical damage. Store materials away from sparks or flames. Store membrane where it will not receive high temperature exposure for extended periods of time. Outdoors, place cartons on raised pallets and cover completely. Manufacturer's directions. Follow
C.
07 13 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. Perform Work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the limits established by the Manufacturer of the materials and products used. Proceed with installation only when substrate construction and preparation Work is complete and in condition to receive sheet membrane waterproofing.
1.06
WARRANTY A. Provide Manufacturer's written warranty for a period of 5 years, against failure of waterproofing system to perform in accordance with the terms expressed in the manufacturer's standard warranty.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products of one of the following Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements: 1. 2. 3. B. W. R. Grace Bituthene www.grace.com W. R. Meadows Sealtight Mel-Rol www.wrmeadows.com Carlisle CCW-860 www.carlisle-ccw.com
Waterproof Membrane: Bituthene 3000 or 4000 membrane equivalent products as manufactured by Carlisle CCW or equal. Provide self-adhering membrane of 56 mils (minimum) of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 4 mils (minimum) of polyethylene sheeting.
2.02
MATERIALS A. Waterproof Membrane: Bituthene 3000 or 4000 membrane minimum selfadhering membrane of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 4 mils of polyethylene sheeting. Primer, Elastomeric Mastic and Protection Board Adhesive: Membrane Manufacturer. Protection Material: 1. Horizontal: Bituthene Asphaltic Hardboard, or Amoco Foam Products AMOCOR-PB4 or equal under the Substitution requirements of Section 01 60 00. Vertical: One inch thick expanded polystyrene. Horizontal beneath concrete pavement and traffic areas: W.R. Grace Hydroduct 660, equivalent products as manufactured by Carlisle CCW or equal As furnished by
B. C.
2. D. 1.
Composite Drainage/Protection Board:
07 13 13 - 2
2. 3.
Vertical and horizontal beneath landscaped areas: W.R. Grace Hydroduct 220, equivalent products as manufactured by Carlisle CCW or equal. Perimeter drain: W.R. Grace Hydroduct 600, equivalent products as manufactured by Carlisle CCW or equal.
PART 3. 3.01
- EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Coordination: Coordinate with other work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
B.
3.02
PREPARATION OF SUBSTRATES A. Refer to Manufacturer's literature for requirements for preparation of substrates. Surfaces shall be structurally sound and free of voids, spalled areas, loose aggregate and sharp protrusions. Remove contaminants such as grease, oil, and wax from exposed surfaces. Remove dust, dirt, loose stone and debris. Use repair materials and methods which are acceptable to Manufacturer of sheet membrane waterproofing. Masonry Substrates: Apply waterproofing over concrete block and brick with smooth trowel-cut mortar joints or parge coat. Related Materials: Treat joints and install flashings as recommended by Waterproofing Manufacturer.
B. C.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. Refer to Manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation, including but not limited to, the following: 1. Apply primer at the rate recommended by Manufacturer. Recoat areas not waterproofed if contaminated by dust. Mask and protect adjoining exposed finish surfaces to protect those surfaces from excessive application of primer. Delay application of membrane until primer is completely dry. Dry time will vary with weather conditions. Seal daily terminations with troweled bead of mastic. Apply protection board and related materials in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations.
2. 3. 4. B.
At the end of each working day, water cut-offs must be installed to protect against water penetration under installed membrane. Temporary water cut-offs shall be removed before Work is resumed. Seal daily terminations with a trowelled bead of elastomeric membrane.
07 13 13 - 3
C. D.
Where metal edging occurs set flanges in mastic and secure as shown on Drawings. Strip in with membrane. Install protection material the same day the membrane is applied. Secure protection material in place by an approved method until concrete or backfill is placed. Nails or other fasteners shall not penetrate through the membrane. Install drainage composite over dry substrate free of dirt or other materials which will prevent bonding of composite. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide perimeter drain system in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction.
E.
3.04
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION
07 13 13 - 4
SECTION 07 21 00 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 1.02 Interior batt insulation.
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data, installation instructions, limitations and recommendations. Include certification and test data substantiating R-Values and combustibility of each type of insulation.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with fire-test-response characteristics as required by code, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84 for surface-burning characteristics, by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. Johns-Manville Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. Certainteed
2.02
INSULATING MATERIALS A. Glass fiber batts: Batts shall be a single thickness to meet the required R-value. 1. Unfaced Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. Only to be used in walls. Faced Mineral-Fiber Blanket: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indices of 25 and 50, respectively; passing
2.
07 21 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Insulation
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. To be used at underside of roof plywood deck. Blankets should have stapling flanges. 3. R-Values (calculated per LTTR method): a. Walls: b. Roof: B. Acoustical Batt Insulation: Insulation. R-20 minimum R-30 minimum. As specified in Section 09 81 00 Acoustical
PART 3. 3.01
- EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections in which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. 3.02
PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. 2. 3. Do not install insulation until the Construction has progressed to the point that inclement weather will not damage or wet the insulation material. Install insulation to comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated. Install materials in a manner that will maximize continuity of thermal envelope. Use a single layer of insulation wherever possible to achieve indicated requirements, unless otherwise indicated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.
4. 5. B.
Batt Insulation: Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Wood-framed construction: Install mineral-fiber blankets according to ASTM C 1320 and as follows:
2. 3.
07 21 00 - 2
a.
With faced blankets having stapling flanges, secure insulation by inset, stapling flanges to sides of framing members.
3.04
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. Protection: Take precautions to protect insulation, both during and after installation, from damage of any kind until covered. END OF SECTION
B.
07 21 00 - 3
SECTION 07 24 00 EXTERIOR INSULATION AND FINISH SURFACE PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Exterior insulation and finish system (EIFS).
REFERENCE A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement ASTM C 297 Standard Test Method for Flatwise Tensile Strength of Sandwich Constructions ASTM C 1177 Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing ASTM C 1396 (formerly C 79) Standard Specification for Gypsum Board ASTM D 968 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6191) Standard Test Methods for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by Falling Abrasive ASTM D 2247 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6201) Standard Practice for Testing Water Resistance of Coatings in 100% Relative Humidity ASTM D 3273 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber ASTM D 4060 Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials ASTM E 96 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials ASTM E 119 Standard Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials ASTM E 283 Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen ASTM E 330 Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 331 Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference ASTM E 2098 Test Method for Determining the Tensile Breaking Strength of Glass Fiber Reinforcing Mesh for use in Class PB Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS), after Exposure to Sodium Hydroxide Solution
M. N. O.
07 24 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Exterior Insulation and Finish Surface
P. Q. R. S. T. U.
ASTM E 2134 Test Method for Evaluating the Tensile-Adhesion Performance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) ASTM E 2178 Standard Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials ASTM E 2273 Test Method for Determining the Drainage Efficiency of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) Clad Wall Assemblies ASTM E 2357 Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier Assemblies ASTM E 2430 Standard Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Thermal Insulation Boards for use in Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) ASTM E 2485 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.01) Standard Test Method for FreezeThaw Resistance of Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) and WaterResistive Barrier Coatings ASTM E 2486 (formerly EIMA Std. 101.86) Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Class PB and PI Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems (EIFS) ASTM G 155 (Federal Test Standard 141A Method 6151) Standard Practice for Operating-Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials Mil Std E5272 Environmental Testing Mil Std 810B Environmental Test Methods NFPA 268 Standard Test Method for Determining Ignitibility of Exterior Wall Assemblies Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
V. W. X. Y. Z.
AA. NFPA 285 Standard Method of Test for the Evaluation of Flammability Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Wall Assemblies Containing Combustible Components Using the Intermediate-Scale, Multistory Test Apparatus BB. ANSI FM 4880 Evaluating Insulated Wall or Wall and Roof/Ceiling Assemblies; Plastic Interior Finish Materials; Plastic Exterior Building Panels; Wall/Ceiling Coating Systems; Interior or Exterior Finish Systems 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. EIFS Performance: Comply with the following: 1. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. Weather tightness: Resistant to water penetration from exterior into EIFS and assemblies behind it or through them into interior of building that results in deterioration of thermal-insulating effectiveness or other degradation of EIFS and assemblies behind it, including substrates, supporting wall construction, and interior finish.
2.
B.
Provide EIFS having physical properties and structural performance that comply with the following when tested per methods referenced:
07 24 00 - 2
1.
Abrasion Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for a minimum of 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, or loss of film integrity after exposure to 528 quarts of sand when tested per ASTM D 968, Method A. Accelerated Weathering Characteristics: Sample of size suitable for test equipment and consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 2000 hours when viewed under 5 times magnification per ASTM G 23, Method 1, or ASTM G 53. Absorption-Freeze Resistance: No visible deleterious effects and negligible weight loss after 60 cycles per EIMA 101.01. Mildew Resistance of Finish Coat: Sample applied to 2-by-2-inch clean glass substrate, cured for 28 days, and showing no growth when tested per ASTM D 3273. Tensile Adhesion: No failure in the adhesive, base coat, or finish coat. Minimum 5-psi tensile strength before and after freeze-thaw and accelerated weathering tests per EIMA 101.03. Water Penetration: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2inch- (12.7mm-) thick gypsum board, cured for 28 days, and showing no water penetration into the plane of the base coat to expanded polystyrene board interface of the test specimen after 15 minutes at 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. of air pressure difference or 20 percent of positive design wind pressure, whichever is greater, across the specimen during a test period when tested per EIMA 101.02. Water Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS mounted on 1/2inch- thick gypsum board; cured for 28 days; and showing no cracking, checking, crazing, erosion, rusting, blistering, peeling, or delamination after testing for 14 days per ASTM D 2247. Impact Resistance: Sample consisting of 1-inch- thick EIFS when constructed, conditioned, and tested per EIMA 101.86; and meeting or exceeding the following impact classification and range as required by local code: a. b. Standard Impact Resistance: 25 to 49 inch-lb. Medium Impact Resistance: 50 to 89 inch-lb.
2.
3. 4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Positive and Negative Wind-Load Performance: Sample assembly, 48 by 48 inches in size, consisting of studs, sheathing, and 1-inch- thick EIFS; and showing capability to withstand wind loads indicated when tested per ASTM E 330.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and component of EIFS indicated.
07 24 00 - 3
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of components, details of penetration and termination, flashing details, joint locations and configurations, fastening and anchorage details including mechanical fasteners, and connections and attachments to other work. Samples for Verification: 24 inch x 24 inch panels for each type of finish-coat color and texture indicated, prepared using same sheathing substrate, tools and techniques intended for actual work including and a typical control joint filled with sealant of color selected. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that EIFS comply with requirements. Qualification Data: For Installer, fabricator/erector, and testing agency. Material Test Reports: For each insulation, reinforcing mesh, and coating. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers or a third-party agency approved by EIFS manufacturer for the following: 1. 2. Cementitious materials and aggregates (for field mixed products) Each type of insulation specified
C.
D. E. F. G.
H. I. 1.05
Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for EIFS. Research/Evaluation Reports: Current ICBO Research Committee Report.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Installer Qualifications: An installer who is certified in writing by EIFS manufacturer as qualified to install manufacturer's system using trained workers. Source Limitations: Obtain EIFS through one source from a single EIFS manufacturer and from sources approved by EIFS manufacturer as compatible with system components. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide EIFS and system components with the following fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical EIFS and system components per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Provide materials and construction tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119. Full-Scale Fire Test: Tested mockup, in form indicated below, that represents completed wall assembly of which EIFS is a part, shows no tendency to propagate flame over the surface or through finish to core, or to cause delamination of finish when vertically mounted exterior face is exposed 15 minutes to a fire source using flame-spread test per ASTM E 108 modified for testing vertical walls as indicated below: a. Provide 2 panels, 72 by 120 inches, consisting of protective finish coat and 4-inchthick insulation applied to 1/2-inch- thick gypsum board;
C.
07 24 00 - 4
cured for 28 days; with protective finish coat removed to leave surface of insulation exposed on 1 panel in an area 4 inches high by 24 inches wide and centered 24 inches above bottom edge of panel. D. Mockups: Prior to commencing work of this section, construct a mockup, approximately 10 feet x 10 feet, at location as directed by Architect. 1. 2. 3. 4. Sample wall shall provide a standard of workmanship, range of color and texture, and shall include flashings, control joints and sealant system. Construct successive sample panels until the standard is approved. When accepted, sample wall shall be the standard of comparison for the remainder of the work. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. Upon completion of the project, remove the sample wall from the site and dispose in a legal manner.
5.
1.06
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages with manufacturers' labels intact. Store materials inside and under cover; keep them dry and protected from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, aging, corrosion, damaging temperatures, construction traffic, and other causes. 1. 2. Stack insulation board flat and off the ground. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
1.07
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Maintain ambient temperatures above 40 deg F for a minimum of 24 hours before, during, and after adhesives or coatings are applied. Do not apply EIFS adhesives or coatings during rainfall. Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions and ambient outdoor air and substrate temperatures permit EIFS to be applied, dried, and cured according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements
1.08
WARRANTY A. Submit written warranty before substantial completion, signed by both the manufacturer and Contractor, agreeing to repair or replace defective materials and workmanship of the Exterior Insulation and Finish System work and damaged adjacent work during the warranty period. Warrant to the Owner that all work is in accordance with drawings and specifications and that all work is free from defects in materials and workmanship and will remain weather tight for a period of five years from the date of acceptance of the work. Agree to repair or replace defective
07 24 00 - 5
materials and workmanship to "like new condition," including such exploratory work, as necessary to determine the cause, at no additional cost to the Owner. B. Defective materials and workmanship is defined to include, but not be limited to, evidence of: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C. 1. Penetration of water into the building. Air infiltration exceeding specified limits. Structural failure of components resulting from forces within specified limits. Discoloration or fading, excessive non-uniformity, pitting, cracking, peeling, or crazing or corrosion of finish. Adhesive or cohesive failure of sealant. Crazing on surface of non-structural sealant. Non-structural sealant hardening beyond Shore A durometer 50 or softening below 20. Failure to fulfill other specified performance requirements. Failure of operating parts to function normally. "Discoloration or fading": means a change in appearance that is perceptible and objectionable as determined by the Architect, when viewed in comparison with the original color range standards. "Excessive non-uniformity": means non-uniform fading during the period of the warranty to the extent that adjacent parts have a color difference greater than the original acceptable color range. "Pitting, cracking, peeling, crazing or corrosion": means there shall be no pitting, surface cracks, blistering, bubbles, or non-uniform surface texture or other type of corrosion discernible from a distance of 10 feet (3.05 m), resulting from the elements in the atmosphere at the project site.
The terms used in conjunction with Finish Warranty are defined as follows:
2.
3.
D. E. F.
Provide a 10-year warranty from the sealant manufacturer against adhesive or cohesive failure and staining. Warranty shall be in a form acceptable to the Owner. Be responsible for damage to the building and furnishings occasioned by defective materials or workmanship or damage as part of repairs to the wall. The warranty, the enforcement or lack of enforcement thereof, shall not deprive the Owner of other actions, rights or remedies available to him. Warranty shall be in form approved by the Owner. Repairs or replacements during the warranty period required by acts of nature exceeding performance requirements, alterations, abuse of the work, vandalism, failure of the supporting structure and other causes beyond the Contractor's control will be completed by the Contractor and paid for by the Owner at prevailing rates.
07 24 00 - 6
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Dryvit Systems, Inc. Parex, Inc. Pleko Systems International, Inc. Senergy Inc Sto Corp. Specifications are based on Outsulation System as
Basis-of-Design Product: manufactured by Dryvit.
2.02
MATERIALS A. Compatibility: Provide substrates, adhesive, fasteners, board insulation, reinforcing meshes, base- and finish-coat systems, sealants, and accessories that are compatible with one another and approved for use by EIFS manufacturer for conditions on this Project. Air/Water-Resistive Barrier Components: 1. 2. C. 1. Flexible, polymer-based noncementitious water-resistive coating and air baririer. Open weave fiberglass mesh tape with pressure sensitive adhesive. Sheet Type: Shall be Flashing Tape and Surface Conditioner a. Flashing Tape High density polyethylene film backed with a rubberized asphalt adhesive b. Flashing Tape Surface Conditioner Water-based surface conditioner and adhesion promoter for the Dryvit Flashing Tape. D. Adhesive for Application of Insulation: EIFS manufacturer's standard formulation designed for indicated use, compatible with substrate, and complying with one of the following requirements: 1. 2. 3. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, and polymer-based adhesive specified for base coat. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and fillers specified for base coat. Factory-mixed noncementitious formulation designed for adhesive attachment of insulation to substrates of type indicated, as recommended by EIFS manufacturer.
B.
Flashing Materials: Used to protect substrate edges at terminations.
E.
Drainage Track: UV treated PVC "J" channel perforated with weep holes, complying with ASTM D 1784 and ASTM C 1063. Drainage track usage is
07 24 00 - 7
limited to the base of the system at finished grade level. All other horizontal terminations shall utilize the Drainage Strip and shall be following: 1. F. Sloped Strip with Drip edge by Vinyl Corp or approved equal. Insulation Board: Expanded polystyrene board, comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements, ASTM C 578 for Type I or II, and EIMA's "EIMA Guideline Specification for Expanded Polystyrene (EPS) Insulation Board" for more stringent requirements for material performance and qualities of insulation, including dimensions and permissible variations, and the following: 1. Aging: Before cutting and shipping, age insulation in block form by air drying for not less than six weeks or by another method approved by EIMA that produces equivalent results. Flame-Spread and Smoke-Developed Indexes: respectively, per ASTM E 84. Size: 24 by 48 inches Thickness: As indicated on Drawings, maximum of 4 inches thick, minimum thickness as allowed by ASTM C 1397. 25 and 450 or less,
2. 3. 4. G.
Reinforcing Mesh: Balanced, alkali-resistant, open-weave glass-fiber mesh treated for compatibility with other EIFS materials, made from continuous multiend strands with retained mesh tensile strength of not less than 120 lbf/in. per EIMA 105.01, complying with ASTM D 578 and the following requirements for minimum weight: 1. 2. Standard-Impact Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 4.0 oz./sq. yd. Heavy-Duty Reinforcing Mesh: Not less than 20 oz./sq. yd.. Provide heavyduty mesh at locations from finish floor to 8-0 above finish floor.
H.
Base-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard mixture complying with one of the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials: 1. Job-mixed formulation of portland cement complying with ASTM C 150, Type I, white or natural color; and manufacturer's standard polymeremulsion adhesive designed for use indicated. Factory-blended dry formulation of portland cement, dry polymer admixture, and inert fillers to which only water is added at Project site. Non-Cementitious Base Coat: Factory mixed 100% acrylic polymer dispersion of hardening air-cured materials with a quartz or silica aggregate.
2. 3. I.
Primer: If recommended by EIFS manufacturer, provided EIFS manufacturer's standard factory-mixed elastomeric-polymer primer for preparing base-coat surface for application of finish coat. Finish-Coat Materials: EIFS manufacturer's standard acrylic-based coating complying with the following requirements for material composition and method of combining materials:
J.
07 24 00 - 8
1. 2. K. L.
Factory-mixed formulation of polymer-emulsion binder, colorfast mineral pigments, sound stone particles, and fillers. Integral Texture: As selected by Architect.
Water: Potable. Trim Accessories: Type as designated or required to suit conditions indicated and to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written requirements; manufactured from UVstabilized PVC; and complying with ASTM D 1784, manufacturer's standard Cell Class for use intended, and ASTM C 1063. 1. Expansion Joint: Prefabricated one-piece V profile; designed to relieve stress of movement.
M. 2.03
Joint Sealants: As specified in Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.
MIXING A. General: Comply with EIFS manufacturer's requirements for combining and mixing materials. Do not introduce admixtures, water, or other materials except as recommended by EIFS manufacturer. Mix materials in clean containers. Use materials within time period specified by EIFS manufacturer or discard.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer and a representative of the EIFS manufacturer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of EIFS. 1. Concrete substrates shall be flat within 1/4 inch within any 4 feet. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for application of additive or leveling coat to assure a smooth surface.
B. C. 3.02
Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION A. Protect contiguous work from moisture deterioration and soiling caused by application of EIFS. Provide temporary covering and other protection needed to prevent spattering of exterior finish coats on other work. Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind EIFS and deterioration of substrates. Prepare and clean substrates to comply with EIFS manufacturer's written requirements to obtain optimum bond between substrate and adhesive for insulation.
B.
C.
07 24 00 - 9
D.
Primer/Sealer: If required by sheathing manufacturer, apply primer over gypsum sheathing substrates to protect substrates from degradation and where required by EIFS manufacturer for improving adhesion of insulation to substrate.
3.03
PREPARATION A. B. C. General: Comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written instructions for installation of EIFS as applicable to each type of substrate indicated. Sheathing Installation: Sheathing. As specified in Section 06 16 43 Exterior Gypsum
Trim: Apply trim accessories at perimeter of EIFS, at expansion joints, and elsewhere as indicated, according to EIFS manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with installation of insulation. Board Insulation: Adhesively attach insulation to substrate in compliance with ASTM C 1397, EIFS manufacturer's written requirements, and the following: 1. Apply adhesive to insulation by notched-trowel method in a manner that results in coating the entire surface of sheathing with adhesive once insulation is adhered to sheathing unless EIFS manufacturer's written instructions specify using primer/sealer with ribbon-and-dab method. Apply adhesive to a thickness of not less than 1/4 inch for factory mixed and not less than 3/8 inch for field mixed, measured from surface of insulation before placement. Press and slide insulation into place. Apply pressure over the entire surface of insulation to accomplish uniform contact, high initial grab, and overall level surface. Allow adhered insulation to remain undisturbed for period recommended by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 24 hours, before beginning rasping and sanding insulation, or applying base coat and reinforcing mesh. Apply insulation over dry substrates in courses with long edges of boards oriented horizontally. Begin first course of insulation from a level base line and work upward. Stagger vertical joints of insulation boards in successive courses to produce running bond pattern. Locate joints so no piece of insulation is less than 12 inches wide or 6 inches high. Offset joints not less than 6 inches from corners of window and door openings and not less than 4 inches from aesthetic reveals. a. 7. 8. Adhesive Attachment: Offset joints of insulation not less than 6 inches from horizontal and 4 inches from vertical joints in sheathing.
D.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
Interlock ends at internal and external corners. Abut insulation tightly at joints within and between each course to produce flush, continuously even surfaces without gaps or raised edges between
07 24 00 - 10
boards. If gaps greater than 1/16 inch occur, fill with insulation cut to fit gaps exactly; insert insulation without using adhesive or other material. 9. 10. Cut insulation to fit openings, corners, and projections precisely and to produce edges and shapes complying with details indicated. Rasp or sand flush entire surface of insulation to remove irregularities projecting more than 1/16 inch from surface of insulation and to remove yellowed areas due to sun exposure; do not create depressions deeper than 1/16 inch. Interrupt insulation for expansion joints where indicated. Form joints for sealant application by leaving gaps between adjoining insulation edges and between insulation edges and dissimilar adjoining surfaces. Make gaps wide enough to produce joint widths indicated after encapsulating joint substrates with base coat and reinforcing mesh. After installing insulation and before applying field-applied reinforcing mesh, fully wrap board edges. Cover edges of board and extend encapsulating mesh not less than 2-1/2 inches over front and back face, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Treat exposed edges of insulation as follows: a. b. 15. E. Except for edges forming substrates of sealant joints, encapsulate with base coat, reinforcing mesh, and finish coat. Encapsulate edges forming substrates of sealant joints within EIFS or between EIFS and other work with base coat and reinforcing mesh.
11. 12.
13.
14.
Coordinate installation of flashing and insulation to produce wall assembly that does not allow water to penetrate behind flashing.
Expansion Joints: Install at locations indicated, where required by EIFS manufacturer, and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Where expansion joints are indicated in substrates behind EIFS. Where building expansion joints occur. Where EIFS adjoin dissimilar substrates, materials, and construction. Where wall height changes. Where the substrate changes Where significant structural movement occurs
F.
Base Coat: Apply to exposed surfaces of insulation in minimum thickness recommended in writing by EIFS manufacturer, but not less than 1/16-inch drycoat thickness. 1. Apply base coat in 2 coats if required to ensure complete mesh encapsulation and provide surface smoothness required for desired finish texture appearance.
07 24 00 - 11
2.
Apply second base coat in same manner and thickness as first application except without reinforcing mesh. Do not apply second coat until first base coat has cured. Total thickness of base coats shall be approximately 3/32 inch. Reverse roll as necessary to remove mesh curl. Embed mesh into wet base coat to produce wrinkle-free installation with mesh continuous at corners and overlapped not less than 2-1/2 inches or otherwise treated at joints to comply with ASTM C 1397 and EIFS manufacturer's written requirements. Ends of adjacent heavy duty mesh pieces shall be tightly butted not lapped. Do not lap reinforcing mesh within 8 inches of corners. Completely embed mesh, applying additional base-coat material if necessary, so reinforcing-mesh color and pattern are not visible.
3. G. 1. 2.
Reinforcing Mesh:
3. 4. H.
Additional Reinforcing Mesh: Apply strip reinforcing mesh around openings extending 4 inches beyond perimeter. Apply additional 9-by-12-inch strip reinforcing mesh diagonally at corners of openings (re-entrant corners). Apply 8inch- wide strip reinforcing mesh at both inside and outside corners unless base layer of mesh is lapped not less than 4 inches on each side of corners. 1. 2. At aesthetic reveals, apply strip reinforcing mesh not less than 8 inches wide. Embed strip reinforcing mesh in base coat before applying first layer of reinforcing mesh.
I. J.
Shapes: Fully embed reinforcing mesh in base coat. Finish Coat: Apply over dry base coat, maintaining a wet edge at all times for uniform appearance, in thickness required by EIFS manufacturer to produce a uniform finish of color and texture matching approved sample and free of cold joints, shadow lines, and texture variations.
3.04
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. Prepare joints and apply sealants, of type and at locations indicated, to comply with applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 -Joint Sealants, EIMA's "EIMA Guide for Use of Sealants with Exterior Insulation and Finish Systems, Class PB and manufacturers requirements. 1. 2. 3. 4. Joint design and surface preparation shall be based on sealant manufacturer's recommendations and project conditions. Install sealant backing to control depth and configuration of sealant joint and to prevent sealant from adhering to back of joint. Apply masking tape to protect areas adjacent to sealant joints. Remove tape immediately after tooling joints, without disturbing joint seal. Follow additional requirements contained in EIFS manufacturer's detailed sealant specification.
07 24 00 - 12
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturers Field Service: EIFS manufacturer, or an authorized representative, shall observe and inspect the work during construction.
3.06
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove temporary covering and protection of other work. Promptly remove coating materials from window and door frames and other surfaces outside areas indicated to receive EIFS coatings. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer and EIFS manufacturer that ensure that EIFS are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
B.
07 24 00 - 13
SECTION 07 51 13 BUILT UP ASPHALT ROOFING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. B. Section includes: 1. 1. Built-up asphalt roofing system over plywood deck. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Metal roof penetration flashings, flashings, and counterflashings. Related Sections:
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Roofing system BU-N-A-G4 (base sheet, 2 plies, cap sheet: Total of 4 plies)-M, according to specification-plate classifications in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" and requirements in this Section.
1.03
DEFINITIONS A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definition of terms related to roofing work in this Section. Hot Roofing Asphalt: Roofing asphalt heated to its equiviscous temperature, the temperature at which its viscosity is 125 centipoise for mopping application and 75 centipoise for mechanical application, within a range of plus or minus 25 deg F, measured at the mop cart or mechanical spreader immediately before application.
B.
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide installed roofing membrane and base flashings that remain watertight; do not permit the passage of water; and resist specified uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based on testing and field experience. FMG Listing: Provide roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials that comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. 2. Fire/Windstorm Classification: I-90. Hail Resistance: MH.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Built Up Asphalt Roofing
B.
C.
07 51 13 - 1
1.05
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's material specifications and installation instructions, and evidence of UL and FM ratings for roofing system for each product indicated. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other Work. 1. 2. 3. C. 1. 2. D. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. Tapered insulation, including slopes. Crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes. 12-by-12-inch square of base sheet and ply sheet. 12-by-12-inch square of mineral-granule-surfaced cap sheet, of color specified.
B.
Samples: Submit the following items, upon request from Architect:
Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install roofing system. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Submit evidence of meeting performance requirements. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of roofing system. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals. Inspection Report: Copy of roofing system manufacturer's inspection report of completed roofing installation.
E.
F. G.
H. I.
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's warranty. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that has UL listing or FMG approval for roofing system identical to that used for this Project. Source Limitations: Obtain components and accessories for roofing system from roofing system manufacturer or company approved by roofing system manufacturer. Materials designated for a specific application shall be the products of one manufacturer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide roofing materials with the fire-testresponse characteristics indicated as determined by testing identical products per
B. C.
D.
07 51 13 - 2
test method below by UL, FMG, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. 2. 3. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Minimum Class C; ASTM E 108, for application and roof slopes indicated. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including flatness and fastening. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation. Architect will record discussions of conference and decisions and agreements reached and furnish copy of record to each party attending.
4. 5. 6.
7. 8. 9. 10.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Delivery: 1. Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storage. Asphalt: Each container or bulk shipping ticket shall indicate the equiviscous temperature (EVT), the finished blowing temperature (FBT), and the flash point (FP). Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from direct sunlight. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life. Materials stockpiled or located on roof areas shall be safely stored away from roof edges and properly secured to prevent wind damage/blowoff. The
2.
B.
Storage: 1.
2.
07 51 13 - 3
materials shall be distributed in such a manner that they will not overload the structure at any location, beyond its capacity. C. D. E. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions All materials shall be new. Deliver all roof system materials in original manufacturer labeled packages. Asphalt shall be labeled with the softening point (SP), flash point (FP), equiviscous temperature (EVT), and finished blowing temperature (FBT). Materials shall be properly stored off of the ground on pallets, minimum 4 inches high and off the roof. Completely cover all materials with breathable watertight covering. Visqueen or other non-breathable plastic coverings shall not be used. Unprotected, moist or damaged materials shall be conspicuously marked and permanently removed from the job site.
F.
1.08
PROTECTION A. Protect building contents and grounds during the process of the work. Protect all paving, walls of building and building adjacent to hoist, kettle and stringer pipe prior to starting work. Windows, doorways, docks, walkways, etc., may require special protection measures. Remove all debris daily from the roof and haul off site. Provide four (4) 15-pound minimum size fire extinguishers using ammonium phosphate fire fighting agent. Locate two at each kettle or tanker and two at site of hot bitumen application on the roof. Contractor to provide special protection or avoid heavy traffic on completed work when ambient temperature exceeds 80 degrees Fahrenheit. Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent interior leakage, materials from falling into the interior, or other such occurrences. Installation of materials shall be accomplished in such a manner that bitumen drippage does not occur. In the event of damage, immediately repair or replace all damaged and/or defective work to the approval of the Architect and at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor must install temporary waterstops at all incomplete roofing locations on a daily basis.
B. C.
D. E.
F. G.
1.09
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. Roofing shall not be applied during precipitation and shall not be started when there is a probability of precipitation during application. Wind velocity limitation will be based on ability to apply materials safely in specified manner.
B.
07 51 13 - 4
C.
Special precautions may be required when ambient temperature is below 40oF, such as insulation of supply lines and insulated asphalt transport equipment, as needed to insure compliance with asphalt heating and application temperature requirements and limitations.
1.10
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) - Class A Assembly. Factory Mutual (FM) - Roof Assembly Classification, wind uplift requirement of 1-90, in accordance with FM Construction Bulletin 1-28. Conform to regulations of public agencies, including any specific requirements of the city and state of jurisdiction.
1.11
WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failure includes roof leaks. 1. 2. Warranty includes roofing membrane, base flashings, roofing membrane accessories and other components of roofing system. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roofing systems as manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Johns Manville International, Inc. GAF Materials Corporation CertainTeed Corporation. Firestone Building Products Company.
Specifications are based on 4GNC system as manufactured by Johns Manville International, Inc.
2.02
SHEET MATERIALS A. B. C. Sheathing Paper: Red-rosin type, minimum 3 lb/100 sq. ft. Base Sheet: ASTM D 4601, Type II, UL Class G-2, asphalt-coated, fiber glass base felt. Membrane Ply Sheet(s): ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt.
07 51 13 - 5
D.
Cap Sheet: ASTM D 3909, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber cap sheet, with tan coarse mineral-granule top surfacing and fine mineral surfacing on bottom surface.
2.03
FLASHING MATERIALS A. Backer Sheet: Provide one of the following as approved by roofing manufacturer: 1. 2. B. ASTM D 2178, Type IV, asphalt-impregnated, glass-fiber felt. Backer Sheet: ASTM D 4601, asphalt-impregnated and -coated, glass-fiber sheet, dusted with fine mineral surfacing on both sides. Hot mop application: ASTM D 6164, Type I or II, polyester-reinforced, SBS-modified asphalt sheet; granular surfaced.
Flashing Sheet: 1.
C.
Flexible Flashing: Flashdek or Dekstrip as manufactured by ITW Buildex. Provide fastening tape and accessories as recommended by manufacturer for complete installation.
2.04
ASPHALT MATERIALS A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type IV.
2.05
AUXILIARY ROOFING MEMBRANE MATERIALS A. B. C. D. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with built-up roofing. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required by roofing system manufacturer for application. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene, plain or modified bitumen, nonhardening, nonmigrating, nonskinning, and nondrying. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates meeting corrosion-resistance provisions in FM 4470; designed for fastening roofing membrane components to substrate; tested by manufacturer for required pullout strength; and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer. Cant Strips: Rigid core fiberboard, ASTM C726, or perlite, ASTM C728. Tapered Roof Insulation Crickets: Isocyanurate, ASTM C1013. Provide preformed crickets and tapered edge strips fabricated to slopes indicated or as required to direct water around mechanical units and as indicated on Drawings. Sheet Metal Flashing: As specified in Section 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide miscellaneous accessories recommended by roofing system manufacturer.
E. F.
G. H.
PART 3.
- EXECUTION
07 51 13 - 6
3.01
EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system: 1. 2. 3. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and set and braced and that roof drains are securely clamped in place. Verify that wood cants, blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations and terminations. Wood Deck: Verify that deck is securely fastened with no projecting fasteners and with no adjacent units in excess of 1/16 inch out of plane relative to adjoining deck. Roof decks shall be installed to provide drainage of water freely over and out drainage fittings such as scuppers, drains, etc. Drainage fittings shall not be set exceedingly high so as to dam or restrict water passage. Metal surfaces shall be smooth and free of sharp edges and rough weldments and shall be free of moisture, rust, dirt and other foreign materials. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
4. 5. 6. 7.
3.02
PREPARATION A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain is forecast. Wood Decks: 1. 2. Surfaces shall be smooth, free of protruding nails, depressions, or raised edges. Seal joints and cover knot holes of wood deck.
B.
C.
3.03
ROOFING MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: Install built-up roofing membrane system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of ARMA/NRCA's "Quality Control Guidelines for the Application of Built-up Roofing." 1. 2. Verify that surface receiving roofing membrane is not wet. Start installation of built-up roofing membrane in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.
07 51 13 - 7
3.
Where roof slope exceeds amount permitted by roofing system manufacturer, install sheets of built-up roofing membrane parallel with slope. a. Backnail roofing membrane sheets to substrate according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.
4. 5.
Cooperate with testing and inspecting agencies engaged or required to perform services for installing built-up roofing system. Coordinate installing roofing system components so roofing membrane sheets are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. a. Provide tie-offs at end of each day's work to cover exposed roofing membrane sheets and insulation with a course of coated felt set in roofing cement or hot roofing asphalt with joints and edges sealed. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.
b. c. B.
Asphalt Heating: Heat roofing asphalt and apply within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature unless otherwise required by roofing system manufacturer. Do not raise roofing asphalt temperature above equiviscous temperature range more than one hour before time of application. Do not exceed roofing asphalt manufacturer's recommended temperature limits during roofing asphalt heating. Do not heat roofing asphalt within 25 deg F of flash point. Discard roofing asphalt maintained at a temperature exceeding finished blowing temperature for more than 4 hours. Substrate-Joint Penetrations: Prevent roofing asphalt from penetrating substrate joints, entering building, or damaging roofing system components or adjacent building construction. Roofing Membranes - General: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Cut plies in lengths not to exceed 18 feet and allow to flatten. Longer lengths may be used when rolled or machined and broomed into place. Plies of roofing shall be broomed thoroughly into place into the hot bitumen full width of felt. Use a clean broom; no rollers or squeegees are permissible. Side and end laps of each ply shall be staggered and offset from preceding plies. Fishmouths, wrinkles, tears, buckles, or other damage in ply of felt shall be cut out and repaired by installation of an additional layer of felt, set into hot bitumen. Mop full width under each felt layer; no dry laps will be allowed. Roofing System shall be installed in a continuous application.
C.
D.
7. 8.
07 51 13 - 8
9. 10. E. 1. 2.
Plies of roofing must be laid single-fashion starting at low points and drains and working up slopes to high points of roof. No "phased" application of roofing will be allowed. Sheathing Paper: Install one course of sheathing paper, lapping edges and ends a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches, respectively. Base Sheet: a. b. c. Install one lapped course of base sheet, extending sheet over and terminating beyond cants. Lap felts a minimum of 2 inches on side laps and 4 inches on end laps. Mechanically fasten base sheet with approved fasteners in accordance with Factory Mutual Wind Uplift Requirements and manufacturers instructions. Solid mop top surface of base ply with asphalt and embed ply sheet(s), shingle method, lapping as per manufacturer's printed instructions, mopping between plies. Install ply sheets starting at low point of roofing system. Align ply sheets without stretching. Shingle side laps of ply sheets uniformly to achieve required number of plies throughout thickness of roofing membrane, lapping 19 inches. Shingle in direction to shed water. Extend ply sheets over and terminate beyond cants. Embed each ply sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer, without voids. Install cap sheet starting at low point of roofing system. Offset laps from laps of preceding ply sheets and align cap sheet without stretching. Maintain 2 inch side laps and 6 inch end laps. Lap in direction to shed water. Extend cap sheet over and terminate beyond cants. Embed cap sheet in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.
Roofing System Installation:
3.
Ply Sheets: a.
b.
c. 4.
Cap Sheet: a. b. c. d. e.
3.04
FLASHING AND STRIPPING INSTALLATION A. Install base flashing over cant strips and other sloping and vertical surfaces, at roof edges, and at penetrations through roof, and secure to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and as follows: 1. Prime substrates with asphalt primer if required by roofing system manufacturer.
07 51 13 - 9
2.
Backer Sheet Application: Mechanically fasten backer sheet to nailable walls or parapets. Adhere backer sheet over roofing membrane at cants in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt or cold adhesive as required by roofing system manufacturer. Flashing Sheet Application: Adhere flashing sheet to substrate using one of the following methods as recommended by roofing system manufacturer: a. Solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F. Apply hot roofing asphalt to back of flashing sheet if recommended by roofing system manufacturer. Cold adhesive applied at rate required by roofing system manufacturer. Asphalt roofing cement; apply cement at rate required by roofing system manufacturer.
3.
b. c. B. C.
Extend base flashing up walls or parapets a minimum of 8 inches above roofing membrane and 4 inches onto field of roofing membrane. Mechanically fasten top of base flashing securely at terminations and perimeter of roofing. 1. Seal top termination of base flashing with a strip of glass-fiber fabric set in asphalt roofing cement.
D.
Install stripping, according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions, where metal flanges and edgings are set on built-up roofing using one of the following methods: 1. Install flashing-sheet stripping in a continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement or in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt applied at not less than 425 deg F, and extend onto roofing membrane. Install flashing-sheet stripping by heat welding and extend onto roofing membrane. Built-up Stripping: Install stripping of not less than 2 roofing membrane ply sheets, setting each ply in a continuous coating of asphalt roofing cement or in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, and extend onto roofing membrane 4 inches and 6 inches, respectively.
2. 3.
E.
Roof Drains: Set 30-by-30-inch metal flashing in bed of asphalt roofing cement on completed roofing membrane. Cover metal flashing with stripping and extend a minimum of 4 inches beyond edge of metal flashing onto field of roofing membrane. Clamp roofing membrane, metal flashing, and stripping into roof-drain clamping ring. 1. Install flashing-sheet stripping by same method as installing base flashing.
3.05
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform roof tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.
07 51 13 - 10
B.
Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to Architect. 1. Notify Architect or Owner 48 hours in advance of date and time of inspection. Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where test results or inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
C. D.
3.06
PROTECTING AND CLEANING A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION
B.
C.
07 51 13 - 11
SECTION 07 53 16 SINGLE PLY ROOFING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. B. Scope 1. The extent of the single-ply roofing system work is indicated on the drawings and by provisions of this section, and is defined to include roofing, roof insulation, flashing and roofing accessories integrally related to roofing installation. Contractor shall coordinate with all other trades that directly influence the roof system application, to provide a watertight installation of all roof flashing. Single Ply PVC Mechanically Fastened Membrane Roofing system Cover Board
2.
C.
All Manufacturers requirements including, but not necessarily limited to, pertinent portions of their specifications and general requirements and recommendations apply to the work of this section as fully as though repeated herein.
1.02
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. Section 06 10 53 Rough Carpentry Section 07 62 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal Division 22 Plumbing Division 23 Mechanical Division 26 Electrical
1.03
REFERENCES A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to the following publications for definitions of roofing work related terms used in this Section: 1. 2. 3. B. ASTM D 1079 Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing. Glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual." Roof Consultants Institute Glossary of Roofing Terms.
Sheet Metal Terminology and Techniques: SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
07 53 16 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Single Ply Roofing
1.04
DESIGN CRITERIA A. General: Installed roofing membrane and base flashing systems shall remain watertight; and resist specified wind uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure. Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Wind Uplift Performance: Roofing system shall be identical to systems that have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist wind uplift pressure calculated in accordance with ASCE-7. Roof should be designed to withstand sustained winds of 90 miles per hour per IBC wind speeds. 1. 2. 3. D. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: -36.22 lbf/sq. ft. (raw pressure per ASCE-7) Perimeter Uplift Pressure: -54.92 lbf/sq. ft. (raw pressure per ASCE-7) Corner Uplift Pressure: -78.29 lbf/sq. ft. (raw pressure per ASCE-7)
B.
C.
FMG Listing: Roofing membrane, base flashings, and component materials shall comply with requirements in FMG 4450 and FMG 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FMG's RoofNav" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FMG markings. 1. 2. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90 Hail Resistance: MH.
E. F. G. H.
Roofing membrane shall achieve an initial reflectance of greater than 0.85 and a three year aged reflectance of greater than 0.80. ASTM E108 - Class A Fire Rated Assembly. FM Global Comply with minimum FM 1-90 Approval, including increased securement at corners and perimeters. Conform to regulations of public agencies, including any specific requirements of the city and state of jurisdiction.
1.05
SUBMITTALS A. Submit to the Architect, six (6) copies of each of the following components for review by the Architect, prior to the Pre-Roofing Conference. 1. Submit shop drawings of all fabricated items for review prior to their fabrication and installation. Items requiring reviewed shop drawings include any item not detailed in the Contractors scope of work, or any proposed changes. Submit a letter from the primary roofing materials manufacturer stating that the Roofing Contractor is a certified applicator of the roofing material submitted. Submit manufacturer's product specifications, installation instructions and general recommendations for each principal roofing system product required.
2.
3.
07 53 16 - 2
4. 5.
Submit material manufacturer product data and MSDS sheets for each product to be used. Submit copy of letter from primary roofing manufacturer stating acceptance of any proposed products not manufactured or supplied by them, for use in their guaranteed roof assembly, including insulation products, etc. Submit 12-inch x 12-inch samples of roofing membrane, insulation and walkpad materials, as well as samples of membrane and insulation fasteners, bagged and labeled. Written approval by the insulation manufacturer (as applicable) for use and performance of the product in the proposed system Submit sample of manufacturer's 20 Year full system non-prorated guarantee. Submit State data confirming Contractor has been licensed under same company name for no less than 10 years. Submit letter from primary roofing manufacturer stating acceptance of the specification and project conditions, if manufacturer representative is not able to attend pre-roofing conference. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's Specifications, installation instructions and evidence of UL and FMG ratings for system. Bond Integrity: Free from bond failure within EIFS components or between system and supporting wall construction, resulting from exposure to fire, wind loads, weather, or other in-service conditions. Shop Drawing: Submit Drawing layout of roof walkways. Contractor Guarantee Manufacturer Guarantee Contractor shall furnish to the Owner the manufacturers printed recommendations for proper maintenance of the specified roof system including inspection frequencies, penetration additional policies, temporary repairs and leak call procedures.
6.
7. 8. 9. 10.
11.
12. B. 1. 2. 3.
Submit Upon Completion:
1.06
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. 2. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified, with minimum 5 years documented experience. Installer: Approved by Membrane Manufacturer, and shall have successfully installed a minimum of five mechanically attached assemblies in the last three years.
B.
UL Listing: Provide Class "A" labeled materials which have been tested and listed by UL for application indicated. Packaging and containers shall bear UL label.
07 53 16 - 3
C.
FMG Listing: Provide labeled Class I roofing system which has been tested and listed by Factory Mutual for application indicated. Provide a minimum 1-90 rating for a mechanically attached system. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencement of Roofing Work, schedule a meeting at a mutually agreeable time to include the Owner, Architect, Contractor, Contractor's field superintendent, roofing installer, Roofing Materials Manufacturer's Representative, and Trades interfacing with roofing to review methods and procedures to be used. Membrane Manufacturer's Representative shall inspect the installation of the roofing system.
D.
E.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials in original unopened containers labeled with Manufacturer's name, brand name, installation instruction, and identification of various items. Storage and Protection: Store materials, except membrane, in dry and protected area between 60 degrees F. and 80 degrees F. If exposed to lower temperature, restore to proper temperature before using. Replace damaged materials. Materials shall be properly stored off of the ground on pallets, minimum 4 inches high and off the roof. Completely cover all materials with breathable watertight covering. Visqueen or other non-breathable plastic coverings shall not be used. Unprotected, moist or damaged materials shall be conspicuously marked and permanently removed from the job site. Contractor shall only place enough roofing materials on the roof structure for that days work. At no time shall Contractor load or permit any part of the structure to be loaded with a weight that will endanger the safety of the structure. Select and handle material handling equipment to avoid damage to materials or installed membrane and insulation. Any damaged material shall be conspicuously marked for permanent removal from the jobsite. Any flammable materials shall be stored in a cool, dry area away from sparks and open flames. Follow precautions outlined by material manufacturer/supplier.
B.
C. D.
E.
F.
G.
1.08
PROTECTION A. Protect building contents and grounds during the process of the work. Protect all paving, walls of building and building adjacent to hoist prior to starting work. Windows, doorways, docks, walkways, etc., may require special protection measures. Remove all debris daily from the roof and haul off site. Contractor shall be responsible for meeting fire regulations. A certified fire extinguisher of adequate size shall be located on the roof and elsewhere as required.
B. C.
07 53 16 - 4
D.
Contractor shall be responsible to exercise caution and/or protect finish roofing surfaces during roof-top activities, and to properly repair any damage that may result from such activities. In the event of damage, immediately repair or replace all damaged and/or defective work to the approval of the Architect, and at no additional cost to the District. Contractor must install temporary waterstops at all incomplete roofing locations on a daily basis.
E. F.
1.09
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. If inclement weather is anticipated during the work period, Contractor shall take adequate precautions to insure that materials, applied roofing, insulation and building interior are protected from possible moisture damage or contamination. Wind velocity limitation will be based on ability to apply materials safely in specified manner. Special precautions may be necessary when installing the roof system at temperatures below 45F to insure satisfactory application and performance.
B. C.
1.10
PRE-ROOFING CONFERENCE A. Prior to installation of the roofing system, representatives of the following entities shall meet at the project site: Owner, General Contractor, Roofing Contractor, HVAC Contractor, Plumbing Contractor, Architect, Materials Manufacturer and representatives of other entities directly concerned with installation or performance of the roofing system. This meeting will be coordinated through the General Contractor and Project Construction Managers. Meeting should be scheduled to allow for a deck inspection to be performed in conjunction with the meeting. If the roofing material manufacturers representative cannot attend, a letter of acceptance of the specification and project conditions must be submitted to the Architect (for file). Attendees shall review all pertinent details and specifications, noting any potential problems and making any changes, deletions or additions as deemed necessary. The Conference will include but not be limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Availability of roofing materials. Guarantee and submittal requirements. Scheduling and forecast weather conditions. Regulatory requirements. Coordination of sub-trades and sub-trade requirements. Proposed installation procedures. Additional items relating to the total roof system.
B.
1.11
WARRANTY
07 53 16 - 5
A.
Manufacturers Warranty: Furnish written No Dollar Limit (NDL) warranty covering materials and labor required to maintain roofing in a watertight condition from date of Substantial Completion of the Work for the following length of time: 1. 2. 3. 20 Years. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of roofing system components that fail in materials or workmanship, at no cost to Owner. Warranty shall cover all materials and installation from the structural deck up including, but not limited to, insulation, flashings, fasteners, sealants, accessories, and walkway pads. Warranty shall be written on manufacturers standard form.
4. B.
Installers Warranty: Furnish roofing installers standard 2 year warranty covering materials and labor required to maintain roofing in a watertight condition from date of Substantial Completion of the Work. 1. 2. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of roofing system components that fail in materials or workmanship. Warranty shall cover all materials and installation from the structural deck up including, but not limited to, insulation, flashings, fasteners, sealants, accessories, and walkway pads.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers and products: 1. 2. 3. 4. Sarnafil, Inc., Energy Smart Roof (S327 and G410) Seaman (FiberTite) Johns Manville PVC with Elvaloy Or equal.
2.02
MATERIALS A. Membrane: Permanent, thermoplastic co-polymer alloy, bonded to a high tenacity, low shrinkage weft inserted polyester fabric with resistance to ultraviolet rays, micro- organisms and impervious to most caustic chemicals, nominal 60 mil thick. Single Ply Roofing Membrane Fasteners: 1. Manufacturer's standard system of plates and coated screws for attachment of the membrane to substrate at sheet perimeter and at intermediate locations to meet requirements for FMG 1-90 uplift. Roof should be designed to withstand sustained winds of 90 miles per hour. Mechanical fasteners shall be supplied by Membrane Manufacturer or shall be Manufacturer approved special fasteners on lightweight or non-standard decking.
B.
2.
07 53 16 - 6
3. 4. C. 1.
Type: FM Global approved fastener with cap plate as required for structural deck, as applicable. Corrosion Resistance: Comply with FM 4470 criteria for corrosion resistance. Tapered Insulation: ASTM C 1289, provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to cricket slope of 1/2 inch per 12 inches, unless otherwise indicated.
Tapered insulation
D.
Flashing: Same membrane as single ply roofing membrane material. Unreinforced .055 inch thick uncured white Hypalon shall be supplied for field fabricated vent stack, pipes and corners. Bonding Adhesive: Provide to hold flashings in place. Not to be used in the seams Primer: Provide for the purpose of welding cured membrane. Seam Caulk: Provide for the purpose of secondary visual weld and seal scrim at cut edges. Water Cutoff Mastic: Provided or approved in writing by Manufacturer. Overnight Seal: Provided or approved in writing by Manufacturer. Pourable Sealer: Pourable sealer for pitch boxes shall be provided or approved in writing by Manufacturer. Caulks: Caulks provided by other than membrane Manufacturer shall be compatible with membrane and flashing materials and applied according to Manufacturer's instructions. Caulks must not be pitch extended, must be exterior grade and suitable for horizontal or vertical applications according to their usage as recommended by Manufacturer. Solvent: Provide clean contaminated seam areas in EP. Insulation Fasteners: FMG approved, acceptable to Insulation and Roofing Membrane Manufacturer. 1. 2. Type: FM Global approved fastener with cap plate as required for structural deck, as applicable. Corrosion Resistance: Comply with FM 4470 criteria for corrosion resistance.
E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
L. M.
2.03
SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Substrate Board: Dens-Deck, glass-mat faced, water-resistant gypsum substrate board complying with ASTM C1177 as manufactured by Georgia Pacific Corporation, or equivalent manufactured by USG Corporation or equal. 1. B. Thickness: 5/8 inch Firestop Type X. Substrate Board Fasteners: Size and type as recommended by manufacturer for type of substrate and as required to comply with wind uplift requirements.
2.04
ACCESSORIES A. Wood Blocking: In accordance with Section 06 10 00.

07 53 16 - 7
B. C. PART 3. 3.01
Counterflashing and Copings: In accordance with Section 07 62 00. Walkway Pads: Product manufacturers standard walkway pads.
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Installer of roofing system shall examine substrate and conditions under which Roofing Work is to be performed and must notify Contractor immediately of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with Roofing Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to installer. Examine roof edges, wall framing, flashings, openings, substrates, and junctures at other construction for suitable conditions where EIFS will be installed. Structural deck shall be cured and dry to industry standards and the surface shall be adequately smooth and free of moisture or frost.
B.
3.02
PREPARATION A. Comply with Manufacturer's instructions for preparation of substrate to receive roofing system.Protect EIFS, substrates, and wall construction behind them from inclement weather during installation. Prevent penetration of moisture behind EIFS and deterioration of substrates. Install metal flashings and similar accessory items as recommended by Manufacturer. Install wood nailers as recommended by Membrane Manufacturer. Prevent compounds from entering and clogging drains, conductors and gutters, and from spilling or migrating onto surfaces of other Work. All curbs shall be of a sufficient height to provide a minimum of 8-inch exposure above the surface of the insulation. The Contractor must not roof in inadequate curbs. Clean all surfaces of debris and of any moisture before proceeding with application of the roofing material.
B. C. D. E.
F.
3.03
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. D. Operations shall not be conducted when water in any significant form is present on deck, such as rain, dew, ice, frost, or snow. Precautions shall be taken to keep materials clean, dry and free of damage. Do not start application of more materials each day than can be completed within the same day. At the end of each day, edge-seal the finished portion of the roofing system completed that day according to manufacturer's recommendations. Remove edge seals prior to the start of the next day's work.
07 53 16 - 8
E.
Start roofing work in dry weather only and without threat of immediate inclement weather. Keep the roofed area of the building watertight each day as the work progresses. All membrane seams, roof terminations and openings shall be made waterproof at the end of each day's work Use only materials and procedures that are proper and suitable for the slopes and for the underlying materials to which they are attached. Approved and operable fire extinguishers shall be on hand at all times on the roof. All additional requirements of OSHA Safety Regulations will be followed.
F. G.
3.04
INSTALLATION SUBSTRATE BOARD A. Install roof board parallel to or perpendicular to deck ribs with long joints in continuous straight lines and perpendicular to roof slopes. 1. 2. 3. B. Locate edge joints on deck ribs. Stagger end joints of adjacent rows. Fit ends and edges tightly butted, but not forced together.
Install approved fasteners in accordance with approved Shop Drawings and the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Provide fasteners in quantity and spacing as required for specified wind uplift. Install fasteners through the roof board to top flange of steel deck. Fastener plate shall be flush with substrate board surface without crushing board. Increase fastener density as required by wind uplift at corners, perimeter and field of roofing.
3.05
INSTALLATION A. B. Comply with Manufacturer's written instructions for installation of the membrane. Insulation Installation: 1. 2. Install insulation saddles/crickets at areas shown, fabricated to dimensions shown, by mechanically tapering roof insulation. Extend insulation full thickness as a single layer over entire surface to be insulated, cutting and fitting tightly around obstructions. Apply additional layers of insulation as required to achieve a total R-value of 22 minimum over the entire roof surface and to provide a smooth surface for roofing. Do not install more insulation each day than can be covered with membrane before end of day or before start of inclement weather. Secure insulation units with mechanical fasteners to comply with the Factory Mutual requirements of the membrane system. Cover immediately with membrane.
3. 4.
07 53 16 - 9
C.
Membrane Installation: 1. 2. Begin installation Representative. only in presence of Manufacturer's Technical
Cut sheets to maximum size possible in order to minimize seams and to accommodate contours of roof deck and proper drainage across shingled laps of sheets. Do not stretch membrane prior to attachment. Install membrane by unrolling over prepared substrate, fastening at laps, perimeter and at penetrations. Lap adjoining sheets a minimum of 4-1/2 inches and heat seal as recommended by the Manufacturer. Seam caulk nonencapsulated edges. Daily Seal: Temporarily seal loose edge of membrane with approved night seal at the end of each day. Roof Walkways: Install walkway pads with minimum 2-inch gap between pads around mechanical equipment. Install temporary cutoffs around incomplete edges of roofing assembly at the end of each day's work and when work must be postponed due to inclement weather. Seal the sheet membrane to the deck or existing membrane. Use a heavy application of roof cement or hot asphalt at least six inches in width overlaid with an embedded reinforcement. Remove the temporary seals completely when work resumes, cutting out the contaminated membrane. Remove all sealant, contaminated membrane, etc. from the work area and properly dispose off-site. Perimeter, curbs, vents, expansion joints, drains, and other details shall be flashed in conformance with Manufacturer's standard published details. Exercise extreme care to minimize possibility of damage to membrane. Apply bonding adhesive to both underside of flashing and surface to which it is to be bonded, at a rate of approximately one gallon per 60 square feet of surface coverage. Bonding adhesive shall be allowed to dry to finger touch so that it does not string or stick to a dry finger. Roll the flashing into the dry adhesive. Care must be taken to assure that the flashing does not bridge where there is any change of direction. Flashing shall be mechanically fastened at the top under appropriate counterflashing with approved fasteners for substrate. Flashing at lightning protection system shall be as detailed. Extend horizontal field membrane to the base of vertical surface at walls, curbs, pipes, etc., and cut even. Secure the membrane along the base of walls and around roof penetrations, curbs, etc., using appropriate fasteners placed at 12" o. c.
3.
4. 5. D.
WATERSTOPS 1.
E.
Flashing: 1.
2.
3.
4. 5. 6.
07 53 16 - 10
7.
At curbs and walls, install flashing sheet extending from at least 4 inches out over the field membrane, up vertical surfaces (where possible, extend over the top of curbs or walls and down over the opposite face). Install reinforcing boots at inside and outside corners as required. Where clad metal is used, secure flanges to deck using appropriate fasteners placed at 6" o. c., staggered, and extend membrane at least three inches over the metal with a minimum 1-2" weld. Extend field membrane onto the entire horizontal portion of the metal, providing a minimum 1-2" continuous weld. At pipes and similar penetrations, extend appropriate flashing membrane at least five inches onto the field membrane. Create minimum one-inch turn-up of membrane at pipes and overlap with vertical sleeve formed from appropriate flashing membrane. Pre-fab pipe boots may be used only if they meet minimum 8 height requirement or are extended as needed. Internal roof drains require a double layer of flashing membrane welded together, extending from under the drain clamping ring, out onto the roof. This double membrane layer is secured with appropriate fasteners placed at 12" o. c. around the drain, then overlapped by the field membrane, providing a continuous weld at the overlap. Provide a continuous weld where the flashing membrane overlaps the field membrane. Where clad metal is used, weld membrane directly to coating on clad metal. Fully adhere membrane to vertical surfaces using appropriate bonding adhesive. Secure top surface of membrane flashing with appropriate fasteners at 12" o. c. On high walls, provide additional securement measures if required by manufacturer. Fasten the top edge of membrane flashings at curbs, walls, etc., approximately every 12 inches on center with appropriate fasteners through one-inch diameter metal discs. Clamp the top edge of pipe flashing sleeves over an additional cushion strip and apply appropriate sealant along the top edge. At roof drains, apply appropriate sealant between the drain rim and the field membrane and between the flashing membrane and clamping ring. Secure clamping ring tightly over both membranes and re-install strainer dome. All flashing shall be in accordance with Roof Details and/or manufacturers instructions. Where alternative flashing methods exist, these will be considered upon submission and acceptance of appropriate shop drawings. Where flashing requirements vary from those described herein or on details, submit shop drawings to describe proposed detail modifications prior to job start. As specified in Section 07 62 00.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
F.
Metal Flashing: 1.
07 53 16 - 11
2. G.
Metal flashing and facia shall be fabricated to comply with membrane Manufacturer's standard published details.
Roof Drains: Terminations shall be made in accordance with Manufacturer's details. Taper insulation to provide smooth transition from roof surface to drain clamping ring.
3.06
MISCELLANEOUS WORK ITEMS A. Support any pipelines running along the roof surface, as well as duct legs and any non-penetrating supports using approved supports adhered over protection material. The protection material shall extend at least 2" beyond the support on all sides. Secure pipes to supports using galvanized metal clips secured on both sides of pipe. If required, supports shall be stacked and secured together to accommodate elevated pipes. Supports shall be spaced no more than 8 feet apart and installed so as not to impede water flow. Roof Walkways 1. Roof walkways shall be at least 36 wide and shall be installed at locations shown on roof plans, including at least two sides of all serviceable mechanical units and at all roof access points, including the base and top of access ladders. Roof protection pads shall be spaced as needed to allow for water flow. Secure walk pad by welding to field membrane along all perimeters in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B.
3.07
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Inspection: The completed installation shall be inspected by a representative of the Manufacturer in the presence of the Architect to verify that it complies with Manufacturer's published requirements. The Contractor shall be responsible for insuring positive drainage around all curbs, roof openings and crickets to roof drains or scuppers. Inferior or deficient work shall be removed and replaced. Water Test: 1. 1. A 48-hr. water test of all completed roof systems, including low-slope and metal roofing, as well as adjacent building components, shall be coordinated with the Architect and conducted by the Contractor in the presence of Architects representative. The water test shall include the following procedures: a. b. At the direction of the Architect, apply simulated rain over all roof areas for at least 15 minutes per area, or as otherwise directed. In addition to the simulated rain, direct water to all walls, windows, units, penetrations, etc. that occur adjacent to, or within each roof area, using a continuous, unforced hose stream.
B. C. D.
07 53 16 - 12
c.
Plug all roof drains in each drainage area and allow each to be filled to a depth of 3-4 inches measured at the drain areas. Allow to stand for a minimum of 48 hours. All plug drains are to be provided by the Contractor. Upon completion of water test, unplug primary drains only and insure that water flows freely without restriction. Verify that no water comes through overflow drain outlets (to insure that pipes are not crossconnected). Then unplug overflow drains and run hose stream directly into overflow drains to insure that water flows freely without restriction through overflow lines. Perform any necessary corrections to defects noted during or after the water test procedures. Perform additional testing as necessary to further define sources of any noted leakage. Contractor shall provide and/or arrange for all necessary equipment, supplies, water, etc. as needed to perform these tests. This may include a water truck with fire hose, if necessary. Water test shall be performed after completion of asphalt paving, and must be completed and verified prior to filing for substantial completion.
d.
e.
f.
g.
E.
A final audit punch list shall be made by the Architect upon notice by the General Contractor that roofing is complete. The roofing and related work must be 100% complete or additional inspections will be back charged.
3.08
ADJUSTING A. Re-inspect roofing and repair bonding defects, raised or exposed fasteners, delaminated flashings, and other defects.
3.09
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. Contractor shall remove any markings resulting from the work, from finished surfaces.
B.
3.10
PROTECTION A. Before the end of each working day, or before application is interrupted by precipitation, seal exposed sheet edges along laps and around drains, projections, and upstands. Cutoffs shall be built in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions and constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. Cutoffs shall be completely removed prior to the resumption of roofing. END OF SECTION
B.
07 53 16 - 13
SECTION 07 62 00 FLASHING AND SHEET METAL PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Flashings, sheet metal work and related items including, but not limited to: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.02 Counterflashing at vertical surfaces. Flashing at roof penetrations. Metal copings. Sump pans.
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings indicating type of material, gage, dimensions, profiles, locations where used, fastening and anchoring methods, joints, and provisions of expansion and contraction. Samples: Submit samples of each type of prefinished metal in selected color.
B. 1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. 2. Comply with design and installation methods of SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual. Comply with The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual installation details.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. C. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Handling: Comply with Manufacturers instructions.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Prefinished Metal: 1. Hot-dipped galvanized, ASTM A653 Structural Quality, Grade 40, G90 coating 24 gage core steel, or prefinished Galvalume - ASTM A792.
07 62 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Flashing and Sheet Metal
2.
Finish: Full strength Kynar 500/Hylar 5000 Fluorocarbon coating or equal under the Substitution requirements of Section 01 60 00, applied by the Manufacturer on a continuous coil coating line, with top side dry film thickness of 0.70 to 0.90 mil over 0.25 to 0.35 mil prime coat, to provide a total dry film thickness of 0.95 to 1.25 mil. a. b. c. Bottom side: Coated with primer with a dry film thickness of 0.25 mil. Finish: Conform to all tests for adhesion flexibility, and longevity as specified by the finish supplier. Color: Match adjacent finish color as selected by Architect.
3. B.
Strippable film: Liquid applied to top side of painted coil to protect finish during fabrications, shipping and field handling.
Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653, 24 gage minimum and as indicated, with G-60 coating.
2.02
ACCESSORIES A. Reglets and Counterflashings: As indicated on Drawings and as follows: 1. Fry Reglet Corporation, Type STX at stucco, Type SM at masonry and Concrete.Provide prefabricated inside and outside reglet and counterflashing corners. OKeefes Corporation, Types as applicable at stucco, masonry and concrete. Provide prefabricated inside and outside reglet and counterflashing corners. Or equal.
2. 3. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.
Solder: ASTM B32, 50/50 type. Flux: FS O-F-506. Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00. Plastic Cement: ASTM D4586. Roofing Felt: ASTM D226, 15 pound type or 30 pound type. Bituminous Coating: FS TT-C-494 or SSPC paint - 12, dry film 15 mils per coat. Polyethylene: Black, 6 mil. Sheet Metal Fasteners: Pre-finished galvanized steel with soft neoprene washers at exposed fasteners. Where exposed in the finished work of prefinished metal, provide fasteners with prefinished heads matching prefinished metal. Prefinished Metal Seam Sealers and Adhesives: As recommended by prefinished metal manufacturer for waterproof and weather-resistant seaming and adhesive applications of flashing and sheet metal work.
J.
2.03
FABRICATION A. Fabricate sheet metal with lines, arris, and angles sharp and true, and plane surfaces free from objectionable wave, warp or buckle. Hem exposed edges to form a 1/2 inch wide hem on the side concealed from view. Substrate Board Fasteners: Size
07 62 00 - 2
and type as recommended by manufacturer for type of substrate and as required to comply with wind uplift requirements. B. Fabricate gutters of 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet in accordance with the SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual and as indicated on drawings. Provide single-ply membrane (0.060 thick, material as specified in Section 07 53 16) liner adhesively applied over sheet metal to provide waterproof lining. Forming, anchoring, expansion and contraction details, shall conform to referenced quality standards. Provide for thermal expansion of running trim, flashing, expansion joints, and other items exposed for more than 15 feet continuous length. Fabricate cleats and starter strips of same material as sheet. Form pieces in longest practical lengths, except form flashing and facias in 8 to 10 foot units. Fabricate coping covers with butt seam with backup plate, fastened one side seams (item19, figure 3-3 per SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual). Solder and seal metal joints [or use seam sealer/adhesive as recommended by prefinished metal manufacturer]. After soldering, remove flux. Wipe and wash solder joints clean. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18 inch long legs, with mitered corners; solder for rigidity, seal with sealant. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches over roofing. Return and brake edges. Where prefabricated counterflashing and reglet system is used, form upper edge of counterflashing with an approved snap lock flange to engage reglet receiver and to provide a spring action at bottom edge against built-up flashing.
C. D. E. F. G. H.
I. J. K.
2.04
FINISH A. B. Shop prepare and prime exposed ferrous metal surfaces. Backpaint concealed metal surfaces with protective backing paint to a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mil.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. 1. 2. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, or vents through roof are solidly set, cant strips and reglets in place, and nailing strips located. Verify membrane termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
07 62 00 - 3
B.
Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work..
3.02
INSTALLATION A. B. Installation shall conform to NRCA and SMACNA manuals. Expansion Seams: Maintain a watertight installation at expansion seams. Locate expansion seams as shown or if not shown, at the following maximum spacing for each general flashing use: 1. 2. Flashing, expansion joints, gravel stops, and trim: At 10 foot intervals, 24 inches on each side of corners and intersections. Sealant-type expansion joints: Where sealant-filled expansion joints are used, embed the hooked flanges of the joint members not less than 1 inch into the sealant. Form joints to completely conceal the sealant. When ambient temperature is moderate at the time of installation (40 to 70 degrees F.), set joint members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant type joints at temperatures below 40 degrees F. Installation of sealant is specified in Section 07 92 00.
C. D.
Where dissimilar materials abut, provide proper separation or protection to minimize the possibility of galvanic action. Soldering: 1. 2. 3. 4. Except where other methods of joining are indicated or specified, solder joints and connections of Sheet Metal Work. Remove grease and dirt from metal surfaces to be joined. Remove flux residue by scrubbing, neutralizing with ammonia or a 5 to 10 percent solution of washing soda, followed by a clear water rinse. Assemble parts and solder using regular non-corrosive resin flux. Heat metal thoroughly to completely sweat solder through full contact area.
E. F.
Reglets: Install reglets in masonry, concrete or stucco to receive flashings. Counterflashing: 1. 2. Provide metal counterflashing at top edges of built-up base flashings and at other locations indicated. Lap end joints a minimum of 3 inches. Do not solder or weld joints. Make flashing continuous at angles. Counterflashing shall overlap base flashing a minimum of 4 inches, unless otherwise indicated. Where counterflashing terminates in reglets, fasten flashing with lead wedges every 12 inches. Fill reglets continuously with synthetic rubber type sealant.
3.
07 62 00 - 4
G.
Copings: 1. Cover top of parapet walls where indicated with 24 gage galvanized metal coping formed to design shown. Before applying metal, cover top of wall or wood blocking with polyethylene. Extend front edge of coping covering down over the lock into a previously placed continuous edge strip. Secure edge strips with nails spaced 12 inches apart. Join rear edge of coping covering to adjacent flashings as indicated.
2.
3. 3.03
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean END OF SECTION
07 62 00 - 5
SECTION 07 72 00 ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Roof Hatches
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Submit installation instructions. Manufacturer's Specifications, design data and
Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing layout, dimensions and construction details.
1.03
QUALITY ACCURANCE A. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Sheet Metal Standard: SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" details for fabrication of units, including flanges and cap flashing to coordinate with type of roofing indicated. NRCA's "Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" details for installing units.
2. 1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. C. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Handling: Comply with Manufacturers instructions.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on Drawings by taking field measurements; proper fit and attachment of parts is required.
1.06
COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.
07 72 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Roof Accessories
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Sheet: otherwise indicated. 1. B. C. D. ASTM A 653 with G90; commercial steel, unless
Structural Quality: Grade 40, where indicated or as required for strength.
Insulation: Manufacturer's standard rigid or semirigid glass-fiber board of thickness indicated. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick. Fasteners: Same metal as metals being fastened, or nonmagnetic stainless steel or other noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. 1. Provide nonremovable fastener heads. Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur and containing no asbestos fibers, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant. Elastomeric Sealant: Recommended by unit manufacturer that is compatible with joint surfaces; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.
E. F.
G. H. I.
2.02
ROOF HATCHES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc Bilco Company. Milcor, Inc. OKeeffees Inc.
Hatches: Frame with minimum 9-inch- high, integral-curb, double-wall construction with 1-1/2inch insulation, formed cants and cap flashing (roofing counterflashing), with welded or sealed mechanical corner joints. Provide doublewall cover (lid) construction with 1- inch- thick insulation core. Provide gasketing and equip with corrosion-resistant or hot-dip galvanized hardware including pintle hinges, hold-open devices, interior padlock hasps, and both interior and exterior latch handles.
07 72 00 - 2
1. 2. 3. C. D.
Fabricate units to withstand 40-lbf/sq. ft. external and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal loading pressure. Size: 30 by 36 inches, unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. Prime-Painted Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer ready to receive paint finish as specified in Section 09 91 00
Sloping Roofs: Where slope or roof deck exceeds 1/4 inch per foot, fabricate hatch curbs with height tapered to match slope to level tops of units. Ladder extension (for roof hatches): Ladder Safety Post: Manufacturer's standard ladder safety post. Post to lock in place on full extension. Provide release mechanism to return post to closed position. 1. Acceptable Product: Bilco Model 1 LadderUP safety post.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of work 1. 2. 3. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, and clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored and is ready to receive roof accessories Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof accessories securely in place and capable of resisting forces specified. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for completing roof accessory installation. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, and fastener disengagement. Install roof accessories to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.
2. 3. B.
Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by roof accessory manufacturers for waterproof performance.
07 72 00 - 3
C.
Roof Hatch Installation: 1. 2. 3. Check roof hatch for proper operation. Adjust operating mechanism as required. Clean and lubricate joints and hardware. Attach safety railing system to roof hatch curb. Attach ladder safety post according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D. 3.03
Seal joints as required by manufacturer of roof accessories.
TOUCH UP A. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting in accordance with Section 09 91 00.
3.04
CLEANING A. B. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged metal coatings. END OF SECTION
07 72 00 - 4
SECTION 07 84 00 FIRE STOPPING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Penetration firestopping for penetrations through fire-resistancerated construction as indicated on Drawings.
1.02
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide penetration firestopping that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. 1. 2. B. Fire-resistance-rated walls. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies.
Rated Systems: Provide penetration firestopping with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide penetration firestopping with F-ratings indicated, as determined per ASTM E 814, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. T-Rated Systems: For the following conditions, provide penetration firestopping with T-ratings indicated, as well as F-ratings, as determined per ASTM E 814, where systems protect penetrating items exposed to potential contact with adjacent materials in occupiable floor areas: a. b. Penetrations located outside wall cavities. Penetrations located outside fire-resistance shaft enclosures.
2.
C.
For penetration firestopping exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that after curing do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. 2. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant penetration firestopping. For floor penetrations with annular spaces exceeding 4 inches in width and exposed to possible loading and traffic, provide firestop systems capable of supporting floor loads involved either by installing floor plates or by other means. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide penetration firestopping not requiring removal of insulation.
3.
07 84 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Fire Stopping
D.
For penetration firestopping exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread ratings of less than 25 and smoke-developed ratings of less than 450, as determined per ASTM E 84.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature for each type of throughpenetration firestop system product indicated. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, show each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. Include firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency that evidences compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each through-penetration firestop system configuration for construction and penetrating items. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.
2.
C.
Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-penetration firestop system, along with the following information: 1. 2. 3. Types of penetrating items. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping for each location identified by firestop design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
D. E. F.
Qualification Data: For installer. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of through-penetration firestop system products certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating throughpenetration firestop system complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years experience with firestop systems similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this and a firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors." Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of penetration firestopping in Project to a single qualified installer.
B.
07 84 00 - 2
C. D.
Source Limitations: Obtain penetration firestopping, for each kind of penetration and construction condition indicated, from a single manufacturer. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide penetration firestopping that comply with the following requirements and those specified in "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or Warnock Hersey or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Penetration firestopping are identical to those tested per ASTM E 814. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. b. Through-penetration firestop system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. Penetration firestopping correspond to those indicated by reference to through-penetration firestop system designations listed by the following: i. UL in "Fire Resistance Directory." ii. ITS in "Directory of Listed Products." iii. Warnock Hersey
2.
E.
Pre-Installation Conference: 1. Convene a pre-installation conference to review specifications and procedures with the Architect, Contractor, installer, manufacturer's representative, Owner and other trades relevant to the work, prior to ordering materials. Notify Architect at least 48 hours prior to starting Work.
2. 1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver through-penetration firestop system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer; date of manufacture; lot number; shelf life, if applicable; qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project; curing time; and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials for penetration firestopping to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.
B.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by through-penetration
07 84 00 - 3
firestop system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.07 COORDINATION A. B. C. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping are installed according to specified requirements. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping. Notify Owner's inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of throughpenetration firestop system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until Owner's inspecting agency and building inspector, if required by authorities having jurisdiction, have examined each installation.
D.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Hilti Construction Chemicals, Inc. Isolatek International. Nelson Firestop Products. Specified Technologies Inc. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division. W.R. Grace Construction
2.02
MATERIALS A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide penetration firestopping that are compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with the items, if any, penetrating penetration firestopping, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in castin-place concrete floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with
B.
Fill Materials: 1.
07 84 00 - 4
an intumescent strip, a radial extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a neoprene gasket. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that after cure do not re-emulsify during exposure to moisture. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foilfaced elastomeric sheet bonded to galvanized steel sheet. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets. Mortars: Prepackaged, dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar. Pillows/Bags: Reusable, heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glassfiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents and fire-retardant additives. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: a. neutral-curing
8.
9.
10.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and other surfaces requiring a nonslumping, gunnable sealant, unless indicated firestop system limits use to nonsag grade for both opening conditions. Grade for Horizontal Surfaces: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal surfaces. Grade for Vertical Surfaces: vertical and other surfaces. Nonsag formulation for openings in
b. c. C.
Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated. Accessories include, but are not limited to, the following items: 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. b. Slag-/rock-wool-fiber insulation. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.
07 84 00 - 5
c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. D.
Fire-rated form board. Fillers for sealants.
Temporary forming materials. Substrate primers. Collars. Steel sleeves.
Fire Safing Insulation: ASTM C24, E119 and E136. Thickness shall be as required by the Manufacturer to provide a fire rating equal to that of the assembly of which it is a part. Where smoke stop protection also is required, install Thermafiber SmokeSeal Caulking Compound as needed to meet UL Standard 1479 and ASTM E814 procedure.
2.03
MIXING A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with throughpenetration firestop system manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.
PART 3. 3.01
- EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. 3.02
PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with firestop system manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
2.
3. B.
Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and
07 84 00 - 6
methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from firestop system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestop system's seal with substrates.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article and firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.
B.
C.
Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. 2. 3. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.
D.
Fire Safing Insulation: Install in proper sizes on safing clips as needed but not to exceed 24 inches O.C. Leave no voids between walls and edges of slabs.
3.04
IDENTIFICATION A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. For plastic labels, use self-adhering type with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed and, in combination with label material, will result in partial destruction of label if removal is attempted. Include the following information on labels: 1. 2. The words: "Warning--Through-Penetration Firestop System--Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage." Contractor's name, address, and phone number.
07 84 00 - 7
3. 4. 5. 6. 3.05
Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. Date of installation. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. Installer's name.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect penetration firestopping and to prepare test reports. 1. B. C. Inspecting agency will state in each report whether inspected penetration firestopping comply with or deviate from requirements.
Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace penetration firestopping so they comply with requirements.
3.06
CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure penetration firestopping are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping immediately and install new materials to produce penetration firestopping complying with specified requirements.
B.
3.07
SCHEDULE OF PENETRATIONS A. Schedule: As indicated on Drawings. END OF SECTION
07 84 00 - 8
SECTION 07 90 00 JOINT SEALANTS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 1.02 Interior and Exterior sealant joints.
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Manufacturers literature for each joint-sealant product indicated, including installation instructions. Samples: Submit one sample for each type and color of joint sealant required. Samples shall be installed in 1/2-inch- wide joints formed between two 6-inchlong strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. Shop Drawings: Illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades. Drawings shall indicate type of sealant scheduled to be used at each type of joint condition. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of joint sealants certifying that products furnished comply with requirements and are suitable for the use indicated. Qualification Data: Submit data indicating capabilities and experience for installers. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Field Test Report: Submit copies of logs and test reports showing results of field adhesion testing and stain testing. Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: manufacturer indicating: 1. 2. H. I. Submit reports from sealant
C.
D. E.
F. G.
Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.
Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating sealants comply with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current product formulations. Warranties: Submit sample warranty to be signed jointly by applicator and manufacturer.
07 90 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Joint Sealeants
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: Installer shall be experienced with project similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project and shall be approved by sealant manufacturer. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of joint sealant through one source from a single manufacturer. 1. If sealants from separate manufacturers must be used and could come in contact with each other, provide written certification from every manufacturer involved that the sealants are compatible and will adhere to each other. Use manufacturers standard test methods to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. a. 2. Perform tests under environmental conditions replicating those that will exist during installation.
B.
C.
Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: 1.
Submit a minimum of 9 pieces of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. At locations where materials fail tests, obtain joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures, including the use of specially formulated primers.
3. 4.
D.
Product Testing: Submitted test results shall be from a qualified testing agency based on testing current sealant formulations within a 36-month period. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. Test elastomeric joint sealants for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920, and where applicable, to other standard test methods. Test elastomeric joint sealants according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in peel, and indentation hardness. Test other joint sealants for compliance with requirements indicated by referencing standard specifications and test methods.
2.
3.
4. E.
Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, perform adhesion field tests for each type of sealant and joint substrate indicated.
07 90 00 - 2
1. 2. 3. 4.
Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. Arrange for tests to take place with joint sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand-pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 60-inchlong joints using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint-sealant installation required for the completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. Make knife cuts from one side of joint to the other, followed by two cuts approximately 2 inches long at sides of joint and meeting cross cut at one end. Place a mark 1 inch from cross-cut end of 2-inch piece. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant between cross-cut end and 1-inch mark; pull firmly at a 90-degree angle or more in direction of side cuts while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to the distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. For joints with dissimilar substrates, check adhesion to each substrate separately by extending cut along one side, checking adhesion to opposite side, and then repeating this procedure for opposite side.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Conduct number of field adhesion tests for each type of sealant and each type of substrate as follows: a. Not less than 10 tests for the first 1,000 feet of installed sealant and 1 test for each additional 1,000 feet of sealant installed, or 1 test per floor per elevation.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Document results of field adhesion tests and record results in field adhesion test log. Include in log data on pull distance used to test each joint sealant. Include data on joints where material connected with pull portion of sealant failed to adhere to joint substrate or tore cohesively. Inspect joints and record data for the following: a. b. c. Complete fill. No voids. Joint dimensions matching those of manufacturers recommended details.
10.
Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
07 90 00 - 3
11.
Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. Repair sealant test areas by removing damaged materials and applying sealant to test area using same procedure used to originally install the sealant.
12. F.
Stain Testing: Perform Stain testing of natural stone, masonry and other porous substrates proposed for use in the Work. Obtain actual samples of materials proposed for use and test to determine if permanent discoloration of porous surfaces will occur from direct contact with sealants. Perform stain testing in conformance with ASTM C1248 and as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Notify Architect at commencement of stain testing procedure. Arrange for manufacturers field technical representative and Architect to be present during examination of test results. Cut substrate to provide flat surface for application of sealant. Separate substrate materials by removable shims to create 1/2 x 1/2 x 3 inch joint. Fill joint with scheduled sealant, tool, and allow to cure for 21 days at room temperature. After 21 day curing, remove shims, compress joint to 50 percent of original joint width to 1/4 inch, and place in an oven at 158 degrees F. for 14 days. After 14 days in oven, remove and allow sample to cool to room temperature. Examine sample to determine presence of discoloration or change in appearance in any way to exposed surfaces. After visual inspection, cut sample in half to determine presence of discoloration or change in appearance in any way into the sample itself at the adhesive bond line and presence of bleeding into the area around the adhesive bond line. Document results of stain tests and record results in stain test log. Do not install sealants that show evidence of staining substrates.
10. 11. G.
Field Color and Workmanship Samples: Caulk a section of joint as directed, under job conditions, at least 7 days prior to start of work for review by Architect. When approved, sample shall be used as a standard of comparison for remainder of work.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration date, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturers written instructions to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes.
B.
07 90 00 - 4
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Project Requirements: Do not install when weather conditions or substrate conditions are not acceptable to manufacturer. 1. 2. Ambient and substrate temperature conditions shall be within limits as recommended by sealant manufacturer. Joint widths shall be at least the minimum width allowed by sealant manufacturer and as recommended by Structural Engineer.
1.06
WARRANTY A. Installer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by Installer agreeing to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. B. Warranty Period: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty, signed by elastomeric sealant manufacturer agreeing to furnish elastomeric joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: a. Exterior Skin of Building: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion, or manufacturers standard warranty period, whichever is longer. Interior of Buildings and other locations other than Exterior Skin: i. Urethane Sealants: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. ii. Silicone Sealants: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. iii. Others: 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
b.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Pecora Tremco Vulkem Dow Corning Corp. Sika Corp. Sonneborn / Degusa GE Silicones
07 90 00 - 5
2.02
MATERIALS A. B. General: The selection of proper sealant for a particular joint shall be in accordance with current published recommendations of the manufacturer. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range for this characteristic.
C.
2.03
JOINT SEALANTS A. Elastomeric Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated. 1. Additional Movement Capability: Where additional movement capability is specified in the Elastomeric Joint-Sealant Schedule, provide products with the capability, when tested for adhesion and cohesion under maximum cyclic movement per ASTM C 719, to withstand the specified percentage change in the joint width existing at the time of installation and remain in compliance with other requirements of ASTM C 920 for uses indicated. Acrylic-Based Solvent-Release Joint-Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 1311. Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant: Provide manufacturer's standard, solventrelease-curing, pigmented, synthetic-rubber sealant complying with AAMA 803.3 and formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Provide manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and the following: a. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.
B.
Solvent-Release Joint Sealants: 1. 2.
C.
Acoustical Joint Sealants: 1.
2.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Provide manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, syntheticrubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission.
2.04
ACCESSORIES A. Joint Sealant Backing: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
07 90 00 - 6
1.
Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, provide one of the following, of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance: a. b. c. Type O: Open-cell material. Type C: Closed-cell material with a surface skin. Type B: Bicellular material with a surface skin. i. Product: Sof Rod by Nomaco.
2.
Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F. Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
3.
B.
Primer: Material recommended by joint sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants with joint substrates. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.
C.
D.
PART 3. 3.01
- EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint-sealant performance. 1. 2. B. Substrates shall be dry and free of contaminants. Report unsatisfactory conditions to Architect in writing.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
07 90 00 - 7
3.02
PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. a. Porous joint substrates: Clean surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint surfaces include the following: Nonporous joint substrates: Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Concrete: Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.
b.
c. B.
Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended in writing by joint sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.
C.
3.03
INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. B. General: Comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. Standards: 1. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. Acoustical Sealant Application Standard: Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 919 for use of joint sealants in acoustical applications as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.
2.
07 90 00 - 8
C.
Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. 2. 3. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.
D. E.
Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and back of joints. Install sealants to comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. 2. 3. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. Completely fill recesses provided for each joint configuration. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
F.
Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. 2. 3. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.
3.04
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field-test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed elastomeric sealant joints as follows: a. b. 2. 3. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation.
Test Method: Test joint sealants by standard hand-pull method. Inspect joints for complete fill, for absence of voids, and for joint configuration complying with specified requirements. Record results in a field adhesion test log. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull
4.
07 90 00 - 9
distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field- adhesion hand-pull test criteria. b. c. 5. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free from voids. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified
Record test results in a field adhesion test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used to originally seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and new sealant contacts original sealant.
6.
B.
Evaluation of Field-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.
3.05
CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises.
B.
3.06
PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
3.07
INTERIOR AND MISCELLANEOUS JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Horizontal traffic: 1. 2. 3. Type: 2-part or 3-part (self-leveling) urethane, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Use T. Conforming to ASTM C920 Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. Pecora NR-200 Urexpan Sealant or Dynatred
07 90 00 - 10
b. c. B.
Tremco THC-900/901 Vulkem 245, Sikaflex 2c SL (self-leveling)
Masonry, concrete to concrete, stucco, steel and wood, except as identified in Exterior Sealant schedule: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Locations: Expansion and Control Joints. Type: 3-part chemically curing polyurethane sealant, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A, O. Conforming to ASTM C920 Movement: 50 percent in extension and compression, and sustained temperatures of 250 degrees F in service Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. b. c. d. Tremco Dymeric 240/240FC Sealant Pecora Dynatrol II Vulkem 922, Sikaflex 2c NS (non-sag) Sonneborn NP-2.
C.
Glass (except exterior, insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum, Natural Stone, and plastics except as identified in Exterior Sealant schedule: 1. 2. 3. 4. Type: One-part low modulus moisture cure silicone rubber sealant, Class A, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O. Conforming to ASTM C920. Movement: 100 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression in service. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. b. Dow Corning 790 Silicone Glazing Sealant Pecora 890.
D.
Glass (including insulating glass or special coated glass), aluminum and plastics except as identified in Exterior Sealant schedule: 1. 2. 3. 4. Type: One-part medium modulus neutral cure silicone rubber sealant, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, G, A, and O. Conforming to ASTM C 920 Movement of 50 percent in extension and 50 percent in compression in service. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. b. c. Pecora 895 Dow Corning 795 Dow Corning 791
07 90 00 - 11
E.
Concrete to concrete, stucco, masonry, aluminum, steel, and wood and Mechanical (ductwork and air conditioning) except as identified in Exterior Sealant schedule: 1. 2. 3. 4. Locations: Non-expanding Joints. Type: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, M, A,O. Conforming to ASTM C920 Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. b. c. d. e. Sika Sikaflex 1A Pecora Dynatrol 1 Tremco DyMonic FC Pecora 345 Sonneborn NP-1.
F.
Plumbing Fixtures (around toilet, bath, kitchen fixtures, and food service equipment): 1. 2. Type: Silicone rubber sealant with mold inhibitor. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: a. b. c. d. Tremco Proglaze or Tremsil 200 Dow Corning 999 Pecora 863 or 898 Sonneborn Omni-Plus.
G.
Acoustical Sealant: 1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. b. Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: i. 2. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. ii. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. a. Acceptable Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products: i. Pecora Corporation; BA-98. ii. Tremco; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
c.
07 90 00 - 12
3.08
EXTERIOR JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Provide the following sealants at exterior locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. EIFS to painted aluminum: Dow Corning 795, GE Silpruf and Pecora 895. EIFS joints: Dow Corning 790, GE Silpruf LM and Pecora 890. Metal to Metal, Metal to Glass: Dow Corning 795, GE Silpruf and Pecora 895. Metal or EIFS to Concrete: Dow Corning 790, GE Silpruf LM and Pecora 890. END OF SECTION
07 90 00 - 13
SECTION 08 11 13 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. B. 1. 1.02 Steel doors. Steel door frames. Section 08 14 00 Wood Doors
Related Sections:
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit elevations or each type of door and frame indicated, including door designation, type, level and model, material description, core description, construction details, label compliance, sound and fire-resistance ratings, and finishes. Shop Drawings: Submit Drawings showing location and installation requirements for hardware. Door Schedule: Use same reference designations indicated on Drawings in preparing schedule for doors and frames.
B. C.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Steel Door and Frame Standard: Comply with ANSI A 250.8, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Single Source: Provide doors and frames from a single manufacturer.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver doors and frames cardboard-wrapped or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional protection as required to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. Deliver welded frames with spreaders. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4inch- high wood blocking. Nonvented plastic or canvas shelters shall not be used for cover. If door packaging becomes wet, remove cartons immediately. Provide minimum 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to avoid metal to metal contact and to permit air circulation.
B. C.
PART 2.
PRODUCTS
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 11 13 - 1
2.01
MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ceco Door Products; a United Dominion Company. Curries Company. Kewanee Corporation (The). Republic Builders Products. Steelcraft; a division of Ingersoll-Rand.
2.02
MATERIALS A. B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: ASTM A 366, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheets: ASTM A 653, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with an A40 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. Doors: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI 250.8 for level and model and ANSI A250.4 for physical-endurance level: 1. D. E. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model (Seamless), 18 gauge cold-rolled steel. 2
C.
Frames: Conforming to ANSIA250.8/SDI100, fabricated from 16 gauge steel. Core Construction: One of the following manufacturer's standard core materials that produce a door complying with SDI standards: 1. 2. Interior: Resin-impregnated kraft/paper honeycomb. Exterior: Polyurethane or Polystyrene.
F.
Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped frames, fabricate stops to receive three silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and two silencers on heads of double-door frames. Plaster Guards: Provide 0.016-inch- thick, steel sheet plaster guards or mortar boxes to close off interior of openings; place at back of hardware cutouts where mortar or other materials might obstruct hardware operation. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from 18 gauge, electrolytic zinc-coated or metallic-coated steel sheet. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where zinc-coated items are to be built into exterior walls, comply with ASTM A 153, Class C or D as applicable. Prime Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory-applied coat of rust-inhibiting primer complying with ANSI A250.10 for acceptance criteria.
G.
H. I.
J.
08 11 13 - 2
2.03
FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to comply with ANSI A250.8 and to be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from defects including warp and buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment, to assure proper assembly at Project site. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, reinforcement, edge channels and moldings from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated, provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolts. Reinforce top and bottom of doors horizontally by 16 gauge steel channels, full width, spot welded to each face at least 3 inches on center. Bevel edge of lock stile. Accurately mortise doors for locks and hinges. Provide adequate box type reinforcement with steel plates welded to the interior reinforcing channels and drilled and tapped. Provide reinforcement for all other items of hardware. Exterior Doors and Frames: 1. 2. Fabricate doors, panels, and frames, dripcaps and other accessories from metallic-coated steel sheet. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an integral part of door construction or by addition of 16 gauge, metallic-coated steel channels with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Secure drip cap to frame of exterior doors. Non-Fire-Rated Doors: Not more than 1/8 inch at jambs and heads, except not more than 1/4 inch between pairs of doors. Not more than 3/4 inch at bottom.
B. C. D. E.
F.
3. G. 1.
Clearances:
H. I.
Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." Frame Construction: Fabricate frames to shape shown. 1. 2. 3. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped and continuously welded corners and seamless face joints. Provide welded frames with temporary spreader bars. For concealed overhead door closers, provide space, cutouts, reinforcement, and provisions for fastening in top rail of doors or head of frames, as applicable.
J. K.
Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or, if not indicated, according to ANSI A250.8.
08 11 13 - 3
2.04
FINISHES A. Clean frames by degreasing process and apply thorough coating of primer, covering inside and outside surfaces, to receive paint finish as specified in Section 09 91 00 - Painting. 1. Galvanealed Frames: Coat welds and other disrupted surfaces with zinc-rich paint containing not less than 90 percent zinc dust by weight.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. B. General: Install steel doors, frames, and accessories according to Shop Drawings, manufacturer's data, and as specified. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions in SDI 105, unless otherwise indicated. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is completed, remove temporary braces and spreaders, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 1. 2. Place frames before construction of enclosing walls and ceilings. In metal-stud partitions, provide at least three wall anchors per jamb; install adjacent to hinge location on hinge jamb and at corresponding heights on strike jamb. Attach wall anchors to studs with screws. For openings 90 inches or more in height, install an additional anchor at hinge and strike jambs.
3. C.
Door Installation: Comply with ANSI A250.8. Fit hollow-metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified in ANSI A250.8. Shim as necessary to comply with SDI 122 and ANSI/DHI A115.1G.
3.02
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after installation, sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch up of compatible air-drying primer. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. END OF SECTION
08 11 13 - 4
SECTION 08 14 00 WOOD DOORS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. Solid-core wood doors. Factory finishing flush wood doors. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers data for each type of door, including details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Shop Drawings: Submit drawings showing schedule of doors indicating location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; requirements for veneer matching; and other pertinent data. Note discrepancies between the Drawings and door schedules, and the requirements of regulatory and testing agencies. Samples: 1. Transparent Finishes: a. Submit 3 samples, 8 inches x 10 inches, for each wood species and transparent finish. Samples shall indicate typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. Submit 2 corner sections of doors, approximately 8 inches by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.
C.
b.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer. Certifications: 1. C. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for Project indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.
Coordination: Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and obtaining necessary information from Hardware and Metal Frame Manufacturers. Door
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wood Doors
08 14 00 - 1
Manufacturer shall be responsible for coordinating necessary information received by Contractor from Hardware and Metal Frame Manufacturers in order that doors shall be properly prepared to receive hinges and hardware. Contractor shall provide door supplier with approved frame schedule, hardware schedule, and hardware templates. Furnish to door supplier 60 days prior to desired delivery date of doors. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. C. D. E. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons or as required to protect door edges and faces. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. Store doors flat and protect from construction activity, dirt, and exposure to sunlight. Handling: 1. 2. 3. Always handle doors with clean hands or gloves. Do not drag doors across one another. Maintain factory packaging or other means of protection on doors, until date of Substantial Completion.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.
1.06
WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, Installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship. 1. Warranty shall also include removal of defective door, hanging, installation or hardware and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.
2.
08 14 00 - 2
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. Buell Door Company. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. Lambton Doors. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. Marshfield Doors Systems.
2.02
DOOR CONSTRUCTION A. Veneers: 1. Transparent Finish: a. b. B. C. Grade: Custom (Grade A faces). Species and Cut: As selected by Architect.
Edge Bandings: Flush Doors, in accordance with AWI Section 1300. Solid Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2, 32 lbs. per cubic foot density or structural composite lumber. Provide doors with structural composite lumber cores at locations where exit devices are indicated.
D. 2.03
Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.
FABRICATION A. Face Veneers, Crossbands and Backers: When wood veneer or medium density overlay faces are specified, doors shall be 5 ply, made up of a face veneer, crossbanding and a core unit, all securely bonded together utilizing type 1 (fully waterproof) adhesive and the hot press assembly technique. All plies must be placed at right angles to adjacent plies. Face veneers shall have a minimum thickness of 1/50 after factory sanding and the individual pieces of veneer forming the face veneer must be spliced or edge glued together Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.
B. C.
08 14 00 - 3
2.04
FACTORY FINISHING A. B. General: Factory finish doors to comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory finishing. Transparent Finish: 1. 2. 3. Grade: Custom. Finish: Manufacturer's standard finish with performance comparable to AWI System TR-4 conversion varnish. Staining: As selected by Architect.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. Reject doors with defects.
2. B. 3.02
INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. Doors that are cut or planed for fitting shall be immediately resealed with a transparent wood sealer. Doors shall operate freely without sticking or binding, without hinge-bound conditions and with hardware installed, properly adjusted and functioning. Site Repair of Factory Finish: 1. Clear and Stain: Minor handling marks or scratches (not through the seal coat) shall be repaired by sanding the damaged area, then topcoating again with polyurethane with a matching gloss.
D.
3.03
ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.
3.04
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of the Work, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION
08 14 00 - 4
SECTION 08 31 13 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 1.02 Access doors and frames.
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Manufacturers literature for each type of access door indicated. Coordination Drawings: Drawn to scale and coordinating access door and frame installation with ceiling support, ceiling-mounted items, and concealed Work above ceiling. Samples: Submit manufacturers standard size sample each exposed finish. Schedule: Door and frame schedule, including types, general locations, sizes, construction details, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.
C. D.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36. Steel Sheet: 1. 2. Hot-Rolled: ASTM A 569, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, and surface defects; pickled and oiled. Cold-Rolled: ASTM A 366, Commercial Steel (CS), or ASTM A 620, Drawing Steel (DS), Type B; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness. a. C. Electrolytic zinc-coated steel sheet, complying with ASTM A 591, Class C coating, may be substituted at fabricator's option.
Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304; with minimum sheet thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 480. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum panels indicated. Shop Primer for Ferrous Metal: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with performance requirements in FS TT-P-664; selected for good resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, compatibility with
D. E.
08 31 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Access Doors and Frames
finish paint systems indicated, and capability to provide sound foundation for fieldapplied topcoats despite prolonged exposure. 2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. PART 3. 3.01 Bilco Company J. L. Industries, Inc. Karp Associates, Inc. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. Milcor Limited Partnership. Nystrom Building Products Co. Williams Brothers Corporation. Style: As required for wall construction and as approved by Architect. Material: Prime-painted steel sheet. subject to moisture. Provide stainless steel at locations
Flush Access Doors and Frames:
Door: Minimum 14 gage thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. Frame: Minimum 16 gage sheet metal. Hinges: Spring-loaded concealed pin type. Lock: Flush screwdriver-operated steel cam.
- EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. Advise installers of other work about specific requirements relating to access door and floor door installation, including sizes of openings to receive access door and frame, as well as locations of supports, inserts, and anchoring devices. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. Install access doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. END OF SECTION
B. C. D.
08 31 13 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Access Doors and Frames
SECTION 08 41 13 ALUMINUM ENTRANCE AND STOREFRONT PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. B. Section Includes: 1. 1. 2. 3. 1.02 Exterior entrance and storefront systems. Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware Section 08 80 00 Glazing Related sections:
REFERENCES A. B. C. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Aluminum Association (AA)
1.03
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide aluminum entrance and storefront systems capable of withstanding loads and thermal and structural movement requirements indicated without failure, based on testing manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project. Failure includes the following: 1. 2. B. C. Air infiltration and water penetration exceeding specified limits. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movement, to glazing units.
Glazing: Physically and thermally isolate glazing from framing members. Wind Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind-load design pressures calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or the American Society of Civil Engineers' ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," 6.4.2, "Analytical Procedure," whichever are more stringent. 1. Deflection of framing members in a direction normal to wall plane is limited to L/175 of clear span or 3/4 inch, whichever is smaller, unless otherwise indicated. Static-Pressure Test Performance: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence material failures, structural distress, failure of operating components to function normally, or permanent deformation of main framing
2.
08 41 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Aluminum Entrance and Storefront
members exceeding 0.2 percent of clear span when tested according to ASTM E 330. a. b. D. Test Pressure: 150 percent of inward and outward wind-load design pressures. Duration: As required by design wind velocity; fastest 1 mile of wind for relevant exposure category.
Seismic Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions calculated according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," Section 9, "Earthquake Loads," whichever are more stringent. Dead Loads: Provide entrance- and storefront-system members that do not deflect an amount which will reduce glazing bite below 75 percent of design dimension when carrying full dead load. 1. 2. Provide a minimum 1/8-inch clearance between members and top of glazing or other fixed part immediately below. Provide a minimum 1/16-inch clearance between members and operable windows and doors.
E.
F.
Live Loads: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate the supporting structures' deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads indicated without failure of materials or permanent deformation. Air Infiltration: Provide entrance and storefront systems with permanent resistance to air leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressure difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. Water Penetration: Provide entrance and storefront systems that do not evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and frame areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at minimum differential pressure of 20 percent of inward-acting wind-load design pressure as defined by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures," but not less than 10 lbf/sq. ft. Water leakage is defined as follows: 1. Uncontrolled water infiltrating systems or appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Water controlled by flashing and gutters that is drained back to the exterior and cannot damage adjacent materials or finishes is not water leakage.
G.
H.
I. J.
Thermal Performance: When tested in accordance with AAMA 1503.1 and 1502.7 the following results should be attained: U-Maximum .53/CRF minimum of 59. Thermal Movements: Provide entrance and storefront systems, including anchorage, that accommodate thermal movements of systems and supporting elements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures without buckling, damaging stresses on glazing, failure of
08 41 13 - 2
joint sealants, damaging loads on fasteners, failure of doors or other operating units to function properly, and other detrimental effects. 1. K. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.
Structural-Support Movement: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate structural movements including, but not limited to, sway and deflection. Dimensional Tolerances: Provide entrance and storefront systems that accommodate dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. Performance - Aluminum Doors (Swinging): Resistance to corner racking shall be tested by the Dual Moment Load test as follows: 1. 2. 3. Test section shall consist of standard top door corner assembly. Side rail section shall be 24 inches long and top rail section 12 inches long. Anchor "top rail" positively to test bench so that corner protrudes 3 inches beyond bench edge. Anchor a lever arm positively to side rail at a point 19 inches from inside edge of top rail. Attach weight support pad at a point 19 inches from inner edge of side rail. Test section shall withstand a minimum load of 200 pounds on the lever arm before reaching the point of failure, which shall be considered a rotation on the lever arm in excess of 45 degrees.
L.
M.
4.
1.04
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers literature for each product specified, including details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Shop Drawings: 1. Entrance and storefront systems. Show details of fabrication and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, details of components, provisions for expansion and contraction, attachments to other work and glazing details. Entrance systems: Submit hardware schedule and indicate operating hardware types, quantities, and locations. Submit 2 samples of each type of exposed finish required in manufacturer's standard sizes. Where finishes involve normal color and texture variations, include sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. Samples will be reviewed by Architect for color and texture only. Cutaway Sample: Architect reserves the right to require samples of typical fabricated sections, showing joints, exposed fastenings (if any), quality of workmanship, glazing, flashing and drainage, expansion provisions,
B.
2. C.
Samples: 1.
2. 3.
08 41 13 - 3
structural sealant joints, hardware and accessory items, before fabrication of the Work proceeds. Samples shall be made from minimum 6-inch lengths of full-size components. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing entrance and storefront systems similar to those required for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. 1. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for entrance and storefront systems, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain entrance and storefront systems, including finishes, used for this project through one source from a single manufacturer. Operable windows used in conjunction with these systems shall be manufactured by a company whose products are compatible with the specified entrances and storefront. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code-Aluminum." Regulatory Requirements: 1. 2. 3. ANSI A117.1 "Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People." Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
C. D.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: 1. 2. 3. Verify dimensions by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating systems without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions to ensure proper fit.
1.07
WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit a written warranty executed by the manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of entrance and storefront systems that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
08 41 13 - 4
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. C.
Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. Adhesive or cohesive sealant failures. Failure of system to meet performance requirements. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. Failure of operating components to function normally.
System Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion. Finish Warranty: Warrant anodized coating against excessive fading, excessive non- uniformity of color or shade, cracking, peeling, pitting or corroding (all within the limits defined). Warranty shall include replacement at no charge (material and labor) within 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Arcadia (Basis of Design Arcadia AG451T Series 2 X 4-1/2 center glazed system thermally broken for 1 insulated glass (screw alpine/shear block system) EFCO Corporation. Kawneer Company, Inc. U.S. Aluminum. Southwest Aluminum Systems, Inc. Vistawall Architectural Products.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.02
MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Extruded 6063 T6 aluminum alloy (ASTM B221 - Alloy G.S. 10aT6), complying with the requirements of standards indicated below. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. Extruded Bars, Rods, Shapes, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. Bars, Rods, and Wire: ASTM B 211. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10.
Steel Reinforcement: Complying with ASTM A 36 for structural shapes, plates, and bars; ASTM A 611 for cold-rolled sheet and strip; or ASTM A 570 for hotrolled sheet and strip. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 80 00 Glazing, minimum 1 insulated glazing at all storefront windows.
C.
08 41 13 - 5
D. E.
Glazing Gaskets: Elastomeric extrusions as required to provide specified performance. Vinyl (PVC) glazing gaskets are not acceptable. Spacers, Setting Blocks, Gaskets, and Bond Breakers: Manufacturer's standard permanent, nonmigrating types in hardness recommended by manufacturer, compatible with sealants, and suitable for system performance requirements. Wood is not an acceptable material for setting blocks or shims. Framing system gaskets, sealants, and joint fillers as recommended by manufacturer for joint type. Sealants and joint fillers: As specified in Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements, except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat.
F. G. H.
2.03
COMPONENTS A. Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard 1-3/4-inch- thick glazed doors with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extruded tubular rail and stile members. Corners shall be mechanically fastened with reinforcing brackets or deep penetration and fillet welded. 1. 2. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Provide manufacturer's standard snap-on extruded aluminum glazing stops and preformed gaskets. Wide Stile: a. b. c. B. Vertical Stile: 5 inches. Top Rail: 5 inches. Bottom Rail: 10 inches
Brackets and Reinforcements: Provide manufacturer's standard brackets and reinforcements that are compatible with adjacent materials. Provide nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. 2. Reinforce members as required to retain fastener threads. Do not use exposed fasteners, except for hardware application. For hardware application, use countersunk Phillips flat-head machine screws finished to match framing members or hardware being fastened, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
D. E.
Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts complying with ASTM A 123 or ASTM A 153 requirements. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing, compatible with adjacent materials and of type recommended by manufacturer.
08 41 13 - 6
F.
Weather Stripping: follows: 1.
Manufacturer's standard replaceable weather stripping as
Compression Weather Stripping: Molded neoprene complying with ASTM D 2000 requirements or molded PVC complying with ASTM D 2287 requirements.
G. H.
Accessories: Provide end-dams, water deflectors and other accessories as required for proper drainage. Hardware: Finish Hardware shall be furnished by Section 08 71 00 Finish Hardware and installed under this Section. No Exceptions.
2.04
FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, will have accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. When shop fabricated, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 1. B. C. D. E. Reinforce the Work as necessary for performance requirements, and for support to the structure.
Forming: Form shapes with sharp profiles, straight and free of defects or deformations, before finishing. Prepare components to receive concealed fasteners and anchor and connection devices. Fabricate components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. Welding: Weld components to comply with referenced AWS standard. Weld before finishing components to greatest extent possible. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. Glazing Channels: Provide minimum clearances for thickness and type of glass indicated according to FGMA's "Glazing Manual." Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. Storefront: Fabricate framing in profiles indicated on Drawings and in accordance with manufacturers approved details. 1. Reinforce internally with steel channel shapes as indicated, or as necessary to support the required loads. Secure vertical steel at head and sill as necessary for structural performance.
F. G.
H.
08 41 13 - 7
I.
Entrances: Fabricate door framing in profiles indicated. Reinforce as required to support imposed loads. Factory assemble door and frame units and factory install hardware to greatest extent possible. Reinforce door and frame units as required for installing hardware indicated. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed hardware before finishing components. 1. Exterior Doors: Provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops. At other locations, provide sliding weather stripping retained in adjustable strip mortised into door edge. Provide interior sills, exterior sill (or subsills) with end dams, closures, flashings, trim and other elements in conjunction with or adjacent to storefront system as required for watertightness and aesthetics. If sill frame does not provide means for conducting water out of the aluminum frame systems, then suitable flashings to ensure that water is conducted out of system shall be provided. Fabricate miscellaneous trim from 0.060-inch-thick minimum aluminum (break metal) finished to match other components, except fabricate interior and exterior sills (or subsills) from 0.075-inch-thick minimum extruded aluminum (unless the sill or subsill is supporting the weight of the system and then a 0.125-inch thick minimum extruded aluminum shall be provided). Flashings and sill can, in conjunction with mechanically fastened end dams and/or water diverters shall direct water entering the system to the outside of the building and shall not depend solely upon sealants.
J.
Flashings and Miscellaneous Trim: 1.
2.
3.
2.05
ALUMINUM FINISHES A. B. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. Class I, Color Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A44 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated; Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, integrally colored or electrolytically deposited color coating 0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 606.1 or AAMA 608.1. 1. Color: Medium Bronze, as approved by Architect.
C.
2.06
STEEL PRIMING A. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying primer.
08 41 13 - 8
B.
Surface Preparation: Perform manufacturer's standard cleaning operations to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel. Priming: Apply manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
C.
PART 3. 3.01
- EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of entrance and storefront systems. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for protecting, handling, and installing entrance and storefront systems. Do not install damaged components. Fit frame joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. Seal joints watertight. Metal Protection: Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or by applying sealant or tape recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. Install components to drain water passing joints and condensation and moisture occurring or migrating within the system to the exterior. Set continuous sill members and flashing in a full sealant bed to provide weathertight construction, unless otherwise recommended by manufacturer. Comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. Install framing components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack of framing members. Install entrances plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades without warp or rack. Lubricate operating hardware and other moving parts according to hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 1. G. H. Install surface-mounted hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.
B.
C. D.
E. F.
Glazing: Comply with requirements of Section 08 80 00 - Glazing unless otherwise indicated. Install perimeter sealant to comply with requirements of Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants, unless otherwise indicated.
08 41 13 - 9
I.
Erection Tolerances: Install entrance and storefront systems to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. 2. Variation from Plane: Limit variation from plane or location shown to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. Alignment: Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.
3.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to test the storefront system for water leaks in accordance with AAMA 501.2.94. Repair or remove and replace Work that does not meet requirements or that is damaged by testing; replace to conform to specified requirements.
3.04
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. B. Adjust doors and hardware to provide tight fit at contact points and weather stripping, smooth operation, and weathertight closure. Remove excess sealant and glazing compounds, and dirt from surfaces.
3.05
CLEANING A. B. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of frames, exercising care to avoid damage of the protective coating. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.
3.06
PROTECTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure entrance and storefront systems are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
08 41 13 - 10
SECTION 08 65 00 TUBULAR SKYLIGHT PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. B. 1.02 Tubular daylighting device, consisting of roof dome, reflective tube, and diffuser assembly; configuration as indicated on the drawings. Accessories.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07 51 13 - Built-Up Roofing
1.03
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. ASTM B 209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. ASTM E 84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2008a. ASTM A 463/A 463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by the Hot Dip Process; 2006. ASTM A 653/A 653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized), by the Hot Dip Process; 2007. ASTM A792/A 792M Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% AluminumZinc Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process ASTM E 283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004. ASTM E 308 - Standard Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the CIE System; 2006. ASTM E 330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors; 2002. ASTM E 547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Difference; 2000. ASTM D 635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position; 2006. ASTM D-1929 - Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics; 1996 (2001). UL 181 - Factory Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors ICC AC-16 - Acceptance Criteria for Plastic Skylights; 2008.
G. H. I. J. K. L. M.
08 65 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Tubular Skylight
1.04
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Completed tubular daylighting device assemblies shall be capable of meeting the following performance requirements: 1. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283. Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 10.5 psf pressure differential with water rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E 547. Uniform Load Test: a. No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make daylighting system inoperable or cause excessive permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf (7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 70 psf (3.35 kPa). All units shall be tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating requirements as described in the 2006 International Building Code. Self-Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D1929. Smoke Density - Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM Standard E 84 in way intended for use. Classification C. Rate of Burn and/or Extent - Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (62 mm/min) Classification CC-2 per ASTM D 635. Rate of Burn and/or Extent - Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm) Classification CC-1 per ASTM D 635.
2.
3.
b.
4.
Fire Testing: a.
b. c. d. e.
1.05
SUBMITTALS A. B. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings complete and full scale (where practical) showing construction of all components, dimensions and details including anchorage, flashings and accessories. Certified independent laboratory test reports verifying compliance with all test requirements specified herein. Product Data: Submit manufacturers data sheet for collector dome, reflector tube and diffuser. 1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
C. D.
08 65 00 - 2
2. 3. 1.06
Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. Installation methods.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: 1. 2. 3. B. C. Provide certified independent laboratory test reports in full accordance with Test Procedures specified herein. Provide tubular skylight system which maintains U.L. (Underwriters Laboratories) listing. Provide tubular skylight system which has been evaluated and approved by ICC and maintains a current Evaluation Report.
Test Units: Perform all tests unless otherwise noted per reference standards on unit sizes which will be incorporated in the project. Test Procedures 1. Air Infiltration Test: a. Solamaster (21 inch) units: Air Infiltration maximum 0.10 cfm per foot of crack length at 6.24 psf pressure differential when tested in accordance with ASTM E283. Brighten Up (14 inch) units: Air infiltration will not exceed .30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E 283.
b.
2.
Water Resistance Test: No uncontrolled water leakage at 6.00 psf pressure differential with water rate of 5 gallons/hours/sf when tested in accordance with ASTM E331. Uniform Load Test: No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or damage to make tubular skylight inoperable, or cause permanent deflection of any section in excess of 1 percent of its span at either a maximum Positive or Negative Load of 100 psf (4.7881 kPa) for the 10 inch (254 mm) and 14 inch (356 mm) units and 35 psf (1.6758 kPa) for the 21 inch (533 mm) unit. All units shall be tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in accordance with ASTM E 330. Fire Testing: a. b. c. Class B Burning Brand The burning brand shall self-extinguish without transferring the fire to the dome per ASTM E108 and UL 790. Self-Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D1929. Smoke Density - Rating no greater than 75 per ASTM D2843 or no greater than 450 per ASTM Standard E 84 in way intended for use.
3.
4.
08 65 00 - 3
d.
Rate of Burn - Minimum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (64 mm/min) Classification CC-2 per ASTM D635.
1.07
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.
1.08
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.09
WARRANTY A. B. Ten-year guarantee on materials and workmanship from the Manufacturer. Oneyear guarantee from the installer for materials and labor. Three year guarantee on electrical parts.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS AND PRODUCTS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc.; 2210 Oak Ridge Way, Vista, CA 92083. Tel: (760) 597-4425. www.solatube.com or approved equal.
2.02
MATERIALS A. Tubular Skylights General : Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and selfflashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to interior spaces; complying with ICBO/ICC AC-16. All components made and assembled by one manufacturer. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 750 DS-C Penetrating Ceiling, 21 inch (530 mm) Daylighting System: 1. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with flashing base supporting dome and top of tube. a. Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum thickness injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibiting (100 percent UV C, 100 percent UV B and 98.5 percent UV A), impact modified acrylic blend. Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to capture low angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight.
B.
b. 2.
Roof Flashing Base:
08 65 00 - 4
a.
One Piece: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A 653/A 653M or ASTM A 463/A 463M or AST A792/A 792M, 0.028 inch plus or minus .006 inch thick. i. Base Style: Type F11, Self mounted, 11 inches high. ii. Base Style: Type FC, Curb cap, with inside dimensions of 27 inches by 27 inches to cover curb as specified in Section 07 62 00.
3. 4. 5.
Flashing Insulator: Type FI, Thermal isolation material for use under flashing. Curb Insulator: Type CI, Thermal isolation material for use at curb base. Roof Flashing Turret Extensions: Provide manufacturer's standard extensions for applications as requiring: a. Type T12: Additional lengths of 12 inches extension. Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch nominal thickness injection molded high impact PVC; to prevent thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel condensed moisture out of tubing. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip 0.63 inch tall by 0.28 inch. Reflective Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch. a. General: i. Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity high reflectance specular finish on exposed reflective surface. Specular reflectance for visible spectrum (400 nm to 760 nm) greater than 99 percent. Total solar spectrum reflectance (400 nm to 2500 nm) less than 80.2 percent.
6.
7. 8.
ii. Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in accordance to ASTM E 308. b. Top Tube Angle Adapter, Type TA: i. c. Reflective 45 degree adjustable Top Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches long. Reflective 45 degree adjustable Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, 16 inches long, required for transition box.
Bottom Tube Angle Adapter, Type BA: i.
d.
Top Tube Angle Adapter and Bottom Tube Angle Adapter Kit, Type AK: i. Reflective 45 degree adjustable top and bottom angle adapters (one each), 16 inches long Reflective extension tube, Type EXX, Notched for Open Ceiling diffuser attachment, 24 inches or 48 inches long.
e.
Extension Tube: i.
f.
Reflective 90 degree Adjustable tube:

08 65 00 - 5
i.
Extension Tube Angle Adapter: Provide manufacturer's standard adapters for applications requiring: 1. Type A1 one 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle adapter. 2. Type A2 two 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle adapters.
9.
Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Penetrating Ceilings: Solatube Model 750 DS-C. Ceiling mounted box transitioning from round tube to square ceiling assembly, supporting light transmitting surface at bottom termination of tube; 23.8 inches by 23.8 inches square frame to fit standard suspended ceiling grids or hard ceilings. a. b. Round to square transition box made of opaque polymeric material, classified as CC2, Class C, 0.110 inch thick. Lens: Type L2 Prismatic lens design to maximize light output and diffusion with extruded aluminum frame and EPDM foam seal to minimize condensation and bug, dirt and air infiltration per ASTM E 283. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at 0.100 inches (2.5 mm) thick. Classified as CC2. Wire Suspension Kit: Type E, Use the wire suspension kit when additional bracing to the structure is required. Local Dimmer Control utilizing a butterfly baffle design of Spectralight Infinity reflective material to minimize shadowing when in use: Provided with dimmer switch and cable. i. Daylight Dimmer: Type D Electro-mechanically actuated daylight valve; for universal input voltages ranging between 90 and 277 V at 50 or 60 Hz; maximum current draw of 50 ma per unit; controlled by low voltage, series Type T02: circuited, 4 conductor, size 22 cable; providing daylight output between 2 and 100 percent. Provided with dimmer switch and cable.
10.
Accessories: a. b.
ii. Switch: Type SW, Manufacturer-specific low voltage DC DP/DT switch (white) required to operate Daylight Dimmer. Note: only one switch is required per set of synchronously controlled dimmers. iii. Cable: Type CA, Two conductor low voltage cable (500 foot) for multiple unit DC connection. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. B. C. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, noncorrosive metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling system requirement. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended by manufacturer.
08 65 00 - 6
2.04
FABRICATION A. General 1. 2. 3. Finish, fabricate and shop prepare all assemblies under responsibility of one manufacturer. Fabricate to allow for thermal movement of materials when subject to a temperature differential from- 30 degrees F to +180 degrees F. Provision shall be made to insure that water will not accumulate and remain in contact within system components.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. B. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.02
PREPARATION A. B. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install tubular skylights in accordance with manufacturers printed installation instructions. Installer to be factory trained and/or certified by the manufacturer prior to commencement of installation. After installation of first unit-conduct field check to determine compliance with specified requirements. Water test in presence of Owners Representative or Architect or Contractor Representative. Correct any deficiencies prior to commencing with subsequent units. Dimming controls: As specified in Division 26. Protect installed products until completion of project. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
D.
3.04
PROTECTION
A. B.
08 65 00 - 7
SECTION 08 71 00 DOOR HARDWARE PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish hardware for doors as specified and as listed in Hardware Groups: and required by actual conditions. 1. B. Include screws, special screws, bolts, special bolts, expansion shields and other devices for proper application of hardware. Section 06 10 00: Rough Carpentry Section 08 11 13 and Section 08 14 00 - Certain hardware items installed with doors. Division 26: Electrical
Related Sections: 1. 2. 3.
1.02
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide items, articles, material, operations and methods listed, mentioned or scheduled herein or on drawings, in quantities as required to complete project. Provide hardware that functions properly. Prior to furnishing hardware, advise Architect of items that will not operate properly, are improper for conditions, or will not remain permanently anchored.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Hardware Schedule: Submit 5 copies of hardware schedule in vertical format as illustrated by the Sequence of Format for the Hardware Schedule as published by the Door and Hardware Institute. Schedules which do not comply will be returned for correction before checking. Hardware schedule shall clearly indicate architects hardware group and manufacturer of each item proposed. The schedule shall be reviewed prior to submission by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC), who shall affix his or her seal attesting to the completeness and correctness of the schedule: 1. 2. Provide 2 copies of illustrations from manufacturers catalogs and data in brochure form. Check specified hardware for suitability and adaptability to details and surrounding conditions. Indicate unsuitable or incompatible items and proposed substitutions in hardware schedule.
B. C.
08 71 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Door Hardware
3. 4.
Provide listing of manufacturers template numbers for each item of hardware in hardware schedule. Furnish other Contractors and Subcontractors concerned with copies of final approved hardware schedule. Submit necessary templates and schedules as soon as possible to hollow metal, wood door and aluminum door fabricators in accordance with schedule they require for fabrication. Samples: Lever design or finish sample: Provide 3 samples if requested by architect.
5. D.
Wiring Diagrams: Provide complete and detailed system operation and elevation diagrams specially developed for each opening requiring electrified hardware, except openings where only magnetic hold-opens or door position switches are specified. Provide these diagrams with hardware schedule submittal for review. Provide detailed wiring diagrams with hardware delivery to jobsite. Installation Instructions: Provide manufacturers written installation and adjustment instructions for finish hardware. Send installation instructions to site with hardware. Templates: Submit templates and reviewed Hardware Schedule to door and frame supplier and others as applicable to enable proper and accurate sizing and locations of cutouts and reinforcing. Contract Closeout Submittals: Comply with Section 01 73 00 including specific requirements indicated below: 1. Operating and maintenance manuals: Submit 3 sets containing the following: a. Complete information in care, maintenance and adjustment, and data on repair and replacement parts and information on preservation of finishes. Catalog pages for each product. Name, address and phone number of local representative for each manufacturer. Parts list for each product. Copy of final approved hardware schedule, edited to reflect As Installed. Copy of final keying schedule. As installed Wiring Diagrams for each opening connected to power, both low voltage and 110 volts. One complete set of special tools required for maintenance and adjustment of hardware, including changing of cylinders. One dogging key for each exit device. shall meet with keying, special the specification writing. Verbal
E. F.
G.
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. H.
On additions and renovations to existing facilities, contractor owner to determine specific owner requirements regarding applications, brands, etc. and advise Architect if any revisions to are required. Any changes to the specification must be in authorization is not considered as valid.
08 71 00 - 2
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Obtain each type of hardware (i.e. latch, and locks, hinges, closers, etc.) from single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements. Where hardware may be furnished by more than one supplier, provide hardware to match the preponderance of building hardware. Supplier: Recognized architectural finish hardware supplier, with warehousing facilities within 100 miles of the jobsite, who has been providing hardware for a period of not less than 3 years. The supplier shall be, or employ, a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). The hardware schedule shall be prepared and signed by a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC). Installer: Firm with 3 years experience in installation of similar hardware to that required for this project. Regulatory Label Requirements: Provide nationally recognized testing agency label or stamp on hardware for labeled openings. Where UL requirements conflict with drawings or specifications, hardware conforming to UL requirements shall be provided. Conflicts and proposed substitutions shall be clearly indicated in hardware schedule. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to the installation of hardware, manufacturers representatives for locks, closers and exit devices shall arrange and hold a jobsite meeting to instruct the installing contractors personnel on the proper installation of their respective products. A letter of compliance, indicating when this meeting is held and who is in attendance, shall be sent to the Architect and Owner.
B.
C. D.
E.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hardware to jobsite in manufacturers original packaging, marked to correspond with approved hardware schedule. Do not deliver hardware until suitable locked storage space is available. Check hardware against reviewed hardware schedule. Store hardware to protect against loss, theft or damage. Deliver hardware required to be installed during fabrication of hollow metal, aluminum, wood or stainless steel doors prepaid to manufacturer.
B.
1.06
WARRANTY A. Guarantee workmanship and material provided against defective manufacture. Repair or replace defective workmanship and material appearing within a period of one year after Substantial Completion. Provide ten year warranty on door closer body against defects in material and workmanship from date of occupancy of Project. Replace shortages and incorrect items with correct material at no additional cost to Owner.
B. C.
08 71 00 - 3
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS HINGES A. Acceptable Manufacturers and Types: McKinney T4A3786 TA2714 TA2314 T4A3786 T4A3386 B. C. Non-removable pins (NRP): 1. Size: 1. 2. 3. D. 1. 2. 3. 4. 2-1/4 thick doors 5 X 5 1-3/4 thick doors 4-1/2 X 4-1/2 1-3/8 thick doors 3-1/2 X 3-1/2 2 hinges per leaf for openings through 60 inches high. 1 additional hinge per leaf for each additional 30 inches in height or fraction thereof. 4 hinges for Dutch doors up to 90 inches in height Drill 5/32 inch hole and use No. 12, 1-1/4 inch steel, threaded to the head, wood screws for hinges on wood doors. Provide NRP (non-removable pins) at outswing lockable doors.
Quantity:
2.02
ELECTRIC HINGES A. Acceptable manufacturers: McKinney QC Provide electric hinges with standardized wire colors and concealed plug connectors to accommodate up to 12 wires. Coordinate plug connectors so that they plug directly into wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide sufficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Locate electric hinges at second hinge from bottom of door. Where electric hinges are used in conjunction with exit devices, locate hinge nearest to exit device. Provide mortar guide similar to McKinney MG-16 for each electric hinge specified.
B. C. D. E. F. 2.03
CONTINUOUS GEARED HINGES A. Acceptable manufacturers:

08 71 00 - 4
B.
McKinney Pemko MCKFM__SLFHD 12HD MCK-25 FM__HD Provide one of the above two models of continuous hinges as appropriate for the type, inset and thickness of door where specified. Coordinate hinge types with the door supplier.
2.04
FLOOR CLOSERS AND INTERMEDIATE PIVOTS A. Acceptable manufacturers: Rixson 27 Series M19 Floor closers shall be complete with ball bearing top pivot, floor plates, intermediate pivots and cement boxes unless indicated otherwise. Provide one intermediate pivot for doors less than 91inches high. Provide two intermediate pivots for doors between 91 inches and 121 inches high. Intermediate pivots shall be spaced equally not less than 25 inches nor more than 35 inches on center for doors over 121 inches in height. Provide single acting offset hung floor closers as specified in Hardware Groups. Provide floor closers with adjustable swing speed, backcheck and automatic hold open features. Closer shall have built in positive stop at specified degree of opening. Floor closers shall meet maximum opening force requirements of ADA.
B.
C. D.
E. 2.05
PIVOT SETS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Type Offset Hung Standard Duty Offset Hung Heavy Duty Intermediate Hung Standard Duty Center Hung Heavy Duty B. Rixon 117 147 M19 370 117-3/4
Pivot sets shall be complete with oil-impregnated top pivot, unless indicated otherwise. Provide one intermediate pivot for doors less than 91 inches high. Provide two intermediate pivots for doors between 91 inches and 121 inches high. Intermediate pivots shall be spaced equally not less than 25 inches nor more than 35 inches on center for doors over 121 inches in height. Provide pivot sets as specified in hardware groups.
C. 2.06
FLUSH BOLTS AND DUSTPROOF STRIKES A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series:

08 71 00 - 5
McKinney FB01M FB06M FB12WFB2 FB04MFB1 DPS3 B.
DCI 780F 842 960 X 9BFB 840 X 8 BFB 82
Trimco 3917 3810 N/A 3917 X 3850 3911
Rockwood 555 1842 N/A 1848 570
Non-labeled Openings: Provide 2 flush bolts or one flush bolt X thermal bolt, as specified, for inactive leaf of pairs of locked and latched doors. Locate centerline of top bolt not more than 78inches from finished floor. Provide dustproof strike for bottom bolt. Labeled Openings: Provide automatic flush bolts as applicable for inactive leaf of pairs of doors.
C.
2.07
LOCKSETS MORTISE A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent Yale Corbin/Russwin
B.
8200 8800 ML2000 Non-labeled Openings: Provide 2 flush bolts or one flush bolt X thermal bolt, as specified, for inactive leaf of pairs of locked and latched doors. Locate centerline of top bolt not more than 78 inches from finished floor. Provide dustproof strike for bottom bolt Labeled Openings: Provide automatic flush bolts as applicable for inactive leaf of pairs of doors.
C.
2.08
LOCKSETS BORED A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent Yale Corbin/Russwin
B.
10-Line 5400LN CL3300 Provide lock functions specified in Hardware Groups, with the following provisions: 1. 2. 3. Locks shall meet the requirements of ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2003, operational Grade 1. Backset: 2-3/4 Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf.
08 71 00 - 6
Where required, provide open back strike and protect with astragal to allow practical and secure operation. 4. 2.09 All locks and latches must be BHMA certified.
LOCKSETS 11 LINE A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent 11-Line Provide lock functions specified in Hardware Groups, with the following provisions: 1. 2. 3. Locks shall be able to withstand 3100 inch pounds of torque applied to the locked lever without gaining access. Locksets shall be cycle tested per ANSI A156.2-2003 to two million cycles without any visible lever sag. Locks and latches shall be able to fit a standard 2-1/8 (55 mm) bore without the use of through bolts. Standard rose size shall be 2-3/4 (70 mm) in diameter. Levers shall be made of solid material with no plastic fillers. Latchbolt head shall be one piece stainless steel. Latchbolt assemblies shall be encased within the lock body. Backset: 2-3/4 Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf. Where required, provide open back strike and protect with astragal to allow practical and secure operation. Locks and latches shall have a 10 year limited warranty. All locks and latches must be BHMA certified.
B.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9. 10. 2.10
ACCESS CONTROL MORTISE LOCKS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent Yale Corbin/Russwin
B.
8200 8800 ML2000 Provide access control mortise lock series, type and function where specified in hardware groups with the provisions below: 1. 2. Backsets: 2-3/4 Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf.
08 71 00 - 7
Where required, provide open back strike and protect with astragal to allow practical and secure operation. C. D. E. F. G. H. Provide access control products with non-volatile memory. Provide keypad operated products with a minimum of 100 user codes or 500 user codes as specified. Provide keypad/proximity and proximity only products with a minimum of 500 user codes and the ability to audit the last 1,000 transactions via and RS-232 port. In addition to user codes, provide a master code as standard. The master code shall assign emergency, supervisory and user codes. The keypad lock shall have the ability to print the last 15 entries via an infrared printer. Provide software and computer cable kit(s), as required, capable of working with Microsoft Windows operation systems (95 or higher), required to program time zone periods, holidays, automatic unlock with first entry, and listing 1,000 event transaction history- unlock, egress activation, entry into programming mode, date, time, user number and door number. Locking and unlocking of the lever handle shall be done by a motor driven, battery powered unit (solenoids not acceptable) contained completely within the body of the mortise lock. The inside lever is always free for egress. Provide lever design to match lock levers. Provide a regulated 9VDC remote power package. Power package is to include Power Supply Module and cable assembly containing power supply to power transfer and wall plug-in transformer. LEDs on unit are to indicate status of unlocked and programming mode. Provide weatherseal gasketing at exterior applications. Provide twenty-five (25) HID Prox Card II for keypad/proximity and proximity only products. All locks shall be BHMA certified.
I.
J.
K. L. M. N. 2.11
ACCESS CONTOL BORED LOCKS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent Yale Corbin/Russwin
B.
10-Line 5400LN CL3300 Provide access control mortise lock series, type and function where specified in hardware groups with the provisions below: 1. 2. Backsets: 2-3/4 Strikes: Provide wrought boxes and strikes with proper lip length to protect trim but not to project more than 1/8 beyond trim, frame or inactive leaf.
08 71 00 - 8
Where required, provide open back strike and protect with astragal to allow practical and secure operation. C. D. E. F. G. H. Provide access control products with non-volatile memory. Provide keypad operated products with a minimum of 100 user codes or 500 user codes as specified. Provide keypad/proximity and proximity only products with a minimum of 500 user codes and the ability to audit the last 1,000 transactions via and RS-232 port. In addition to user codes, provide a master code as standard. The master code shall assign emergency, supervisory and user codes. The keypad lock shall have the ability to print the last 15 entries via an infrared printer. Provide software and computer cable kit(s), as required, capable of working with Microsoft Windows operation systems (95 or higher), required to program time zone periods, holidays, automatic unlock with first entry, and listing 1,000 event transaction history- unlock, egress activation, entry into programming mode, date, time, user number and door number. Locking and unlocking of the lever handle shall be done by a motor driven, battery powered unit (solenoids not acceptable) contained completely within the body of the bored lock. The inside lever is always free for egress. Provide lever design to match lock levers. Provide a regulated 9VDC remote power package. Power package is to include Power Supply Module and cable assembly containing power supply to power transfer and wall plug-in transformer. LEDs on unit are to indicate status of unlocked and programming mode. Provide weatherseal gasketing at exterior applications. Provide twenty-five (25) HID Prox Card II for keypad/proximity and proximity only products. All locks shall be BHMA certified.
I.
J.
K. L. M. N. 2.12
EXIT DEVICES A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent Yale Corbin/Russwin
B. C. D. E. F.
80 Series 7000 Series ED5000 Series Provide exit device series and functions as specified in Hardware Groups. All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic. Exit devices for labeled doors shall be listed as Fire Exit Hardware. Where lever trim is specified, provide lever design to match lock levers. Provide cylinders for key locking mullions and exit devices with locking trim. Provide keyed removable mullions as specified in the Hardware Groups
08 71 00 - 9
G. 2.13
All exit devices must be BHMA certified.
ACCESS CONTROL EXIT DEVICES A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent 80 Series B. C. D. Yale 7000 Series Corbin/Russwin ED5000 Series
Provide access control mortise lock series, type and function where specified in hardware groups. All exit devices shall be UL listed for panic. Exit devices for labeled doors shall be UL listed as Fire Exit Hardware. Provide exit devices factory cut to door width and height. Locate exit devices at a height recommended by the exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building codes, and approved by the Architect. Provide access control products with non-volatile memory. Provide keypad operated products with a minimum of 100 user codes or 500 user codes as specified. Provide keypad/proximity and proximity only products with a minimum of 500 user codes and the ability to audit the last 1,000 transactions via and RS-232 port. In addition to user codes, provide a master code as standard. The master code shall assign emergency, supervisory and user codes. The keypad exit device shall have the ability to print the last 15 entries via an infrared printer. Provide software and computer cable kit(s), as required, capable of working with Microsoft Windows operation systems (95 or higher), required to program time zone periods, holidays, automatic unlock with first entry, and listing 1,000 event transaction history- unlock, egress activation, entry into programming mode, date, time, user number and door number. Locking and unlocking of the lever handle shall be done by a motor driven, battery powered unit (solenoids not acceptable) contained completely within the body of the outside trim. Egress is free at all times. Provide lever design to match lock levers. Provide a regulated 9VDC remote power package. Power package is to include Power Supply Module and cable assembly containing power supply to power transfer and wall plug-in transformer. LEDs on unit are to indicate status of unlocked and programming mode. Provide weatherseal gasketing at exterior applications. Provide twenty-five (25) HID Prox Card II for keypad/proximity and proximity only products. Provide cylinders for key locking mullions and exit devices with locking trim. Provide keyed removable mullions, as specified in Hardware Groups.
E. F. G. H. I. J.
K.
L.
M. N. O. P. Q.
08 71 00 - 10
R. 2.14
All exit devices shall be BHMA certified.
ELECTRIC STRIKES A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: HES 1006 Series 7000 Series 9500 9600 B. C. Provide electric strikes designed for use with the type locks shown at each opening where specified. Electric strikes shall be UL Listed as burglary resistant electric door strikes and, where required, shall be UL Listed as electric strikes for fire rated doors and frames. Provide fail secure type electric strikes unless otherwise specified. Provide power supplies for each electric strike as required. Verify voltage with electrical contractor. Folger 310 Series
D.
2.15
MAGNETIC LOCKS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent 1564 Securitron M62 SAM B. C. D. Magnetic Locks shall meet ANSI/BHMA A156.23-2004 classification criteria including a minimum holding force of 1200 LBF. Provide power supplies for magnetic locks by the same manufacturer as locks. Provide fasteners, mounting brackets and spacer bars as required to suit details. Folder Adams 9970 LM
2.16
KEYING A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent XC Series B. Yale Keymark Corbin/Russwin Pyramid
Master key or Grand master key cylinders and key in groups, unless otherwise specified. Factory masterkey with manufacturer retaining permanent keying records. Provide 6 masterkeys for each masterkey set. Provide 3 change keys for each lock. Provide 2 control keys for core removal. Stamp keys DO NOT DUPLICATE.
C.
08 71 00 - 11
D.
Submit proposed keying schedule to Architect. If requested, meet with Owner and Architect to review keying schedule.
2.17
DOOR TRIM A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney Rockwood PO53 DP503 OP810 KP50 B. C. D. E. 70C 110 X 70C BF15747 K1050 Trimco 1001-3 1010-3 1737 KO050
Pulls: Where required, mount back to back with push bars. Kick and Armor Plates: Minimum of .050 thick, beveled 4 edges. At single and pairs of doors provide kick and armor plates 2 less door width (2 LDW). Provide kick plates at a height of 10 unless otherwise specified.
2.18
COORDINATORS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney CSM Series Rockwood 1600 Series Trimco 3094 Series 3095 DCI 600 Series 600AB/C
MBAB/MBC 1601AB/C B.
Provide coordinator for labeled pairs of doors equipped with automatic flush bolts and those with vertical rod/ mortise lock fire exit device combinations with astragals. Provide filler bars for total opening width, closer mounting brackets, carry bars and special preparation for top latches where applicable.
C.
2.19
DOOR CLOSERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Norton 8501 UNI-7500 UNI-8501 B. Sargent 1331 351-P10 X O.H. Stop 1430-P10 X O.H. Stop Yale 4400/PR4400 3000 Series PR4400 X O.H. Stop PR3300 X O.H. Stop 7500/pr7500 351/351-P10
Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet maximum opening force requirements of ADA.
08 71 00 - 12
C. D. E. F. G. H.
Provide drop plates, brackets or adaptors for arms and as required to suit details. Install closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors and stair side of stairway doors. Provide back check for door closers. Provide hold open arms where specified. Provide closers as specified in Hardware Groups and, in addition, provide closers for labeled doors whether or not specifically noted in Hardware Groups. Provide closers meeting the requirements of UBC7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.
2.20
CLOSER/HOLDERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Norton 7700 PT Sargent 2468 Yale 400PT 4210MPI
7210MPI 2900 B. C. D. E. F. G.
Provide non-sized closers, adjustable to meet maximum opening force requirements of ADA. Provide drop plates, brackets or adaptors for arms and as required to suit details. Install closers on room side of corridor doors, inside of exterior doors and stair side of stairway doors. Provide back check for door closers. Provide single point or multi-point hold open where specified. Provide closers meeting the requirements of UBC7-2, 1997 and UL 10C positive pressure tests.
2.21
AUTOMATIC OPERATORS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Besam Swingmaster B. C. Sargent 4000 Series Norton 6900 Series
Provide automatic operators as specified in Hardware Groups. Provide complete with drop plates, brackets or adaptors for arms as required to suit details. Provide wall mounted actuator switches by the same manufacturer as the operator. Actuators shall be weather resistant type at exterior doors.
2.22
OVERHEAD STOPS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent Rixson Yale
08 71 00 - 13
1540 1530 590 690 B. C. 2.23
10 Series 2 Series 1 Series 9 Series
500V 500 900V 100
Provide overhead stops for doors that open against equipment, casework, sidelites, or other objects that would make wall stops inappropriate. Provide sex bolts to attach overhead stops and holders to mineral core doors.
WALL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney Trimco WS01 1270 WS02 FS01 FS29 FS30 B. 1270WV 1211 1214 1214H Rockwood 406 409 443 481 481H
Provide wall stops as applicable for each door leaf, except where floor stops are specified in Hardware Groups, or where conditions require the use of an overhead stop. Provide an appropriate carpet rise for floor stops, as needed.
C. 2.24
THRESHOLDS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney Pemco MCK272 B. C. D. E. 272 Provide thresholds to match details. Refer to drawings for details. Provide accessories, shims and fasteners, as required. Where thresholds occur at openings with one or more mullions, they shall be cut for the mullions and extended continuously for the entire opening. Install thresholds using an H cut with the threshold contacting the inside and outside rabbets, stops and soffit.
2.25
WEATHERSTRIPPING A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney Sweeps Jambs MCK18062 NB MCK303 PK Pemco 18062 NB 303 PK
08 71 00 - 14
Raindrip MCK346 B. C.
346
Provide self tapping fasteners for weatherstripping being applied to hollow metal frames. Where rain drips are specified in hardware groups, provide raindrip X fill frame width, unless detailed otherwise.
2.26
GASKETING A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney MCKS88BL Pemko S88BL
MCKHSS2000 HSS-2000 B. C. D. Provide gaskets for 20 Minute doors and doors designated for smoke and draft control. Where frame applied intumescent seals are required by the manufacturer, provide gaskets that comply with UC 7-2 and UL 10C positive pressure tests. Install adhesive mounted smoke seals per manufacturers direction and provide silencers as needed to prevent door to frame contact.
2.27
SOUND GASKETING A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney Automatic Door Bottoms (Wood) Automatic Door Bottoms (Metal) Jambs MCL411APK MCK420APK MCKS88BK (Double Row) Pemko 411 APK 420APK S88BK (Double Row)
2.28
MAGNETIC HOLDERS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent 1561 B. C. Rixson HES 998 8837
Verify voltage with Electrical Contractor. Provide transformer for each wall magnet (low voltage).
2.29
DOOR POSITION SWITCHES A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Sargent 3287 Sentrol Detex 1076 MS-2049F
08 71 00 - 15
B. C.
Coordinate door and frame preparations with door and frame suppliers. Switches are to be installed in the door and frame approximately 4 from lock edge of door.
2.30
LATCH PROTECTORS A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: McKinney Mortise LP-01 Bored Bored B. LP-04 Lp-06
Latch protectors shall be stainless steel of the type required to work with the specified lock.
2.31
KEY CABINET A. Acceptable manufacturers and Series: Lund 1200 Series B. C. D. E. Telkee Aristocrat
Provide cabinet with one hook for each lock or cylinder plus at least 50 per cent extra hooks. Provide each hook with one non-removable security key tag and one snap-on link duplicate key tag. Provide tools, instruction sheets and accessories to complete installation. Owner will place keys in key cabinet and complete index cards furnished with key system.
2.32
KEY MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE A. B. C. Provide Key Wizard key management software. Software shall provide tracking, issuing, collecting and transferring information regarding keys, doors and hardware. Provide training for Owners personnel on the proper operation and application of the key management system.
2.33
FASTENERS A. B. Use only manufacturer supplied fasteners to anchor, attach or otherwise install all pieces of hardware. Install all door closers and exit devices with machine screws, whether or not selftapping (self drilling) fasteners are offered by the manufacturer. Provide sex bolts (SNB) at fire rated wood doors unless proper blocking is provided by the door manufacturer.
08 71 00 - 16
C. D. E.
Use phillips head at all exposed screws. Aluminum screws are not acceptable to attach or install any hardware. Provide self-tapping (self-drilling) screws for attachment of sweeps and stop applied weatherstrip only. Replace all fasteners that have damaged heads due to inappropriate installation methods.
2.34
FINISHES AND MATERIALS A. Hinges: 1. 2. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 1. 2. J. K. L. 1. 1. 1. Exterior- BHMA 630 (US32D) Interior- BHMA 652 (US26D) BHMA 628 (US28) BHMA 626 (US26D) BHMA 630 (US32D) BHMA 626 (US26D) BHMA 630 (US32D) BHMA 600 (USP) BHMA 630 (US32D) Exterior- BHMA 630 (US32D) Interior- BHMA 652 (US26D) BHMA 689 (Painted Aluminum) BHMA 630 (US32D) BHMA 626 (US26D)
Continuous Hinges Flush Bolts Exit Devices Locks and Latches Pulls, Push Plates, Push Bars Coordinators Kick Plates, Armor Plates and Edge Guards Overhead Stops and Holders
Surface Mounted Door Closers Latch Protectors Miscellaneous Hardware
2.35
ELECTRICAL SUBSTITUTIONS: A. The electrical products contained within this specification represent a carefully engineered system. If alternate electrical products are submitted, it is the
08 71 00 - 17
responsibility of the distributor to bear the cost of providing a complete and working system, including re-engineering of electrical diagrams, wiring diagrams and system layout, as well as power supplies, power transfers and all required electrical components. Coordinate with electrical engineer and electrician to ensure that line voltage and low voltage wiring is coordinated to provide a complete and working system. PART 3. 3.01 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine doors, frames and related items for conditions that would prevent the proper application of finish hardware. Do no proceed until defects are corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. Install finish hardware in accordance with reviewed hardware schedule and manufacturers printed instructions. Prefit hardware before finish is applied: remove and reinstall after finish is completed. Install hardware so that parts operate smoothly, close tightly and do not rattle. Installation of hardware shall comply with NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. Set units level, plumb and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment to substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. Drill and countersink units which are not factory-prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant, forming tight seal between threshold and surface to which set. Securely and permanently anchor thresholds using countersunk, non-ferrous screws to match color of thresholds. Provide stainless steel screws at aluminum thresholds. Lead Protection: Lead wrap hardware penetrating lead-lined doors. Levers and roses to be lead lined. Apply kick and armor plates with 3M adhesive #1357, as recommended by 3M Company, on lead lined doors.
B. C. D. E.
F.
3.03
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. At completion of project, a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) as certified by the Door and Hardware Institute shall inspect hardware installation. After this inspection, a letter shall be sent to Architect reporting on conditions, verifying that hardware has been properly installed and adjusted. Any deficiencies noted shall be corrected prior to final payment.
3.04
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. At final completion, hardware shall be left clean and free from disfigurement. Make final adjustment to door closers and other items of hardware. Where hardware is found defective, repair, replace or otherwise correct as directed.
08 71 00 - 18
B. C.
Adjust door closers to meet opening force requirements of Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards. Final Adjustment: Wherever hardware installation is made more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy of space or area, return to work during week prior to acceptance of occupancy and make final check and adjustment of hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish of hardware. Instruct Owners personnel in proper adjustment and maintenance of door hardware and hardware finishes. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation.
D. E. 3.05
PROTECTION A. Provide for proper protection of items of hardware until Owner accepts Project as complete.
3.06
HARDWARE SETS SET #01 NOT USED SET #02 NOT USED SET #03 1 Continuous Hinge 1 Exit Device 1 Closer 1 Wall Stop 1 Raindrip 1 Weatherstrip 1 Sweep 1 Threshold SET #04 1 Continuous Hinge 1 Exit Device 1 Closer 1 Wall Stop 1 Raindrip 1 Weatherstrip 1 Sweep 1 Threshold SET #05 4 Hinges 1 Exit Device
MCK-25HD 11 43 72 8504 X 826 PR7500 WS01 (Convex) MCK346 C MCK303 APK (Head & Jamb) MCK18062 CNB MCK272A MS&A
CLEAR 32D 689 US32D MW MW MW MW
MC SA NO MC
MCK-25HD 11 12 43 72 8813 X ETL PR7500 WS01 (Convex) MCK346 C MCK303 APK (Head & Jamb) MCK18062 CNB MCK272A MS&A
CLEAR 32D 689 US32D MW MW MW MW
MC SA NO MC
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 11 12 43 72 8813 ETL
26D 32D
MC SA
08 71 00 - 19
1 1 1 3
Closer Kickplate Wall Stop Smoke Seal
PR8501 KP50 10" X 2" LDW WS01 (Convex) S773
689 US32D US32D PK
NO MC MC
SET #06 NOT USED SET #07 NOT USED SET #08 4 Hinges 1 Classroom Lock 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Wall Stop 3 Door Silencers SET #08 4 Hinges 1 Push Plate 1 Door Pull 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Wall Stop 3 Door Silencers SET #10 4 Hinges 1 Storeroom 1 Wall Stop 3 Door Silencers SET #11 NOT USED SET #12 4 Hinges 1 Office Lock 1 Wall Stop 3 Door Silencers SET #13 4 Hinges 1 Exit Device 1 Closer 1 Kickplate
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 11 72 8237 LNA 8501 KP50 10" X 2" LDW WS01 (Convex) S1M
26D 26D 689 US32D US32D MC
MC SA NO MC MC
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 P053 DP503 8501 KP50 10" X 2" LDW WS01 (Convex) S1M
26D US32D US32D 689 US32D US32D MC
MC MC MC NO MC MC
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 Lock 11 72 8204 LNA WS01 (Convex) S1M
26D 26D US32D MC
MC SA MC
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 11 72 8205 LNA WS01 (Convex) S1M
26D 26D US32D MC
MC SA MC
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 11 43 72 8513 ETA PR8501 KP50 10" X 2" LDW
26D 32D 689 US32D
MC SA NO MC
08 71 00 - 20
1 3
Wall Stop Smoke Seal
WS01 (Convex) S773
US32D PK
MC
SET #14 4 Hinges 1 Classroom Lock 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Wall Stop 3 Door Silencers
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 NRP 11 72 8237 LNA PR8501 KP50 10" X 2" LDW WS01 (Convex) S1M
26D 26D 689 US32D US32D MC
MC SA NO MC MC
SET #15 4 Hinges 1 Classroom Lock 1 Closer 1 Kickplate 1 Dome Stop 3 Door Silencers
TA2714 4 1/2 X 4 1/2 11 72 8237 LNA 8501 KP50 10" X 2" LDW FS01 S1M
26D 26D 689 US32D US26D MC
MC SA NO MC MC
Manufacturer List Code A--R HS MC MW NO SA PK Finish List Code 28 26D 32D 630 689 PEN US28 CLEAR US26D US32D Description Aluminum Anodized (Clear) Satin Chrome Satin Stainless Steel Satin Stainless Steel Aluminum Painted Powder Coated to Match 26D Aluminum - Clear Anodized Clear Chromium Plated, Dull Stainless Steel, Dull END OF SECTION Name Adams Rite HES McKinney McKinney Weatherstrip Norton Sargent Pemko
08 71 00 - 21
SECTION 08 80 00 GLAZING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Glazing for the following products and applications: 1. 2. 1.02 Windows. Doors.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind loads without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. Glass Design: Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites in thicknesses and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with IBC 2003 requirements, as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from a maximum change (range) of 120 deg F for ambient surfaces and 180 deg F in surface temperatures, respectively, acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.
B.
C.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturers literature for each glass product and glazing material indicated,including structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handlingor installation requirements for glass and plastic materials. Samples: 1. 2. C. D. Glazing: Submit 2 samples, 12 inches x 12 inches for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass. Sealant: 4 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as selected
B.
Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Reports: Submit sealant compatibility and adhesion test reports.
08 80 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Glazing
E.
Manufacturer's Certificate: Submit Manufacturer's certification that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. 2. B. ANSI/ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings.
Perform Work in accordance with FGMA Glazing Manual, FGMA Sealant Manual, and Laminators Safety Glass Association Standards Manual for Glazing Installation Methods.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
C. D. 1.06
WARRANTY A. Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by manufacturer, inwhich manufacturer agrees to furnish replacements for units that deteriorate from normal use bydeveloping defects attributable to the manufacturing process, within warranty period. 1. Insulating Glass: a. b. Deterioration: Failure of hermetic seal resulting in obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following manufacturers: 1. 2. Guardian Industries Oldcastle
08 80 00 - 2
3. 4. 5. 6. 2.02
Pilkington PPG Industries Viracon Visteon
GLASS MATERIALS A. Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Quality q3 (glazing select); class 1 clear. Provide thicknesses as indicated on Drawings, 1/4 inch minimum. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I (transparent glass, flat); Quality q3 (glazing select); class 1, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Condition A (uncoated surfaces). Safety Glass: Category II materials complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.,Kind FT (fully tempered). Insulating-Glass Units: Preassembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by adehydrated interspace, complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units. 1. 2. Basis of Design: PPG Solarbronze, and Sungate 500 Low E Glass. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass in place of annealed glass where needed to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) where safety glass is indicated. Low Emmisivity Coating: Number 3 surface. Outer Lite: Float glass, Class 2 (tinted, heat absorbing, and light reducing). a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. a. Thickness: 1/4 inch. Tint Color: Bronze. Thickness: 1/4 inch.
B.
C. D.
3. 4.
Inner Lite: Float glass, Class 1 (clear). Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch. Interspace Content: Air. High Visible Light Transmittance: 44 percent. Visible Light Reflectance: 7 percent. Outstanding Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.40. Summer Daytime U-Value: 0.30. Winter Night-time U-Value: 0.31 Shading Coefficient: 0.46.
08 80 00 - 3
2.03
GLAZING TAPES A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800. If exposed, tape shall be paintable, or colored to match frame. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tape: Closed-cell, PVC foam tape; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. C. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.
B.
2.04
GLAZING GASKETS A. Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.
2.05
ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (sidewalking). Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. Sealants: As specified in Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.
B. C. D.
E. F.
G. 2.06
FABRICATIONS A. Fabricate glass and other glazing products in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions,
08 80 00 - 4
and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing standard, to comply with system performance requirements. PART 3. 3.01 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Examine framing or glazing channel surfaces, backing, removable stop design, and conditions under which glazing is to be performed. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
B. C.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. Glazing channel dimensions, as indicated on Drawings, provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. Adjust as required by Project conditions during installation. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction sealant-substrate testing. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. Provide spacers for glass lites where the length plus width is larger than 50 inches as follows: a. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.
2.
3. 4.
5. 6.
b.
08 80 00 - 5
7.
Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with, or protrude a maximum of 1/16 inch, above sightline of stops. Install tapes continuously in greatest lengths practical. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. Where framing joints are vertical, apply tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Where framing joints are horizontal, apply tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. Do not remove release paper from tape until just before each glazing unit is installed. Apply bed of sealant along exterior void ensuring full contact with glass. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Apply cap bead of sealant along exterior void, to uniform and level line, flush with sightline. Tool or wipe cap bead surface with solvent for smooth appearance. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.
8. 9.
10.
B.
Tape Glazing: 1.
2. 3.
4.
5. 6. 7.
8.
C.
Gasket Glazing (Dry): 1.
2.
08 80 00 - 6
3.
Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weather tight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.
4. 3.03
ADJUSTING A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in any other way during the construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
3.04
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. Remove labels after Work is completed.
B. 3.05
PROTECTION A. B. Protect glass from breakage immediately upon installation, by attachment of crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers of any type to surfaces of glass. END OF SECTION
08 80 00 - 7
SECTION 09 22 16 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Formed metal stud framing, furring, suspensions systems and accessories as shown on the Drawings and as specified.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Submit data describing standard framing member materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, limitations, and installation instructions. Shop drawings and calculations for soffit and exterior ceiling construction, developed by Structural Engineer Licensed in the State of Nevada: Contractor shall provide engineering for entire soffit and exterior ceiling construction for wind, seismic, thermal, etc. (including imposed live loads). Certificates: Mill Certification shall be provided with shipment to verify chemical composition, yield strength, tensile strength, elongation and coating thickness. Include listing of applicable ASTM standards specified in this section and comparison of ASTM requirements to actual materials provided to jobsite. Manufacturer's letter: Manufacturer shall provide letter stating that the material supplied to the specific project meets or exceed the performance standards listed in these specifications.
C.
D.
1.03
PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Exterior ceilings and soffits framing and details should be developed by Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Nevada. Ceiling should be designed for Seismic D classification and ceiling load should be less than 7 lbs/sq ft on the Structural members.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with ASTM C 754 requirements.
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Furnish products as manufactured by a manufacturing member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA), subject to compliance with Specification requirements.
09 22 16 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Non-Structural Metal Framing
2.02
FRAMING MATERIALS A. Studs, Runners and Furring Channels: 1. ASTM C 645, electro-galvanized to meet ASTM A 591, manufactured from steel supplied in accordance with ASTM A 653, Structural Quality Grade 33; G60 designation galvanized sheet steel. Thickness: In accordance with stud schedule provided herein. Deflection Track: Provide the following as applicable to the project requirements. a. Slottted Top Track (non-fire rated and fire-rated, as applicable): SLPTRK as manufactured by Sliptrack Systems (888) 475-7875 www.BradyInnovations.com, as distributed by Cemco (800) 775-2362 (western U.S) and Unimast Inc. (800) 654-7883 (eastern U.S.) or equal, gauge as per ICBO ER-5344, Table 2. Provide fire rated assemblies in accordance with manufacturer's literature, where applicable. Non-Fire Rated Slotted Top Track - Single Track Slip System for Interior Partitions: As manufactured by Metal Lite, Inc., 3070 E. Miraloma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 (800) 886-6824 or equal. Provide for partitions that are not required to be fire rated. Fire Rated Shadowline Top Track - Single Track Slip System for Interior Partitions: Applicable configuration as required for fire rating as manufactured by Fire Trak Corporation, 111 Hazel Avenue East, Kimball, MN 55353 (800) 394-9875 or equal. Provide for partitions that are required to be fire rated.
2. 3.
b.
c.
4.
Curved Stud and Track Components: Custom curved stud and track components as manufactured by RadiusTrack Corporation, 6612 Lyndale Avenue So., Suite 2, Richfield, MN 55423 (888) 872-3487 or equal.
B. C. D. E. F.
Studs: C-shaped, non-load bearing rolled steel, punched for utility access, of size shown on Drawings. Ceiling Runners: Cold or hot-rolled steel, meet ASTM C 754. Hanger and Tie Wire: Meet ASTM C 754. Furring and Bracing Members: Of same gauge, material and finish as studs, thickness to suit purpose. Clips, Brackets: Galvanized wire or sheet metal designed for attachment of framing, furring and bridging members. 1. Deflection Clips: If acceptable to Building Official, VertiClip as manufactured by Signature Industries, LLC, P.O. Box 68005, Raleigh, NC 27613 (919) 844-0789 or equal may be provided for attachment of framing to roof and floor construction at head and slide conditions. Provide sizes as required for stud depth(s). Clips shall be manufactured of steel conforming to ASTM A 653 Prime Certified G60 galvanized material or better, 50 ksi yield strength and 65 ksi ultimate strength. Deflection clips to have positive
09 22 16 - 2
attachment to structure and stud material while allowing for frictionless movement. 2. Bridging Clips: If acceptable to Building Official, BridgeClip as manufactured by Signature Industries, LLC, P.O. Box 68005, Raleigh, NC 27613 (919) 844-0789 or equal may be provided for attachment of bridging to studs.
G. H. I. J. K.
Fasteners: GA 203, self-drilling, self-tapping screws. Anchorage Devices: Power driven, powder actuated, drilled expansion bolts or screws with sleeves as required for positive anchorage. Acoustic Sealant: As specified in Section 09 29 00. Primer: FS TT-P-645, for touch-up of galvanized surfaces. Backing: "Notch-Tite" and "Flush Mount" as manufactured by Metal Lite, Inc., 3070 E. Miraloma Avenue, Anaheim, CA 92806 (800) 886-6824 or equal.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. B. C. D. Verify that conditions are ready to receive Work. Verify field measurements are as shown on Drawings. Verify that rough-in utilities are in proper location. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate.
3.02
METAL STUD ERECTION A. B. C. D. Install stud framing in accordance with ASTM C 754. Align and secure top and bottom runners at 24 inches o.c. Place two beads of acoustic sealant between runners and substrate. Fit runners under and above openings; secure intermediate studs at spacing of wall studs. Install studs vertically at 16 inches on center; unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Place two beads of acoustic sealant between studs and adjacent vertical surfaces. Install felt strips between wall and stud where studs abut exterior walls. Connect studs to tracks using fastener method. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. Provide 18 gauge framing at door framing. Backing and Blocking: Provide backing and blocking attached to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install backing and blocking for support of plumbing fixtures, toilet partitions, wall cabinets, toilet accessories, and hardware. If proprietary system is used, install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
E. F.
G.
09 22 16 - 3
H. I. J. K. L. M. N.
Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical Work placed in or behind partition framing. Splice studs with 8 inch nested lap, secure each stud flange with flush head screw. Construct corners using minimum three studs. Brace stud framing system and make rigid. Coordinate erection of studs with requirements of door and window frame supports and attachments. Align stud web openings. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to ceiling only and for partitions extending through ceiling to structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. Provide nested extended leg ceiling runners, deflection clips or proprietary slip track. Install fire rated proprietary slip track at fire rated partitions in accordance with applicable UL assembly and coordinate installation of additional gypsum board strips to comply with assembly requirements. Coordinate placement of insulation in multiple stud spaces made inaccessible after stud framing erection.
O.
3.03
WALL FURRING INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete masonry walls. Erect furring channels vertically. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches. Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines, and butting walls. Install furring channels directly attached to concrete masonry walls, as applicable in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Erect free-standing metal stud framing tight to concrete, concrete and brick masonry walls, attached by adjustable furring brackets in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions.
3.04
ACOUSTICAL AND FIRE RATINGS A. Install framing and furring as required for indicated acoustical and fire ratings.
3.05
CEILING FRAMING INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. Install in accordance with ASTM C 754. Coordinate location of hangers with other Work. Install ceiling framing independent of walls, columns and above-ceiling Work. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing. Extend bracing minimum 24 inches beyond each end of openings.
09 22 16 - 4
E. F. G.
Laterally brace entire suspension system. No hanger support shall be allowed from roof deck. At steel beams, joists or other steel construction wrap hangers around, inset through, or clip or bolt to the supports, so as to develop the full strength of the hangers. At lights or other openings that interrupt the main runner or furring channels reinforce grillage with 3/4 inch cold-rolled channels, wire tied atop and parallel to the main runner channels. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with metal furring. Provide separate supports on each side of joint. Fabricate and bend curved furring to required curves and radii in the shop.
H.
I. J. 3.06
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: At Owners request, Contractor shall provide spot testing of actual properties of steel framing to verify compliance with specifications.
3.07
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
3.08
STUD SCHEDULE A. Stud Table: Maximum limits based upon 5 psf deflection limit, 33 ksi yield stress, and composite wall sheathed both sides full height with 1/2 inch thick gypsum wallboard attached with No. 6 screws at 12 inches on center minimum, from the SSMA "Product Technical Information" - "Wall Height Tables for Composite Allowable Wall Heights." Maximum allowable deflection as follows: 1. 2. 3. Walls receiving gypsum wallboard finishes: L/240. Walls receiving plaster and brittle finishes, including stucco, masonry, and mirrors: L/360. Walls receiving tile finishes: L/360. END OF SECTION
09 22 16 - 5
SECTION 09 29 00 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.02 Interior gypsum board. Cementitious backer boards.
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: For each type of gypsum product, joint, finish and accessories indicated. Samples: 1. 2. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inchlong length for each trim accessory indicated. Textured Finishes: Manufacturer's standard size for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with applicable specification recommendations of GA-216 and GA-600 as published by the Gypsum Association.
B.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or damage metal corner beads and trim.
C.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Gypsum Board Assemblies
09 29 00 - 1
C.
Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. 2. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS GYPSUM WALLBOARD A. B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36. 1. Type X: a. b. c. Thickness: 5/8 inch. Long Edges: Tapered. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: i. ii. iii. iv. v. 2. a. American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum Corp. National Gypsum Company. United States Gypsum Co. Pabco Gypsum
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 630, 5/8 inch, Type X. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: i. ii. iii. iv. v. American Gypsum Co. G-P Gypsum Corp. National Gypsum Company. United States Gypsum Co. Pabco Gypsum
C.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. c. 2. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. United States Gypsum Co.; DUROCK Cement Board.
Thickness: 1/2 inch.
09 29 00 - 2
2.02
TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. 2. Material: Galvanized steel sheet Shapes: a. Cornerbead: i. ii. b. c. d. e. Shape: As selected by Architect. Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.
LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges unless otherwise indicated. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long leg receives joint compound; use where indicated. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound; use where indicated. Expansion (Control) Joint: One piece formed with V shaped slot, with removable strip covering slot opening, use where indicated.
2.03
JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Joint Materials: Comply with ASTM C 475 1. Joint Tape: a. b. B. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. Cementitious Backer Board: As recommended by panel manufacturer.
Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. 2. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping or drying-type, allpurpose compound. a. 3. 4. 5. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.
Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping or drying-type, all-purpose compound. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish, use high-build interior coating product designed for application by airless sprayer and to be used instead of skim coat to produce Level 5 finish.
C.
Joint Compound for water resistant panels:

09 29 00 - 3
1. 2. 2.04
Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Use setting-type taping compound and setting-type, sandable topping compound. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by backer unit manufacturer.
TEXTURE FINISHES A. B. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. b. 2. C. G-P Gypsum; Georgia-Pacific Ceiling Textures/Vermiculite. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture (Aggregated).
Texture: As selected by Architect or Interior Designer.
Drywall Primer: White latex drywall primer formulated with high binder solids, applied undiluted, applied to gypsum board surfaces prior to the application of texture materials. 1. 2. Acceptable Product: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. Drywall primer which is applied to the finished surface of the work specified in this section is specified in Section 09 91 00 - Painting.
2.05
ACCESSORIES A. B. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. C. Wood Framing: ASTM C 1002, Type W for fastening to wood framing, unless otherwise indicated. Cementitious Backer Units: Use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.
Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: 1. 2.
D. E. F.
Sound Attenuation Blankets: As specified in Section 09 81 00 Acoustical Insulation. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 21 00 Thermal Insulation. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants.
09 29 00 - 4
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollowmetal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. C. 3.02
APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS - GENERAL A. B. C. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: ASTM C 840 and GA-216. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by coffers, joists, and other structural members, allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim edges with U-bead edge trim where edges of gypsum panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's written recommendations. Space fasteners a maximum of 12 inches o.c. for vertical applications. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.
D.
E. F. G. H. I.
J.
K. L. M.
09 29 00 - 5
N.
Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.
O.
3.03
PANEL APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: 1. Ceilings: a. Install across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. Apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.
b.
2.
Partitions/Walls: Apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing), to minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board.
3. 4. B.
Z-furring members: Apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in the same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.
Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A108.11, at locations indicated to receive tile. 1.
3.04
INSTALLATION - TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, as recommended by board manufacturers recommendations and in accordance with ASTM C840. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:
B.
C.
09 29 00 - 6
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 3.05
Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners and where indicated. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. L-Bead: Use where indicated. U-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: Use at curved openings.
FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim having flanges not intended for tape. Provide finish of gypsum board surfaces in accordance with the Gypsum Association "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" as follows: 1. 2. Level 0 (Temporary Construction): required. No taping, finishing, or accessories
B. C. D.
Level 1 (Fire Taping at plenum areas above ceiling, in attics, in areas where the assembly will be concealed or in building service corridors and other areas not normally open to public view): a. b. c. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable.
3.
Level 2 (Storage areas, or other similar area where surface appearance is not of primary concern): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and wiped with a joint knife leaving a thin coating joint compound over joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with a coat of joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. Joint compound applied over the body of the tape at the time of tape embedment shall be considered a separate coat of joint compound and shall satisfy the conditions of this level.
b. c. d. e.
4.
Level 3 (Appearance areas to receive heavy or medium texture (spray or hand applied) finishes before final painting, or where heavy grade
09 29 00 - 7
wallcoverings are to be applied as final decoration. This level of finish is not to be used where smooth painted surface or light to medium wallcoverings are to be applied.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and one additional coat of joint compound applied over joints and interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 2 separate coats of joint compound. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes as specified in Section 09 91 00 - Painting.
b. c. d. e. 5.
Level 4 (Appearance areas to receive flat paints, light texture, or where backed wallcoverings are to be applied. This level of finish is not to be used where gloss, semi-gloss and enamel paints are to be applied.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and 2 separate coats of joint compound applied over flat joints and one separate coat of joint compound applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 3 separate coats of joint compound. Joint compound shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes as specified in Section 09 91 00 Painting.
b. c. d. e. 6.
Level 5 (Appearance areas to receive gloss, semi-gloss, enamel, or nontextured flat paints or where severe lighting conditions occur.): a. Joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and 2 separate coats of joint compound applied over flat joints and one separate coat applied over interior angles. Fastener heads and accessories shall be covered with 3 separate coats of joint compound. A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface to fill imperfections in the joint work, smooth the paper texture and provide a uniform surface for decorating. Excess compound shall be immediately sheared off, leaving a film of skim coating compound completely covering the paper. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges.
b. c.
d.
09 29 00 - 8
e. f.
Surface to be coated with Drywall Primer as specified herein prior to application of texture. Untextured surfaces to be coated with Drywall Primer prior to application of final finishes as specified in Section 09 91 00 - Painting.
3.06
APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup, free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture finish manufacturer's written recommendations.
B.
C.
3.07
PROTECTION A. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. 2. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION
09 29 00 - 9
SECTION 09 30 00 TILING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 3. B. 1. 1.02 Wall and Floor tile. Crack-suppression/waterproofing membrane. Installation materials and accessories. Section 09 29 00 Gypsum Board: Tile backer boards.
Related Sections:
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction (wet): For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. 2. 3. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.6. Step Treads: Minimum 0.6. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.8.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Submit Manufacturer's data for tile and accessory materials, including recommended procedures for mixing materials and setting tile. Samples: 1. Tile: Submit 4 full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Samples shall be marked with manufacturers name and location where tile is scheduled to be installed. Grout: 6-inch sample of each grout color indicated to be used on project. Threshold: Submit one full size sample of threshold.
2. 3. C.
Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer indicating that tile complies with ANSI A137.1. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. Qualification Data: requirements. Submit data indicating installers compliance with
D. E. F.
Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.
09 30 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Tiling
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: 1. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA's "2005 Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. Other Products: Obtain each accessory product specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product:
2.
B.
Source Limitations: 1.
2.
3. C.
Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Review methods and procedures related to tile installation including, but not limited to, the following: 1. 2. Review methods and procedures related to tile installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. Attendees: a. b. c. d. Owner Architect Contractor Subcontractor.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided.
B. C.
09 30 00 - 2
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.
1.07
WARRANTY A. Warranty: Submit tile, setting material and installation accessory manufacturers standard warranty against material defects.
1.08
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed, for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated. Grout: Furnish sufficient grout of applicable colors to install extra tile materials furnished.
2.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS TILE PRODUCTS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 1. American Olean; Div. of Dal-Tile International Corp. Daltile; Div. of Dal-Tile International Inc. GranitiFiandre. Monarch Tile, Inc. Quarry Tile Company. United States Ceramic Tile Company. Tile materials shall comply with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. a. 2. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements, unless otherwise indicated.
General:
Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.
09 30 00 - 3
3.
Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.
C. D.
Tile: As indicated on Drawings. Trim Shapes: Provide Manufacturer's full selection of trim shapes as required. 1. 2. Provide bases, caps, stops, returns, trimmers, and other shapes indicated or required to produce a completely finished installation. Color and finish: Matching the adjacent tile unless otherwise indicated.
2.02
SETTING AND GROUTING MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. C-Cure. Custom Building Products. LATICRETE International Inc. MAPEI Corporation. TEC Specialty Products Inc. Others, as approved by tile manufacturer.
Thin Set Mortar: Kerabond/Keralastic as manufactured by MAPEI Corporation. Dry-Set mortar conforming to per ANSI A118.1 with liquid flexible additive to produce a polymer modified mortar conforming to ANSI A118.4. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7 Polymer type, either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, redispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 1. 2. 3. Joints 1/8 inch and narrower: Unsanded grout. Joints 1/8 inch and wider: Sanded grout. Color: As selected by Architect.
C.
2.03
ACCESSORIES A. Crack Isolation/Joint Bridging/Waterproofing Membrane: 1. 2. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI A118.10. Chlorinated-Polyethylene-Sheet Product: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with high-strength, nonwoven polyester fabric, for adhering to latex-portland cement mortar; 60 inches wide by 0.030-inch nominal thickness. a. Product: Subject to compliance with specifications, provide one of the following:
09 30 00 - 4
i. B.
Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS
ii. Dal Seal CIS Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. Edge Strips: As selected by Architect. Temporary Protective Coating: If recommended by tile manufacturer, provide one of the products indicated below that is formulated to protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile. 1. 2. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, contains at least 0.5 percent oil with a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.
C. D.
E.
Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard product for sealing grout joints that does not change color or appearance of grout.
F.
2.04
MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions. 1. 2. B. C. Mix grout to a creamy consistency. Mix only as much grout as can be used in one hour.
Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds.
09 30 00 - 5
2.
Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.
3.
B.
Where tile units will be thin-set directly to the substrata, do not commence installation of the tile units until substrata are within the following tolerances: 1. 2. Horizontal surfaces: Level within 1/8 inch in ten feet in all directions. Vertical surfaces: Level within 1/8 inch in eight feet in all directions. Vertical Surfaces: Verify that design of the wall or partition will not permit deflection exceeding 1/360 of the span for point and uniform loading. Space studs not less than 16 inches on centers. Horizontal Surfaces: Less than 1/360 of the span.
C.
Verify deflection does not exceed the following limits: 1.
2. D. 3.02
PREPARATION A. B. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2. 3. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vaporemission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. installation only after substrates pass testing. Proceed with
b. C.
Prepare concrete substrates for tile floors as follows: 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding.
2. D.
Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages
09 30 00 - 6
and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. E. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type or needed to prevent grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.
3.03
INSTALLATION - ACCESSORIES A. Movement Joints: Locate movement joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. 2. 3. B. Install joints in accordance with TCA EJ171-05. Locate joints in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates. Prepare joints and apply sealants as specified in Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealants. Install crack-isolation/joint bridging membrane in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. Install membrane in accordance with manufacturers instructions for waterproof membranes at all locations subject to moisture, including restrooms and kitchens.
Crack Isolation/Joint Bridging/Waterproofing Membrane: 1.
2.
3.04
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. 2. Install tile to comply with requirements of applicable TCA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each
3.
4.
09 30 00 - 7
wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths, unless otherwise indicated. 5. B. 1. Lay out tile wainscots to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. Thin Set Installation: a. b. C. D. Floors: TCA F125A-05. Walls: i. Grout: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Installation Standards: installation standards: comply with requirements of the following tile Moisture Resistant Gypsum Board: TCA W244-05. Installation: Install tile using TCA Method for substrate condition and as follows:
Joint Widths: As selected by Architect.
Ceramic tile grouts: Comply with ANSI A108.10. Thoroughly force grout into joints, filling entire depth. Finished surface of joints shall be uniformly smooth, and continuously level with edges of tile. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to grout joints according to grout-sealer manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer that has gotten on tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.
E.
Edge Strips: Install at locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile.
3.05
CURING A. Damp cure tile installations, including Portland cement grouts, for 72 hours minimum. 1. 2. 3. Cover with clean non-staining 40-pound Kraft paper. Do not use polyethylene sheets directly over tile on horizontal surfaces. Keep all traffic off newly installed floors for at least 72 hours. Protection may be necessary.
3.06
TOLERANCES A. Tile: Do not exceed the following deviations from level and plumb, and from elevations, locations, slopes and alignments shown: 1. 2. 3. B. 1. Horizontal surfaces: 1/8 inch in 10-0 in all directions. Vertical surfaces: 1/8 inch in 8-0 in all directions. Lippage: 1/8 inch maximum. Maximum Variation of Joint Width: 1/16 inch.
Joints:
09 30 00 - 8
3.07
CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. 2. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. Clean grout smears and hazes from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.
B.
When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. Place large, flat boards in walkways and wheelways where use of newly tiled floor is unavoidable. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION
C.
D. E.
09 30 00 - 9
SECTION 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL CEILING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers data for each type of ceiling grid and ceiling panel indicated. Shop Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items. Drawings shall indicate the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. C. 1. 2. Ceiling suspension members. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. Intersections of members and edge conditions. Acoustical Panel: Submit 2 samples, 6-inch- square, of each type, color, pattern, and texture indicated. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inchlong Samples of each type, finish, and color.
Samples:
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: 1. 2. B. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer. Suspension System: Obtain each type through one source from a single manufacturer.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide acoustical panel ceilings that comply with the following requirements: 1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical panel ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. a. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Acoustical Ceiling
09 51 00 - 1
b. 2. C.
Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: Complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84.
Seismic Standard: Provide acoustical panel ceilings designed and installed to withstand the effects of earthquake motions according to the following: 1. 2. Standard for Ceiling Suspension Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with ASTM E 580. CISCA's Guidelines for Systems Requiring Seismic Restraint: Comply with CISCA's "Guidelines for Seismic Restraint of Direct-Hung Suspended Ceiling Assemblies--Seismic Zones 3 & 4." Requirements of governing Building Code.
3. 1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. Storage: Store materials in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.
B.
C. D.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.
1.06
COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.07
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
09 51 00 - 2
1. 2.
Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2.0 percent of quantity installed.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with specifications, provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Armstrong World Industries Chicago Metallic Corporation (for suspension system) USG Interiors, Inc. BPB-Celotex Building Products Division
2.02
ACOUSTICAL PANELS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. Panel-Based Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial solution that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: As indicated on Drawings.
B.
C. 2.03
ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with specifications, provide one of the following: 1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. b. 2. a. b. B. Pecora Corp; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. Pecora Corp.; BA-98. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.
Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:
Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant
C.
09 51 00 - 3
recommended for sealing interior concealed joints to reduce airborne sound transmission. PART 3. 3.01 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. 3.02
PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook." Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and
B.
2.
3.
4.
5.
09 51 00 - 4
appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. 7. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. members. Attach hangers to structural
Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member.
C.
Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. 2. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.
D.
3. E. F.
Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. Acoustical panels: Install panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. 2. Reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated assembly.
3.
3.04
ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 feet.
3.05
ADJUSTING A. Remove damaged or soiled panels and replace with new units, as directed by Architect.
09 51 00 - 5
3.06
CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION
09 51 00 - 6
SECTION 09 65 00 RESILENT FLOORING AND BASE PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 1.02 Vinyl composition tile (VCT). Resilient wall base
SUBMITTALS A. Products selected by Interior Designer: Submittals to the Architect are for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the general review of quality of materials and installation and is not for review of aesthetic design, color, pattern, or finish. Aesthetic review is the responsibility of the Interior Designer. Submit samples as required by Interior Designer for aesthetic review. Product Data: Submit manufacturers data for each product indicated. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of resilient floor tile required.
B. C. 1.03
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods: 1. 2. 3. B. C. D. E. 48 hours before installation. During installation. 48 hours after installation.
After postinstallation period, maintain temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor covering installation. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS VINYL COMPOSITION TILE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as manufactured by one of the following:
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Resilient Flooring and Base
09 65 00 - 1
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 1. 2. 3. 4.
AB ColorPlus, American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO. Congoleum Corporation Mannington Mills, Inc. Tarkett Inc. Class: 1 (solid-color tile). Thickness: 0.125 inch. Size: 12 by 12 inches. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: a. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648.
Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): ASTM F 1066.
5. 2.02
Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Azrock Commercial Flooring, DOMCO Burke Mercer Flooring Products Johnsonite Marley Flexco (USA), Inc. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. Roppe Corporation Type (Material Requirement): TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). Style: Cove (with top-set toe), toeless at carpet. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm). Height: 4 inches (102 mm). Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. Corners: Premolded. Surface: Smooth. Color and Pattern: As indicated on Drawings.
Wall Base: ASTM F 1861.
09 65 00 - 2
2.03
INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic cement based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. Metal Edge or Transitions Strips: As selected by Architect.
B. C. PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION PREPARATION A. B. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written recommendations to ensure adhesion of resilient products. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710. 1. 2. 3. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing. Moisture Testing: a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vaporemission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours. Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. installation only after substrates pass testing. Proceed with
b. C.
Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. Use trowelable leveling and patching compound to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.
D. E.
F.
Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, and dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION VCT
09 65 00 - 3
A.
Lay out tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter. Match tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles. Scribe, cut, and fit tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, door frames, thresholds, and nosings. Extend tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. Install tiles on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern with pieces of tile installed on covers. Tightly adhere tile edges to substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters. Adhere tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. 2. 3. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil. a. Do not wash surfaces until after time period recommended by manufacturer.
B.
C.
D. E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods recommended in writing by manufacturer.
3.03
INSTALLATION WALL BASE A. B. C. D. Apply wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. Premolded Corners: Install premolded corners before installing straight pieces. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.
09 65 00 - 4
E. F.
Do not stretch wall base during installation. Cut the wall base to finished length or miter cut the ends for inside and outside corners utilizing a standard compound or sliding miter saw, table saw or radial arm saw equipped with a tungsten carbide or diamond-tipped saw blade with 60 teeth or greater. Glue mitered corners together prior to installation. Porous Wall Surfaces: Spread approved adhesive to the back surface of the wall base with an 1/8" square-notched trowel. Verify adhesive covers a minimum of 80 percent of the back surface. Leave a 1/4 inch uncovered space at the top of the wall base to prevent the adhesive from spreading onto the wall above the base when installed. Non-porous Wall Surfaces: (i.e.: vinyl wallpaper, metal, epoxy paint, ceramics, etc.) apply approved adhesive to both the wall surface and the back of the wall base. Allow adhesive to thoroughly dry to the touch. The adhesive will turn from "white to clear" when dry. Carefully position the wall base on the wall surface. Position wall base on wall surface and roll with hand roller. Always roll back to starting point to prevent stretching the wall base.
G. H.
I.
J.
3.04
CLEANING A. B. C. After flooring has become well seated and just prior to opening it to traffic, thoroughly clean in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Remove dirt, debris and adhesive from floor covering and adjacent surfaces using Manufacturers recommended methods and leave installation in a condition. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition.
3.05
PROTECTION A. Minimize traffic until flooring has become well seated at least 48 hours, at a maintained temperature of not less than 70 degrees F., and do not permit fixtures, equipment, trucks, or similar items on flooring. END OF SECTION
09 65 00 - 5
SECTION 09 68 13 CARPET TILES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Carpet tile.
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation methods. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C. Columns, doorways, enclose walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. Type of subfloor. Type of installation. Pattern of installation. Pattern type, location, and direction. Pile direction. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. Transition details to other flooring materials.
B.
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. 2. Carpet Tile: Full-size Sample. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inchlong Samples.
D. E.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.
2.
09 68 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Carpet Tiles
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tile until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Do not install carpet tile over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet tile, install carpet tile before installing these items.
C.
D.
1.06
WARRANTY A. Carpet Tile Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet tile manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet tile that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.
1.07
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
09 68 13 - 2
PART 2. 2.01
- PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. B. Carpet Tile: As indicated on Drawings. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydrauliccement-based formulation provided by or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and that is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.
C.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet tile installation and comply with requirements specified. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. 2. 3. 4. Carpet manufacturer. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpet. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Test concrete for excessive moisture content or hydro-static moisture content. Excessive moisture is defined as no more than 2.5 pounds per 1000 square feet in 24 hours. Test concrete for acidity/alkalinity which shall test in the 6.0 to 8.0 range. Frequency of tests shall comply with manufacturer's guidelines.
B.
5. 6. C. 3.02
PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates.
B.
09 68 13 - 3
C.
Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
D.
3.03
INSTALLATION A. B. C. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14 "Carpet Modules (Tiles)." Installation Method: As recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.
D. E.
F. 3.04
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. 2. 3. B. C. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.
Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16 "Protection of Indoor Installations." Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. END OF SECTION
09 68 13 - 4
SECTION 09 68 16 SHEET CARPETING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. B. Section includes: Sheet Carpet. Related Sections: 1. 09 65 00 - Resilient Tile Flooring and Base: accessories installed with carpet. Resilient wall base and
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated including: 1. 2. B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. C. Manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. Locations where dye lot changes occur. Seam locations, types, and methods. Type of subfloor. Type of installation. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. Pile direction. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. Transition details to other flooring materials.
Shop Drawings: Show the following:
Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. 2. Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inchlong Samples.
D. E.
Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Maintenance Data: Include the following information:
09 68 16 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sheet Carpeting
1.
Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. At least 30 days prior to scheduled installation, submit certification that carpet will conform to Specifications and approved samples. Manufacturer shall furnish roll numbers and other information which will enable identification of certified carpet. Inspect carpet after manufacture for manufacturing defects. Provide certification from manufacturer that carpet will not display or evidence a significant change in color due to exposure to atmospheric contaminants (Ozone or Oxides of Nitrogen) for 5 years.
2. F.
Certification: 1.
2.
G.
Test Reports: Submit reports for flammability, smoke density and static propensity from independent laboratory no more than 2 years old.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer with a minimum of 5 years experience in projects similar in scope to this project, who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, 10th Edition, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. General: Comply with CRI 104, 10th Edition, Section 7, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. Field Measurements: measurements. Verify installation dimensions by making field
C. D.
Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.
09 68 16 - 2
E.
Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items.
1.06
WARRANTY A. Carpet Warranty: Written warranty, signed by carpet manufacturer agreeing to replace carpet that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, and delamination. 1. B. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. Manufacturer's Warranty: In addition to Project Warranty, provide manufacturer's Limited 10 Year Wear Warranty on manufacturer's standard form of similar content subject to Architect's approval. Manufacturer's warranty shall include dimensional stability, wear and static resistance.
1.07
EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS CARPET A. Products: As indicated on Drawings.
2.02
INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydrauliccement-based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: 1. B. Carpet manufacturer. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. C. Carpet manufacturer. Seaming Cement: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer for taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile loss at seams. Edge and Transition Strips: As selected by Architect.
D.
09 68 16 - 3
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. 2. 3. 4. Carpet manufacturer. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete for slabs receiving carpet. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. Test concrete for excessive moisture content or hydro-static moisture content. Excessive moisture is defined as no more than 2.5 pounds per 1000 square feet in 24 hours. Test concrete for acidity/alkalinity which shall test in the 6.0 to 8.0 range. Frequency of tests shall comply with manufacturer's guidelines.
B.
5. 6. C. 3.02
PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, 10th Edition, Section 7, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: 1. D. Carpet manufacturer. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. C.
09 68 16 - 4
3.03
INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Lay carpet materials tight and free of irregularities. Cut and fit carpeting accurately and smoothly on wall and floor surfaces, around projections and into trim strips or binding bars with a minimum number of seams. Install no lengths or fillers which are less than 2'-0" in length. Carpet Seams: a. b. c. d. Locate seams in accordance with approved seam diagram. Seam layout shall provide a minimum total seam length with minimum head seams. Do not locate head seams in areas of heavy traffic. Butt match seams in carpeting material with no cut yard ends allowed and with carpet tufting running in same direction throughout Project installation. Stagger carpet cross cuts or seams by a minimum of 10 feet. Required tapes or adhesives used shall be in strict accordance with carpet and product Manufacturer's recommendations for type of seam, material and use intended. Install where floor carpeting terminates and where carpeting abuts a dissimilar floor material. Securely fasten edge and transition strips with concealed fasteners.
2.
e. f.
3.
Edge and Transition Strips: a. b.
4.
Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. Install pattern parallel to walls and borders. Center under doors at doorways.
5. 6.
7. 8. B.
Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, 10th Edition, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation." 1. Carpet Layout: Layout the carpet according to the seaming diagram. Cut carpet 3-4 inches longer than the area measurement. Where applicable, allow for pattern repeat. Align all carpet breadths to their proper position and trim seams. Adhesive:
2. 3.
09 68 16 - 5
a. b.
Select the appropriate adhesive and trowel notch configuration recommended by the carpet manufacturer and adhesive supplier. Spread floor adhesive uniformly over the subfloor with an appropriate trowel, leaving ridges of sufficient height to achieve full and complete coverage of the substrate and carpet backing, including penetration into the backings deepest recesses. After sufficient open time, the press the carpet into the adhesive and roll in accordance with CRI 104 recommendations.
c. 4.
Seam Adhesive (Sealer) - For carpet systems that require seam sealing, an appropriate direct-glue seam adhesive must be applied to the edges trimmed for seaming and cover the thickness of both the primary and secondary backing without contaminating face yarns. Apply seam adhesive to the cut edge of one side only, that side being the first one placed into the floor adhesive. Finishing at Wall Line Finish and adhere carpet securely along the wall line with a smooth, neat appearance.
5. C. 3.04
Base: Install base after carpet installation is complete.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. 2. 3. B. C. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet manufacturer. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.
Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, 10th Edition, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations." Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION
09 68 16 - 6
SECTION 09 77 10 FRP PANELS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Fiberglass-reinforced plastic panels as indicated on Drawings and as specified herein.
1.02
SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Product Data: Manufacturer's Specifications and installation instructions for each material and accessory. Submit Manufacturer's full range of color and pattern samples of wall panels and trim pieces for Architect's selection. Submit two samples of selected products. Submit cleaning and maintenance instructions.
1.03
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. Deliver materials clearly labeled to identify Manufacturer, brand name, quality or grade and fire hazard classification. Store horizontally in original undamaged packages.
1.04
PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Install materials when temperature and humidity conditions approximate conditions that will exist when building is occupied.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as manufactured by one of the following: 1. 2. Kemlite Company Marlite
2.02
MATERIALS A. Panels and Accessories: 1. Fiberglass reinforced plastic; 0.09 inches thick laminated to one side of a 1/2 inch thick APA, CD Exposure 1 grade plywood or moisture resistant gypsum board. Panels shall be USDA approved for incidental food contact.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow FRP Panels
2.
09 77 10 - 1
3. 4. 5. 6. B. C. D. E.
Moldings at panel edges to be 2 piece batten type with snap-on trim. Fasteners to be Manufacturer's standard nylon drive pins. Texture: Smooth, high gloss. Color: White
Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended type for use with selected materials, waterproof, mildew resistant nonstaining type. Cauking: Latex type as approved by Adhesive and Wall Paneling Manufacturer. Moldings: Extruded polyvinyl chloride (PVC), color to match panel. Miscellaneous Items: Furnish and install supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation whether or not specified or indicated.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Examine substrate and conditions under which the material is to be installed. Verify that surfaces, when tested with moisture meter, have proper moisture content. Verify that nails and screws are recessed, with joints and depressions taped, finish and sealed. Remove contaminants from areas to be covered. Do not proceed with Work until Work of other Trades which passes through wall covering has been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Start of Work indicates acceptance of responsibility for performance and any required remedial Work.
6.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. Install panels in accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions using full sheet mastic coverage method plus nylon fasteners. Make joints with 1/8 inch space for expansion and use moldings designed for each condition for the Project. Bevel back edges of panels with block plane to permit proper fit into moldings. If one end of panel must be nailed, do not nail the other end. Remove plumbing escutcheons, switchplates, wall plates, and surface-mounted fixtures, and cut wall paneling evenly to fit. Replace items after completion of Work. Where applicable, install paneling before installation of plumbing, casings, bases, cabinets and other items to be applied over paneling.
F.
09 77 10 - 2
3.03
CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive and smudges with soft cloth and mineral spirits END OF SECTION
09 77 10 - 3
SECTION 09 81 00 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Acoustical Insulation as shown on the Drawings and as specified.
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulation from physical damage and from becoming wet, soiled, or covered with ice or snow. Comply with manufacturers recommendations for handling, storage and protection during installation. Label insulation packages to include material name, production date and/or product code.
B.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS, PRODUCTS, AND OPERATIONS A. Furnish products of one of the specified Manufacturers, except as approved by the Architect, subject to compliance with Specification requirements. 1. 2. 3. 4. Manville Building Products Group Owens Corning Figerglas U.S. Gypsum Company Or equal.
2.02
MATERIALS A. Sound Control Batts: Fiberglass unfaced, ASTM C665, Type I, Class B. 1. 2. Thickness: 3-1/2 inch or as indicated on the Drawings Surface Burning Characteristics: When tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. a. b. 3. Maximum flame spread: 25 Maximum smoke developed: 50
Fire Resistance Rating: Passes ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall assembly.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION
09 81 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Acoustical Insulation
A.
Examine substrates and conditions under which insulation work is to be performed. A satisfactory substrate is one that complies with requirements of the section in which substrate and related work is specified. Obtain installers written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation of insulations until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulation.
B.
C. 3.02
INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical insulation batts in sound-rated stud partition walls where indicated on Drawings. Size batts for a friction fit and install in accordance with Manufacturer's recommendations. Install acoustical insulation batts above lay-in ceilings, and other locations as shown on Drawings, in strict accordance with Manufacturer's printed instructions. Butt ends of batts closely together and fill all voids.
B. C. 3.03
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION
09 81 00 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Acoustical Insulation
SECTION 09 91 00 PAINTING PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Painting as specified and as noted on Drawings. Surfaces requiring finishing and left unfinished by the requirements of other Sections shall be painted or finished as part of the Work of this Section.
1.02
DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 and ASTM D523 apply to this section: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Flat: Lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measures at as 85-degree meter. Eggshell: Low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Lo Luster: Low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 25 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Satin: Low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Semigloss: Medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Full gloss: High-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. Touch-Up: Painting of items missed by painter at no additional cost to Owner. Re-Paint: Repairs to paint work for damages caused by other trades.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit Manufacturers data for each paint system indicated, including primers. Data shall include label analysis and instruction for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. Material List: Submit an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturers catalog number and general classification. Samples:
B.
C.
09 91 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Painting
1.
Architect will furnish Contractor a color schedule of colors selected either from manufacturer's stock colors or specially requested color mixes before Work is begun. Submit two 8 inch x 10 inch samples of each color, including the correct sheen and texture, on heavy cardboard or masonry. Submit sealer and stain finishes on material of the same quality and species of wood on which that particular finish shall be used. Rejected samples shall be resubmitted until approved. Samples shall be submitted at least 30 days prior to the start of painting work. Label and identify each sample as to location and application. Upon submittal of color samples, minor variations or changes in color selection may be requested by the Architect and new samples ordered, until final color approval.
2.
3.
D.
Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit data on cleaning, touch-up, and repair of painted and coated surfaces
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Materials, preparation, application and workmanship shall be in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and applicable provisions of the following: 1. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) "Painting Specification Manual" and "Standards". a. PDCA P1-92, "Touch-Up Painting and Damage Repair -Financial Responsibility:" A properly painted surface shall be as defined in this Standard. PDCA P2-92, "Third Responsibilities." Party Inspection Qualifications and
b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 1.
PDCA P3-93, "Designation of Paint Colors." PDCA P4-94, "Responsibilities for Inspection and Acceptance of Surfaces Prior to Painting and Decorating." PDCA P5-94, "Benchmark Sample Procedures for Paint and Other Decorative Coating Systems."
Gypsum Association - GA210, "Gypsum Board for Walls and Ceilings." ASTM Standards listed in paint manufacturers technical literature. UL Ratings listed in paint manufacturers technical literature. Federal Specifications listed in paint manufacturers technical literature. Local and Federal regulations regarding toxicity and air quality regulations Fire Retardant Finishes: Maximum 25/450 flame spread/smoke developed index when tested in accordance with ASTM E84
Surface Burning Characteristics:
09 91 00 - 2
C. D.
Source limitations: Obtain primer for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual with a minimum of 5 years experience applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and scope of this project.
1.05
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. B. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's sealed containers, legends and labels, intact. Storage: Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a wellventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Adequately protect against damage while stored at site. Protect materials from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. In no case shall the amount or method of materials stored exceed the amount permitted or the manner allowed by local ordinances, state laws, or fire underwriter regulations.
2.
1.06
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: Do not apply exterior paint in damp or rainy weather or until after the surface has dried thoroughly from the effects of such weather. 1. 2. Do not apply varnish or paint when temperature is below 50 degrees F.. Avoid painting surfaces exposed to hot sunlight. During interior application, maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. unless otherwise directed by Architect or manufacturer's printed instructions. Hold temperature as constant as possible. Provide adequate ventilation at all times so the humidity cannot rise above the dew point of the coldest surface to be painted. Moisture-containing surfaces, such as concrete, stucco and cement plaster shall have a moisture content of less than 8 percent as measured by moisture meter. Remove surface salt deposits prior to painting. Verify that pH is neutral, or within acceptable limits of Paint Manufacturer. Paint after thoroughly cured.
3. 4.
1.07
WARRANTY A. Furnish five year manufacturer warranty for paints and coatings.
1.08
MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Upon completion of the Work, furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but not less than one gallon of each type and color of paint and finish used
09 91 00 - 3
on this Project from the same production run as the materials applied. Package for protective covering for storage and label containers with manufacturer's name, batch, color, shelf life, instructions, and cautions. Deliver extra materials to location as instructed by Owner. PART 2. 2.01 EXECUTION MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.02 Dunn Edwards Frazee ICI Paint Centers Sherwin-Williams Co. Tnemec Kelly-Moore Paints
MATERIALS A. Material Compatibility: Provide primers, and finish-coat material that are compatible with one another, and with the substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. Material Quality: Provide manufacturers best-quality paint materials, factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated.
B.
2.03
COMPONENTS A. Coatings: Ready mixed. Prepare coatings: 1. 2. 3. B. C. To soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to homogeneous coating. For good flow and brushing properties. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
Patching Materials: compatible with finish Fastener Head Cover Materials: compatible with finish
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report in writing with a copy to Architect, conditions detrimental to Work. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces.
09 91 00 - 4
1. 2. B. C.
Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. Commencement of painting will be construed as Applicators acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
Test shop applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials. Verify moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. 2. 3. 4. Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D4442. Concrete Floors: 8 percent.
3.02
PROTECTION A. Before painting, remove hardware, accessories, electrical plates, lighting fixtures and similar items and protect. 1. Provide Wet-Paint signs and other barricades and protections as required to protect adjacent surfaces and work of other trades, whether being painted or not. Mask permanent labels. Provide, distribute, and maintain a sufficient supply of clean drop cloths and other protective coverings. Protect foliage and other exterior finished surfaces from contact with cleaning materials and thoroughly flush with water after contact. On completion of each space, replace above items
2. 3. 4. 5. 3.03
SURFACE PREPARATION A. General: 1. Surfaces requiring painting or finishing shall be thoroughly dry and cured, free of dirt, dust, rust, stains, scale, mildew, wax, grease, oil, deteriorated substrates, bond-breakers, efflorescence and other foreign matter detrimental to the coatings adhesion and performance. Repair voids, cracks, nicks and other surface defects with appropriate patching material. Finish flush with surrounding surfaces and match adjacent finish texture. Spot prime marred or damaged shop coats on metal surfaces with appropriate metal primer. Determine moisture content of plaster, stucco, cementitious materials, wood, and other moisture-holding materials by use of a reliable electronic moisture meter.
2.
3. 4.
09 91 00 - 5
5. 6. B.
Determine alkalinity of plaster, stucco and other cementitious materials by performing appropriate tests. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content or alkalinity exceeds that which is allowed by paint manufacturer. Sandpaper to smooth and even surface and then dust off. After primer or stain coat has been applied, thoroughly fill nail holes and other surface imperfections with putty tinted with primer or stain to match wood color. Sand woodwork between coats to a smooth surface. Cover knots and sap streaks with a thin coat of shellac, or seal with a suitable stain blocking sealer. Finish door and window edges after final fitting. Finish interior of cabinets in the same manner as the exterior unless otherwise specified. Seal interior of drawers unless otherwise specified. Backpriming: a. b. c. d. Backprime exterior woodwork, which is to receive paint finish, with exterior primer paint. Backprime interior woodwork, which is to receive paint or enamel finish, with enamel undercoater paint. Backprime interior and exterior woodwork, which is to receive stain and/or varnish finish with varnish. Back-prime wood trim before installation.
Wood: 1.
2.
3.
C.
Steel and Iron: 1. Remove grease, oil, mill scale, rust and rust scale and touch-up chipped or abraded places on items that have been shop coated. Remove and reprime incompatible or damaged shop applied primers. Comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations for cleaning of uncoated steel and iron surfaces. When area will be exposed to view, sandpaper the entire primed area smooth, feather the edge of surrounding undamaged prime coat and spot prime in a manner to eliminate evidence of repair. Thoroughly clean by wiping surfaces with a non-hydrocarbon, low VOC solvent that will not leave an oily residue. Apply surface conditioner or vinyl-wash pretreatment as required for proper adhesion if required by paint manufacturer. Prime galvanized metal with galvanized iron primer as recommended by paint manufacturer. A test sample of the complete painting system should be applied and checked for adhesion before final painting begins. Clean visible portions of throats of galvanized steel ductwork with solvent; wipe dry with clean rags and paint flat black.
2.
D.
Galvanized Metal and Aluminum: 1.
2.
09 91 00 - 6
E.
Concrete and Portland Cement Plaster: 1. The method of surface preparation shall be at Contractor's discretion, provided the results are satisfactory to the Architect, and the method is in compliance with applicable codes and requirements. Repair surfaces to be painted prior to application of prime and finish coat(s). Apply a tinted primer to the substrate to help identify surface imperfections. After the primer has thoroughly dried, patch, fill and repair surface imperfections to match and flush-out with adjacent finish texture and profile. Before first paint coat is applied, spot prime nails and other exposed metal occurring in the surfaces with a rust inhibitive primer as recommended by paint manufacturer. Fill cracks, holes or imperfections with compatible patching material and smooth off to match adjoining surfaces. Before painting, surfaces shall be first tested for dryness with a moisture testing device. Apply no paint or sealer on gypsum board when the moisture content exceeds 8 percent. Test sufficient areas in each space and as often as necessary to determine if the surface has the proper moisture content for painting. If the moisture content is between 8 percent and 12 percent, prime with alkali resistant primer. If 8 percent or less, prime with specified primer. Remove the dry salt deposits from plaster surfaces by brushing with a stiff brush before painting.
2.
3.
F.
Gypsum Board Surfaces: 1.
2.
3.
3.04
WORKMANSHIP A. B. C. Apply products to achieve paint manufacturer's printed specifications for dry mil thickness Apply each coat of paint evenly and comply with manufacturer's drying time before applying subsequent coats. Finished work shall be uniform, match approved color, texture and coverage, and free from runs, sags, clogging or excessive flooding. Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors sharp and clean, without overlapping. Where varnishes or enamel is used, lightly sand, dust and clean undercoats to obtain a smooth finish coat. Sand carefully between each coat of finish on smooth surfaces for good adhesion of subsequent coats. Where clear finishes are required, ensure tinted fillers match wood. Work fillers well into the grain before set. Wipe excess from the surface. Where specific mil thicknesses are required, check thickness by the following methods: 1. 2. Over ferrous metal - Elecometer Film Gauge Other surfaces - Tooke Dry Mil Inspection Gauge
D. E.
09 91 00 - 7
3.05
APPLICATION A. Painting and finishing: 1. 2. 3. 4. Paint shall be applied over proper primer, filler or pretreatment for each type of surface as required to hold surface finish. 2 coats of finish and additional coats are required to provide adequate coverage will be provided. High, overhead spaces to have dryfall paint finish. Transformer boxes, meter panels and electrical equipment, backflow valves, and other utility equipment located on the site shall be painted to match the building color. Hollow metal frames. Stairs, ladders and miscellaneous metals.
5. 6. B.
The number of coats scheduled is the minimum number of coats required. Additional coat(s) shall be applied, at no additional cost to the Owner, to completely hide base material, provide uniform color and to produce satisfactory finish results. Apply coatings without thinning except as specifically required by label directions, or required by these specifications. In such cases, thinning shall be the minimum reduction permitted. Priming will not be required on items delivered with prime or shop coats, unless otherwise specified. Touch up prime coats applied by others as required to ensure an even primed surface before applying finish coat. Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical: 1. Exterior and interior exposed water, gas, waste piping, sprinkler piping, conduit, lighting and electrical panels, telephone terminal boxes, galvanized ducts and insulated ducts, shall be painted in areas other than mechanical rooms, unless otherwise scheduled. Paint exposed unfinished fixtures, metal ducts, switch boxes, control panels, devices, starters, junction boxes, vents, drains, and other similar items, as directed by Architect.
C.
D.
E.
2.
F.
Spray paint prime coated (not pre-finished) grilles and registers with enamel or lacquer to match walls and ceilings. Paint materials shall not sag, run or bind movable parts of grilles, registers, louvers, baffles and other similar items. 1. Throats of ducts shall be given one coat of flat black paint, wherever visibility of the interior of the duct is allowed through registers or other similar items. At fiber lined duct, use black latex paint. Examine the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings and Specifications to determine the amount of exposed work to be painted.
2. G.
Paint exposed surfaces of every member; paint items inaccessible after installation before installation, if required to be painted. Edges, tops and bottoms of wood
09 91 00 - 8
doors shall be sealed and finished with the same finish as the door faces, to meet door manufacturer's warranty requirements. Verify edge color with Architect as different colors may be selected for each face. H. I. Paint items fitted with finish hardware after hardware has been temporarily removed. Heating and other equipment on or adjacent to walls or surfaces scheduled for painting, shall be disconnected, using workmen skilled in appropriate trades and moved temporarily to permit painting of surface. Following completion of painting, replace and reconnect items. Each succeeding pigmented coat shall be distinguishably lighter than the previous coat. Tint prime and undercoats to a color similar to finish coat. Each coat of material applied must be inspected and approved by the Architect before the application of the succeeding specified coat; otherwise no credit for the concealed coat will be given, and the Contractor shall assume the responsibility to recoat work in question. Contractor shall notify the Architect when each coat is completed. Brush, wipe or roll stain in 2 coat application. Avoid lap marks by maintaining "wet-edge" continually being merged with existing liquid coverage and stop only at natural edges, turns and breaking places. Do not paint over Underwriters' Laboratory labels, fusible links, exposed sprinkler heads and other similar items. Paint piping, electrical or other equipment, conduit, vents and other similar items, on roof or other exterior locations as directed by Architect. Finish closets and the interior of cabinets with same color as adjoining rooms, unless otherwise specified. Finish other surfaces same as nearest or adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise shown or scheduled. Paint surface of walls which will be concealed by cabinets, chalkboards and other items attached to wall. For walls that extend above lay-in ceilings: Provide at least one coat minimum of paint finish, color to match wall surface, for walls that continue 18 inches above ceiling surface. Apply paint finish prior to installation of ceiling grid to that there is no break in finish from bottom to top of wall due to ceiling grid edge angles. Handrails: Provide mastic epoxy primer with 2 coats of aliphatic polyurethane, interior and exterior to all handrails and similar heavy wear painted surfaces. Space above Open Ceiling: Structure, piping, ductwork, insulation and any other items exposed to view to be painted flat black.
J.
K.
L. M. N.
O. P.
Q. R.
3.06
ADJUSTING A. At completion, do touch-up and re-paint work and leave finish surfaces in good condition.
09 91 00 - 9
3.07
CLEANING A. B. C. During the course of the Work, remove misplaced paint and stain spots or spills. Leave Work in clean condition acceptable to Architect. Remove oily rags and waste daily, taking precaution to prevent fire. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces.
3.08
SCHEDULES A. B. C. Color Schedule: As listed on Interior Finishes Schedule. Schedule of Finishes: Refer to the "Finish Schedule" on the Drawing for designated finishes of areas. Finishing of the following listed items and materials will not be required and shall be protected: 1. Stainless Steel, brass, bronze, copper, monel, chromium, anodized aluminum; specially finished articles such as porcelain enamel, plastic coated fabrics, and baked enamel, unless otherwise indicated. Finished products such as ceramic tile, glass, brick, resilient flooring and acoustical tiles, board and metal tees. Pre-finished products such as wood folding partitions and doors, wood casework, and elevator cabs.
2. 3.
3.09
SHOP PRIMED ITEMS FOR SITE FINISHING A. B. Metal Fabrications (Section 05 50 00): Exposed surfaces of lintels, elevator pit ladders. Metal Stairs (Section 05 51 00): Exposed surfaces of stringers, exposed vertical risers.
3.10
EXTERIOR SURFACES A. Exterior Ferrous Metals: Apply to exposed steel such as beams and column connectors, metal doors and frames, grilles, and other exposed miscellaneous ferrous metals that are not pre-finished. 1. 2. 3. 1st Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer (Red or White color as applicable to finish coats). 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3rd Coat: Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking).
09 91 00 - 10
B.
Exterior Galvanized Metals: Apply to exposed galvanized metal such as copings, louvers and metal flashings. 1. Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment (if required by paint manufacturer). 1st Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3rd Coat: Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking).
2. 3. 4. C.
Exterior Aluminum: Apply to exterior louvers and other miscellaneous exposed exterior unfinished aluminum surfaces. 1. 2. 3. 4. Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment. 1st Coat: Aluminum Primer. 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd coat as recommended by manufacturer. 3rd Coat: Enamel, Semi-Gloss - Waterborne (100% Acrylic - Non-Blocking).
D.
Portland Cement Plaster: Apply to exterior cementitious surfaces as indicated or noted. 1. 2. 1st Coat: Filler Coat 2nd Coat and 3rd Coat: Elastomeric Smooth unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 85 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied. 1st Coat: Exterior Gypsum Board Primer/Undercoater Waterborne unless noted otherwise. 2nd and 3rd Coats: Flat Paint -Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 85 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied. 1st Coat: Primer 2nd and 3rd Coats: Flat Paint -Waterborne (100% Acrylic) unless noted otherwise. Sheen shall be 4 to 6% per a 85 degree gloss meter. One of the coats shall be roller applied
E.
Exterior Gypsum Board: Apply to exterior grade gypsum board soffits. 1. 2.
F.
Exterior EIFS: Omit Primer if integral colored finish has been applied 1. 2.
3.11
INTERIOR SURFACES A. Interior Ferrous Metals: Apply to exposed metals such as steel doors, hollow metal frames, metal beam saddles, columns, grilles and registers, stair and hand railings, ladders, and other exposed miscellaneous metals. 1. 2. 1st Coat: Ferrous Metal Primer (Red or White color as applicable to finish coats). 2nd Coat: Same material as 3rd Coat as recommended by manufacturer.
09 91 00 - 11
3. B.
3rd Coat: Enamel, Eggshell.
Interior Wood Finishes -Enamel: Apply to wood door frames, columns, exposed and concealed casework and millwork, wood-window wall construction, medium density plywood surfaces, shelving, perforated and plain type hardboard, particleboard and other exposed miscellaneous wood and trim, except wood specified for a transparent or stain finish. 1. 2. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Enamel, Eggshell
C.
Interior Wood Finish - Flat: Apply to plywood telephone backing boards and other miscellaneous softwood as noted, specified or scheduled. 1. 2. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater/Primer. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Flat Paint, -Waterborne (Vinyl Acrylic) Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment (if required by paint manufacturer) 1st Coat: Galvanized Metal Primer 2nd and 3rd Coat: Enamel, Eggshell
D.
Interior Galvanized Metals: Apply to exposed galvanized metal. 1.
2. 3. E.
Interior Aluminum: Apply to interior louvers and other miscellaneous exposed unfinished aluminum surfaces. 1. 2. 3. Clean metal to remove foreign matter or any coating applied by the metal manufacturer. Apply Surface Conditioner or Vinyl Wash Pretreatment. 1st Coat: Aluminum Primer. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Enamel, Eggshell
F.
Gypsum Board, Plaster and Concrete - Wet Areas: Apply to gypsum board, plaster and concrete surfaces in toilet rooms, janitor rooms, and other areas as scheduled. 1. 2. 1st Coat: Enamel Undercoater. 2nd and 3rd Coats:Enamel, Semi-Gloss.
G.
Gypsum Board, Plaster and Concrete - Non-Wet Areas: Apply to gypsum board, plaster and concrete except for wet areas. 1. 2. 1st Coat: Waterborne Primer/Sealer. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Enamel, Eggshell
3.12
CLEAR WOOD FINISHES A. Stained and Clear Finish: Apply to wood doors. Fill open grain hardwood such as Oak. 1. Stained and Finished with Clear Satin or Gloss Varnish Waterborne: a. 1st Coat: Semi-Transparent Stain
09 91 00 - 12
b. c.
2nd Coat: Varnish, Gloss Polyurethane (Waterborne) 3rd Coat: 1) Satin: Varnish, Satin Polyurethane (Waterborne) 2) Gloss: Varnish, Gloss Polyurethane (Waterborne) END OF SECTION
09 91 00 - 13
SECTION 10 14 00 SIGNAGE PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 1.02 Interior directional signage as required by code. Signage accessories
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. ANSI A117.1 "Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People." Public Law 101-336 "The Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 (ADA). ADA Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG).
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. B. C. Product Data: Submit Manufacturers brochures indicating materials and finished Shop Drawings: Show sizes of members, methods of construction, copy layout, and mounting details for proper mounting. Samples: For each type of sign, include the following Samples to verify color selected: 1. Panel Signs: Full-size Samples of each type of sign required.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. B. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Storage and Protection: Store items in dry, protected areas. Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site. Keep free from corrosion or other damage.
1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions shown on drawings.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS
10 14 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Signage
A.
Materials shall be new stock, free from defects, imperfections strength, durability, and appearance. Provide materials as shown and detailed on drawings and as specified herein. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface. Tape: VHB (very high bond) double-stick foam tape as manufactured by 3M. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.
B. C. D.
2.02
PLASTIC SIGNAGE A. Interior Signage: All interior signage shall comply with applicable ADA and IBC requirements. 1. Base: Melamine plastic laminate, 1/8 inch thick, rated non-static, fire retardant and self extinguishing. a. b. Colors and Style: As selected by Architect. Mounting: Screw attach to wall as required by code. Minimum 2 screws per sign. Height shall be 60 inches above finish floor to centerline of sign at wall mounted signs. Finish and contrast: i. d. Matte finish. ii. Characters shall contrast with background by at least 20 percent. Letters and Braille characters: i. Raised 1/32 inch upper case, sans serif or simple serif, and accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be at least 5/8 inch high, but not higher than 2 inches.
c.
ii. Letters and numbers: Width-to-height ratio from 3:5 to 1:1, and stroke width-to-height ratio from 1:5 to 1:10. iii. Text: As provided by Architect. PART 3. 3.01 EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurfaces to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Construction Manager. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurfaces. Coordination: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
B.
3.02
INSTALLATION
10 14 00 - 2
A.
General: Locate sign units and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of the type described and in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions. Install plumb and level in accordance with Manufacturer's instructions. Securely fasten wall mounted items to solid backing.
B. C. 3.03
CLEANING A. During the course of the Work and on completion of theWork, remove excess materials, equipment and debris and dispose of away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION
10 14 00 - 3
SECTION 10 21 13 TOILET COMPARTMENTS PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: Toilet compartments and screens as follows: 1. 2. 1.02 Type: Steel, color-coated finish. Compartment Style: Floor mounted and overhead braced.
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and style of toilet compartment and screen specified. Include details of construction relative to materials, fabrication, and installation. Include details of anchors, hardware, and fastenings. Shop Drawings: For fabrication and installation of toilet compartment and screen assemblies. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. C. Show locations of reinforcement and cutouts for compartment-mounted toilet accessories.
B.
Samples for Verification: Of each compartment or screen color and finish required, prepared on 6-inch- square Samples of same thickness and material indicated for Work.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at the site.
B. 1.05
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions in areas of installation by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Toilet Compartments
10 21 13 - 1
Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating units without field measurements. Coordinate supports, adjacent construction, and fixture locations to ensure actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Accurate Partitions Corporation. Capitol Partitions, Inc. General Partitions Mfg. Corp. Metpar Corp.
2.02
MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that have been selected for surface flatness and smoothness. Exposed surfaces that exhibit pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, telegraphing of core material, or other imperfections on finished units are unacceptable. Steel Sheets for Color-Coated Finish: Provide mill-phosphatized steel sheet that is leveled to stretcher-leveled flatness complying with the requirements of standards indicated below: 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized or Galvannealed Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, in manufacturer's standard coating designation and of the following minimum thicknesses:
a. Pilasters, Panels and Screens: 20 gauge. b. Doors: 22 gauge.
B.
C.
Core Material for Metal-Faced Units: Manufacturer's standard sound-deadening honeycomb of resin-impregnated kraft paper in thickness required to provide finished thickness of 1 inch minimum for doors, panels, and screens and 1-1/4 inches minimum for pilasters. Pilaster Shoes and Sleeves (Caps): ASTM A 666, Type 302 or 304 stainless steel, not less than 0.0312 inch thick and 3 inches high, finished to match hardware. Stirrup Brackets: Manufacturer's standard ear or U-brackets for attaching panels and screens to walls and pilasters of the following material: 1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clearanodized aluminum.
D. E.
10 21 13 - 2
F.
Hardware and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard design, heavy-duty operating hardware and accessories of the following material: 1. Material: Chrome-plated, nonferrous, cast zinc alloy (zamac) or clearanodized aluminum.
G.
Anchorages and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners of stainless steel or chrome-plated steel or brass, finished to match hardware, with theftresistant-type heads. Provide sex-type bolts for through-bolt applications. For concealed anchors, use hot-dip galvanized or other rust-resistant, protective-coated steel.
2.03
FABRICATION A. General: Provide standard doors, panels, screens, and pilasters fabricated for compartment system. Provide units with cutouts and drilled holes to receive compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated. 1. B. Provide internal reinforcement in metal units for compartment-mounted hardware, accessories, and grab bars, as indicated.
Metal-Faced Toilet Compartments and Screens: Pressure laminate seamless face sheets to core material and provide continuous, interlocking molding strip or lapped and formed edges. Seal corners by welding or clips. Grind exposed welds smooth. Floor-Anchored Screens: Provide pilasters and panels of same construction and finish as toilet compartments. Provide manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant anchoring assemblies complete with threaded rods, lock washers, and leveling adjustment nuts at pilasters for structural connection to floor. Provide shoes at pilasters to conceal anchorage. Wall-Hung Screens: Provide units in sizes indicated of same construction and finish as compartment panels, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Provide metal-faced screens with integral full-height flanges for attachment to wall.
C.
D.
E.
Doors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide 24-inch- wide in-swinging doors for standard toilet compartments and 36-inch- wide out-swinging doors with a minimum 32-inch- wide clear opening for compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible. 1. 2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard self-closing type that can be adjusted to hold door open at any angle up to 90 degrees. Latch and Keeper: Manufacturer's standard surface-mounted latch unit with combination rubber-faced door strike and keeper designed for emergency access. Provide units that comply with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
10 21 13 - 3
3.
Coat Hook: Manufacturer's standard combination hook and rubber-tipped bumper, sized to prevent door from hitting compartment-mounted accessories. Door Bumper: Manufacturer's standard rubber-tipped bumpers at outswinging doors or entrance screen doors. Door Pull: Manufacturer's standard unit that complies with accessibility requirements of authorities having jurisdiction at out-swinging doors. Provide units on both sides of doors at compartments indicated to be handicapped accessible.
4. 5.
2.04
ZINC- OR ZINC-ALLOY-COATED STEEL SHEET FINISHES A. B. General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations relative to applying finishes. Color-Coated Finish: Provide manufacturer's standard baked finish complying with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness. Colors: As selected by Architect.
C. PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install units rigid, straight, plumb, and level. Provide clearances of not more than 1/2 inch between pilasters and panels and not more than 1 inch between panels and walls. Secure units in position with manufacturer's recommended anchoring devices. 1. Secure panels to walls and panels with not less than 2 stirrup brackets attached near top and bottom of panel. Locate wall brackets so holes for wall anchors occur in masonry or tile joints. Align brackets at pilasters with brackets at walls.
B.
Overhead-Braced-and-Floor-Anchored Compartments: Secure pilasters to floor and level, plumb, and tighten. Secure continuous head rail to each pilaster with not less than 2 fasteners, using thru-bolting with one-way stainless steel sex bolts. Cadmium plated sex bolts shall not be allowed. Hang doors and adjust so tops of doors are parallel with overhead brace when doors are in closed position. Screens: Attach with anchoring devices according to manufacturer's written instructions and to suit supporting structure. Set units level and plumb and to resist lateral impact.
C.
3.02
ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Hardware Adjustment: Adjust and lubricate hardware according to manufacturer's written instructions for proper operation. Set hinges on in-swinging doors to hold open approximately 30 degrees from closed position when unlatched. Set hinges
10 21 13 - 4
on out-swinging doors and swing doors in entrance screens to return to fully closed position. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure toilet compartments and screens are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION
10 21 13 - 5
SECTION 10 28 00 TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. 1.02 Section includes: Toilet Accessories
1.03
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: For each product indicated showing sizes, construction and mounting techniques. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. Use room and product designations indicated on Drawings.
1.04
DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver materials to site in Manufacturer's original unopened packaging with labels intact. Protect finished surfaces with removable wrapping or coating which will not bond when exposed to sunlight. Storage: Adequately protect against damage while stored at site. Handling: Comply with Manufacturer's instructions.
B. C. PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. B. C. D. E. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, No. 4 finish (satin), 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 366, 0.0359-inch minimum nominal thickness. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653, G60. Baked-Enamel Finish: Factory-applied, gloss-white, baked-acrylic-enamel coating. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: fabrication. ASTM A 153, hot-dip galvanized after
10 28 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Toilet Accessories
F. G. 2.02
Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit, tamper and theft resistant when exposed, and of galvanized steel when concealed. Backing Plates: 16 gage cold-rolled steel for mounting grab bars in stud partitions.
TOILET ACCESSORIES A. Toilet Accessories: As selected by Architect.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Examine subsurface to receive Work and report detrimental conditions in writing to Architect. Commencement of Work will be construed as acceptance of subsurface. Coordination with other Work: Coordinate with other Work which affects, connects with, or will be concealed by this Work.
B.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. General: Install accessories using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer and in compliance with ANSI A117.1 as applicable. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated Attachment to Toilet Partitions: Secure at screw attachment point with metal tamper-resistant screws. 1. 2. Attachments of Recessed Accessories: Place shims between framing and cabinet at screw attachment points. Attachment of Surface Mounted Accessories: At stud walls, provide concealed blocking or backing at screw points to allow attachments with No. 18 x 1-1/2 inch sheet metal screws. At solid walls, rawl plugs, expansion shields or toggle bolts shall be provided. Mirrors shall be locked to wall hangers by tightening locking screws concealed in lower frame. Soap dispensers shall be mounted with 4 inch clearance from filler top to underside of any horizontal projection.
B.
C.
Grab Bars: Framed wall construction: Install concealed anchor plates to studs. Attachment to studs must be sufficient to withstand a horizontal pull of 300 pounds. Accurately position and fasten before wall finish is applied. After wall surface is finished, secure concealed mounting plate to anchor plate using stainless steel tamper resistant screws.
3.03
CLEANING
10 28 00 - 2
A.
During the course of the Work and on completion, remove and dispose of excess materials, equipment and debris away from premises. Leave Work in clean condition. END OF SECTION
10 28 00 - 3
SECTION 10 44 13 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. 2. 1.02 Portable Fire Extinguishers. Fire-protection cabinets.
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire-protection specialties. 1. 2. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification Cabinets: Include door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, panel style, and details of installation.
Samples: For each exposed cabinet finish.
B.
1.03
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers." Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1.04
COORDINATION A. Coordinate size of cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of hoses, hose valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated. 1. 2. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure extinguisher indicated and with plated or baked-enamel finish. Identification: Lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify bracket-mounted extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter decals applied to wall surface.
10 44 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Fire Protection Specialties
B.
Extinguishers: Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type, UL-rated, capacity as required by Code, in enameled-steel container.
2.02
FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. 2. 3. B. 1. J.L. Industries, Inc. Larsens Manufacturing Company. Potter-Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc. Cabinet: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames. a. b. C. D. E. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Listed and labeled to meet requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed. Cabinet Metal: Enameled-steel sheet.
Fire Protection Cabinet:
Mounting: Semi-Recessed. Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth. Door: 1. 2. Material: Manufacturer's standard steel sheet. Construction: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, of materials indicated, and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected. 1) Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels. Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 degrees. Door Locks: Provide cylinder lock, with all cabinets keyed alike. Identification: Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Locate as directed by Architect. a. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" applied to door. i. Lettering Color: As selected by Architect.
3.
4. 5.
F. 2.03
Wall Bracket: Manufacturer's standard J-type for wall hung extinguishers.
FINISHES
10 44 13 - 2
A. B.
Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, grease, mill scale, rust, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond using manufacturer's standard methods. Steel, Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply manufacturers or fabricator's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal primer shop primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. Examine roughing-in for hose valves, hose racks, and cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed and semi-recessed cabinets are to be installed. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated. 1. 2. 3. E. F. Prepare recesses for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style. Fasten mounting brackets to structure and cabinets, square and plumb. Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.
Adjust cabinet doors that do not swing or operate freely. Refinish or replace cabinets and doors damaged during installation. END OF SECTION
10 44 13 - 3
SECTION 14 21 00 ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATOR PART 1. 1.01 GENERAL SUMMARY A. B. This Section specifies electric traction elevators. Work Required: 1. The work required under this section consists of all labor, materials and services required for the complete installation (including operational verification) of all the equipment required for the elevator(s) as herein specified. All work shall be performed in a first class, safe and workmanlike manner. In all cases where a device or part of the equipment is herein referred to in the singular, it is intended that such reference shall apply to as many of such devices or parts as are required to make complete installation.
2. 3.
C.
Related work not specified herein: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section and are performed by trades other than the elevator manufacturer/installer. 1. Section 01 50 00 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: protection of floor openings and personnel barriers; temporary power and lighting. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: elevator pit, and elevator machine foundation. Section 05 50 00 - Metal Fabrications: pit ladder, divider beams, and supports for entrances, rails and hoisting beam at top of elevator hoistway. Section 07 13 13 Bituminous Sheet Waterproofing: waterproofing of elevator pit. Division 23 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning: ventilation and temperature control of elevator equipment areas. Division 26 - Electrical: a. b. c. d. e. f. Main disconnects for each elevator. Electrical power for elevator installation and testing. Disconnecting device to elevator equipment prior to activation of sprinkler system. The installation of dedicated GFCI receptacles in the pit and overhead. Lighting in controller area, machine area and pit. Wiring for telephone service to controller.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
14 21 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Electric Traction Elevator
7. 8.
Section 26 XX XX Emergency (Standby) Power Supply Systems: emergency generator for elevator operation. Section 26 XX XX - Fire Alarm Systems: The installation of fire and smoke detectors at required locations and interconnecting devices; fire alarm signal lines to contacts in the machine area. Section 26 XX XX - Telephone Systems: ADAAG-required emergency communications equipment. Section 31 20 00 Earthwork: excavation for elevator pit.
9. 10. D.
Applicable Codes: Comply with applicable building and elevator codes at the project site, including but not limited to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. ANSI A117.1, Buildings and Facilities, Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. ADAAG, Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. ANSI/NFPA 70, National Electrical Code. ANSI/NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows. ASME/ANSI A17.7, Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators. ANSI/UL 10B, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. Local Building Codes All other local applicable codes.
1.02
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Manufacturers: 1. 2. 3. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. Otis Elevator Co. Gen2 gearless machine-room less elevator where all components fit inside the hoistway. Schindler Elevator Corp: ThyssenKrupp Elevators: Synergy self-supported
Quantity of Elevators: One Elevator Stop Designations: Two Stops : 2 Openings: In line. Travel (maximum): 100 ft (200 fpm) Rated Capacity: 3500 lb. Rated Speed: 200 fpm Clear Cab Height: 7-10 Entrance Type and Width: Single-Slide Door 36 Entrance Height: 7-0
14 21 00 - 2
L.
Main Power Supply: 208, 220-240, 440-480 or 600 Volts + or - 5% of normal, three-Phase, with a separate equipment grounding conductor. Transformer (by others) required for voltages other than 208, 220-240, 440-480 volts. Car Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, Single-phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway at the top of the hoistway. Signal Fixtures: Manufacturers standard with metal button targets (exc. CA). Controller Location: Machine-Roomless Controller(s) must be in the front wall on the same side as the counterweight, located at the top landing. Optional Machine Room/Space. Optional remote controller (max distance 250) Performance: 1. 2. 3. Car Speed: + 3 % of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of travel. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold up to 120% of rated load. (code required). Ride Quality: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 20 milli-g Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 12 milli-g Vertical Jerk (maximum): 4.59 1.0 ft./ sec3 (1.4 0.3 m/ sec3) Acceleration/Deceleration (maximum): 2.62 ft./ sec2 (0.8 m/ sec2) In Car Noise: 55 60 dB(A) Stopping Accuracy: 0.375 in. ( 10 mm) max, 0.25 in. ( 6 mm) Typical Re-leveling Distance: 0.5 in. ( 12 mm)
M. N. O. P.
Q.
R.
Operation: 1. Simplex Collective Operation: Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation shall be automatic by means of the car and hall buttons. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served. Full Collective Operation Anti-nuisance. Fan and Light Protection. Load Weighing Bypass. Independent Service. Full Collective Operation. Firefighters' Service Phase I and Phase II Automatic Standby Power Operation with Manual Override.
S.
Operating Features Standard 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
T.
Operation Features 1.
14 21 00 - 3
U.
Door Control Features: 1. 2. Door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at a landing in response to a normal hall or car call. Elevator doors shall be provided with a reopening device that will stop and reopen the car door(s) and hoistway door(s) automatically should the door(s) become obstructed by an object or person. Door protection shall consist of a two dimensional, multi-beam array projecting across the car door opening. Door nudging operation to occur if doors are prevented from closing for an adjustable period of time.
3. V. 1.03
Provide equipment according to seismic zone: 2
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers product data for each system proposed for use. Include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. C. D. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels and indicators. Cab design, dimensions and layout. Hoistway-door and frame details. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in hoistway (BTU). Color selection chart for Cab and Entrances. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway. Maximum rail bracket spacing. Maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structure. Clearances and travel of car. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. Location and sizes of access doors, hoistway entrances and frames.
Shop Drawings: Submit approval layout drawings. Include the following:
Operations and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturer's standard operations and maintenance manual. Submit State Elevator Inspection Report and Approval to Architect in Closeout Documents.
1.04
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. C. Manufacturer: Elevator manufacturer shall be ISO 9001 certified. Installer: Elevators shall be installed by the manufacturer. Permits, Inspections and Certificates: The Elevator Contractor shall obtain and pay for necessary Municipal or State Inspection and permit as required by the elevator inspection authority, and make such tests as are called for by the regulations or
14 21 00 - 4
such authorities. These tests shall be made in the presence of such authorities or their authorized representatives. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Should the building or the site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed upon date, the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable storage area on or off the premises.
1.06
WARRANTY A. The warranty period shall be one (1) year from the date of substantial completion.
1.07
MAINTENANCE and SERVICE A. Maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment shall be provided by the elevator contractor for a period of twelve (12) months after the elevator has been turned over for the customers use. This service shall not be subcontracted but shall be performed by the elevator contractor. All work shall be performed by competent employees during regular working hours of regular working days. This service shall not cover adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents caused by persons other than the elevator contractor. Only genuine parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of the original equipment shall be provided. The periodic lubrication of elevator components shall not be required, including: Sheaves, Rails, Belts, Ropes, Car and CWT guides, etc The elevator control system must: 1. 2. 3. Provide in the controller the necessary devices to run the elevator on inspection operation. Provide on top of the car the necessary devices to run the elevator in inspection operation. Provide in the controller an emergency stop switch. This emergency stop switch when opened disconnects power from the brake and prevents the motor from running. Provide in the event of a power outage, means from the controller to electrically lift and control the elevator brake to safely bring the elevator to the nearest available landing. Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch and also trip the governor. Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set because of an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed.
B. C.
4.
5. 6. D.
Provide system capabilities to enable a remote expert to create a live, interactive connection with the elevator system to enable the following functions:
14 21 00 - 5
1. 2. 3. 4.
Remotely diagnose elevator issues with a remote team of experts Remotely return an elevator to service Provide real-time status updates via email Remotely make changes to selected elevator functions including: a. Control building traffic: Restrict floor access, remove car from group operation, shut down elevator, select up peak/down peak mode, activate independent service Conserve energy: Activate cab light energy save mode, activate fan energy save mode, shut down car(s) Improve passenger experience: Extend door open times, change parking floor, activate auto car full, activate anti-nuisance, advance door opening, door nudging, extend specific floor extended opening time, release trapped passengers
b. c.
PART 2. 2.01
PRODUCTS DESIGN AND SPECIFICATIONS A. Provide machine-roomless traction passenger. Specifically, the system shall consist of the following components: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Controller located entirely inside the hoistway. No extra machine room or control closet space required. An AC gearless machine using embedded permanent magnets mounted at the top of the hoistway. Polyurethane Coated-Steel Belts for elevator hoisting purposes. Regenerative drive that captures normally wasted energy and feeds clean power back into the buildings power grid. LED lighting standard in ceiling lights and elevator fixtures. Sleep mode operation for LED ceiling lights and car fan.
2.02
EQUIPMENT: CONTROLLER COMPONENTS A. Controller: A microcomputer based control system shall be provided to perform all of the functions of safe elevator operation. The system shall also perform car and group operational control. 1. 2. All high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside the controller shall be protected from accidental contact when the controller doors are open. Controller shall be separated into two distinct halves; Motor Drive side and Control side. High voltage motor power conductors shall be routed so as to be physically segregated from the rest of the controller. Field conductor terminations points shall be segregated; high voltage (>30 volts DC and 110 VAC,) and low voltage (< 30 volts DC)
3.
14 21 00 - 6
4.
Controllers shall be designed and tested for Electromagnetic Interference (EMI) immunity according to the EN 12016 (May 1998): EMC Product Family Standards for lifts, escalators, and passenger conveyors Part 2 immunity Controller shall be located inside the wall next to the top landing entrance frame. Emergency access shall be provided through an access panel in the entrance frame secured by a key lock. A separate control room or cabinet should not be required.
5.
6. B.
Drive: A Variable Voltage Variable Frequency AC drive system shall be provided. The drive shall be set up for regeneration of AC power back to the building grid.
2.03
EQUIPMENT: MACHINE AND GOVERNOR A. Machine: AC gearless machine, with a synchronous permanent-magnet motor, dual solenoid service and emergency disc brakes, mounted at the top of the hoistway. Governor: The governor shall be a tension type car-mounted governor. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Polyurethane type buffers shall be used. Hoistway Operating Devices: 1. 2. E. F. Emergency stop switch in the pit Terminal stopping switches.
B. C. D.
Positioning System: Consists of an encoder, reader box, and door zone vanes. Guide Rails and Attachments: Guide rails shall be Tee-section steel rails with brackets and fasteners. Side counterweight arrangements shall have a dual-purpose bracket that combines both counterweight guide rails, and one of the car guide rails to building fastening. Coated-Steel Belts: Polyurethane coated belts with high-tensile-grade, zinc-plated steel cords and a flat profile on the running surface and the backside of the belt. All driving sheaves and deflector sheaves should have a crowned profile to ensure center tracking of the belts. A continuous 24/7 monitoring system using resistance based technology has to be installed to continuously monitor the integrity of the coated steel belts and provide advanced notice of belt wear. Governor Rope: Governor rope shall be steel and shall consist of at least eight strands wound about a sisal core center. Fascia: Galvanized sheet steel shall be provided at the front of the hoistway. Hoistway Entrances: 1. Frames: Entrance frames shall be of bolted construction for complete onepiece unit assembly. All frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway and shall be of UL fire rated steel. Frame finish shall be factory painted. Sills shall be extruded aluminum, or bronze finish, or nickel silver finish.
G.
H. I. J.
2.
14 21 00 - 7
3. 4. 5.
Doors: Entrance doors shall be of metal construction with vertical channel reinforcements. Door finish shall be factory painted finish. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire rated for 1-1/2 hour Entrance marking plates: Entrance jambs shall be marked with 4 x 4 (102 mm x 102 mm) plates having raised floor markings with Braille located adjacent to the floor marking. Marking plates shall be provided on both sides of the entrance. Sight Guards: sight guards will be furnished with all doors painted to match with painted doors, painted black for stainless steel and gold satin doors.
6.
2.04
EQUIPMENT: CAR COMPONENTS A. Car frame and Safety: A car frame fabricated from formed or structural steel members shall be provided with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosures. The car safety shall be integral to the car frame and shall be Type "B", flexible guide clamp type. Cab: 1. 2. 3. 4. Car Front Finish: Painted Surface Car Door Finish: Satin Stainless Steel (Interior Car Door including car operating panel) Ceiling Type: Dropped flat steel ceiling factory Painted White Finish with 4 LED lights. Cab Wall Finishes Except at Door Side: Plastic laminate finish with stainless steel vertical decorative trim, satin stainless steel horizontal rail and brushed stainless steel finished base plate.
B.
C.
Emergency Car Lighting: An emergency power unit employing a 6-volt sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall be provided to illuminate the elevator car in the event of building power failure. Fan: A one-speed 120 VAC fan will be mounted to the ceiling to facilitate in-car air circulation, meeting A17.1 code requirements. The fan shall be rubber mounted to prevent the transmission of structural vibration and will include a baffle to diffuse audible noise. A switch shall be provided in the car-operating panel to control the fan. Threshold: Extruded Aluminum Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit. Guides: The car shall have 3 diameter roller guides at top and bottom and the counterweight shall have slide type guides at the top and the bottom. Platform: The car platform shall be constructed of metal. Load weighing device shall be mounted on the belts at the top of the hoistway. Certificate frame: Provide a Certificate frame with a satin stainless steel finish.
D.
E. F. G. H. I.
14 21 00 - 8
J.
The LED ceiling lights and the fan should automatically shut off when the system is not in use and be powered back up after a passenger calls the elevator and pushes a hall button.
2.05
EQUIPMENT: SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES A. Car Operating Panel: A car operating panel shall be provided which contains all push buttons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation. The car operating panel shall have a satin stainless steel. A car operating panel shall be furnished. It shall contain a bank of round stainless steel, mechanical LED illuminated buttons. Flush mounted to the panel and marked to correspond to the landings served. All buttons to have raised numerals and Braille markings with: 1. C. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1/8 satin stainless steel projecting button with blue illuminating halo Raised markings and Braille to the left hand side of each push-button. Car Position Indicator at the top of and integral to the car operating panel. Door open and door close buttons. Inspection key-switch. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity and car number. Help Button: The help button shall initiate two-way communication between the car and a location inside the building, switching over to another location if the call is unanswered, where personnel are available who can take the appropriate action. Visual indicators are provided for call initiation and call acknowledgement. Landing Passing Signal: A chime bell shall sound in the car to signal that the car is either stopping at or passing a floor served by the elevator. In car stop switch (toggle or key unless local code prohibits use) Firefighters hat (standard USA) Firefighters Phase II Key-switch (standard USA) Call Cancel Button (standard USA) The car operating panel shall be equipped with the following features:
B.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. D. E.
Car Position Indicator: A digital, LED car position indicator shall be integral to the car operating panel. Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation. Hall fixtures shall have an Integral Hall fixtures shall feature round stainless steel, mechanical buttons marked to correspond to the landings. Hall fixtures to be located in the entrance frame face. Buttons shall be in vertically mounted fixture. Fixture shall be satin stainless steel. 1. Button: Projecting button satin stainless steel button with blue LED illuminating halo.
14 21 00 - 9
F.
Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in the car entrance. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound.
PART 3. 3.01
EXECUTION PREPARATION A. Take field dimensions and examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.
3.02
INSTALLATION A. Installation of all elevator components except as specifically provided for elsewhere by others.
3.03
DEMONSTRATION A. The elevator contractor shall make a final check of each elevator operation with the Owner or Owners representative present prior to turning each elevator over for use. The elevator contractor shall determine that control systems and operating devices are functioning properly. END OF SECTION
14 21 00 - 10
Harris Consulting Engineers
SECTION 21 13 13 WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 1.03 A. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. Fire-protection valves. Fire-department connections. Sprinklers. Alarm devices. Manual control stations. Control panels. Pressure gages.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum. SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: working pressure. Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum
1.04 A.
1.05 A. B.
Delegated Design: Contractor shall design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. The existing sprinkler system shall be expanded to properly protect all new areas of construction. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: per UL listing.. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
C.
21 13 13 - 1
D.
Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7 . SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate existing sprinkler system components to remain. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.06 A. B.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional Fire Protection Engineer responsible for their preparation. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following: a. b. Lighting fixtures. Air outlets and inlets.
D.
E. F. G. H. I.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. Welding certificates. Fire-hydrant flow test report. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." Field quality-control reports. Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
J. K.
1.07 A.
21 13 13 - 2
B. C. D.
Welding Qualifications: Pressure Vessel Code.
Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. 2. 3. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems." NFPA 13R, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems in Residential Occupancies up to and Including Four Stories in Height." NFPA 24, "Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances."
1.08 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Architect's written permission.
1.09 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. EXTRA MATERIALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
1.10 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. PIPING MATERIALS Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
21 13 13 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
2.02 A. B.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Standard Weight, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E , Grade B . Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. Schedule 30, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135; ASTM A 795/A 795M, Type E ; or ASME B36.10M, wrought steel; with wall thickness not less than Schedule 30 and not more than Schedule 40. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. Schedule 10, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, Schedule 10 in NPS 5 (DN 125) and smaller; and NFPA 13-specified wall thickness in NPS 6 to NPS 10 (DN 150 to DN 250), plain end. Hybrid Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M, lightwall, with wall thickness less than Schedule 10 and greater than Schedule 5. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150. Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances: 1. 2. 3. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum. Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
C.
D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
L.
Steel Pressure-Seal Fittings: UL 213, FM-approved, 175-psig (1200-kPa) pressure rating with steel housing, rubber O-rings, and pipe stop; for use with fitting manufacturers' pressure-seal tools. PIPING JOINING MATERIALS Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick . 1. Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: gaskets. Full-face
2.03 A.
B. C.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 13 - 4
D. E.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, and Bolts and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200 kPa). Minimum Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Piping: 250 psig (1725 kPa) .
2.04 A.
B.
Ball Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends. Valves NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
C.
Bronze Butterfly Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL 1091. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). Body Material: Bronze. End Connections: Threaded.
D.
Iron Butterfly Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Standard: UL 1091. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. Style: Lug or wafer. End Connections: Grooved.
E.
Check Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Standard: UL 312. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum . Type: Swing check. Body Material: Cast iron. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
F.
Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL 262. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). Body Material: Bronze. End Connections: Threaded.
G.
Iron OS&Y Gate Valves: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 13 - 5
1. 2. 3. 4. H.
Standard: UL 262. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum . Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Indicating-Type Butterfly Valves: 1. 2. 3. Standard: UL 1091. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Valves NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: a. b. c. 4. Valve Type: Ball or butterfly. Body Material: Bronze. End Connections: Threaded.
Valves NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: a. b. c. Valve Type: Butterfly. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. End Connections: Flanged, grooved, or wafer.
I.
NRS Gate Valves: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Standard: UL 262. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum . Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange. Stem: Nonrising. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
2.05 A.
FIRE-DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS Exposed-Type, Fire-Department Connection: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Standard: UL 405. Type: Exposed, projecting, for wall mounting. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Body Material: Corrosion-resistant metal. Inlets: Brass with threads according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire-department sizes and threads. Include extension pipe nipples, brass lugged swivel connections, and check devices or clappers. Caps: Brass, lugged type, with gasket and chain. Escutcheon Plate: Round, brass, wall type. Outlet: Back, with pipe threads. Number of Inlets: Two . Escutcheon Plate Marking: Similar to " AUTO SPKR." Finish: Rough brass or bronze . Outlet Size: As Required.
2.06 A.
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Standard: UL 213. 21 13 13 - 6 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. B.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum . Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
Flow Detection and Test Assemblies: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum . Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve. Size: Same as connected piping. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
C.
Branch Line Testers: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Standard: UL 199. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). Body Material: Brass. Size: Same as connected piping. Inlet: Threaded. Drain Outlet: Threaded and capped. Branch Outlet: Threaded, for sprinkler.
D.
Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum . Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass. Size: Same as connected piping. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
E.
Adjustable Drop Nipples: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Standard: UL 1474. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum . Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM-rubber O-ring seals. Size: Same as connected piping. Length: Adjustable. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
F.
Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL 1474. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum . Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
21 13 13 - 7
2.07 A.
SPRINKLERS General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory"listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating for Residential Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Pressure Rating for High-Pressure Automatic Sprinklers: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum .
B.
Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199 . Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
C. D.
Sprinkler Finishes: Match Existing. Special Coatings: 1. 2. 3. Wax. Lead. Corrosion-resistant paint.
E.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. 2. Ceiling Mounting: Match Existing. Sidewall Mounting: Match Existing.
2.08 A. B.
ALARM DEVICES Alarm-device types shall match piping and equipment connections. Water-Motor-Operated Alarm: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Standard: UL 753. Type: Mechanically operated, with Pelton wheel. Alarm Gong: Cast aluminum with red-enamel factory finish. Size: 10-inch (250-mm) diameter. Components: Shaft length, bearings, and sleeve to suit wall construction. Inlet: NPS 3/4 (DN 20). Outlet: NPS 1 (DN 25) drain connection.
C.
Electrically Operated Alarm Bell: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL 464. Type: Vibrating, metal alarm bell. Size: 6-inch (150-mm) minimum-diameter. Finish: Red-enamel factory finish, suitable for outdoor use.
D.
Water-Flow Indicators: 21 13 13 - 8 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
1. 2. 3.
4. 5. 6. E.
Standard: UL 346. Water-Flow Detector: Electrically supervised. Components: Two single-pole, double-throw circuit switches for isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 A, 125-V ac and 0.25 A, 24-V dc; complete with factory-set, fieldadjustable retard element to prevent false signals and tamperproof cover that sends signal if removed. Type: Paddle operated. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa). Design Installation: Horizontal or vertical.
Pressure Switches: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL 346. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
F.
Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: UL 346. Type: Electrically supervised. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
2.09 A.
MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS Description: UL listed or FM approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening. CONTROL PANELS Description: Single-area, two-area, or single-area cross-zoned control panel as indicated, including NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 enclosure, detector, alarm, and solenoid-valve circuitry for operation of deluge valves. Panels contain power supply; battery charger; standby batteries; field-wiring terminal strip; electrically supervised solenoid valves and polarized fire-alarm bell; lamp test facility; single-pole, double-throw auxiliary alarm contacts; and rectifier. 1. 2. 3. Panels: UL listed and FM approved when used with thermal detectors and Class A detector circuit wiring. Electrical characteristics are 120-V ac, 60 Hz, with 24-V dc rechargeable batteries. Manual Control Stations: Electric operation, metal enclosure, labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening. Manual Control Stations: Hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening.
2.10 A.
21 13 13 - 9
2.11 A. B. C. D.
PRESSURE GAGES Standard: UL 393. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum . Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. 3.02 A. PREPARATION Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article. Report test results promptly and in writing. PIPING INSTALLATION Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for seismic-restraint device materials and installation in NFPA 13. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes. Install automatic (ball drip) drain valve at each check valve for fire-department connection, to drain piping between fire-department connection and check valve. Install drain piping to and spill over floor drain or to outside building. 21 13 13 - 10 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
K. L. M.
Install alarm devices in piping systems. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13. Install pressure gages on riser or feed main, at each sprinkler test connection, and at top of each standpipe. Include pressure gages with connection not less than NPS 1/4 (DN 8) and with soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and install where they will not be subject to freezing. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. JOINT CONSTRUCTION Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
N. O. P. Q. 3.03 A.
B. C. D. E. F. G.
H. I. J.
Twist-Locked Joints: Insert plain end of steel pipe into plain-end-pipe fitting. Rotate retainer lugs one-quarter turn or tighten retainer pin. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join lightwall steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 13 - 11
1. K.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints. Steel-Piping, Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join Schedule 5 steel pipe and steel pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources. Specialty Valves: 1. 2. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system. Alarm Valves: Include bypass check valve and retarding chamber drain-line connection.
L.
M. N.
3.04 A. B.
C. D.
3.05 A. B. 3.06 A.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid. IDENTIFICATION Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 21 13 13 - 12 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
3.07 A. B.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. C. D. 3.08 A. B. 3.09 A. 3.10 A.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. Coordinate with fire-pump tests. Operate as required. Verify that equipment hose threads are same as local fire-department equipment.
Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. CLEANING Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. DEMONSTRATION Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves . PIPING SCHEDULE Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with grooved ends; grooved-end fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control vales, instead of specified fittings. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; uncoated, plain-end-pipe fittings; and twist-locked joints. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints.
B. C.
D.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 6, shall be one of the following: 1. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 13 - 13
2. 3.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded joints. END OF SECTION
21 13 13 - 14
SECTION 21 13 16 DRY-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. B. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. Fire-protection valves. Sprinkler specialty pipe fittings. Sprinklers. Alarm devices. Manual control stations. Control panels. Pressure gages.
1.02 A.
Related Sections: 1. Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for wet-pipe sprinkler piping.
1.03 A.
DEFINITIONS Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Dry-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure 175 psig (1200 kPa) maximum. SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing compressed air. Opening of sprinklers releases compressed air and permits water pressure to open dry-pipe valve. Water then flows into piping and discharges from sprinklers that are open. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: working pressure. Listed for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum
1.04 A.
1.05 A. B.
Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. 21 13 16 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
2.
Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: a. Automobile Parking Areas (Over Hang): Ordinary Hazard, Group 1 .
3.
Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: 0.15 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area.
4. 5.
Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: Per UL listing. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: a. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated. According to NFPA 13 unless
6.
Total Combined Hose-Stream Demand Requirement: otherwise indicated: a. b.
Light-Hazard Occupancies: 100 gpm (6.3 L/s) for 30 minutes. Ordinary-Hazard Occupancies: 250 gpm (15.75 L/s) for 60 to 90 minutes.
C.
Seismic Performance: Sprinkler piping shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to NFPA 13 and ASCE/SEI 7. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Shop Drawings: For dry-pipe sprinkler systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.06 A. B.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3. 4. Domestic water piping. Compressed air piping. HVAC hydronic piping. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. b. Lighting fixtures. Air outlets and inlets.
1.07 A.
B. C.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. 21 13 16 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
D. E.
Fire-hydrant flow test report. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinkler specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project.
F. 1.08 A.
1.09 A.
1.10 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B. C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
1.11 A.
PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 16 - 3
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's written permission.
1.12 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. PIPING MATERIALS Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS Standard Weight, Galvanized-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. Galvanized-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. Galvanized, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860. Plain-End-Pipe Fittings: UL 213, ductile-iron body with retainer lugs that require one-quarter turn or screwed retainer pin to secure pipe in fitting. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. F. Anvil International, Inc. Shurjoint Piping Products.
2.02 A. B. C. D. E.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 2. 3. Anvil International, Inc. Corcoran Piping System Co. National Fittings, Inc. Shurjoint Piping Products. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Victaulic Company.
Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Galvanized, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching steel pipe. 21 13 16 - 4 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
4.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
2.03 A. 2.04 A.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. LISTED FIRE-PROTECTION VALVES General Requirements: 1. 2. Valves shall be UL listed or FM approved. Minimum Pressure Rating for Standard-Pressure Piping: 175 psig (1200 kPa).
B.
Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. 3. 4. 5. Anvil International, Inc. Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 1091 except with ball instead of disc. Valves NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. Valves NPS 2 and NPS 2-1/2 (DN 50 and DN 65): Bronze body with threaded ends or ductile-iron body with grooved ends. Valves NPS 3 (DN 80): Ductile-iron body with grooved ends.
C.
Bronze Butterfly Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fivalco Inc. Global Safety Products, Inc. Milwaukee Valve Company.
Standard: UL 1091. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). Body Material: Bronze. End Connections: Threaded.
D.
Check Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. AFAC Inc. American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. 21 13 16 - 5 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. u. v. w. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. E.
Anvil International, Inc. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Fire Protection Products, Inc. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. Matco-Norca. Metraflex, Inc. Milwaukee Valve Company. Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. NIBCO INC. Potter Roemer. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Shurjoint Piping Products. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. United Brass Works, Inc. Victaulic Company. Viking Corporation. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Standard: UL 312 Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum . Type: Swing check. Body Material: Cast iron. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
Bronze OS&Y Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. United Brass Works, Inc.
Standard: UL 262. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa). Body Material: Bronze. End Connections: Threaded.
F.
NRS Gate Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e.
American Cast Iron Pipe Company; Waterous Company Subsidiary. American Valve, Inc. Clow Valve Company; a division of McWane, Inc. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Division. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. JMA 127457 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow BID Documents: February 18, 2013 21 13 16 - 6 Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
f. g. h. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.05 A.
Mueller Co.; Water Products Division. NIBCO INC. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Standard: UL 262. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum . Body Material: Cast iron with indicator post flange. Stem: Nonrising. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
TRIM AND DRAIN VALVES General Requirements: 1. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
B.
Angle Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Fire Protection Products, Inc. United Brass Works, Inc.
C.
Ball Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. Anvil International, Inc. Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves. Fire-End & Croker Corporation. Fire Protection Products, Inc. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. Kitz Corporation. Metso Automation USA Inc. Milwaukee Valve Company. NIBCO INC. Potter Roemer. Red-White Valve Corporation. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Victaulic Company. Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
D.
Globe Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 16 - 7
a. b. 2.06 A.
Fire Protection Products, Inc. United Brass Works, Inc.
SPECIALTY VALVES General Requirements: 1. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating: a. 3. 4. 5. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. Size: Same as connected piping. End Connections: Flanged or grooved.
B.
Dry-Pipe Valves: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. 3. 4. AFAC Inc. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. Victaulic Company. Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL 260 Design: Differential-pressure type. Include UL 1486, quick-opening devices, trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. Air Compressor: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) b. c. d. Gast Manufacturing Inc. General Air Products, Inc, Viking Corporation.
5.
Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Motor Horsepower: Fractional. Power: 120-V ac, 60 Hz, single phase.
6.
Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 16 - 8
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) AFAC Inc. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. Victaulic Company. Viking Corporation.
b. c. d.
Standard: UL 260. Type: Automatic device to maintain minimum air pressure in piping. Include shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler piping, bypass valve for quick filling, pressure regulator or switch to maintain pressure, strainer, pressure ratings with 14- to 60-psig (95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range, and 175-psig (1200-kPa) outlet pressure.
2.07 A. B.
SPRINKLER SPECIALTY PIPE FITTINGS General Requirements for Dry-Pipe-System Fittings: UL listed for dry-pipe service. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Anvil International, Inc. National Fittings, Inc. Shurjoint Piping Products. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL 213. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. Type: Mechanical-T and -cross fittings. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded.
C.
Flow Detection and Test Assemblies: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. AGF Manufacturing Inc. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Victaulic Company. 21 13 16 - 9 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. D.
Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with orifice, sight glass, and integral test valve. Size: Same as connected piping. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
Sprinkler Inspector's Test Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. AGF Manufacturing Inc. Triple R Specialty. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Victaulic Company. Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Body Material: Cast- or ductile-iron housing with sight glass. Size: Same as connected piping. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
E.
Adjustable Drop Nipples: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. CECA, LLC. Corcoran Piping System Co. Merit Manufacturing; a division of Anvil International, Inc.
Standard: UL 1474. Pressure Rating: 250 psig (1725 kPa) minimum. Body Material: Steel pipe with EPDM O-ring seals. Size: Same as connected piping. Length: Adjustable. Inlet and Outlet: Threaded.
F.
Flexible, Sprinkler Hose Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. 2. Fivalco Inc. FlexHead Industries, Inc. Gateway Tubing, Inc.
Standard: UL 1474. 21 13 16 - 10 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
3. 4. 5. 2.08 A.
Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid. Pressure Rating: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler.
SPRINKLERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. AFAC Inc. Globe Fire Sprinkler Corporation. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. Venus Fire Protection Ltd. Victaulic Company. Viking Corporation.
B.
General Requirements: 1. 2. Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide," published by FM Global, listing. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum.
C.
Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. Characteristics: Nominal 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) orifice with discharge coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application.
D.
Sprinkler Finishes: 1. Chrome plated.
E.
Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed, flush, and recessed-type sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Chrome-plated steel, one piece, flat.
F.
Pressure Switches: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. AFAC Inc. Barksdale, Inc. Detroit Switch, Inc. Potter Electric Signal Company. System Sensor; a Honeywell company. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. United Electric Controls Co. 21 13 16 - 11 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
h. 2. 3. 4. 5. G.
Viking Corporation.
Standard: UL 346. Type: Electrically supervised water-flow switch with retard feature. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Design Operation: Rising pressure signals water flow.
Valve Supervisory Switches: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. 2. 3. 4. 5. Fire-Lite Alarms; a Honeywell company. Kennedy Valve; a division of McWane, Inc. Potter Electric Signal Company. System Sensor; a Honeywell company.
Standard: UL 346. Type: Electrically supervised. Components: Single-pole, double-throw switch with normally closed contacts. Design: Signals that controlled valve is in other than fully open position.
2.09 A.
MANUAL CONTROL STATIONS Description: UL listed or FM Global approved, hydraulic operation, with union, NPS 1/2 (DN 15) pipe nipple, and bronze ball valve. Include metal enclosure labeled "MANUAL CONTROL STATION" with operating instructions and cover held closed by breakable strut to prevent accidental opening. PRESSURE GAGES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. AMETEK, Inc.; U.S. Gauge Division. Ashcroft, Inc. Brecco Corporation. WIKA Instrument Corporation.
2.10 A.
B. C. D. E. F.
Standard: UL 393. Dial Size: 3-1/2- to 4-1/2-inch (90- to 115-mm) diameter. Pressure Gage Range: 0 to 250 psig (0 to 1725 kPa) minimum. Water System Piping Gage: Include "WATER" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face. Air System Piping Gage: Include retard feature and "AIR" or "AIR/WATER" label on dial face.
21 13 16 - 12
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. 3.02 A. PREPARATION Perform fire-hydrant flow test according to NFPA 13 and NFPA 291. Use results for system design calculations required in "Quality Assurance" Article. Report test results promptly and in writing. PIPING INSTALLATION Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans.
B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for installation of sprinkler piping. Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for seismic-restraint device materials and installation. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections. Install "Inspector's Test Connections" in sprinkler system piping, complete with shutoff valve, and sized and located according to NFPA 13. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. Install sprinkler control valves, test assemblies, and drain risers adjacent to standpipes when sprinkler piping is connected to standpipes. Connect compressed-air supply to dry-pipe sprinkler piping. Connect air compressor to the following piping and wiring: 1. 2. 3. Pressure gages and controls. Electrical power system. Fire-alarm devices, including low-pressure alarm.
L. M. N.
Install alarm devices in piping systems. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements in NFPA 13 for hanger materials. Drain dry-pipe sprinkler piping. 21 13 16 - 13 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
O. P.
Pressurize and check dry-pipe sprinkler system piping and air compressors. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for Fire-Suppression Piping." Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 210517 "Sleeves and Sleeve Seals for FireSuppression Piping." Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210518 "Escutcheons for Fire-Suppression Piping." JOINT CONSTRUCTION Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger end connections. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged.
Q.
R.
3.03 A.
B. C. D. E. F.
G.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION Install listed fire-protection valves, trim and drain valves, specialty valves and trim, controls, and specialties according to NFPA 13 and authorities having jurisdiction. Install listed fire-protection shutoff valves supervised open, located to control sources of water supply except from fire-department connections. Install permanent identification signs indicating portion of system controlled by each valve. 21 13 16 - 14 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
H.
3.04 A. B.
C. D.
Install check valve in each water-supply connection. Install backflow preventers instead of check valves in potable-water-supply sources. Specialty Valves: 1. 2. General Requirements: Install in vertical position for proper direction of flow, in main supply to system. Dry-Pipe Valves: Install trim sets for air supply, drain, priming level, alarm connections, ball drip valves, pressure gages, priming chamber attachment, and fill-line attachment. a. b. Install air compressor and compressed-air supply piping. Air-Pressure Maintenance Device: Install shutoff valves to permit servicing without shutting down sprinkler system; bypass valve for quick system filling; pressure regulator or switch to maintain system pressure; strainer; pressure ratings with 14to 60-psig (95- to 410-kPa) adjustable range; and 175-psig (1200-kPa) maximum inlet pressure. Install compressed-air supply piping from building's compressed-air piping system.
c. 3.05 A. B. C. 3.06 A. B.
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. Install dry-type sprinklers with water supply from heated space. sidewall, wet-type sprinklers in areas subject to freezing. Do not install pendent or
Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid. IDENTIFICATION Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. Energize circuits to electrical equipment and devices. Start and run air compressors. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required.
3.07 A. B.
C.
Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. 21 13 16 - 15 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
D. 3.08 A. B. 3.09 A.
Prepare test and inspection reports. CLEANING Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. PIPING SCHEDULE Piping between Fire-Department Connections and Check Valves: Galvanized, standard-weight steel pipe with threaded ends; cast-iron threaded fittings; and threaded grooved ends; groovedend fittings; grooved-end-pipe couplings; and grooved joints. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control vales, instead of specified fittings. Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. 2. 3. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with plain ends; plain-end-pipe fittings; and twistlocked joints. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
3.10 A.
B. C.
D.
Standard-pressure, dry-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100), shall be one of the following: 1. 2. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
3.11 A.
SPRINKLER SCHEDULE Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications: 1. 2. 3. 4. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Dry recessed sprinklers. Wall Mounting: Dry sidewall sprinklers. Spaces Subject to Freezing: Upright sprinklers Dry pendent sprinklers.
B.
Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
21 13 16 - 16
1. 2. 3.
Flush Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with painted white escutcheon. Recessed Sprinklers: Bright chrome, with bright chrome escutcheon. Upright, Pendent, and Sidewall Sprinklers: Chrome plated in finished spaces exposed to view; rough bronze in unfinished spaces not exposed to view; wax coated where exposed to acids, chemicals, or other corrosive fumes. END OF SECTION
21 13 16 - 17
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dry-Pipe Sprinkler Systems
SECTION 22 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. Metal pipe hangers and supports. Trapeze pipe hangers.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Design: Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for plumbing piping and equipment shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to ASCE/SEI 7 . 1. 2. 3. Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. Design seismic-restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
1.05 A. B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details and include calculations for the following; include Product Data for components: 1. Trapeze pipe hangers. 22 05 29 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment
2. C.
Metal framing systems.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For trapeze hangers indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. 2. Detail fabrication and assembly of trapeze hangers. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for designing trapeze hangers.
1.06 A. 1.07 A. B.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Welding certificates. QUALITY ASSURANCE Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. B. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel .
Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. 2. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel .
2.02 A.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
22 05 29 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment
2.03 A. B.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS Structural Steel: galvanized. ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. 2. Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5-MPa), 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. 2. C. D. E. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
B.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. Insulated Piping: 22 05 29 - 3 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment
F. G.
H. I. J.
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. b. c. Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
2.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles if insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
3.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weightdistribution plate for pipe NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger if pipe is installed on rollers.
4.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. b. c. d. e. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2 (DN 8 to DN 90): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.048 inch (1.22 mm) thick. NPS 4 (DN 100): 12 inches (305 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. NPS 5 and NPS 6 (DN 125 and DN 150): 18 inches (457 mm) long and 0.06 inch (1.52 mm) thick. NPS 8 to NPS 14 (DN 200 to DN 350): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.075 inch (1.91 mm) thick. NPS 16 to NPS 24 (DN 400 to DN 600): 24 inches (610 mm) long and 0.105 inch (2.67 mm) thick.
5. 6. 3.02 A. B. 3.03 A. B.
Pipes NPS 8 (DN 200) and Larger: Include wood or reinforced calcium-silicate-insulation inserts of length at least as long as protective shield. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation.
ADJUSTING Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches. HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment
22 05 29 - 4
C. D. E.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports or metal trapeze pipe hangers for general service applications. and attachments
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. END OF SECTION
22 05 29 - 5
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Hangers And Supports For Plumbing Piping And Equipment
SECTION 22 07 19 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes insulating the following plumbing piping services: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 1.03 A. B. Domestic cold-water piping. Domestic hot-water piping. Domestic recirculating hot-water piping. Roof drains and rainwater leaders. Supplies and drains for handicap-accessible lavatories and sinks.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied, if any). Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. Detail insulation application at pipe expansion joints for each type of insulation. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, flanges, valves, and specialties for each type of insulation. Detail removable insulation at piping specialties, equipment connections, and access panels. Detail application of field-applied jackets.
1.04 A. B.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction indicating, interpreting, and certifying test results for compliance of insulation materials, sealers, attachments, cements, and jackets, with requirements indicated. Include dates of tests and test methods employed. Field quality-control reports.
C.
22 07 19 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Plumbing Piping Insulation
1.05 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. 2. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
B.
C.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for miscellaneous components: 1. Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
1.06 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application. Before preparing piping Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. SCHEDULING Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
1.07 A. B.
1.08 A.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. INSULATION MATERIALS Comply with requirements indicated on the drawings. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 07 19 - 2
B. C. D.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. PROTECTIVE SHIELDING GUARDS Protective Shielding Pipe Covers, : 1. Description: Manufactured plastic wraps for covering plumbing fixture hot- and coldwater supplies and trap and drain piping. Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
2.02 A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. 2. B. 3.02 A. B. C. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application. Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing. requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation. Comply with
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water; if insulating cements are to be in contact with stainless-steel surfaces, use demineralized water. GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties. Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. 22 07 19 - 3 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Plumbing Piping Insulation
3.03 A. B. C.
D. E. F. G. H. I. J.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2. 3. 4. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K. L.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. 2. 3. Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Install insulation with longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. a. 4. 5. For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M. N. O.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. 22 07 19 - 4 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Plumbing Piping Insulation
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Vibration-control devices. Testing agency labels and stamps. Nameplates and data plates. Cleanouts.
3.04 A.
PENETRATIONS Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations. 1. 2. Install insulation continuously through roof
3. 4. B.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. 2. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
3. 4. C. D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions. 1. Install insulation
Comply with requirements in Division 7 for firestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
E.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. 2. Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations. Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Division 7
3.05 A. B.
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles. Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 07 19 - 5
1. 2.
3.
4.
5.
6. 7.
8.
9. C.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation. Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with adhesive. Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets, valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor barrier. Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker. Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour. For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation facing using PVC tape. Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match size and color of pipe labels.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps, test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant. Install removable insulation covers at locations indicated. following: 1. Installation shall conform to the
D.
Make removable flange and union insulation from sectional pipe insulation of same thickness as that on adjoining pipe. Install same insulation jacket as adjoining pipe insulation. 2. When flange and union covers are made from sectional pipe insulation, extend insulation from flanges or union long at least two times the insulation thickness over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of flange or union. Secure flange cover in place with stainlesssteel or aluminum bands. Select band material compatible with insulation and jacket. 3. Construct removable valve insulation covers in same manner as for flanges, except divide the two-part section on the vertical center line of valve body. JMA 127457 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow BID Documents: February 18, 2013 22 07 19 - 6 Plumbing Piping Insulation
4.
5.
When covers are made from block insulation, make two halves, each consisting of mitered blocks wired to stainless-steel fabric. Secure this wire frame, with its attached insulation, to flanges with tie wire. Extend insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm) over adjacent pipe insulation on each side of valve. Fill space between flange or union cover and pipe insulation with insulating cement. Finish cover assembly with insulating cement applied in two coats. After first coat is dry, apply and trowel second coat to a smooth finish. Unless a PVC jacket is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules, finish exposed surfaces with a metal jacket.
3.06 A. B. C.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: inspections. Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and
Perform tests and inspections. All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. END OF SECTION 22 07 19
22 07 19 - 7
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Plumbing Piping Insulation
SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. Under-building-slab and aboveground domestic water pipes, tubes, and fittings inside buildings. Encasement for piping.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For transition fittings and dielectric fittings. FIELD CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Water Service: Do not interrupt water service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary water service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of water service. Do not interrupt water service without Architect's written permission.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. PIPING MATERIALS Comply with requirements on drawings for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14 and NSF 61. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
22 11 16 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Domestic Water Piping
2.02 A. B. C. D. E. F.
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) and ASTM B 88, Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C) water tube, drawn temper. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K (ASTM B 88M, Type A) and ASTM B 88, Type L (ASTM B 88M, Type B) water tube, annealed temper. Cast-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Copper Unions: 1. 2. 3. 4. MSS SP-123. Cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body. Ball-and-socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces. Solder-joint or threaded ends.
G.
Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings: 1. 2. Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, Oring seal in each end. Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100): Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber, O-ring seal in each end.
H.
Copper-Tube, Extruded-Tee Connections: 1. Description: Tee formed in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014.
I.
Appurtenances for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: 1. 2. Bronze Fittings for Grooved-End, Copper Tubing: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M) copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze castings. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: a. b. c. d. e. Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to AWWA C606. Ferrous housing sections. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. Bolts and nuts. Minimum Pressure Rating: 300 psig (2070 kPa).
2.03 A.
DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: 1. 2. AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
B.
Standard-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: 22 11 16 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Domestic Water Piping
1. 2. C.
AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
Compact-Pattern, Mechanical-Joint Fittings: 1. 2. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
D.
Push-on-Joint, Ductile-Iron Pipe: 1. 2. AWWA C151/A21.51. Push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.
E.
Standard-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: 1. 2. AWWA C110/A21.10, ductile or gray iron. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
F.
Compact-Pattern, Push-on-Joint Fittings: 1. 2. AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile iron. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
G. H.
Plain-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51. Appurtenances for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: 1. 2. Fittings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron castings or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron castings with dimensions that match pipe. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron-Piping: a. b. c. d. AWWA C606 for ductile-iron-pipe dimensions. Ferrous housing sections. EPDM-rubber gaskets suitable for hot and cold water. Bolts and nuts.
2.04 A.
CPVC PIPING CPVC Pipe: ASTM F 441/F 441M, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. 1. 2. CPVC Socket Fittings: ASTM F 438 for Schedule 40 and ASTM F 439 for Schedule 80. CPVC Threaded Fittings: ASTM F 437, Schedule 80.
B. C. 2.05 A.
CPVC Piping System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, pipe and socket fittings. CPVC Tubing System: ASTM D 2846/D 2846M, SDR 11, tube and socket fittings. PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40 and Schedule 80. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Domestic Water Piping
22 11 16 - 3
B. C. 2.06 A.
PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2466 for Schedule 40 and ASTM D 2467 for Schedule 80. PVC Schedule 80 Threaded Fittings: ASTM D 2464. PIPING JOINING MATERIALS Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: 1. 2. AWWA C110/A21.10, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick or ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free unless otherwise indicated. Full-face or ring type unless otherwise indicated.
B. C. D. E. F.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Flux: ASTM B 813, water flushable. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8/A5.8M, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for generalduty brazing unless otherwise indicated. Solvent Cements for Joining CPVC Piping and Tubing: ASTM F 493. 1. 2. 3. CPVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 490 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to
G.
Solvent Cements for Joining PVC Piping: ASTM F 656. 1. 2. 3.
PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Solvent cement and adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
H.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gaskets, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. ENCASEMENT FOR PIPING Standard: ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105/A21.5.
2.07 A.
22 11 16 - 4
2.08 A. B.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. Dielectric Unions: 1. 2. 3. Standard: ASSE 1079. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C) . End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
C.
Dielectric Flanges: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard: ASSE 1079. Factory-fabricated, bolted, companion-flange assembly. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C) . End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous; threaded solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. EARTHWORK Comply with requirements in other Divisions for excavating, trenching, and backfilling. PIPING INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41. Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve inside the building at each domestic water-service entrance. Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting. Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves. Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and plumb. Install seismic restraints on piping. Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.
22 11 16 - 5
J.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and coordinate with other services occupying that space. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher than the system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and specialty. Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping for each plumbing pump and packaged booster pump. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. JOINT CONSTRUCTION Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before assembly. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. 2. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Comply with CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," "Brazed
K. L. M. N. O. P. Q. R. S. T. 3.03 A. B. C.
D. E. F.
Brazed Joints for Copper Tubing: Joints" chapter.
Soldered Joints for Copper Tubing: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook." Pressure-Sealed Joints for Copper Tubing: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools recommended by fitting manufacturer.
22 11 16 - 6
G.
Push-on Joints for Copper Tubing: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting tube to measured depth. Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating stop, and braze branch tube into collar. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Copper Tubing: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Roll groove ends of tubes. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of tubes or tube and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in tubing grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. Joint Construction for Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Cut round-bottom grooves in ends of pipe at gasket-seat dimension required for specified (flexible or rigid) joint. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. Joint Construction for Grooved-End Steel Piping: Make joints according to AWWA C606. Square cut groove ends of pipe as specified. Lubricate and install gasket over ends of pipes or pipe and fitting. Install coupling housing sections over gasket with keys seated in piping grooves. Install and tighten housing bolts. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. Joint Construction for Solvent-Cemented Plastic Piping: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings according to the following: 1. 2. 3. Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent cements. Apply primer. CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix. PVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
H.
I.
J.
K.
L.
M.
N.
Joints for Dissimilar-Material Piping: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. DIELECTRIC FITTING INSTALLATION Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and tubing. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Use dielectric .
3.04 A. B. C. D. 3.05 A.
Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4 (DN 65 to DN 100) : Use dielectric flanges . Dielectric Fittings for NPS 5 (DN 125) and Larger: Use dielectric flange kits. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Comply with requirements for pipe hanger, support products, and Section 22 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." 22 11 16 - 7 installation in
1. 2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or 42, clamps. Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: a. b. c. 100 Feet (30 m) and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m): MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers. Longer Than 100 Feet (30 m) if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
3. 4. B. C.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet (30 m) or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor. Rod diameter may be reduced one size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch (10 mm). CONNECTIONS Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. When installing piping adjacent to equipment and machines, allow space for service and maintenance. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and connect to the following: 1. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections. 2. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than that required by plumbing code. 3. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water-supply piping as indicated, but not smaller than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger. IDENTIFICATION Identify system components. Label pressure piping with system operating pressure. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Piping Inspections: a. Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.06 A. B. C. D.
3.07 A. B. 3.08 A.
22 11 16 - 8
b.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least one day before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction: 1) 2) Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing in after roughing in and before setting fixtures. Final Inspection: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified in "Piping Tests" Subparagraph below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
c. d. 2.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass tests or inspections, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
Piping Tests: a. b. c. d. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound and that piping is full of water. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig (345 kPa) above operating pressure, without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow it to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. Repair leaks and defects with new materials, and retest piping or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
e. f. B. C. 3.09 A.
Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. ADJUSTING Perform the following adjustments before operation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs. Open shutoff valves to fully open position. Open throttling valves to proper setting. Adjust balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide adequate flow. a. b. 5. 6. Manually adjust ball-type balancing valves in hot-water-circulation return piping to provide hot-water flow in each branch. Adjust calibrated balancing valves to flows indicated.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and for temporary sealing of piping during installation. Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Domestic Water Piping
22 11 16 - 9
7. 8. 3.10 A.
Remove filter cartridges from housings and verify that cartridges are as specified for application where used and are clean and ready for use. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows: 1. 2. Purge new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired before using. Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction; if methods are not prescribed, use procedures described in either AWWA C651 or AWWA C652 or follow procedures described below: a. b. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. Fill and isolate system according to either of the following: 1) 2) c. d. e. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm (50 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 200 ppm (200 mg/L) of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from system after the standing time. Repeat procedures if biological examination shows contamination. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction.
B. C. 3.11 A. B. C.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities. Include copies of watersample approvals from authorities having jurisdiction. Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. PIPING SCHEDULE Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used in applications below unless otherwise indicated. Flanges and unions may be used for aboveground piping joints unless otherwise indicated. Fitting Option: copper tubing. Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
3.12 A. B. C.
VALVE SCHEDULE Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Use check valves to maintain correct direction of domestic water flow to and from equipment. Iron grooved-end valves may be used with grooved-end piping.
22 11 16 - 10
END OF SECTION
22 11 16 - 11
SECTION 22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 1.03 A. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
1.02 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa).
B.
Seismic Performance: Soil, waste, and vent piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. QUALITY ASSURANCE Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping Systems Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-dwv" for plastic drain, waste, and vent piping and "NSF-sewer" for plastic sewer piping. PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Sanitary Waste Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1.
1.04 A. 1.05 A. B.
1.06 A.
Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sanitary waste service. JMA 127457 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow BID Documents: February 18, 2013 22 13 16 - 1 Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
2.
Do not proceed with interruption of sanitary waste service without Architect's permission.
written
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. PIPING MATERIALS Comply with requirements on Drawings for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Piping: 1. 2. 3. B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, mechanical-joint, ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
2.02 A.
Ductile-Iron, Push-on-Joint Piping: 1. 2. 3. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, push-on-joint ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
C.
Ductile-Iron, Grooved-Joint Piping: 1. 2. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51 with round-cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606. Ductile-Iron-Pipe Appurtenances: a. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching AWWA C110/A 21.10 ductile-iron pipe or AWWA C153/A 21.53 ductile-iron fittings and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber center-leg gasket suitable for hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts.
b.
2.03 A. B. C.
ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
22 13 16 - 2
D.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 1. 2. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.04 A. B. C. D.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1. 2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. 2. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. EARTH MOVING Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in other Divisions. PIPING INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
B.
22 13 16 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Install piping to permit valve servicing. Install piping at indicated slopes. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install piping to allow application of insulation. Install seismic restraints on piping. Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if two fixtures are installed back to back or side by side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
L.
M. N. O. P. Q.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows: 1. Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
R.
Plumbing Specialties: 1. 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building sanitary sewers in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in sanitary drainage force-main piping. Install drains in sanitary drainage gravity-flow piping. 22 13 16 - 4 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
S. T. U. V. 3.03 A. B. C.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. CONNECTIONS Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. Connect drainage and vent piping to the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment: Connect atmospheric vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by authorities having jurisdiction. Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. Install test tees (wall cleanouts) in conductors near floor and floor cleanouts with cover flush with floor. Equipment: Connect drainage piping as indicated. Provide shutoff valve if indicated and union for each connection. Use flanges instead of unions for connections NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
D. E.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3.04 A. 3.05 A.
IDENTIFICATION Identify exposed sanitary waste and vent piping. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
22 13 16 - 5
2. B. C. D.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. 2. 3. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping except outside leaders on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug vent-stack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg (250 Pa). Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
4.
5. 6. 3.06 A. B. C.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION
22 13 16 - 6
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sanitary Waste And Vent Piping
SECTION 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 1.03 A. Pipe, tube, and fittings.
1.02 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working pressure unless otherwise indicated: 1. Storm Drainage Piping: 10-foot head of water (30 kPa) .
B.
Seismic Performance: Storm drainage piping and support and installation shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 . ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Seismic Qualification Certificates: For storm drainage piping, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. 2. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
B. 1.06 A.
Field quality-control reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. 22 14 13 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Storm Drainage Piping
B.
Comply with NSF/ANSI 14, "Plastics Piping System Components and Related Materials," for plastic piping components. Include marking with "NSF-drain" for plastic drain piping and "NSFsewer" for plastic sewer piping. PROJECT CONDITIONS Interruption of Existing Storm-Drainage Service: Do not interrupt service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of stormdrainage service. Do not proceed with interruption of storm-drainage service without Architect's written permission.
1.07 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. PIPING MATERIALS Comply with requirements on Drawings for applications of pipe, tube, fitting materials, and joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes. HUB-AND-SPIGOT, CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service classes. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber. Calking Materials: ASTM B 29, pure lead and oakum or hemp fiber. DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS Ductile-Iron, Mechanical-Joint Piping: 1. 2. 3. B. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with mechanical-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, mechanical-joint ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111/A21.11, ductile- or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.
2.02 A. B. C. 2.03 A.
Ductile-Iron, Push-On-Joint Piping: 1. 2. 3. Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51, with push-on-joint bell and plain spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated. Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110/A21.10, push-on-joint ductile- or gray-iron standard pattern or AWWA C153/A21.53, ductile-iron compact pattern. Gaskets: AWWA C111/A21.11, rubber.
C.
Ductile-Iron, Grooved-Joint Piping: 22 14 13 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Storm Drainage Piping
1. 2.
Ductile-Iron Pipe: AWWA C151/A21.51 with round-cut-grooved ends according to AWWA C606. Ductile-Iron-Pipe Appurtenances: a. Grooved-End, Ductile-Iron Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron castings with dimensions matching AWWA C110/A21.10 ductile-iron pipe or AWWA C153/A21.53 ductile-iron fittings and complying with AWWA C606 for grooved ends. Grooved Mechanical Couplings for Ductile-Iron Pipe: ASTM F 1476, Type I. Include ferrous housing sections with continuous curved keys; EPDM-rubber center-leg gasket suitable for hot and cold water; and bolts and nuts.
b.
2.04 A. B. C. D.
ABS PIPE AND FITTINGS Solid-Wall ABS Pipe: ASTM D 2661, Schedule 40. Cellular-Core ABS Pipe: ASTM F 628, Schedule 40. ABS Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2661, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2235. 1. 2. ABS solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 325 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
2.05 A. B. C. D.
PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS Solid-Wall PVC Pipe: ASTM D 2665, drain, waste, and vent. Cellular-Core PVC Pipe: ASTM F 891, Schedule 40. PVC Socket Fittings: ASTM D 2665, made to ASTM D 3311, drain, waste, and vent patterns and to fit Schedule 40 pipe. Adhesive Primer: ASTM F 656. 1. 2. Adhesive primer shall have a VOC content of 550 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
E.
Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 1. 2. PVC solvent cement shall have a VOC content of 510 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Solvent cement shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Storm Drainage Piping
22 14 13 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. 3.02 A. EARTH MOVING Comply with requirements for excavating, trenching, and backfilling specified in other Divisions. PIPING INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations from layout are approved on coordination drawings. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Install piping at indicated slopes. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Install seismic restraints on piping. Make changes in direction for storm drainage piping using appropriate branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Lay buried building storm drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull past each joint as completed. Install storm drainage piping at the following minimum slopes unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. L. Building Storm Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 (DN 80) and smaller; 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 (DN 100) and larger. Horizontal Storm-Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
B. C.
D. E. F. G. H. I.
J.
K.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook," Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings." 1. Install encasement on underground piping according to ASTM A 674 or AWWA C105. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Storm Drainage Piping
22 14 13 - 4
M. N. O. P. Q.
Install aboveground ABS piping according to ASTM D 2661. Install aboveground PVC piping according to ASTM D 2665. Install underground ABS and PVC piping according to ASTM D 2321. Install engineered drain specialties and storm drainage piping in locations indicated. Plumbing Specialties: 1. 2. Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building storm drains connect to building storm sewers in storm drainage gravity-flow piping. Install cleanout fitting with closure plug inside the building in storm drainage force-main piping. Install drains in storm drainage gravity-flow piping.
R. S. T. U. 3.03 A. B. C. D. E.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. CONNECTIONS Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. Connect interior storm drainage piping to exterior storm drainage piping. Use transition fitting to join dissimilar piping materials. Connect storm drainage piping to roof drains and storm drainage specialties. Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of equipment. Make connections according to the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. Install unions, in piping NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment. Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment.
3.04 A. 3.05 A.
IDENTIFICATION Identify exposed storm drainage piping. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Storm Drainage Piping
22 14 13 - 5
1. 2. B. C. D.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in after roughing-in. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction. Test storm drainage piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction or, in absence of published procedures, as follows: 1. 2. 3. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested. Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced storm drainage piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed before it was tested. Test Procedure: Test storm drainage piping on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water (30 kPa). From 15 minutes before inspection starts until completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect joints for leaks. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
4. 5. 3.06 A. B. C.
CLEANING Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops. END OF SECTION
22 14 13 - 6
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Storm Drainage Piping
SECTION 22 42 13.13 COMMERCIAL WATER CLOSETS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 1.03 A. Water closets. Flushometer valves. Toilet seats.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for water closets. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.04 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals. For flushometer valves to include in operation and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. 2.02 A. FLOOR-MOUNTED, BOTTOM-OUTLET WATER CLOSETS Water Closets Refer to Drawings. . TOILET SEATS Toilet Seats Refer to Drawings:
22 42 13.13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Water Closets
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. 3.02 A. EXAMINATION Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before water-closet installation. Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where water closets will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Water-Closet Installation: 1. 2. 3. B. Install level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. Install floor-mounted water closets on bowl-to-drain connecting fitting attachments to piping or building substrate. Install accessible, wall-mounted water closets at mounting height for handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
Support Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets. Use carrier supports with waste-fitting assembly and seal. Install floor-mounted, back-outlet water closets attached to building floor substrate, onto waste-fitting seals; and attach to support. Install wall-mounted, back-outlet water-closet supports with waste-fitting assembly and waste-fitting seals; and affix to building substrate.
C.
Flushometer-Valve Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Install flushometer-valve, water-supply fitting on each supply to each water closet. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible water closets with handle mounted on open side of water closet. Install actuators in locations that are easy for people with disabilities to reach. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
D. E.
Install toilet seats on water closets. Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation: 1. 2. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
F.
22 05 18Joint Sealing: 1. 2. 3. Seal joints between water closets and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to water-closet color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants." 22 42 13.13 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Water Closets
3.03 A. B. C. D. 3.04 A. B. C. 3.05 A. B. C.
CONNECTIONS Connect water closets with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match water closets. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping." Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." Where installing piping adjacent to water closets, allow space for service and maintenance. ADJUSTING Operate and adjust water closets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning water closets, fittings, and controls. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean water closets and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Install protective covering for installed water closets and fittings. Do not allow use of water closets for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION
22 42 13.13 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Water Closets
SECTION 22 42 13.16 COMMERCIAL URINALS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.03 A. Urinals. Flushometer valves.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for urinals. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.04 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals. For flushometer valves to include in operation and
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. URINALS Urinals Refer to Drawings
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before urinal installation. 22 42 13.16 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Urinals
B. C. 3.02 A.
Examine walls and floors for suitable conditions where urinals will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Urinal Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install urinals level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. Install wall-hung, back-outlet urinals onto waste fitting seals and attached to supports. Install wall-hung, bottom-outlet urinals with tubular waste piping attached to supports. Install accessible, wall-mounted urinals at mounting height for the handicapped/elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1.
B.
Support Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung urinals. Use off-floor carriers with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet urinals. Use carriers without waste fitting for urinals with tubular waste piping. Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible urinals.
C.
Flushometer-Valve Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install flushometer-valve water-supply fitting on each supply to each urinal. Attach supply piping to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures. Install lever-handle flushometer valves for accessible urinals with handle mounted on open side of compartment. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
D.
Wall Flange and Escutcheon Installation: 1. 2. 3. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Install deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Comply with escutcheon requirements specified in Section 22 05 18 "Escutcheons for Plumbing Piping."
E.
Joint Sealing: 1. 2. 3. Seal joints between urinals and walls and floors using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to urinal color. Comply with sealant requirements specified in Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants."
3.03 A. B. C.
CONNECTIONS Connect urinals with water supplies and soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match urinals. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping." Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." 22 42 13.16 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Urinals
D. 3.04 A. B. C. 3.05 A. B. C.
Where installing piping adjacent to urinals, allow space for service and maintenance. ADJUSTING Operate and adjust urinals and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning urinals, fittings, and controls. Adjust water pressure at flushometer valves to produce proper flow. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms. CLEANING AND PROTECTION Clean urinals and fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Install protective covering for installed urinals and fittings. Do not allow use of urinals for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION
22 42 13.16 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Urinals
SECTION 22 42 16.13 COMMERCIAL LAVATORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.03 A. Lavatories. Faucets.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for lavatories. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals. 1. For lavatories and faucets to include in operation and
In addition to items specified in Division 1 include the following: a. Servicing and adjustments of automatic faucets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. LAVATORIES Lavatory : Refer to Drawings 22 42 16.13 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Lavatories
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. 3.02 A. B. C. D. E. F. EXAMINATION Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before lavatory installation. Examine counters and walls for suitable conditions where lavatories will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Install lavatories level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-mounted lavatories. Install accessible wall-mounted lavatories at handicapped/elderly mounting height for people with disabilities or the elderly, according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Seal joints between lavatories, counters, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible lavatories. Comply with requirements in Section 22 07 19 "Plumbing Piping Insulation." CONNECTIONS Connect fixtures with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping." Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." ADJUSTING Operate and adjust lavatories and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning lavatories, fittings, and controls. Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow. Install fresh batteries in battery-powered, electronic-sensor mechanisms.
3.03 A. B. C.
3.04 A. B. C.
22 42 16.13 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Lavatories
3.05 A. B. C. D.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION After completing installation of lavatories, inspect and repair damaged finishes. Clean lavatories, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Provide protective covering for installed lavatories and fittings. Do not allow use of lavatories for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION
22 42 16.13 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Lavatories
SECTION 22 42 16.16 COMMERCIAL SINKS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 1.03 A. Service basins.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. 2. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for sinks. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics and furnished specialties and accessories.
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Counter cutout templates for mounting of counter-mounted lavatories. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For sinks to include in maintenance manuals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. SERVICE BASINS Service Basins : Refer to Drawings.
22 42 16.16 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Sinks
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. 3.02 A. B. C. D. E. EXAMINATION Examine roughing-in of water supply and sanitary drainage and vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before sink installation. Examine walls, floors, and counters for suitable conditions where sinks will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Install sinks level and plumb according to roughing-in drawings. Install supports, affixed to building substrate, for wall-hung sinks. Install accessible wall-mounted sinks at handicapped/elderly mounting height according to ICC/ANSI A117.1. Set floor-mounted sinks in leveling bed of cement grout. Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each sink faucet. 1. 2. F. G. H. Exception: Use ball, gate, or globe valves if supply stops are not specified with sink. Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
Install wall flanges or escutcheons at piping wall penetrations in exposed, finished locations. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings. Seal joints between sinks and counters, floors, and walls using sanitary-type, one-part, mildewresistant silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color. Install protective shielding pipe covers and enclosures on exposed supplies and waste piping of accessible sinks. Comply with requirements in Section 22 07 19 "Plumbing Piping Insulation." CONNECTIONS Connect sinks with water supplies, stops, and risers, and with traps, soil, waste, and vent piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Comply with water piping requirements specified in Section 22 11 16 "Domestic Water Piping." Comply with soil and waste piping requirements specified in Section 22 13 16 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping." ADJUSTING Operate and adjust sinks and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning sinks, fittings, and controls. 22 42 16.16 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Sinks
3.03 A. B. C.
3.04 A.
B. 3.05 A. B. C. D.
Adjust water pressure at faucets to produce proper flow. CLEANING AND PROTECTION After completing installation of sinks, inspect and repair damaged finishes. Clean sinks, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials. Provide protective covering for installed sinks and fittings. Do not allow use of sinks for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner. END OF SECTION
22 42 16.16 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Commercial Sinks
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. 1.03 A. B. C. D. E. 1.04 A. Constant-volume air systems.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. TABB: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: Within 45 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit documentation that the TAB contractor and this Project's TAB team members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. Sample report forms. Instrument calibration reports, to include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Instrument type and make. Serial number. Application. Dates of use. Dates of calibration.
B. C.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 23 05 93 - 1 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC
1.05 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC NEBB or TABB. TAB Conference: Meet with Architect on approval of the TAB strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Require the participation of the TAB field supervisor and technicians. Provide seven days' advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location. 1. Agenda Items: a. b. c. d. The Contract Documents examination report. The TAB plan. Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors. Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
C.
Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. 2. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification.
D. E. F. G.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Architect . Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: Section 5, "Instrumentation." ASHRAE Compliance: Balancing." As described in ASHRAE 111,
Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1,
ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." PROJECT CONDITIONS
1.06 A.
Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy the site and existing building during entire TAB period. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's operations. COORDINATION Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and times. Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air satisfactorily completed. distribution systems have been
1.07 A. B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. EXAMINATION Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. 2. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions.
C. D.
E.
F. G. H. I. J.
Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. PREPARATION Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. 2. Permanent electrical-power wiring is complete. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 23 05 93 - 3 Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing For HVAC
3.02 A. B.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. END OF SECTION
SECTION 23 07 13 DUCT INSULATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes insulation as indicated on the Drawings. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any). Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.04 A. B. 1.05 A. Detail application of protective shields, saddles, and inserts at hangers for each type of insulation and hanger. Detail insulation application at elbows, fittings, dampers, specialties and flanges for each type of insulation. Detail application of field-applied jackets. Detail application at linkages of control devices.
1.02 A. 1.03 A. B.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. Field quality-control reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of Apprenticeship and Training. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency. 1. Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 23 07 13 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Duct Insulation
B.
2.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed index of 150 or less.
1.06 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature. COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields. Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Before preparing ductwork Shop Drawings, establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance. SCHEDULING Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems and, where required, after installing and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments that have satisfactory test results. Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of construction.
1.07 A. B.
1.08 A.
B.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. C. D. E. INSULATION MATERIALS Comply with requirements on the Drawings where insulating materials shall be applied. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the manufacturing process. Flexible Elastomeric Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials. Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK jacket . Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. Mineral-Fiber Board Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Comply with ASTM C 612, Type IA or Type IB. For duct and plenum applications, provide insulation with factory-applied ASJ. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
F.
23 07 13 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Duct Insulation
G.
Mineral-Fiber, Pipe and Tank Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin. Semirigid board material with factory-applied ASJ complying with ASTM C 1393, Type II or Type IIIA Category 2, or with properties similar to ASTM C 612, Type IB. Nominal density is 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m) or more. Thermal conductivity (k-value) at 100 deg F (55 deg C) is 0.29 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.042 W/m x K) or less. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article. Polyolefin: Unicellular, polyethylene thermal plastic insulation. Comply with ASTM C 534 or ASTM C 1427, Type I, Grade 1 for tubular materials and Type II, Grade 1 for sheet materials. FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS Field-applied jackets shall comply with ASTM C 921, Type I, unless otherwise indicated. FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil-face, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing. PVC Jacket: High-impact-resistant, UV-resistant PVC complying with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C; thickness as scheduled; roll stock ready for shop or field cutting and forming. Thickness is indicated in field-applied jacket schedules. 1. 2. Adhesive: As recommended by jacket material manufacturer. Color: White .
H.
2.02 A. B. C.
D.
Metal Jacket: 1. Aluminum Jacket: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005, Temper H-14.
E.
Self-Adhesive Outdoor Jacket: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, laminated vapor barrier and waterproofing membrane for installation over insulation located aboveground outdoors; consisting of a rubberized bituminous resin on a crosslaminated polyethylene film covered with white aluminum-foil facing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application. 1. 2. B. 3.02 A. Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects. Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will adversely affect insulation application.
23 07 13 - 3
3.03 A. B. C.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces; free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings. Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules. Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or dry state. Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs. Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer. Install insulation with least number of joints practical. Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic. 1. 2. 3. Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic. Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
D. E. F. G. H. I.
J. K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet and dry film thicknesses. Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows: 1. 2. 3. Draw jacket tight and smooth. Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide strips, of same material as insulation jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of strip, spaced 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches (100 mm) o.c. a. 4. 5. For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written instructions, to maintain vapor seal. Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
23 07 13 - 4
L. M. N.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal thickness. Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking due to thermal movement. Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas. Extend patches at least 4 inches (100 mm) beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar to butt joints. PENETRATIONS Insulation Installation at Roof Penetrations: penetrations. 1. 2. Install insulation continuously through roof
3.04 A.
3. 4. B.
Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation above roof surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside roof flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm) below top of roof flashing. Seal jacket to roof flashing with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation at Aboveground Exterior Wall Penetrations: Install insulation continuously through wall penetrations. 1. 2. Seal penetrations with flashing sealant. For applications requiring only indoor insulation, terminate insulation inside wall surface and seal with joint sealant. For applications requiring indoor and outdoor insulation, install insulation for outdoor applications tightly joined to indoor insulation ends. Seal joint with joint sealant. Extend jacket of outdoor insulation outside wall flashing and overlap wall flashing at least 2 inches (50 mm). Seal jacket to wall flashing with flashing sealant.
3. 4. C. D.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated): Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions. Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). 1. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping"irestopping and fire-resistive joint sealers.
E.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations: 1. 2. Duct: For penetrations through fire-rated assemblies, terminate insulation at fire damper sleeves and externally insulate damper sleeve beyond floor to match adjacent duct insulation. Overlap damper sleeve and duct insulation at least 2 inches (50 mm). Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies. Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Duct Insulation
23 07 13 - 5
3.05 A.
INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC INSULATION Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to surface being insulated. INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. 2. 3. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. b. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), place pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
3.06 A.
c. d. e. f.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outwardclinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or fieldapplied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. b. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5. 6.
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) on longitudinal seams and end joints. At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches (450 mm) o.c. Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. 23 07 13 - 6 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Duct Insulation
7.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
B.
Board Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation pins. 1. 2. 3. Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area, for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces. Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and transitions. Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitor-discharge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as follows: a. b. On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches (450 mm) and smaller, place pins along longitudinal centerline of duct. Space 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation end joints, and 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches (450 mm), space pins 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. each way, and 3 inches (75 mm) maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing. Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums. Do not overcompress insulation during installation. Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation facing.
c. d. e.
4.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with insulation by removing 2 inches (50 mm) from one edge and one end of insulation segment. Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch (13-mm) outwardclinching staples, 1 inch (25 mm) o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or fieldapplied jacket, adhesive, vapor-barrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions. a. b. Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal. Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F (10 deg C) at 18-foot (5.5-m) intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface. Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm).
5.
6.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section for each surface. Groove and score insulation to fit as closely as possible to outside and inside radius of elbows. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually mitered gores cut to fit the elbow. Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with 6-inch- (150-mm-) wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches (150 mm) o.c.
23 07 13 - 7
3.07 A.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET INSTALLATION Where glass-cloth jackets are indicated, install directly over bare insulation or insulation with factory-applied jackets. 1. 2. 3. Draw jacket smooth and tight to surface with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at seams and joints. Embed glass cloth between two 0.062-inch- (1.6-mm-) thick coats of lagging adhesive. Completely encapsulate insulation with coating, leaving no exposed insulation.
B.
Where FSK jackets are indicated, install as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Draw jacket material smooth and tight. Install lap or joint strips with same material as jacket. Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. Install jacket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide joint strips at end joints. Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation with vapor-barrier mastic.
C.
Where PVC jackets are indicated, install with 1-inch (25-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints; for horizontal applications, install with longitudinal seams along top and bottom of tanks and vessels. Seal with manufacturer's recommended adhesive. 1. Apply two continuous beads of adhesive to seams and joints, one bead under lap and the finish bead along seam and joint edge.
D.
Where metal jackets are indicated, install with 2-inch (50-mm) overlap at longitudinal seams and end joints. Overlap longitudinal seams arranged to shed water. Seal end joints with weatherproof sealant recommended by insulation manufacturer. Secure jacket with stainlesssteel bands 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. and at end joints. FINISHES Insulation with ASJ, Glass-Cloth, or Other Paintable Jacket Material: Paint jacket with paint system identified below and as specified in Division 9. 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats over a primer that is compatible with jacket material and finish coat paint. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coat Material: Interior, flat, latex-emulsion size.
3.08 A.
B. C. D. 3.09 A.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating. Color: Final color as selected by Architect. inspection of the completed Work. Vary first and second coats to allow visual
Do not field paint aluminum or stainless-steel jackets. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: inspections. Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Duct Insulation
23 07 13 - 8
B. C.
Perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 1. Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be limited to one location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" Article.
D.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals noncompliance with requirements. END OF SECTION
23 07 13 - 9
SECTION 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL-GAS PIPING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.03 A. Pipes, tubes, and fittings. Piping specialties.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces, pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings, unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels. Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and mechanical equipment rooms. Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Minimum Operating-Pressure Ratings: 1. Piping and Valves: 100 psig (690 kPa) minimum unless otherwise indicated.
B. C.
1.04 A.
B. C.
Natural-Gas System Pressure within Buildings: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa) or less . Delegated Design: Design restraints and anchors for natural-gas piping and equipment, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.05 A.
1. Piping specialties. 2. Corrugated, stainless-steel tubing with associated components. JMA 127457 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow BID Documents: February 18, 2013 23 11 23 - 1 Facility Natural-Gas Piping
3. 4. B.
Valves. Include pressure rating, capacity, settings, and electrical connection data of selected models. Dielectric fittings.
Shop Drawings: For facility natural-gas piping layout. Include plans, piping layout and elevations, sections, and details for fabrication of pipe anchors, hangers, supports for multiple pipes, alignment guides, expansion joints and loops, and attachments of the same to building structure. Detail location of anchors, alignment guides, and expansion joints and loops. 1. 2. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) . Detail mounting, supports, and valve arrangements for service meter assembly and pressure regulator assembly.
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: For natural-gas piping and equipment indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1. 2. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting seismic restraints.
1.06 A. B. C. D. E. 1.07 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Plans and details, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other installations, using input from installers of the items involved. Site Survey: Plans, drawn to scale, on which natural-gas piping is shown and coordinated with other services and utilities. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. Welding certificates. Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Steel Support Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. pressure regulators to include in emergency,
1.08 A. B. C.
23 11 23 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
1.09 A. B.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and dispose of liquids from existing natural-gas piping according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture. Store and handle pipes and tubes having factory-applied protective coatings to avoid damaging coating, and protect from direct sunlight. Protect stored PE pipes and valves from direct sunlight. PROJECT CONDITIONS Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility-locating service for area where Project is located. Interruption of Existing Natural-Gas Service: Do not interrupt natural-gas service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide purging and startup of natural-gas supply according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of naturalgas service. Do not proceed with interruption of natural-gas service without Architect's written permission.
C. D. 1.10 A. B.
1.11 A. B.
COORDINATION Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for valves installed concealed behind finished surfaces. Comply with requirements in Division 8.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. PIPES, TUBES, AND FITTINGS Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. 1. 2. 3. 4. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern. Wrought-Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M for butt welding and socket welding. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded ends. Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, minimum Class 150, including bolts, nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings: a. Material Group: 1.1. 23 11 23 - 3 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
b. c. d. e. 5.
End Connections: Threaded or butt welding to match pipe. Lapped Face: Not permitted underground. Gasket Materials: ASME B16.20, metallic, flat, asbestos free, aluminum o-rings, and spiral-wound metal gaskets. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel aboveground.
Mechanical Couplings: a. b. c. d. e. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. Buna-nitrile seals. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. Coupling shall be capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. Steel body couplings installed underground on plastic pipe shall be factory equipped with anode.
B.
PE Pipe: ASTM D 2513, SDR 11. 1. 2. 3. PE Fittings: ASTM D 2683, socket-fusion type or ASTM D 3261, butt-fusion type with dimensions matching PE pipe. PE Transition Fittings: Factory-fabricated fittings with PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11; and steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B. Anodeless Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 4. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet. Casing: Steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, black steel, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating covering. Vent casing aboveground. Aboveground Portion: PE transition fitting. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. Tracer wire connection. Ultraviolet shield. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
Transition Service-Line Risers: Factory fabricated and leak tested. a. b. c. d. e. f. g. Underground Portion: PE pipe complying with ASTM D 2513, SDR 11 inlet connected to steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, Schedule 40, Type E or S, Grade B, with corrosion-protective coating for aboveground outlet. Outlet shall be threaded or flanged or suitable for welded connection. Bridging sleeve over mechanical coupling. Factory-connected anode. Tracer wire connection. Ultraviolet shield. Stake supports with factory finish to match steel pipe casing or carrier pipe.
5.
Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 1-1/2 (DN 40) and Smaller: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe. a. b. c. d. PE body with molded-in, stainless-steel support ring. Buna-nitrile seals. Acetal collets. Electro-zinc-plated steel stiffener. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
23 11 23 - 4
6.
Plastic Mechanical Couplings, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Larger: Capable of joining PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. b. c. d. e. Fiber-reinforced plastic body. PE body tube. Buna-nitrile seals. Acetal collets. Stainless-steel bolts, nuts, and washers.
7.
Steel Mechanical Couplings: Capable of joining plain-end PE pipe to PE pipe, steel pipe to PE pipe, or steel pipe to steel pipe. a. b. c. d. Steel flanges and tube with epoxy finish. Buna-nitrile seals. Steel bolts, washers, and nuts. Factory-installed anode for steel-body couplings installed underground.
2.02 A.
PIPING SPECIALTIES Appliance Flexible Connectors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Indoor, Fixed-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.24. Indoor, Movable-Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.69. Outdoor, Appliance Flexible Connectors: Comply with ANSI Z21.75. Corrugated stainless-steel tubing with polymer coating. Operating-Pressure Rating: 0.5 psig (3.45 kPa). End Fittings: Zinc-coated steel. Threaded Ends: Comply with ASME B1.20.1. Maximum Length: 72 inches (1830 mm.)
B.
Weatherproof Vent Cap: Cast- or malleable-iron increaser fitting with corrosion-resistant wire screen, with free area at least equal to cross-sectional area of connecting pipe and threadedend connection. JOINING MATERIALS Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas. Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. Brazing Filler Metals: Alloy with melting point greater than 1000 deg F (540 deg C) complying with AWS A5.8/A5.8M. Brazing alloys containing more than 0.05 percent phosphorus are prohibited. EARTHQUAKE VALVES Earthquake Valves: Comply with ASCE 25. 1. 2. 3. Listing: Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Maximum Operating Pressure: 5 psig (34.5 kPa). Cast-aluminum body with nickel-plated chrome steel internal parts. 23 11 23 - 5 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
2.03 A. B. C.
2.04 A.
4. 5. 6. 7. 2.05 A.
Nitrile-rubber valve washer. Sight windows for visual indication of valve position. Threaded end connections complying with ASME B1.20.1. Wall mounting bracket with bubble level indicator.
PRESSURE REGULATORS General Requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Single stage and suitable for natural gas. Steel jacket and corrosion-resistant components. Elevation compensator. End Connections: Threaded for regulators NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller; flanged for regulators NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and larger.
B.
Line Pressure Regulators: Comply with ANSI Z21.80. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. Body and Diaphragm Case: Cast iron or die-cast aluminum. Springs: Zinc-plated steel; interchangeable. Diaphragm Plate: Zinc-plated steel. Seat Disc: Nitrile rubber resistant to gas impurities, abrasion, and deformation at the valve port. Orifice: Aluminum; interchangeable. Seal Plug: Ultraviolet-stabilized, mineral-filled nylon. Single-port, self-contained regulator with orifice no larger than required at maximum pressure inlet, and no pressure sensing piping external to the regulator. Pressure regulator shall maintain discharge pressure setting downstream, and not exceed 150 percent of design discharge pressure at shutoff. Overpressure Protection Device: Factory mounted on pressure regulator. Atmospheric Vent: Factory- or field-installed, stainless-steel screen in opening if not connected to vent piping. Maximum Inlet Pressure: 2 psig (13.8 kPa) .
2.06 A. B.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS General Requirements: Assembly of copper alloy and ferrous materials with separating nonconductive insulating material. Include end connections compatible with pipes to be joined. Dielectric Unions: 1. Description: a. b. c. Standard: ASSE 1079. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa) minimum at 180 deg F (82 deg C). End Connections: Solder-joint copper alloy and threaded ferrous.
2.07 A.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, PE film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
23 11 23 - 6
a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored yellow. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. 3.02 A. B. C. 3.03 A. B. C. D. 3.04 A. B. EXAMINATION Examine roughing-in for natural-gas piping system to verify actual locations of piping connections before equipment installation. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. PREPARATION Close equipment shutoff valves before turning off natural gas to premises or piping section. Inspect natural-gas piping according to NFPA 54 devices are turned off in piping section affected. to determine that natural-gas utilization
Comply with NFPA 54 requirements for prevention of accidental ignition. OUTDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. Install underground, natural-gas piping buried at least 36 inches (900 mm) below finished grade. Install underground, PE, natural-gas piping according to ASTM D 2774. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. INDOOR PIPING INSTALLATION Comply with NFPA 54 for installation and purging of natural-gas piping. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings. Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, sleeves, and openings in building structure during progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. 23 11 23 - 7 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
C. D. E.
F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. Locate valves for easy access. Install natural-gas piping at uniform grade of 2 percent down toward drip and sediment traps. Install piping free of sags and bends. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in. Comply with requirements in Sections specifying gas-fired appliances and equipment for roughing-in requirements. Drips and Sediment Traps: Install drips at points where condensate may collect, including service-meter outlets. Locate where accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install where condensate is subject to freezing. 1. Construct drips and sediment traps using tee fitting with bottom outlet plugged or capped. Use nipple a minimum length of 3 pipe diameters, but not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long and same size as connected pipe. Install with space below bottom of drip to remove plug or cap.
N. O. P.
Extend relief vent connections for service regulators, line regulators, and overpressure protection devices to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. Conceal pipe installations in walls, pipe spaces, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, and in floor channels unless indicated to be exposed to view. Concealed Location Installations: Except as specified below, install concealed natural-gas piping and piping installed under the building in containment conduit constructed of steel pipe with welded joints as described in Part 2. Install a vent pipe from containment conduit to outdoors and terminate with weatherproof vent cap. 1. 2. Above Accessible Ceilings: Natural-gas piping, fittings, valves, and regulators may be installed in accessible spaces without containment conduit. In Floors: Install natural-gas piping with welded or brazed joints and protective coating in cast-in-place concrete floors. Cover piping to be cast in concrete slabs with minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of concrete. Piping may not be in physical contact with other metallic structures such as reinforcing rods or electrically neutral conductors. Do not embed piping in concrete slabs containing quick-set additives or cinder aggregate. In Floor Channels: Install natural-gas piping in floor channels. Channels must have cover and be open to space above cover for ventilation. In Walls or Partitions: Protect tubing installed inside partitions or hollow walls from physical damage using steel striker barriers at rigid supports. a. 5. Exception: Tubing passing through partitions or walls does not require striker barriers.
3. 4.
Prohibited Locations: a. Do not install natural-gas piping in or through circulating air ducts, clothes or trash chutes, chimneys or gas vents (flues), ventilating ducts, or dumbwaiter or elevator shafts. 23 11 23 - 8 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
b. Q. R. S. T. U. V. W. X. Y. 3.05 A. B. C. D. E. 3.06 A. B. C.
Do not install natural-gas piping in solid walls or partitions.
Use eccentric reducer fittings to make reductions in pipe sizes. Install fittings with level side down. Connect branch piping from top or side of horizontal piping. Install unions in pipes NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connection to each piece of equipment. Unions are not required at flanged connections. Do not use natural-gas piping as grounding electrode. Install strainer on inlet of each line-pressure regulator and automatic or electrically operated valve. Install pressure gage upstream and downstream from each line regulator. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. VALVE INSTALLATION Install manual gas shutoff valve for each gas appliance. Install underground valves with valve boxes. Install regulators and overpressure protection devices with maintenance access space adequate for servicing and testing. Install earthquake valves aboveground outside buildings according to listing. Install anode for metallic valves in underground PE piping. PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly. Threaded Joints: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads complying with ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter of pipe. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dryseal threading is specified. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
23 11 23 - 9
D.
Welded Joints: 1. 2. 3. Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes and welding operators. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. Patch factory-applied protective coating as recommended by manufacturer at field welds and where damage to coating occurs during construction.
E. F. G.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube" Chapter. Flanged Joints: Install gasket material, size, type, and thickness appropriate for natural-gas service. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Flared Joints: Cut tubing with roll cutting tool. Flare tube end with tool to result in flare dimensions complying with SAE J513. Tighten finger tight, then use wrench. Do not overtighten. PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657. 1. 2. Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion. Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
H.
3.07 A. B.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Install seismic restraints on piping. Comply with requirements for pipe hangers and supports specified in Section 23 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment." CONNECTIONS Connect to utility's gas main according to utility's procedures and requirements. Install natural-gas piping electrically continuous, and bonded to gas appliance equipment grounding conductor of the circuit powering the appliance according to NFPA 70. Install piping adjacent to appliances to allow service and maintenance of appliances. Connect piping to appliances using manual gas shutoff valves and unions. Install valve within 72 inches (1800 mm) of each gas-fired appliance and equipment. Install union between valve and appliances or equipment. Sediment Traps: Install tee fitting with capped nipple in bottom to form drip, as close as practical to inlet of each appliance. LABELING AND IDENTIFYING Install detectable warning tape directly above buried gas piping, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
3.08 A. B. C. D.
E.
3.09 A.
23 11 23 - 10
3.10 A.
PAINTING Paint exposed, exterior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D. a. b. c. d. Prime Coat: Alkyd anticorrosive metal primer. Intermediate Coat: Exterior alkyd enamel matching topcoat. Topcoat: Exterior alkyd enamel (semigloss). Color: Gray .
B.
Paint exposed, interior metal piping, valves, service regulators, service meters and meter bars, earthquake valves, and piping specialties, except components, with factory-applied paint or protective coating. 1. Latex Over Alkyd Primer System: MPI INT 5.1Q. a. b. c. d. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat) . Color: Gray.
C.
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-applied finishes with materials and by procedures to match original factory finish. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 1. Test, inspect, and purge natural gas according to NFPA 54 jurisdiction. and authorities having
3.11 A. B.
C. D. 3.12 A.
Natural-gas piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain earthquake valves. END OF SECTION
23 11 23 - 11
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Facility Natural-Gas Piping
SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.03 A. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. Sheet metal materials. Duct liner.
1.02 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. 2. 3. Liners and adhesives. Sealants and gaskets. Seismic-restraint devices.
B.
1.04 A.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, components, and attachments to other work. including plans, elevations, sections,
C.
Delegated-Design Submittal: 1. 2. 3. 4. Sheet metal thicknesses. Joint and seam construction and sealing. Reinforcement details and spacing. Materials, fabrication, assembly, and spacing of hangers and supports. 23 31 13 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Ducts
1.05 A. B.
QUALITY ASSURANCE ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 "HVAC System Construction and Insulation."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible." Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Ducts
B.
C.
D.
2.02 A.
B.
C.
23 31 13 - 2
D.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." SHEET METAL MATERIALS General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. 2. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180). Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
2.03 A.
B.
C.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M) Alloy 3003, H14 temper; with mill finish for concealed ducts, and standard, one-side bright finish for duct surfaces exposed to view. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.
D.
E.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). DUCT LINER Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 1) 2) 2. Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.039 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.033 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature.
2.04 A.
3.
Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion-resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Ducts
23 31 13 - 3
b.
Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
B.
Flexible Elastomeric Duct Liner: Preformed, cellular, closed-cell, sheet materials complying with ASTM C 534, Type II, Grade 1; and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. 2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. b. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
C.
Natural-Fiber Duct Liner: 85 percent cotton, 10 percent borate, and 5 percent polybinding fibers, treated with a microbial growth inhibitor and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. 2. 3. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.24 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F (0.034 W/m x K) at 75 deg F (24 deg C) mean temperature when tested according to ASTM C 518. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Maximum flame-spread index of 25 and maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to ASTM E 84; certified by an NRTL. Liner Adhesive: As recommended by insulation manufacturer and complying with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. b. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). Adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."
D.
Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch- (2.6-mm-) diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) galvanized carbonsteel washer. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch- (0.41-mm-) thick galvanized steel ; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) in diameter.
2.
E.
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Ducts
23 31 13 - 4
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s). Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches (100 mm) from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches (300 mm) transversely; at 3 inches (75 mm) from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches (450 mm) longitudinally. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. b. c. Fan discharges. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm (12.7 m/s) or where indicated.
9.
Secure insulation between perforated sheet metal inner duct of same thickness as specified for outer shell. Use mechanical fasteners that maintain inner duct at uniform distance from outer shell without compressing insulation. a. Sheet Metal Inner Duct Perforations: 3/32-inch (2.4-mm) diameter, with an overall open area of 23 percent.
10.
Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds.
2.05 A.
SEALANT AND GASKETS General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.
2.06 A. B.
C. D.
23 31 13 - 5
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Ducts
E. F.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. 2. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. DUCT INSTALLATION Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch (25 mm), plus allowance for insulation thickness. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J.
K.
L.
23 31 13 - 6
3.02 A. B. C.
INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part tape sealing system. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. DUCT SEALING Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified on the Drawings. HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.
D. E.
3.03 A.
3.04 A. B.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1 (Table 5-1M), "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches (610 mm) of each elbow and within 48 inches (1200 mm) of each branch intersection. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet (5 m). Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 23 31 13 - 7 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Ducts
D. E.
F.
3.05 A. B.
CONNECTIONS Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. PAINTING Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 9 or on the Drawings. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. Leakage Tests: 1. 2. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. Test the following systems: a. Supply Ducts with a Pressure Class of 2-Inch wg (500 Pa) or Higher: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area for each designated pressure class. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.
3.06 A.
3.07 A. B.
3. 4. 5.
6. C.
Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. 2. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.
D. E.
Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports.
23 31 13 - 8
3.08 A. B.
DUCT CLEANING Clean new and existing duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. 2. 3. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. 23 33 00 Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.
C.
Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. 2. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building.
D.
Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. Coils and related components. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.
E.
Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet. Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable material, mold, or fungus growth. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present. Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface deposits and debris. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Metal Ducts
23 31 13 - 9
END OF SECTION
23 31 13 - 10
SECTION 23 33 00 AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Remote damper operators. 3. Duct-mounted access doors. 4. Flexible connectors. ACTION SUBMITTALS Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. attachments to other work. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and
1.02 A.
1.03 A.
Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. b. c. d. e. Special fittings. Manual volume damper installations. Control-damper installations. Fire-damper, smoke-damper, combination fire- and smoke-damper, ceiling, and corridor damper installations, including sleeves; and duct-mounted access doors and remote damper operators. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.04 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct accessories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals. For air duct accessories to include in operation and
1.05 A.
23 33 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Air Duct Accessories
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. MATERIALS Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. 2. B. C. D. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60 (Z180). Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
2.02 A.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch (6-mm) minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches (900 mm) or less; 3/8-inch (10-mm) minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches (900 mm). MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. 2. 3. Standard leakage rating. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Frames: a. b. c. 4. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch- (2.4-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel. Mitered and welded corners. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
2.03 A.
Blades: a. b. c. d. Multiple or single blade. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch (1.62 mm) thick.
5. 6.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Air Duct Accessories
23 33 00 - 2
b. 7. B.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
Standard, Aluminum, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. 2. 3. 4. Standard leakage rating. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. Frames: Hat-shaped, 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet channels; frames with flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. Blades: a. b. c. d. e. 5. 6. Multiple or single blade. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. Stiffen damper blades for stability. Roll-Formed Aluminum Blades: 0.10-inch- (2.5-mm-) thick aluminum sheet. Extruded-Aluminum Blades: 0.050-inch- (1.2-mm-) thick extruded aluminum.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel. Bearings: a. b. Oil-impregnated bronze. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg (750 Pa) or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
7. 2.04 A. B. C. D. E. 2.05 A.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Aluminum.
REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment. Tubing: Aluminum.
Cable: Stainless steel . Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed . Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Stainless steel. DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. b. c. Double wall, rectangular. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. Vision panel. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Air Duct Accessories
23 33 00 - 3
d. e. 2. 3.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch (25-by-25-mm) butt or piano hinge and cam latches. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. b. c. d. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches (300 mm) Square: No hinges and two sash locks. Access Doors up to 18 Inches (460 mm) Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Three hinges and two compression latches. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches (600 by 1200 mm): Four hinges and two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
2.06 A. B. C.
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches (146 mm) wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- (70-mm-) wide, 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-) thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- (0.8-mm-) thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. 2. 3. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. (880 g/sq. m). Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch (84 N/mm) in the warp and 360 lbf/inch (63 N/mm) in the filling. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F (Minus 40 to plus 93 deg C).
D.
E.
Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to UV rays and ozone. 1. 2. 3. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq. yd. (810 g/sq. m). Tensile Strength: 530 lbf/inch (93 N/mm) in the warp and 440 lbf/inch (77 N/mm) in the filling. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250 deg F (Minus 45 to plus 121 deg C).
F.
Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression, and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 23 33 00 - 4 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Air Duct Accessories
7.
Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement at start and stop.
2.07 A.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, springsteel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. 2. 3. 4. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg (2500 Pa) positive and 1.0-inch wg (250 Pa) negative. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm (20 m/s). Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F (Minus 23 to plus 71 deg C). Insulation R-value: R-50.
2.08 A.
DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in galvanized-steel and fibrous-glass ducts, stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts, and aluminum accessories in aluminum ducts. Install control dampers at inlet of exhaust fans or exhaust ducts as close as possible to exhaust fan unless otherwise indicated. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. 2. E. F. G. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. Install aluminum volume dampers in aluminum ducts.
B.
C. D.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. Install fire and smoke dampers according to UL listing. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Air Duct Accessories
23 33 00 - 5
H.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. On both sides of duct coils. Upstream and downstream from duct filters. At outdoor-air intakes and mixed-air plenums. At drain pans and seals. Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, backdraft dampers, and equipment. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot (15-m) spacing. Upstream and downstream from turning vanes. Upstream or downstream from duct silencers. Control devices requiring inspection. Elsewhere as indicated.
7. 8. 9. 10. 11. I. J.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. Access Door Sizes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches (200 by 125 mm). Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches (300 by 150 mm). Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches (460 by 250 mm). Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches (530 by 355 mm). Body Access: 25 by 14 inches (635 by 355 mm). Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches (635 by 430 mm).
K. L. M. N. O. P.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. For fans developing static pressures of 5-inch wg (1250 Pa) and more, cover flexible connectors with loaded vinyl sheet held in place with metal straps. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts directly or with maximum 60-inch (1500-mm) lengths of flexible duct clamped or strapped in place. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with adhesive plus sheet metal screws.
Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. Install thrust limits at centerline of thrust, symmetrical on both sides of equipment. Attach thrust limits at centerline of thrust and adjust to a maximum of 1/4-inch (6-mm) movement during start and stop of fans. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 23 33 00 - 6 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Air Duct Accessories
3.02 A.
3. 4. 5.
Operate fire, smoke, and combination fire and smoke dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heat-response device is installed. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. Operate remote damper operators to verify full range of movement of operator and damper. END OF SECTION
23 33 00 - 7
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Air Duct Accessories
SECTION 23 34 23 HVAC POWER VENTILATORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.03 A. B. 1.04 A. Centrifugal roof ventilators. Ceiling-mounted ventilators.
1.02 A.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on actual Project site elevations . Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. Also include the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. Certified fan sound-power ratings. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. Fan speed controllers.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. 2. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.05 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved:
1. Roof framing and support members relative to duct penetrations. JMA 127457 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow BID Documents: February 18, 2013 23 34 23 - 1 HVAC Power Ventilators
2. 3. 4. B. 1.06 A.
Ceiling suspension assembly members. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. Ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings.
Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. AMCA Compliance: Fans shall have AMCA-Certified performance ratings and shall bear the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. UL Standards: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705. COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with actual equipment provided.
1.07 A. B. C. 1.08 A. B. C.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. CENTRIFUGAL ROOF VENTILATORS Housing: Removable, spun-aluminum, dome top and outlet baffle aluminum base with venturi inlet cone. 1. B. C. Hinged Subbase: maintenance. ; square, one-piece,
Galvanized-steel hinged arrangement permitting service and
Fan Wheels: Aluminum hub and wheel with backward-inclined blades. Belt Drives: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Resiliently mounted to housing. Fan Shaft: Turned, ground, and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub. Shaft Bearings: Permanently lubricated, permanently sealed, self-aligning ball bearings. Pulleys: Cast-iron, adjustable-pitch motor pulley. Fan and motor isolated from exhaust airstream. 23 34 23 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow HVAC Power Ventilators
D.
Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Disconnect Switch: Nonfusible type, with thermal-overload protection mounted outside fan housing, factory wired through an internal aluminum conduit. Bird Screens: Removable, 1/2-inch (13-mm) mesh, aluminum or brass wire. Dampers: Counterbalanced, parallel-blade, backdraft dampers mounted in curb base; factory set to close when fan stops.
E.
Roof Curbs: Galvanized steel; mitered and welded corners; 1-1/2-inch- (40-mm-) thick, rigid, fiberglass insulation adhered to inside walls; and 1-1/2-inch (40-mm) wood nailer. Size as required to suit roof opening and fan base. 1. 2. 3. 4. Configuration: Self-flashing without a cant strip, with mounting flange. Overall Height: 16 inches (400 mm). Pitch Mounting: Manufacture curb for roof slope. Metal Liner: Galvanized steel.
2.02 A. B. C. D. E.
CEILING-MOUNTED VENTILATORS Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan wheel shall be removable for service. Grille: Painted aluminum, louvered grille with flange on intake and thumbscrew attachment to fan housing. Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for motor plug-in. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than 50 percent. Manual Starter Switch: Single-pole rocker switch assembly with cover and pilot light. Time-Delay Switch: Assembly with single-pole rocker switch, timer, and cover plate. Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators. Manufacturer's standard roof jack or wall cap, and transition fittings.
2.03 A.
MOTORS Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, and efficiency requirements for motors. 1. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0.
B.
Enclosure Type: As indicated on the Drawings.
23 34 23 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow HVAC Power Ventilators
2.04 A.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Certify sound-power level ratings according to AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal. Certify fan performance ratings, including flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency by factory tests according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Aerodynamic Performance Rating." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. 3.02 A. B. 3.03 A. INSTALLATION Install power ventilators level and plumb. 3Secure roof-mounted fans to roof curbs with cadmium-plated hardware. See Division 7 for installation of roof curbs. Ceiling Units: Suspend units from structure; use steel wire or metal straps. Install units with clearances for service and maintenance. CONNECTIONS Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. connections with flexible connectors. Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform tests and inspections. 1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Make final duct
B.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed. Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches. Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete. Disconnect fan drive from motor, verify proper motor rotation direction, and verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation. Reconnect fan drive system, align and adjust belts, and install belt guards. Adjust belt tension. Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts. 23 34 23 - 4 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow HVAC Power Ventilators
8. 9. 10. 11. C. D. 3.04 A. B. C. D. E.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire and smoke dampers in connected ductwork systems are in fully open position. Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
Test and adjust controls and safeties. equipment. Prepare test and inspection reports. ADJUSTING
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation. Adjust belt tension. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. Lubricate bearings. END OF SECTION
23 34 23 - 5
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow HVAC Power Ventilators
SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: Supply, Return and Exhaust grilles. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. 2. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
1.02 A. 1.03 A.
1.04 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Ceiling suspension assembly members. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. Duct access panels.
B.
Source quality-control reports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. CEILING DIFFUSERS Supply, Return, Exhaust Grilles: Refer to Drawings
23 37 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of equipment. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. ADJUSTING After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION
B. 3.02 A. B.
C.
3.03 A.
23 37 13 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Diffusers, Registers, And Grilles
SECTION 23 74 13 PACKAGED GAS/ELECTRIC AIR CONDITIONING UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units (rooftop units) with the following components and accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 1.03 A. B. C. Direct-expansion cooling. Hot-gas reheat. Gas furnace. Economizer outdoor- and return-air damper section. Integral, space temperature controls. Roof curbs.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS DDC: Direct-digital controls. ECM: Electrically commutated motor. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the outdoor-air stream to reject heat during cooling operations and to absorb heat during heating operations. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system. Outdoor-Air Refrigerant-Coil Fan: The outdoor-air refrigerant-coil fan in RTUs. "Outdoor air" is defined as the air outside the building or taken from outdoors and not previously circulated through the system. RTU: Rooftop unit. As used in this Section, this abbreviation means packaged, outdoor, central-station air-handling units. This abbreviation is used regardless of whether the unit is mounted on the roof or on a concrete base on ground. Supply-Air Fan: The fan providing supply air to conditioned space. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus. Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: Refrigerant coil in the supply-air stream to absorb heat (provide cooling) during cooling operations and to reject heat (provide heating) during heating operations. "Supply air" is defined as the air entering a space from air-conditioning, heating, or ventilating apparatus.
D.
E.
F. G.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 23 74 13 - 1 Packaged,Gas/Electric Air Conditioning Units
1.04 A. B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical data for each RTU, including rated capacities, dimensions, required clearances, characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Plans and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3. Structural members to which RTUs will be attached. Roof openings Roof curbs and flashing.
1.05 A.
B. 1.06 A.
Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE ARI Compliance: 1. 2. Comply with ARI 203/110 and ARI 303/110 for testing and rating energy efficiencies for RTUs. Comply with ARI 270 for testing and rating sound performance for RTUs. For RTUs to include in emergency, operation, and
1.07 A.
B.
ASHRAE Compliance: 1. 2. 3. Comply with ASHRAE 15 for refrigeration system safety. Comply with ASHRAE 33 for methods of testing cooling and heating coils. Comply with applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and Startup."
C. D. E. F.
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6 "Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning." NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. UL Compliance: Comply with UL 1995. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.08 A.
WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of RTUs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. 2. 3. 4. Warranty Period for Compressors: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Gas Furnace Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than five years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Solid-State Ignition Modules: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion. Warranty Period for Control Boards: Manufacturer's standard, but not less than three years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: CASING General Fabrication Requirements for Casings: Formed and reinforced double-wall insulated panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. Exterior Casing Material: Galvanized steel with factory-painted finish, with pitched roof panels and knockouts with grommet seals for electrical and piping connections and lifting lugs. 1. C. Exterior Casing Thickness: 0.052 inch (1.3 mm) thick.
2.02 A.
B.
Inner Casing Fabrication Requirements: 1. Inside Casing: Galvanized steel, 0.034 inch (0.86 mm) thick.
D.
Casing Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. 1. 2. 3. 4. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). Liner materials shall have air-stream surface coated with an erosion- and temperatureresistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
E.
Condensate Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized -steel sheet, a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) deep. 1. 2. 3. Double-Wall Construction: Fill space between walls with foam insulation and seal moisture tight. Drain Connections: Threaded nipple. Pan-Top Surface Coating: Corrosion-resistant compound. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 23 74 13 - 3 Packaged,Gas/Electric Air Conditioning Units
F.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. FANS Direct-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved , centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, multispeed motor resiliently mounted in the fan inlet. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls. Belt-Driven Supply-Air Fans: Double width, forward curved, centrifugal; with permanently lubricated, single-speed motor installed on an adjustable fan base resiliently mounted in the casing. Aluminum or painted-steel wheels, and galvanized- or painted-steel fan scrolls. Condenser-Coil Fan: Propeller, mounted on shaft of permanently lubricated motor. Relief-Air Fan: Forward curved , shaft mounted on permanently lubricated motor. Seismic Fabrication Requirements: Fabricate fan section, internal mounting frame and attachment to fans, fan housings, motors, casings, accessories, and other fan section components with reinforcement strong enough to withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC" when fan-mounted frame and RTU-mounted frame are anchored to building structure. COILS Supply-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Aluminum or Copper-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. Coil Split: Interlaced. Baked phenolic coating. Condensate Drain Pan: Galvanized steel with corrosion-resistant coating formed with pitch and drain connections.
2.03 A.
B.
C. D. E.
2.04 A.
B.
Outdoor-Air Refrigerant Coil: 1. 2. 3. Aluminum or Copper-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. Baked phenolic coating.
C.
Hot-Gas Reheat Refrigerant Coil: 1. 2. 3. Aluminum or Copper-plate fin and seamless internally grooved copper tube in steel casing with equalizing-type vertical distributor. Polymer strip shall prevent all copper coil from contacting steel coil frame or condensate pan. Baked phenolic coating.
2.05 A. B. C.
REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT COMPONENTS Number of Refrigerant Circuits: One . Compressor: Hermetic, reciprocating , mounted on vibration isolators; with internal overcurrent and high-temperature protection, internal pressure relief. Refrigeration Specialties: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A . Refrigerant: R-407C or R-410A. Expansion valve with replaceable thermostatic element. Refrigerant filter/dryer. Manual-reset high-pressure safety switch. Automatic-reset low-pressure safety switch. Minimum off-time relay. Automatic-reset compressor motor thermal overload. Brass service valves installed in compressor suction and liquid lines. Low-ambient kit high-pressure sensor. Hot-gas bypass solenoid valve with a replaceable magnetic coil. Four-way reversing valve with a replaceable magnetic coil, thermostatic expansion valves with bypass check valves, and a suction line accumulator.
2.06 A.
AIR FILTRATION Minimum arrestance according to ASHRAE 52.1, and a minimum efficiency reporting value (MERV) according to ASHRAE 52.2. 1. Glass Fiber: Minimum 80 percent arrestance, and MERV 5 .
2.07 A.
GAS FURNACE Description: Factory assembled, piped, and wired; complying with ANSI Z21.47 and NFPA 54. 1. CSA Approval: Designed and certified by and bearing label of CSA.
B.
Burners: Stainless steel. 1. 2. Fuel: Natural gas. Ignition: Electronically controlled electric spark or hot-surface igniter with flame sensor.
C. D. E.
Heat-Exchanger and Drain Pan: Stainless steel. Venting: Gravity vented with vertical extension. Safety Controls: 1. 2. Gas Control Valve: Single stage . Gas Train: Single-body, regulated, redundant, 24-V ac gas valve assembly containing pilot solenoid valve, pilot filter, pressure regulator, pilot shutoff, and manual shutoff.
2.08 A. B.
DAMPERS Outdoor-Air Damper: Linked damper blades, for 0 to 25 percent outdoor air, with manual or motorized damper as indicated on Drawings. Outdoor- and Return-Air Mixing Dampers: Parallel- or opposed-blade galvanized-steel dampers mechanically fastened to cadmium plated for galvanized-steel operating rod in reinforced cabinet. Connect operating rods with common linkage and interconnect linkages so dampers operate simultaneously. 1. 2. Damper Motor: Modulating with adjustable minimum position. Relief-Air Damper: Gravity actuated or motorized, as required by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, with bird screen and hood.
2.09 A.
ELECTRICAL POWER CONNECTION Provide for single connection of power to unit with control-circuit transformer with built-in overcurrent protection. CONTROLS Basic Unit Controls: 1. 2. Control-voltage transformer. Wall-mounted electronic thermostat or sensor with the following features: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. Heat-cool-off switch. Fan on-auto switch. Fan-speed switch. Automatic changeover. Adjustable deadband. Concealed set point. Concealed indication. Degree F indication. Unoccupied-period-override push button. Data entry and access port to input temperature set points, occupied and unoccupied periods, and output room temperature, supply-air temperature, operating mode, and status.
2.10 A.
B.
Electronic Controller: 1. 2. Controller shall have volatile-memory backup. Safety Control Operation: a. b. c. 3. Smoke Detectors: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if smoke is detected. Provide additional contacts for alarm interface to fire alarm control panel. Low-Discharge Temperature: Stop fan and close outdoor-air damper if supply air temperature is less than 40 deg F (4 deg C) . Defrost Control for Condenser Coil: Pressure differential switch to initiate defrost sequence.
Scheduled Operation: Occupied and unoccupied periods on seven -day clock with a minimum of four programmable periods per day. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 23 74 13 - 6 Packaged,Gas/Electric Air Conditioning Units
4.
Economizer Outdoor-Air Damper Operation: a. Occupied Periods: Open to specified percent fixed minimum intake, and maximum 100 percent of the fan capacity to comply with ASHRAE Cycle II. Controller shall permit air-side economizer operation when outdoor air is less than 60 deg F (15 deg C) . Use outdoor-air enthalpy to adjust mixing dampers. Start relief-air fan with end switch on outdoor-air damper. During economizer cycle operation, lock out cooling. Unoccupied Periods: Close outdoor-air damper and open return-air damper.
b. 2.11 A. B. 2.12 A. B.
ACCESSORIES Low-ambient kit using staged condenser fans for operation down to 35 deg F (1.7 deg C) . Coil guards of painted, galvanized-steel wire. ROOF CURBS Roof curbs with vibration isolators and wind or seismic restraints are specified in Section 23 05 48 "Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC." Materials: Galvanized steel with corrosion-protection coating, watertight gaskets, and factoryinstalled wood nailer; complying with NRCA standards. 1. Curb Insulation and Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. b. 2. Materials: ASTM C 1071, Type I or II. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm).
Application: Factory applied with adhesive and mechanical fasteners to the internal surface of curb. a. b. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I. Mechanical Fasteners: Galvanized steel, suitable for adhesive attachment, mechanical attachment, or welding attachment to duct without damaging liner when applied as recommended by manufacturer and without causing leakage in cabinet. Liner materials applied in this location shall have air-stream surface coated with a temperature-resistant coating or faced with a plain or coated fibrous mat or fabric depending on service air velocity. Liner Adhesive: Comply with ASTM C 916, Type I.
c. d. C. D.
Curb Height: 14 inches (355 mm). Wind and Seismic Restraints: Metal brackets compatible with the curb and casing, painted to match RTU, used to anchor unit to the curb, and designed for loads at Project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. 3.02 A. EXAMINATION Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of RTUs. Examine roughing-in for RTUs to verify actual locations of piping and duct connections before equipment installation. Examine roofs for suitable conditions where RTUs will be installed. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Roof Curb: Install on roof structure or concrete base, level and secure, according to NRCA's "Low-Slope Membrane Roofing Construction Details Manual," Illustration "Raised Curb Detail for Rooftop Air Handling Units and Ducts." Install RTUs on curbs and coordinate roof penetrations and flashing with roof construction specified in Division 7. Secure RTUs to upper curb rail, and secure curb base to roof framing or concrete base with anchor bolts. CONNECTIONS Install condensate drain, minimum connection size, with trap and indirect connection to nearest roof drain or area drain. Install piping adjacent to RTUs to allow service and maintenance. 1. Gas Piping: Comply with applicable requirements in Section 23 11 23 "Facility NaturalGas Piping." Connect gas piping to burner, full size of gas train inlet, and connect with union and shutoff valve with sufficient clearance for burner removal and service.
3.03 A. B.
C.
Duct installation requirements are specified in other HVAC Sections. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of ducts. The following are specific connection requirements: 1. 2. 3. 4. Install ducts to termination at top of roof curb. Remove roof decking only as required for passage of ducts. Do not cut out decking under entire roof curb. Connect supply ducts to RTUs with flexible duct connectors specified in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." Install return-air duct continuously through roof structure.
3.04 A.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Report results in writing. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 23 74 13 - 8 Packaged,Gas/Electric Air Conditioning Units
B.
1.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing. Report results in writing.
C.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. 4. After installing RTUs and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test units for compliance with requirements. Inspect for and remove shipping bolts, blocks, and tie-down straps. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. 3.05 A. B.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above. STARTUP SERVICE Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions and do the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Inspect for visible damage to unit casing. Inspect for visible damage to furnace combustion chamber. Inspect for visible damage to compressor, coils, and fans. Inspect internal insulation. Verify that labels are clearly visible. Verify that clearances have been provided for servicing. Verify that controls are connected and operable. Verify that filters are installed. Clean condenser coil and inspect for construction debris. Clean furnace flue and inspect for construction debris. Connect and purge gas line. Remove packing from vibration isolators. Inspect operation of barometric relief dampers. Verify lubrication on fan and motor bearings. Inspect fan-wheel rotation for movement in correct direction without vibration and binding. Adjust fan belts to proper alignment and tension. Start unit according to manufacturer's written instructions. a. b. c. 18. 19. 20. 21. 22. 23. Start refrigeration system. Do not operate below recommended low-ambient temperature. Complete startup sheets and attach copy with Contractor's startup report.
Inspect and record performance of interlocks and protective devices; verify sequences. Operate unit for an initial period as recommended or required by manufacturer. Calibrate thermostats. Adjust and inspect high-temperature limits. Inspect outdoor-air dampers for proper stroke and interlock with return-air dampers. Start refrigeration system and measure and record the following when ambient is a minimum of 15 deg F (8 deg C) above return-air temperature: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 23 74 13 - 9 Packaged,Gas/Electric Air Conditioning Units
a. b. c. d. 24. 25.
Coil leaving-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. Coil entering-air, dry- and wet-bulb temperatures. Outdoor-air, dry-bulb temperature. Outdoor-air-coil, discharge-air, dry-bulb temperature.
Inspect controls for correct sequencing of heating, mixing dampers, refrigeration, and normal and emergency shutdown. Measure and record the following minimum and maximum airflows. Plot fan volumes on fan curve. a. b. c. d. Supply-air volume. Return-air volume. Relief-air volume. Outdoor-air intake volume.
26.
Simulate maximum cooling demand and inspect the following: a. b. Compressor refrigerant suction and hot-gas pressures. Short circuiting of air through condenser coil or from condenser fans to outdoor-air intake.
27.
Verify operation of remote panel including pilot-light operation and failure modes. Inspect the following: a. b. c. d. e. High-temperature limit on gas-fired heat exchanger. Low-temperature safety operation. Filter high-pressure differential alarm. Economizer to minimum outdoor-air changeover. Relief-air fan operation.
28.
After startup and performance testing and prior to Substantial Completion, replace existing filters with new filters.
3.06 A.
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to site during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. After completing system installation and testing, adjusting, and balancing RTU and airdistribution systems, clean filter housings and install new filters. DEMONSTRATION Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain RTUs. END OF SECTION
B.
3.07 A.
SECTION 26 05 19 LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. B. Building wires and cables rated 600 V and less. Connectors, splices, and terminations rated 600 V and less.
1.02 A.
Related Requirements: 1. Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cabling used for voice and data circuits.
1.03 A. 1.04 A. B. 1.05 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For testing agency. Field quality-control reports. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: JMA 127457 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow BID Documents: February 18, 2013 26 05 19 - 1 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. C. D.
Alcan Products Corporation; Alcan Cable Division. Alpha Wire. Belden Inc. Encore Wire Corporation. General Cable Technologies Corporation. Southwire Incorporated.
Copper Conductors: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658. Conductor Insulation: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type THHN-2-THWN-2 . Multiconductor Cable: Comply with NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658 for Type MC with ground wire. CONNECTORS AND SPLICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. Gardner Bender. Hubbell Power Systems, Inc. Ideal Industries, Inc. Ilsco; a branch of Bardes Corporation. NSi Industries LLC. O-Z/Gedney; a brand of the EGS Electrical Group. 3M; Electrical Markets Division. Tyco Electronics. metal-clad cable,
2.02 A.
B.
Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NFPA 70.
2.03 A. B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS Feeders: Copper . Solid for No. 10 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger. Branch Circuits: Copper. Solid for No. 12 AWG and smaller; stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
26 05 19 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables
3.02 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.
CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND MULTICONDUCTOR CABLE APPLICATIONS AND WIRING METHODS Service Entrance: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. Exposed Feeders: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. Feeders Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, Partitions, and Crawlspaces: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC. Feeders Concealed in Concrete, below Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground: THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. Type THHN-2-
Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings, Walls, and Partitions: Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway Metal-clad cable, Type MC. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete, below Type THHN-2-THWN-2, single conductors in raceway. Slabs-on-Grade, and Underground:
Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainlesssteel, wire-mesh, strain relief device at terminations to suit application. INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Conceal cables in finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Complete raceway installation between conductor and cable termination points according to Section 26 05 33 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems" prior to pulling conductors and cables. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will not damage cables or raceway. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. Support cables according to Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems." CONNECTIONS Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B. Make splices, terminations, and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables
3.03 A. B.
C.
D. E. F. 3.04 A.
B.
26 05 19 - 3
C. 3.05 A. B.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 6 inches (150 mm) of slack. IDENTIFICATION Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Identify each spare conductor at each end with identity number and location of other end of conductor, and identify as spare conductor. FIRESTOPPING Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly according to Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. 2. After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized, test service entrance and feeder conductors for compliance with requirements. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
3.06 A.
3.07 A. B. C.
D.
Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare a written report to record the following: 1. 2. 3. Procedures used. Results that comply with requirements. Results that do not comply with requirements and corrective action taken to achieve compliance with requirements.
E.
Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. END OF SECTION
26 05 19 - 4
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors And Cables
SECTION 26 05 26 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment. Section includes grounding and bonding systems and equipment, plus the following special applications: 1. 1.03 A. 1.04 A. Underground distribution grounding.
1.02 A. B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS As-Built Data: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of grounding features specified in "Field Quality Control" Article, including the following: 1. Grounding arrangements and connections for separately derived systems.
B. C. 1.05 A.
Qualification Data: For testing agency and testing agency's field supervisor. Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: maintenance manuals. QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing. 26 05 26 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems For grounding to include in emergency, operation, and
1.06 A.
B. C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 2.02 A. B. 2.03 A. B. Burndy; Part of Hubbell Electrical Systems. Dossert; AFL Telecommunications LLC. ERICO International Corporation. Fushi Copperweld Inc. Galvan Industries, Inc.; Electrical Products Division, LLC. Harger Lightning and Grounding. ILSCO. O-Z/Gedney; A Brand of the EGS Electrical Group. Robbins Lightning, Inc. Siemens Power Transmission & Distribution, Inc.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment. CONDUCTORS Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction. Bare Copper Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG conductor, 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded conductor. Bonding Jumper: Copper tape, braided conductors terminated with copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches (41 mm) wide and 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.
C.
Grounding Bus: Predrilled rectangular bars of annealed copper, 1/4 by 4 inches (6.3 by 100 mm) in cross section, with 9/32-inch (7.14-mm) holes spaced 1-1/8 inches (28 mm) apart. Stand-off insulators for mounting shall comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V and shall be Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V. 26 05 26 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
2.04 A.
CONNECTORS Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for applications in which used and for specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items connected. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for materials being joined and installation conditions. Bus-Bar Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless compression -type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. GROUNDING ELECTRODES Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch by 10 feet (19 mm by 3 m) .
B. C. D.
2.05 A.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. APPLICATIONS Conductors: Install solid conductor for No. 8 AWG and smaller, and stranded conductors for No. 6 AWG and larger unless otherwise indicated. Panelboard Grounding Conductor: Install bare copper conductor, No. 3 AWG minimum. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical equipment rooms, in rooms housing service equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. 1. 2. D. Install bus horizontally, on insulated spacers 2 inches (50 mm) minimum from wall, 6 inches (150 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Where indicated on both sides of doorways, route bus up to top of door frame, across top of doorway, and down; connect to horizontal bus.
Conductor Terminations and Connections: 1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
3.02 A.
GROUNDING AT THE SERVICE Equipment grounding conductors and grounding electrode conductors shall be connected to the ground bus. EQUIPMENT GROUNDING Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
3.03 A.
26 05 26 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Grounding And Bonding For Electrical Systems
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to those required by NFPA 70: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Feeders and branch circuits. Lighting circuits. Receptacle circuits. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. Flexible raceway runs. Metal-clad cable runs.
C.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters, dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and to air duct and connected metallic piping. INSTALLATION Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible unless otherwise indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance except where routed through short lengths of conduit. 1. 2. 3. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install bonding so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations; if a disconnect-type connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
3.04 A.
B.
C.
Grounding and Bonding for Piping: 1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit, from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes; use a bolted clamp connector or bolt a lug-type connector to a pipe flange by using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment shutoff valve.
2. 3. D.
Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install bonding jumper to bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
26 05 26 - 4
3.05 A. B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been energized, test for compliance with requirements. Inspect physical and mechanical condition. Verify tightness of accessible, bolted, electrical connections with a calibrated torque wrench according to manufacturer's written instructions. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground-resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal.
C. D. E.
Grounding system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values: 1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity of 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
F.
Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify Architect promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance. END OF SECTION
26 05 26 - 5
SECTION 26 05 29 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY This Section includes the following: 1. 2. 1.03 A. B. C. 1.04 A. B. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. Construction requirements for concrete bases.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. RMC: Rigid metal conduit. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems and its contents. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems.
1.05 A.
1.06 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Welding certificates.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 26 05 29 - 1 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems
1.07 A. B. 1.08 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." Comply with NFPA 70. COORDINATION Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified together with concrete Specifications.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. 2. 3. 4. B. C. D. E. Allied Tube & Conduit. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. ERICO International Corporation. GS Metals Corp. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. Wesanco, Inc.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to MFMA4. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints: shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or their supports to building surfaces include the following: 1. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, stainless steel, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc. Hilti Inc. ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc. MKT Fastening, LLC.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 2.02 A.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58. Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for attached structural element. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with ASTM A 325. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions of supported equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. APPLICATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for EMT, IMC, and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch (6 mm) in diameter. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted or other support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. D. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
C.
Spring-steel clamps designed for supporting single conduits without bolts may be used for 11/2-inch (38-mm) and smaller raceways serving branch circuits and communication systems above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to trapeze supports. SUPPORT INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT, IMC, and RMC may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 26 05 29 - 3 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems
3.02 A. B.
C.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb (90 kg). Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts. To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4 inches (100 mm) thick or greater. Do not use for anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
D.
6. 7.
E.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS Comply with installation requirements in Section 05 50 00 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M. CONCRETE BASES Construct concrete bases of dimensions indicated but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger in both directions than supported unit, and so anchors will be a minimum of 10 bolt diameters from edge of the base. Use 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive-strength concrete. Concrete materials, reinforcement, and placement requirements are specified in Section 03 30 53 "Miscellaneous Cast-in-Place Concrete." Anchor equipment to concrete base. 1. 2. 3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use supported equipment manufacturer's setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported equipment. Install anchor bolts according to anchor-bolt manufacturer's written instructions. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 26 05 29 - 4 Hangers And Supports For Electrical Systems
3.03 A. B. C. 3.04 A.
B.
C.
3.05 A.
PAINTING Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils (0.05 mm).
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 33 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 1.03 A. B. 1.04 A. B. Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings. Metal wireways and auxiliary gutters. Surface raceways. Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit. IMC: Intermediate metal conduit. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover enclosures, and cabinets. Shop Drawings: For custom enclosures and cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. METAL CONDUITS, TUBING, AND FITTINGS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc. 2. Allied Tube & Conduit. 3. O-Z/Gedney. 4. Republic Conduit. 5. Robroy Industries. 6. Southwire Company. JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 26 05 33 - 1 Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
7. 8. 9. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I.
Thomas & Betts Corporation. Western Tube and Conduit Corporation. Wheatland Tube Company.
Listing and Labeling: Metal conduits, tubing, and fittings shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. GRC: Comply with ANSI C80.1 and UL 6. ARC: Comply with ANSI C80.5 and UL 6A. IMC: Comply with ANSI C80.6 and UL 1242. EMT: Comply with ANSI C80.3 and UL 797. FMC: Comply with UL 1; zinc-coated steel . LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket and complying with UL 360. Fittings for Metal Conduit: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 514B. 1. Fittings for EMT: a. b. Material: Steel. Type: Setscrew or compression.
J.
Joint Compound for IMC, GRC, or ARC: Approved, as defined in NFPA 70, by authorities having jurisdiction for use in conduit assemblies, and compounded for use to lubricate and protect threaded conduit joints from corrosion and to enhance their conductivity. BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. Adalet. Cooper Technologies Company; Cooper Crouse-Hinds. EGS/Appleton Electric. Erickson Electrical Equipment Company. FSR Inc. Hoffman. Hubbell Incorporated. Kraloy. Milbank Manufacturing Co. Mono-Systems, Inc. O-Z/Gedney. RACO; Hubbell. Robroy Industries. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Company. Stahlin Non-Metallic Enclosures. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Wiremold / Legrand.
2.02 A.
B. C. D. E.
General Requirements for Boxes, Enclosures, and Cabinets: Boxes, enclosures, and cabinets installed in wet locations shall be listed for use in wet locations. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1 and UL 514A. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, ferrous alloy, Type FD, with gasketed cover. Metal Floor Boxes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Material: Cast metal or sheet metal. Type: Fully adjustable . Shape: Rectangular. Listing and Labeling: Metal floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Listing and Labeling: Nonmetallic floor boxes shall be listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
F.
Luminaire Outlet Boxes: Nonadjustable, designed for attachment of luminaire weighing 50 lb (23 kg). Outlet boxes designed for attachment of luminaires weighing more than 50 lb (23 kg) shall be listed and marked for the maximum allowable weight. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. Cast-Metal Access, Pull, and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1 and UL 1773, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. Box extensions used to accommodate new building finishes shall be of same material as recessed box. Device Box Dimensions: 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep (100 mm square by 60 mm deep) . Gangable boxes are allowed . Cabinets: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. NEMA 250, Type 1 galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage. Accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
G. H. I. J. K. L.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. RACEWAY APPLICATION Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: GRC or IMC. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 26 05 33 - 3 Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
2. 3. 4. B.
Concealed Conduit, Aboveground: GRC, IMC or EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC. Boxes and Enclosures, Aboveground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.
Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. Exposed, Not Subject to Severe Physical Damage: EMT. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic, Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. Damp or Wet Locations: GRC .
C. D.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch (21-mm) trade size. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. 1. 2. 3. Rigid and Intermediate Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings unless otherwise indicated. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. EMT: Use setscrew or compression, steel fittings. Comply with NEMA FB 2.10. Flexible Conduit: Use only fittings listed for use with flexible conduit. Comply with NEMA FB 2.20.
3.02 A.
INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except where requirements on Drawings or in this article are stricter. Comply with NECA 102 for aluminum conduits. Comply with NFPA 70 limitations for types of raceways allowed in specific occupancies and number of floors. Keep raceways at least 6 inches (150 mm) away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hotwater pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for hangers and supports. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above finished slab. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degree bends in any conduit run except for control wiring conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed. Support within 12 inches (300 mm) of changes in direction. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors unless otherwise indicated. Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Support conduit within 12 inches (300 mm) of enclosures to which attached. Stub-ups to Above Recessed Ceilings: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 26 05 33 - 4 Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
B. C. D. E. F.
G. H. I.
1. 2. J.
Use EMT, IMC, or RMC for raceways. Use a conduit bushing or insulated fitting to terminate stub-ups not terminated in hubs or in an enclosure.
Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints. Follow compound manufacturer's written instructions. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG. Terminate threaded conduits into threaded hubs or with locknuts on inside and outside of boxes or cabinets. Install bushings on conduits up to 1-1/4-inch (35mm) trade size and insulated throat metal bushings on 1-1/2-inch (41-mm) trade size and larger conduits terminated with locknuts. Install insulated throat metal grounding bushings on service conduits. Install raceways square to the enclosure and terminate at enclosures with locknuts. Install locknuts hand tight plus 1/4 turn more. Do not rely on locknuts to penetrate nonconductive coatings on enclosures. Remove coatings in the locknut area prior to assembling conduit to enclosure to assure a continuous ground path. Cut conduit perpendicular to the length. For conduits 2-inch (53-mm) trade size and larger, use roll cutter or a guide to make cut straight and perpendicular to the length. Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb (90-kg) tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack at each end of pull wire. Flexible Conduit Connections: Comply with NEMA RV 3. Use a maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed luminaires, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. 2. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.
K. L.
M. N. O. P.
Q.
R.
Mount boxes at heights indicated on Drawings. If mounting heights of boxes are not individually indicated, give priority to ADA requirements. Install boxes with height measured to center of box unless otherwise indicated. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block, and install box flush with surface of wall. Prepare block surfaces to provide a flat surface for a raintight connection between box and cover plate or supported equipment and box. Horizontally separate boxes mounted on opposite sides of walls so they are not in the same vertical channel. Locate boxes so that cover or plate will not span different building finishes. Support boxes of three gangs or more from more than one side by spanning two framing members or mounting on brackets specifically designed for the purpose. Fasten junction and pull boxes to or support from building structure. Do not support boxes by conduits. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow 26 05 33 - 5 Raceways And Boxes For Electrical Systems
S.
T. U. V. W.
X. 3.03 A. 3.04 A.
Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface. FIRESTOPPING Install firestopping at penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. PROTECTION Protect coatings, finishes, and cabinets from damage and deterioration. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION
SECTION 26 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.03 A. B. C. Identification for raceways. Identification of power and control cables. Identification for conductors. Warning labels and signs. Instruction signs. Equipment identification labels. Miscellaneous identification products.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each electrical identification product indicated. Samples: For each type of label and sign to illustrate size, colors, lettering style, mounting provisions, and graphic features of identification products. Identification Schedule: An index of nomenclature of electrical equipment and system components used in identification signs and labels. QUALITY ASSURANCE Comply with ANSI A13.1. Comply with NFPA 70. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.144 and 29 CFR 1910.145. Comply with ANSI Z535.4 for safety signs and labels. Adhesive-attached labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers, shall comply with UL 969.
1.04 A. B. C. D. E.
26 05 53 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Identification For Electrical Systems
1.05 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate identification names, abbreviations, colors, and other features with requirements in other Sections requiring identification applications, Drawings, Shop Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual; and with those required by codes, standards, and 29 CFR 1910.145. Use consistent designations throughout Project. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of surfaces where devices are to be applied. Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors. Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
B. C. D.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. B. POWER AND CONTROL RACEWAY IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each raceway size. Colors for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: 1. 2. C. Black letters on an orange field . Legend: Indicate voltage.
Vinyl Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. Snap-Around Labels for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands for Raceways Carrying Circuits at 600 V or Less: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of raceway or cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. ARMORED AND METAL-CLAD CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. Colors for Cables Carrying Circuits at 600 V and Less: 1. 2. Black letters on an orange field . Legend: Indicate voltage.
D.
E.
2.02 A. B.
C.
Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label.
26 05 53 - 2
D. E.
Self-Adhesive Vinyl Tape: Colored, heavy duty, waterproof, fade resistant; 2 inches (50 mm) wide; compounded for outdoor use. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. POWER AND CONTROL CABLE IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS Comply with ANSI A13.1 for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum length of color field for each cable size. Vinyl Labels: Preprinted, flexible label laminated with a clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating and matching wraparound clear adhesive tape for securing ends of legend label. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted, 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemicalresistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the cable diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around cable it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve, 2 inches (50 mm) long, with diameter sized to suit diameter of cable it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Colored, self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils (0.08 mm) thick by 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide. Self-Adhesive, Self-Laminating Polyester Labels: Preprinted , 3-mil- (0.08-mm-) thick flexible label with acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive that provides a clear, weather- and chemicalresistant, self-laminating, protective shield over the legend. Labels sized to fit the conductor diameter such that the clear shield overlaps the entire printed legend. Snap-Around Labels: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, preprinted, color-coded acrylic sleeve, with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. Snap-Around, Color-Coding Bands: Slit, pretensioned, flexible, solid-colored acrylic sleeve with diameter sized to suit diameter of conductor it identifies and to stay in place by gripping action. Heat-Shrink Preprinted Tubes: Flame-retardant polyolefin tube with machine-printed identification label. Sized to suit diameter of and shrinks to fit firmly around conductor it identifies. Full shrink recovery at a maximum of 200 deg F (93 deg C). Comply with UL 224.
2.03 A. B. C.
D.
E. F.
2.04 A. B.
C. D. E.
26 05 53 - 3
2.05 A.
FLOOR MARKING TAPE 2-inch- (50-mm-) wide, 5-mil (0.125-mm) pressure-sensitive vinyl tape, with yellow and black stripes and clear vinyl overlay. WARNING LABELS AND SIGNS Comply with NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1910.145. Self-Adhesive Warning Labels: Factory-printed, multicolor, pressure-sensitive adhesive labels, configured for display on front cover, door, or other access to equipment unless otherwise indicated. Baked-Enamel Warning Signs: 1. 2. 3. Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 7 by 10 inches (180 by 250 mm).
2.06 A. B.
C.
D.
Metal-Backed, Butyrate Warning Signs: 1. 2. 3. Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, cellulose-acetate butyrate signs with 0.0396inch (1-mm) galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and size required for application. 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) grommets in corners for mounting. Nominal size, 10 by 14 inches (250 by 360 mm).
E.
Warning label and sign shall include, but are not limited to, the following legends: 1. 2. Multiple Power Source Warning: "DANGER - ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD EQUIPMENT HAS MULTIPLE POWER SOURCES." Workspace Clearance Warning: "WARNING - OSHA REGULATION - AREA IN FRONT OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT MUST BE KEPT CLEAR FOR 36 INCHES (915 MM)."
2.07 A.
INSTRUCTION SIGNS Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine plastic, minimum 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches (129 sq. cm) and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick for larger sizes. 1. 2. 3. Engraved legend with black letters on white face . Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners. Framed with mitered acrylic molding and arranged for attachment at applicable equipment.
B. C.
Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label.
26 05 53 - 4
2.08 A. B.
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION LABELS Adhesive Film Label: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Adhesive Film Label with Clear Protective Overlay: Machine printed, in black, by thermal transfer or equivalent process. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Overlay shall provide a weatherproof and UV-resistant seal for label. Self-Adhesive, Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Adhesive backed, with white letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Engraved, Laminated Acrylic or Melamine Label: Punched or drilled for screw mounting. White letters on a dark-gray background. Minimum letter height shall be 3/8 inch (10 mm). Stenciled Legend: In nonfading, waterproof, black ink or paint. Minimum letter height shall be 1 inch (25 mm) . MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Paint: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for paint materials and application requirements. Select paint system applicable for surface material and location (exterior or interior). Fasteners for Labels and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
C. D. E.
2.09 A.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. INSTALLATION Verify identity of each item before installing identification products. Location: Install identification materials and devices at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Apply identification devices to surfaces that require finish after completing finish work. Self-Adhesive Identification Products: Clean surfaces before application, using materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of identification device. Attach signs and plastic labels that are not self-adhesive type with mechanical fasteners appropriate to the location and substrate. Attach plastic raceway and cable labels that are not self-adhesive type with clear vinyl tape with adhesive appropriate to the location and substrate. System Identification Color-Coding Bands for Raceways and Cables: Each color-coding band shall completely encircle cable or conduit. Place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side. Locate bands at changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot (15-m) maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot (7.6-m) maximum intervals in congested areas. 26 05 53 - 5 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Identification For Electrical Systems
H.
Painted Identification: Comply with requirements in painting Sections for surface preparation and paint application. IDENTIFICATION SCHEDULE Accessible Raceways and Metal-Clad Cables, 600 V or Less, for Service, Feeder, and Branch Circuits More Than 120 V to ground: Identify with self-adhesive vinyl label . Install labels at 30-foot (10-m) maximum intervals. Accessible Raceways and Cables within Buildings: Identify the covers of each junction and pull box of the following systems with self-adhesive vinyl labels with the wiring system legend and system voltage. System legends shall be as follows: 1. Power. Power-Circuit Conductor Identification, 600 V or Less: For conductors in vaults, pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use color-coding conductor tape to identify the phase. 1. Color-Coding for Phase and Voltage Level Identification, 600 V or Less: Use colors listed below for ungrounded feeder and branch-circuit conductors. a. b. Color shall be factory applied. Colors for 208/120-V Circuits: 1) 2) 3) c. Phase A: Black. Phase B: Red. Phase C: Blue.
3.02 A.
B.
C.
Colors for 480/277-V Circuits: 1) 2) 3) Phase A: Brown. Phase B: Orange. Phase C: Yellow.
d.
Field-Applied, Color-Coding Conductor Tape: Apply in half-lapped turns for a minimum distance of 6 inches (150 mm) from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Locate bands to avoid obscuring factory cable markings.
D. E.
Install instructional sign including the color-code for grounded and ungrounded conductors using adhesive-film-type labels. Control-Circuit Conductor Identification: For conductors and cables in pull and junction boxes, manholes, and handholes, use self-adhesive vinyl labels with the conductor or cable designation, origin, and destination. Auxiliary Electrical Systems Conductor Identification: Identify field-installed alarm, control, and signal connections. 1. 2. Identify conductors, cables, and terminals in enclosures and at junctions, terminals, and pull points. Identify by system and circuit designation. Use system of marker tape designations that is uniform and consistent with system used by manufacturer for factory-installed connections. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Identification For Electrical Systems
F.
26 05 53 - 6
3. G.
Coordinate identification with Project Drawings, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual.
Workspace Indication: Install floor marking tape to show working clearances in the direction of access to live parts. Workspace shall be as required by NFPA 70 and 29 CFR 1926.403 unless otherwise indicated. Do not install at flush-mounted panelboards and similar equipment in finished spaces. Warning Labels for Indoor Cabinets, Boxes, and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: enamel warning signs . 1. 2. 3. Comply with 29 CFR 1910.145. Identify system voltage with black letters on an orange background. Apply to exterior of door, cover, or other access. Baked-
H.
I.
Operating Instruction Signs: Install instruction signs to facilitate proper operation and maintenance of electrical systems and items to which they connect. Install instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or equipment operation. Equipment Identification Labels: On each unit of equipment, install unique designation label that is consistent with wiring diagrams, schedules, and the Operation and Maintenance Manual. Apply labels to disconnect switches and protection equipment, central or master units, control panels, control stations, terminal cabinets, and racks of each system. Systems include power, lighting, control, communication, signal, monitoring, and alarm systems unless equipment is provided with its own identification. 1. Labeling Instructions: a. Indoor Equipment: Engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) high letters on 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches (50 mm) high. Unless provided with self-adhesive means of attachment, fasten labels with appropriate mechanical fasteners that do not change the NEMA or NRTL rating of the enclosure.
J.
b.
2.
Equipment to Be Labeled: a. b. c. d. e. Panelboards: Typewritten directory of circuits in the location provided by panelboard manufacturer. Panelboard identification shall be engraved, laminated acrylic or melamine label. Enclosures and electrical cabinets. Access doors and panels for concealed electrical items. Variable-speed controllers. Contactors. END OF SECTION
26 05 53 - 7
SECTION 26 09 23 LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Time switches. Photoelectric switches. Indoor occupancy sensors. Lighting contactors.
1.02 A.
Related Requirements: 1. Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices" for wall-box dimmers, wall-switch occupancy sensors, and manual light switches.
1.03 A. B.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors. 1. 2. Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of lighting control device to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
26 09 23 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Lighting Control Devices
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. TIME SWITCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. B. Cooper Industries, Inc. Intermatic, Inc. Invensys Controls. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. Tyco Electronics; ALR Brand.
Electronic Time Switches: Solid state, programmable, with alphanumeric display; complying with UL 917. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Contact Configuration: SPST . Contact Rating: 20-A ballast load, 120-/240-V ac . Programs: Eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule and an annual holiday schedule that overrides the weekly operation on holidays. Programs: Two on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule, allowing different set points for each day of the week. Programs: 8 channels; each channel is individually programmable with eight on-off set points on a 24-hour schedule. Circuitry: Allow connection of a photoelectric relay as substitute for on-off function of a program. Astronomic Time: All channels. Automatic daylight savings time changeover. Battery Backup: Not less than seven days reserve, to maintain schedules and time clock.
2.02 A.
INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. Cooper Industries, Inc. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. Lightolier Controls. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. RAB Lighting. Sensor Switch, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. Watt Stopper.
B.
General Requirements for Sensors: Wall- or ceiling-mounted, solid-state indoor occupancy sensors with a separate power pack. 26 09 23 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Lighting Control Devices
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when coverage area is occupied, and turn them off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 15 minutes. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A. Sensor is powered from the power pack. Power Pack: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac, for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Sensor has 24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source, as defined by NFPA 70. Mounting: a. b. c. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch (13-mm) knockout in a standard electrical enclosure. Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged door.
6. 7. 8. C.
Indicator: Digital display, to show when motion is detected during testing and normal operation of sensor. Bypass Switch: Override the "on" function in case of sensor failure. Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 2 to 200 fc (21.5 to 2152 lux); turn lights off when selected lighting level is present.
Dual-Technology Type: Ceiling mounted; detect occupants in coverage area using PIR and ultrasonic detection methods. The particular technology or combination of technologies that control on-off functions is selectable in the field by operating controls on unit. 1. 2. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology. Detector Sensitivity: Detect occurrences of 6-inch- (150-mm-) minimum movement of any portion of a human body that presents a target of not less than 36 sq. in. (232 sq. cm), and detect a person of average size and weight moving not less than 12 inches (305 mm) in either a horizontal or a vertical manner at an approximate speed of 12 inches/s (305 mm/s). Detection Coverage (Standard Room): Detect occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft. (93 sq. m) when mounted on a 96-inch- (2440-mm-) high ceiling.
3.
2.03 A.
SWITCHBOX-MOUNTED OCCUPANCY SENSORS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. Bryant Electric; a Hubbell company. Cooper Industries, Inc. Hubbell Building Automation, Inc. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. Lightolier Controls. Lithonia Lighting; Acuity Lighting Group, Inc. Lutron Electronics Co., Inc. NSi Industries LLC; TORK Products. RAB Lighting. Sensor Switch, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric. Watt Stopper. 26 09 23 - 3 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Lighting Control Devices
B.
General Requirements for Sensors: mounting in a single gang switchbox. 1. 2. 3.
Automatic-wall-switch occupancy sensor, suitable for
Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Operating Ambient Conditions: Dry interior conditions, 32 to 120 deg F (0 to 49 deg C). Switch Rating: Not less than 800-VA fluorescent at 120 V, 1200-VA fluorescent at 277 V, and 800-W incandescent.
C.
Wall-Switch Sensor Tag WS1: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Standard Range: 180-degree field of view, field adjustable from 180 to 40 degrees; with a minimum coverage area of 900 sq. ft. (84 sq. m) . Sensing Technology: Dual technology - PIR and ultrasonic. Switch Type: SP. SP, field selectable automatic "on," or manual "on" automatic "off." Voltage: Dual voltage, 120 and 277 V; dual-technology type. Ambient-Light Override: Concealed, field-adjustable, light-level sensor from 10 to 150 fc (108 to 1600 lux). The switch prevents the lights from turning on when the light level is higher than the set point of the sensor. Concealed, field-adjustable, "off" time-delay selector at up to 30 minutes. Concealed "off" time-delay selector at 30 seconds, and 5, 10, and 20 minutes. Adaptive Technology: Self-adjusting circuitry detects and memorizes usage patterns of the space and helps eliminate false "off" switching.
2.04 A.
LIGHTING CONTACTORS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Allen-Bradley/Rockwell Automation. ASCO Power Technologies, LP; a division of Emerson Electric Co. Eaton Corporation. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution; Total Lighting Control. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Description: Electrically operated and mechanically held, combination-type lighting contactors , complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508. 1. 2. 3. Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served, including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or less total harmonic distortion of normal load current). Fault Current Withstand Rating: Equal to or exceeding the available fault current at the point of installation. Enclosure: Comply with NEMA 250.
26 09 23 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. SENSOR INSTALLATION Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke detectors, fire-suppression systems, and partition assemblies. Install and aim sensors in locations to achieve not less than 90 percent coverage of areas indicated. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written instructions. CONTACTOR INSTALLATION Mount electrically held lighting contactors with elastomeric isolator pads to eliminate structureborne vibration, unless contactors are installed in an enclosure with factory-installed vibration isolators. WIRING INSTALLATION Wiring Method: Comply with Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." Minimum conduit size is 3/4 inch. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. IDENTIFICATION Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. B. 3.05 A. B. C. Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
B.
3.02 A.
3.03 A. B. C. D.
3.04 A.
Label time switches and contactors with a unique designation. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate lighting control devices and perform tests and inspections. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Perform the following tests and inspections: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Lighting Control Devices
26 09 23 - 5
1. 2. D. E.
Operational Test: After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.
Lighting control devices will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION
26 09 23 - 6
SECTION 26 24 16 PANELBOARDS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 1.03 A. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards.
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of panelboard, switching and overcurrent protective device, transient voltage suppression device, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. Shop Drawings: For each panelboard and related equipment. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Include dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment features, and ratings. Detail enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Detail bus configuration, current, and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices. Include evidence of NRTL listing for series rating of installed devices. Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components. Include wiring diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. Include time-current coordination curves for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device included in panelboards. Submit on translucent log-log graft paper; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
B.
1.04 A. 1.05 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Panelboard Schedules: For installation in panelboards. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For panelboards and components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 26 24 16 - 1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Panelboards
1. 2.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting overcurrent protective devices. Time-current curves, including selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device that allows adjustments.
1.06 A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3. Keys: Two spares for each type of panelboard cabinet lock. Circuit Breakers Including GFCI and Ground Fault Equipment Protection (GFEP) Types: Two spares for each panelboard. Fuses for Fused Switches: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than three of each size and type.
1.07 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: testing. Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site
B. C.
Source Limitations: Obtain panelboards, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories from single source from single manufacturer. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for panelboards including clearances between panelboards and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NEMA PB 1. Comply with NFPA 70. DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Handle and prepare panelboards for installation according to NEMA PB 1. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: 1. Do not deliver or install panelboards until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above panelboards is complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 26 24 16 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Panelboards
D. E. F. 1.08 A. 1.09 A.
2.
a. b. B.
Ambient Temperature: Not exceeding minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) to plus 104 deg F (plus 40 deg C). Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
Service Conditions: NEMA PB 1, usual service conditions, as follows: 1. 2. Ambient temperatures within limits specified. Altitude not exceeding 6600 feet (2000 m).
C.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 3. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.10 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, including electrical and other types of equipment, raceways, piping, encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast anchorbolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified with concrete. WARRANTY Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace transient voltage suppression devices that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.
B.
1.11 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR PANELBOARDS Enclosures: 1. Flush- and surface-mounted cabinets.
Rated for environmental conditions at installed location. a. Indoor Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1.
2.
Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts, match box dimensions; for flush-mounted fronts, overlap box. 26 24 16 - 3 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Panelboards
3. 4. 5. 6.
Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover. Skirt for Surface-Mounted Panelboards: Same gage and finish as panelboard front with flanges for attachment to panelboard, wall, and ceiling or floor. Gutter Extension and Barrier: Same gage and finish as panelboard enclosure; integral with enclosure body. Arrange to isolate individual panel sections. Finishes: a. b. Panels and Trim: Steel, factory finished immediately after cleaning and pretreating with manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Back Boxes: Galvanized steel . metal frame with transparent
7. B. C.
Directory Card: Inside panelboard door, mounted in protective cover. Top and bottom.
Incoming Mains Location:
Phase, Neutral, and Ground Buses: 1. 2. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment grounding conductors; bonded to box.
D.
Conductor Connectors: Suitable for use with conductor material and sizes. 1. 2. 3. 4. Material: Hard-drawn copper, 98 percent conductivity. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type. Ground Lugs and Bus-Configured Terminators: Mechanical type. Feed-Through Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for use with conductor material. Locate at opposite end of bus from incoming lugs or main device.
E. F. G.
Service Equipment Label: NRTL labeled for use as service equipment for panelboards or load centers with one or more main service disconnecting and overcurrent protective devices. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections, filler plates, and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. Panelboard Short-Circuit Current Rating: current available at terminals. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Seismic Performance: Panelboards shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to SEI/ASCE 7. 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event." Fully rated to interrupt symmetrical short-circuit
2.02 A.
26 24 16 - 4
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Panelboards
2.03 A.
LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. C. D. E. 2.04 A.
Panelboards: NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch-circuit type. Mains: Circuit breaker or lugs only. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Bolt-on circuit breakers, replaceable without disturbing adjacent units. Doors: Concealed hinges; secured with flush latch with tumbler lock; keyed alike. DISCONNECTING AND OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Molded-Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB): Comply with UL 489, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. 2. 3. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. Adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame sizes 250 A and larger. Adjustable Instantaneous-Trip Circuit Breakers: Magnetic trip element with frontmounted, field-adjustable trip setting. Electronic trip circuit breakers with rms sensing; field-replaceable rating plug or fieldreplicable electronic trip; and the following field-adjustable settings: a. b. c. d. 4. 5. Instantaneous trip. Long- and short-time pickup levels. Long- and short-time time adjustments. Ground-fault pickup level, time delay, and I2t response.
GFCI Circuit Breakers: Single- and two-pole configurations with Class A ground-fault protection (6-mA trip). Molded-Case Circuit-Breaker (MCCB) Features and Accessories: a. b. Standard frame sizes, trip ratings, and number of poles. Lugs: Mechanical style, suitable for number, size, trip ratings, and conductor materials.
26 24 16 - 5
c. d. e.
Application Listing: Appropriate for application; Type SWD for switching fluorescent lighting loads; Type HID for feeding fluorescent and high-intensity discharge (HID) lighting circuits. Ground-Fault Protection: Integrally mounted relay and trip unit with adjustable pickup and time-delay settings, push-to-test feature, and ground-fault indicator. Shunt Trip: 120 -V trip coil energized from separate circuit, set to trip at 75 percent of rated voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. 3.02 A. B. C. D. EXAMINATION Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards according to NEMA PB 1.1. Examine panelboards before installation. Reject panelboards that are damaged or rusted or have been subjected to water saturation. Examine elements and surfaces to receive panelboards for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB 1.1. Mount top of trim 90 inches (2286 mm) above finished floor unless otherwise indicated. Mount panelboard cabinet plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly flush with wall finish and mating with back box. Install overcurrent protective devices and controllers not already factory installed. 1. E. F. Set field-adjustable, circuit-breaker trip ranges.
Install filler plates in unused spaces. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits from panelboard into accessible ceiling space or space designated to be ceiling space in the future. Stub four 1-inch (27-GRC) empty conduits into raised floor space or below slab not on grade. Comply with NECA 1. IDENTIFICATION Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs complying with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads; incorporate Owner's final room designations. Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory; handwritten directories are not acceptable. 26 24 16 - 6 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Panelboards
G. 3.03 A. B.
C. D.
Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panelboard with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Device Nameplates: Label each branch circuit device in distribution panelboards with a nameplate complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2. Test insulation resistance for each panelboard bus, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
3.04 A. B.
C.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
D. E.
Panelboards will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies panelboards included and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action. ADJUSTING Adjust moving parts and operable component to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. Load Balancing: After Substantial Completion, but not more than 60 days after Final Acceptance, measure load balancing and make circuit changes. 1. 2. 3. 4. Measure as directed during period of normal system loading. Perform load-balancing circuit changes outside normal occupancy/working schedule of the facility and at time directed. Avoid disrupting critical 24-hour services such as fax machines and on-line data processing, computing, transmitting, and receiving equipment. After circuit changes, recheck loads during normal load period. Record all load readings before and after changes and submit test records. Tolerance: Difference exceeding 20 percent between phase loads, within a panelboard, is not acceptable. Rebalance and recheck as necessary to meet this minimum requirement. END OF SECTION
3.05 A. B.
26 24 16 - 7
SECTION 26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Receptacles, receptacles with integral GFCI, and associated device plates. Twist-locking receptacles. Weather-resistant receptacles. Snap switches and wall-box dimmers. Communications outlets. Floor service outlets, poke-through assemblies, service poles, and multioutlet assemblies.
1.02 A.
1.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. 1.04 A.
DEFINITIONS EMI: Electromagnetic interference. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. TVSS: Transient voltage surge suppressor. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordination: 1. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
1.05 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wiring Devices
26 27 26 - 1
B.
Shop Drawings: List of legends and description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates. INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packinglabel warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Poke-Through, Fire-Rated Closure Plugs: One for every five floor service outlets installed, but no fewer than two .
1.06 A. 1.07 A.
1.08 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Cooper Wiring Devices; Division of Cooper Industries, Inc. (Cooper). Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell). Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton). Pass & Seymour/Legrand (Pass & Seymour).
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device and associated wall plate from single source from single manufacturer. GENERAL WIRING-DEVICE REQUIREMENTS Wiring Devices, Components, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NFPA 70. Devices that are manufactured for use with modular plug-in connectors may be substituted under the following conditions: 1. 2. Connectors shall comply with UL 2459 and shall be made with stranding building wire. Devices shall comply with the requirements in this Section.
2.02 A. B. C.
26 27 26 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wiring Devices
2.03 A.
STRAIGHT-BLADE RECEPTACLES Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Configuration 5-20R, UL 498, and FS W-C-596. 1. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. Cooper; 5351 (single), CR5362 (duplex). Hubbell; HBL5351 (single), HBL5352 (duplex). Leviton; 5891 (single), 5352 (duplex). Pass & Seymour; 5361 (single), 5362 (duplex).
2.04 A.
GFCI RECEPTACLES General Description: 1. 2. 3. Straight blade, feed -through type. Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, UL 498, UL 943 Class A, and FS W-C-596. Include indicator light that shows when the GFCI has malfunctioned and no longer provides proper GFCI protection.
B.
Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. Cooper; VGF20. Hubbell; GFR5352L. Pass & Seymour; 2095. Leviton; 7590.
2.05 A.
CORD AND PLUG SETS Description: 1. 2. 3. Match voltage and current ratings and number of conductors to requirements of equipment being connected. Cord: Rubber-insulated, stranded-copper conductors, with Type SOW-A jacket; with green-insulated grounding conductor and ampacity of at least 130 percent of the equipment rating. Plug: Nylon body and integral cable-clamping jaws. Match cord and receptacle type for connection.
2.06 A. B.
TOGGLE SWITCHES Comply with NEMA WD 1, UL 20, and FS W-S-896. Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 26 27 26 - 3 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wiring Devices
a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. t. 2.07 A.
Single Pole: Cooper: AH1221 Hubbell: HBL1221 Leviton: 1221-2 Pass & Seymour: CSB20AC1 Two Pole: Cooper: AH1222 Hubbell: HBL1222 Leviton: 1222-2 Pass & Seymour: CSB20AC2 Three Way: Cooper: AH1223 Hubbell: HBL1223 Leviton: 1223-2 Pass & Seymour: CSB20AC3 Four Way: Cooper: AH1224 Hubbell: HBL1224 Leviton: 1224-2 Pass & Seymour: CSB20AC4
DECORATOR-STYLE DEVICES Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, and UL 498. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. Cooper; 6252. Hubbell; DR15. Leviton; 16252. Pass & Seymour; 26252.
B.
GFCI, Feed -Through Type, Convenience Receptacles: Square face, 125 V, 15 A; comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-15R, UL 498, and UL 943 Class A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. c. d. Cooper; VGF15. Hubbell; GF15LA. Leviton; 8599. Pass & Seymour; 1594.
C.
Telephone Outlet: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wiring Devices
26 27 26 - 4
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. Cooper; 3560-6. Leviton; 40649.
2. D.
Description: Single RJ-45 jack for terminating 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 6 . Comply with UL 1863.
Combination TV and Telephone Outlet: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. b. 2. Cooper; 3562. Leviton; 40159.
Description: Single RJ-45 jack for 100-ohm, balanced, four-pair UTP; TIA/EIA-568-B.1; complying with Category 6 . Comply with UL 1863.
2.08 A. B. C.
WALL-BOX DIMMERS Dimmer Switches: Modular, full-wave, solid-state units with integral, quiet on-off switches, with audible frequency and EMI/RFI suppression filters. Control: Continuously adjustable slider ; with single-pole or three-way switching. Comply with UL 1472. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmer Switches: Modular; compatible with dimmer ballasts; trim potentiometer to adjust low-end dimming; dimmer-ballast combination capable of consistent dimming with low end not greater than 20 percent of full brightness. WALL PLATES Single and combination types shall match corresponding wiring devices. 1. 2. 3. 4. Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish. Material for Finished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic . Material for Unfinished Spaces: Smooth, high-impact thermoplastic. Material for Damp Locations: Thermoplastic with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed and labeled for use in wet and damp locations. NEMA 250, complying with Type 3R, weather-
2.09 A.
B.
Wet-Location, Weatherproof Cover Plates: resistant thermoplastic with lockable cover. FLOOR SERVICE FITTINGS
2.10 A. B. C.
Type: Modular, flush-type , dual-service units suitable for wiring method used. Compartments: Barrier separates power from voice and data communication cabling. Service Plate: Round, with satin finish. 26 27 26 - 5 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wiring Devices
D. E.
Power Receptacle: NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, gray finish, unless otherwise indicated. Voice and Data Communication Outlet: Two modular, keyed, color-coded, RJ-45 jacks for UTP cable. POKE-THROUGH ASSEMBLIES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems. Pass & Seymour/Legrand. Square D/Schneider Electric. Thomas & Betts Corporation. Wiremold/Legrand.
2.11 A.
B.
Description: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Factory-fabricated and -wired assembly of below-floor junction box with multichanneled, through-floor raceway/firestop unit and detachable matching floor service-outlet assembly. Comply with UL 514 scrub water exclusion requirements. Service-Outlet Assembly: Flush type with two simplex receptacles and space for two RJ-45 jacks . Size: Selected to fit nominal 4-inch (100-mm) cored holes in floor and matched to floor thickness. Fire Rating: Unit is listed and labeled for fire rating of floor-ceiling assembly. Closure Plug: Arranged to close unused 4-inch (100-mm) cored openings and reestablish fire rating of floor. Wiring Raceways and Compartments: For a minimum of four No. 12 AWG conductors and a minimum of two , four-pair cables.
2.12 A.
FINISHES Device Color: 1. Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System: As selected by Architect unless otherwise indicated or required by NFPA 70 or device listing.
B.
Wall Plate Color: For plastic covers, match device color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. INSTALLATION Comply with NECA 1, including mounting heights listed in that standard, unless otherwise indicated. Coordination with Other Trades:
26 27 26 - 6
1. 2. 3. 4. C.
Protect installed devices and their boxes. Do not place wall finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are guided by riding against outside of boxes. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete, dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors, and cables. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
Conductors: 1. 2. 3. 4. Do not strip insulation from conductors until right before they are spliced or terminated on devices. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose. Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70, Article 300, without pigtails. Existing Conductors: a. b. c. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted, provided the outlet box is large enough.
D.
Device Installation: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Replace devices that have been in temporary use during construction and that were installed before building finishing operations were complete. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to connect conductors. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the last possible moment. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches (152 mm) in length. When there is a choice, use side wiring with binding-head screw terminals. Wrap solid conductor tightly clockwise, two-thirds to three-fourths of the way around terminal screw. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by manufacturer. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold device-mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
E.
Receptacle Orientation: 1. 2. Install ground pin of vertically mounted receptacles down, and on horizontally mounted receptacles to the left. Install hospital-grade receptacles in patient-care areas with the ground pin or neutral blade at the top.
F. G.
Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening. Dimmers: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Wiring Devices
26 27 26 - 7
1. 2. 3. H.
Install dimmers within terms of their listing. Verify that dimmers used for fan speed control are listed for that application. Install unshared neutral conductors on line and load side of dimmers according to manufacturers' device listing conditions in the written instructions.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. Adjust locations of floor service outlets and service poles to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436. 2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital readout or illuminated digital-display indicators of measurement. Tests for Convenience Receptacles: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is unacceptable. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2 ohms are acceptable. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted. Tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
I.
3.02 A.
B.
C. D.
Wiring device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION
26 27 26 - 8
SECTION 26 28 13 FUSES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 1.03 A. Cartridge fuses rated 600-V ac and less for use in enclosed switches .
1.02 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material, dimensions, descriptions of individual components, and finishes for spare-fuse cabinets. Include the following for each fuse type indicated: 1. Ambient Temperature Adjustment Information: If ratings of fuses have been adjusted to accommodate ambient temperatures, provide list of fuses with adjusted ratings. a. b. 2. 3. 4. For each fuse having adjusted ratings, include location of fuse, original fuse rating, local ambient temperature, and adjusted fuse rating. Provide manufacturer's technical data on which ambient temperature adjustment calculations are based.
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, and ratings. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics. Fuse sizes for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
1.04 A.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For fuses to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2. Ambient temperature adjustment information. Current-limitation curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
26 28 13 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Fuses
1.05 A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Fuses: Equal to 10 percent of quantity installed for each size and type, but no fewer than two of each size and type.
1.06 A. B. C. D. E. 1.07 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Source Limitations: Obtain fuses, for use within a specific product or circuit, from single source from single manufacturer. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NEMA FU 1 for cartridge fuses. Comply with NFPA 70. Comply with UL 248-11 for plug fuses. PROJECT CONDITIONS Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40 deg F (5 deg C) or more than 100 deg F (38 deg C), apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to fuse ratings. COORDINATION Coordinate fuse ratings with utilization equipment nameplate limitations of maximum fuse size and with system short-circuit current levels.
1.08 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 2.02 A. Cooper Bussmann, Inc. Edison Fuse, Inc. Ferraz Shawmut, Inc. Littelfuse, Inc.
CARTRIDGE FUSES Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuses with voltage ratings consistent with circuit voltages. 26 28 13 - 2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Fuses
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. 3.02 A. EXAMINATION Examine fuses before installation. damaged. Reject fuses that are moisture damaged or physically
Examine holders to receive fuses for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance, such as rejection features. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. Evaluate ambient temperatures to determine if fuse rating adjustment factors must be applied to fuse ratings. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FUSE APPLICATIONS Cartridge Fuses: 1. Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK5, time delay. INSTALLATION Install fuses in fusible devices. removing fuse. IDENTIFICATION Install labels complying with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems" and indicating fuse replacement information on inside door of each fused switch and adjacent to each fuse block, socket, and holder. END OF SECTION Arrange fuses so rating information is readable without
3.03 A.
3.04 A.
26 28 13 - 3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Fuses
SECTION 26 28 16 ENCLOSED SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 1.03 A. B. C. 1.04 A. Fusible switches. Nonfusible switches.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS NC: Normally closed. NO: Normally open. SPDT: Single pole, double throw. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS Seismic Performance: Enclosed switches and circuit breakers shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7 . 1. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
1.05 A.
ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breaker, accessory, and component indicated. Include dimensioned elevations, sections, weights, and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, accessories, and finishes. 1. 2. 3. 4. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1. Current and voltage ratings. Short-circuit current ratings (interrupting and withstand, as appropriate). Detail features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices, accessories, and auxiliary components. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers
26 28 16 - 1
5.
Include time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device. Include plans, elevations,
B.
Shop Drawings: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers. sections, details, and attachments to other work. 1. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.
1.06 A. B.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For qualified testing agency. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. 2. 3. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.
C.
Field quality-control reports. 1. 2. 3. Test procedures used. Test results that comply with requirements. Results of failed tests and corrective action taken to achieve test results that comply with requirements.
D. 1.07 A.
Manufacturer's field service report. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches and circuit breakers to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 01 78 23 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following: 1. 2. Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting enclosed switches and circuit breakers. Time-current coordination curves (average melt) for each type and rating of overcurrent protective device; include selectable ranges for each type of overcurrent protective device.
1.08 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Testing Agency Qualifications: Member company of NETA or an NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by NETA to supervise on-site testing.
26 28 16 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches and circuit breakers, overcurrent protective devices, components, and accessories, within same product category, from single source from single manufacturer. Product Selection for Restricted Space: Drawings indicate maximum dimensions for enclosed switches and circuit breakers, including clearances between enclosures, and adjacent surfaces and other items. Comply with indicated maximum dimensions. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NFPA 70. PROJECT CONDITIONS Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated: 1. 2. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F (minus 30 deg C) and not exceeding 104 deg F (40 deg C). Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet (2010 m).
C.
D. E. 1.09 A.
B.
Interruption of Existing Electric Service: Do not interrupt electric service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary electric service according to requirements indicated: 1. 2. 3. Notify Architect no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of electric service. Do not proceed with interruption of electric service without Architect's written permission. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.10 A.
COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with equipment served and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. FUSIBLE SWITCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
26 28 16 - 3
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, with clips or bolt pads to accommodate indicated fuses, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. Accessories: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors. Class R Fuse Kit: Provides rejection of other fuse types when Class R fuses are specified. Lugs: Mechanical type, suitable for number, size, and conductor material. Service-Rated Switches: Labeled for use as service equipment.
C.
2.02 A.
NONFUSIBLE SWITCHES Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution. Siemens Energy & Automation, Inc. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B.
Type HD, Heavy Duty, Single Throw, 240 -V ac, 1200 A and Smaller: UL 98 and NEMA KS 1, horsepower rated, lockable handle with capability to accept three padlocks, and interlocked with cover in closed position. Accessories: 1. 2. Equipment Ground Kit: Internally mounted and labeled for copper and aluminum ground conductors. Neutral Kit: Internally mounted; insulated, capable of being grounded and bonded; labeled for copper and aluminum neutral conductors.
C.
2.03 A.
ENCLOSURES Enclosed Switches and Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, NEMA 250, and UL 50, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location. 1. 2. Indoor, Dry and Clean Locations: NEMA 250, Type 1 . Outdoor Locations: NEMA 250, Type 3R .
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches and circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Enclosed Switches And Circuit Breakers
26 28 16 - 4
B. 3.02 A. B. C. 3.03 A.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. INSTALLATION Install individual wall-mounted switches and circuit breakers with tops at uniform height unless otherwise indicated. Install fuses in fusible devices. Comply with NECA 1. IDENTIFICATION Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." 1. 2. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs. Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate.
3.04 A. B. C.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections. Acceptance Testing Preparation: 1. 2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch and circuit breaker, component, connecting supply, feeder, and control circuit. Test continuity of each circuit.
D.
Tests and Inspections: 1. 2. 3. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. malfunctioning controls and equipment. Replace damaged and
E. F.
Enclosed switches and circuit breakers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports, including a certified report that identifies enclosed switches and circuit breakers and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial action taken, and observations after remedial action.
26 28 16 - 5
3.05 A.
ADJUSTING Adjust moving parts and operable components to function smoothly, and lubricate as recommended by manufacturer. END OF SECTION
26 28 16 - 6
SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. B. Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts. Emergency lighting units. Exit signs. Lighting fixture supports.
1.02 A.
Related Sections: 1. Section 26 09 23 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and contactors.
1.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.04 A.
DEFINITIONS BF: Ballast factor. CCT: Correlated color temperature. CRI: Color-rendering index. HID: High-intensity discharge. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture, including ballast housing if provided. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. JMA 127457 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow BID Documents: February 18, 2013 26 51 00 - 1 Interior Lighting
3. 4. 5. 6.
Ballast, including BF. Energy-efficiency data. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI), and energy-efficiency data for lamps. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. The adjustment factors shall be for lamps, ballasts, and accessories identical to those indicated for the lighting fixture as applied in this Project. a. b. Testing Agency Certified Data: For indicated fixtures, photometric data shall be certified by a qualified independent testing agency. Photometric data for remaining fixtures shall be certified by manufacturer. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products.
1.05 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plan(s) and other details, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Lighting fixtures. Suspended ceiling components. Partitions and millwork that penetrate the ceiling or extends to within 12 inches (305 mm) of the plane of the luminaires. Ceiling-mounted projectors. Structural members to which suspension systems for lighting fixtures will be attached. Other items in finished ceiling including the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. Air outlets and inlets. Speakers. Sprinklers. Smoke and fire detectors. Occupancy sensors. Access panels.
B. C. D. E. 1.06 A.
Qualification Data: For qualified agencies providing photometric data for lighting fixtures. Product Certificates: For each type of ballast for bi-level and dimmer-controlled fixtures, from manufacturer. Field quality-control reports. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. Provide a list of all lamp types used on Project; use ANSI and manufacturers' codes.
26 51 00 - 2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Interior Lighting
1.07 A.
MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. 3. 4. Lamps: 10 for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Plastic Diffusers and Lenses: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type. Fluorescent-fixture-mounted, emergency battery pack: One for every 20 emergency lighting unit. Ballasts: One for every 100 of each type and rating installed. Furnish at least one of each type.
1.08 A. B. 1.09 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Comply with NFPA 70. COORDINATION Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies. WARRANTY Special Warranty for Emergency Lighting Batteries: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer of battery-powered emergency lighting unit agrees to repair or replace components of rechargeable batteries that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period for Emergency Fluorescent Ballast and Self-Powered Exit Sign Batteries: Seven years from date of Substantial Completion. Full warranty shall apply for first year, and prorated warranty for the remaining six years.
1.10 A.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, product(s) indicated on Drawings. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
2.02 A.
26 51 00 - 3
B. C. D. E. F.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. NEMA LE 5 and NEMA LE 5A as applicable.
Where LER is specified, test according to
HID Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598. Where LER is specified, test according to NEMA LE 5B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during relamping and when secured in operating position. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. b. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. UV stabilized.
G.
H.
Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Include recommended lamps and ballasts. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. 1. Label shall include the following lamp and ballast characteristics: a. b. c. d. e. f. "USE ONLY" and include specific lamp type. Lamp diameter code (T-4, T-5, T-8, T-12, etc.), tube configuration (twin, quad, triple, etc.), base type, and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. Lamp type, wattage, bulb type (ED17, BD56, etc.) and coating (clear or coated) for HID luminaires. Start type (preheat, rapid start, instant start, etc.) for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires. ANSI ballast type (M98, M57, etc.) for HID luminaires. CCT and CRI for all luminaires.
2.03 A.
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS General Requirements for Electronic Ballasts: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. Comply with UL 935 and with ANSI C82.11. Designed for type and quantity of lamps served. Ballasts shall be designed for full light output unless another BF, dimmer, or bi-level control is indicated. Sound Rating: Class A . Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. Operating Frequency: 42 kHz or higher. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. BF: 0.88 or higher. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 26 51 00 - 4 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Interior Lighting
B. C.
Luminaires controlled by occupancy sensors shall have programmed-start ballasts. Electronic Programmed-Start Ballasts for T5 or T8 Lamps: Comply with ANSI C82.11 and the following: 1. 2. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit for T5 diameter lamps. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
D.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type. 1. 2. 3. 4. Dimming Range: 100 to 5 percent of rated lamp lumens. Ballast Input Watts: Can be reduced to 20 percent of normal. Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system and lamp type indicated. Control: Coordinate wiring from ballast to control device to ensure that the ballast, controller, and connecting wiring are compatible.
2.04 A.
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS Description: Electronic-programmed rapid-start type, complying with UL 935 and with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement. Sound Rating: Class A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less. BF: 0.95 or higher unless otherwise indicated. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
2.05 A.
EMERGENCY FLUORESCENT POWER UNIT Internal Type: Self-contained, modular, battery-inverter unit, factory mounted within lighting fixture body and compatible with ballast. Comply with UL 924. 1. 2. 3. Emergency Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp(s) continuously at an output of 1400 lumens each. Connect unswitched circuit to battery-inverter unit and switched circuit to fixture ballast. Nightlight Connection: Operate one fluorescent lamp continuously. Test Push Button and Indicator Light: Visible and accessible without opening fixture or entering ceiling space. a. b. 4. Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. Indicator Light: LED indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. 26 51 00 - 5 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Interior Lighting
5.
Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state, constant-current type with sealed power transfer relay.
2.06 A.
BALLASTS FOR HID LAMPS Electronic Ballast for Metal-Halide Lamps: indicated: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. Include the following features unless otherwise
Minimum Starting Temperature: Minus 20 deg F (Minus 29 deg C) for single-lamp ballasts. Rated Ambient Operating Temperature: 130 deg F (54 deg C). Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit. Sound Rating: Class A. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41.1 and IEEE C62.41.2, Category A or better. Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.5 or less. Power Factor: 0.90 or higher. Interference: Comply with 47 CFR 18, Ch. 1, Subpart C, for limitations on electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment. Protection: Class P thermal cutout.
2.07 A. B.
EXIT SIGNS General Requirements for Exit Signs: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Internally Lighted Signs: 1. 2. Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 50,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Self-Powered Exit Signs (Battery Type): Integral automatic charger in a self-contained power pack. a. b. c. Battery: Sealed, maintenance-free, nickel-cadmium type. Charger: Fully automatic, solid-state type with sealed transfer relay. Operation: Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger. Test Push Button: Push-to-test type, in unit housing, simulates loss of normal power and demonstrates unit operability. LED Indicator Light: Indicates normal power on. Normal glow indicates trickle charge; bright glow indicates charging at end of discharge cycle.
d. e.
2.08 A.
FLUORESCENT LAMPS T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches (1220 mm), 2800 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. T8 rapid-start lamps, rated 17 W maximum, nominal length of 24 inches (610 mm), 1300 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life of 20,000 hours unless otherwise indicated. 26 51 00 - 6 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Interior Lighting
B.
C.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at three hours operation per start, and suitable for use with dimming ballasts unless otherwise indicated. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 13 W: 18 W: 26 W: 32 W: 42 W: 57 W: 70 W: T4, double or triple tube, rated 900 initial lumens (minimum). T4, double or triple tube, rated 1200 initial lumens (minimum). T4, double or triple tube, rated 1800 initial lumens (minimum). T4, triple tube, rated 2400 initial lumens (minimum). T4, triple tube, rated 3200 initial lumens (minimum). T4, triple tube, rated 4300 initial lumens (minimum). T4, triple tube, rated 5200 initial lumens (minimum).
2.09 A. 2.10 A. B. C. D. E. F. G.
HID LAMPS Metal-Halide Lamps: ANSI C78.43, with minimum CRI 65 , and color temperature 4000 K. LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS Comply with Section 26 05 29 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch (13-mm) steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm) . Wires for Humid Spaces: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Composition 302 or 304, annealed stainless steel, 12 gage (2.68 mm) . Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch (5-mm) minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. INSTALLATION Lighting fixtures: 1. 2. B. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. Install lamps in each luminaire.
Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Interior Lighting
26 51 00 - 7
C.
Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. 2. 3. 4. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from lighting fixture corners. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4-inch (20-mm) metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. Install at least one independent support rod or wire from structure to a tab on lighting fixture. Wire or rod shall have breaking strength of the weight of fixture at a safety factor of 3.
D.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. 2. 3. 4. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches (1200 mm), brace to limit swinging. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure.
E.
Connect wiring according to Section 26 05 19 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables." IDENTIFICATION Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction and outlet boxes. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal. Prepare a written report of tests, inspections, observations, and verifications indicating and interpreting results. If adjustments are made to lighting system, retest to demonstrate compliance with standards. STARTUP SERVICE Burn-in all lamps that require specific aging period to operate properly, prior to occupancy by Owner. Burn-in fluorescent and compact fluorescent lamps intended to be dimmed, for at least 100 hours at full voltage. END OF SECTION
3.02 A.
3.03 A. B.
3.04 A.
26 51 00 - 8
SECTION 27 15 00 COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 A. RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. SUMMARY Section Includes: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 1.03 A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. UTP cabling. Coaxial cable. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. Cabling system identification products. Cable management system.
1.02 A.
DEFINITIONS BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. LAN: Local area network. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.
27 15 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Communications Horizontal Cabling
1.04 A. B.
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. cabling with Owner's
Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. ACTION SUBMITTALS Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used: a. b. c. Nominal OD. Minimum bending radius. Maximum pulling tension.
1.05 A.
B.
Shop Drawings: 1. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following: a. b. c. 2. Cross-connects. Patch panels. Patch cords.
Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.
1.06 A. B. C. 1.07 A. 1.08 A.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS Qualification Data: For Installer, installation supervisor, and field inspector. Source quality-control reports. Field quality-control reports. CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals. MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. 2. Device Plates: One of each type. Multiuser Telecommunications Outlet Assemblies: One of each type.
27 15 00 - 2
1.09 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff. 1. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Level 2 Installer, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
B.
Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL. 1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.
1.10 A.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING Test cables upon receipt at Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 A. HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols. 1. 2. 3. B. C. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling.
A work area is approximately 100 sq. ft. (9.3 sq. m), and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet (90 m). This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet (4.9 m) to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.
2.02 A. B. C.
27 15 00 - 3
2.03 A. 2.04 A.
BACKBOARDS Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches. UTP CABLE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. ADC. Belden Inc. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. CommScope, Inc. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. Superior Essex Inc. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand. 3M Communication Markets Division. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.
B.
Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair, binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP or MPP, complying with NFPA 262.
2.05 A.
UTP CABLE HARDWARE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. ADC. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. Belden Inc. Dynacom Inc. Hubbell Premise Wiring. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. Panduit Corp. Siemon Co. (The). Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.
B.
General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.
27 15 00 - 4
C.
Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6 . Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. 1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.
D.
E.
Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. 1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.
F. G.
Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 48-inch1200-mm lengths; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end. 1. 2. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.
2.06 A.
COAXIAL CABLE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Alpha Wire Company. Belden Inc. Coleman Cable, Inc. CommScope, Inc. Draka Cableteq USA.
B.
Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM. 1. 2. 3. 4. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. Suitable for indoor installations.
C.
2.07 A.
COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Communications Horizontal Cabling
27 15 00 - 5
1. 2. 3. B. 2.08 A. B.
Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. Siemon Co. (The).
Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms. TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Workstation Outlets: Two-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate. 1. 2. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Section 26 27 26 "Wiring Devices." For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. 3. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.
Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.
2.09 A. B. 2.10 A. B. 2.11 A. B. C. D.
GROUNDING Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 26 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors. Comply with J-STD-607-A. IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. 27 15 00 - 6 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Communications Horizontal Cabling
E. F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. INSTALLATION OF CABLES Comply with NECA 1. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. 2. 3. 4. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications outlet/connectors: a. b. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. C. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet (15 m) from communications equipment room.
Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches (760 mm) and not more than 6 inches (150 mm) from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot- (3-m-) long service loop on each end of cable. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.
UTP Cable Installation: 1. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.
D.
Open-Cable Installation: 1. 2. 3. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches (1524 mm) apart. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items. Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Communications Horizontal Cabling
27 15 00 - 7
E.
Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. b. c. 3. 4. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches (64 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches (150 mm). Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches (300 mm).
2.
Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches (1200 mm). Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches (127 mm).
3.02 A. 3.03 A. B. C.
FIRESTOPPING Comply with requirements in Section 07 84 13 "Penetration Firestopping." GROUNDING Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter. Comply with J-STD-607-A. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch (50-mm) clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground where indicated. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor. IDENTIFICATION Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems." Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. Cable and Wire Identification: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Communications Horizontal Cabling
D.
3.04 A.
B.
C.
27 15 00 - 8
1. 2. 3. 4.
Label each cable within 4 inches (100 mm) of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet (4.5 m). Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a buildingmounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.
b. 5.
6. D.
Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.
Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.
3.05 A. B.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.
2. 3. 4.
5.
UTP Performance Tests: Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Communications Horizontal Cabling
27 15 00 - 9
a.
Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) Wire map. Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). Insertion loss. Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). Return loss. Propagation delay. Delay skew.
6.
Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.
b.
C.
Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION
D. E.
27 15 00 - 10
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 10 00 SITE CLEARING
PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. 1.2 Removal of surface trash and debris. Clearing site of plant life and grass. Removal of concrete and asphalt within existing site.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Services.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A Soils/Geotechnical engineer will be retained by the Owner to observe performance of work in connection with clearing, grading, excavating, backfilling and trenching in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Services.
1.4
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. Conform to local ordinances for handling and disposal of debris. Coordinate clearing Work with utility companies. Obtain necessary permits and comply with requirements of local agencies for dust and air quality controls.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NONE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. B. 3.2 Verify that no known existing features remain on site which would affect completion of this section. Coordinate start of work with Owner's Soils/Geotechnical engineer.
PROTECTION A. B. C. D. Protect utilities that are to remain from damage. Protect any features designated to remain. Protect benchmarks from damage or displacement. Protect adjacent properties from damage to plant life or change in grades unless specifically required under this contract.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Site Clearing
31 10 00-1
Lochsa Engineering
E. 3.3
Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks and/or fire hydrants without permits.
CLEARING A. B. C. D. E. F. Clear areas required for access to site and execution of Work. Remove trash, debris, trees, shrubs and all organic material. Remove stumps, root system to a depth of 6 inches. Clear undergrowth and deadwood without disturbing subsoil. Remove concrete, asphalt, curbs, gutters and other site work designated to be removed or required to be removed for completion of the Work. Conduct clearing operations to minimize interference with adjacent structures and occupancies. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions or unmarked utility lines and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work.
3.4
REMOVAL A. B. C. Remove debris, rock, and extracted plant life from site. Do not dump on adjacent properties. Dispose of all debris, rubbish, etc. legally. Do not burn any material, debris, rubbish, trash, etc.
END OF SECTION
31 10 00-2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Site Clearing
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 20 00 EARTHWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Earthwork including, but not limited to: 1. Preparing and grading of subgrade for slabs on grade, walks, and pavements. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage and moisture control of fill course, slabs on grade. 4. Subbase course for walks and pavements. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill for walls and trenches. 6. Excavating and backfilling of trenches within building lines. 7. Excavating and backfilling for underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical appurtenances. 8. Accessories and related work required. Related Sections: 1. Division 00 31 32 Soils/Geotechnical Report. 2. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements. 3. Section 31 23 16.26 Rock/Caliche Removal 4. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching. 5. Section 32 13 13 - Portland Cement Concrete Paving
B.
1.2
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Document: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Off-site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition. Soils/Geotechnical Report. Geotechnical Evaluation; as prepared for the subject property.
1.3
DEFINITIONS A. B. C. D. E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered to subgrade elevations indicated and subsequent disposal of materials removed. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of excavation or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. Borrow: Soil material obtained off site when sufficient approved soil material is not available from excavations. Subbase Course: Layer placed between subgrade and base course in a paving system or the layer placed between the subgrade and surface of a pavement or walk. Base Course: Layer placed between subbase and surface pavement in a paving system.
31 20 00-1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Earthwork
Lochsa Engineering
F. G. H.
Drainage Fill: Course of washed granular material supporting slab on grade placed to cut off upward capillary flow of pore water. Uncontrolled Fill: Existing fill not properly placed, observed, and tested. Unauthorized Excavation: Removal of materials beyond indicated subgrade elevations or dimensions without specific direction of Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer, is the Contractor's expense. 1. Under footings, foundation bases, or retaining walls, fill unauthorized excavation by extending indicated bottom elevation of footing or base to excavation bottom, without altering required top elevation. When acceptable to Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer, use lean concrete fill to bring elevations to proper position. 2. In locations other than above, backfill and compact unauthorized excavations as specified for authorized excavations of same classification, unless otherwise directed by Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or man made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface. Utilities include on site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within building lines. Additional Excavation: When excavation has reached required subgrade elevations, notify Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Enginner, who will make an inspection of conditions. If Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer determines that bearing materials at required subgrade elevations are unsuitable, continue excavation until suitable bearing materials are encountered and replace excavated material as directed by Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer. The Contract Sum may be adjusted by an appropriate Contract Modification. 1. Removal of unsuitable material and its replacement as directed will be paid on basis of Conditions of the Contract relative to changes in work.
I.
J. K.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements, Codes and Standards: 1. Perform excavation work in compliance with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 495 - Explosive Materials Code. 3. Conform to Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, OffSite Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition. Testing and Inspection Service: Contractor shall employ and pay for a qualified independent soils/geotechnical testing laboratory to perform soil testing and inspection service during earthwork operations. 1. Conform to Soils/Geotechnical Report Recommendations. Testing Laboratory Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, the geotechnical testing laboratory must demonstrate to Architect's/Owners satisfaction, based on evaluation of laboratory submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, that it has the experience and capability to conduct required field and laboratory geotechnical testing without delaying the progress of the Work.
B.
C.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
31 20 00-2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Earthwork
Lochsa Engineering
A. B. C.
Product Data: Manufacturer's technical data for each type of plastic warning tape and filter fabric. Samples: 12" by 12" sample of filter fabric. Test Reports: Submit reports directly to Architect/Owner from the testing services, with copy to Contractor, 1. Submit test reports as required by authorities having jurisdiction and soils/geotechnical report requirements.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Data in subsurface investigation reports was used for the basis of the design and are available to the Contractor for information only. Conditions are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. The Owner is not responsible for interpretations and conclusions drawn from data by the Contractor. 1. Additional test borings and exploratory operations may be performed by Contractor at Contractor's option. No change in Contract Sum will be authorized for additional exploration. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt existing utilities serving adjacent properties except when permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after acceptable temporary utility services have been provided. 1. Provide minimum 72 hours notice to Architect and receive written notice to proceed before interrupting any utility. 2. Protect existing service lines and related structures encountered in the excavation work. Where lines and structures have been undermined due to the excavation work, provide suitable supports. If damaged, repair such lines or structures or arrange for their repair with the proper authorities or companies. 3. Report uncharted or incorrectly charted lines to the Architect for further direction. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shutoff services if lines are active. Use of Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted. Protection of Persons and Property: Barricade open excavations occurring as part of this work and post with warning lights as recommended by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Sheet Piling, Bracing, and Shoring: Take precaution to guard against movement and settlement of new construction, utilities, paving, walks, light standards, piping, and conduit. Provide and design required sheet piling, bracing, and shoring adequate to prevent movement and settlement.
B.
C. D. E.
F.
31 20 00-3
Lochsa Engineering
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. 2.2 Refer to Soils/Geotechnical Report for this project.
ACCESSORIES A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid and alkali resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, 6 inches (150mm) wide and 4 mils thick minimum, continuously inscribed with description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 2'6" deep. Tape Colors: 1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. Topsoil and Fill: Strip topsoil and fill indicated for removal, from the entire developed portion of the site. Stockpile free of admixture of subsoil, stones, clods of earth, plants, roots, sticks, and matter not conducive to plant growth. Remove as indicated, existing on grade and below grade construction encountered. In areas of general grading, remove obstructions encountered to depth of minimum 18 inches below rough grades.
B. C.
D.
E.
3.2
DEWATERING A. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area. 1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent softening of foundation bottoms, undercutting footings, and soil changes detrimental to stability of subgrades and foundations. Provide and maintain pumps, well points, sumps, suction and discharge lines, and other dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.
31 20 00-4
Lochsa Engineering
2.
3. B. 3.3
Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey rain water and water removed from excavations to collecting or runoff areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches. Where required for deep excavations and when encountering ground water, use sump pumps and well points to control water.
Provide erosion control methods in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and recommendations of geotechnical report.
EXCAVATION A. Excavation is unclassified and includes excavation to subgrade elevations indicated, regardless of character of materials and obstructions encountered. Caliche may be encountered during excavation operations. Follow recommendations in Soils/Geotechnical Report for over-excavation and all uncontrolled materials including but not limited to gypsum materials. Replace uncontrolled material with blended soil mix in accordance with Soils/Geotechnical Engineers recommendation. Recompact blended mix and place in a method approved by Soils/Geotechnical Engineer. Follow recommendations in Soils/Geotechnical Report for concrete pavement area subgrade preparation. Contractor is responsible for calculating quantities of uncontrolled material to be excavated and replaced.
B.
C. D. 3.4
STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS A. B. Comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes, ordinances, and requirements of agencies having jurisdiction. Shore and brace where sloping is not possible because of space restrictions or stability of material excavated. Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition until completion of backfilling. Shoring and Bracing: Provide materials for shoring and bracing, such as sheet piling, uprights, stringers, and cross braces, in good serviceable condition. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open. Extend shoring and bracing as excavation progresses.
C.
3.5
STORAGE OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS A. Stockpile excavated materials acceptable for backfill and fill soil materials, including acceptable borrow materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent wind blown dust. 1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of trees indicated to remain. 2. Dispose of excess excavated soil material and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.
31 20 00-5
Lochsa Engineering
3.6
EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES A. Conform to elevations and dimensions shown, and extending a sufficient distance from footings and foundations to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, and other construction and for inspection. 1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations per soils/geotechnical report recommendations.
3.7
EXCAVATION FOR PAVEMENTS A. Cut surface under pavements to comply with cross sections, elevations, and grades as indicated.
3.8
TRENCH EXCAVATION FOR PIPES AND CONDUIT A. B. Comply with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and soils report recommendations. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated. Clearance: 12 inches each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trenches and conduit to depth indicated or required to establish indicated slope and invert elevations and to support bottom of pipe or conduit on undisturbed soil. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove stones and sharp objects to avoid point loading.
C.
D.
3.9
APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. B. Notify Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. When Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer determines unforeseen unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. 1. Unforeseen additional excavation and replacement material will be paid according to the Contract provisions for changes in work. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by the Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer.
C.
3.10
UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavations as directed by Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer.
3.11
COLD WEATHER PROTECTION B. Protect excavation bottoms against freezing when atmospheric temperature is less than 35 degrees F.
Lochsa Engineering
3.12
BACKFILL A. Backfill excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Acceptance of construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp-proofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Testing, inspecting, and approval of underground utilities. 4. Concrete formwork removal. 5. Removal of trash and debris from excavation. 6. Removal of temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. Utility Trench Backfill: Comply with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and soils report recommendations. 1. Coordinate backfilling with soils and utilities testing. Subsurface Drainage Backfill: Comply with applicable requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and soils report recommendations. 1. Coordinate backfilling with soils and utilities testing. Take care during fill and backfill operations to avoid damage to walls. Do not over compact causing excessive lateral earth pressures on walls.
B.
C.
D. 3.13 FILL A.
Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills as recommended by soils report. When subgrade or existing ground surface to receive fill has a density less than that required for fill, scarify and recompact per soils/geotechnical engineer recommendations. Place fill material in layers to required elevations for each location. Refer to civil engineering drawings and specifications and soils/geotechnical data.
B. C. 3.14
COMPACTION A. Moisture Control: Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within plus 2 per cent to plus 4 per cent over optimum for fine grained materials and near optimum moisture content for granular. Refer to soils report recommendations. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace or scarify and air dry satisfactory soil material too wet to compact to specified density. 3. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil material. Ground Surface Preparation: Remove vegetation, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placement of fills per soils report. 1. When existing ground surface has a density less than that specified for particular area classification, break up ground surface, pulverize, moisture condition to optimum moisture content, and compact to required depth and percentage of maximum density.
B.
Lochsa Engineering
C. D. E. 3.15
Stabilization: Refer to soils/geotechnical report recommendations. Place backfill and fill materials in accordance to soils/geotechnical report recommendations. Control soil and fill compaction, providing minimum percentage of density specified in Soils/Geotechnical Report.
GRADING A. Uniformly grade areas within limits of grading under this section, including adjacent transition areas. Smooth finished surface within specified tolerances, compact with uniform levels or slopes between points where elevations are indicated or between such points and existing grades. 1. Provide a smooth transition between existing adjacent grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to conform to required surface tolerances. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Compaction: After grading, compact subgrade surfaces to the depth and indicated percentage of maximum or relative density for each area classification.
B. C. 3.16
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide testing services during construction as required by the jurisdiction having authority. Allow testing service to inspect and approve each subgrade and fill layer before further backfill or construction work is performed. 1. Perform field in place density tests according to ASTM D 1556 (sand cone method), ASTM D 2167 (rubber balloon method), or ASTM D 2937 (drive cylinder method), as applicable. 2. Field density tests may also be performed by the nuclear method in accordance with ASTM D 2922, providing that calibration curves are periodically checked and adjusted to correlate to tests performed using ASTM D 1556. In conjunction with each density calibration check, check the calibration curves furnished with the moisture gages in accordance with ASTM D 3017. 3. If field tests are performed using nuclear methods, make calibration checks of both density and moisture gages at beginning of work, on each different type of material encountered, and at intervals as directed by the Architect. 4. Footing Subgrade: For each strata of soil on which footings will be placed, perform at least one test to verify required design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of each footing subgrade may be based on a visual comparison of each subgrade with related tested strata when acceptable to Architect. 5. Paved Areas and Building Slab Subgrade: Perform at least one field density test of subgrade for every 2,000 sq. ft. of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. In each compacted fill layer, perform one field density test for every 2,000 sq. ft. of overlaying building slab or paved area, but in no case fewer than three tests. 6. Foundation Wall Backfill: In each compacted backfill layer, perform at least one field in place density test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests along a wall face. 7. Trench Backfill: In each compacted initial and final backfill layer, perform at least one field in place density test for each 150 feet or less of trench, but no fewer than two tests.
Lochsa Engineering
B.
When testing agency report subgrades, fills, or backfills are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained.
3.17
PROTECTION A. B. Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions. 1. Scarify or remove and replace material to depth directed by the Architect; reshape and recompact at optimum moisture content to the required density. Settling: Where settling occurs during correction period, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional approved material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. 2. Where settling is measurable or observable at excavated areas during general project warranty period, remove surface (pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.
C.
3.18
DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose off Owner's property. 1. Remove waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose off Owner's property. END OF SECTION
31 20 00-9
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 22 00 GRADING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. 1.2 Excavate subsoil and stockpile material acceptable for re-use. Remove and dispose of excess soil material. Grade and rough contour site. Removal of rock and caliche in the work of this section shall be included in base bid.
REFERENCES A. B. C. American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and Facilities. Soils/Geotechnical Report. Geotechnical Evaluation; as prepared for the subject property. Document: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition.
1.3
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Services. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation. Section 31 23 16.26 Rock/Caliche Removal. Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A soils/geotechnical engineer will be retained by the Owner to observe performance of work in connection with clearing, grading, excavating, backfilling and trenching in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Service.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. B. C. Conform to local ordinances for handling and disposal of debris. Coordinate excavation Work with utility companies. Obtain necessary permits and comply with requirements of local agencies for dust and air quality controls.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NONE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Grading
31 22 00-1
Lochsa Engineering
A. B. C. D. E. F. 3.2
Identify required lines, levels, contours, and datum. Locate and identify all below grade utilities. Stake and flag locations. Identify and flag above grade utilities and aerial utilities. Maintain and protect existing utilities remaining which pass through work area. Notify utility company to remove or relocate utilities where required or shown on drawings. Coordinate start of work with Owner's soils/geotechnical engineer.
PROTECTION A. B. C. D. Protect bench marks, roads, and any features designated to remain. Protect above or below grade utilities which are to remain. Protect adjacent properties from damage to plant life or change in grades unless specifically required under this contract. Do not close or obstruct roadways, sidewalks, hydrants without permits.
3.3
SUBSOIL EXCAVATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Excavate subsoil at proposed structure, exterior slab and pavement as required per Section 31 23 16 - Excavating. Excavate proposed site areas to grades shown on drawings. Stockpile material acceptable for re-use in area designated on or near site acceptable to Owner. Remove excess subsoil not being reused from site. Stockpile subsoil to depth not exceeding 8 feet. Conduct grading operations to minimize interference with adjacent structures and occupancies. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions or unmarked utility lines and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. Rock/caliche to be removed in accordance with the soils/geotechnical engineers recommendations.
3.4
FILLING A. B. C. Fill areas to contours and elevations shown on drawings with an allowance for the thickness of required base courses or topsoil. Fill and compact subsoil in accordance with Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas.
3.5
TOLERANCES A. B. Top Surface of Subgrade in site areas: Plus or minus one inch. Top Surface of Subgrade under Building Pad and Paved areas: Plus or minus 1/2 inch.
31 22 00-2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Grading
Lochsa Engineering
END OF SECTION
31 22 00-3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Grading
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 23 16 EXCAVATION
PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. 1.2 Excavation for building foundations. Excavation for slabs-on-grade and paving. Removal of rock and caliche in the work of this section shall be included in base bid.
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. Section 01 14 00 - Quality Control Services. Section 31 23 16.26 - Rock/Caliche Removal. Section 31 22 00 - Grading. Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. A Soils/Geotechnical engineer will be retained by the Owner to observe performance of work in connection with clearing, grading, excavating, backfilling and trenching in accordance with Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Services.
1.4
FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that survey benchmark and intended elevations for the Work are as indicated.
1.5
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. All work within public rights of way to conform to requirements of Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS NONE PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.2 EXCAVATION REQUIREMENTS A. Excavate and remove from site surficial loose, disturbed or debris laden soils and all soils containing organic material in all areas requiring surface preparation. Over excavate soils: 1. A minimum of 3 feet below bottom of footings. 2. Extend over excavation to a minimum of 5 feet beyond exterior building lines and 2 feet beyond exterior flatwork and pavement.
31 23 16-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Excavation
B.
Lochsa Engineering
3. C. D.
Verify all over excavation limits with the project Soils/Geotechnical Engineer prior to start of Work. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum locations. Locate, identify and protect from damage existing utility lines including but not limited to water, sewer, gas, storm drain, irrigation, electrical lines and other utilities that are proposed to remain. Notify utility company to remove or relocate utilities, if required.
E. D.
Protect plant life, lawns, adjacent private and public property from damage during excavation. Protect bench marks, survey control points, existing structures, walkway overhang support posts, chain link fences, gates and walls, as well as sidewalks, paving and curbs, (proposed to remain), from damage by excavating equipment and vehicular traffic.
3.3
EXCAVATION A. B. C. Excavate subsoil required to accommodate building foundations, slabs-on-grade, site structures and construction operations. Underpin adjacent structures which may be damaged by excavation work, including utilities and pipe chases. Excavate and remove from site surficial loose, disturbed or debris laden soils to expose competent, firm to stiff or medium dense to dense, undisturbed native soils in all areas requiring surface preparation. At all footing locations, if caliche or rock is encountered at required sub grade elevation, over excavate a minimum of one (1) foot below elevation. Machine slope banks to angle of repose or less, until shored. Excavation cut not to interfere with normal forty-five (45) degree bearing splay of foundation. Grade top perimeter of excavation to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. Hand trim excavation. Remove loose matter. Correct unauthorized excavation in accordance with Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling at no extra cost to Owner. Conduct excavation operations to minimize interference with adjacent structures and occupancies. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions or unmarked utility lines and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. Saw cut paved areas to be removed in neat straight lines at right angles. Remove defective pavement proposed to be demolished and excavate existing subgrade to accommodate new sub-base, new paving or other site features. When necessary, grade top perimeter of excavating to prevent surface water from draining into excavation. Hand trim excavations, if necessary, to remove loose soil and other material.
31 23 16-2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Excavation
D. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K. L. M.
Lochsa Engineering
N. O.
Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume Work. Any areas that are over-excavated shall be repaired by replacing the over-excavated materials with Type II Aggregate Base as specified in Subsection 704.03.04 of the Standard Specifications, then compacting the area to 95% of maximum density or as directed by the Architect or Soils/Geotechnical Engineer. Notify Owner of any overexcavated areas prior to commencing repairs. Stockpile excavated material in area designated on-site, remove excess or unsuitable materials from site daily.
END OF SECTION
31 23 16-3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Excavation
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 23 16.26 ROCK/CALICHE REMOVAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. 1.2 Removal of rock and caliche during excavation. Removal of rock and caliche shall be included in base bid.
RELATED SECTIONS A. B. C. D. E. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Services. Section 31 22 00 - Grading. Section 31 23 16 - Excavation. Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching.
1.3
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable ordinances for mechanical disintegration of rock and caliche.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Rock: Solid mineral material with a volume in excess of 1/3 cu yd or solid material that cannot be removed with a 3/4 cu yd capacity power shovel or by bulldozer blade or ripper teeth. Caliche: Material commonly understood locally as "caliche and/or cemented sand and gravel" meeting the same criteria as above for "rock".
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. B. C. 3.2 Verify site conditions and note irregularities affecting work of this Section. Coordinate start of work with Owner's soils/geotechnical engineer. Schedule work to minimize disruption of access to and activities within the existing facilities.
ROCK REMOVAL A. B. Excavate for and remove rock by the mechanical method. Use of explosives is not allowed. Cut away rock to approved depth below bottom of footings per Soils/Geotechnical Engineer.
31 23 16.26-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Rock/Caliche Removal
Lochsa Engineering
C. D. E. F. G. H. 3.3
Remove layers to provide sound and unshattered base for footings and foundations. In utility trenches, excavate to a minimum of 6 inches below invert elevation of pipe and a minimum of 24 inches wider than pipe diameter. Remove excavated material Soils/Geotechnical Engineer. from site unless approved for re-use by the
Correct unauthorized rock removal in accordance with directions of Soils/Geotechnical Engineer. Conduct removal operations to minimize interference with adjacent structures and occupancies. Conduct operations with minimum interference to public or private accesses. Maintain egress and access at all times.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide for visual inspection of bearing surfaces and cavities formed by removed rock under provisions of Sections 01 40 00. END OF SECTION
31 23 16.26-2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Rock/Caliche Removal
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 23 17 TRENCHING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. 1.2 Excavate trenches for utilities from 5 feet outside building to municipal utilities or existing on-site distribution or collection systems. Compacted bedding under fill over utilities to subgrade elevations. Backfilling and compaction. Removal of rock and caliche in the work of this section shall be included in base bid.
FILL MATERIALS A. Types A, B, and C materials as specified in Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling.
1.3
BED MATERIALS A. Type A - Aggregate: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction offsite Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Subsection 704.03.04 - Type II Aggregate Base. Type B - Sand: Natural sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, or organic matter; graded, within the following limits (ASTM C136): Sieve Size No. 4 No. 14 No. 50 No. 100 No. 200 Percent Passing 100 10 to 100 5 to 90 4 to 30 0
B.
1.4
EXCAVATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. Excavate subsoil required for storm drain, sanitary sewer, water, electrical and telephone conduit. Excavate to a minimum of 6 inches below invert elevation of pipe and a minimum of 24 inches wider than pipe diameter. In addition to other specified requirements, cut trenches sufficiently wide to enable installation of utilities and allow inspection. Excavation shall not interfere with normal 45 degree bearing splay of foundations. Hand trim excavation. Hand trim for bell and spigot pipe joints. Remove loose matter. Correct areas over-excavated by error in accordance with Section 31 23 23 Backfilling. Stockpile excavated material in area approved by Owner and remove excess material not being used, from site.
31 23 17-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Trenching
Lochsa Engineering
H. I. J. 1.5
Conduct excavation operations to minimize interference with adjacent structures and occupancies. Notify Owner of unexpected subsurface conditions or unmarked utility lines and discontinue affected Work in area until notified to resume work. If rock/caliche is encountered proceed in accordance with Section 31 23 16.26 Rock/Caliche Removal.
BEDDING A. B. Support pipe and conduit during placement and compaction of bedding fill. Bedding shall comply with Section 208.03.02 of the Uniform Standards and with the individual sections of these specifications
1.6
BACKFILLING A. B. C. D. E. Backfill trenches in accordance with Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling. All utility trenches leading into the structures should be backfilled with compacted non-pervious fill. Backfill trenches to contours and elevations with unfrozen materials. Systematically backfill to allow proper mechanical compaction. porous, frozen or spongy sub grade surfaces. Do not backfill over
Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage conduit duct in trench. All utility pipe and conduit shall be bedded in a minimum of six (6) inches of sand or other suitable material unless shown otherwise. Compaction and use of optimum moisture content are covered under Section 31 23 23. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. Remove surplus backfill materials from site. Leave fill material stockpile areas completely free of excess fill materials. END OF SECTION
F. G. H.
31 23 17-2
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Trenching
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 23 19 DEWATERING PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUMMARY A. This Section provides for construction dewatering.
1.2
RELATED DOCUMENTS A. B. Documents affecting work of this Section include but are not necessarily limited to the Conditions of the Contract and Sections in Division 1 of these Specifications. Related Sections include the following 1. Division 1, 2. Division 2, Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities. Section 31 23 16: Excavation.
1.3
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Dewatering Performance: Design, provide, test, operate, monitor, and maintain a dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable sub grades. 1. 2. 3. 4. Work includes removing temporary dewatering system when no longer needed. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion is controlled, stability of excavations and constructed slopes is maintained, and flooding of excavation and damage to structures are prevented. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For dewatering system. Show arrangement, locations, and details of wells and well points; locations of headers and discharge lines; and means of discharge and disposal of water. 1. 2. B. Include layouts of piezometers and flow-measuring devices for monitoring performance of dewatering system. Include a written report outlining control procedures to be adopted if dewatering problems arise.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. Field Test Reports: Before starting excavation, submit test results and computations demonstrating that dewatering system is capable of meeting performance requirements.
31 23 19-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dewatering
C.
Lochsa Engineering
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to assume engineering responsibility and perform dewatering who has specialized in installing dewatering systems similar to those required for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall prepare all studies, testing, analyses and reports necessary to support and allow permitting Contractor shall be solely responsible to submit, obtain, manage and close-out all necessary permits.
B.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by the Owner or others unless permitted in writing by the Architect and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated. Project Site Information: A soils/geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of the soils/geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of the subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by the geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data by Contractor. 1. C. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations as necessary.
B.
Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer or surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly identify benchmarks and record existing elevations. 1. During dewatering, resurvey benchmarks weekly, maintaining an accurate log of surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify Architect if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident in adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations. 1. 2. B. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared sub grades, and from flooding site and surrounding area. Protect sub grades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water accumulation.
Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
Lochsa Engineering
Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations. 3.2 DEWATERING A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances, water disposal, and surface-water controls as required for this project. Before excavation below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to specified levels and then operate it continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation, construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry sub grades. Install sufficient dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. D. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, sub grade softening, and slope instability.
B.
C.
Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below sub grade elevations of foundations, drains, sewers, and other excavations. 1. Maintain piezometric water level a minimum of 24 inches below surface of excavation.
E.
Dispose of water removed from excavations in a manner to avoid endangering public health, property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a manner to avoid inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall be solely responsible to obtain all necessary authorization and permits to allow discharge/disposal of water to any and all facilities. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to maintain dewatering on a continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails. If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense. 1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below overlying construction. Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering
F.
G. 3.3
Damages: operations.
OBSERVATION WELLS A. B. C. Provide, take measurements, and maintain at least the minimum number of observation wells as may be required by authorities having jurisdiction. Observe and record daily elevation of ground water and piezometric water levels in observation wells. Repair or replace, within 24 hours, observation wells that become inactive, damaged, or destroyed. Suspend construction activities in areas where observation wells are not
Lochsa Engineering
functioning properly until reliable observations can be made. Add or remove water from observation-well risers to demonstrate that observation wells are functioning properly. 1. Fill observation wells, remove piezometers, and fill holes when dewatering is completed. END OF SECTION
31 23 19-4
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Dewatering
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 31 23 23 BACKFILLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. B. C. D. E. 1.2 Building perimeter and site structure backfilling to sub grade elevations. Site filling and backfilling. Fill and base under slabs-on-grade, cart paths and sidewalks, Consolidation and compaction. Fill for over-excavation.
RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control Services.
1.3
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. ANSI/ASTM C136 - Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. ANSI/ASTM D1556 and ANSI/ASTM D2922 - Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone or Nuclear Density Method. ANSI/ASTM D1557 - Test Methods for Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil-Aggregate Mixtures Using 10 lb Rammer and 18 inch Drop. Parts II and III of the Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction offsite Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, and revisions, supplements or addenda thereto.
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. B. A Soils/Geotechnical engineer will be retained by the Owner to observe performance of work in connection with clearing, grading, excavating, backfilling and trenching. Conform to Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FILL MATERIALS A. Type A - Base: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction off-site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Subsection 704.03.04 - Type II Aggregate Base. Type B - Structural Backfill: Structural Backfill is defined as compacted fill placed for the support of footings, slabs-on-grade, exterior concrete flatwork, retaining walls and pavements. Structural Backfill, both on-site and imported, shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Free of organic material and miscellaneous debris.
31 23 23-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Backfiling
B.
Lochsa Engineering
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. C.
Contain no material larger than 4 inch nominal size. Non-expansive Liquid limit less than 35 Plasticity index less than 15 Less than 0.5 percent soluble sodium sulfate salts. Less than 2 percent solubility. Less than 40 percent passing the No. 200 sieve. Approved by Soils/Geotechnical Engineer.
Type C - Site Backfill: All compacted fill not classified as Structural Backfill. Site Backfill may be excavated on-site soils or imported soils meeting the soils requirements of Structural Backfill.
2.2
USE OF ON-SITE SOILS AS FILL A. B. Existing, on-site, natural soils may be used as fill subject to the approval of the Soils/Geotechnical engineer. Critical soluble, surficial salt-laden soils excavated from the site shall not be re-used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. 3.2 Verify in writing to Owner that fill materials to be reused are acceptable to Soils/Geotechnical Engineer.
PREPARATION A. Exposed natural soils shall be scarified to a depth of 12 inches, adjusted to optimum to 3 percent over optimum moisture content. Compact to a least 95 percent relative compaction based on the maximum dry density determined by ASTM D 1557. Cut out soft areas of sub grade. Backfill and compact to density equal to or greater than requirements for subsequent backfill material. If caliche is encountered during scarification, over excavate 1 foot below required grade and backfill with Structural Backfill.
B. C. 3.3
BACKFILLING A. B. C. D. E. F. Backfill areas to contours and elevations with unfrozen, uncontaminated, approved materials. Systematically backfill to allow maximum time for natural settlement. Do not backfill over porous, wet, frozen or spongy sub grade surfaces. Fill: Place and compact materials in continuous layers not exceeding 8 inches loose thickness. Employ a placement method that does not disturb or damage foundation damp proofing, foundation waterproofing and protective cover, or utilities in trenches. Maintain optimum moisture content of backfill materials to attain required compaction density. Backfill against supported foundation walls. Do not backfill against unsupported foundation walls.
Lochsa Engineering
G. H. I. 3.4
Slope grade away from building minimum 1 inch in 10 ft, unless noted otherwise. Make grade changes gradual. Blend slope into level areas. Remove surplus backfill materials from site.
TOLERANCES A. Top Surface of backfilling under building pad and slabs-on-grade: Plus or minus one-half (1/2) inch from required elevations.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. C. D. E. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00. Tests and analysis of fill material will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1557. Compaction testing will be performed in accordance with ANSI/ASTM D1556 and ANSI/ASTM D2922. Frequency of Tests: As directed by the Soils/Geotechnical Engineer but not less than one test per lift per 5,000 sq. ft. of surface area. Proof roll compacted fill surfaces under slabs-on-grade and paving.
3.6
PROTECTION A. Recompact fills subjected to vehicular traffic.
3.7
SCHEDULES A. Structural Backfill to sub grade elevations under footings, slabs-on-grade, exterior concrete flatwork, retaining walls and pavement. 1. Type B Structural Backfill 2. Adjusted to between 2 percent plus or minus of optimum moisture content 3. Compacted to 95 percent relative compaction based on maximum dry density determined by ASTM D 1557. 4. 6 to 8 inch lifts. Site Backfill: 1. Type C Site Backfill 2. Compacted to 85 percent relative compaction based on maximum dry density determined by ASTM D 1557. Base under Interior Slabs-On-Grade and Exterior Concrete Flatwork 1. Type A Base 2. Minimum 12 inches thick 3. Compacted to 95 percent relative compaction based on maximum dry density determined by ASTM D1557. Base under Asphalt Pavement 1. Type A Base 2. Minimum 6 inches thick. Provide greater thickness if shown on drawings. 3. Compacted to 95 percent relative compaction based on maximum dry density determined by ASTM D1557. Fill to correct over excavation: Contractors Option 1. Type A fill, compacted to 95 percent as tested utilizing ASTM D-1557
B.
C.
D.
E.
Lochsa Engineering
2.
Lean concrete with a minimum compressive strength of 1000 psi. Method to be approved by Soils/Geotechnical engineer.
END OF SECTION
31 23 23-4
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Backfiling
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 32 01 16 ASPHALT PAVING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Asphaltic concrete paving. B. Prime and tack coating and surface sealer except at outdoor courts. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01 40 00 - Quality Control. B. Section 31 22 00 - Grading. C. Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling. 1.3 REFERENCES A. The Asphalt Institute - Manual MS-4 - The Asphalt Handbook. B. The Asphalt Institute - Manual MS-13 - Asphalt Surface Treatments and Asphalt Penetration Macadam. C. ASTM D946 - Penetration-Grades Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction. D. Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works' Construction, Offsite Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada (Latest Edition) herein referred to as Uniform Standard Specifications. E. Uniform Building Code (UBC), 1997 Edition. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with Divisions II and III of the Uniform Standard Specifications. B. Mixing Plant: Conform to Uniform Standard Specifications. C. Obtain materials from same source throughout. 1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not place asphalt when base surface temperature is less than 50 degrees F, or when surface is wet or frozen. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Asphalt Cement: USS 703.01.01 AC-20 B. Aggregate for Bituminous Base and Surface Course Mix: Type 3 aggregate, Uniform Standard Specifications, Section 705.03 (1/2 inch maximum aggregate size).
JMA 127457 Bid Documents: February 18, 2013 32 01 16-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Asphalt Paving
Lochsa Engineering
2.2
ACCESSORIES A. Prime Coat: Homogeneous, medium curing, liquid asphalt MC-70 per Uniform Standard Specifications. B. Tack Coat: Homogeneous, slow setting, liquid asphalt SS-1h or CCS-1h per Uniform Standard Specifications. C. Seal Coat: Homogenous, slow setting, liquid asphalt SS-1h or CCS-1h, conforming to Section 407.02.01 Uniform Standard Specifications. D. Sand Blotter: Conforming to Section 705.03.06 Uniform Standard Specifications.
2.3
ASPHALT PAVING MIX A. Use dry material to avoid foaming. Mix uniformly. B. Binder Course: 4.5 to 6 percent of asphalt cement by weight in mixture in accordance with Asphalt Institute Manual MS-4 and approved job mix.
2.4
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Provide mix design for asphalt under provisions of Section 01 40 00. B. Submit proposed mix design for review and approval prior to commencement of work. C. Test samples in accordance with Uniform Standard Specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that compacted subgrading and granular base is dry and ready to support paving and imposed loads. B. Verify gradients and elevations of base are correct. C. Verify gradients and slopes at all handicapped parking stalls do not exceed UBC requirements. 3.2 SUBBASE A. In accordance with Section 31 23 23 - Backfilling. 3.3 PREPARATION - PRIMER A. Apply primer on base or subbase over subgrade surface at uniform rate of 1/3 gal/sq. yd. B. Application of blotter material (if required): Standard Specifications. 3.4 PREPARATION - TACK COAT A. Apply tack coat on asphalt or concrete surfaces at uniform rate of 1/4 gal/sq. yd.
JMA 127457 Bid Documents: February 18, 2013 32 01 16-2 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Asphalt Paving
Shall conform to Section 406.03.05 Uniform
Lochsa Engineering
B. Also apply to contact surfaces of curbs, gutter, walls, sidewalks, lower asphalt lifts or other similar surfaces. C. Coat surfaces of manhole and catch basin lids, frames, etc. with oil to prevent bond with asphalt pavement. Do not tack coat these surfaces. 3.5 PLACING ASPHALT PAVEMENT - DOUBLE COURSE A. Place asphalt binder course within 24 hours of applying primer or tack coat. B. Place binder course to a maximum of 1-1/2 inches compacted thickness. C. Place wearing course within two (2) hours of placing and compacting binder course. D. Place wearing course to achieve a total overall compacted minimum thickness of two (2) inches where parking areas are noted on drawings and three (3) inches where bus and truck areas are noted. E. Install gutter drainage grilles and frames and manholes in correct position and elevation. F. Compact pavement by rolling to requirements of Uniform Standard Specifications 401.03.12. Do not displace or extrude pavement form position. Hand compact in areas inaccessible to rolling equipment. G. Develop rolling with consecutive passes to achieve even and smooth finish, without roller marks. 3.6 TOLERANCES A. Flatness: Maximum variation of 1/8 inch measured with 10 foot straight edge. B. Scheduled Compacted Thickness: Within 1/4 inch. C. Variation from True Elevation: Within 1/4 inch. Such variation will not be allowed if ponding of water results. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00. B. Take samples and perform tests in accordance with Uniform Standard Specifications. 3.8 PROTECTION A. Immediately after placement, protect pavement from mechanical injury.
END OF SECTION
32 01 16-3
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Asphalt Paving
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 32 13 13 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Construction of walkways, sidewalks, driveways, curbs and gutters 2. Related accessories required for complete installation. Related Sections: 1. Document 00 31 32 Soils/Geotechnical Report. 2. Section 31 20 00 Earthwork.
B.
1.2
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. American Concrete Institute (ACI). American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM). American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and Facilities. Soils/Geotechnical Report. Geotechnical Evaluation; as prepared for the subject property. Document: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements, Codes, and Standards: 1. Comply with applicable subsections the Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition. 2. Local governing regulations having jurisdiction over work. 3. American Concrete Institute, ACI 304 Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete. 4. American Concrete Institute, ACI 305 Hot Weather Concreting. 5. American Concrete Institute, ACI 306 Cold Weather Concreting. 6. Disability Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements for the American Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) for Buildings and Facilities, including updates and revisions. Testing Laboratory: Employ an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the Owner, to perform tests and submit reports. 1. Responsibility: To conduct and interpret tests; submit written reports stating compliance of test specimens to requirements specifically noting deviations.
B.
1.4
SUBMITTALS A. B. Shop Drawings: Layout showing sidewalks with expansion and control joints. Mix Design: ACI 301; concrete mix designs, including report on designs strength tests. 1. Submit written report for each proposed concrete mix a minimum of 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed and are acceptable to Architect.
32 13 13-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Portland Cement Concrete Paving
Lochsa Engineering
2.
Adjust mix designs when materials characteristics, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant. Do not use concrete mixes until submitted to and reviewed by Architect.
C.
Test Reports: Submit 2 copies of test or evaluation reports for concrete materials and mix designs. 1. Tests of materials, or review of test reports available from suppliers. 2. Tests of field specimens. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit dated delivery tickets. Material Certifications required for concrete, joint fillers, reinforcement, admixtures, hardeners, curing materials, and accessories.
D. E. 1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Forms: Steel, wood, or other suitable material of size and strength to resist movement during concrete placement and to retain horizontal and vertical alignment until removal. Use straight forms, free of distortion and defects. 1. Use flexible spring steel forms or laminated boards to form radius bends as required. 2. Coat forms with nonstaining form release agent that do not discolor or deface surface of concrete. Welded Wire Mesh: ASTM A 185; welded plain cold drawn steel wire fabric, lat sheets. Reinforcing Bars: Deformed steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain steel bars, ASTM A 615, Grade 60. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. Metal Expansion Cap: Provide 1 for end of each dowel bar in expansion joints. Design caps with one end closed and minimum length of 3 inches to allow bars movement of minimum 1 inch. Hook Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A bolts, internally and externally threaded. Design hook bolt joint assembly to hold coupling against pavement form and in position during concreting operations, and to permit removal without damage to concrete or hook bolt. Concrete Materials: 1. Portland Cement, ASTM C150-Type V. Normal Weight Aggregates: Clean, coarse aggregate and gravel, free from foreign matter, conforming to ASTM C33. 1. Maximum Aggregate Size: 3/4 inches. 2. Do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain substances causing spalling.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Portland Cement Concrete Paving
B. C. D. E.
F.
G. H.
32 13 13-2
Lochsa Engineering
I. J.
Moisture Barrier: ASTM E 154, minimum 8 mil polyethylene sheet. Expansion Joint Materials: 1. Preformed Asphalt Joint Filler: ASTM D 994; extruding, self sealing expansion joints (not sealed). 2. Backer Rod: Provide Cera-Rod Red Rod, heat resistant backer rod for hot and cold applied sealers by W.R. Meadows. Air Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Liquid Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A unless other type acceptable to Architect. Bonding Compound: Polyvinyl acetate or acrylic base, rewettable type. Subject to compliance with requirements. Admixtures: Do not use admixtures, other than air entrainment, without prior written approval by Architect.
K. L. M. N. 2.2
CONCRETE MIX, DESIGN, AND TESTING A. B. Comply with applicable requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 304 for concrete mix design, sampling and testing, and quality control and as specified. Delivery Tickets: Provide copies of each delivery tickets for concrete delivered to the job site with time and date of departure from plant and time and date of pouring at site stamped on ticket. If water is added to concrete at time of delivery, indicate amount added on delivery ticket. Signature of person authorizing addition of water is required on delivery ticket. Design mix to product normal weight concrete consisting of Portland cement, aggregate, water reducing, air entraining mixture and water to produce the following properties: 1. Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi, minimum at 28 days in accordance with Standard Method of Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Laboratory, ASTM C l92 and Standard Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinder, ASTM C 39. 2. Slump Limits: Maximum 4 inches. 3. Air Entrained: 5 to 7 percent by volume. Ready Mixed Concrete: ASTM C 94. Mix concrete until materials are uniformly distributed. Discharge completely before recharging mixer. Proportion aggregate to produce a mixture which readily works into corners and angles of forms and around reinforcement with specified method of placing without segregation of materials or accumulation of excess free water on the surface.
C.
D. E.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION A. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. Proof roll prepared subbase surface checking for unstable areas and need for additional compaction. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.
3.2
FORM CONSTRUCTION
32 13 13-3
Lochsa Engineering
A.
Set forms to required grades and lines, braced and secured. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so that forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement. Verify completed formwork for grade and alignment to following tolerances: 1. Top of forms not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis, not more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet. Clean forms after each use and coat with form release agent as required to ensure separation from concrete without damage. Step Treads: Slope step treads at 1/4 inch per foot to drain. Sidewalks: Secure in place using stakes or braces, with the top edges true to line and grade. Set forms so slabs have a maximum 2% cross slope and maximum 5% longitudinal slope.
B.
C. D. E.
3.3
REINFORCEMENT A. Place reinforcement as specified in Civil Improvement plans.
3.4
CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. B. Comply with requirements of ACI 301 and ACI 304 for mixing and placing concrete and as specified. Do not place concrete until subbase and forms have been checked for line and grade. Moisten subbase if required for uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until required finish elevation and alignment is reached. Place concrete by methods to prevent segregation of mix. Consolidate concrete along face of forms and adjacent to transverse joints with internal vibrator. Keep vibrator away from joint assemblies, reinforcement, or side forms. Use square faced shovels for hand spreading and consolidation. Consolidate with care to prevent dislocation of reinforcing, dowels, and joint devices. Lay moisture barrier over compacted leveling course in as long lengths as possible and lap 5 inches minimum. Place top lap on direction of concrete placement. Lay moisture barrier immediately before placing concrete to avoid tearing and puncturing the moisture barrier. Replace damaged sheets before placing concrete. Use bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces.
C.
D.
E.
F. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints as far as possible. If interrupted for more than hour, place a construction joint. G. Curbs and Gutters: When automatic machine placement is used for curb and gutter placement, submit revised mix design and laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce curbs and gutters to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed concrete. 3.5 JOINTS
Lochsa Engineering
A.
Construct expansion, weakened plane (contraction), and construction joints true to line with face perpendicular to surface of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to the centerline. When joining existing structures, place transverse joints to align with previously placed joints, unless otherwise indicated. Contraction Joints: Provide weakened plane (contraction) joints, sectioning concrete into areas as shown on drawings. Construct weakened plane joints for a depth equal to at least 1/4 concrete thickness, as follows: 1. Tooled Joints: Form weakened plane joints in fresh concrete by grooving top portion with a recommended cutting tool and finishing edges with a jointer. 2. Sawed Joints: Form weakened plane joints with powered saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or diamond rimmed blades. Cut joints into hardened concrete as soon as surface will not be torn, abraded, or damaged by cutting action. 3. Inserts: Use embedded strips of metal or sealed wood to form weakened-plane joints. Set strips into plastic concrete and carefully remove strips after concrete has hardened. 4. Construct contraction joints in slabs-on-ground. Saw cut 1/8" x 1/4" of the slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. Weakened joints shall be 10' and Isolation Joints every 30'. 5. Construct isolation joints at points of contact between flatwork and vertical surfaces, such as, foundation walls, at existing abutting slabs and elsewhere, as indicated on drawings. Construction Joints: Place construction joints at end of placements and at locations where placement operations are stopped for more than hour, except where such placements terminate at expansion joints. 1. Construct joints using standard metal keyway section forms. 2. Where load transfer slip dowel devices are used, install so one end of each dowel bar is free to move. Expansion Joints: Provide premolded joint filler for expansion joints abutting concrete curbs, structures, walks, and other fixed objects. 1. Extend joint fillers full width and depth of joint, not less than inch or more than 1 inch below finished surface where joint sealer is indicated. If no joint sealer, place top of joint filler flush with finished concrete surface. 2. Furnish joint fillers in one piece lengths for full width being placed wherever possible. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip joint filler sections together. 3. Protect top edge of joint filler during concrete placement with a metal cap or other temporary material. Remove protection after concrete has been placed on both sides of joint. Sidewalks: Divide surface with grooves extending 1/4 depth of walks plus 1/4 inch minimum, minimum 1/8 inch and maximum 1/4 inch width edged with an edging tool having 1/4 inch radius. Follow joint pattern indicated. Where no joint pattern is indicated request direction in writing from Civil. 1. Expansion Joints: Install preformed inch joint fillers. Set top of joint filler 1 inch below surface for joints receiving sealant. Where the walks are constructed adjacent to pavements or curbs having expansion joints, place expansion joints in walks opposite existing expansion joints as near as practicable. Place expansion joints where walks abut existing walks or curbs, between walks and structures
B. C.
D.
E.
F.
32 13 13-5
Lochsa Engineering
extending through walks, and at locations where thicker expansion joint is not specifically required. a. Provide contraction joints where required to ensure that undesirable thermal and shrinkage cracking of slabs are minimized. b. Time work so fresh concrete does not ravel and random cracking does not occur. c. Clean, prime joints, and fill with sealing compound. 3.6 CONCRETE FINISHING A. After striking off and consolidating concrete, smooth surface by screening and floating. Use hand methods only where mechanical floating is not possible. Adjust floating to compact surface and produce uniform texture. After floating, test surface for trueness with a 10 ft. straightedge. Distribute concrete as required to remove surface irregularities, and refloat repaired areas to provide a continuous smooth finish. Work edges of slabs, gutters, back top edge of curb, and formed joints with an edging tool, and round to inch radius. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surface. Sidewalks: Provide thickness required, but not less than 5 inches thick. Install reinforcement 2 inches below top of concrete. Place concrete in successive batches for the entire width of slab, struck off from to 3/4 inches higher than finished slab, tamped until voids are removed and free mortar appears on the surface. Thoroughly spade along edges, strike off to true grade, and finish to true and even surface with floats and trowels. Do not remove forms for 24 hours after concrete has been placed. After form removal, clean ends of joints and point up any minor honeycombed areas. Remove and replace areas or sections with major defects, as directed by Architect. Finishing: After completion of floating and when excess moisture or surface sheen has disappeared, complete troweling and finish surface. 1. Sidewalks: Perform final troweling steel trowel, leaving a smooth, even surface. After water sheen has disappeared, begin final finish of light brooming. Draw broom across walks at right angles to edges of walk, with adjacent strokes slightly overlapping, to produce uniform, slightly roughened surface with paralleled broom marks.
B.
C. D.
E.
F.
3.7
CURING A. Protect freshly deposited concrete from premature drying and maintain without drying at a relatively constant temperature for the period of time necessary for the hydration of the cement and proper hardening of the concrete. Use membrane forming curing and sealing compound or approved moist curing methods.
3.8
CONCRETE SEALING A. B. C. Do not apply until resin base curing compound has a minimum of 30 days to dissipate and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Test for pH level, according to repellent manufacturer's instructions to ensure chemical bond to silicates minerals. Protect adjoining work, including sealant bond surfaces, from spillage or blow over of water repellent. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces of aluminum and glass where
Lochsa Engineering
possibility of water repellent being deposited on surfaces exists. Cover live plants and grass. Immediately clean water repellent from adjoining surfaces, complying with manufacturer's cleaning recommendations. D. Coordination with Sealants: Do not apply water repellent until sealants for joints adjacent to surfaces receiving water repellent treatment have been installed and cured. 1. Water repellent work may precede sealant application only if sealant adhesion and compatibility have been tested and verified using substrate, water repellent, and sealant materials identical to those used in the work. Apply heavy saturation spray coating of water repellent on surfaces indicated for treatment using low pressure spray equipment. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations using airless spraying procedure.
E.
3.9
REPAIRS AND PROTECTIONS A. B. Repair or replace broken or defective concrete, as directed by Owner at no additional expense to Owner. Drill test cores where directed by Civil/Owner when necessary to determine magnitude of cracks or defective areas. Fill drilled core holes in satisfactory pavement areas with portland cement concrete bonded to pavement with epoxy adhesive. Protect concrete from damage until acceptance of work. Exclude traffic from pavement for a minimum of 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain pavement as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur. Sweep concrete walks and wash free of stains, discolorations, dirt, and foreign material before final inspection. END OF SECTION
C.
D.
32 13 13-7
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 32 16 13 CONCRETE CURBS, GUTTERS, SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. 1.2 Section Includes: Concrete curbs, gutters, sidewalks and driveways as shown on the Drawings.
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable Federal, State and local ordinances. Where soils/geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings state more restrictive requirements, the requirements of the soils/geotechnical report, General Structural Notes, or notes on drawings shall govern.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. B. C. D. E. Concrete for Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks Concrete for Driveways: Comply with Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada. Expansion Joint Filler: Expansion joint filler materials shall consist of premolded strips of a durable resilient compound and comply with ASTM D-1751, D-1752, or D-2628.. Epoxy Resin: Sta-Crete Epoxy Resin No. 15-J or 20. Curing Compound: ASTM C309, Type 1, Class B; acrylic type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Cut existing pavements and concrete joined by new construction as follows: 1. 2. The removal of existing improvements shall be conducted in such a manner as not to injure utilities or any portion of the improvement that is to remain in place. Sidewalks shall be removed to a distance required to maintain a maximum slope for the replaced portion of sidewalk, for one inch per foot and all driveways shall be removed to a distance as required by standard details. Existing concrete driveway curbs and gutters shall be removed to the right-ofway line and the new end of curb faced. Portland cement concrete pavements, curbs and gutters and sidewalks designated on the plans for removal shall be saw-cut at match lines, and removed. Removal of trees, stumps, irrigation structures, storm water inlets, headwalls and other items in the right-of-way shall be done in accordance with Section 02 41 00. Backfill and compaction of all excavated areas shall be compacted to the densities as prescribed in Sections 31 23 23 and 31 22 00. All surplus materials shall be immediately hauled from the jobsite and disposed of in a legal manner.
32 16 13-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks And Driveways
3. 4.
5.
6. 7.
Lochsa Engineering
8.
Pavement Widening or Extensions: Existing pavements which are to be matched by pavement widening or pavement extension shall be trimmed to a neat true line with straight vertical edged free from irregularities with a saw specifically designed for this purpose. The minimum depth of cut shall be 1 1/2 inches or D/4, whichever is greater. a. The existing pavement shall be cut and trimmed after placement of required ABC and just prior to placement of asphalt concrete for pavement widening or extension, and the trimmed edges shall be painted with a light coating of asphalt cement or emulsified asphalt immediately prior to constructing the new abutting asphalt concrete pavements. No extra payment shall be provided for these items and all costs incurred in performing this work shall be incidental to the widening or pavement extension. The exact point of matching, termination, and overlay may be adjusted in the field, if necessary, by the Owners Representative.
b. 9.
Pavement to be Removed: Existing asphalt pavement to be removed for trenches or for other underground construction or repairs shall be cut by a device capable of making a neat, straight and smooth cut without damaging adjacent pavement that is not to be removed. The Owners Representatives decision as to the acceptability of the cutting device and manner of operation shall be final. If saw cutting, only is to be utilized, it will be so specified in the plans or special provisions. a. Pavement replacement for cuts essentially parallel to the street centerline and greater than 50 feet in length shall be two-course pavement replacement as hereinafter specified. Pavement replacement for cuts parallel to the street centerline less than 50 feet in length, transverse cuts, bell holes and similar small areas shall match gradation and thickness of the existing pavement. These onecourse pavement patches shall be compacted with vibratory roller to the same density specified for asphalt concrete pavements. In lieu of cutting pipe trenches across driveways, curbs and gutters, sidewalks, alley entrances, and other types of pavements, the Contractor may, when approved by the Owners Representatives, elect to tunnel or bore under such structures and pavements.
b.
c.
B. C.
Construct sub grade and compacted true to grades and lines shown on Drawings and as specified in Sections 31 23 23 and 31 22 00. Remove soft or unsuitable material to a depth of not less than 18 inches below sub grade under access drives and truck parking areas, and 12 inches below sub grade under automobile parking areas. Replace with approved materials. Material displaced during construction shall not be placed on base or surfacing material already in place on roadway. Do not place excavated material in manner as to interfere with access to property or traffic flow in street. Remove concrete sidewalks and driveways, which are necessarily disturbed by construction to a distance required to maintain a slope, as indicated by Standard Details or not to exceed one inch per foot where sidewalks are concerned.
D.
E.
3.2
CONCRETE CONSTRUCTION A. Construct concrete curbs, gutters and sidewalks by conventional use of forms, or by means of a curb and gutter machine when approved by Construction Manager. 1. If machines designed specifically for such work and approved by the Construction Manager are used, results must be equal to or better than that produced by use of forms.
Lochsa Engineering
2. 3. B. C. D. E.
If the results are not satisfactory to Construction Manager, discontinue use. Requirements applicable to use of forms shall apply to use of machines.
Extruded Concrete Curbs Without Gutter: Provide extruded concrete formed-in-place curbs to cross section and locations as shown on Drawings and as specified. Concrete for Curbs, Gutters and Sidewalks: 40 percent stone by weight and extruded in a zero slump condition. Jointing: Install cold joints every 20 linear feet and at each end of radius corners. Install 2 inch diameter weep holes every 5 feet unless shown otherwise on Drawings. Bonding: 1. 2. Bond extruded concrete curbing to asphalt surfacing by use of slow setting cutback asphalt tack coat. Apply tack coat in a manner approved by Construction Manager to provide a uniform continuous coating 1/8 to 3/16 inch in thickness and a width one inch less than the base width of curbing. Take care to prevent spills or running of tack coat over surface of finished asphalt pavement. Bond extruded concrete curbing to concrete surfaces by use of an epoxy resin.
3. 4. F. Forms: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. G.
Carefully set forms to line and grade, securely staked in position and conforming to dimensions of curbs, gutters, sidewalks, driveways and alley intersections. Moisten forms and sub grade immediately in advance of placing concrete. Clean forms thoroughly each time they are used, and coated with a light oil, or other releasing agent of a type which will not discolor concrete. Thoroughly spade concrete away from forms so that there will be no rock pockets next to forms. Concrete may be compacted by mechanical vibrators approved by Construction Manager. Continue tamping or vibrating until mortar flushes to surface, and coarse aggregate is below concrete surface.
Expansion Joints: 1. 2. 3. Constructed vertical, and at right angles to centerline of drive and match joints in adjacent pavement or sidewalks. Concrete drives: Maximum 15 feet o.c. Construct joints at radius points, driveways, alley entrances and at adjoining structures.
H. I. J.
Construct contraction joints as detailed. Shape edges with tool formed to round edges to radius indicated on standard details. Form Removal: 1. Do not remove front face form before concrete has taken initial set and has sufficient strength to carry its own weight.
Lochsa Engineering
2. 3. 4. K.
Do not remove gutter forms and rear forms until concrete has hardened sufficiently to prevent damage to the edges. Take special care to prevent damage. Repair any portion of concrete damaged while stripping forms. If damage is severe, replace at no additional cost to Owner.
Finishing and Curing: 1. Spray extruded curbs with curing agent sealer immediately after placing to achieve a surface comparable to a uniform broom finish. Take care in extruding radiuses and corners to prevent cracking and breaking of concrete curbing. Thoroughly fill, bond, and finish breaks or cracks to match remaining installation in manner approved by Construction Manager. Curbing found unacceptable by Construction Manager to be replaced at Contractor's expense.
2. 3. L. 3.3
Backfilling: Unless otherwise specified, backfill behind curbs or sidewalk with native soil to lines and grades shown on Drawings.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing: 1. 2. 3. 4. Test face, top, back and flow line of curb and gutter with a 10 foot straightedge or curved template, longitudinally along surface. Correct deviations in excess of 1/4 inch. Test surface of concrete sidewalks with a 5-foot straight edge. deviations in excess of 1/8 inch. Gutters: a. When required by Construction Manager, water test gutters having a slope of 0.8 foot per 100 feet or less, and where unusual or special conditions indicate gutter may not drain satisfactorily. Water testing consists of establishing flow in length of gutter to be tested by supplying water from a hydrant, tank truck or other source. One hour after supply of water is shut off, inspect gutter for evidence of ponding or improper shape. In the event water is found ponded in gutter to a depth greater than 1/2 inch, or on the adjacent pavement, correct defect or defects in a manner acceptable to Construction Manager. Correct
b. c. d.
5. 3.4 CLEANING A.
Remove and replace sections of Work deficient in depth or not conforming to Drawings or Specifications.
Leave work in clean condition. END OF SECTION
32 16 13-4
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Concrete Curbs, Gutters, Sidewalks And Driveways
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 32 17 13 PARKING BUMPERS PART 1 1.1 - GENERAL SUBMITTALS A. PART 2 2.1 Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data. - PRODUCTS MATERIALS A. Precast Parking Bumpers: 1. Commercially produced precast units 2. Smooth surface finish 3. 3 pad bearing surfaces. 4. Construct of 3000 psi (at 28 days) concrete. 5. Length: 72 inches long curb 6. Configuration: 8 inches wide by 6 inches high with 4 vertical sides angled one inch and a inch minimum to 1 inch maximum radius at top corners 7. Provide two No. 3 reinforcing bars continuous through the length of the curb (69 inch overall length, each.) 8. Provide 5/8 inch diameter hole at 4 inches from each end to allow for a pin. B. Hold-down Pins: ASTM A615, Grade 40, plain steel bar, inch diameter, 24 inches long.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. B. C. Install bumpers at locations indicated on Civil and Architect Drawings. Concrete Pavement Areas: Install each unit with epoxy adhesive. Use adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions. Asphalt Pavement Areas: pavement. Install each unit with hold-down pins driven through
END OF SECTION
32 17 13-1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Parking Bumpers
SECTION 32 84 00 LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. 1.02 A. B. 1.03 A. B. SECTION INCLUDES Pipe and fittings, valves, sprinkler heads, outlets, emitters and accessories. Connection to utilities. Control system. RELATED SECTIONS Divisions 31 and 32 1. 32 93 00, Landscape. Division 26, Electrical Work. REFERENCES American National Standards Institute / American Society for testing and Materials (ANSI / ASTM). D 2564 Solvent Cement for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings. American National Standards Institute / American Society for testing and Materials (ANSI / ASTM). F 656 Standard Specification for Primers for Use in Solvent Cement Joints of Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe and fittings. American National Standards Institute / American Society for testing and Materials (ANSI / ASTM). D 2672 Standard Specification for Joints for IPS PVC Pipe Using Solvent Cement. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). D 2241 Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), D1785 Standard Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). D 2855 Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe and Fittings. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), F 1498 Standard Specifications for Taper Pipe Threads 60 for Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings. American Water Works Association (AWWA). C-900 and C909 Ring Tight Pipe and Fittings. Federal Specifications O-F-506 Flux, Soldering; Paste and Liquid. Federal Specifications A-A-58092 Tape, Antiseize, Polytetrafluorethylene. National Electric Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
C. D. E. F. G. H. I. J. K.
32 84 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Landscape Irrigation
1.04 A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE Regulatory Requirements, Codes, and Standards: 1. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of products in system. 2. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water for prevention of backflow and back siphonage. Installer Qualifications and Requirements: 1. Licensed in the state of Nevada with a C-10 license. 2. Installer having minimum (5) five years documented experience in irrigation systems similar in material, design, and extent to work indicated and having a successful record of service performance. 3. Irrigation contractor; Individuals that install rigid PVC piping including flexible PVC piping and solvent cement for projects similar to the school work. a. Require certification for attendance to Solvent Cementing Training Class. b. Required to complete the Solvent Cementing Training Class (SCTC) offered by Spears Manufacturing Company Technical Services Dept. Phone: (800) 862-1499 1) Contractor is to have a Certified (SCTC) card available for review by Owners Representative or others. 2) (SCTC) Certification is required every two (2) years and shall be current. 4. Irrigation certification: The contractor shall employ an individual with one of the following certifications. The certified individual shall be present on site as noted below. a. Certified Irrigation Contractor, certified and current with the Irrigation Association, Falls Church, VA. One (1) individual on site during the installation of the irrigation system a minimum of 50 percent of the time. b. Certified Irrigation Installer, certified and current with Irrigator Technical Training School, Chino, CA. One (1) individual on site during the installation of the irrigation system a minimum of 95 percent of the time. Listing/Approval Stamp, Label, or Other Markings on equipment, specialties, and accessories made to specified standards. Listing and Labeling: Equipment, specialties, and accessories listed and labeled in National Electrical Code, Article 100. 1. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. Product Options: Irrigation system piping, specialties, and accessories are based on specific types, manufacturers, and models indicated. Components with equal performance characteristics produced by other manufacturers may be considered, provided deviations in dimensions, operation and other characteristics do not change design concept or intended performance as judged by the Owners Representative. The burden of proof of product equality is on the Contractor. 1. All piping, fittings, components, and accessories shall be of domestic manufacture. The contractor shall have readily available a copy of related specifications and plans on site at all times. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Underground irrigation system with electric solenoid valves controlled by an irrigation control clock.
B.
C. D.
E.
F. 1.05 A.
32 84 00 - 2
1.06 A. B. 1.07 A. B.
SUBMITTALS Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00, Administrative Requirements. Submit all products to be used and as noted on the irrigation drawings etc. PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00, Administrative Requirements. Project Record Drawing: 1. At onset of irrigation installation the Contractor shall obtain a set of the irrigation drawings for their record set. 2. At end of each day the record drawings are to be updated with the current changes by a qualified draftsperson. 3. All up-to-dates shall be submitted to the Owners Representative each week for review and comments (Photo Copies are acceptable). 4. A Master Copy of the Record Drawings shall be kept at the Project Site. 5. Dimensions are required from two permanent points of reference such as; building corners, sidewalk, fencing, road intersections or permanent structures. Provide dimensioned locations for the following: a. Connection points to existing water lines b. All Sleeves (both ends) c. Irrigation control valves d. All gate valves e. Control wire routing 6. Owners Representative will not certify any pay request submitted by the Contractor if the weekly record drawings are not current. Processing of pay request will not occur until records are updated. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00, Administrative Requirements. Provide instructions for operation and maintenance of system and controls and manufacturer's parts catalog. 1. Valves, including automatic control valves. 2. Clock controller systems. 3. Emitters Contractor to provide schedule-indicating length of time each valve is required to be open to provide an adequate amount of water for four seasonal watering times. Take into account sun exposure, shade and other physical conditions surrounding the site or building. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Conform to applicable code for piping and component requirements. FIELD MEASUREMENTS AND VERIFICATIONS Verify that field measurements match the drawings. If they do not match the drawings, do not proceed without notifying the Owners Representative in writing.
1.08 A. B.
C.
1.09 A. 1.10 A.
32 84 00 - 3
1.11 A.
DELIVER, STORAGE, and HANDLING Deliver, unload, store, and handle materials, packaging, bundling, and products, in dry, weatherproof condition to prevent damage, breakage, deterioration, intrusion, ignition, and vandalism. Deliver in original unopened packaging containers prominently displaying manufacturer name, volume, quantity, contents, instructions, and conformance to local, state, and federal law. Remove and replace cracked, broken, or contaminated items or elements prematurely exposed to moisture, inclement weather, snow, ice, temperature extremes, fire, or jobsite damage. Handling of PVC Pipe: Exercise care in handling, loading and storing of PVC pipe. All PVC pipe shall be transported in a vehicle that allows length of pipe to lie flat so as not to subject it to undue bending of concentrated external loads. All sections of pipe that have been dented or damaged shall be discarded, and if installed, shall be removed and replaced with new piping. PROJECT CONDITIONS Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Protection of Property: 1. Preserve and protect all trees, monuments, structures, and paved areas from damage due to Work of this Section. In the event damage does occur, all damage to inanimate items shall be completely repaired or replaced to satisfaction of Owner. All injury to trees, shrubs, and ground covers shall be repaired by Contractor, and all costs of such repairs shall be charged to and paid by Contractor. 2. Protect buildings, walks, walls, landscaping, irrigation system, and other property from damage. Flare and barricade open ditches. Damage caused to asphalt, concrete, landscaping, irrigation system, or other building materials surfaces shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to Owner. Restore disturbed areas to original condition. Existing Trees Conditions: 1. All trenching or other Work under limb spread of any tree or shrub shall be done by hand or by other methods so as to prevent damage to limbs, branches and roots. 2. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees, use all possible care to avoid injury to trees and tree roots. Excavation, in areas where 2-inch and larger roots occur, shall be done by hand. Roots 2-inches or larger in diameter, except directly in the path of pipe of conduit, shall be tunneled under and shall be heavily wrapped with burlap to prevent scarring or excessive drying. Where a trenching machine is operated close to trees having roots smaller than 2-inches in diameter, a wall or trench adjacent to tree shall be hand trimmed, making clean cuts through roots. Roots 1-inch and larger in diameter shall be painted with two coats of Tree Seal. Trenches adjacent to trees shall be closed within 24 hours, and when this is not possible, side of trench adjacent to tree shall be kept shaded with moistened burlap or canvas. Protection and Repair of Underground Lines: 1. Request proper utility company to stake exact location (including depth) of all underground water, electric, gas, or telephone lines. Take necessary precautions to protect the underground lines from damage. In the event damage does occur, all damage shall be repaired by Contractor, and all costs of such repairs shall be paid by Contractor unless other arrangements have been made. Replacement of Paving and Curbs: Where trenches and lines cross existing roadways, paths, curbing, etc., damage shall be kept to a minimum and shall be restored to original condition.
B.
1.12 A. B.
C.
D.
E.
32 84 00 - 4
F.
Cleaning: Maintain continuous cleaning operation throughout duration of Work. Dispose of, offsite at no additional cost to Owner, all trash or debris generated by installation of irrigation system. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Maintain uninterrupted water service to building during normal working hours. Arrange for temporary water shutoff with Owner. Coordinate work with site backfilling, landscape grading, and delivery of plant material.
1.13 A. B.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. MANUFACTURERS Products: irrigation spray and rotor heads, electrical and manual valves, quick couplers, bubblers, and controllers. All hydraulic calculations were derived from the products indicated on the irrigation schedule noted on the drawings. The Owners Representative must approve any substitutions to the products listed on the irrigation schedule. Additional Equipment list: 1. Weathermatic: Remote control valves 2. Agricultural Products: Basket filter after drip irrigation valves 3. Senninger: Pressure reducing valve for drip irrigation 4. Hunter: Irrigation controller 5. Sand for trench backfill, with less than 10-percent clay content 6. Items not listed, see Irrigation Schedule on irrigation drawings MATERIALS Sand Irrigation Trench Backfill 1. Less than 10% clay content 2. Free of rubbish, concrete, asphalt, glass, rubber, organic materials, stones larger than 1/16 diameter, and other debris. 3. Construction grade. General Piping: 1. Pressure Supply Lines (downstream from ductile iron union) a. Pipe 1-inch to 3-inches Schedule 40 PVC, unplasticized PVC 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification D12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784 and D1785, with an integral belled end. 2. Lateral Piping: a. Pipe 3/4-inch to 3-inches Schedule 40 PVC rigid, unplasticized PVC 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification D12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784 and D1785, with an integral belled end. 3. Sleeving: a. Schedule 40 PVC (6 and smaller) rigid, unplasticized PVC 1120, 1220 National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approved pipe extruded from material meeting the requirements of Cell Classification D12454-A or 12454-B, ASTM Standard D1784 and D1785, with an integral belled end. b. Install separate sleeve beneath paved areas to route each run of irrigation pipe or wiring bundle.
2.02 A.
B.
32 84 00 - 5
c.
d. C.
Sleeving diameter: minimum two sizes larger than the piping inside, equal to twice that of the wiring bundle. Exception: where sleeving on the irrigation plan exceeds this requirement, the larger piping shall be installed. Wire sleeves shall be a minimum of 2-inch Schedule 40 PVC.
Solvent Welding: 1. PVC piping 4 inches and smaller, use IPS 705 or 721 cement 2. Main line PVC piping 3 inches and larger, use IPS 711 cement 3. IPS flexible PVC piping (Salco), use IPS-795 cement 4. All PVC piping, including IPS flexible PVC pipe, use IPS P-70 primmer Plastic Pipe and Fittings: 1. Identification Markings: a. Identify all pipe with following indelible markings: 1) Manufacturer's name. 2) Nominal pipe size. 3) Schedule of class. 4) Pressure rating. 5) NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) seal of approval. 6) Date of extrusion. 2. Solvent Weld Pipe - Manufactured from virgin poly vinyl chloride (PVC) compound in accordance with ASTM D2241 and STM D1784; cell classification 12454-B, Type 1, Grade 1. a. Fittings - Standard weight, Schedule 40, injection molded PVC; complying with ASTM D1784 and D2466, cell classification 12454-B. 1) Threads - injection molded type (where required). 2) Tees and Ells - Side gated. b. Fittings - Schedule 80, injection molded PVC; complying with ASTM D1785 and D2467, cell classification 12454-B. c. Threaded Nipples - ASTM D2464, Schedule 80 with molded threads. d. Joint Cement and Primer - (ANSI/ASTM D2564). 3. Joining Materials: Refer to Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods for joining materials not included in this section. a. Primer, IPS P-70 (ASTM 656) Provide for all solvent cemented connections b. Solvent Cement, IPS 705 or 721 (ASTM 2564) clear medium bond for all rigid PVC pipe. c. Solvent Cement, IPS 711 (ASTM 2564) gray medium bond for main line PVC pipe over 3 inches. d. Solvent Cement, IPS 795 (ASTM 2564) for all flexible PVC pipe such as the Salco pipe. e. Solder: ASTM B 32, Alloys Sn95 and E. f. Gaskets and fasteners for metal and metal-to-plastic flanged joints: ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, asbestos-free, flat, 1/8 inch (3-mm) thickness gaskets and ASME B18.2.1, stainless steel bolts, butts and washers. g. Gaskets for plastic flanged joints: Materials recommended by plastic pipe and fittings manufacturer. h. PTFE sealing tape (Teflon Tape) shall have a minimum thickness of 3.5 mil, minimum of 1.2 density, and meet with FED. MIL SPEC A-A58092. 4. Detectable Marking Tape 3-inches in width shall be installed 12-inches above all irrigation main lines. a. Tape shall consist of a minimum 5.0 mil overall thickness; 100% virgin polyethylene; acid, alkaline and corrosion resistant.
D.
32 84 00 - 6
b. c. d. e. f. E.
Elongation properties shall be in accordance with ASTM D882-80A and shall be: 80% MD and 135%TD. Tape shall have a minimum 20 gauge solid aluminum foil core, adhered to a 2.55 mil polyethylene backing. Tape color shall be blue and the legend shall read Caution Irrigation Line Buried Below. Tape tensile strength shall be in accordance with ASTM D882-80A and be not less than 7,800 PSI. Tape shall remain flexible as measured by ASTM D671-76 pliable hand value.
Drip Irrigation: 1. Drip lateral piping Manufactured by GPH Irrigation, Salco, or approved equal: a. Flexible PVC piping -inch IPS and -inch IPS. PVC flexible pipe will conform to ASTM D-2287 with standard outside diameters compatible with PVC IPS solventweld fittings, resistant to UV radiation, uniformly black in color, homogeneous throughout and smooth inside and outside, free from foreign materials, cracks, holes, dents, wrinkles and blisters.. 1) Durometer Hardness (A Scale) - 88 to 94 tested per ASTM Method D2240 2) Specific Gravity, nominal - 1.40 to 1.44 tested per ASTM Method D792(A) 3) Tensile Strength, minimum - 1,800 psi tested per ASTM Method D412 4) Brittleness Temp., maximum - 15 C tested per ASTM Method D746(A) 5) Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. 6) Bending radius shall be 7. VALVES Gate Valves: 1. Gate Valves for 3/4 inch to 1-1/2 inches matching pipe size Shall have brass construction; solid wedge, IPS threads, and non-rising stem with brass butterfly operating handle. 2. Gate valves 2 inches and under shall be threaded. Plastic Ball Valves: PVC with 235 psi minimum working pressure rating, ends compatible with piping where valve is to be installed. Spears, or equal. REMOTE CONTROL VALVES Normally closed, 24 VAC, 50/60 cycle solenoid actuated globe pattern with pressure rating of 200 PSI minimum. The valve body and bonnet shall be constructed of heavy-duty gall-filled UV-resistant nylon and have stainless steel studs and flange nuts; diaphragm shall be of nylon reinforced nitrile rubber. Internal bleed manual open/close control. Manual flow control with brass or stainless steel stem. VALVE BOXES AND VALVE VAULTS Valve Boxes and covers shall be Carson, Dura Plastics, or Pentek: 1. Heavy-duty and will be constructed with high-density polyethylene structural foam. 2. Valve boxes shall have locking equipment provided 3. Green in color for turf areas 4. Tan in areas other than turf 5. Provide extensions for length required for depth of bury of valve. 6. Standard 12 inches deep rectangular valve boxes are to be used for electric solenoid turf valves and wire splices.
2.03 A.
B. 2.04 A.
2.05 A.
32 84 00 - 7
Jumbo 12 inches deep rectangular valve boxes with extension, when required, are to be used for all drip control valves. 8. 12-inch round valve box is required for all gate valves, quick coupler valves, manual control valves, pressure regulators (if separate from drip control valves), and drip flushing valves. 9. Utility Vault 10. If any of the equipment is too tight, enlarge the box size. Confirm selection with Owners Representative. 2.06 A. EMITTERS AND DEVICES Strainer/Filter Units: Basket Filter shall be pressure rated to 150 PSI (located downstream of the control valve). 1. For optimum filtration and system performance, the Basket Filter shall incorporate the following: a. Stainless steel screen element with a basket design to capture debris and prevent that debris from falling into the downstream line during routine maintenance. b. Screen element shall be reinforced with polypropylene ribs to increase durability and the screen element shall be color-coded for easy identification of mesh size. c. Screen mesh shall be a minimum of 150 mesh. d. Stainless Steel Screen Element 2. The Basket Filter and Stainless Steel Screen Element shall be manufactured by Rain Bird or approved equal. Drip Emitters: Drip emitters shall be single outlet, pressure compensating, with FIPT inlet with 20 Mesh Screen. 1. Check Valve: 4 psi internal spring 2. Emitter pressure range: 5 PSI minimum to 50 PSI maximum. 3. Flow ranges shall be 1 GPH and 2 GPH; a body with molded diffuser cap made from UV Inhibiting Engineering Grade plastics. 4. Emitter warranty (7) seven year warranty minimum. 5. Manufactured by Salco Products, Model #PST-CV-1 or PST-CV-2, or approved equal. Drip Tubing: Flexible PVC Piping and Inline Drip Tubing. Drip Header: PVC Pipe, PVC 1120, Schedule 40. Other Devices: As specified and as indicated. AUTOMATIC CONTROLS Low voltage controller system, made for control of irrigation system automatic remote control valves. Controller operates on 120 volts AC building power system, provides 24 volts AC power to control valves, and includes stations for at least the number of control valves indicated. Must be compatible with specified central control system. Wiring: UL 493, solid copper conductor, insulater cable, suitable for direct burial 1. Feeder Circuit Cables: Type UF, No. 12 AWG minimum, between building and controllers. Wire type and size as required by local codes and ordinances. 2. Electrical Control Wire: AWG UF U1 approved minimum No. 14 gauge direct burial copper wire for all control wires, and minimum No.12 gauge direct burial copper wire for all common wires. 3. Provide extra wires to valve groupings:
7.
B.
C. D. E. 2.07 A.
B.
32 84 00 - 8
4.
5.
6.
a. Pull (2) two extra wires orange in color (to each individual valve grouping). b. Extend wires to designated valve grouping as noted on the irrigation drawings. c. Locate wires adjacent to mainline Remote control wire colors: a. Common wire white with a different color strip for each controller used. b. Drip emitter red wire. c. Bubblers to trees yellow wire. d. Lawn areas blue wire. e. Extra wires for valve groupings, orange wire. If multiple controllers are utilized, and wire paths of different controllers cross each other, both common and control wires from each controller shall be different colors approved by Owners Representative. Control wire connections and splices shall be made with 3M direct bury splice #DBY or DBR, or similar dry splice method. a. All splices to be made in 10-inch round valve boxes. b. Locate spliced wiring on record drawings with dimensions.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. EXAMINATION Verify that field conditions are ready to receive work. 1. Match the drawings with proper dimensions and layout configurations 2. Rough grades are at specified elevations 3. Other trades have completed work in irrigation areas 4. Utilities schedules are in order to meet irrigation deadline Verify location of existing utilities. Verify that required utilities and services are available, in proper location and ready for use. If discrepancies exist notify the Owners Representative immediately, no more than 48-hours. Obtain all necessary permits. Prior to irrigation installation all landscape grades are to be established and approved by the Owners Representative and Construction Inspector/Manager. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. Receive approval of all required submittals prior to commencing work. PREPARATION Irrigation Drawings are drawn schematically. Follow as close as practical. All materials, equipment, etc. are to be located in landscape areas, contractor to provide accurate record drawings verifying actual locations. Any discrepancies between site conditions and drawings are to be brought to the attention of the Owners Representative and Construction Inspector/Manager. Route piping to avoid structures, trees and other plantings. Prior to the installation of sleeves, review layout requirements with other affected Work. Coordinate locations of sleeves under paving to accommodate system. Install sleeving under asphalt paving and concrete walks, prior to concreting and paving operation, to accommodate piping and wiring. Other sleeve requirements:
B. C. D. E. F. G. 3.02 A.
B.
32 84 00 - 9
1. 2. 3. C.
Separate sleeves shall be installed for mainline, individual laterals, control wiring, and Central Control cable. Compact backfill around sleeves to 95% Standard proctor Density within 2% of optimum moisture content in accordance with ASTM D1557. Extend sleeves 12-inches into the planting areas past hardscape the edge.
Set stakes to identify proposed sprinkler locations, piping layout indicated is diagrammatic only. Rout piping to avoid plants, ground covers, and structures. 1. Obtain Owners Representative and Construction Inspector/Manager approval before excavation. TRENCHING Trenching: Trench excavation shall follow, as much a possible, layout show on drawing. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Trench bottom shall be clean and smooth with all rock and organic debris removed. Pressure supply line trenches shall be over-excavated as required to allow for bedding material. Trench depth shall be uniform as required to meet minimum depth requirement for type of piping. 1. Clearances: a. Piping Smaller than 3-Inches Trenches shall have a minimum width of 7-inches. b. Line Clearance Provide not less than 6-inches of clearance between each line, and not less than 12-inches of clearance between lines of other trades. c. Trench to accommodate grade changes. 2. Pipe and Wire Depth: a. Pressure Supply Piping 24-inches to 30-inches deep to top of pipe. Mainline depth shall not exceed 3-0. b. Non-pressure Piping (rotor and pop-up) 15-inches to 18-inches deep to top of the pipe. c. Control wiring 24-inches to 30-inches deep to top of the wire. d. Communications Cable 24-inches to 30-inches deep to top of the cable. e. Drip Tubing 12-inches deep to top of pipe. f. In-line Emitter Tubing 6-inches deep to top of pipe (non-slope plantings. 4-inches deep to top of the pipe (slopes 2:1 or greater). On existing tree 2-inches deep to top of pipe with soil staples to hold in place every 5 feet or less. Contractor to notify Owners Representative and Construction Inspector/Manager before backfilling for inspection. Trench to accommodate grade changes. All piping is to be installed in an individual trench; no other piping is to be placed in this trench. Wiring can be in the same trench and should run on the side. Mainline piping is to be installed in an individual trench; no other piping is to be placed in this trench. Wiring can be in the mainline trench and should run on the side of the pipe only. Do not stack piping in same trench; piping shall have 12 inches minimum separation when sideby-side. Where pipes cross above or below another pipe, provide a minimum separation of 6 inches above and or below. Backfilling: Do not begin backfilling operations until required system tests have been completed. Do not backfill when conditions are below 35-degrees Fahrenheit except with prior approval by Owners Representative. Leave trenches slightly mounded to allow for settlement
3.03 A.
B. C. D. E.
F.
32 84 00 - 10
after backfilling is completed. Trenches shall be finished graded prior to walk-through of system by Owners Representative. 1. All pressure supply lines shall be bedded with approved sand 4-inches below invert of pipe, to finish rough grade and width of trench. 2. Do not leave trenches open for a period of more than 48 hours. Open excavations shall be protected in accordance with OSHA regulations. 3. Compact backfill to 90% maximum density in 6-inch lifts, determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 utilizing the following methods: a. First water settle, then mechanically tamp for maximum density. G. Piping Under Paving or Hard Surface areas: 1. Provide for a minimum cover of 30-inches between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic concrete or concrete paving. 2. Piping shall be bedded with construction grade sand or squeegee 6-inches below pipe to 6-inches above pipe and width of excavation. 3. Compact backfill material in 6-inch lifts at 95% maximum density determined in accordance with ASTM D1557 using manual or mechanical tamping devices. 4. Set in place, cap, and pressure test all piping under paving, in presence of Owners Representative or Owners representative prior to backfilling and paving operations. 5. Piping under existing walks or concrete pavement shall be done by jacking, boring, or hydraulic driving, but where cutting or breaking of walks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done and replaced at no cost to Owners representative. Obtain permission and prior approval to cut or break walks and/or concrete from Owners representative. Do not backfill trenches until inspected by Construction Inspector/Manager. INSTALLATION Install pipe, valves, controls, and outlets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and all applicable codes. Water Supply and Point of Connection: Water supply shall be extended as shown from water supply lines. Backflow Preventer: Install as detailed at location designated on Drawings. Install in accordance with the current Uniform Plumbing Code and Uniform Design and Construction Standards for Water Distribution Systems for Clark County, NV. Provide for thermal movement of components in system. Controller. 1. Provide 6-inch expansion coil at each valve to which controls are connected, and at 100 ft. intervals. 2. Bury and tape the wire to the side of the pipe. 3. Field splices to be placed in a 12 circular valve box and connected with 3M DBY or DBR connectors as per manufacturers recommendations. a. All wire splice locations are to be approved by the Owners Representative prior to splice. After piping is installed but before sprinkler heads are installed and backfilling commences, open valves and flush system with full head of water.
H. 3.04 A. B. C.
D. E.
F.
32 84 00 - 11
G.
PVC Piping: 1. Snake pipe in trench as much as possible to allow for expansion and contraction, do not place mainline and lateral line in same trench. Place each line in a separate trench. 2. When pipe installation is not in progress, or at end of each day, close pipe ends with tight plug or cap. 3. Coordinate pressure supply line installation with required bedding operations. 4. Stake all above grade PVC piping per details. 5. Use 45 ells when making perpendicular crossing of above grade PVC piping, to depress bottom pipe. 6. Lay pipe and make all plastic-to-plastic joints in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. 7. Install detectable marking tape 12-inches above all irrigation main lines. 8. Flushing: a. The mainline and lateral lines after piping, risers and valves are in place and connected, but prior to installation of sprinkler heads and quick coupler assemblies, shall be thoroughly flushed under full head of water pressure until totally clean (15 minutes minimum). b. Additional flushing will be required if piping is damaged or changes have occurred to the mainline system. 9. Solvent Welding shall be done in accordance to ASTM-2855. Refer to 2.02 materials for approved products for each type of piping. Threaded Fitting Requirements: 1. All threaded fittings will use an approved threaded joint sealant. 2. PTFE sealing tape shall meet FED.MIL SPEC A-A58092 and be installed per manufacturers specifications and American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), F 1498. 3. Do not over-tighten. 4. Paste-type thread sealants shall be compatible with the particular plastic used. Materials: Spears 75TM thread sealant or approved equal. Thrust Blocks: 1. Construct thrust blocks behind all gasketed fittings, tees, bends, reducers, and caps in accordance with pipe manufacturer's recommendations. a. Contact Owners Representative prior to placing thrust blocks, for observation of thrust block excavation and initial placement. b. All ductile iron fittings, flanges (PVC or Ductile Iron), joint restrains, valves, etc. installed under ground shall be wrapped with a minimum 8 mil polyethylene clear sheeting and then secured with a 2 inch black, 10 mil polyvinyl chloride (PVC) tape with a high-tack adhesive provides a corrosion- and impact-resistant seal for allweather protection, UV resistance and has a temperature rating of 176F (80C). c. Pressure test pressure supply line with thrust blocks 48 hours after installing thrust blocks. d. Use thrust blocks for fittings on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any diameter rubber gasket pipe. e. Use 3,000-PSI concrete. f. Use No. 4 Rebar wrapped or painted with asphalt tar based mastic coating. g. Do not cover the top and bottom of pipe joint with concrete. Soil is to be compacted 95% or greater. 2. Joint Restraint Harness: a. Use a joint restraint harness wherever joints are not positively restrained by flanged fittings, and/or threaded fittings.
H.
I.
32 84 00 - 12
3.
Use a joint restraint harness with transition fittings between metal and PVC pipe, where weak trench banks do not allow the use of thrust blocks, or where extra support is required to retain a fitting or joint. c. Use bolts, nuts, retaining clamps, all-thread, or other joint restraint harness materials, which are zinc plated or galvanized. d. Use on pipe greater than or equal to 3-inch diameter or any diameter rubber gasket pipe. Thrust developed per 100-psi pressure (lbs. force) for various fitting configurations. Pipe Size 3 4 6 8 Fitting 90o Elbow 1,000 1,800 4,000 7,200 Fitting 45o Elbow 600 1,100 2,300 4,100 Valves, Tees Dead Ends 800 1,300 2,900 5,100
b.
Approximate bearing strength of typical soils: Soil Type Mulch, Peat, etc. Soft Clay Sand Sand and Gravel Sand and Gravel with Clay Sand and Gravel Cemented with Clay Hard Pan J. Lbs/Ft 2 0 500 1,000 1,500 2,000 4,000 5,000
Valve Boxes 1. Install one valve box for each type of valve per the detail drawings. a. Install Terra Bond Fabric around the outside of the valve box by taping. Extend fabric 12 inches beyond base of valve box backfill around the valve box and compact. b. Install gravel sump inside of valve box after compaction of all trenches. Place final portion of gravel inside valve box after valve box is backfilled and compacted. 2. Valve box colors; green in turf areas and tan in non-turf areas. 3. The top of valve box in turf areas shall be 3 inches to 4 inches below the finish soil grade. 4. Use extensions when depths of the equipment being covered are greater than the box. 5. All electric control valves shall be identified with Christy I.D tag noting the controller I.D. and station number. 6. Brand all valve box lids. Letter and number size shall be no smaller than 1-inch and no greater in size than 1 -inches. Depth of branding shall be no more than 3/8-inches into valve box lid as follows: a. Control valves Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each control valve box i.e. Controller A valve station number 2 would read as A - 2. b. Quick Coupling Valves Brand quick coupling valve box lids with letters Q.C.. c. Wire splices Brand all wire splice box lids with letters W.S.. d. Drip Tubing Blowout Stubs Brand controller letter and station number on lid of each drip tubing blow out box lid. e. Isolation Gate Valves Brand all isolation gate valve box lids with letters G.V.. f. Air Release Valves Brand all air release valve box lids with word AIR. g. Brand all other irrigation boxes with letters as instructed by the owners representative. 7. All vaults will have a minimum separation of 4 feet. 8. For model and sizing information see section 2.02 materials.
32 84 00 - 13
Valve boxes and vaults installed near asphalt or concrete surfaces shall be parallel and equal to the elevation of hard surface. 10. All valve boxes shall have Epic plastics valve box stabilizers or bricks under each corner of a rectangular valve box and minimum of three (3) under round valve boxes. K. Control Wiring: 1. Low Voltage Wiring: a. Bury control wiring between controller and electric valves in pressure supply line trenches, with wires consistently located to one side of pipe once the pipe has been placed on top of initial sand bedding. b. Separate wire trenches will not be allowed unless approved by Owners Representative prior to installation. c. Bundle all 24 volt wires at 10-foot intervals with electrical or duct tape. d. Provide an expansion loop forming expansion loop by wrapping wire at least 8 times around a -inch pipe and withdrawing pipe at for the following locations 1) Pressure supply line angle fittings. 2) Every electric control valve location (in valve box). 3) At minimum, 50 feet intervals. e. Make splices and electric control valve Connections using 3M direct bury splice DBY or DBR; or similar dry splice method provide 8-inch expansions loops. f. Install control wire splices not occurring at control valve in a separate splice valve box. g. Install one control wire for each control valve. h. Run two (2) spare #14-1 control wires from controller pedestal(s) to last electric control valve operated by controller on each leg of pressure supply line. 1) See irrigation drawings for valves to receive spare wires. 2) Label spare wires at controller and wire stub box. 3) Loop a minimum of 24-inches from all spare wires inside every control valve box operated by controller. i. Run all future control wires from controller pedestal to point indicated on drawings. Coil a minimum of ten (10) feet at termination and install in 10: round valve box. Label all wires at termination. 2. High Voltage Wiring for Automatic Controller: Provide 120-volt power connection to automatic controller. 3. Communication Cable: Installed as per controller manufacturers specifications and details. a. Splices to occur only at controller pedestals unless approved by Owners Representative prior to installation. b. All communication wire between controllers shall be installed in 1 -inch PVC electrical conduit. c. Conduit for communication wire to be laid to bottom and side of pressure supply line trench opposite of control wire. Separate wire trenches will not be allowed unless approved by Owners Representative prior to installation. Drip emitter irrigation with cap threads Piping PVC with threaded emitters, emitters are to be placed -inch above grade when 3/8-inch minus rock material is used. Other crushed rock sizes adjust emitter elevation for minimal visibility; submit for Owners Representative approval. 1. Solvent welding IPS flexible PVC pipe to rigid PVC pipe use the following: a. IPS 795 cement with IPS P70 primmer. b. PVC male adapter are to be used on both ends of piping when connection to lateral ties or emitters.
9.
L. M.
32 84 00 - 14
2. N.
PVC male adapter connecting to emitter shall be black or matching color of the emitter. Manual flushing valves shall be installed at the end of each drip irrigation lateral.
c.
Automatic Control System installation 1. Install controllers according to manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. 2. Ground all controllers according to the American Society of Irrigation Consultants grounding guidelines (http://asic.org/asic_grounding_guideline.htm) and the details on the drawings. All grounds shall meet NEC Code. 3. Install control wiring in same trench with piping. FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Testing - Conduct tests in presence of Owners Representative. Arrange for presence of Owners Representative 48 hours in advance of testing. Pressure test is to be conducted prior to backfilling trench. Supply force pump and all other test equipment. 1. After backfilling at key locations for stabilization of the mainline; all valves, quick couplers and other devices subject to constant line pressure; and fill pressure supply line with water. The main line is to be under designated static pressure for seven (7) continuous days before the pressure test is to be conducted. Expose all couplings, fittings, and valves. 2. Pressurize the mainline to 40 PSI over the designated static pressure or 120 PSI, for a period of 2 hours, whichever is higher. 3. Leakage, Pressure Loss - Test is acceptable if no leakage or loss of pressure is evident during test period. 4. Leaks - Detect and repair leaks. 5. Retest system until test pressure can be maintained for duration of tests. 6. Before final acceptance, pressure supply line shall remain under pressure for a period of 48 hours. 7. Subsections of pressure piping may be tested independently, subject to review of Construction Inspector/Manager. However, a final pressure test must be conducted when the entire system is in place. 8. After the main line pressure test is passed, if any comprise in the irrigation main line, the contractor will then have to re-test any section(s) that was comprised. 9. Owner reserves the right to require re-testing of the irrigation main line before the end of the warranty/maintenance period. ADJUSTING ADJUSTING - Upon completion of installation, on a weekly basis, "fine-tune" entire system by performing the following: 1. Regulating valves 2. Adjusting patterns and break-up arms 3. Setting pressure-reducing valves at proper pressure to provide optimum and efficient coverage. 4. Flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance 5. Prevent over spray onto walks, roadways, and buildings. 6. Heads of same type shall be operating at same pressure +/- 7%. 7. Provide written report of each week findings and submit to Owners Representative. 8. System is to be flushed one week prior to Owner acceptance. Each valve is to be opened and the last head or emitter is to be removed on each line until clean. 9. Emitter spacing is to be equal around the planting.
3.05 A.
3.06 A.
32 84 00 - 15
B.
If it is determined that irrigation adjustments will provide proper and more adequate coverage, make such adjustments prior to Final Acceptance, as directed, at no additional cost to Owner. Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle sizes, degrees of arc, and control valve throttling. Changes should coordinate with water audit. After installations of crushed rock adjust emitters so the emitter is buried into the crushed rock. The top 1/2-inch is to be exposed above crushed rock. Areas that do not conform to designated operation requirements due to unauthorized changes or poor installation practices shall be immediately corrected at no additional cost to the Owner. Verify all grass areas dimension prior to installation. DEMONSTRATION Demonstrate to the Owners Representative and Construction Inspector/Manager that the system meets coverage requirements, the automatic controls function properly, operation of equipment, sprinklers specialties, and accessories Review operating and maintenance information. Provide 7 days written notice in advance of demonstration. WARRANTY Provide prime quality materials matching the originally installed equipment. Warrant irrigation materials, equipment, and workmanship against defects for a period of one (1) year from date of substantial completion. Warrant the irrigation pump station for 24 months from date of authorized start-up. 1. Fill and repair depressions. 2. Restore landscape or structural features damaged by settlement of irrigation trenches or excavations. 3. Repair damage to premises caused by defective components. 4. Make repairs within 24 hours of notification from Owners Representative. If no response is made to the requested repair, the contractor(s) will be back-charged for costs that occur. 5. Any work performed on the irrigation system during the warranty period is to be extended with a full year warranty The Contract Documents govern replacement materials, labor, and workmanship identically as with new work. Make replacements at no additional cost to owner. 1. The warranty applies to originally installed materials and equipment and replacements made during the warranty period. 2. Expenses due to vandalism, before substantial completion and during the maintenance period, shall be borne by Contractor. 3. Act of God may become an acceptable reason for a warranty to be void. However, the contractor must make every reasonable attempt to prevent potential damage. Act of God damage shall be limited to unseasonable freeze, winds above 60 M.P.H., and flooding from excessive rain. Contractor shall accommodate operation on irrigation system as to not conflict with school hours and use of turf areas or other areas accessed by school. END OF SECTION
C. D.
3.07 A.
3.08 A. B.
C.
D.
32 84 00 - 16
SECTION 32 93 00 LANDSCAPE PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 A. B. C. D. E. 1.02 A. SECTION INCLUDES Preparation of subsoil and topsoil. Topsoil bedding. Trees, plants, and ground cover. Mulch and fertilizer. Maintenance. REFERENCES, STANDARDS AND COORDINATION American Nursery & Landscape Association (ANLA) American Standard for Nursery Stock (USA); Edition approved 1985 by American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI - Z60.1)-plant materials. Hortus Third, 1976; Cornell University--plant nomenclature. Arizona Nursery Association Recommended Tree Specification 1989 Standards. Federal Specifications O-F-241 - Fertilizers, Mixed, Commercial. ASTM D 1777 - Geotextile Fabric. ASTM D 1682 - Geotextile Fabric. ASTM D 751 - Geotextile Fabric. DEFINITIONS Weeds: Includes Dandelion, Jimsonweed, Quackgrass, Horsetail, Morning Glory, Rush Grass, Mustard, Lambsquarter, Chickweed, Cress, Crabgrass, Canadian Thistle, Nutgrass, Poison Oak, Blackberry, Tansy Ragwort, Bermuda Grass, Johnson Grass, Poison Ivy, Nut Sedge, Nimble Will, Bindweed, Bent Grass, Wild Garlic, Perennial Sorrel, Brome Grass, Puncture Vine and Salt Cedar (Tamarisk). Plants: Living trees, plants, and ground cover specified in this Section, and described in ANSI Z60.1 and Hortus Third. Tree: Plant denoted on the plant schedule as tree or palm. See to planting plan. Shrub: Plant denoted on the plant schedule as shrub, groundcover, accent or cactus. See planting plan. Landscape areas: All areas scheduled for turf, tree and shrub planting.
B. C. D. E. F. G. 1.03 A.
B. C. D. E.
32 93 00 - 1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Landscape
F. G. H. I. 1.04 A. 1.05 A.
Planters: All landscape areas not scheduled for turf. Building envelope: Area within the boundary constituted by the outermost corners of all buildings. Including, but not limited to areas between buildings. Planters at grade: Planters that reside at or within 2-inches of the adjacent walks, curbs, finish floor, or finish grade elevations. Raised planters: Planters that retain soil in excess of 2-inches of soil. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Submit instructions for continuing Owner maintenance under provisions of Section Execution Requirements. PERFORMANCE Provide the labor, materials, equipment, plant, services and transportation, and perform the operations in connection with the construction and installation of the work. Work shall be as herein specified and as denoted on the accompanying drawings. Refer to section 1.07 submittals for Landscape contractor prior experience requirements. QUALITY ASSURANCE The Owners Representative reserves the right to inspect plant materials at the nursery or growing ground prior to loading and transporting and/or by photographs. Tag all trees and representative samples of shrubs and ground cover prior to the inspection. Arrange with the Owners Representative ten (10) days in advance for the inspection. Such approval shall not impair the right of inspection and rejection during progress of the work. Comply with federal, state and local laws requiring inspection for plant disease and infestations. Inspection certificates required by state law shall accompany each shipment of plants and deliver certificates to the Owner. Inspections are to be performed in the state of origin. Transport plant materials in enclosed or tarp covered vehicles to minimize damage from wind and sun. Contractor is to carefully inspect all plants at the time of off-loading. 1. Check all plants for proper caliper, height, shape and balanced branching. Reject plants that fail the noted requirements. 2. Damaged plants are to be rejected. 3. Incorrect species and varieties are to be rejected. 4. Water immediately and protect as needed from wind and heat and other harmful conditions. Substitutions of plant materials will not be permitted unless authorized in writing by Owners Representative. 1. Requests for substitutions shall include a list of suppliers that have been contacted and shall include the date of contact. 2. If proof is submitted that specified plant is not obtainable, a proposal will be considered for use of the nearest equivalent size or variety with corresponding adjustment of Contract Price. Personnel: Employ only qualified personnel familiar with required work. 01 70 00,
B. 1.06 A.
B.
C.
D.
E.
32 93 00 - 2
F. G.
Nursery: Company specializing in growing and cultivating the plants specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. Installer: Nevada Licensed Contractor with a current C-10 license. The subcontractor who holds a classification C-10 license may: 1. Grade and prepare plots of land for architectural horticulture. 2. Decoratively treat, arrange, plant and maintain gardens, lawns, shrubs, vines, bushes, trees and other vegetation. 3. Construct systems of drainage and landscape irrigation; 4. Install rocks, crushed rock and soils for desert landscaping. Landscape contractor prior experience requirements: 1. All landscape contractors that bid the landscape portion of this project must submit to the Architect for approval, their proven abilities to perform the work required as in the specifications and drawing. Proven ability to grow and maintain Bermuda grass during the appropriate seasons. All grasses must have 98 percent coverage with equal heights and thickness. 2. The installing contractor shall have a minimum of seven (7) years experience with similar project size and cost similar in material, size, and extent to work indicated and having a successful record of service performance. Documented work must be in the desert southwest. 3. The contractor must provide the following information to be approved as a qualified bidder. All references must have current addresses and phone numbers. a. Proven ability to manage and schedule the landscape planting, irrigation work, water audit, and related work that impacts the landscape completion date. b. Proven ability to complete the work on time and within budget. c. Proven ability to schedule and obtain the specified plant types and sizes during all seasons. d. Proven ability to follow and understand the drawings and specifications. e. Proven to grade large grass areas with the appropriate material and correct depths so that the finish grades are true and even. (Laser grading is required.) f. Proven ability to complete the work that has been specified with required mock-ups. g. Proven ability to complete the punch list work in the required time period. h. Proven ability to provide proper maintenance and care of the project prior to the substantial completion date and during the maintenance period. i. Proven ability to submit the required paper work and reports during the maintenance period. SUBMITTALS Plant and material Certifications: 1. Certificates of inspection required by governmental authorities. 2. Label data substantiating the plants, trees, shrubs, and planting materials comply with specified requirements. 3. Manufacturers or vendors certified analysis for soil amendments and fertilizer materials. 4. Seed vendors certified statement for each grass seed mixture required, stating botanical and common name, percentage by weight, and percentages of purity, germination, and weed seed for each grass seed species. 5. All plants are to have a Certificate of Origin. 6. Submit certification from grower stating palms are free from insects fungus/insects/borers or vascular infections. Soil, Organic Amendments and Crushed Rock Submittals
H.
1.07 A.
B.
32 93 00 - 3
1. 2. 3. C.
Soil test and sample for all soil types Organic amendments submit, test/reports and samples Crushed rock submit test/reports and samples
Submit within (60) sixty days after Notice to Proceed, a completed list of materials to be furnished and source noting tree trunk caliper sized for each tree under this Section. Owners Representative reserves the right to approve or reject materials, suppliers and subcontractors. Topsoil 1. Refer to Section 32 91 19, Landscape Grading for submittal requirements. Submit copies of all invoices or receipts for materials used on the project that cannot be visually verified. These include, but are not limited to, backfill mix material, fertilizer tablets, composts, seed, soil stabilizers, water holding agents, herbicides, etc. All invoices or receipts must list the item, quantity, job location, date, and the supplier. Submit as items are delivered to the site. Substantial completion will not be given without all receipts being submitted. Installer Qualifications: Submit the following certificates, licenses, or other legal documents to substantiate company experience. 1. Date and location company established. 2. Copy of C-10 license. 3. Two completed projects of equal size and scope in the desert southwest with a current contact name and phone number. Planting Schedule: Proposed planting schedule, indicating dates for each type of landscape work during normal seasons for such work in area of site. Correlate with specified maintenance periods to provide maintenance from date of substantial completion. Once accepted, revise dates only as approved in writing after documentation of reasons for delays. Submit instructions to the Architect for continuing maintenance under provisions of Sections 01 30 00, Administrative Requirements. Submit all records of existing weed eradications to the Architect. Include date of action and method of eradication including any chemical means. Submit all Right to Know forms (14) days before the application of pesticides, herbicides, fertilizer, and etc. REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS Comply with regulatory requirements for fertilizer and herbicide composition. Comply with regulatory requirements set forth by Clark County Department of Air Quality and Environmental Management (DAQEM) regarding the planting of Olive trees when specified for use. 1. Exempt trees in inventory at retail outlets and those being delivered to landscaping projects, must include a label/tag approved by the DAQEM Control Officer documenting the exempt status, and date of approval of the Certificate of Exemption until sale to the consumer 2. Copies of all invoices must be maintained in a separate binder at the Nursery business office, and made available to the DAQEM staff upon request. Verification of deliveries should also be made available by phone or facsimile. 3. Trees shall meet the following criteria: a. Trees shall be accompanied by the original Exempt Status Nursery invoices; the tag number must match those listed on the invoice.
D. E.
F.
G.
H. I. J. 1.08 A. B.
32 93 00 - 4
4.
5.
Any person who violates any provision of these Regulations, including, but not limited to, any application requirements; any permit condition; any fee or filing requirement; any duty to allow or carry out inspection, entry or monitoring activities or any requirements by the Department of Air Quality and Environmental Management is guilty of a civil offense and shall pay civil penalty levied by the Air Pollution Control Hearing Board and/or Hearing Officer not more than $10,000. Each day of violation constitutes a separate offense. For any additional informational request or questions on exempt status olive tree qualifications, please contact the DAQEM at (702) 455-5942 between the hours of 8 a.m. to 4:00 p.m., Monday through Friday.
C. 1.09 A.
The types of herbicides to be used and the methods of application shall confirm with the Environmental Protection Agency Policies. PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING Preparation: 1. Spray evergreen plants and deciduous plants in full leaf with anti-desiccant immediately prior to shipment and after delivery when temperatures in Las Vegas are over 98 degrees. Delivery: 1. Deliver packaged material in sealed waterproof bags or containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. 2. Deliver only plant materials that can be planted in one day unless adequate storage and watering facilities are available on project site. 3. Notify Owners Representative of delivery schedule a minimum of 48 hours in advance so plant material can be inspected prior to unloading from trucks. 4. Remove rejected materials immediately from site. 5. Do not lift, move, adjust to plumb, or otherwise manipulate plants by trunk or stems. Keep plants moist at all times. 6. Spray additional anti-desiccant after trees have arrived when temperature are over 100 degrees and winds exceed 20 miles per hour. This includes plants that have been installed and the temperature has increased causing stress to the plant. SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING Coordinate the work of this Section with installation of underground irrigation system, utilities, piping and watering heads. Protection: 1. Do not move equipment over existing or newly placed structures without approval of Site Superintendent. 2. Provide board covering as required to protect paving. 3. Protect other improvements from damage with protection boards, ramps and protective sheeting. Utilities: 1. Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate, if required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Repair and replace immediately at Contractor's expense utilities, conduits, etc. that are damaged as a result of Contractor's work. Call before you dig. 2. Coordinate work with irrigation contractor to prevent damage to underground irrigation system.
B.
1.10 A. B.
C.
32 93 00 - 5
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 A. TREES, PLANTS, AND GROUND COVER Trees, Plants, and Ground Cover: Species and size identifiable in plant schedule, grown in climatic conditions similar to those in locality of the work. At least 10% of all plant varieties to have nursery identification tags attached. Plants to be in compliance with the Arizona Nursery Association Recommended Tree Specification (1989) standards. If a plant is not on that list then it shall be in compliance with the USA Standard for Nursery Stock current edition and/or Hortus Third. Plants shall be sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs or larvae and shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. They shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions that would prevent thriving growth. Soil in the containers shall be free of disease and pathogens. Plants shall be true to species and variety and conform to the measurements specified. 1. Plants larger than the specified size may be used if approved by Owners Representative. Use of such plants shall not increase Contract price. If larger plants are approved, the ball of earth shall be increased in proportion to the size of the plant. 2. Plants shall be measured when branches are in their normal position. Height and spread dimensions specified refer to main body of plant and not branch tip to tip. Caliper measurement shall be taken at a point on the trunk 6 inches above natural ground line for trees up to 4 inches in caliper and at a point 12 inches above the natural ground line for trees over 4 inches in caliper. 3. If a range of size is given, no plant shall be less than the minimum size and not less than 40% of the plants shall be as large as the maximum size specified. 4. The measurements specified are the minimum size acceptable and are the measurements after pruning, where pruning is required. 5. Plants that meet the measurements specified, but do not possess a normal balance between height and spread, shall be rejected. Container stock shall have grown in the containers in which delivered for at least six months, but not over two years. Samples must prove that no root bound conditions exist. Plants not able to stand upright without staking will be rejected. No container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth when taken from container shall be planted except upon special approval by Owners Representative. Plants shall not be pruned before delivery. Trees, which have damaged or crooked trunks and or leaders, or multiple leaders, unless specified, will be rejected. Trees with abrasions of the bark, sunscald, disfiguring knots, or fresh cuts of limbs over 3/4 inch, which have not completely calloused, will be rejected. Trees are to be selected first according to caliper size and second by the box size. Unless noted otherwise. Trunk caliper size requirements will take precedence over box size unless noted by the Owners Representative. 1. Caliper will be measured six inches above graft or six inches above root ball if grown from seed. 2. Conform to the requirements of ANSI Z60.1 for tree branching configuration and shrub cane quantities for the type and species of each plant specified. In summer months wrap all tree trunks that are prone to sun scald, remove after September 30.
B.
C.
D.
E.
F.
G.
H.
32 93 00 - 6
2.02 A. B.
SOIL AND AMENDMENT MATERIALS Refer to Section 32 91 19, Landscape Grading for fill material requirements. Agriform (20-10-5) pre-plant 21 gram: (2) per 1-gallon plants, (3) per gallon 5-gallon plants, (8) per 15-gallon plants (20) per 24-inch box, (30) per 36 inch box, (40) per 48 inch box, (50) per 54 inch box and (20) per palm. Sizes not listed shall use the closest box size. Larger gallon containers shall use quantities based upon the equivalent box size as defined by the American Standard for Nursery stock. Soil amendment: Soils Plus shredded, loose, free of lumps, roots, inorganic material or acidic materials. Organic addition: Grow-Power Plus. Soil sulphur, Hi-Yield or equal. Liquid fertilizer Grow Power 4-8-2. Water: Clean, fresh and free of substances or matter, which could inhibit vigorous growth of plants. SOILS Fill Material: Contractor is required to process fill material to remove all rocks, etc. over 2inches in diameter prior to placement. No rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter are allowed as fill. Fill material is to have positive percolation rates. Remove and dispose of rocks removed during soil processing at an appropriate off-site dumping area. Imported topsoil, sandy/loamy texture with no gravel particles. Landscape Grading. GRANITE COLORED CRUSHED ROCK MATERIALS Crushed rock 3/8 minus shall conform to the following gradations: PERCENT PASSING U.S STANDARD SIEVE Sieve Size 3/8 #10 60-95 #16 40-60 #100 20-40 #200 0-20 See Section 32 91 19,
C. D. E. F. G. 2.03 A.
B. C. 2.04 A.
Percent Finer 95-100 by weight B.
Riprap used for slopes over 6:1 or for drainage swales should be an industry standard 8 to 14 granite riprap or the definition of a D50=12 rock size and conforming to the following gradations: 1. At least 85% of the material must be less than 14 in size. 2. At least 50% of the material must be equal to or less than 12 in size 3. No more than 15% of the material less than 8 in size 4. No material shall be over 18 in size. 5. No material shall be less than 4 in size. All rock must meet the following requirements:
C.
32 93 00 - 7
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
Rip Rap Durability: %loss after 500 revolutions < 45%. Crushed Rock Durability % loss after 500 revolutions < 50%. pH should not be less than 6.0 and or greater than 8.0 and free of basic or acidic compounds. Sulfate (SO4): <0.10%. Potassium & Sodium (K & Na): The sum of these two as a total weight < 1.0%. Calcium (Ca): Percent of total weight < 2.0%. Toxicity: Must meet the minimum EPA testing standards for arsenic, barium, cadmium, chromium, copper, lead, mercury, selenium, and silver. Visual properties such as any active crystal growth caused by elevated conditions listed above will be cause for independent testing by the Owner, which may result in material removal from property by contractor. Results of testing for above listed chemical properties is to be current within six (6) months of installation and within the current guidelines established for Landscape Aggregate Suppliers by the Clark County Department of Development Services, Building Division.
D.
Visual Properties with any active crystal growth caused by elevated conditions listed above in C will be cause for independent testing by the Owner. Test results my result in the removal of such rock material from the property by the contractor. Results of testing of above chemical properties should be current within six-months of installation and within the guidelines established for Landscape Aggregate Suppliers by the Clark County Department of Development Services, Building Division, effective July 1, 2004. See planting drawing for size, type, and color. DRAIN GRAVEL: diameter pea gravel. STAKING MATERIALS: Tree Stakes: All stakes are to be Lodge pole pine unless noted in the details. Lodge pole stakes shall have a 10 inch tapered driving point and chamfered top; treated with copper napthanate or pentachlorophenol to heartwood; green in color, 3 inches in diameter by 10 feet in length for 15 gallon trees and 2 inches in diameter by 10 feet in length for 24 inches box trees or greater. If tree is staked, 24 inches of stake is to be driven into soil. Staking shall be by industry standards. Do not stake into root ball areas. All tree ties for staking to be done with wire gauge #8 or #9 and GCS tree strap (nylon) or approved equal according to manufacturer's specifications. Attach wiring securely to poles with 2 galvanized staples each strap. Nursery tape or rope will not be considered an adequate substitute. Approved nylon tree strap substitutes will be allowed. 1. Trees less than 1 caliper use GCS V-Strap, Model #1018 or equal. 2. Trees over 1 , under 2 caliper use GCS Treestrap, Model #1018 or equal. 3. Trees over 2 caliper use GCS Treestrap, Model #3724 or equal. Multi-trunk tree ties to be staked with three or more lodge pole pine stakes in a triangular configuration with the branches attached to wire and nylon strap. Wiring to be secured to poles with 2 galvanized staples each strap. Spacing of poles may vary upon individual tree needs. If the tree is stable enough to withstand 25 mph wind conditions staking will not be required, if wind conditions impact the tree the contractor is to provide the required staking to stabilize and protect the tree from the seasonal winds. Trees that are not staked shall not be exempt from warranty and replacement requirements in the event of high winds or other adverse conditions.
E.
F. 2.05 2.06 A.
B.
C.
D.
32 93 00 - 8
2.07 A.
ANTI-DESICCANT Anti-desiccants for retarding excessive loss of plant moisture and inhibiting wilt shall be spray able, water insoluble vinyl-vinyledine complex, which will produce a moisture-retarding barrier not removable by water. Wilt-proof Formula NCF as manufactured by Nursery Specialty Products, Greenwich, Connecticut, or approved equal. PRE-EMERGENT MATERIAL Approved granular pre-emergent: Snapshot and XL 2 G. GEOTEXTILE FABRIC: Shall conform to the following standards: Weight: ASTM D 1777 (4.3 oz/yd2) Grab Strength: ASTM D 1682 Puncture: ASTM D 751 Flow Rate: Falling Head Test (120 gpm/ft2) SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Provide inspection for verifying acceptability of plants prior to planting. Organic Material Soils Plus: When left in large piles and in windy conditions, the piles are to be tarped and secured to the ground with stakes. Prior to grass installation and after the irrigation system has been installed water the topsoil with the current irrigation system for dust control.
2.08 A. 2.09 A. B. C. D. 2.10 A. B. C.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 A. B. C. D. E. 3.02 A. B. EXAMINATION Verify that prepared subsoil and planters are at the proper sub-grade elevation and ready to receive work of this section. Saturate soil with water to test drainage. Verify that required underground utilities are available, in proper location and ready for use. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. Irrigation: Do not commence planting work prior to installation and acceptance of irrigation system, unless approved by Owners Representative. PREPARATION OF SUBSOIL Prepare subsoil to eliminate uneven areas. Maintain profiles and contours. Make changes in grade gradual. Blend slopes into level areas. Remove foreign materials, weeds, and undesirable plants and their roots. Remove contaminated subsoil.
32 93 00 - 9
C. D. E.
Dig pits and beds as per planting details. Remove existing soil from courtyards designated planters and add amended soils. Layout and Staking: Layout plants at locations shown on Drawings. Use steel wired flags, colorcoded for each species of plants. Stake each tree. Place shrubs in position on bed areas before cans have been removed. Review: Locations of plants will be checked in the field by Owners Representative and will be adjusted to exact position before planting begins. Right is reserved to refuse review at this time if, in the opinion of the Owners Representative, a sufficient quantity of plants is not available. Owners Representative reserves the right to interchange or adjust the locations of plants prior to planting. Equipment for Digging Plant Pits: Use backhoe or handwork to dig tree pits. Sides of the tree pit are to be sloped after excavation. See planting drawing for the hole size formula. Do not use an auger or tree spade. Containerized Plant Pits: Excavate square plant pits as shown in the planting details. Remove excavated soil from project site and/or dispose of as directed by Owners Representative. Verify that planter walls have been waterproofed prior to installing soil mix. PLANTING Planting schedule: See plant list on planting drawing. Environmental requirements: 1. Do not install plant life when ambient temperatures may drop to below 35 degrees F or above 105 degrees F. 2. Do not install plants when wind velocity exceeds 25 mph. Place plants for best appearance for review and final orientation by Owners Representative. Set plants vertical and flush to finish grade. Do not install soil on top of the root ball. The root ball shall be flush with finish grade. Top dress with (1) one inch of decomposed granite above the root ball area. Provide 2 inch depth elsewhere. Remove all root containers. All containers are to be cut with cutter on 2 sides to remove plant. Support root ball during installation to prevent cracking. Pry off bottom boards of boxed trees rather than hammering boards off. Boxed plants may not be planted with the sides of the box in place. In special situations Palo Verde trees are to have the bottom portion of the box left when planted. Scarify root ball before planting. Set plants in pits of beds, partly filled with prepared soil mixture. Remove burlap, ropes, and wires from the root ball. Scarify root ball before planting. Saturate soil with water when the pit or bed is half full of soil mix and again when full. Install Agriform tablets when hole is 2/3 full.
F.
G.
H. I. 3.03 A. B.
C. D. E. F. G.
H. I. J.
32 93 00 - 10
K.
Backfill: for trees and shrubs 1. Mix to consist of (3) parts Soils Plus (3) parts imported topsoil and (2) parts native soil. 2. Do not add additional soil above the root ball. 3. Add to and mix into this, soil sulfur according to following rate per plant container size: a. 1 gallon = 1/4 cup b. 5 gallon = 1 cup c. 15 gallon = 2 cups d. 24 inch box = 3 cups e. 36 inch box = 4 cups f. 48 inch box = 5 cups g. 54 inch box or larger = 8 cups h. Palms box = 6 cups 4. For Palo Verde trees use only (1) part Soils Plus (3) parts import and (2) parts native soil. 5. Palms use 100% Aquaria sand from Vegas Rock or mortar sand no larger than 1/16 inch in size. 6. Courtyard plantings use a. (3) parts imported topsoil b. (1) part Soils Plus by Biorem soil amendment c. (1) Bag of Grow-Power Plus for every (2) two cubic yards of topsoil (28 inch depth minimum). 7. Water settle all soils prior to planting. 8. Courtyard planting is to include all raised and ground level planters/planting beds within the building envelope and raised retaining planters adjacent to the building. a. All existing soil is to be excavated 30 inches below the concrete walkways to accommodate the 28 inches of topsoil and soil amendments. After planting, apply grow power 4-8-2 liquid fertilizer to Soil surface directly above root zones of all trees and shrubs. Ratio: (2) tablespoons per gallon of water shall provide 20 square feet of coverage. Watering Basin: Form saucer with 3 inches high by 6 inches wide berm centered around tree and shrub pit 12 inches wider than root ball diameter. Do not form saucer around tree in lawn area. For trees in lawn areas, keep a 2 feet diameter (not radius) circle centered on the tree trunk free of turf and weeds. Use a precise template covering the areas outside of the 2 feet circle in applying herbicide to ensure a crisp shape without over spray die back. Maintain 2 feet diameter grass by filling in with 1-inch diameter bark mulch 2 inch depth. When pruning, the Contractor is not to prune more than 1/10 of the canopy off newly planted trees. Contractor to complete pruning before Substantial Completion, but after all planting is complete. CRUSHED ROCK MULCH INSTALLATION Granular pre-emergent shall be applied to all planting beds, avoid pre-emergent applications to areas that are to be seeded. 1. Two (2) pre-emergent applications are required during the rock mulch installation. See rock mulch detailing on the drawings. a. Application rate for pre-emergent, (5) five pounds per 1000 SF. b. All pre-emergent applications are to be water activated within two (2) hours after applied.
L.
M. N.
O.
3.04 A.
32 93 00 - 11
B.
Where existing weeds exist it is the contractor shall eradicate the weeds by using herbicides and manual procedures for eradication. It is required to keep a record of all herbicide applications noting the date and location of such applications. The surfaces upon which the crushed rock mulch is to be placed shall be graded and compacted to a density of 90 percent. The areas on which the rock mulch is to be placed shall be reasonably smooth and free of all deleterious material. Rocks larger than one-inch in diameter shall be removed and disposed of by the contractor. Crushed rock mulch shall not be placed until the required water distribution systems and planting operations have been completed within the area. Crushed rock mulch shall be evenly distributed over the designated areas. The depth of the rock mulch shall be at least 2-inches in depth up to the plants root ball. The rock mulch depth over the plant root ball shall be 1-inch depth. After placing, spreading, grading and applying the pre-emergent to the rock mulch the contractor shall water settle the total thickness of the rock mulch, settling the minus material in the crushed rock and activating the pre-emergent material. The Contractor shall correct all erosion that occurs within the rock mulch areas immediately. CLEAN UP During course of planting, excess and waste materials shall be continuously and promptly removed and all reasonable precautions taken to avoid damage to plants and existing vegetation. Walks, drives and paving shall be kept clean and clear from debris, materials and equipment, as much as possible. When planting is complete in any one area, the area shall be cleared of all debris, rubbish, excess backfill mix, and waste materials. Upon completion of entire work and before Final Inspection, all debris, rubbish, topsoil, and waster materials shall be removed from site, all areas of exposed soil raked smooth, and all paving to be swept and cleaned. Remove soil or other materials from site amenities. MAINTENANCE Maintain installed landscape through the date of substantial completion. For more information regarding maintenance after substantial completion see section 32 01 90 Landscape Maintenance. Provide a one-year warranty starting from the substantial completion date for all trees and palms. All plants are to have a complete warranty. Warranty is to include: 1. Death 2. Unsatisfactory growth 3. Other defects identified by the owners representative. MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS Maintain plant life immediately after placement until plants are well established and exhibit a vigorous growing condition.
C.
D. E.
F.
G. 3.05 A.
B.
3.06 A. B. C.
3.07 A.
32 93 00 - 12
B. C.
All plantings or replacement planting for dead or damaged plants must be completed before Substantial Completion Acceptance unless directed otherwise by the Owners Representative. Maintenance to include: 1. Cultivation and weeding plant beds and tree pits. 2. The control of weeds shall be accomplished either by the use of herbicides or manual means. The Contractor shall keep a record of all applications, listing the type of herbicides used, the rate and method of applications, and the date and locations of the applications. A copy of this record shall be submitted to the CCSD Representative & Owners Representative every month with the pay request. 3. Application of herbicides for weed control in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage resulting from use of herbicides. 4. Supply individual school a schedule of pesticides, herbicide, pre-emergent and fertilizing application at least seven (14) days before chemical treatment of all pesticide and weed problems and fertilizing. This to conform to the Clark County School Districts policy and regulations concerning the Right to Know. 5. Application of pesticides in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remedy damage from use of pesticides. 6. Irrigating sufficient to saturate root system. Adjust watering for current weather conditions and season. 7. Trimming and pruning, including removal of clippings and dead or broken branches, and treatment of pruned areas or other wounds. Work to be performed by a certified arborist. 8. Disease control. 9. Maintaining and adjusting tree, guys, and stakes, repair or replace accessories when required. 10. Apply post-emergent herbicides to control all weed growth, at a minimum, on a monthly basis. 11. Cleaning and removal of debris in landscape areas. 12. Erosion control of all planting and grass areas. Clean and repair all damaged areas. 13. Landscape areas shall be kept free of all debris at all times. 14. Contractor shall repair any and all eroded areas by in filling with topsoil and/or crushed rock to restore the area. Factors that cause the erosion shall be reported immediately to the Owners Representative. LANDSCAPE PROGRESS REVIEWS Installation work is subject to review at any time during by the Owners Representative. Formal reviews will be conducted after the Owners Representative has received a written request at the following intervals during the construction period: 1. Irrigation piping, connections to water source & equipment, water pressure test etc. 2. Review upon delivery of plant materials. 3. Review of layout of planting pits. 4. Review of excavated planting pits. 5. Review of all landscape grades. 6. Review of installed plants and decomposed granite. Post Construction Completion Review 1. Substantial Completion Walk Through (Punch List Creation). 2. Walk-thru for Landscape Warranty/Maintenance Period (Punch List Completion) 3. Final Acceptance Walk-Thru. (Completion of maintenance period). 4. Eleven (11) month walk review. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION WALK THROUGH AND PUNCH LIST REVIEW
3.08 A. B.
C.
3.09
32 93 00 - 13
A.
Substantial Completion Requirements: 1. All as-built drawings are to be approved and accepted before the punch list walk. If drawings are not approved prior to the scheduled walk, this review will not proceed. 2. Arrange for Owners Representative presence, a minimum notice of 72 Hours is required. The contractor is to turn over all required equipment, keys and supplies (provide in writing all material names, quantities and manufacture names) to the Owners Representative. A copy of the material list is to be submitted to the Owners Representative. 3. Entire landscape shall be installed as per planting plans. Any deviations or inadequacies due to field conditions shall have been corrected prior to walk-thru. 4. Owners Representative will provide a punch list of items to be corrected prior to commencement of Landscape Warranty/Maintenance Period. Contractor shall complete all items prior to the maintenance period. 5. Reviews include all planting, turf and irrigation areas. 6. Open all valve boxes for review - valves that have been buried under the areas are to be reviewed prior to Sodding. PUNCH LIST REVIEW FOR ACCEPTANCE Walk-thru for Landscape Punch List Completion: 1. All landscape work noted on the punch list is to be completed with in seven working days after the school site has been walked for the original punch list. a. The contractor shall submit in writing that all of the items on the punch list been completed. Work not completed can delay the maintenance start date at the discretion of the owners representative. 2. Contractor shall demonstrate that all items, which are deficient or incorrect, have been corrected for the walk-thru. Items deemed not acceptable by the Owners Representative shall be revoked or replaced to complete satisfaction of the representative. 3. If items identified on the final walk-thru list are not completed properly prior to the starting of the Warranty Maintenance Period, the Contractor can be charged for time spent for all subsequent walk-throughs and the walk-through will be terminated. Funds will be withheld from final payment and/or retainage to Contractor, in amount equal to additional time and expenses incurred by the Owners Representative to conduct and document further walkthru as deemed necessary to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. 4. Upon satisfaction of the above, the Owners Representative will issue in writing that the punch list is accepted and that the Landscape Warranty/Maintenance Periods shall begin. Refer to Section 32 01 90, Landscape Maintenance for maintenance requirements. FINAL ACCEPTANCE REVIEW At the end of the Landscape Warranty/Maintenance period, the contractor is to review the school site before final acceptance walk. All plants and grass areas are to be in excellent condition if they are not it will be deemed that the maintenance requirements were not met and monies will be withheld to correct the incomplete maintenance work and or damage. All rock mulch areas are to be level and raked clean. All plants are to be in good health conditions and the irrigation equipment is to be in 100% working order. If all the work is found to be complete and in accordance with the construction documents, this review will be constituted as the Final Acceptance and the landscape work will be closed-out. Written notification will be sent upon acceptances of the work. If the review reveals any unsatisfactory work, the Contractor will continue maintenance until the replaced work is accepted by the Owners Representative. Additional inspections to review compliance will be billed to the contractor by the Owners Representative.
3.10 A.
B. 3.11 A.
B.
C.
32 93 00 - 14
D. E. 3.12 A.
The Landscape Contractor shall request, in writing, the final acceptance review. The Owners Representative will not release retention monies until Final Acceptance of the work. ELEVEN MONTH REVIEW The eleven-month review is set up eleven months after substantial completion date. The Owners Representative will walk the site to review all items that have warranty items that extend beyond the 120-day maintenance and warranty period. Primary items that will be reviewed are: 1. Irrigation 2. Trees 3. Items that received an extended warranty. All landscape work noted on the eleven month review is to be completed within seven working days after the walk is performed. END OF SECTION
B.
32 93 00 - 15
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 33 11 00 WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Tying into existing water distribution systems including but not limited to: 1. Water systems piping for potable water service and fire protection services. 2. Cleaning and disinfecting water piping system. 3. Accessories required for a complete installation. Related Sections: 1. Document 00 31 32 Soils/Geotechnical Report. 2. Section 31 23 16 Excavation. 3. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching. 4. Section 31 23 23 Backfilling. 5. Section 33 13 00 Disinfection of Water Systems.
B.
1.2
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. E. F. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). American Water Works Association (AWWA). Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) 246 Hydrants for Fire Protection Service. Soils/Geotechnical Report - Geotechnical Evaluation; Prepared for the project. Document: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements, Codes, and Standards: 1. Comply with applicable section of the Uniform Building Code, 1997 UBC. 2. Comply with applicable provisions of the Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition. 3. Comply with requirements of utility supplying water, including tapping of water mains and backflow prevention. 4. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire protection systems, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing. 5. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable water piping and plumbing systems, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. 6. National Fire Protection Association: NFPA 24(1995 Edition) Standard for the Installation of Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances for materials, installations, tests, and flushing. NFPA 70(1997 Edition) National Electrical Code for electrical connections between wiring and electrically operated devices. 7. Approval Stamps: 8. Listing/approval stamp, label, or other marking on equipment made to specified standards.
33 11 00-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Water Systems
Lochsa Engineering
9. 10. B. C. D. E. 1.4
Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment and accessories listed and labeled as defined in National Electrical Code, Article 100. Disinfection of System: Perform work in accordance with AWWA C651.
Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. Water Treatment Firm: Firm specializing in disinfecting potable water systems having minimum 5 years documented experience. Testing Firm: Firm specializing in testing and examining potable water systems, certified by the State of Nevada. Submit bacteriologist's signature and authority associated with testing.
SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Technical data including pressure rating, rated capacity, and settings of selected models for the following: 2. Backflow preventers. 3. Valves. 4. Identification materials and devices. 5. Technical data for disinfecting chemicals. Record Drawings: At project closeout of installed water system piping and products. Reports and Certifications: 1. Test Reports: Indicate results comparative to specified requirements including pressure and distribution testing. 2. Certification: Certified test results from testing laboratory. 3. Certification: Cleanliness of water distribution system meets or exceeds specified requirements and as required by local codes. 4. Disinfection Report: 5. Type and form of disinfectant used. 6. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 7. Test locations. 8. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 9. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 10. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. 11. Bacteriological report: 12. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 13. Time and date of water sample collection. 14. Name of person collecting samples. 15. Test locations. 16. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 17. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 18. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of State of Nevada.
B. C.
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Preparation for Transport: 1. Ensure valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion.
Lochsa Engineering
B.
2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends, flange faces, and weld ends. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling. Storage: 1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage. 2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew point temperature. Support valves off ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. B. C. Perform site survey, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations. Contact utility locating service for area where Project is located. Verify water system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards. Site Information: Reports on subsurface condition investigations made during the design of the Project are available for informational purposes only; data in reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions (between soil borings). Owner assumes no responsibility for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.
1.7
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. B. C. D. E. Coordinate connection to water main with Owners Maintenance Staff. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building fire protection systems piping. Coordinate with pipe materials, sizes, entry locations, and pressure requirements of building water distribution systems piping. Coordinate with other utility work. Coordinate electrical requirements of actual equipment furnished with requirements specified.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, provide products by one of the following: 1. Gate Valves: American Darling Valve Div., American Cast Iron Pipe Co. Clow Valve Co. Div., McWane, Inc. Kennedy Valve Div., McWane, Inc. Mueller Co., Grinnell Corp. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. 2. Disinfecting Chemicals: Comply with EPA requirements. AWWA B300, Hypochlorite. AWWA B301, Liquid Chlorine. AWWA B302, Ammonium Sulfate. AWWA B303, Sodium Chlorite.
Lochsa Engineering
3. 4. 5.
Double Check Detector Assembly. Conraco FEBCO Double Check Detector Assembly Enclosure. Hotbox Hydrocowl Reduced Pressure Principle Assembly Backflow Preventors. Conraco Febco
B.
Pipes: Subject to compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: AWWA C900; Classes 150 and 200; with bell end and elastomeric gasket, with plain end for cast iron and ductile iron fittings, or with plain end for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings. 1. Pipe Marking: NSF 14, NSF-pvc cto only. 2. Gaskets:ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. Joining Materials 1. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated. Valves: 1. Valves 2 Inches and Larger: AWWA C500, nonrising stem and nut operator or handwheel, double wedge, flanged, grooved, or mechanical ends. 2. Gate Valves, 2 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP 80; bronze body, nonrising stem and handwheel, inside screw, single wedge or disc, threaded ends.
C.
D.
2.2
IDENTIFICATION A. Metallic Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid blue in color with continuously printed caption in black letters CAUTION - WATER LINE BURIED BELOW.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EARTHWORK A. 3.2 Excavation, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31.
SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING A. Extend water system piping and connect to water supply source and building water distribution and fire protection systems at outside face of the building wall in locations and pipe sizes indicated. 1. Terminate water system piping at building wall until building water systems are installed. Terminate piping with caps, plugs, or flanges as required for piping material. Make connections to building water systems when those systems are installed. Water distribution systems and fire protection systems as specified. Install restrained joints for buried piping within 5 feet of building. Use restrained joint pipe and fittings, thrust blocks, anchors, tie rods and clamps, and other supports at vertical and horizontal offsets.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Water Systems
B. C.
33 11 00-4
Lochsa Engineering
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. AWWA Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Gasketed Joints: Use AWWA C900 joining materials. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer's written instructions. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping Solvent Cement Joints: Construct joints according to ASTM D 2672 and ASTM D 2855. 1. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F 402 for safe handling when joining plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cements. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Construct joints using adapters that are compatible with both piping materials, outside diameters, and system working pressure. Comply with specifications for joining piping of dissimilar metals.
B.
C.
3.4
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Install piping as indicated except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. Install piping at indicated slope. Install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. Install piping free of sags and bends. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit valve servicing. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections. Piping Connections: Make piping connections as specified below. 1. Install unions, in piping 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having 2 inch or smaller threaded pipe connection. 2. Install flanges, in piping 2-1/2 inches and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping of dissimilar metals.
B. C. D. E. F. G.
3.5
PIPING INSTALLATION A. B. Comply with requirements of NFPA 24 for materials and installation. Bury piping at minimum depth of 36 inches below finished grade and not less than 18 inches below average local frost depth.
3.6
ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION A. Anchorages: Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems: 1. Gasketed Joint, Ductile Iron Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed Joint, Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: According to AWWA M23.
33 11 00-5
Lochsa Engineering
B. 3.7
Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion retarding material to surfaces of installed ferrous anchorage devices.
VALVE INSTALLATION A. Application: Use mechanical joint end valves for 3 inch and larger buried installation. Use threaded and flanged end valves for installation in pits and inside building. Use nonrising stem UL/FM gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use bronze corporation stops and valves, with ends compatible with piping, for 2 inch and smaller installation. AWWA Type Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600. Install buried valves with stem pointing up and with cast iron valve box. UL/FM Type Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. 1. Install buried valves and valves in pits with stem pointing up and with vertical cast iron indicator post.
B. C.
3.8
DETECTOR CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION A. B. Align detector check valves for proper direction of flow. Install according to authorities having jurisdiction. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on 3000 psi minimum, portland cement mix concrete.
3.9
BACKFLOW PREVENTER INSTALLATION A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to plumbing and health department authorities having jurisdiction. Do not install bypass around backflow preventer. Do not install reduced pressure principle type in pit. Support backflow preventers, valves, and piping on 3000 psi minimum, portland/cement mix concrete.
B. C. D. 3.10
IDENTIFICATION INSTALLATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back filling of trench for underground water service piping. Locate 6 inches to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping. Attach nonmetallic piping label permanently to main electrical meter panel.
B. 3.11
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours prior to testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at minimum 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. 1. Increase pressure in 50 psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly
B.
Lochsa Engineering
increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within above limits. 3.12 CLEANING AND DISINFECTING SYSTEM A. B. C. Inspected and pressure test piping system. Perform scheduling and disinfecting activity with start up, testing, adjusting and balancing, demonstration procedures, including coordination with related systems. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping: 1. Purge new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use. 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by that authority, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below: 3. Comply with NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 4. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours. 5. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours. 6. Following allowed standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in water coming from system. 7. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authority having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination made by authority shows evidence of contamination. Prepare reports for purging and disinfecting activities. END OF SECTION
D.
33 11 00-7
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 33 13 00 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Disinfection of on-site potable water system, including service mains to the building. B. Test and report results. 1.2 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit reports to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Disinfection report; accurately record: 1. Type and form of disinfectant used. 2. Date and time of disinfectant injection start and time of completion. 3. Test locations. 4. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residual (quantity in treated water) in ppm for each outlet tested. 5. Date and time of flushing start and completion. 6. Disinfectant residual after flushing in ppm for each outlet tested. C. Bacteriological report; accurately record: 1. Date issued, project name, and testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number. 2. Time and date of water sample collection. 3. Name of person collecting samples. 4. Test locations. 5. Initial and 24 hour disinfectant residuals in ppm for each outlet tested. 6. Coliform bacteria test results for each outlet tested. 7. Certification that water conforms, or fails to conform, to bacterial standards of State of Nevada. 8. Bacteriologist's signature. 1.3 EXECUTION A. Provide and attach equipment required to execute work of this Section. B. Inject treatment disinfectant into piping system. C. Circulate and flush repeatedly until required cleanliness is achieved. D. Flush and clean with municipal domestic water. E. Replace permanent system devices removed for disinfection. F. Pressure test system to 150 psi unless higher pressures are required by authorities having jurisdiction. Repair leaks and retest. 1.4 TESTS A. Provide testing of treated water per requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Test Samples in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651. END OF SECTION
33 13 00-1
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Disinfection of Water Systems
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 33 30 00 SANITARY SEWER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Sanitary sewer system including but not limited to: 1. Tie into and extend existing sanitary sewerage system appurtenances. 2. Accessories required for a complete installation. Related Work: 1. Document 00 31 32 Soils/Geotechnical Report 2. Section 31 23 17 - Trenching. 3. Section 31 23 23 Backfilling.
piping
and
B.
1.2
REFERENCES A. B. C. D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). Soils/Geotechnical Report. Soils/Geotechnical Evaluation; as prepared for the subject property. Document: Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition. Document: Design and Construction Standards for Wastewater Collection Systems, Clark County Water Reclamation District, Latest Edition.
1.3
QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements, Codes, and Standards: 1. Applicable provisions of the Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Off Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, latest edition. 2. Design and Construction Standards for Wastewater Collection Systems, 1991. 3. Environmental Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of local environmental agency regulations pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems. 4. Utility Compliance: Comply with local utility regulations and standards pertaining to sanitary sewerage systems. Manufacturers Qualifications: Firm having minimum 5 years documented experience in manufacturing sanitary sewer products.
B. 1.4
SUBMITTALS A. B. Product Data: Drainage piping specialties. Coordination drawings showing pipe sizes and cleanouts, locations, and elevations. Include details of underground structures and connections. Show other piping in the same trench and clearances from sanitary sewerage system piping. Indicate interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate structures. Coordination profile drawings showing sanitary sewerage system piping in elevation. Draw profiles at a horizontal scale of minimum 1 inch equals 50 feet and a vertical scale of minimum 1 inch equals 5 feet. Indicate pipe and underground structures. Show types, sizes, materials, and elevations of other utilities crossing sewerage system piping.
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sanitary Sewer
C.
33 30 00-1
Lochsa Engineering
1.5
PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Site Information: Perform site survey, and verify existing utility locations. Verify storm sewerage system piping may be installed in compliance with original design and referenced standards. 1. Locate existing sanitary sewerage system piping and structures that are to be connected into, and abandoned and closed.
1.6
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. B. C. Coordinate relocation of existing sewer to avoid interruption of service. Coordinate with interior building sanitary drainage piping. Coordinate with other utility work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Manufacturers: Provide products complying with requirements of one of the following: 1. Cleanouts: Ancon, Inc. Josam Co. Smith (Jay R.) Mfg. Co. Wade Div.; Tyler Pipe. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div. 2. Underground Warning Tapes: Allen Systems, Inc.; Reef Industries, Inc. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. Carlton Industries, Inc. EMED Co., Inc. Seton Name Plate Co.
2.2
PIPE AND FITTINGS A. B. Provide pipe and pipe fitting materials compatible with each other. Where more than one type of materials or products is indicated, selection is Installer's option. Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, gray cast iron, for compression gasket joints. 1. Class: Service. 2. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber, thickness to match class of pipe. PVC (Polyvinyl Chloride) Sewer Pipe and Fittings: Size and thickness to match existing. 1. ASTM D 2729, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends. 2. ASTM D 3033, Type PSP, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends. 3. ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, bell and spigot solvent sealed ends. 4. Solvent Cement: ASTM D 2564. 5. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 6. Reinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 76, Class II, Wall B, for rubber gasket joints, bell and spigot. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber compression gasket joint.
C.
D.
33 30 00-2
Lochsa Engineering
E.
Nonreinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe and Fittings: ASTM C 14, Class 2, for rubber gasket joints. 1. Gaskets: ASTM C 443, rubber compression gasket joint.
2.3
CLEANOUTS A. Provide cast iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug, with round cast iron access frame and heavy duty, secured, scoriated cast iron cover.
2.4
IDENTIFICATION A. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid green in color with continuously printed caption in black letters CAUTION SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW. Metallic Lined Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape with metallic core, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid green in color with continuously printed caption in black letters CAUTION - SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW.
B.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS A. B. C. Grade trench bottom to provide a smooth, firm, stable, and rock free foundation, throughout length of pipe. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at surface upon which pipes are to be laid, and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of pipe. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of all loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on foundation.
3.2
INSTALLATION A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans and details) indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage system piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. Install piping as indicated to extent practical. Install piping beginning at low point of systems, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line and pull past each joint as it is completed. Use cleanouts for changes in direction, except where a fitting is indicated. Use fittings for branch connections, except where direct tap into existing sewer is indicated. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings, where different size or material of pipes and fittings are connected. Reduction of size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. Building sewers shall be run in impractical alignment and at a uniform slop of not less than 1/4 of an inch per foot toward the point of disposal. Except when approved by the
33 30 00-3 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Sanitary Sewer
B.
C. D.
E.
Lochsa Engineering
Administrative Authority and where it is impractical, due to the depth of the street sewer or to the structural features or to the arrangement of any building or structure, to obtain a slope of 1/4 of an inch per foot, any such pipe or piping 4 inches through 6 inches may have a slope of not less than 1/8 of an inch per foot and any such piping 8 inches and larger may have a slope of not less than 1/16 of an inch per foot. F. 3.3 Extend sanitary sewerage system piping to connect to building sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations indicated.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION A. Join and install PVC pipe as follows: 1. Solvent cement joint pipe and fittings, joining with solvent cement in accordance with ASTM D 2855 and ASTM F 402. 2. Pipe and gasketed fittings, joining with elastomeric seals in accordance with ASTM D 3212. 3. Installation in accordance with ASTM D 2321. Join different types of pipe with standard manufactured couplings and fittings intended for that purpose.
B. 3.4
CLEANOUTS A. Install cleanouts and extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade as indicated. Set cleanout frame and cover in concrete block 18" x 18" x 12" deep, except where location is in concrete paving. Set top of cleanout 1 inch above surrounding earth grade or flush with grade when installed in paving.
3.5
TAP CONNECTIONS A. B. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished work will conform as nearly as practicable to requirements specified for new work. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section of existing pipe, install wye fitting into existing piping, and encase entire wye fitting plus 6 inch overlap, with minimum 6 inches of 4500 psi 28 day compressive strength concrete. Make branch connections from side into existing 4 to 21 inch piping by removing section of existing pipe and installing wye fitting, into existing piping. Encase entire wye with minimum 6 inches of 3000 psi 28 day compressive strength concrete. Make branch connections from side into existing 24 inch or larger piping or to underground structures by cutting opening into existing unit sufficiently large to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground. 1. Provide concrete attaining minimum 28 day compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Use epoxy bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and piping materials. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris, concrete, or other extraneous material that may accumulate.
C.
D.
E.
Lochsa Engineering
3.6
INSTALLATION OF IDENTIFICATION A. Install continuous plastic underground warning tape during back filling of trench for underground sanitary sewer piping. Locate 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly over piping.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. B. Testing: Perform testing of completed piping in accordance with local authorities having jurisdiction. Cleaning: Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of day or whenever work stops. 3. Flush piping between cleanouts, if required by local authority, to remove collected debris. Interior Inspection: Inspect piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. 1. Make inspections after pipe between cleanouts and cleanout locations has been installed and approximately 2 feet of backfill is in place, and again at completion of project. 2. If inspection indicates poor alignment, debris, displaced pipe, infiltration or other defects correct such defects, and reinspect. In order to check for line defects and independent third-party contractor herein referred to as the Videotaping Company shall be hired by the Owner to perform videotaping of sanitary sewer lines, provide written certification of videotape accuracy, and provide a written catalogue of deficiencies. If the pipes are constructed per Project Drawings and Specifications, the catalogue of deficiencies should state, No defects detected. 1. The Videotaping Company shall televise/videotape all sanitary sewer lines between manholes, excluding laterals to the building. 2. The videotaping shall be done after the sanitary sewer lines have been completely backfilled and compacted, but prior to paving. The Contractor will give the Owner a minimum of ten working days written notice when the sanitary sewer lines are ready to be televised. 3. The Videotaping Company shall use a color television camera and video taping equipment with time stamp and date features. The videotape shall be annotated to show date, time, and pipe identification; each sanitary sewer line will be identified on the tape as to location on the project site. 4. Videotaping provided by the Videotaping Company shall be completed in accordance with National Association of Sewer Service Companies (NASSCOs) specifications. 5. Two (2) copies each of the certified and annotated videotape will be produced and delivered to each of the following: Owner, Architect, Project Manager, and Inspector. The written certification of videotape accuracy and catalogue of deficiencies shall accompany each copy. Once the videotaping has been completed, reviewed, and accepted by the Owner Representative, the Owner will sign a document accepting the work. Testing procedures and results shall be observed and verified by a representative of the Owner.
C.
D.
E.
Lochsa Engineering
END OF SECTION
33 30 00-6
Lochsa Engineering
SECTION 33 40 00 STORM DRAIN PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY: This section specifies construction of outside, underground storm sewer systems. The storm sewer systems shall be complete and ready for operation, including all drainage structures, frames, grate and covers, connections to new buildings, structure service lines, existing storm sewer lines and existing drainage structures and all required incidentals. 1.2 RELATED WORK: A. Section 00 31 32 - Soils/Geotechnical Report. B. Section 01 00 00 General Requirements. C. Section 31 22 00 - Grading. D. Section 31 23 16 Excavation. E. Section 21 23 17 - Trenching. F. Section 23 23 23 - Backfilling. G. Document Uniform Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction Off-Site Improvements, Clark County Area, Nevada, Latest Edition. Herein referred to as Uniform Standard Specifications. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE: A. Products Criteria: 1. Multiple Units: When two or more units of the same type or class of materials or equipment are required, these units shall be products of one manufacturer. 2. Nameplates: Nameplate bearing manufacturer's name, or identifiable trademark, securely affixed in a conspicuous place on equipment, or name or trademark cast integrally with equipment, stamped, or otherwise permanently marked on each item of equipment. B. Comply with the rules and regulations of the Public Utility having jurisdiction over the connection to public storm sewer lines and the extension, and/or modifications to Public Utility systems. 1.4 SUBMITTALS: A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 23, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES. B. Manufacturers' Literature and Data: Submit the following as one package: 1. Piping. 2. Jointing material. 3. Manhole, inlet and catch basin material. 4. Frames and covers. 5. Steps. 6. Resilient connectors and downspout boots. C. One copy of Uniform Standard Specification standard details of MANHOLES, INLETS and catch basins. D. One copy of Uniform Standard Specification specification. 1.5 APPLICABLE PUBLICATIONS: A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referenced in the text by the basic designation only. B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
JMA 127457 Bid Documents: February 18, 2013 33 40 00-1 Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Storm Drain
Lochsa Engineering
A48-03/A48M-03 ....... Gray Iron Castings A536-84(2004) .......... Ductile Iron Castings A615-05/A615M-05 ... Deformed and Plain-Billet Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement A655-04e1/A655M-04e1... Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe A742-03/A742M-03 ... Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated and Polymer Precoated for Corrugated Steel Pipe A760-01a/A760M-01a Corrugated Steel Pipe, Metallic-Coated for Sewers and Drains A762-00/A762M-00 ... Corrugated Steel Pipe, Polymer Precoated for Sewers and Drains A798-01/M798M-01 .. Installing Factory-Made Corrugated Steel Pipe for Sewers and Other Applications A849-00 ..................... Post-Applied Coatings, Pavings, and Linings for Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe A929-01/A929M-01 ... Steel Sheet, Metallic Coated by the Hot Dip Process for Corrugated Steel Pipe C76-05a/C76M-05a ... Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C139-03 .................... Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes C150-04ae1 .............. Portland Cement C443-05/C443M-05 ... Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets C478-03a/C478M-03a Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections C506-05/C506M-05 ... Reinforced Concrete Arch Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C507-05a/C507M-05a Reinforced Concrete Elliptical Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C655-04e1/C655M-04e1 Reinforced Concrete D-Load Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe C1433-04e1/C1433M-04e1 Precast Reinforced Concrete Box Sections for Culverts, Storm Drains and Sewers C828-03 .................... Low-Pressure Air Test of Vitrified Clay Pipe Lines C857-95(2001) .......... Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures C923-02/C923M-02 ... Resilient Connectors between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures, Pipes and Materials C924-02/C924M-02 ... Testing Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines by Low Pressure Air Test Method C1103-03/C1103M-03 Joint Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines D698-00ae1 .............. Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)) D1056-00 .................. Flexible Cellular Materials-Sponge or Expanded Rubber D2412-02 .................. Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel Plate Loading D2321-04e1 .............. Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications . D3034-04a ................ Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings D3212-96a(2003)e1 .. Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals D3350-04 .................. Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials D4101-05a ................ Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials F477-02e1 ................. Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe F679-03 ..................... Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings F714-05 ..................... Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR) Based on Outside Diameter F794-03 ..................... Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter F894-98a ................... Polyethylene (PE) Large Diameter Profile Wall Sewer and Drain Pipe F949-03 ..................... Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe with Smooth Interior
Lochsa Engineering
F1417-92(2005) ........ Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using LowPressure Air NOTE: ASTM test methods shall be the current version as of the date of advertisement of the project. C. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO): HB17 ......................... Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges M190-04 .................... Bituminous Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe Arches M198-05 .................... Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe Using Flexible Watertight Gaskets M294-04 .................... Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300-1500 mm (12 to 60 inches) Diameter PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPING: A. Gravity Lines (Pipe and Appurtenances): 1. Concrete: Reinforced pipe, ASTM C76 or ASTM C655. Reinforced arch culvert and storm drainpipe shall comply with ASTM C506. Reinforced elliptical culvert and storm drainpipe shall comply with ASTM C507. Joints shall be watertight flexible joints made with rubber-type gaskets conforming to ASTM C443. 2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): a. Pipe and Fittings, Type PSM PVC Pipe, shall conform to ASTM D3034, Type PSM, SDR 35. Pipe and fittings shall have elastomeric gasket joints providing a watertight seal when tested in accordance with ASTM D 3212. Gaskets shall conform to ASTM F 477. Solvent welded joints shall not be permitted. b. Pipe and fittings, smooth wall, corrugated or ribbed PVC, shall conform to the following: 1) Pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F949 corrugated sewer pipe with a smooth interior. The corrugated outer wall shall be fused to the smooth interwall at the corrugation valley. Pipe and fitting shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D 3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi at 5 percent deflection, when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2412. Corrugation shall be perpendicular to the axis of the pipe to allow gaskets to be installed on field cut sections of pipe without the requirement for special fittings. 2) Ribbed wall PVC pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F794, Series 46. Ribbed sewer pipe with smooth interior pipe and fittings shall have a smooth bell, elastomeric joints conforming to ASTM D 3212, and shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 psi when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2412, at 5 percent vertical deflection. Joints shall not leak at 25 feet of head under 5 percent deflection. 3) Solid wall pipe and fittings shall conform to ASTM F 679. pipe and fittings shall have gaskets conforming to ASTM F 477, and shall be able to withstand a hydrostatic pressure of 50 psi. 3. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE): a. Smooth Wall PE Pipe: Shall comply with ASTM F714, DR 21 for pipes 3 to 24 inches, and SDR 26 for pipes 26 to 48 inches. Pipe shall be produced from PE certified by the resin producer as meeting the requirements of ASTM D3350, minimum cell class 335434C. b. Corrugated PE Pipe: Shall comply with AASHTO M294, for pipes 12 to 60 inches. c. Profile Wall PE Pipe: Shall comply with ASTM F894, Class 160, produced from PE certified by the resin producer as meeting the requirements of ASTM D3350, Minimum cell class 334433C. 4. Corrugated Steel Pipe: a. Zinc/Aluminum Coated: Pipe shall comply with ASTM A760, zinc or aluminum (Type 2) coated of either: 1) Type II pipe with helical 2-2/3 by 1/2 inch corrugations.
Lochsa Engineering
2) Type IIR pipe with helical 3/4 by 3/4 by 7-1/2 inch corrugations. b. Internal coatings shall be fully bituminous coated (AASHTO M190 Type A. c. Concrete Lined: Zinc coated Type I corrugated steel pipe with helical 2-2/3 by 1/2 inch corrugations shall comply with ASTM A760. Concrete lining shall comply with ASTM A849. d. Polymer Precoated: ASTM A762 corrugated steel pipe fabricated from ASTM A742, Grade 250/250 10/10 polymer precoated sheet of either: 1) Type II pipe with helical 2-2/3 by 1/2 inch corrugations. 2) Type IIR pipe with helical 3/4 by 3/4 by 7-1/2 inch corrugations. e. Internal coatings shall be polymer precoated. 2.2 JOINTING MATERIAL: A. Concrete Pipe: Rubber gasket ASTM C443. B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: 1. PVC Plastic Pipe: Joints shall comply with ASTM D3212, Elastomeric Gaskets shall comply with ASTM F477 and as recommended by the manufacturer. C. PE Plastic Pipe: 1. Smooth Wall PE Plastic Pipe: Pipe shall be joined using butt fusion as recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Corrugated PE Plastic Pipe: Water tight joints shall be made using a PVC or PE coupling and rubber gaskets as recommended by the pipe manufacturer. Rubber gaskets shall conform to ASTM F477. Soil tight joints shall conform to requirements in AASHTO HB-17, Division II, for soil tightness and shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. 3. Profile Wall PE Plastic Pipe: Joints shall be gasket or thermal weld type with integral bell in accordance with ASTM F894. D. Corrugated Metal Pipe: 1. Gaskets: Rubber gaskets, shall comply with ASTM D1056, Type 2 Rubber O-rings shall conform to ASTM C443. 2. Connecting Bands: Connecting bands shall be of the type, size and sheet thickness of the band, and the size of the angles, bolts, rods and lugs as indicated, or where not indicated, as specified in the applicable standards or specifications for the pipe. 2.3 MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS: A. Manholes, inlets and catch basins shall be constructed of precast concrete segmental blocks, precast reinforced concrete rings, precast reinforced sections, or cast-in-place concrete. Manholes, inlets and catch basins shall be in accordance with State Department of Transportation standard details, and the following VA requirements, in case of variance, VA requirements supersede: 1. Precast Concrete Segmental Blocks: Blocks shall conform to ASTM C139 and shall not be less than 6 inches thick for manholes to a depth of 12 feet; not less than 8 inches thick for manholes deeper than 12 feet deep. Blocks shall be not less than 8 inches in length. Blocks shall be shaped so that joints seal and bond effectively with cement mortar. Parge structure interior and exterior with 1/2 inch of cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface. 2. Precast Reinforced Concrete Rings: Rings or sections shall have an inside diameter as indicated on the drawings, and shall be not less than 48 inches in diameter. Wall thickness shall conform to requirements of ASTM C76, except that lengths of the sections may be shorter as conditions require. Tops shall conform to ASTM C478. Top section shall be eccentric cone type. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover. 3. Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Risers and Tops: Design, material and installation shall conform to requirements of ASTM C478. Top sections shall be eccentric. Steps on inside wall shall be in the same plane from bottom of structure to manhole cover. 4. Flat top manhole tops shall be reinforced concrete as detailed on the drawings. 5. Precast Catch Basins: Concrete for precast sections shall have a minimum compressive strength of 5,000 psi at 28 days, ASTM A615, Grade 60 reinforcing steel, rated for AASHTO
Lochsa Engineering
HS20-44 loading with 30 percent impact, and conform to ASTM C-857. 6. Mortar: a. Precast Concrete Segmental Block Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement, l/4 part lime hydrate, and 3 parts sand. b. Precast Reinforced Concrete Ring and Riser Structures: By volume, 1 part of Portland cement and 2 parts sand. Water in mixture shall produce a stiff, workable mortar, but shall not exceed 5-l/2 gallons per sack of cement. 7. Flexible sealing compound shall be packaged in extruded preformed shape, sized to completely fill the joint between precast sections, and form permanently flexible watertight seal. The sealing compound shall be non-shrink and meet AASHTO M-198B. 8. Frames and covers shall be gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48. The frame and cover shall be rated for HS20-44 loading, have a studded pattern on the cover, and the words storm sewer. The studs and the lettering shall be raised 5/16 inch. The cover shall be a minimum of 24 inches in diameter and shall have four 3/4 inch vent holes and two lifting slots. The bearing surface of the frame and cover shall be machine finished. The cover shall fit firmly on the frame without movement when subject to traffic. 9. Manhole steps shall be polypropylene plastic coated on a No. 4 deformed rebar conforming to ASTM C478, Polypropylene shall conform to ASTM D4101. Steps shall be a minimum of 10 inches wide and project a minimum of 5 inches away from the mall. The top surface of the step shall have a studded non-slip surface. Steps shall be placed at 12 inch centers. 10. Ladders, brackets and hardware shall be constructed of welded aluminum, rails shall be 3/8 inch by 2-1/2 inches spaced a minimum of 16 inches apart. Rungs shall be 1-3/8 inches in diameter and have a non-slip surface. Standoffs shall offset the ladder 7 inches from the wall. The ladder assembly shall be rated for a minimum of 500 pounds. B. Prefabricated Corrugated Metal Manholes: Manholes shall be the type and design as indicated on the drawings and as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Prefabricated Plastic Manholes and Drain Basins: Plastic manholes and drain basins shall be as indicated on the drawings. D. Frame and Cover for Gratings: Frame and cover for gratings shall be cast gray iron conforming to ASTM A48; cast ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536 in accordance with State Department of Transportation standard details. Weight, shape, size, and waterway openings for grates and curb inlets shall be as indicated on the drawings. 2.4 HEADWALLS: Headwalls shall be cast-in-place concrete and in accordance with State Department of Transportation standard details. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. The cement shall be Type III conforming to ASTM C150. Concrete shall conform with the provisions of Division 03 of these specifications. 2.5 CONCRETE: Concrete shall be in accordance with State Department of Transportation standard specification. For concrete not specified in above standards, concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 psi at 28 days. The cement shall be Type III conforming to ASTM C150. Concrete shall conform to the provisions of Division 03 of these specifications. 2.6 REINFORCING STEEL: Reinforcing steel shall be deformed bars, ASTM A615, Grade 40 unless otherwise noted. 2.7 FLARED END SECTIONS: Flared End Sections: Sections shall be of standard design fabricated from zinc-coated steel sheets conforming to requirements of ASTM A929. 2.8 PRECAST REINFORCED CONCRETE BOX.
Lochsa Engineering
Precast Reinforced Concrete Box: For highway loadings with 2 feet of cover or more subjected to dead load only, conform to ASTM C1433; For less than 2 feet of cover subjected to highway loading, conform to ASTM C1433. 2.9 RESILIENT CONNECTORS AND DOWNSPOUT BOOTS: A. Resilient Connectors: Flexible, watertight connectors used for connecting pipe to manholes and inlets shall conform to ASTM C923. B. Downspout Boots: Boots used to connect exterior downspouts to the storm drainage system shall be of gray cast iron conforming to ASTM A48, Class 30B or 35B. 2.10 WARNING TAPE: Standard, 4-Mil polyethylene 76 mm (3 inch) wide tape detectable type, purple with black letters, and imprinted with CAUTION BURIED STORM SEWER BELOW. PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION FOR STORM DRAINS AND DRAINAGE STRUCTURES: Excavation of trenches and for appurtenances and backfilling for storm drains, shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of Section 31 23 16 Excavation and Section 21 23 17 Trenching. 3.2 PIPE BEDDING: The bedding surface of the pipe shall provide a firm foundation of uniform density throughout the entire length of pipe. Concrete pipe requirements are such that when no bedding class is specified, concrete pipe shall be bedded in a soil foundation accurately shaped and rounded to conform with the lowest one-fourth of the outside portion of circular pipe. When necessary, the bedding shall be tamped. Bell holes and depressions for joints shall not be more than the length, depth, and width required for properly making the particular type of joint. Plastic pipe bedding requirements shall meet the requirements of ASTM D2321. Bedding, haunching and initial backfill shall be either Class IB or Class II material. Corrugated metal pipe bedding requirements shall conform to ASTM A798. 3.3 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION: A. Lay pipes true to line and grade. Gravity flow sewer shall be laid with bells facing upgrade. B. Do not lay pipe on unstable material, in wet trench or when trench and weather conditions are unsuitable for the work. C. Support pipe on compacted bedding material. Excavate bell holes only large enough to properly make the joint. D. Inspect pipes and fittings, for defects before installation. Defective materials shall be plainly marked and removed from the site. Cut pipe shall have smooth regular ends at right angles to axis of pipe. E. Clean interior of all pipe thoroughly before installation. When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe shall be closed securely to prevent entrance of storm water, dirt or other substances. F. Lower pipe into trench carefully and bring to proper line, grade, and joint. After jointing, interior of each pipe shall be thoroughly wiped or swabbed to remove any dirt, trash or excess jointing materials. G. Do not lay sewer pipe in same trench with another pipe or other utility. H. Do not walk on pipe in trenches until covered by layers of shading to a depth of 12 inches over the crown of the pipe. I. Install gravity sewer line in accordance with the provisions of these specifications and the following standards: 1. Reinforced Concrete Pipe: Comply with manufacturers recommendations with gasketed joints.
Lochsa Engineering
2. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Piping: ASTM D2321. 3. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Piping: Comply with manufacturers recommendations with gaskets with fused joints 4. Corrugated Metal Pipe: ASTM A798. J. Warning tape shall be continuously placed 12 inches above storm sewer piping. 3.4 REGRADING: A. Raise or lower existing manholes and structures frames and covers in regraded areas to finish grade. Carefully remove, clean and salvage cast iron frames and covers. Adjust the elevation of the top of the manhole or structure as detailed on the drawings. Reset cast iron frame and cover, grouting below and around the frame. Install concrete collar around reset frame and cover as specified for new construction. B. During periods when work is progressing on adjusting manholes or structures cover elevations, the Contractor shall install a temporary cover above the bench of the structure or manhole. The temporary cover shall be installed above the high flow elevation within the structure, and shall prevent debris from entering the wastewater stream. C. The Contractor shall comply with all OSHA confined space requirements when working within existing structures. 3.5 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING PUBLIC UTILITY MANHOLES: A. Comply with all rules and regulations of the public utility. B. The connection to the existing utility shall comply with the standard details and specifications of the public utility company, except as specifically modified on the plans and specifications. 3.6 MANHOLES, INLETS AND CATCH BASINS: A. General: 1. Circular Structures: a. Precast concrete segmental blocks shall lay true and plumb. All horizontal and vertical joints shall be completely filled with mortar. Parge interior and exterior of structure with 1/2 inch of cement mortar applied with a trowel and finished to an even glazed surface. b. Precast reinforced concrete rings shall be installed true and plumb. The joints between rings and between rings and the base and top shall be sealed with a preform flexible gasket material specifically manufactured for this type of application. Adjust the length of the rings so that the eccentric conical top section will be at the required elevation. Cutting the conical top section is not acceptable. c. Precast reinforced concrete manhole risers and tops. Install as specified for precast reinforced concrete rings. 2. Rectangular Structures: a. Reinforced concrete structures shall be installed in accordance with project concrete specifications. b. Precast concrete structures shall be placed on a 8 inch reinforced concrete pad, or be provided with a precast concrete base section. Structures provided with a base section shall be set on a 8 inches thick aggregate base course compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D 698. Set precast section true and plumb. Seal all joints with preform flexible gasket material. 3. Do not build structures when air temperature is 32 degrees F, or below. 4. Invert channels shall be smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Make changes in direction of flow with a smooth curve of as large a radius as size of structure will permit. Make changes in size and grade of channels gradually and evenly. Construct invert channels by one of the listed methods: a. Forming directly in concrete base of structure. b. Building up with brick and mortar. 5. Floor of structure outside the channels shall be smooth and slope toward channels not less than 1:12 (1-inch per foot) nor more than 1:6 (2 inches per foot). Bottom slab and benches shall be concrete.
Lochsa Engineering
6. The wall that supports access rungs or ladder shall be 90 degrees vertical from the floor of structure to manhole cover. 7. Install steps and ladders per the manufacturers recommendations. Steps and ladders shall not move or flex when used. All loose steps and ladders shall be replaced by the Contractor. 8. Install manhole frames and covers on a mortar bed, and flush with the finish pavement. Frames and covers shall not move when subject to vehicular traffic. Install a concrete collar around the frame to protect the frame from moving until the adjacent pavement is placed. In unpaved areas, the rim elevation shall be 2 inches above the adjacent finish grade. Install a 8 inch thick, by 12 inch concrete collar around the perimeter of the frame. Slope the top of the collar away from the frame. 3.7 CURB INLETS, CATCH BASINS, AND AREA DRAINS: Reinforced concrete as shown or precast concrete. 3.8 INSPECTION OF SEWERS: Inspect and obtain the Resident Engineer's approval. Thoroughly flush out before inspection. Lamp between structures and show full bore indicating sewer is true to line and grade. Lip at joints on inside of sewer is prohibited. 3.9 TESTING OF STORM SEWERS: A. Gravity Sewers (Select one of the following): 1. Air Test: Concrete Pipes conform to ASTM C924, Plastic Pipes conform to ASTM F1417, all other pipe material conform to ASTM C828 or C924, after consulting with pipe manufacturer. Testing of individual joints shall conform to ASTM C1103. 2. Exfiltration Test: a. Subject pipe to hydrostatic pressure produced by head of water at depth of 3 feet above invert of sewer at upper manhole under test. In areas where ground water exists, head of water shall be 3 feet above existing water table. Maintain head of water for one hour for full absorption by pipe body before testing. During 1 hour test period, measured maximum allowable rate of exfiltration for any section of sewer shall be 3.0 gallons per hour per 100 feet. b. If measurements indicate exfiltration is greater than maximum allowable leakage, take additional measurements until leaks are located. Repair and retest. END OF SECTION
33 40 00-8
Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Storm Drain

FIT Bid Set Project Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

FIT Bid Set Project Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

PROJECT MANUAL FOR

(FIT) Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Building Addition

1931 Stella Lake Drive Las Vegas, Nevada 89106

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow

JMA Architects, Inc.

DATE: February 18, 2013 BID Documents

JMA Architecture Studios

DOCUMENT 00 01 10 TABLE OF CONTENTS

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Table of Contents

JMA Architecture Studios

DIVISION 2 EXISTING CONDITIONS 02 41 00 02 41 00.10 Demolition Selective Demolition 4 8

DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE 03 10 00 03 30 00 Concrete Formwork Cast-In-Place Concrete 5 36

DIVISION 4 - MASONRY Not Used DIVISION 5 METALS 05 10 00 Structural Steel

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Table of Contents

JMA Architecture Studios

DIVISIONS 11 13 Not Used

DIVISION 14 CONVEYING EQUIPMENT 14 21 00 Electric Traction Elevator 10

DIVISIONS 15 20 Not Used

DIVISION 21 FIRE SUPRESSION 21 13 13 21 13 16 Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System Dry-Pipe Sprinkler System 14 17

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

JMA Architecture Studios

DIVISION 24 25 Not Used

DIVISION 27 COMMUNICATIONS 27 15 00 Communications Horizontal Cabling 10

DIVISION 28 30 Not Used

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Table of Contents

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Table of Contents

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Advertisement for Bids

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Instructions to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Instructions to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Instructions to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Instructions to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Instructions to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Instructions to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Information Available to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

PROJECT LOCATION MAP

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Information Available to Bidders

JMA Architecture Studios

JMA 127457 BID Documents: February 18, 2013

Foundation for an Independent Tomorrow Information Available to Bidders